NEC SV8500 Manual Download Page 1294 | Manualshive

Page: 1294 / 3438

background image

VOL.2-1041

MG(PRI) (1.5M) [SCA-24PRIA/MG-24PRIA]

STEP 5: ATRK (Assignment of Trunk Data)

Assign the Trunk Data to Virtual Speech Channel. The following is an example for assigning channel data
of PRI (1.5M). Note that the data setting for Dch must be performed after the

ACIC1

command assignment

Trunk Data Setting

Note:

Virtual trunk occupies 1HW (4-Group). For example, if one channel is registered for Virtual Trunk, the
whole HW is occupied exclusively for the Virtual Trunk.

Note:

Do not assign the trunk data to even-numbered MG, U=0, and G=00. It is not available for MG(PRI).

Note:

Be sure to assign route data by ARTD/ARTI in advance before assigning trunk data by ATRK.

Note:

The total number of B-channels must not exceed 460 per two Module Group (MG) pair.
i.e. MG2/3, MG4/5 and MG6/7

PIR

HW4

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3

HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

17

18

19

20

21

22

14

15

16

PWR #0

TSW/MUX TSW/MUX

PWR #1

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19

00-01 02-03 04-05 06-07 08-09 10-11 12-15 16-19

20-23

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16 20

17 21

18

19

00

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

22

23

G05

G04

LV0

LV7

1 0

2

RT

TK

LENS

(1-255)

(1-255)

MG

U

G

00-07

0-3

LV

0-7

00-23

1

2 0

2 0

0

4

0

2

0

0

0

1

7

1

0

5

0

2

0

2

0

5

0

2

0

2 0

2 3

6

0

7

0

2

0

0

7

0

2

0

V

irtual Speech Channel

V

irtual Signaling Channel

1 0

Virtual Speech Channel

Virtual Signaling Channel

LV0

LV7

G07

G06

LV0

LV7

LV0

LV7

«
...
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
...
»

Summary of Contents for SV8500

Page 1: ...Peripheral Equipment Description NWA 041680 001 ISSUE 12 0 FP85 110 S7 ...

Page 2: ...ed this document for use by its employ ees and customers The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC Corporation All brand names and product names on this document are trade marks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Copyright 2008 2013 NEC Corporation ...

Page 3: ... injury or a serious system fault ATTENTION Incorrect use of the equipment may limit the system performance or cause the system to fail The telephone system can only be used in NEC designated countries If a system down malfunction defect or external factor such as an electrical failure indirectly causes a loss of profit the company or affiliates will not be held responsible The goal is to produce ...

Page 4: ...ower source to disassemble or configure it This action may cause a fire an electrical shock or a system failure NEC Corporation does not take any responsibility for disassembled or reconfigured equipment Do not put any container objects such as a vase or a cup on the main power source or any peripheral equipment It might cause a fire an electrical shock or a system failure Be sure to use cables de...

Page 5: ...n this state might cause a fire an electrical shock or a system failure If this occurs turn off the power and contact the dealer Be careful when using any peripheral equipment s Liquid Crystal Display LCD If the liquid leaks it can be harmful to the user and to the system Before connecting any non NEC customer provided equipment check with the supplier to ensure that the equipment is compatible If...

Page 6: ...shock to occur If lightning causes a fault contact the dealer Provide the appropriate temperature humidity and ventilation on an around the clock basis For example at a height that is one meter 3 28 feet above the floor the temperature should be between 20 C and 25 C 68 F to 77 F and the humidity should be approximately 50 Take appropriate anti static measures so that the other end of the anti sta...

Page 7: ...ife expectancy drops to approximately one year Perform periodic diagnostic tests and maintenance procedures on the emergency battery and its terminals to ensure their readiness If there is a power failure and the emergency battery is not ready then the system will not work Additionally a damaged or dead battery or terminals that need replacement might cause battery acid to leak which might cause s...

Page 8: ...sunlight Locations where the moisture level exceeds the allowed level Locations where the equipment might be exposed to water oil or chemicals Locations with very low temperatures such as in a walk in cooler or freezer Locations that are exposed to Electromagnetic Interference EMI from devices such as television sets and two way radios Locations that receive illegal electric waves The life expecta...

Page 9: ... approved after July 23 2001 the REN for this product is the product identifier in format US AAAEQ TXXXX The digits represented by are the REN without a decimal point e g 03 is a REN of 0 3 Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utilities commission public service commission or corporation commission for information For single and two line equipment t...

Page 10: ... is required Refer to ATIS Tech nical Report No 5 for details on this connector The Facility Interface Code FIC associated with each private line application represents the type of service that will be provided by the telephone company The user instructions must contain a detailed list of private line ports and the associated FICs for which the equipment has been approved In addition the Service O...

Page 11: ...e Net work PSTN Permissible exceptions are A call is unanswered A busy tone is received A reorder tone is received 1 7 VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT MONITORING OVER DID LINES When using voice announcement or monitoring over DID Lines observe the following CAUTION Using the Voice Announcement feature to eavesdrop or record sound activities at the other end of the tele phone line may be illegal under certain c...

Page 12: ...right Law a license may be required from the American Society of Com posers Authors and Publishers or other similar organization if radio or TV broadcasts are transmit ted through the Music On Hold feature of this telecommunication system NEC Corporation of America Inc hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license 2 RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE In compliance wi...

Page 13: ...ive designated by the supplier Any re pairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommu nications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility tele phone lines and internal metallic water pipe system when present are connec...

Page 14: ...IES IN YOUR REGULAR TRASH THE PRODUCT YOU PUR CHASED CONTAINS LITHIUM NICKEL CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES LITHIUM NICKEL CADMIUM OR SEALED LEAD BATTERIES MUST BE COLLECTED RECYCLED OR DIS POSED OF IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY SOUND MANNER The incineration landfilling or mixing of nickel cadmium or sealed lead batteries with the municipal sol id waste stream is PROHIBITED BY LAW in most areas Contact ...

Page 15: ...ined in this product For Ni Cd batteries you can also call 1 800 8 BATTERYSM when further information is required The packaging for the UNIVERGE SV8500 system contains the following labels regarding proper dispos al PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING CONTAINS NICKEL CADMIUM BATTERY BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF PROPERLY MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY BATTER...

Page 16: ...t Additional interfaces are available for connection to public analogue and digital telecommunication networks which comply with ETS 300 011 PRI ETS 300 012 BRI ETS 300 402 PRI BRI ETS 300 403 PRI BRI TBR3 ISDN basic rate interface TBR4 ISDN primary rate interface TBR21 Analogue interface To take advantage of all features of this system and the connected equipment the country specific or network s...

Page 17: ... stream To facilitate separate disposal and environmentally sound recycling arrangements have been made for local collection and recycling If you need to dispose of your electrical and electronic products please refer to your supplier or the contractual agreements that your company made when these products were acquired At www nec unified com weee you can find information about separate disposal a...

Page 18: ... essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC http www nec unified com doc Español Por medio de la presente NEC Corporation declara que el SV8500 cumple con los requisitos esen ciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999 5 CE http www nec unified com doc Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η NEC Corporation ΕΝΟΠΟΙΗΜΕΝΕS ΛΥSΕΙS ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤ...

Page 19: ...jiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid Dirrettiva 1999 5 EC http www nec unified com doc Magyar Alulírott NEC Corporation nyilatkozom hogy a SV8500 megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelmé nyeknek és az 1999 5 EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak http www nec unified com doc Nederlands Hierbij verklaart NEC Corporation dat het toestel SV8500 in overeenstemming is met de essentiël...

Page 20: ... spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustano venia Smernice 1999 5 ES http www nec unified com doc Suomi NEC Corporation vakuuttaa täten että SV8500 tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen http www nec unified com doc Svenska Härmed intygar NEC Corporation att denna SV8500 står I överensstämmelse med de väsentli...

Page 21: ...released Note 3 In regard to China market NEAX2000 IPS INTERNET PROTOCOL SERVER has not been released but NEAX2000 is released TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL SYSTEM NAMES SV8500 the system UNIVERGE SV8500 SV7000 the system UNIVERGE SV7000 Note 1 MPS SV7000 MPS the system UNIVERGE SV7000 MPS IPX 2400 IPX NEAX 2400 IPX the system NEAX2400 IPX Internet Protocol eXchange Note 2 IPS 2000 IPS NEAX 2000 IPS N...

Page 22: ...erm 75 Dterm Series i DT300 Series DT310 DT330 IP Station IP terminal IP Enabled Dterm Dterm Series E Dterm 75 with IP adapter Note 4 Dterm Series i with IP adapter Note 4 DtermIP INASET Note 4 DtermIP DtermIP Proprietary Protocol Soft Phone Soft Phone Propri etary Protocol DtermSP20 DtermSP30 DtermSP30 Proprietary Protocol SIP terminal Soft Phone SIP DtermSP30 SIP Soft Client SP350 SIP Multiple L...

Page 23: ...hen service conditions of Standard SIP terminals vary depending on controlling device Standard SIP terminals are mentioned as shown below GENERIC TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL CONTROLLING DEVICE TERMINAL NAMES Standard SIP terminal SP SP Controlled SIP terminal SP Controlled SIP Voice terminal SP Controlled SIP Video terminal SIP Handler SIP Handler Controlled SIP terminal SIP Handler Controlled SIP V...

Page 24: ...PRIA MG PRI MG PRA MG T1 SIP MG T1 SIP Card SCA 24DTIA MG BRI MG BRI Card SCA 2BRIA MG BRI Box MG 2BRIA MG BRI MG SIP MG SIP16 MG SIP16 Card SCA 16SIPMGA MG SIP16 Box MG 16SIPMGA MG SIP16 Card SCA 16SIPMG US MG SIP96 MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ MC MG COT Note 9 MCMG Card SCA 4LC2COTA MCMG Box MG 4LC2COTA MCMG Card SCA 7COTA MC MG COT with PFT MG COT Note 10 MG COT Card SCA 6COTA ...

Page 25: ... Note 7 Proprietary Protocol SIP CD 4LCA CD 8LCA PZ 4LCA PZ 8LCE UG50 PRT 1 5M Proprietary Protocol SIP Note 7 Proprietary Protocol SIP CD PRTA UG50 COT TYPE1 Note 9 Proprietary Protocol CD 4COTA B C PZ 4COTE F G UG50 COT TYPE2 Proprietary Protocol SIP Note 7 Note 10 Proprietary Protocol SIP IPG mode UG50 IPG Digital Proprietary Protocol CD 16DLCA UG50 IPG Analog Proprietary Protocol CD 8LCA PZ 8L...

Page 26: ...IP Note 9 MC MG COT in this manual indicates the following terminals MCMG Card SCA 4LC2COTA MCMG Box MG 4LC2COTA MCMG Card SCA 7COTA MC MG COT with PFT UG50 COT TYPE1 UG50 4LC2COTA Note 10 MG COT in this manual indicates the following terminals MG COT Card SCA 6COTA MG COT Card SCA 6COTB MG COT Card SCA 6COTC UG50 COT TYPE2 Proprietary Protocol SIP UG50 6COT Proprietary Protocol SIP Note 11 Analog...

Page 27: ... Refer to Volume 1 SMDR PCPro Server MG SIP16 Analog 2MC FTP Server DHCP Server DNX Server MC 2A PWR ON LINE OPERATION Tx Rx LINK 100M 0 1 PWR LOAD LAN1 LAN2 ACT ALM TxRx LINK TxRx LINK PWR LOAD LAN1 LAN2 ACT ALM TxRx LINK TxRx LINK MDF NEC Distribute d Access Unit POWER B D B D ON LINE LINE 0 LINE 1 Tx Rx LINK MG 2B EM EMA MAIN MAIN PWR PWR SYS SYS ALM ALM SYS 1 SYS 1 MB MB SUB SUB SYS SYS LOCK L...

Page 28: ...INTRODUCTION INT 2 2 LT Cable Accommodations and Time Slot Allocations for PIR The following shows PIR LT cable accommodations and Time Slot allocation ...

Page 29: ... LT 10 LT 7 LT 6 LT 11 PL 0 LT 3 LT 2 LBUS 1 LBUS 0 LT 5 LT 4 LT 1 LT 0 LT 8 LT 9 PWR PWR SYS SYS ALM ALM SYS 1 SYS 1 MB MB SUB SUB SYS SYS LOCK LOCK SYS SYS SE SEL PF PFT LINK LINK OPE OPE ALM ALM INI INIT SYS 0 SYS 0 1 2 SWO0 SWO0 SWO1 SWO1 1 2 ON ON LINE LINE LOAD LOAD PWR PWR ON ON LINE LINE LOAD LOAD PWR PWR LINE LINE SPEED SPEED LINE LINE SPEED SPEED LINE LINE SPEED SPEED LINE LINE SPEED SPE...

Page 30: ... HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 LV 7 G17 G16 LV 0 LV 7 LV 0 Time Slot 0...

Page 31: ...the table below Note For UG50 refer to UG50 Installation Guide How to Count IP Equipment Channels KIND IP EQUIPMENT NUMBER OF CHANNELS PHC PHC Speech channel 32 CS IP BS 4 H 323 Gate Keeper 4 SIP Server 4 MG MCMG SCA 4LC2COTA MG 4LC2COTA 1 MCMG SCA 7COTA 1 MG COT SCA 6COTA MG 6COTA 1 MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG 128 MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ MG SIP96 96 MG SIP16 16 MG SIP16 SCA 16SIPMGA MG 16SIPMGA MG SIP1...

Page 32: ... function the Telephony Server may order the coun ter party to release a call by Related call Release In this case the call will not be retained Communication Failure by LAN cable link down at ACT side CPU Note When IP equipment terminals register to SP of STBY side CPU the Telephony Server may order the counter party to release a call by Related call Release In this case the call will not be reta...

Page 33: ...ocol Note 4 Ver 2 00 or later Note 7 No Limit Handset When going on hook Key operation on terminal When receiving system reset signal Headset Speaker Key operation on terminal When receiving system reset signal Note 8 DtermIP SIP Note 4 Note 5 Ver 4 0 0 0 or later No Limit Handset When going on hook When receiving system reset signal Headset Speaker Key operation on terminal When receiving system ...

Page 34: ...SIP Ver 4 or later Note 9 No Limit When receiving system reset signal Note 8 Soft Client SP350 No Condition No Limit When receiving system reset signal Note 8 IP BS PS No Condition Up to 4 minutes Note 13 When Health Check timeout occurs Note 10 PS be haves in the same way as the IP BS does VS 32 Dual Card SCA VS32VA Proprie tary Proto col No Condition Up to 2 minutes 30 seconds Note 13 When Healt...

Page 35: ...r party for a certain period SIP No Condition No Limit When PSTN line is disconnected When not receiving RTP from coun ter party for a certain period MG COT Card SCA 6COTC Proprie tary Proto col No Condition No Limit When PSTN line is disconnected When not receiving RTP from coun ter party for a certain period SIP No Condition No Limit When PSTN line is disconnected When not receiving RTP from cou...

Page 36: ...SIP BSC PROG A Is sue 4 or later Note 12 No Limit When RTP communication stops When the Disconnection message is received from the network When Layer 2 Link is down Note 11 MG BRI Box MG 2BRIA SP 3826BRI MG SIP BSC PROG A Is sue 4 or later Note 12 No Limit When RTP communication stops When the Disconnection message is received from the network When Layer 2 Link is down Note 11 MG PRI MG PRA No Con...

Page 37: ...ssage is received from the network When Layer 2 Link is down Note 11 MG PRI Box MG 30PRIA Proprie tary Proto col Note 14 SP 3884 MG PRIPROG A Issue 8 or lat er Note 12 No Limit When RTP communication stops When the Disconnection message is received from the network When Layer 2 Link is down Note 11 SIP SP 3884 MG PRIPROG A Issue 8 or lat er Note 12 No Limit When RTP communication stops When the Di...

Page 38: ...Disconnection message is received from the network When Ether Link is down MG SIP16 Card SCA 16SIPMGA Earlier than SP 3905 MG SIP 16 PROG A Is sue 5 Up to 4 minutes When Health Check timeout occurs When a communication failure oc curs Note 16 Since SP 3905MGSIP 16 PROG A Issue 5 Note 12 No Limit When RTP communication stops When the Disconnection message is received from the network When Ether Lin...

Page 39: ...ention function see MG Based Call Retention on Chapter 2 of this manual IPG Digital No Condition Up to 6 minutes 30 seconds When Health Check timeout occurs IPG Analog No Condition Up to 2 minutes 30 seconds When Health Check timeout occurs UG50 DLC No Condition Up to 5 minutes 30 seconds When Health Check timeout occurs UG50 LC Proprie tary Protocol No Condition No Limit When a loop is opened in ...

Page 40: ...red on each equipment side For more details see MG Based Call Retention on Chapter 2 of Data Programming Manual Business Note 12 Call can be retained by MG Based Call Retention For more details see MG Based Call Retention on Chapter 2 of Data Programming Manual Business Note 13 For IP equipment terminals which cannot use Call Retention function a call can be retained until Health Check timeout occ...

Page 41: ... method Not Avail able Restricted Not Available Not Available Not Available SIP Handler Controlled SIP termi nal Keep alive through OPTIONS method Restricted Available Available Note 18 Available Restricted SIP Handler Controlled SIP termi nal Keep alive through Session Timer method Not Avail able Available Available Note 18 Available Not Available DtermSP30 Proprietary Protocol Restricted Availab...

Page 42: ...tricted MG COT Restricted Not Avail able Available Note 18 Available Restricted MC MG with PFT MC Restricted Not Avail able Available Note 19 Available Restricted MG COT Restricted Not Avail able Available Note 18 Available Restricted MCMG Card SCA 4LC2COTA MC Restricted Not Avail able Available Note 19 Available Restricted MG COT Restricted Not Avail able Available Note 18 Available Restricted MC...

Page 43: ...ilable Note 19 Available Not Available MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ Not Avail able Not Avail able Available Note 19 Available Not Available MG SIP96 MG 96SIPMGB Not Avail able Not Avail able Available Note 19 Available Not Available MG SIP16 Not Avail able Not Avail able Available Note 19 Available Not Available MG SIP16 Card SCA 16SIPMG US Not Avail able Not Avail able Available Note 19 Available Not A...

Page 44: ...ol Restricted Not Avail able Available Note 19 Available Restricted SIP Restricted Not Avail able Available Note 18 Available Restricted UG50 IPG Digital Restricted Not Avail able Available Note 18 Available Restricted UG50 IPG Analog Restricted Not Avail able Available Note 19 Available Restricted UG50 2MC Restricted Not Avail able Available Note 19 Available Restricted UG50 8LC Restricted Not Av...

Page 45: ...re ad dress MAC layer address and physical address When a DtermIP is used in MAC authentication mode the Ex tension Number can be assigned in conjunction with this MAC Address Refer to MAC Authentication for more details DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol A TCP IP protocol enabling IP devices stations to get temporary or per manent IP addresses out of a po...

Page 46: ...ived packets can be conveyed to the higher ap plication However too much buffer size may cause delay CODEC Coder Decoder A codec is a module that is used for Analog Digital conversion of video or audio data The system uses the fol lowing codecs Static Routing Routing table of router is manually created by the network administrator When the network configuration is changed the administrator must ch...

Page 47: ...n pressing the LOGOUT Key in a temporary attempt to use the terminal as the one with a different Extension Number For example assume that the user of DtermIP 2000 is now in a distant location and tries to make a call from DtermIP 2021 At this time the user can use DtermIP 2021 temporarily as Station 2000 by pressing the LOGOUT Key When this key is pressed a Login prompt appears on the LCD and the ...

Page 48: ...r minals including a FAX can be connected MC MG with PFT MC MG with PFT consists of Analog MC and Analog MG COT A maximum of four analog terminals and two analog C O lines can be connected In case of commercial power outage the built in PFT is activated to connect analog C O lines and analog terminals directly Thus analog terminals can place receive a call to from Public Network MG BRI Media Gatew...

Page 49: ...rty conference 32 channels 16 party conference 16 chan nels 16 party conference 16 channels or 8 party conference 8 channels Announcement 4 channels IP External Hold Tone 4 channels MG BRI SCA 2BRIA MG 2BRIA MG BRI SCA 2BRIA MG 2BRIA is a media gateway to provide gateway function between ISDN network and IP network MG BRI can accommodate a maximum of two ISDN lines MG BRI works in SIP mode that is...

Page 50: ...mergency line MG SIP16 SCA 16SIPMGA MG 16SIPMGA MG SIP16 SCA 16SIPMGA MG 16SIPMGA is an Media Gateway to provide the system with Session Initi ation Protocol SIP interface It enables the system to build a multi service and reliable Voice over IP VoIP networks using SIP defined by IETF Up to 16 channels of extensions in the network can communicate with outside SIP network via an MG SIP16 at the sam...

Page 51: ...A EMEA SCA 8LCC SCA 8LCC EMEA is a Media Converter MC pro viding media converting function between Internet Protocol LAN side and conventional Voice Data MC connected conventional terminal side By using this converter analog telephones can serve as IP stations under the control of the Telephony Server Media Data voice fax is sent received directly between IP devices sta tions MC to MC MC to DtermI...

Page 52: ... control data PH is divided into several parts depending on the function Internal PHC Internal PHE Internal PHF Internal PHI PRI BRI SP PHD and SP PHI For this function no hardware is required PH can be used by assigning system data IP devices stations need PH to operate in the system MPH MPH Multi Protocol Handler is the collective name for SP PH functions MPH controls and monitors the sta tus of...

Page 53: ...al Multiple Line tele phones Single Line telephones without the use of PIRs UG50 UG50 is a gateway device to perform media exchange between IP packets LAN side and Voice data terminal line side It functions as a remote unit for the SV8500 enabling the terminals lines connected to the unit to be controlled by the SV8500 The UG50 allows Digital Multiple Line telephones Single Line telephones to conn...

Page 54: ... to the network conditions Virtual LAN VLAN The following two types of VLAN are typical Port VLAN VLAN is configured by data assignment of network devices In case of Internal PH VLAN can be configured by port VLAN For this type of VLAN Layer 2 Switch switching hub with Port Base VLAN function is re quired Tagged VLAN To identify VLAN frame a unique ID VLAN ID or VID is tagged for each packet sent ...

Page 55: ... Location ID basis that is given to each network location PAD EC Control IP PHC Support By assigning system data ASYDL SYS1 Index 825 default PAD EC value that is appropriate to the network environment is automatically applied If the value is not appropriate for a particular network or terminal it can be adjusted to match the environment 5 4 Descriptions of UMG Information on SV8500 UMG Ultra Modu...

Page 56: ...ATE JULY 2012 Not Revised S6 DATE JUNE 2012 TERMS IN THIS MANUAL 2 3 Introduction 4 5 8 12 17 22 27 S5 DATE OCTOBER 2011 Introduction 12 13 27 34 S4 DATE MARCH 2011 Introduction 18 24 25 S3 DATE AUGUST 2010 Regulatory Notice 2 4 8 9 10 Terms In This Manual 3 Introduction 11 12 33 34 S2E DATE FEBRUARY 2010 Product Liability 2 Introduction 3 Terms In This Manual 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 23 25 S2...

Page 57: ...DHCP Address Conflict Detection Microsoft Windows 2000 44 1 2 6 Setting up DHCP Address Static Microsoft Windows 2000 46 2 DNS Server 48 2 1 When Using Microsoft Windows NT 49 2 1 1 Installing Microsoft DNS Server in Microsoft Windows NT 49 2 1 2 Setting up DNS Server Microsoft Windows NT 52 2 1 3 Setting up DHCP Options DNS Server Address Domain Name Microsoft Windows NT 56 2 2 When Using Microso...

Page 58: ...n SP PHI 99 2 4 1 General 99 2 4 2 Hardware Required 99 2 4 3 Installation Procedure 99 2 4 4 Data Programming 100 2 5 How to Assign Virtual PIR 102 2 5 1 General 102 2 5 2 Hardware Required 102 2 5 3 Installation Procedure 102 2 5 4 Data Programming 103 2 6 How to Set Terminal Software when using HyperTerminal 104 2 6 1 General 104 2 6 2 Hardware Required 104 2 6 3 Installation Procedure 104 2 6 ...

Page 59: ...erence Sheet 147 4 1 IP Terminal and SIP Multiple Line Terminal 148 4 1 1 Basic Data Assignment 148 4 1 2 MAC Authentication 149 4 1 3 Login Logout 150 4 2 SP Controlled SIP Terminal 151 4 3 SIP Handler Controlled SIP Terminal 152 4 4 IP Terminal and Legacy Station Trunk Connection via IPPAD 153 4 5 H 323 Terminal Connection 154 4 6 Analog Terminal Connection via Analog 2MC MC MG COT 155 4 7 How t...

Page 60: ...age of ZT Installation 168 2 1 3 Radio Wave Propagation 169 2 2 Installation of the Zone Transfer ZT 170 3 IP BS Installation Design 172 3 1 Installation Design of IP BS Synchronization 172 3 1 1 Wireless Synchronization Kind 172 3 1 2 Setting Method of Wireless Synchronization Kind 172 3 1 3 Operation Pattern of PRIMARY IP BS 174 4 SN1757 BBUB Installation Design 177 ...

Page 61: ...ephony Server assigned by ADTM DNS Server IP Address The following topics are covered in this section This section is divided into two parts for the system using Microsoft Windows NT and for the system using Microsoft Windows 2000 Select the page necessary for you by clicking on the hyper link When using Microsoft Windows NT When using Microsoft Windows 2000 Items Notes 1 Microsoft DHCP Server Ins...

Page 62: ...indows NT Server STEP 1 Start the Microsoft Windows NT Server STEP 2 Make sure that Microsoft DHCP Server is installed or not on the PC 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel Network Router 1 Registration Request 2 Receive the following Network Information DHCP Server IP Address 10 136 20 150 DtermIP Start Address 10 136 20 221 End Address 10 136 20 230 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Lease Duration 3 da...

Page 63: ...Network Service listing Select Microsoft DHCP Server and click OK STEP 5 A dialog box appears to transfer necessary files for the server indicating insertion of Microsoft Win dows NT CD ROM and input of file path information Insert Microsoft Windows NT Server CD ROM to the drive and input the file path for the CD ROM When E drive is used as a CD ROM drive for example input the data as follows STEP...

Page 64: ...osoft Windows NT Server STEP 2 Startup of DHCP Server service 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and click the Services button Then the Services dialog box appears as shown below 2 Set Microsoft DHCP Server as follows Microsoft DHCP Server Status Started Startup Automatic 3 Click the Close button when set the above data or the data has already been set ...

Page 65: ... Startup of DHCP Manager Start DHCP Manager by selecting Start Programs Administrative Tools Common DHCP Manager as shown below STEP 4 DHCP Server Address Entry 1 Select Server Add on the menu bar of the DHCP Manager Then the following dialog box is dis played ...

Page 66: ...0 150 is entered as the address of the DHCP server It is recommended to enter the IP address of the Microsoft Windows NT server 3 Click OK to close this dialog box STEP 5 Creating Scope 1 To create the scope of the DHCP server select the IP address of the DHCP Server assigned in STEP 4 in the list of the DHCP Servers ...

Page 67: ...VOL 1 7 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK 2 Select Scope Create on the menu bar as shown below ...

Page 68: ...he following is assigned Start Address 10 136 20 221 End Address 10 136 20 230 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Lease Duration 3 Day s STEP 6 Activating the New Scope Click OK button on the Create Scope dialog box The following message box is displayed Click the Yes button on the message box Up to this point DHCP server startup has completed In the next section DHCP Option data assignment is ex plained ...

Page 69: ...in blue in the DHCP Servers list box 2 Select DHCP Options Scope or Global on the menu bar As an example Scope is selected in this case 3 DHCP Options Scope dialog box appears Select 003 Router from Unused Options list box 4 Move 003 Router to Active Options by pressing Add button STEP 2 Address Entry 1 Click Value button on the DHCP Options Scope dialog box Then the display changes as follows 2 C...

Page 70: ... appears Enter the IP address of the default Gateway in the New IP Address text box 4 Click Add button on the IP Address Array Editor As an example 10 136 20 254 is assigned 5 Click OK to close the dialog box 6 Make sure that the IP Address assigned in 4 is displayed in the IP Address list box ...

Page 71: ...P Options Scope dialog box 8 Make sure that 003 Router is selected in the Option Configuration list box Up to this point DHCP Options data assignment has completed The DHCP server can notify the IP ad dress of the default gateway to DHCP clients including IP terminals as option ...

Page 72: ...ddress Microsoft Windows NT Note This data assignment is optional Note DRS Device Registration Server used in this section refers to Telephony Server Telephony Server acts as DRS where IP device terminal is registered STEP 1 Adding Options 1 Select DHCP Options Default on the DHCP Manager ...

Page 73: ...Add Option Type dialog box appears 3 Enter the following data of the new option Name Any name is available as far as it is not duplicated In this case DRS is assigned as an example Data Type Select IP Address and check Array Identifier Enter 161 in this text box 4 Click the OK button to close Add Option Type dialog box ...

Page 74: ...d in 2 of STEP 1 1 Select the scope activated in the DHCP Servers list box 2 Select DHCP Options Scope or Global on the menu bar As an example Scope is selected in this case 3 DHCP Options Scope is displayed allowing the user to select active options Select 161 DRS in the Active Options and click the Add button to move 161 DRS to Active Options list box STEP 3 Address Entry 1 Select the Value on t...

Page 75: ...ton The IP Address Array Editor is displayed 3 Enter the IP address you want to use as the DRS in the New IP Address text box on the IP Address Ed itor dialog box 4 Click the Add button when the IP Address is entered The added IP Address is shown in the IP Ad dresses list box ...

Page 76: ...this case the upper address is DRS Primary and the lower is DRS Secondary 6 Click the OK on the dialog box to close the IP Address Array Editor The display returns to the DHCP Options Scope 7 Make sure that the IP Address of DRS is displayed in the IP Address list box 8 Click the OK button on the DHCP Options Scope dialog box ...

Page 77: ...TWORK 9 Make sure that 003 Router is selected in the Option Configuration list box Up to this point DHCP Options data assignment has completed The DHCP server can notify the IP address of the DRS to DHCP clients including IP Enabled Dterm as option ...

Page 78: ...rform this setting Note DHCP Server must be installed in advance Note When activating DHCP address conflict detection at Microsoft Windows NT Service Pack 6 or later must be installed on the server STEP 1 Start the DHCP Manager and open the following dialog box referring to 1 1 2 Setting up DHCP Mi crosoft Windows NT Select the IP address of the currently activated DHCP Server in the DHCP Servers ...

Page 79: ... 19 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3 The following dialog box appears Enter the number of times the DHCP Server executes the Ping Command for the detection of IP address conflict Default 0 ...

Page 80: ...s In consideration of network security etc follow the procedure below if necessary Note DHCP Server must be installed in advance STEP 1 Start DHCP Manager and open the following dialog box referring to 1 1 2 Setting up DHCP Micro soft Windows NT Select the activated scope highlighted in blue in the DHCP Servers list box STEP 2 Select Scope Add Reservations on the menu bar as shown below ...

Page 81: ...AC address The following figure is example STEP 4 Then click Add button After all the necessary IP addresses are set click Close button STEP 5 Select Scope Active Leases on the menu bar to display the following dialog box The message Reservation is displayed until the DHCP server receives the address request from the target client ...

Page 82: ...VOL 1 22 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 6 When the DHCP server reserves the address request from the target client the message changes to Reservation in use as the following figure ...

Page 83: ...ver where IP device terminal is registered 1 2 1 Installing DHCP Server in Microsoft Windows 2000 STEP 1 Start up the Microsoft Windows 2000 Server 1 Registration Request DtermIP DNS Server DRS Server SIP Server Domain xxx co jp Router 2 Receive the following Network Information Dterm IP Information IP Address 10 40 13 251 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Network Equipment Information Router IP Address 1...

Page 84: ...WORK STEP 2 Make sure that Microsoft DHCP Server is installed on the PC Select Start Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs Add Remove Win dows Components then the dialog below appears Click the check box of Networking Services and click Details ...

Page 85: ... 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3 The dialog below appears click the check box of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP and then click OK STEP 4 Windows Components dialog box is displayed again click Next ...

Page 86: ... STEP 5 CD ROM request dialog appears Specify the location of CD ROM Drive i386 into edit box and click OK Components start to be configured in the diagram below STEP 6 Windows Components Wizard is complete and the following diagram appears Click Finish ...

Page 87: ...soft Windows 2000 Server STEP 2 Select Start Program Administrative Tool DHCP then the dialog below appears Se lect Action Add Server STEP 3 The dialog below appears Enter the IP Address of DHCP Server 10 40 13 1 into the edit box or browse the network to choose the computer to be the Server by clicking Browse and then click OK ...

Page 88: ...TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 4 DHCP Administrative Tool dialog box appears again Move the mouse pointer to the newly added DHCP IP Address ss2p251 10 40 13 1 and then select Action New Scope STEP 5 Click Next on the dialog to create a new scope ...

Page 89: ...ORK STEP 6 Enter the scope name DRS2 into the Name edit box and click Next STEP 7 Specify the effective IP Addresses Start IP Address 10 40 13 250 End IP Address 10 40 13 253 and Subnet Mask which DHCP server allocates to IP terminals Then click Next ...

Page 90: ...BUILD NETWORK STEP 8 Enter the range of IP Addresses Start IP address 10 40 13 1 Start IP address 10 40 13 4 which DHCP server does not allocate to IP devices terminals Exclusive Range STEP 9 Specify the lease duration 8 days and click Next ...

Page 91: ...VOL 1 31 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 10 Select the DHCP options Select Yes I want to configure these option now and click Next to con figure the DHCP options ...

Page 92: ...t Windows 2000 STEP 1 Select the DHCP options Select Yes I want to configure these option now and click Next The dialog below is displayed STEP 2 Specify the domain name and IP address of DNS and click Add to register the IP address After making sure that IP address is listed in the box click Next ...

Page 93: ...ED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3 When Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service WING Servers are needed in the network When NetBIOS comes into effect in IP network specify the WING server name WING and the IP address 10 40 13 5 Then click Next ...

Page 94: ...VOL 1 34 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 4 Select No I will activate this scope later and click Next STEP 5 Click Finish to complete the New Scope Wizard ...

Page 95: ... code and data type IP Address The following DHCP Options CODE are available Note Tips for specifying DHCP Options for SIP Multiple Line terminals For DtermIP SIP Earlier than firmware version 3 0 0 0 select Option 120 CODE REMARKS 120 This option is used when DHCP Server distributes the IP Address of SIP server to IP devices terminals or when DHCP Server distributes the IP Address of SIP server t...

Page 96: ...DHCP Options 120 161 162 The following is an example using IP address when name DRS2 and code 161 are specified Select IP Address in Data type and check the Array box When assigning IP address FQDN with DHCP Options 120 only The following is an example using IP address Fully Qualified Domain Name when a name SIP and a code 120 are specified Select Byte in Data type and check the Array box Note Whe...

Page 97: ... DHCP Servers need to be prepared to distribute two types of IP addresses Di vide it into multiple networks such as using VLANs and then locate the terminals at the network that DHCP Server provides an appropriate IP address If the above cannot be made in your environment stop using the DHCP Server and assign the appropriate IP addresses to the terminals by the terminal setting on each one STEP 3 ...

Page 98: ... Add After confirming the IP address is added click OK Note When setting two IP addresses the first one in the column indicates IP address of DRS primary and the second one indicates that of DRS secondary STEP 5 Confirm that IP address assigned in STEP 4 displays in IP address of the dialog Then click OK ...

Page 99: ...hen select Action Configure Options STEP 7 Click the check box of an appropriate option The data entry field becomes available When IP Address used with DHCP Options 161 162 is assigned Specify an IP Address and click Add After all the settings are done click OK The following is an example when an IP address 10 40 13 62 is added to 161 DRS2 name DRS2 and code 161 ...

Page 100: ...the IP address After all the settings are done click OK For example when SIP Server s IP address in the network is 10 40 13 6 the following numbers have to be specified Note that you have to click Add after specifying each of the number set 1 Start with 1 fixed 10 Indicates the first octet 40 Indicates the second octet 13 Indicates the third octet 6 Indicates the forth octet ...

Page 101: ...tart with 0 fixed 0x3 Declares three characters to be used for the first character string sp0 0x73 Indicates s in ASCII format 0x70 Indicates p in ASCII format 0x30 Indicates 0 in ASCII format 0x6e Declares three characters to be used for the second character string nec 0x65 Indicates n in ASCII format 0x65 Indicates e in ASCII format 0x63 Indicates c in ASCII format 0x2 Declares two characters to...

Page 102: ... 0x23 C 0x43 c 0x63 0x24 D 0x44 d 0x64 0x25 E 0x45 e 0x65 0x26 F 0x46 f 0x66 0x27 G 0x47 g 0x67 0x28 H 0x48 h 0x68 0x29 I 0x49 i 0x69 0x2a J 0x4a j 0x6a 0x2b K 0x4b k 0x6b 0x2c L 0x4c l 0x6c 0x2d M 0x4d m 0x6d 0x2e N 0x4e n 0x6e 0x2f O 0x4f o 0x6f 0 0x30 P 0x50 p 0x70 1 0x31 Q 0x51 q 0x71 2 0x32 R 0x52 r 0x72 3 0x33 S 0x53 s 0x73 4 0x34 T 0x54 t 0x74 5 0x35 U 0x55 u 0x75 6 0x36 V 0x56 v 0x76 7 0x3...

Page 103: ...VOL 1 43 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 8 Highlight Scope 10 0 0 0 ss2 and select Action Activate ...

Page 104: ... the Ping Command for the detection of IP address conflict Follow the procedure below Be sure to perform this setting Note DHCP Server must be installed in advance STEP 1 Start DHCP Manager and open the following dialog box Select the currently activated DHCP Server in the DHCP Servers list box STEP 2 Select Action Properties on the menu bar to display the following figure ...

Page 105: ... STEP 3 Click Advanced tab The display changes as follows STEP 4 Set the number of times the DHCP Server executes the Ping Command for the detection of IP address conflict In the following example 3 is specified as the number of times Ping is carried out ...

Page 106: ...follow the procedure below if necessary Note DHCP Server must be installed in advance STEP 1 Start DHCP Manager and open the following dialog box Select the Reservation under the activated scope in the tree STEP 2 Select Action New Reservation on the menu bar STEP 3 The following dialog box appears Enter the appropriate IP address and MAC address Then click Add button After all the necessary IP ad...

Page 107: ...splay changes as follows The message Reservation inac tive is displayed until the DHCP server receives the address request from the target client STEP 5 When the DHCP server reserves the address request from the target client the message changes to Reservation active as shown in the following figure ...

Page 108: ... The following topics are covered in this section This section is divided into two parts for the system using Microsoft Windows NT and for the system using Microsoft Windows 2000 Select the page necessary for you by clicking on the hyper link When Using Microsoft Windows NT When Using Microsoft Windows 2000 Items Notes 1 Microsoft DNS Server Installation Required if it has not been installed on th...

Page 109: ...ing Microsoft DNS Server in Microsoft Windows NT STEP 1 Start the Microsoft Windows NT Server STEP 2 Make sure that Microsoft DNS Server has been installed or not on the PC Select Start Settings Control Panel Network Click Services tab to see services that are installed on the PC When Microsoft DNS Server is listed in Network Services list box this procedure is not required Close the Network Dialo...

Page 110: ...VOL 1 50 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK Network Services List Box Example ...

Page 111: ... the server indicating insertion of Microsoft Win dows NT CD ROM and input of file path information Insert Microsoft Windows NT Server CD ROM to the drive and input the file path for the CD ROM When E drive is used as a CD ROM drive for example input the data as follows and click OK When install is complete reset the PC STEP 6 Install Service Pack 4 or higher using the CD ROM Install the Service P...

Page 112: ...lick DNS on the menu bar and select Add DNS Server STEP 4 Enter the IP address of the DNS server Example DNS Server 10 136 20 150 IP Address of the DNS Server STEP 5 Click OK button The server is added to the server list and starts running STEP 6 Create zone of domain names allocated to IP terminals As to the domain name of area where the IP terminals use ask the network administrator Make sure th...

Page 113: ...STEP 7 Click the right mouse button on the added DNS STEP 8 Select New Zone Selecting New Zone Note To distribute arbitrary domain name to IP terminals use DHCP server STEP 9 Select Primary radio button and click Next button Selecting Primary radio button ...

Page 114: ...er Key Example Zone Name nec com Domain Name Entry STEP 10 The database file name is automatically input in Zone File text box Click Next button to create zone STEP 11 Make sure that the zone is created for nec com STEP 12 Click the right mouse button on the created zone and select New Record on the menu Selecting New Record ...

Page 115: ...ource Record STEP 14 Enter the IP Address ex 10 136 20 100 of the DRS and click OK When an IP terminal inquires the IP address of necdrs1 nec com the DNS server replies necdrs1 nec com is 10 136 20 100 STEP 15 Double click the nec com of 10 136 20 150 STEP 16 Make sure that necdrs1 is registered in the Zone Information ...

Page 116: ...of DNS server STEP 1 Start DHCP Manager by selecting Start Programs Administrative Tools Common DHCP Manager If Microsoft DHCP Server has not been installed on the PC install it referring to 1 1 1 Installing DHCP in Microsoft Windows NT Server STEP 2 Select the activated scope highlighted in blue in the DHCP Servers list box STEP 3 Select DHCP Options Scope or Global on the menu bar DHCP Options S...

Page 117: ... 6 Click Edit Array button IP Address Array Editor dialog box appears STEP 7 Enter the IP address of the DNS server in the New IP Address text box Example New IP Address 10 136 20 150 IP Address Array Editor dialog box STEP 8 Click OK button The IP address of the DNS server is added to the DHCP services IP Address Array Editor dialog box is closed ...

Page 118: ...x and click Add button 015 Domain Name moves to Active Options list box Adding Options Domain Name STEP 2 Enter the Domain Name STEP 3 Click OK button The Domain Name is added to the DHCP services STEP 4 Make sure that the assigned DNS server and Domain Name are displayed in the Option Configura tion list box Check of the Added Options ...

Page 119: ...ork configuration that is used in this section Network Configuration Microsoft Windows 2000 DNS Note DRS Device Registration Server used in this section refers to Telephony Server Telephony Server acts as DRS where IP device terminal is registered 1 Send necdrs1 DtermIP DRS Server Domain nec com IP Address 10 136 20 100 Router 2 Receive IP Address 10 136 20 100 responding to DRS necdrs1 3 Connect ...

Page 120: ...rver has been installed on the PC Select Start Settings Control Panel Add Remove Program Click Add Remove Windows Components to see services that are installed on the PC When Domain Name System DNS is checked in Network Services list box this procedure is not required Close the Network Dialog Box and move on to 2 2 2 Setting up DNS Server Microsoft Windows 2000 When DNS is not listed move on to ST...

Page 121: ...QUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 2 Check the box of Domain Name System DNS and Click OK CD ROM request dialog box appears Specify the location of CD ROM into edit box and click OK Components start to be configured in the diagram below ...

Page 122: ...VOL 1 62 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 3 Click Finish to complete the DNS installation ...

Page 123: ...r Select Start Programs Administrative Tools DNS STEP 3 Click Action on the menu bar and point to Connect To Computer STEP 4 Select This computer and check the box of Connected to specified computer now Then click OK Note Once DNS Server is specified the DNS server is automatically set when the DNS console is activated Clicking DNS on the left tree displays DNS server name ...

Page 124: ...UIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 5 Highlight the DNS on DNS console and then select New Zone on pulldown of Action Note When the specified domain name is given to IP terminal DHPC Server must be used STEP 6 Click Next on New Zone Wizard ...

Page 125: ...VOL 1 65 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 7 Select Standard primary and click Next STEP 8 Select Forward lookup zone and click Next ...

Page 126: ...6 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 9 Enter a domain name nec co jp in the Name on the screen and then click Next STEP 10 Make sure the file name nec co jp dns on the screen and then click Next ...

Page 127: ...VOL 1 67 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 11 Click Finish to complete the process STEP 12 Make sure that the zone is created on DNS screen ...

Page 128: ...VOL 1 68 CHAPTER 1 DEVICES REQUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 13 Highlight the created zone nec co jp Click the right mouse button and select New Host on the menu ...

Page 129: ...on firming dialog appears indicating the process is successfully completed then click OK Note Host name of IP terminal is set to necdrs1 as an initial setting STEP 15 Enter the IP Address of the DRS 10 136 20 100 and click OK When an IP Enabled Dterm inquires the IP address of necdrs1 nec com the DNS server replies necdrs1 nec com is 10 136 20 100 ...

Page 130: ...s to obtain DNS server address and domain name Refer to 1 2 3 Setting up DHCP Server Option Microsoft Windows 2000 IP Address of DNS Server STEP 1 Start DHCP Manager by selecting Start Programs Administrative Tools DHCP If Microsoft DHCP Server has not been installed on the PC install it referring to Microsoft DHCP Server Installation STEP 2 Select Configure Options on the pulldown menu of Action ...

Page 131: ...TEP 3 Check the box of 006 DNS Servers and specify IP address 10 136 20 150 Then click Add IP address moves to Active Options list box STEP 4 After confirming the IP address click OK on the dialog box STEP 5 Confirm that DNS Server is added on DHCP Console ...

Page 132: ...QUIRED TO BUILD NETWORK STEP 6 Select Configure Options on Action Check the box of 015 DNS Domain Name and specify domain name nec co jp and then click OK STEP 7 Confirm that DNS Server and DNS domain name are added on DHCP Console ...

Page 133: ... the following PC installed Microsoft Windows NT Server CD ROM of Microsoft Windows NT Server CD ROM of Microsoft Windows NT Server Service Pack 4 or higher STEP 1 Start the Microsoft Windows NT Server STEP 2 Make sure that Microsoft IIS has been installed or not on the PC Select Start Settings Control Panel Network Click Services tab to see services that are installed on the PC When Microsoft Int...

Page 134: ...ng insertion of Microsoft Win dows NT CD ROM and input of file path information Insert Microsoft Windows NT Server CD ROM to the drive and input the file path for the CD ROM When E drive is used as a CD ROM drive for example input the data as follows STEP 5 Restart the PC STEP 6 Install Service Pack 4 or higher using the CD ROM If Service Pack 4 or higher has been already installed on the PC insta...

Page 135: ...ns how to set up FTP service STEP 1 Start the Microsoft Windows NT Server STEP 2 Start Internet Service Manager Select Start Program Internet Service Manager Microsoft Internet Service Manager ap pears Startup of Internet Service Manager STEP 3 Make sure that FTP is Running State of FTP Service ...

Page 136: ...K STEP 4 Click the right mouse button on the FTP server icon A pull down menu appears Service Properties on pull down menu STEP 5 Select Service Properties on the menu FTP Service Property dialog box appears FTP Service Properties for server dialog box ...

Page 137: ...llow Anonymous Connections and Allow only anonymous connections boxes on the Service tab STEP 7 Select Directories tab Directory used for download is displayed The default is C InetPub ftp root Copy the files you want to download to the directory Directory for Download ...

Page 138: ...bles referring to the figure below PCPro Cabling when using Ethernet EMA MAIN PWR SYS ALM SYS 1 MB SUB SYS LOCK SYS SEL PFT LINK OPE ALM INIT PBI No SYS 0 1 2 1 2 SWO0 SWO1 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 3 4 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 1 2 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 3 4 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 1 2 ON LINE LOAD PWR ON LINE LOAD PWR ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PCPro SW HUB Note LAN c...

Page 139: ...232C cable PCPro customer provided Connect the PCPro using the following cables SV 4PORT CA A RS 232C CA 1 and RS 232C SV 4PORT CA A M Male F Female F M M M F ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required EMA MAIN PWR SYS ALM SYS 1 MB SUB SYS LOCK SYS SEL PFT LINK OPE ALM INIT PBI No SYS 0 1 2 1 2 SWO0 SWO1 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 3 4 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 1 2 LINE SPEED LINE SPE...

Page 140: ...Installation Cable PCPro Use the following cables to connect Telephony Server and PCPro through modems The customer should provide the RS 232C cable M M M F M Male F Female RS 232C cable customer provided ANALOG LINE 2W 4W RTSRD DCD TEST SD MODEM RTSRD DCD TEST SD MODEM less than 10m 33 feet MODEM MODEM ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required SV 4PORT CA A F M M EMA MAIN ...

Page 141: ... Printer which is equipped with a parallel port END RS 232C CA 0 RS 232C cable Printer customer provided Connect the printer using the following cables SV 4PORT CA A RS 232C CA 0 and RS 232C M F F ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required SV 4PORT CA A M Male F Female M M EMA MAIN PWR SYS ALM SYS 1 MB SUB SYS LOCK SYS SEL PFT LINK OPE ALM INIT PBI No SYS 0 1 2 1 2 SWO0 SWO1...

Page 142: ...ce specifications are Synchronization Asynchronous Data Speed 9600 bps maximum Code ASCII 7 bit Parity Bit Maximum Distance 15 meters 49 feet without Modems 6 1 When using LAN Cable Connect the cable as shown below for connecting the SMDR via LAN SMDR Cabling when using Ethernet EMA MAIN PWR SYS ALM SYS 1 MB SUB SYS LOCK SYS SEL PFT LINK OPE ALM INIT PBI No SYS 0 1 2 1 2 SWO0 SWO1 LINE SPEED LINE ...

Page 143: ...RT CA A M Male F Female F M M EMA MAIN PWR SYS ALM SYS 1 MB SUB SYS LOCK SYS SEL PFT LINK OPE ALM INIT PBI No SYS 0 1 2 1 2 SWO0 SWO1 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 3 4 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 1 2 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 3 4 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 1 2 ON LINE LOAD PWR ON LINE LOAD PWR SW00 1 0 MBR AUX SD RD DR ER RS CD Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3 CONN OPE ALM RS 232C CA 1 RS 232C cable SMDR customer provided Connec...

Page 144: ... A M Male F Female F M M EMA MAIN PWR SYS ALM SYS 1 MB SUB SYS LOCK SYS SEL PFT LINK OPE ALM INIT PBI No SYS 0 1 2 1 2 SWO0 SWO1 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 3 4 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 1 2 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 3 4 LINE SPEED LINE SPEED 1 2 ON LINE LOAD PWR ON LINE LOAD PWR SW00 1 0 MBR AUX SD RD DR ER RS CD Port0 Port1 Port2 Port3 CONN OPE ALM RS 232C CA 3 Installation Cable SMDR Use the following cables...

Page 145: ... 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 24 OR BK1 GY BK1 W BK1 W BK3 W BK5 Y BK3 Y BK5 P BK3 OR BK4 GY BK4 W BK4 Y BK4 P BK4 OR BK5 GY BK5 P BK1 Y BK1 OR BK2 GY BK2 OR BK3 GY BK3 W BK2 P BK2 Y BK2 Cable Accommodation TYP0 04 07 05 01 11 06 50 02 12 10 09 03 08 25 Cable Accommodation TYP1 04 07 05 01 11 06 50 02 12 10 09 03 08 25 Note A line with no indication within the diagram is treate...

Page 146: ... Pin Cannon Connector Male Connect to PRT Connect to IPX 2PORT CA A TYPE 1 SD TYPE 2 RD TYPE 3 RS TYPE 4 CS TYPE 5 DR TYPE 6 SG TYPE 7 CD TYPE 8 ER TYPE 9 PB TYPE 10 SP0 TYPE 12 SP2 TYPE 11 SP1 DTE 3 RD TYPE 2 SD TYPE 8 CD TYPE TYPE 20 ER TYPE 7 SG TYPE 4 RS 5 CS TYPE 6 DR TYPE 11 PB TYPE 24 ST1 TYPE 17 RT TYPE 15 ST2 RS 232C CA 0 ...

Page 147: ...n Connector Female Connect to RS 232C Cable Connect to IPX 2PORT CA A TYPE 1 SD TYPE 2 RD TYPE 3 RS TYPE 4 CS TYPE 5 DR TYPE 6 SG TYPE 7 CD TYPE 8 ER TYPE 9 PB TYPE 10 SP0 TYPE 12 SP2 TYPE 11 SP1 DTE 3 RD TYPE 2 SD TYPE 8 CD TYPE TYPE 20 ER TYPE 7 SG TYPE 4 RS 5 CS TYPE 6 DR TYPE 11 PB TYPE 24 ST1 TYPE 17 RT TYPE 15 ST2 DTE RS 232C CA 1 ...

Page 148: ...nector Female 25 Pin Cannon Connector Male Connect to Modem Connect to IPX 2PORT CA A TYP 1 SD TYP 2 RD TYP 3 RS TYP 4 CS TYP 5 DR TYP 6 SG TYP 7 CD TYP 8 ER TYP 10 SP0 TYP 11 SP2 TYP 12 SP1 DCE 2 SD DCE 3 RD DCE 4 RS DCE 5 CS DCE 6 DR DCE 7 SG DCE 8 CD DCE 20 ER DCE 17 RT DCE 24 ST1 DCE 15 ST2 RS 232C CA 3 DTE ...

Page 149: ...Connection by IP Stations Data Programming Manual Business I 43 IP Enabled Dterm 2 MAC Authentication Mode Data Programming Manual Business I 43 IP Enabled Dterm 3 Login Mode Data Programming Manual Business I 43 IP Enabled Dterm 4 IP Terminal and Legacy Station Trunk Connection via IPPAD Data Programming Manual Business Basic Data Programming 5 Analog Terminal Connection via Analog 2MC MC MG with...

Page 150: ...o Assign Internal PHI How to Assign SP PHD How to Assign SP PHI How to Assign Virtual PIR How to Set Terminal Software when using HyperTerminal Note About Internal PHC which is another PH function to establish CCIS over IP network refer to the Data Programming Manual CCIS Note About Internal PHF which is another PH function to establish FCCS over IP network refer to the Data Programming Manual FCC...

Page 151: ...igure below Internal PHE is also used as the interface for communication between TP and SP This operation is shown at the right part of the figure below where SP communicates with TP to control the IP station All the devices controlled by Internal PHE are listed on Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual 2 1 2 Hardware Required None 2 1 3 Installation...

Page 152: ...HE accommodated location LENS two digit Module Group Number one digit Unit Number two digit Group Number Note 2 The LENS can be allocated on either a Virtual PIR or a Physical PIR The figure below is an example to show Internal PHE accommodated location In this example 01308 is specified to LENS and the Group colored blue is the accommodated location corresponding to the LENS STEP 4 ADPM Initializ...

Page 153: ...prietary Protocol mode including MG BRI and MG PRI All the devices controlled by Internal PHI are listed on Registration Desti nation of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual The figure below is an example to show the Internal PHI operation 2 2 2 Hardware Required None 2 2 3 Installation Procedure None Telephony Server IP Station Analog Telephone MG BRI in Proprietary Protocol...

Page 154: ...rtup and Basic Tests in MG PRI 1 5M SCA 24PRIA MG 24PRIA MG PRI 2M SCA 30PRIA MG 30PRIA of Volume 2 in this manual Note 2 The Port Number for Internal PHI is shared between MG PRI and MG BRI Note 3 Internal PHI BRI data apply to other devices using Internal PHI except for MG PRI Note When the data are modified in this command initialize Internal PHI by ADPM command STEP 3 ALIDL Specify the LENS fi...

Page 155: ...he LENS STEP 4 ADPM Initialize and reset the Internal PHI HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 Highway Number 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05...

Page 156: ...P devices terminals TP and SP SP which SP PHD belongs to needs to commu nicate with TP for its operation In this communication Internal PHE at TP side and MPH at SP side work as the interfaces respectively The figure below will help you to understand this operation All the IP stations controlled by SP PHD are listed on Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in IN TRODUCTION of Installatio...

Page 157: ...mber of MPH 1 4095 Single CPU MPH ID 1 Fixed Dual CPU MPH ID 1 and 2 Fixed Note Assign MPH ID 1 for CPU 0 and MPH ID 2 for CPU 1 PH TYPE Select PHD in the combo box PH LENS Line Equipment Number of SP PHD accommodated slot Note 1 Do not assign the same LENS as that of MPH REGMAX Capacity of registration 1 4095 default 256 MGC PORT Controlling Signaling Port Number for TP 1 65535 default 64105 TERM...

Page 158: ...02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 ...

Page 159: ...has two parts of registration destination for IP devices terminals TP and SP SP which SP PHI belongs to needs to communicate with TP for its operation In this communication Internal PHE at TP side and MPH at SP side work as the interfaces respectively The figure below will help you to understand this operation Note 1 IP devices controlled by SP PHI in Proprietary Protocol mode are MG BRI MC MG COT...

Page 160: ...mber of MPH 1 4095 Single CPU MPH ID 1 Fixed Dual CPU MPH ID 1 and 2 Fixed Note Assign MPH ID 1 for CPU 0 and MPH ID 2 for CPU 1 PH TYPE Select PHI in the combo box PH LENS Line Equipment Number of SP PHI accommodated slot Note 1 Do not assign the same LENS as that of MPH REGMAX Capacity of registration 1 4095 default 256 MGC PORT Controlling Signaling Port Number for TP 1 65535 default 64105 TERM...

Page 161: ...02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 ...

Page 162: ... CCIS over IP Note The existing Virtual PIR data cannot be deleted while the System is in on line mode The existing Virtual PIR data must be deleted during the off line mode After deleting the Virtual PIR data the System must be initialized 2 5 2 Hardware Required None 2 5 3 Installation Procedure None Virtual PIR Available MGs IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 PIR 0 PIR 1 PIR 2 PIR 3 PIR 0 PIR 1 PIR 2 PIR 3 PIR 0 P...

Page 163: ...ue is 0 Physical PIR The following shows the relationship between bit and PIR STEP 2 ASYD MG LP Assignment SYS1 INDEX 0 Specify the number of Module Group Physical PIR Virtual PIR SYS1 INDEX 198 199 Specify IMG 0 3 Mounting Status Physical PIR Virtual PIR STEP 3 AUNT Unit Data Assignment Assign the total number of PIR Physical PIR Virtual PIR b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 PIR3 PIR2 PIR1 PIR0 IMG1 IMG3 I...

Page 164: ...l as an example For Windows Vista or later operating systems prepare a terminal software yourself and assign the configuration data referring to the description for HyperTerminal 2 6 2 Hardware Required None 2 6 3 Installation Procedure None 2 6 4 Data Programming STEP 1 Startup Windows on the Maintenance Console PC STEP 2 Click Start All Programs Accessories Communications HyperTermi nal STEP 3 W...

Page 165: ...VOL 1 105 CHAPTER 2 IP RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING STEP 5 Port setting screen appears Set appropriate data and click OK Terminal software setting has completed ...

Page 166: ...rogramming of network related data programming The following topics are covered here Guideline for Calculating Bandwidth Required Peer to Peer Bandwidth Control by Location ID ToS Control by Location ID Virtual LAN VLAN PAD Control by Location ID Echo Canceler Control by Location ID PAD EC Control IP PHC Support ...

Page 167: ...onship between Codec Type Payload Size and Bandwidth The following shows available Payload Type Payload Size for each equipment Payload Type and Payload Size for each Equipment CODEC SIZE Bandwidth Required kbps Remarks G 711 64k 10 ms 192 20 ms 160 30 ms 149 4 40 ms 144 G 729a 8k 10 ms 80 20 ms 48 30 ms 37 4 40 ms 32 G 723 1 6 3k 30 ms 34 2 60 ms 23 4 G 723 1 5 3k 30 ms 32 60 ms 21 4 Equipment Pa...

Page 168: ...terminal Note 4 WLAN Handset MH250 G 711 G 729a 20ms 40ms IP DTG Note 5 Software Tone Generator G 711 law G 711 A law 20ms 40ms Analog MC Analog 2MC G 711 G 729a 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms G 723 1 5 3k 6 3k G 723 1 6 3k 5 3k 30ms 60ms T 30 for Fax G 726 for Fax SCA 8LCC SCA 8LCC EMEA G 711 G 729a 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms G 723 1 5 3k 6 3k G 723 1 6 3k 5 3k 30ms 60ms T 30 for Fax G 726 for Fax 10ms 20ms 30ms 4...

Page 169: ...k 6 3k G 723 1 6 3k 5 3k 30ms 60ms T 30 for Fax G 726 for Fax 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms MC MG COT MG 4LC2COTA SCA 4LC2COTA MC MG COT with PFT SCA 7COTA G 711 G 729a 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms G 723 1 5 3k 6 3k G 723 1 6 3k 5 3k 30ms 60ms T 30 for Fax G 726 for Fax 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms MG COT SCA 6COTA SCA 6COTB SCA 6COTC G 711 G 729a 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms G 723 1 5 3k 6 3k G 723 1 6 3k 5 3k 30ms 60ms T 30 for Fax...

Page 170: ... FEC G 729a FEC G 722 FEC AMR NB FEC AMR WB FEC 20ms 30ms Note 9 40ms Note 10 Soft Client SP350 G 711 G 729a G 722 AMR NB AMR WB G 711 law FEC G 711 A law FEC G 729a FEC G 722 FEC AMR NB FEC AMR WB FEC 20ms 40ms Note 11 VS 32 SCA VS32VA MG VS32VA SN8111 VSEB A G 711 G 729a 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms Note 12 G 723 1 5 3k 6 3k G 723 1 6 3k 5 3k 30ms 60ms IP BS BS301 G 711 G 729a 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms IPG Dig...

Page 171: ...ng to public SIP network assign the following payload type and payload size FAX con nection is not available when any payload types except G 711 are assigned for voice or fax commu nication Note 9 Payload size 30ms is available when PROTIMS over IP mode is selected For SIP mode Payload size 30ms is not available Note 10 When DtermSP30 is used as an ACD terminal assign the following payload type an...

Page 172: ...an ACD terminal Note 12 When VS 32 that has no Voice Compression feature is used assign G 711 as payload type Note 13 Only the following types of the equipment can be used Note 14 UG50 functions if T 38UDP is set on the connected FAX The payload size cannot be set on the UG50 side Payload Type Payload Size G 711 20ms 30ms 40ms G 729a Payload Type Payload Size G 722 20ms 40ms UG50 Mode Retrofit mod...

Page 173: ...5M Card SCA 24PRIA 65 per unit MG PRI PRI 1 5M Box MG 24PRIA 65 per unit MG PRI PRI 1 5M Card SCA 24PRIA SIP 95 per unit MG PRI PRI 1 5M Box MG 24PRIA SIP 95 per unit MG PRI PRI 2M Card SCA 30PRIA 65 per unit MG PRI PRI 2M Box MG 30PRIA 65 per unit MG PRI PRI 2M Card SCA 30PRIA SIP 95 per unit MG PRI PRI 2M Box MG 30PRIA SIP 95 per unit MG BRI MG BRI 12 per unit MG BRI Card SCA 2BRIA 30 per unit M...

Page 174: ... of bandwidth for call per unit Note 3 MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ See Remarks 10 of bandwidth for call per unit Note 3 MG T1 SIP MG T1 SIP Card SCA 24DTIA 95 per unit Soft Phone Proprietary Protocol 5 per unit When using voice traffic only SIP 8 per unit When using voice traffic only WLAN Handset MH Series 16 per unit Standard SIP Voice Terminal 8 per unit Standard SIP Video Terminal 32 per unit Dterm...

Page 175: ...G Digital 5 per unit IPG Analog 20 per unit UG50 IPG Digital 5 per channel UG50 IPG Analog 20 per channel UG50 Multi slot mode 5 per channel UG50 DLC UG50 IPG mode UG50 IPG Digital Proprietary Protocol Mode 18 per channel UG50 Multi slot mode UG50 LC UG50 IPG mode UG50 IPG Analog UG50 Retrofit mode UG50 2MC UG50 4LC2COTA MC part SIP Mode 40 per channel UG50 Multi slot mode UG50 LC SIP UG50 Retrofi...

Page 176: ...ce channel the number of contracted channels Proprietary Protocol Mode 5 per channel UG50 Multi slot mode UG50 COT TYPE1 UG50 COT TYPE2 Proprietary Protocol UG50 Retrofit mode UG50 4LC2COTA MG part UG50 6COT Proprietary Protocol Proprietary Protocol Mode 3 per channel UG50 Multi slot mode UG50 PRT 1 5M Proprietary Protocol UG50 Retrofit mode UG50 24PRIA Proprietary Protocol SIP Mode 5 per channel ...

Page 177: ...rk ad dress Point Code Fusion Point Code or Station Number basis Assigned groups work as basic units for per forming LAN management ToS control Bandwidth control VLAN Each location requires an unique ID which is called Location ID LOC ID Note This feature includes another function Bandwidth Control for IPPAD This is voice compression func tion performed in IPPAD For information about it refer to t...

Page 178: ...ween them can be set respectively You can also put different network addresses into the same LOC ID Note 1 This figure is a simple image As a matter of fact in this configuration other LOC IDs called Dummy Location should be assigned Dummy Location is set on a branch point where multiple network routes branch off It combines these routes into one and helps you to use Bandwidth Control more flexibl...

Page 179: ...uration other LOC IDs called Dummy Location should be assigned Dummy Location is set on a branch point where multiple network routes branch off It combines these routes into one and helps you to use Bandwidth Control more flexibly For more information about Dummy Location refer to the Data Programming Manual Business Peer to Peer Bandwidth Control by Location ID Location ID 0 Location ID 4 IP Netw...

Page 180: ...er PC Note 1 This figure is a simple image As a matter of fact in this configuration other LOC IDs called Dummy Location should be assigned Dummy Location is set on a branch point where multiple network routes branch off It combines these routes into one and helps you to use Bandwidth Control more flexibly For more information about Dummy Location refer to the Data Programming Manual Business Note...

Page 181: ...e 1 This figure is a simple image As a matter of fact in this configuration other LOC IDs called Dummy Location should be assigned Dummy Location is set on a branch point where multiple network routes branch off It combines these routes into one and helps you to use Bandwidth Control more flexibly For more information about Dummy Location refer to the Data Programming Manual Business Note 2 About ...

Page 182: ... the network and an other one How To Use Dummy Locations LOC ID 0 and LOC ID 1 can be combined into one as LOC ID 200 Dummy Location because they exist in the same network LOC ID 3 and LOC ID 4 also can be combined into one as LOC ID 300 Dummy Location be cause they exist in the same network LOC ID 100 Dummy Location can be allocated to a branch point between LOC ID 200 LOC ID 300 and LOC ID 2 Act...

Page 183: ...en using this feature via CCIS over IP network assign Location ID to the other Node PC Note When using this feature via FCCS network assign Location IDs to all Node FPCs except Self Node FPC in the network When selecting Network Address TYPE Select Network Address IP ADDRESS Assign the IP Address For the Telephony Server assign 0 0 0 0 MASK BIT Assign the MASK BIT in the range 1 31 except when IP ...

Page 184: ... 4095 Note LOC ID 0 is predetermined to the location ID of the Telephony Server STEP 2 AIVCL AIVCN Assign the IP service Voice Control data When data is not assigned the default value is used See AIVCL Default Value Note Only the Location ID corresponding to the network address STN can be assigned on the AIVCL AIVCN The Location IDs corresponding to PC or FPC cannot be assigned Note When using thi...

Page 185: ...ecedence PRI1 high PRI4 low PAYLOAD TYPE Payload Type G 711 G 729a G 723 1 5 3K 6 3K G 723 1 6 3K 5 3K G 722 Note 1 AMR NB Note 2 AMR WB Note 2 G 711 law FEC Note 2 Note 3 G 711 A law FEC Note 2 Note 3 G 729a FEC Note 2 Note 3 G 722 FEC Note 2 Note 3 AMR NB FEC Note 2 Note 3 AMR WB FEC Note 2 Note 3 Note 1 Payload Type G 722 is effective for the following connections The connection between DtermSP...

Page 186: ...n the same terminal specify the same value to the payload size of both types It is not necessary to assign the payload type size to the whole priorities Specifying the first priority only is allowed STEP 3 ASFC Assign the following SFI to grant an exception to the bandwidth restriction SFI 199 Bandwidth Restriction RES 1 Restriction is not applied STEP 4 ABNDL Assign bandwidth control data An expl...

Page 187: ...e of Normal bandwidth 1 16777215 At this value sys tem message 36 G 36 H is issued as a warning Alarm System message 36 I 36 J output 0 1 Provided not provided Particular bandwidth data This value is applied only for specified time zone A maximum of 10 time zone patterns can be assigned Assign the following data related to Particular Bandwidth Time zone Time zone to which the specified bandwidth v...

Page 188: ...s G 729a 20 ms G 729a 20 ms G 729a 20 ms G 729a 20 ms G 729a 20 ms G 711 40 ms LOC ID A 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 ABNDL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 200 100 200 100 300 200 100 300 200 100 200 100 300 200 100 300 100 300 100 300 Start LOC ID Intermediate LOC ID End LOC ID 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 Limit Value Assignment 1 2 3 0 0 0 200 100 300 1520 Kbps 760 Kbps 1140 Kbps LOC ID A LOC ID B Limit Value Remark...

Page 189: ...ms G 729a 20 ms G 729a 20 ms G 729a 20 ms G 729a 20 ms LOC ID A 0 0 0 1 1 3 ABNDL 1 2 0 1 100 100 Start LOC ID Intermediate LOC ID End LOC ID 20 20 Limit Value Assignment Routing Data Assignment 1 20 100 1520 Kbps LOC ID A LOC ID B Limit Value Remarks Line A Point Code 2 Data Assignment in PC1 When Payload is controlled by LOC ID When Payload is controlled by LOC ID Location PC Dummy Location Line...

Page 190: ...5 0 0 1 1 2 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 100 Start LOC ID Intermediate LOC ID End LOC ID 2 10 2 10 10 Limit Value Assignment Routing Data Assignment 1 2 100 2 200 100 11140 Kbps 760 Kbps LOC ID A LOC ID B Limit Value Remarks Line B Line C Point Code 1 When Payload is controlled by LOC ID When Payload is controlled by LOC ID Location PC Dummy Location Line to be controlled Self PC not have LOC I...

Page 191: ...to NCN which is the main node in the net work The data which is assigned by AIVCN command is common in the FCCS network The following is an example of it Location FPC Dummy Location LOC ID 1 10 40 10 0 24 LOC ID 1 10 41 10 0 24 LOC ID 0 0 0 0 0 32 LOC ID 0 0 0 0 0 32 LOC ID 2 10 41 20 0 24 IP Network LOC ID 100 LOC ID 100 LOC ID 200 FPC2 FPC1 NCN LN Line C Line A Line B LOC ID 20 LOC ID 10 Line to...

Page 192: ...1 10 0 24 10 41 20 0 24 IP Address LOC ID 0 1 2 LOC ID 10 FPC 1 Data Assignment in FPC2 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 1 1 2 200 100 200 100 200 100 200 100 100 Start LOC ID Intermediate LOC ID End LOC ID 2 10 2 10 10 Routing Data Assignment Limit Value Assignment 1 2 100 2 200 100 11140 Kbps 760 Kbps LOC ID A LOC ID B Limit Value Remarks Line B Line C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FPC B 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Payload G 711 4...

Page 193: ... basically used the ToS value can be changed on a Location ID basis accord ing to the network condition The following figure shows an example of the network configuration using ToS Control ToS Control by Location ID 3 3 2 Hardware Required None 3 3 3 Installation Procedure None Location ID 0 Location ID 1 Location ID 2 Assigned by ALOCL Priority 6 Low Delay ON High Throughput ON High Reliability C...

Page 194: ...the following ToS for Signaling Packet data Note 1 Select either IP PRECEDENCE or DIFFSERV When IP PRECEDENCE is selected Priority Specify the precedence in the range 0 7 low high Low Delay Place a checkmark in the checkbox to set Low Delay to ON Through put Place a checkmark in the checkbox to set High Throughput to ON Reliability Place a checkmark in the checkbox to set High Reliability to ON Mi...

Page 195: ...selected Precedence Specify the precedence in the range 0 7 low high Low Delay Place a checkmark in the checkbox to set Low Delay to ON Through put Place a checkmark in the checkbox to set High Throughput to ON Reliability Place a checkmark in the checkbox to set High Reliability to ON Min Cost Place a checkmark in the checkbox to set Cost Precedence to ON When Diffserv is selected DCSP Specify th...

Page 196: ... priority can also be used by which you can give higher priority to voice packets to provide high speech quality User priority bits conform to IEEE 802 1p The following figure shows a MAC frame tagged with a VLAN tag Virtual LAN VLAN Tagged VLAN conforms to IEEE 802 1q To use this feature Switch must support Tagged VLAN This feature is not supported by Internal PH For In ternal PH use Port VLAN Ta...

Page 197: ...ase VLAN function is re quired Multiple VLANs can not be configured under each port Data assignment is required to the Layer 2 Switch Refer to the attached manual of the switch for configuring Port VLAN The figure below shows that VLAN is being configured to each port of the switch by using a maintenance console Port VLAN Data Assignment via a Console Swich or Router DtermIP PC User Priority CFI V...

Page 198: ...2 1p REMARKS DtermIP See Configuration Setup in this guide DtermIP INASET See Configuration Setup in this guide IP Enabled Dterm See Configuration Setup in this guide Soft Phone Soft Phone will be able to be compatible with VLAN IDs by using the Windows features and compatible external equipment See the manual of the Soft Phone Analog MC Use SET VLAN command from the maintenance console IP BS Use ...

Page 199: ...e shows an example of the network configuration that applies PAD Control by using Location ID PAD Control by Location ID Example 3 5 2 Hardware Required None 3 5 3 Installation Procedure None Location ID 1 Location ID 0 Location ID 2 PAD Control between LOC ID 0 2 IP terminal 12dB IPPAD 8dB PAD Control between LOC ID 1 2 IP terminal 12dB MC PAD OFF PAD Control between LOC ID 0 1 MC PAD OFF IPPAD 8...

Page 200: ...nding on the terminal kind Applied PAD Value by ASYD Index 4 Bit 5 0 ON PAD Control by ASYD Index 4 Bit 5 0 ON TERMINAL APPLIED PAD VALUE REMARKS DtermIP 9 dB DtermIP INASET 9 dB Analog MC 5 dB IP BS 6 dB DtermSP20 30 12 dB Analog Station 5 dB Dterm 9 dB SND RCV ELC SND RCV LC 0 dB 5 dB SND RCV IPPAD Telephony Server Analog Telephone Analog Telephone Dterm DtermIP MC IP Network 0 dB 0 dB SND RCV 9...

Page 201: ...pplied to both SENDING and RECEIVING sides In the following example 2 dB is assigned by AIVCL between Location ID 1 and Location ID 2 for DtermIP PAD Control by Location ID AIVCL Location ID 0 Location ID 1 SND RCV 11 dB 2 dB SND RCV 11 dB 2 dB Telephony Server DtermIP DtermIP DtermIP IP Network Data Programming by AIVCL Location A Location ID 0 Location B Location ID 1 PAD 2 dB applied PAD Value ...

Page 202: ... 0 dB S N D 0 dB R C V Note 1 R C V 9 dB R C V Note 2 R C V 5 dB R C V 6 dB R C V 12 dB R C V 12 dB 12 dB IP VPS R C V 0 dB S N D Note 1 S N D 0 dB S N D 0 dB S N D 0 dB S N D 0 dB S N D 0 dB S N D 0 dB S N D 0 dB R C V Note 1 R C V 9 dB R C V Note 2 R C V 5 dB R C V 6 dB R C V 12 dB R C V 12 dB Command to be used AIVCL ASYD AIVCL ASYD Note 3 ASYD ASYD ASYD IP Terminal Group and Legacy Terminal Gr...

Page 203: ... command from a maintenance terminal connected to the Analog MC The value ranges from 0 dB to 15 dB in 1 dB increments ex SET PAD Note 4 PAD value is applied to TDSW side not the called terminal according the following table Note 5 By using AIVCL KIND 3 PAD value can be set in combination of two Location IDs The data for the parameter ranges from 1 to 15 Note that 0 and 8 15 are PAD OFF which is e...

Page 204: ... in advance on a location ba sis Echo Canceler ON OFF can be determined in combination of two locations Echo Canceler Control by Location ID 3 6 2 Hardware Required None 3 6 3 Installation Procedure None 3 6 4 Data Programming STEP 1 ALOCL Assign Location ID on a network basis STEP 2 AIVCL Set EC ON EC OFF by specifying two locations Location ID 1 Location ID 0 Location ID 2 LOC ID 0 LOC ID 2 LOC ...

Page 205: ...his fea ture supports CCIS over IP network as well The figure below shows network to which default value applies By assigning System Data appropriate value is automatically set If the value does not match the particular network the value can be modified Default PAD EC is applied to IPPAD Default PAD EC is applied to DtermIP IPPAD DtermIP DtermIP DtermIP Telephony Server Telephony Server Analog Tel...

Page 206: ...rnal PHC enables communication between PCs in the CCIS network STEP 2 APDIL Assign PAD EC control data that supports IP This PAD EC control data is applied for calls not via CCIS over IP STEP 3 APDCL Assign PAD EC control data that supports IP This step is required to assign PAD EC data for calls via CCIS over IP If CCIS over IP is not used skip this step ASYDL SYS 1 INDEX 825 Bit 1 Bit 0 PAD EC C...

Page 207: ...ASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4 Data Programming Quick Reference Sheet This section provides Quick Reference for Service Features covered in the previous chapters Command in a round bracket is optional command Assign the data when required ...

Page 208: ...ocation ID assignment IP Service Voice Control Data Key Data for Desktop Terminal Desktop Terminal Key Status Data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 Not Used Japan North America Australia other countries Hong Kong Malaysia Singapore England Mexico Taiwan New Zealand Korea Brazil China Thailand Thailand EGAT Sri Lanka DATA COUNTRY START END SYS1 Index 880 bit 3 1 Internal PHE SY...

Page 209: ...RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4 1 2 MAC Authentication Yes No AMAC ADTM START IP Station MAC Address Registration Password END Assign MAC address and the Station Number Assign IP Station MAC Address Registration Password ...

Page 210: ...Password Authentication Failure is detected Assign IP Station MAC Address Registration Password Assign 1st DC for IP Station Password Entry access code Assign the special access code for IP Station Password Entry SRV SSCA Service Code Appendix SIDA 123 Allow IP Station Login feature on an SFC basis SFI186 IP Station Login Note Data 0 allows the user to log in from the terminal Assign the MND data ...

Page 211: ...t 6 0 AMND Tables Separate SYS1 Index 186 bit 6 1 CCIS SYS1 Index 220 bit 6 0 ISDN SYS1 Index 420 bit 0 1 Access Code Operation by Pre Set dialing Assign ToS value Reset Internal PHE Assign the domain names to be controlled by Telephony Server Telephony Server Operating Data Assign Physical Station number of SIP terminal Assign SIP terminal data ASFC ASYD AMND ASPW START END SFI 4 SFI 5 SFI 6 SFI ...

Page 212: ...M Initialize Internal PHE and SIP Handler ASPTL Assign SIP terminal data SYS1 Index 93 bit 6 0 AMND Tables Separate ASYD START END ASFC SFI 4 SFI 5 SFI 6 SFI 67 AMND Assign Maximum Necessary Number of Digits for Password ASPW Assign the password for SIP terminal SYS 1 INDEX 880 b3 1 Internal PHE is valid SYS 1 INDEX 880 b5 1 SIP Handler activation is valid SYS 1 INDEX 811 Tone Code by countries SY...

Page 213: ...ING 4 4 IP Terminal and Legacy Station Trunk Connection via IPPAD ACRD ACTK AFPC ALIDL MBCT Assign the Route Class data of the IP PAD Assign the Connection Trunk Data Assign the C_RT number to FPC 0 Assign the LAN information Make idle the trunk START END ...

Page 214: ... ASYDL ALIDL AGKDL AGKDN COGKL COGHN AHSD ALGSL ALGSN SYS1 Index 30 SYS1 Index 186 bit 6 1 SYS1 Index 187 00H SYS1 Index 220 bit 6 0 Assign PHE LAN information Assign Gatekeeper information Make sure of the status of Gatekeeper Assign H 323 Terminal data Assign Telephone Number START END ...

Page 215: ...uide ASYDL ANPD ASPA ALIDL AISTL ALOCL AIVCL SYS1 Index 811 SYS1 Index 813 SYS1 Index 824 bit 0 SYS1 Index 880 bit 3 1 START END Assign 1st DC for Analog Stations SRV STA Assign the LAN information Assign the Station Data such as IP Station Number TEC RSC SFC Assign the Location ID data Assign IP Service Voice Control data MG data assignment Note 1 Note 1 Be sure to assign MG related data in advan...

Page 216: ...Internal PHE because Internal PHE is necessary for acti vating SP PHD If Internal PHE data has been already assigned the related data are not required to be assigned again ASYDL ALIDL ALIDL SYS1 Index 880 bit 3 1 Internal PHE SYS1 Index 885 bit 7 1 SP implementation Assign LENS of Internal PHE Assign LENS of MPH and SP PHD START END ...

Page 217: ...SIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4 8 How to Assign Internal PHE ASYDL ADTM ALIDL ADPM SYS1 Index 880 bit 3 1 Internal PHE Assign port number when changing the default value 60130 Assign the LAN information Initialize the Internal PHE START END ...

Page 218: ... 4 9 How to Assign Internal PHI ASYDL ADTM ALIDL ADPM SYS1 Index 880 bit 1 1 Internal PHI SYS1 Index 884 bit 0 PHI Re transmission Timer Assign port number when changing the default value 64000 Assign the LAN information Initialize the Internal PHI START END ...

Page 219: ...Internal PHE because Internal PHE is necessary for acti vating SP PHI If Internal PHE data has been already assigned the related data are not required to be assigned again ASYDL ALIDL ALIDL SYS1 Index 880 bit 3 1 Internal PHE SYS1 Index 885 bit 7 1 SP implementation Assign LENS of Internal PHE Assign LENS of MPH and SP PHI START END ...

Page 220: ...RAMMING 4 11 How to Assign Virtual PIR ASYDL ASYD AUNT START END SYS1 Index 556 557 Set 1 to each PIR to be used as Virtual PIR SYS1 Index 0 Number of MGs Physical PIR Virtual PIR SYS1 Index 198 199 Specify IMG 0 3 Mounting Status Assign the unit data ...

Page 221: ...r to Peer Bandwidth Control by Location ID ALOCL AIVCL ASFC ABNDL START END Assign the Location ID data Assign IP service Voice Control data SFI 199 Bandwidth Restriction When 1 is set the station assigning the SFC will not be restricted Assign bandwidth control data ...

Page 222: ...VOL 1 162 CHAPTER 2 IP RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4 13 ToS Control by Location ID ALOCL AIVCL START END Assign the Location ID data Assign the IP service Voice Control data ...

Page 223: ...BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4 14 PAD Control by Location ID ASYD ALOCL AIVCL START END SYS1 Index 4 bit 5 0 PAD Control for Station to Station Call is applied Assign the Location ID data Assign PAD value by specifying two Location IDs ...

Page 224: ...VOL 1 164 CHAPTER 2 IP RELATED BASIC FEATURE PROGRAMMING 4 15 Echo Canceler Control by Location ID ALOCL AIVCL START END Assign the Location ID data Assign Echo ON OFF data ...

Page 225: ...ity Note 1 Note 1 3M is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Inc How to use the Service Kit ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required LOAD LAN1 LAN2 PWR ACT ALM EMA TxRx LINK TxRx LINK SV7000 APEX TP S LOAD LAN1 LAN2 PWR ACT ALM TxRx LINK TxRx LINK SV7000 APEX SP S U P U P U P U P S P 2 3 4 S P 2 3 4 SP 234 SP 234 SN1234 SN1234 Connect ground wire to...

Page 226: ...ides WARNING CAUTION and Note indicators to draw attention to specific matters 1 Meaning WARNING If warnings are not heeded personal injury may result CAUTION If cautions are not heeded actions may result in damage to the equipment and or the system Note Indicates an item that requires special attention 2 Locations of Indicators WARNING and CAUTION indicators are generally located at the top of a ...

Page 227: ...istics range of the radio zone are as follows Indoor general Radius of 49 feet 15 meters approximately Indoor floor and corridor with unobstructed view Radius of 65 feet 20 meters approximately Outdoor Radius of 164 to 196 feet 50 to 60 meters approx imately The range shown represents model values Adjustment of the radio zone should be needed to design the final drawings as the radio wave fluctuat...

Page 228: ...ZT instal lation a Single Floor Installation ZTs are ideally installed at right angles or zigzag like spots in a die b Vertical Successive Floor Installation Install the ZTs at zigzag positions alternately by even number and odd number floors The transparent radio waves penetrating floors or ceilings are sufficient enough to receive an electric field to be a radio zone and the transparent radio wa...

Page 229: ...es Radio waves that are propagated directly and linearly b Reflected waves diffracted waves indirect waves Radio waves that are propagated by being reflected or diffracted from an obstacle such as a wall and ceiling c Transmitted waves Radio waves that travel through a wall floor partition d Propagating corridor waves Radio waves that travel along a corridor One type of reflected waves e Re enteri...

Page 230: ...sends a weak signal as radio waves It should not be installed near and around equipment or an environment listed below to ensure speech quality and various kinds of control operations Care must be taken Indoor Installation Do not install around equipment capable of emitting noise high frequency electric waves such as a Wireless apparatus television set radio set fluorescent lightening and microwav...

Page 231: ...using the outdoor mounting box and other pro tection if necessary Avoid abnormal places where a fear of an explosion may be present or those subjected to malfunc tion by radio waves or to a strong electromagnetic field b Avoid installing on a clay wall or plasterboard c Ensure the wall or pillar used is strong enough to support the weight of the ZT so that it does not shake and has very little vib...

Page 232: ...lled at a proper location so that the wireless area of PRIMARY and SUB PRIMARY may overlap one another Under normal circumstances it functions as a secondary IP BS 3 SECONDARY IP BS This IP BS establishes the synchronization by receiving the sync signal from the following IP BS that has the same SYS ID and the synchronization has been established CS 3 1 2 Setting Method of Wireless Synchronization...

Page 233: ...ock 2 Wireless Block 3 Seconday Seconday Seconday Seconday Seconday Seconday Seconday Seconday SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC SYNC PRIMAY PRIMAY PRIMAY SUB PRIMAY SUB PRIMARY represents wireless area for 1 IP BS represents wireless block service area Note SYNC ...

Page 234: ... itself If the synchronizing connection in operation is down it will start run ning by itself searching for CS of the specified CS Then it will synchronize the one as soon ass the connection is established Note When SYS ID of existing CS to which PRIMARY BS synchronizes and SYS ID of PRIMARY BS are the same this is the case when using FCCS or IPPAD do not assign the SYS ID of the CS for the PRIMAR...

Page 235: ...r the synchronization In this case setting as primary or sub primary is not enable on the IP BS Each one operates in secondary mode Note It is necessary to assign the location data by COCS5L COCS5N command Besides CS needs to have sent LCCH in slot 1 CS SYNC SYNC SUB PRIMARY Operates as a Secondary in normal circumstace PRIMARY Operates as a Secondary in normal circumstace Secondary Secondary CSI ...

Page 236: ...following order 1 CS having SYS ID specified as clock source 2 CS which has identical SYS ID and whose synchronization has been established If IP BS is unable to find CS using all of the above it starts running by itself while searching for CS of the spec ified SYS ID IP BS will synchronize the CS as soon as the search is successful SYNC SYNC PRIMARY Secondary SUB PRIMARY Internal PHE ...

Page 237: ...ssage waiting lamps by one unit A maximum of two unit can be connected per a system Note This BBU is unavailable for PIR B SPIR How to connect the BBU to the system 48V 48VR DC DC Converter on BBU 48V 48Vaux FG 48VR 80V connected to 80V on PIR1 PIR3 Power receiving terminal FG 48VR G 48V connectors REAR AC DC Power Unit 48V IN 80V OUT Note 1 Note 2 48VR G 48V AL1 AL2 80V 80VR G INPUT OUTPUT ޣ 2 4 ...

Page 238: ...emove the short piece SP PWR CA L before in serting the cable Note 2 The BBU can be installed in a maximum of two PIRs Note The consumption current for 80V is 0 5A and 0 88A for 48V Note A clear cover is attached on the BBU for an electrical shock guard Remove this cover before inserting the cables ...

Page 239: ...13 114 121 122 123 132 149 150 S6 DATE NOVEMBER 2012 Chapter 2 92 94 97 100 S6 DATE JULY 2012 Not Revised S6 DATE JUNE 2012 Chapter 1 37 Chapter 2 91 93 94 96 98 105 106 107 108 109 111 121 122 S5 DATE OCTOBER 2011 Chapter 2 107 S4 DATE MARCH 2011 Chapter 2 89 102 105 131 132 133 137 138 140 147 Chapter 3 168 S3 DATE AUGUST 2010 Chapter 2 107 109 S2E DATE FEBRUARY 2010 Chapter 2 108 109 S2 DATE JU...

Page 240: ...to Make Busy a CS 29 3 Zone Transceiver ZT 30 3 1 General 30 3 2 Installation Procedure 31 3 3 Cable Connection Diagram and Maximum Length 32 3 4 Installation of Zone Transceiver ZT 34 3 5 How to Make busy a ZT 40 4 Analog 2MC Analog Media Converter 41 4 1 General 41 4 1 1 Introduction 41 4 1 2 Specifications 47 4 1 3 Hardware Requirements 50 4 1 4 Service Conditions 50 4 2 Analog 2MC Installation...

Page 241: ... Basic Tests 126 5 3 1 Data Assignment by PCPro 127 5 3 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 131 5 3 3 Power On 132 5 3 4 Configuration Command Assignment 133 5 3 5 Cable Connection 142 5 3 6 Basic Test Procedures 143 5 4 Operation and Maintenance 145 5 4 1 How to Back Up and Restore Config Data by Serial Connection Local 145 5 4 2 How to Back Up and Restore Config Data by TFTP Conne...

Page 242: ...ssignment by PCPro 325 7 3 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 345 7 3 3 Power On 346 7 3 4 Configuration Command Assignment 347 7 3 5 Cable Connection 352 7 3 6 Basic Test Procedures 354 7 4 Operation and Maintenance 357 7 4 1 How to Use Maintenance Command 357 7 4 2 Error Messages 396 8 MCMG Card SCA 7COTA 397 8 1 General 397 8 1 1 What is MCMG 397 8 1 2 Function Overview 398 8 1 ...

Page 243: ...able Connection 562 9 3 6 Basic Test Procedures 564 9 4 Operation and Maintenance 567 9 4 1 How to Use Maintenance Command 567 9 4 2 Error Messages 613 10 MG COT Card SCA 6COTB 614 10 1 General 614 10 1 1 What is MG COT 614 10 1 2 Function Overview 615 10 1 3 Specifications 624 10 1 4 Requirements 632 10 1 5 Service Conditions 634 10 2 Installation 638 10 2 1 How to Set MG COT 638 10 2 2 Cable Con...

Page 244: ...re 752 11 7 Operation and Maintenance 759 11 7 1 How to Restore Config Data by Serial Connection Local Download 759 11 7 2 How to Upgrade Firmware by Serial Connection Local Download 761 11 7 3 How to Upgrading Firmware By FTP Remote Download 763 11 7 4 Operation of Configuration Command 766 11 7 5 Basic Command Entry 766 11 7 6 List of Command Used for Configuration Data 768 11 7 7 Error Message ...

Page 245: ...rnal PHI PRI 934 13 1 3 Signaling Flow 935 13 1 4 Function Overview of MG PRI PRA 936 13 1 5 Quality of Service QoS 937 13 1 6 Specifications 938 13 2 Installation 943 13 2 1 Mounting Location 943 13 2 2 Cable Connection 944 13 3 System Startup 945 13 3 1 Summary 945 13 3 2 Before Taking Procedures 945 13 3 3 Procedure Overview 948 13 3 4 Detailed Procedure 950 13 4 Operation and Maintenance 961 1...

Page 246: ...wnload 1075 14 4 5 How to Use Maintenance Command 1078 14 4 6 SETUP Command 1085 14 4 7 SET Command 1092 14 4 8 SHOW Command 1114 14 4 9 PING Command 1124 14 4 10 DELETE Command 1125 14 4 11 SAVE Command 1125 14 4 12 GET Command 1125 14 4 13 PUT Command 1126 14 4 14 REBOOT Command 1126 14 4 15 EXIT Command 1126 14 4 16 INITIAL Command 1127 14 4 17 Error Messages 1128 15 MG PRI 2M SCA 30PRIA MG 30P...

Page 247: ...IP 1251 16 1 2 Function Overview 1252 16 1 3 Specifications 1253 16 1 4 Requirements 1260 16 1 5 Service Conditions 1261 16 2 Installation 1265 16 2 1 How to Set MG T1 SIP 1265 16 2 2 Cable Connection 1266 16 3 Startup MG T1 SIP and Basic Tests 1270 16 3 1 Data Assignment by PCPro 1271 16 3 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 1277 16 3 3 Power ON 1278 16 3 4 Configuration Command As...

Page 248: ...llation Test 1468 18 3 1 Setting of Basic Assignment 1472 18 3 2 Setting of IP Address 1473 18 3 3 Setting of the Telephony Server Information 1474 18 3 4 Setting of SIP Server Data 1475 18 3 5 Setting of Pilot Number for MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ 1477 18 3 6 Operation Check 1479 18 4 Operation and Maintenance 1481 18 4 1 FAN Replacement 1482 18 5 Configuration Commands 1484 18 5 1 How to Use the Con...

Page 249: ...a Assignment by PCPro 1719 20 4 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 1720 20 4 3 Power ON 1721 20 4 4 Configuration Command Assignment 1722 20 4 5 Cable Connection 1724 20 4 6 Operation Check 1724 20 4 7 Diagnosis 1725 20 5 Maintenance Console Commands 1726 20 5 1 How to Use Maintenance Command 1726 20 5 2 How to Read Maintenance Command on This Section 1727 20 5 3 Error Messages on ...

Page 250: ...Maintenance Console 1870 22 4 3 Power ON 1871 22 4 4 Configuration Command Assignment 1872 22 4 5 Cable Connection 1878 22 4 6 Operation Check 1879 22 4 7 Trouble Shooting 1879 22 5 Maintenance Console Commands 1880 22 5 1 How to Use Maintenance Command 1880 22 5 2 How to Read Maintenance Command on This Section 1881 22 5 3 Error Messages on Maintenance Console 1944 23 VS 32 Conference Server 1945...

Page 251: ... 1 Part Names 2085 25 2 2 Details 2085 25 3 Installation 2090 25 3 1 Installing Procedure 2090 25 3 2 Cabling Procedure 2090 25 4 Startup 2092 25 5 Office Data Assignment 2097 25 6 Installation Test 2098 25 7 FAN Replacement 2101 25 8 Shutdown 2103 25 9 Version Upgrade 2105 25 10Remote Version Upgrade 2111 26 SR MGC S 2117 26 1 General 2118 26 2 Specifications 2119 26 2 1 Part Names 2119 26 2 2 De...

Page 252: ...on Test 2185 27 4 System Maintenance 2186 27 4 1 Fault Diagnosis 2186 27 4 2 Initialization of SR MGC 2187 27 4 3 Operation Mode Changeover 2187 27 4 4 Change of Switch Settings on CPU Board 2187 27 4 5 FAN Replacement Procedure 2188 27 5 Shutdown Procedure 2190 27 6 Version Upgrade Procedure 2191 27 6 1 Version Upgrade Procedure for SR T of SR MGC 2191 27 6 2 Version Upgrade Procedure for SR S of...

Page 253: ...VOL 2 xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTINUED Page ...

Page 254: ...b using cascade connection a maximum of four hubs are recommended for 10BASE T stack connection and a maximum of two hubs are recommended for 100BASE TX class2 stack con nection The table below lists recommended cables for connecting IP BS 10BASE T 100BASE TX Category Category 3 or higher Category 5 or higher Maximum Length 100 m 100 m Cable Type Straight through Cable Straight through Cable IP BS...

Page 255: ... the radio controlled plane cars Near the seashore where might suffer damage from salty breeze Plastic box is provided to give protection from the rains and salty breeze Reconsider to install in any other special location location where there is risk of explosion radio signal jam strong electromagnetism b Avoid to install in the wall made by the soil or to the board because it might fall down c Th...

Page 256: ...unting tab with the attached screws STEP 3 Mount the IP BS on the wall and slide it so that the two hooks of the tab may fix the unit tightly STEP 4 Remove the cover from the reverse side of the IP BS STEP 5 Set SW23R to the right when the switch is equipped on the back of IP BS Note 1 Note 1 SW23R may not be equipped depending on IP BS There is no difference in terms of functionality between IP B...

Page 257: ...ngle so that the antenna may be vertical with the ground Adjustment of Antenna STEP 13 Turn ON the power to the IP BS to confirm the lamp indications are normal LAMP INDICATION STATE REMARKS GREEN RED ON Normal ON Make Busy Cancel the make busy state AC adapter plug AC adapter jack ACV plug AC adapter IP BS AC adapter Voltage 15 V Current 1 2 A When mounting on a wall When mounting on a ceiling Wh...

Page 258: ... BS301 Flash Faulty Need to be repaired OFF OFF Power OFF Check the connections of cables and the AC adapter if used Flash Speech channels are all busy Please wait for a while LAMP INDICATION STATE REMARKS GREEN RED ...

Page 259: ...ke note in the following when making busy IP BS by using MBNCSL MBNCSN command IP BS indicated as Master Synchronization or Master on Autonomous on COCS6L COCS6N command is operating as an IP BS synchronization source If the Primary IP BS or Sub Primary IP BS is placed in make busy state all IP BS that are synchronizing with the Primary or Sub Primary IP BS will become inoperative When you want to...

Page 260: ... use one of the following Login To make a connection activate communication software such as telnet in the PC and specify IP ad dress and port number The ways of specifying port number and IP address depend on the software to be used Example IP Address 192 168 0 100 Note 1 Port Number 5000 Note 1 192 168 0 100 is default IP address Enter a password Note 1 in the following message The entered passw...

Page 261: ...displayed by using show ipadr command Please take notes for the IP address and the MAC address attached on back of IP BS These items are necessary when to change the data If IP address is unknown do the following Enter arp a in command prompt to show a list of available terminals If the appropriate one is not listed make sure the related cables are physically connected If the cables are connected ...

Page 262: ...on of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual IP Address of Primary DRS Command set drspip Example Primary DRS IP Address is 10 41 207 30 When IP BS receives the settings successfully set done message is displayed This specified settings can be displayed by using show drspip command Port Number of DRS Command set drsudp Example DRS Port Number is 3457 When IP BS receives the set...

Page 263: ...hn dnsip dnsdn Example Hostname bcd01 IP Address of DNS 10 41 207 100 Domain Name bcd abk When IP BS receives the settings successfully set done message is displayed This specified settings can be displayed by using show dnshn show dnsip and show dnsdn commands To delete the setting enter for the host name or domain name and enter 0 0 0 0 for the IP address See the following ex ample 5 Write the s...

Page 264: ...tings successfully set done message is displayed This specified settings can be displayed by using show vlan command To delete the setting enter 0 for the VLAN ID and Priority VLAN ON OFF Command set vlansw on When IP BS receives the settings successfully set done message is displayed This specified settings can be displayed by using show vlansw command To set vlan disabled use set vlansw off rebo...

Page 265: ...t Gateway 10 41 207 254 IP Address of DRS 10 41 207 30 Note 1 Note 1 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual telnet 192 168 0 100 5000 Connecting Please Input Password IPBS Connect OK set dhcp off set done set ipadr 10 41 207 20 255 255 255 0 set done set dgw 10 41 207 254 set done set drsip 10 41 207 ...

Page 266: ...cuit card into a proper slot of PIR for connecting CS For more information about CSINT circuit card refer to the Circuit Card Description When the CS is connected to a vacant port of the existing CSINT card this step is not necessary STEP 3 Terminate the installation cables to the MDF and the modular blocks STEP 4 Check the terminal locations on the MDF To identify the lead names and the lead s te...

Page 267: ...the specification of modular plug that is used for the connection to CS RJ 45 modular plug Diameter 0 4 φ 0 5 φ 0 65 φ 0 9 φ Distance No arrestor 260 m 435 m 740 m 1400 m 853 ft 1427 ft 2428 ft 4593 ft Diameter 0 4 φ 0 5 φ 0 65 φ 0 9 φ Distance No arrestor 560 m 960 m 1280 m 2080 m 1837 ft 3149 ft 4199 ft 6824 ft TERMINAL NUMBER TERMINAL NUMBER FUNCTION POLARITY CSINT TERMINAL TERMINAL EQUIPMENT C...

Page 268: ...n cable SWVP50 lead MDF Note 1 No 1 No 3 No 0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 No 0 No 1 No 2 No 3 RB0 TB0 RB1 TB1 RB2 TB2 RB3 TB3 RA0 TA0 RA1 TA1 RA2 TA2 RA3 TA3 TB RB RA TA RB RA TB TA RB TB TA RA 3 4 5 6 TB RB Modular rosette eg MJ 8S CS CSINT LT cable Champ connector lead Note 2 RA TA MD...

Page 269: ...NG 049251 000 BS21 CABLE Note By ordering a BS21 ID ND BS21A ID ND also attached to is a single 4 wire pressure welding connector color blue If more connector is necessary arrange the following 18 additional connectors as a set color all black Product Name 232D 04S1B DA5 18 Diameter 0 4 φ 0 5 φ 0 65 φ 0 9 φ Distance No arrestor 500 m 800 m 1350 m 2400 m 1641 ft 2624 ft 4429 ft 7874 ft Diameter 0 4...

Page 270: ...tic Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PIR LT Back board P Installation cable SWVP50 lead MDF Note 1 No 1 No 7 No 0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 No 1 No 3 No 5 No 7 No 0 No 2 No 4 No 6 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 3 B B A A A B 6 Modular rosette eg MJ 8S CS CSINT ...

Page 271: ... Make sure terminal numbers 1 and 4 are con nected Note User can arrange an optional cable for conversion from RJ 45 modular plug to 4 wire pressure welding connector Product Name NG 049251 000 BS21 CABLE Note By ordering a BS31A BS41 also attached to is a single 4 wire pressure welding connector color blue If more connector is necessary arrange the following 18 additional connectors as a set colo...

Page 272: ...ting location so as to mark the locations of screw holes When drilling holes the diameter and depth should be as follows Diameter φ 3 0 3 2 Depth 20mm 0 8 inch Dimension Drawing of Mounting Tag STEP 2 Mount the mounting tag securing with the attached screws 124 2 240 2 Unit mm 14 2 0 8 Nail for CS Backside Slit Nail for CS Backside Slit Mounting Tag ...

Page 273: ... also used for the adjacent CS the adapter jack OUT is used for the adjacent CS Cable for the adjacent CS must be provided by the installer Power feeding to a maximum of two CSs are available for one AC adapter AC Adapter STEP 4 On the backside of the CS two slits are provided Using these slits hang up the CS onto the mounting tag Then secure it with a screw after removing the cover of power switc...

Page 274: ...adjustment of the antennas is necessary The angle of the antenna ranges within 0 to 90 at every 30 degree intervals as illustrated When adjusting the antennas set both antennas at the same angle In the case of standard wall mount installation set the antennas at an angle of 0 so that the antennas may be placed at a right angle to the radio zone Since the antennas are designed so as to be locked at...

Page 275: ...he mounting tag using three screws as shown below When drilling holes the diameter and depth should be as follows Diameter φ 3 0 3 2 Depth 20mm 0 8 inch 2 Mount the CS on the mounting tag and secure the CS using the screw for CS Mounting of the CS Wall Mounting tag Screw for the mounting Screw for CS CS ...

Page 276: ...If power feeding from the Telephony Server is not available use the AC adapter for local power feed ing The AC adapter is connected to the CS as shown below Local Power Feeding CS AC adaptor plug AC adaptor jack AC100V plug AC adaptor ...

Page 277: ...the power to the CS to confirm the lamp indications are normal LAMP INDICATION STATE REMARKS GREEN RED ON Normal ON Make Busy Cancel the make busy state Flash Faulty Need to be repaired OFF OFF Power OFF Check the connections of cables and the AC adapter if used Flash Speech channels are all busy Please wait for a while When mounting on a wall When mounting on a ceiling When mounting behind a ceil...

Page 278: ...CSINT card to perform make busy on a CSINT card basis Disconnect the line cable from the CS that is set make busy In the following cases PS using the CS and the counter party hear momentary noise Be sure to make busy the CS before performing CSINT and CS maintenance work When performing CSINT card make busy operation When disconnecting the cable between a CSINT card and the CS ...

Page 279: ... three screws as shown below When drilling holes the diameter and depth should be as follows Diameter φ 3 0 3 2 Depth 20mm 0 8 inch 2 Mount the CS on the mounting tag and secure the CS using the screw for CS Mounting of the CS Mounting Tab Screw for the CS Screw for the mounting 78 75mm CS ...

Page 280: ...use the AC adapter for local power feeding Remove the cover from the reverse side of the CS 2 The AC adapter and LINE cable are connected to the CS as shown below Local Power Feeding 3 Attach the removed cover again AC adapter plug AC adapter jack AC100V plug AC adapter CS AC adapter LINE cable ...

Page 281: ...er to the CS to confirm the lamp indications are normal LAMP INDICATION STATE REMARKS POWER STATUS Green Green Normal Green Red Make Busy Cancel the make busy state Green Flash Red Faulty Need to be repaired OFF OFF Power OFF Check the connections of cables Green Flash Green Speech channels are all busy Please wait for a while When mounting on a wall When mounting on a ceiling When mounting behind...

Page 282: ...NT card to perform make busy on a CSINT card basis Disconnect the line cable from the CS that is set make busy In the following cases PS using the CS and the counter party hear momentary noise Be sure to make busy the CS before performing CSINT and CS maintenance work When performing CSINT card make busy operation When disconnecting the cable between a CSINT card and the CS ...

Page 283: ...one Transceiver as an example A maximum three Personal Stations PS can be simultaneously accessed to a ZT Zone Transceiver Outerview Interface Circuit Cards The following circuit card can be used for connecting ZT to the system Circuit Card 2W 4W Remarks PA 8CSIE 2W U Interface PS PS PS 2 Wired Zone Transceiver U Interface ZTII ZTII S S Interface ZTII U U Interface ...

Page 284: ... the Circuit Card Description When the CS is connected to a vacant port of the existing CSINT card this step is not necessary STEP 3 Terminate the installation cables to the MDF and the modular blocks STEP 4 Check the terminal locations on the MDF To identify the lead names and the lead s terminal locations refer to LT Connector Lead Accommodation of the circuit card in the Circuit Card Descriptio...

Page 285: ... 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 No 0 No 1 No 2 No 3 RB0 TB0 RB1 TB1 RB2 TB2 RB3 TB3 RA0 TA0 RA1 TA1 RA2 TA2 RA3 TA3 CSINT LT cable Champ connector lead TB RB RA TA MDF ZTII TB RB TA RA Modular rosette eg RJ 45 Modular plug ZTII ZTII S Note 2 Confirm that the electric potential be tween TA TB and RA RB feed ...

Page 286: ...arrester Note The connection of the connector lead depends on the mounting location of the CSINT circuit card For de tails refer to the Circuit Card Description Diameter 26 AWG 0 4φ 24 AWG 0 5φ 22 AWG 0 65φ 19 AWG 0 9φ Distance 762 meters 1219 meters 1676 meters 2438 meters 2500 feet 4000 feet 5500 feet 8000 feet Diameter 26 AWG 0 4φ 24 AWG 0 5φ 22 AWG 0 65φ 19 AWG 0 9φ Distance 548 meters 883 met...

Page 287: ...t cannot sustain the weight of ZT e g a plaster wall plywood wall ii Make sufficient space so that the antenna can be placed at any angle iii When mounting a ZT on a wall that contains a reinforcing bar near the mounting location place the antenna at an angle with the wall to make a space between the antenna and the reinforced bar ZT Mounting Example i ii iii plaster wall Reinforcing Bar ...

Page 288: ...sition Leave a space more than 4 3 inches 110 millimeters for the antenna Dimension Drawing for ZT Installation 1 2 STEP 3 Secure the furnished screws to the marked locations In this instance for the lower mounting screw hole select either of the mounting options depending on the mounting location Leave a space more than 4 3 in 110 mm for the antenna 4 2 107 Screw of the mounting tag Screw of ZT 4...

Page 289: ...VOL 2 36 Zone Transceiver ZT Dimension Drawing for ZT Installation 2 2 0 2 5 0 5 12 2 4 60 0 08 2 0 3 8 0 2 5 Front 0 9 22 5 4 9 124 4 2 2 54 0 5 13 5 0 4 10 3 1 78 75 0 8 21 0 08 2 0 3 8 inches mm ...

Page 290: ...rews fix the ZT tightly Mounting of the ZT STEP 5 If power feeding from the Telephony Server is impossible use the AC adapter for local power feeding The AC adapter is connected to the ZT as shown below Local Power Feeding Use either of two screws WALL Screw Connector cover Rear Modular jack DC in jack ...

Page 291: ... when the power is supplied STATUS OFF Line is not open LIT Theflickercycleis 0 1 seconds ZT does not stand by LIT The light cycle is 1 8 seconds All ZT lines are busy LIT Theflickercycleis 0 2 seconds by standard The number of ZT line used The number of flicker indicates the number of ZT line used Lamp Time 0 2s Lamp Time 0 2s Lamp Time 0 2s Lamp Time 0 2s Lamp 1 line used 2 lines used 3 lines us...

Page 292: ...VOL 2 39 Zone Transceiver ZT LEDs on the Zone Transceiver POWER STATUS Power lamp Status lamp ...

Page 293: ...w to Make busy a ZT Observe the following procedure to make busy a ZT Use MBCSL MBCSN to make busy an individual line Use the MB key on the CSINT card to perform make busy on a CSINT card basis Disconnect the line cable from the ZT that is set make busy In the following cases PS using the ZT and the counter party hear momentary noise Be sure to make busy the ZT before performing CSINT and ZT maint...

Page 294: ...ular jacks for legacy terminal connection The MC connected terminals Note 1 promote a call by directly sending the conventional Media Voice Fax Data to the MC The MC side embeds the media in the IP packets that are sent to the destination terminal on the LAN The call control signals between the Telephony Server and MC are sent received on a different route via the Protocol Handler PHE The PHE func...

Page 295: ...mIP MC to IPPAD etc as described in Position of Analog 2MC within the System Basic Connection as a Peer to Peer Connection This connection is a direct connection between IP ter minals devices with each other without the control of the Telephony Server Note 2 A TFTP server is necessary for file download For details refer to How to Use Maintenance Command in 4 4 PH to control this operation Signalin...

Page 296: ...ection CCIS Network The figure below shows a network configuration example using CCIS over IP For details on CCIS over IP refer to the Data Programming Manual CCIS Position of Analog 2MC within the System Node to Node Connection Analog Telephones Analog 2MC Analog 2MC Analog Telephones PH to control this operation Telephony Server IP Network Telephony Server Voice Data Peer to Peer Signaling Contr...

Page 297: ...tting VLAN to each MC terminal by the maintenance command is required see Data Assignment by PCPro in 4 3 and How to Use Main tenance Command in 4 4 VLAN Example shows an example network configuration when an Analog 2MC is used in VLAN VLAN Example Note For detailed explanation of the VLAN feature refer to the Data Programming Manual VLAN data can be set from the maintenance terminal by using main...

Page 298: ...om the IP network and also whether voice compression device is accommodated The figure below shows a network configuration example Note For detailed procedure and data assignment for Fax connections refer to I 44 IP Control FAX service in Data Programming Manual MC MC connection and MC LC connection via IPPAD including CCIS FAX communication within self node FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX Analog 2MC Analog 2...

Page 299: ... G 711 or ADPCM G 726 is recommended MC Trunk connection via IPPAD excluding CCIS over IP MC Trunk in destination node connection via IPPAD through CCIS complies with the FAX connection type assigned to the Internal PHC COT PRT BRT DTI TLT ODT FAX FAX Analog 2MC PSTN Private Network IP Network IP PAD Internal PHC Internal PHE G 711 or ADPCM G 726 is recommended PH to control this operation ...

Page 300: ...e for connecting a PC 4 1 2 Specifications The specifications for Analog 2MC are listed in the table below Analog 2MC Specifications FUNCTION SPECIFICATION NOTE Input Power AC 100 240 V Internal power is generated from DC 48V to each power supply Maximum Power Consumption Rated value AC100V 0 6A AC120V 0 5A AC240V 0 3 A Voice CODEC G 711 64 k bps PCM µ law A law G 729a 8 k bps CS ACELP G 723 1 6 3...

Page 301: ...alog 2MC is not supported Control Protocol LP PM over IP Signaling between Analog 2MC and Internal PHE H 323 standard Jitter Buffer Static 10 300 milliseconds assignable in increments of 10 millisecond Dynamic 10 300 milliseconds Quality of Service QoS ToS IP Precedence DiffServ IP Address Assignment DHCP is supported Operation Maintenance Program download Console Connecting through RS 232C Cable ...

Page 302: ...ault value analog LAN 0 dB LAN analog 3 dB FAX PAD for data transmission as voice data 0 15 dB One dB step FAX PAD value is added to Voice PAD The sum of FAX PAD and Voice PAD is limited to 15 dB Default value analog LAN 0 dB LAN analog 4 dB Stutter Dial Tone Supported Polarity Reverse Supported Momentary Open Supported Switch setting is required Howler PCM Howler Hooking Flash Detection Supported...

Page 303: ...ported Cables LAN Cable Use any of the following cables for connecting to LAN 10BASE T Unshielded Twisted pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 3 or higher a maximum of 100 m 100BASE TX Unshielded Twisted pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100 m Modular Cable For the connection between an analog terminal and an MC use a Modular Cable with an RJ 11 Modular Jack Ser...

Page 304: ...each IP client Internal PHE uses UDP IP packet that ALOCL command assigns to LOC ID 0 6 VLAN function is not available for Internal PHE To set up VLAN use network equipment 7 Internal PHE can control up to 6144 ports Note The above maximum port number is the same as maximum capacity of a system 8 Use ALIDL command for Internal PHE data assignment This assignment require a group regardless its maxi...

Page 305: ...cation This section shows how to install the hardware required for Analog 2MC 4 2 2 How to Set Analog 2MC Analog 2MC can be installed in one of two ways horizontal or vertical setting F Desktop horizontal setting Analog 2MC Horizontal Setting MC 2A PWR ON LINE LINK 100M OPERATION Tx Rx 0 1 ...

Page 306: ...VOL 2 53 Analog 2MC Analog Media Converter F Desktop vertical setting with stand Analog 2MC Vertical Setting with Stand Use four screws on the stand ...

Page 307: ...nnection Analog 0 Analog 1 RS 232C POWER AC IN Ether Analog 2MC Rear View Analog Telephone FAX Maintenance Console PC LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX Switch LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX Telephony Server 8 Not Used 7 Not Used 6 RD 5 Not Used 4 Not Used 3 RD 2 TD 1 TD RJ 45 Connector Pin Assignment 4 Not Used 3 A 2 B 1 Not Used RJ 11 Connector Pin Assignment D Sub 9 Pin Straight through Cable DtermIP...

Page 308: ...Figure below Specifications Specifications of the gas tube arrester for analog line to be provided are as follows PARAMETER SPECIFICATIONS Nominal DC sparkover voltage 204V 276V 100V S 1mA DC200V Impulse sparkover voltage 300V 10 1000μs Nominal discharge current 100A 10 1000μs Nominal decoupling resistance 26 ohm max System Analog 2MC R T To Analog Telephone Set OFF PREMISE G Modular Rosette GAS T...

Page 309: ...og 2MC On the right side of an Analog 2MC a slide switch is provided to select an Operation Mode Push either of the switches according to system requirements Left front Reverse Right back Momentary Open Note Both modes correspond to two analog ports Analog 2MC Side View Front Back Slide Switch ...

Page 310: ...by PCPro 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 3 Power ON 1 Selection whether to use DHCP server 2 Network Data Assignment STEP 4 Configuration Command Assignment 1 Connection between MC MG and LAN STEP 5 Cable Connection 1 Basic Connection Test 2 A...

Page 311: ...s Code ACC for station access by using the combination of ANPD and ASPA com mands 1st DC Assign the 1st DC of the station numbers NND Assign the total station number digits ASPA Assignment of Special Access Code ACC Assign the access code using the 1st DC specified by the ANPD command AISTL Assignment of IP Station Data LDM Assign the IP Station Data of each analog terminal connected to Analog 2MC...

Page 312: ...30 300 ms is applied when the check box is not clicked Setting of Type of Service Voice Packet Click the check box to assign the ToS data for voice packet IP Precedence DiffServ Select either of the radio buttons When IP Precedence is selected Precedence Specify the precedence in the range of 0 7 low high Low Delay Place a check mark to set Low Delay to ON Through Put Place a check mark to set Hig...

Page 313: ... Peripheral Equipment Description Volume 1 Chap ter 2 3 1 1 Bandwidth Required for Voice Traffic Setting of PAD Click the check box to assign the PAD data manually If not checked default value 0 is applied KIND2 Specify the PAD value of Analog 2MC in the range of 0 3 No PAD control determined by ASYD SYS1 INDEX 4 bit5 5 dB PAD PAD OFF 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB KIND3 Specify the PAD No of IPPAD in the range o...

Page 314: ... on the Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Re...

Page 315: ...MC STEP 2 Make sure the LED indicate normal status PWR lamp lights green Boot program automatically starts ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required REAR Analog 0 Analog 1 RS 232C POWER AC IN Ether Turn ON the power switch UP Terminal Software MC 2A PWR ON LINE OPERATION Tx Rx LINK 100M 0 1 PWR lamp ...

Page 316: ...re information about pro cedure for the command operation refer to 4 4 5 How to Use Maintenance Command Note DRS Device Registration Server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server The Telephony Server acts as DRS for Analog 2MC using Proprietary Protocol There are two ways to set the network data When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used ...

Page 317: ...Assign other data to be changed from the default such as PAD value 3 Save the data change to the Flash ROM SAVE CONFIGDATA 4 Reboot the MC REBOOT 5 Exit from the maintenance command Note 1 Check the number of IP addresses saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of MC any time Note 2 Assign DHCP option on DHCP server as follows Name Not specified but do not enter the same option ...

Page 318: ...Assign Default Gateway address of MC SET DEFAULTROUTE x x x x 4 Assign IP Address and Port Number of DRS SET DRSADDRESS Note 1 5 Assign other data to be changed from the default such as PAD value 6 Save the data change to the Flash ROM SAVE CONFIGDATA 7 Reboot the MC REBOOT 8 Exit from the maintenance command Note 1 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP D...

Page 319: ...to check the following Is there other device having the same IP address overlapped Is the new IP address assigned correct STEP 2 Check the lamp indication on the front panel of Analog 2MC PWR lamp lights green ON LINE lamp lights green ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required to LAN REAR Analog 0 Analog 1 RS 232C POWER AC IN Ether Ether connector RJ 45 pin assignment S S R...

Page 320: ...n established Initial setting between MC and Telephony Server is started MC starts operating normally Is the Power Cable firmly connected Is the Power Switch turned ON The MC may not be physically connected to the LAN Check the LAN Cable between the MC and Network Device Use a LAN Cable straight through Test the continuity in the LAN Cable Make sure the network device SW HUB or Router is turned ON...

Page 321: ...al setting has not been completed OPERATION 0 Green Lights when Line 0 is busy Flash Flashes when Line 0 is in Make busy State or Station Data has not been assigned OFF Remains OFF when Line 0 is idle When unable to originate a call check the following items Is the Station Data assigned correctly Re assign the station data by PCPro commands AISTL ARSC ATNR etc if required Is the Modular Cable betw...

Page 322: ...ng receiving IP Packet between MC and the Telephony Server while establishing the connection or between MC and dis tant terminal during a call OFF Remains OFF when there is no IP Packet sent received LINK Green Lights when establishing Layer 1 Link a physical connection with the IP Network OFF Layer 1 Link is not established 100M Green Lights when transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Remains OFF whe...

Page 323: ...ff Analog 2MC and disconnect it from the network STEP 2 Connect PC to Analog 2MC by using RS 232C cable STEP 3 Power on Analog 2MC STEP 4 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 5 Select Transfer Capture File STEP 6 Send File screen is displayed Specify a file name to be saved and then click the Start butto...

Page 324: ... For more information refer to the appropriate manual at tached to the TFTP server program Data Assignment on Serial Console STEP 7 Power on Analog 2MC STEP 8 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 9 After a prompt is displayed enter usrConsole STEP 10 After a prompt 2A MC is displayed enter get configdata...

Page 325: ...d from TFTP server save it by entering save config and reboot Analog 2MC by entering reboot STEP 13 Exit the HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit Confirmation of Analog 2MC STEP 14 Connect the Analog 2MC to the network STEP 15 Confirm that Analog 2MC is normally registered in system after reboot Use the DISD FPTS commands in PCPro For more information refer to the Command Manual STEP 16 Check that...

Page 326: ...nfiguration data STEP 2 Start the TFTP server program STEP 3 Assign the folder as root folder and then permit write and read behavior of this directory For more information refer to the appropriate manual attached to the TFTP server program Data Assignment on PCPro STEP 4 To search for the LENS of the target Analog 2MC use the IPAN command IP Network MC 2A MC 2A PWR ON LINE LINK 100M OPERATION Tx ...

Page 327: ... them as you like STEP 6 After completing the above click the Set button Data Assignment on Telnet PC STEP 7 Start a command prompt and enter telnet Analog 2MC s IP Address to con nect Analog 2MC via Telnet STEP 8 Log in to the target Analog 2MC by entering the userID and the password which are set in the AUTD command STEP 9 After a prompt is displayed enter usrConsole STEP 10 After a prompt 2A MC...

Page 328: ...are required for logging in Analog 2MC via Telnet Input any letter for USER LEVEL because Analog 2MC does not use USERLEVEL For VALID TIME input a total of time required for completing this procedures Note A user ID and a password are temporary ones for download you can specify them as you like STEP 6 After completing the above click the Set button Data Assignment on Telnet PC STEP 7 Start a comma...

Page 329: ...uccessfully completed is displayed in the command prompt indicating the upload to TFTP server is completed normally STEP 12 To reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from TFTP server save it by entering save config and reboot Analog 2MC by entering reboot STEP 13 Exit the HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit Confirmation of Analog 2MC STEP 14 Confirm that Analog 2MC is normally register...

Page 330: ...g 2MC with LAN connector and RS 232C cable both STEP 3 Put the firmware file for upgrade in the root folder of TFTP server Note The following files have to be located in the root folder MC 2A MC 2A PWR ON LINE LINK 100M OPERATION Tx Rx 0 1 Serial Console TFTP Server IP Address 10 41 1 250 Analog 2MC Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 TFTP server and Serial Console both can be used by single Personal Computer RS...

Page 331: ...P 13 Make sure correct IP addresses are set in TFTP server and Analog 2MC And then input y STEP 14 Program download menu is displayed Input 0 to download main program Main program is downloaded and written into Flash ROM After that system will reboot au tomatically STEP 15 At the moment that boot programming is starting Starting 2AMC boot pro gram press the ESC key STEP 16 The boot mode main menu ...

Page 332: ...he upgraded firmware make a call to the Analog 2MC Check that you can hear RBT STEP 25 Receive a call via the Analog 2MC and confirm that you can talk to each other STEP 26 After all the tasks are completed write down label the firmware version in the back of the Analog 2MC For example 2A is indicated for Version 2 3A is indicated for Version 3 ...

Page 333: ...FTP Server STEP 1 Put the firmware file for upgrade in the root folder of FTP server and then start the FTP server program Note The following files have to be located in the root folder IP Network MC 2A MC 2A PWR ON LINE LINK 100M OPERATION Tx Rx 0 1 TFTP Server PCPro SYSTEM Analog 2MC 3 Download firmware via TFTP Firmware 2 Make environment setting for firmware upgrade 1 Make environment setting ...

Page 334: ... box To avoid setting upgrade task to the target Analog 2MC twice select either one of the two channels used in the Analog 2MC by checking LENS STEP 7 Click the Close button to go back to the main screen STEP 8 Click the Exe button to upgrade the firmware to the target Analog 2MCs Upgrade is succeeded is displayed Note that version information in the screen is not updat ed at this time If the upgr...

Page 335: ...bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None 3 Enter usrConsole after the prompt Then the following prompt appears 2A MC _ Machine Name default Something similar to the following is displayed when Analog 2MC is turned on MC ID 00004c323232 Starting 2A MC boot program Online start wait 30sec Attached TCP IP interface to axDev unit 0 Attaching network interface lo0 done NFS client suppor...

Page 336: ...lue 11 HEALTHCHECKTIMER Setting health check timer value 12 INTERFACE Setting communication speed for LAN interface 13 IPADDRESS Setting IP Address and Subnet Mask Note 1 14 MUSICTYPE Setting Music on Hold 15 OPEN Setting Open Reverse 16 PAD Setting default receiver PAD value Note 1 17 PRERINGING Setting Pre Ringing 18 RINGFREQ Setting frequency of Ringer 19 RINGVOLTAGE Setting Ringer Voltage 20 S...

Page 337: ...ERFACE To show communication speed for LAN interface 12 IPADDRESS To show IP Address 13 MUSICTYPE To show Music on Hold type 14 OPEN To show Open Reverse 15 PAD To show default receiver PAD value 16 PRERINGING To show Pre Ringing 17 RINGFREQ To show the frequency of Ringer 18 RINGVOLTAGE To show Ringer Voltage 19 SENDPAD To show default sender PAD value 20 STARTPORT To show RTP Start Port 21 STUTT...

Page 338: ... request to list up the Target Help by entering command name or command name sub command name and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when requesting a list of SET commands 2A MC set BURSTPATTERN Setting Burst Ringer Pattern CHANNELATTRIBUTE Setting circuit attribute COUNTRYCODE Setting country code DEFAULTROUTE Setting Default Gateway DHCP Setting DHCP DRSADDRESS Setting DRS Ad...

Page 339: ... the following 1 0 35 seconds ON 0 3 seconds OFF 0 35 sec onds ON default 2 0 4 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 4 seconds ON 3 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 4 0 2 seconds ON 0 4 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 5 0 25 seconds ON 0 25 seconds OFF 2A MC SET BURSTPATTERN 5 Burst Ringer Pattern setting succeed ed 2A MC _ Line 1 Enter the Channel Nu...

Page 340: ... restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter Default Gateway Address Line 2 Result is shown 2A MC SET DEFAULTROUTE 10 4 128 254 The default gateway setting succeeded 2A MC _ Line 1 Enter ENABLE or DISABLE after the command name ENABLE DHCP is valid default DISABLE DHCP is invalid Line 2 Result is shown 2A MC SET DHCP ENABLE DHCP setting succeeded 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 Select wheth...

Page 341: ...cedence 0 7 low high default 6 Line 3 Delay 0 1 Normal default Low Delay ON Line 4 Throughput 0 1 Normal default High Throughput ON Line 5 Reliability 0 1 Normal default High Reliability ON Line 6 Cost 0 1 Normal default Cost Precedence ON Line 7 Result is shown 2A MC SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 DELAY 0 1 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 RELIABILITY 0 1 0 COST 0 1 0 DRS TOS setting succeeded 0xC0 2A ...

Page 342: ...etected Note The total PAD value Sender PAD Fax Sender PAD is limited to 15dB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter the Change Effective Timer 0 Invalid to change to Fax mode 1 5 Possible to change to Fax mode within 1 5 minutes default 1 minute OFF Always possible to change to Fax mode Line 2 Result is shown 2A...

Page 343: ...mmand and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Note The designated IP address cannot be applied when the DHCP is set to ENABLE Assign the DHCP setting to DISABLE before performing this IP address assignment Line 1 Enter the timer value in the range of 120 300 after the command name default 120 Line 2 Result is shown 2A MC SET HEALTHCHECKTIMER 120 Health check timer setting succeeded 2A ...

Page 344: ... in the receiver IP to analog terminal direc tion Line 1 Select the Music on Hold type in the range of 1 4 1 Minuet default 2 Nocturne 3 Maiden s Prayer 4 For Elise Line 2 Result is shown 2A MC SET MUSICTYPE 1 Music on Hold setting succeeded 2A MC _ Line 1 Enter ON or OFF after the command name ON Open valid Reverse invalid OFF Open invalid Reverse valid default Line 2 Result is shown 2A MC SET OP...

Page 345: ...ncoming call indication lamp set the Ringer Voltage to 75 Vrms to support the lamp of a neon type Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter ON or OFF ON Pre Ringing is valid default OFF Pre Ringing is invalid Line 2 Result is shown 2A MC SET PRERINGING ON Pre ringing setting succeeded 2A MC _ Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 to ...

Page 346: ...e com mand 22 Setting Stutter Dial Tone Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter the PAD value in the range of 0 15 after the command name default 0 Line 2 Result is shown 2A MC SET SENDPAD 0 Default Sender PAD setting succeeded 2A MC _ Line 1 Enter the number of RTP Start Port in the range of 1024 65534 default 10...

Page 347: ...nce com mand COUNTRY BNW SET TING VALUE KIND OF BNW North America countries applying µ law interface 0 600Ω 1 350 1K 0 21µ Australia 0 600Ω 1 220 820 120n China 0 220 560 100n 1 220 560 100n Brazil 0 800 50n 1 900Ω countries applying A law interface 0 600Ω 1 350 1K 0 21µ Line 1 Enter ON or OFF whether the ringer of both channels ring simultaneously or not ON Ringer timing synchronizes OFF Ringer t...

Page 348: ...s 10 10 10 1 Existing LAN IP Address 0 0 0 0 Set to disabled because the IP address of existing LAN is not used Default Gateway 10 10 10 254 DRS Address 10 41 207 217 Line 3 Enter the VLAN_ID in the range of 1 4095 VLAN_ID 1 is standard setting Line 4 Enter the COS Priority in the range of 0 7 5 is recommended Line 5 Enter the IP Address of VLAN Line 6 Enter the Subnet Mask of VLAN Line 7 Line 8 S...

Page 349: ... assigned data to Flash ROM Reboot the MC to make the setting effective usrConsole 2A MC Maintenance command Version 1 00 2001 07 19 2A MC SET DHCP DISABLE DHCP setting succeeded Setting IP Address is required 2A MC SET VLAN Please enter a parameter VLAN_ID 5 COS 3 IP Address 10 10 10 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 VLAN device setting complete 2A MC SET IPADDRESS 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 IP address se...

Page 350: ...et the routing table is overlapped and the operation may go wrong Activate the usrConsole Set IP address and Subnet Mask of existing LAN If existing LAN is not used enter 0 0 0 0 to the IP address Activate the VLAN setting command Enter the parameters VLAN_ID 5 Priority COS 3 IP Address of VLAN 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask of VLAN 0 0 0 0 Enable DHCP Save the assigned data to Flash ROM Reboot the MC to mak...

Page 351: ... is activated via the existing LAN because the Telephony Server acknowledges the MC s IP address in the existing LAN side Be sure to assign the IP address of either VLAN or existing LAN Never use the both IP addresses simultaneously Note 1 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual ...

Page 352: ...r the Channel Number after the Command Name Line 2 Circuit Number Line 3 The current setting of designated circuit is shown When Circuit Number is not specified the infor mation of both circuits is shown 2A MC SHOW CHANNELATTRIBUTE 0 Circuit number 0 NLP is ON 2A MC SHOW CHANNELATTRIBUTE Circuit number 0 NLP is ON Circuit number 1 NLP is ON 2A MC_ Line 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown Line 3 ...

Page 353: ...ddress and Port Number is shown Note 1 Line 3 Enter 1 Primary DRS or 2 Secondary DRS after the command name to show either data if not specified both data are shown 2A MC SHOW DRSADDRESS Primary DRS Address 10 41 1 100 Port 3456 Secondary DRS Address 10 41 1 101 Port 3457 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 2A MC SHOW DRSTOS DRS TOS is 0xC0 PRECEDE...

Page 354: ... IP Address Net Mask and Default Gateway Line 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown Line 3 2A MC SHOW FAXSENDPAD FAX Sender PAD is 0 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown Line 3 2A MC SHOW HEALTHCHECKTIMER Health check timer is 120 sec 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown Line 3 2A MC SHOW INTERFACE axDev0 Ethernet Speed AUTO 2A MC _ Line 1 Enter the interface name only ...

Page 355: ...ine 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown Line 3 2A MC SHOW MUSICTYPE Music on hold type is 1 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown Line 3 2A MC SHOW OPEN Open is ON Reverse is OFF 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown Line 3 2A MC SHOW PAD Default Receiver PAD is 3 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 Registered setting is shown Line 3 2A MC SHOW PRERINGING Pre Ringing is ON 2A MC _ Li...

Page 356: ...ow Synchronous Ringing Line 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown 2A MC SHOW RINGVOLTAGE Voltage of ringer is 75Vrms 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown Line 3 2A MC SHOW SENDPAD Default Sender PAD is 0 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 The current setting is shown Line 3 2A MC SHOW STARTPORT Number of RTP start port is 1024 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 Registered setting is shown Line 3 2A MC SHOW ST...

Page 357: ...tively 2A MC SHOW VERSION 2A MC Maintenance command Version 1 00 2001 07 01 By NEC Version information Hardware PZ CC152 2A Boot program SP 3651 01 00 Firmware SP 3629 01 00 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 The current VLAN setting is shown If VLAN_ID is not specified the setting of all the registered VLAN_IDs is to be listed Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 When specifying the VLAN_ID 1 4095 only the requ...

Page 358: ...y the deleted data immediately Line 4 Result is shown 2A MC DELETE VLAN 1 VLAN device remove complete Is this setup made to reflect immediately Y N Y VLAN device delete complete 2A MC _ Line 1 Line 2 Select either Y or N Line 3 When Y is selected Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Result is shown Line 1 Line 2 When N is selected Line 3 Result is shown Line 4 2A MC SAVE CONFIGDATA May I save N Y Y ...

Page 359: ...of TFTP Server after the Command Name Line 2 Result is shown 2A MC GET CONFIGDATA 111 222 33 4 The download of configuration data was successful 2A MC _ Line 1 Specify the IP Address of TFTP Server af ter the Command Name Line 2 Result is shown 2A MC PUT CONFIGDATA 111 222 33 4 The upload of configuration data was successful 2A MC _ 2A MC REBOOT May I do reboot Y N Y Line 1 Line 2 Enter Y or N to ...

Page 360: ...ied memory address exceeds the number of digit Please enter sub command Required sub command has not been entered Range is illegal The specified range is illegal Sub command not found The entered sub command is not correct The inputted command cannot be distin guished The system cannot recognize the entered command The inputted key name is not used The entered key name is not correct The inputted ...

Page 361: ...ormal end The command did not end correctly This command needs a parameter A required parameter has not been entered This VLAN ID is registered already The specified VLAN ID has already been registered VLAN ID is not registered The specified VLAN ID is not registered ...

Page 362: ...ports The MC connected terminals communicate by directly sending conventional Media Data voice fax to MC MC embeds the media in IP packets which are sent to the destination IP terminals on the LAN Control signal between the Telephony Server and 8LC Card is handled by SP PHI which is embedded function of the Telephony Server to use Session Initiation Protocol SIP and control signal and voice packet...

Page 363: ...M signals For more information on IPPAD refer to the Circuit Card Guide Note 1 SP PHI which is accommodated in MPH Multi Protocol Handler of the Telephony Server handles the control signal from to 8LC Card MPH is the interface for the control signal Call control between SP PHI and 8MC is executed via TCP IP port of the Telephony Server Note 2 TFTP server is required for file downloading For detail...

Page 364: ...ations 1 Dimension 8LC Card is mounted on 1U MPC module 19 inch rack mount 1U box Size of 8LC Card in 1U MPC Unit mm inch 400 0 1 3 75 43 8 1 72 430 0 1 4 93 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC8 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET ...

Page 365: ...ax auto detect is activated on timer timeout Timer 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 0min fixed to voice mode No timer always in automatic Fax detection mode Jitter Buffer Static 10 300 msec in 10 msec steps Dynamic 10 300 msec Quality of Service QoS ToS IP Precedence Supported DiffServ Supported VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagging VLAN LAN Interface 100 Mbps 10 Mbps auto negotia tion Half Full Duplex RJ 45 Connector...

Page 366: ...ault 600Ω Selectable depending on the countries PAD Control for voice transmission 10dB 20dB 1dB step Default value analog LAN 0 dB LAN analog 0 dB Stutter Dial Tone Supported Caller ID Supported FSK only For North America the name is sup ported only if sent in the setup mes sage ETSI 300 659 1 V1 3 1 for EMEA Bellcore Telcordia GR 30 COR for North America Momentary Open Reverse Supported Selectab...

Page 367: ...ephone or fax connection RJ 11 2 wire CONSOLE Interface for Maintenance Con sole RJ 45 serial connection CONSOLE cable RJ 45 RS 232C is used RESET Executes power on reset MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC8 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET Ether connector PWR lamp ALM lamp RESET switch CONSOLE connector ON LINE lamp MC0 MC7 connector MC0 MC7 O...

Page 368: ...hen physically connected to IP network Flash Flashes green in 0 2 second cycle when sending receiving IP Packet OFF Port link is not established OPERATIONMC0 MC7 Green See Lamp Indication and Status Flash OFF LAMP INDICATION DISCRIPTION OF STATUS LEGEND L Lights Fr Flashes rapidly 60INT Fs Flashes slowly 30INT Remains OFF R Rounds ON LINE OPERATION MC0 MC1 MC2 MC3 MC4 MC5 MC6 MC7 Power ON BOOT pro...

Page 369: ... CH4 is not registered L Fs MC CH5 is not registered L Fs MC CH6 is not registered L Fs MC CH7 is not registered L Fr MC CH0 is on the call L Fr MC CH1 is on the call L Fr MC CH2 is on the call L Fr MC CH3 is on the call L Fr MC CH4 is on the call L Fr MC CH5 is on the call L Fr MC CH6 is on the call L Fr MC CH7 is on the call L L MC CH0 is Make Busy L L MC CH1 is Make Busy L L MC CH2 is Make Busy...

Page 370: ...strike and other electrical surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10Ω These might cause damage to 8LC Card and AC power unit without Ground connection NAME FUNCTION AC power inlet Connected to AC DC adapter with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft AC 100V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 230V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 240V 50 60 Hz 10 Power swit...

Page 371: ... 5 Available Channels See VoIP Encryption V 27 in Data Programming Manual Business for the number of available channels on the encryption status of this component Function TP side SP side LAN Port default Port Number default Command to Change Setting Port Number default Command to Change Setting TP SP Note 1 Registration LAN1 3456 ADTM Port Number only 22000 Cannot be changed iLP PM LAN1 60130 ADT...

Page 372: ...3 or higher a maximum of 100 m 100BASE TX Unshielded Twisted pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100 m Line Cable For the connection between an analog terminal and an MC0 MC7 line use a Mod ular Cable with an RJ 11 Modular Jack CONSOLE Cable RJ 45 RS 232C serial cable for maintenance console 2 Firmware Program The following program is installed in 8LC Card SCA 8LC For...

Page 373: ...rd supports PB only 8 Conditions on fault monitoring SP PHI and 8LC Card are connected via UDP IP So periodic diagnosis is activated in proprietary method When any fault is detected in periodic diagnosis System Message 33 S IP PKG Warning Health Check Error is output on the LENS of SP PHI When communication error is detected in sending control packets between Internal PHE and SP PHI System Message...

Page 374: ...of registration login on SP PHI 10 SR MGC supports 8LC Card 11 Modem connection using 8LC Card is not supported 12 If connection to the Telephony Server is lost due to problems such as network failure 8LC Card cannot exchange tone control signals Thus no tone is heard on an analog telephone connected to the 8LC Card when it goes off hook ...

Page 375: ... Sensitive Handling Precautions Required bracket to mount on 19 inch rack 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis 8LC Card SCA 8LCA SCA 8LCA EMEA SCA 8LCC SCA 8LCC EMEA MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC8 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET 8LC Card FRONT 1U MPC MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC8 ON ...

Page 376: ...nnect the required cables according to the system configuration The figure below shows general description of cable connection for 8LC Card 8LC Card Cable Connection Diagram Front FRONT Maintenance Console PC used for configuration data setting connected to LAN 10BASE T 100BASE TX RS 232C D sub 9 pin RJ 45 serial Note 1 CONSOLE cable option serial straight through cable Analog Telephone FAX MC1 MC...

Page 377: ... with the stopper Connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate AC supply Note For the safety measures against static electricity lightning strike and other electrical surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω Lightning might cause damage to 8LC Card and AC power unit without Ground connection REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected to AC Power supply ...

Page 378: ...C Card and Basic Tests Do not connect here FRONT MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 ALM PWR ON LINE Ether OPERATION MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC8 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET CONSOLE cable CONSOLE connector RJ 45 serial RS 232C D sub 9 pin B A 1 RJ 11 connector pin assignment 2 FRONT MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 ALM PWR ON LINE Ether OPERATION MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC8 100M LINK CONSOLE...

Page 379: ...ata Assignment by PCPro 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 1 One Time Password Assignment 2 Selection whether to use DHCP DNS server 3 Network Data Assignment STEP 4 Configuration Command Assignment 1 Connection between 8LC Card and LAN STEP 5 Cable C...

Page 380: ...P PHI is also there 3 8LC Card Data Assignment ASYDL Assignment of System Data LDM SYS1 INDEX 811 Tone Code by countries See Command Manual for more details ANPD Assignment of Numbering Plan Assign the Access Code ACC for station access by using the combination of ANPD and ASPA com mands 1st DC 1st DC of the station numbers NND Total station number digits ASPA Assignment of Special Access Code ACC...

Page 381: ...itter Buffer maximum value 0 30 10 milliseconds Note Default settings JIT_MIN 1 10 ms JIT_MAX 30 300 ms is applied when the check box is not clicked Setting of Type of Service Voice Packet Click the check box to assign the ToS data for voice packet IP Precedence DiffServ Select either of the radio buttons When IP Precedence is selected Precedence Specify the precedence in the range of 0 7 low high...

Page 382: ...sign the PAD data manually If not checked default value 0 is applied KIND2 Specify the PAD value of 8LC Card in the range of 0 3 No PAD control determined by ASYD SYS1 INDEX 4 bit5 5 dB PAD PAD OFF 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB KIND3 Specify the PAD No of IPPAD in the range of 0 15 PAD value is determined by this PAD No 0 15 and the setting of SW10 6 7 on IPPAD card Refer to the Circuit Card Description for more...

Page 383: ...E TIME PASSWORD One Time Password to be used for authentication procedure in 8LC Card reg istration 4 10 digits with numerics hyphen period Note 1 AVAILABLE PERIOD Expiration date of One Time Password No limit 1 7 days Note 1 Assign the same One Time Password to 8LC Card by configuration command setting Note One Time Password will be lost during a power reset ...

Page 384: ...perTerminal on the Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Pre...

Page 385: ...ront panel of 8LC Card to restart the card and start its boot program STEP 2 Make sure the LED indicate normal status PWR lamp lights green Boot program automatically starts ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT REAR Turn ON the power switch UP FRONT MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 ALM PWR ON LINE Ether OPERATION MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC8 100M LINK CONSOL...

Page 386: ...hen the boot program is started the initial display below is displayed on the screen STEP 2 Following the boot program main program launches and the initial display below is displayed on the screen In factory default system data is in initial setting 8LC Card starts up with the setting of DHCP en abled The display is shifted to OS prompt when 8LC Card tries getting IP address from DHCP server DP O...

Page 387: ...ard command prompt MC SIP appears as follows STEP 5 If one time password has not been set in STEP 2 assign one time password here using SET ONE_TIME_PASS command STEP 6 Set the basic data for connecting network by SETUP SP command depending on your LAN envi ronment Enter SETUP SP following the prompt No One Time Password Please input a one time password One Time Password 12345 One Time Password se...

Page 388: ...a according to the setting of DHCP server and DNS server When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used DNS server is used When DHCP server is NOT used DNS server is NOT used DHCP Interface set Current DHCP Interface ENABLE Change DHCP Interface Y change N current Q quit Y Input new DHCP Interface E enable D disable D DNS Interface set Current DNS Interface DISABLE Change DNS Interface Y ch...

Page 389: ...dress of SIP server Note 2 Check the number of IP addresses saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of 8LC Card anytime Note 1 Assign DHCP option on DHCP server as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate e g SP1 Data IP address Array Checked Code 162 Note 2 About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration De...

Page 390: ...T DHCP DISABLE before starting the IP address setting 1 DNS server IP Address 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask of 8LC Card 3 Host name of 8LC Card Note Enter the host name in full domain format DNS IP Address set Current DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 Change DNS IP Address Y change N current Q quit Y Input new DNS IP Address 10 41 1 150 IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 2...

Page 391: ...quit Y Input new Default Gateway 10 41 1 254 SIP Server Host Name set Current SIP Server and Host Name SIP Server 1 2 3 20 Host Name Change SIP Server Information Y change N current Q quit Y Input new SIP Server 1 20 1 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit N Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed auto Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y Inp...

Page 392: ...phony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual 1 IP Address and Subnet Mask of 8LC Card 2 Host name of 8LC Card Host name setting is optional Enter N if not required to set host name Note Enter the host name in full domain format 3 Default Gateway IP Address IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 255 25...

Page 393: ...er Host Name SIP Server 1 2 3 20 IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port Number 5060 5060 5060 5060 Host Name Change SIP Server Information Y change N current Q quit Y Input new SIP Server 1 20 1 Input new IP Address 10 41 1 200 Input new Port Number 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit N Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed auto Cha...

Page 394: ...d to see all the required configuration data is correctly assigned STEP 8 Reboot the 8LC Card by turning the power OFF ON or pressing RESET button Don t power off in progress Do you save the configuration data N Y Y Configuration data has been saved Restarting is required for making a setup reflect Sp mode setting succeeded The register mode will be changed to SP mode after re starting ...

Page 395: ...nt panel of 8LC Card PWR lamp lights green ALARM lamp OFF ON LINE lamp OFF OPERATION MC0 MC7 lamp flashes green Note After completing the data assignment 8LC Card entry station data entry on the Telephony Server side ON LINE lamp lights green and the corresponding OPERATION MC0 MC7 lamp will go out ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required FRONT MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 ...

Page 396: ...ch turned ON The 8LC Card may not be physically connected to the LAN Check the LAN Cable between 8LC Card and Network Device Use a LAN Cable straight through Test the continuity in the LAN Cable Make sure the network device SW HUB or Router is turned ON If the problem is not cleared change the LAN Cable or change the network device Check the data assignment on Telephony Server and 8LC Card Telepho...

Page 397: ...k the following items Is the Station Data assigned correctly Re assign the station data by the PCPro commands ANPD ASPA AISTL etc Is the Modular Cable between 8LC Card and Analog Terminal connected properly Is the cable damaged Is the Analog Terminal connected to 8LC Card damaged Perform the Speech Test connecting to the test terminal if required Adjust the parameters related to IP Network and spe...

Page 398: ...d disconnect it from the network STEP 2 Connect PC to 8LC Card by using CONSOLE cable STEP 3 Power on 8LC Card STEP 4 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 5 Select Transfer Capture File STEP 6 Send File screen is displayed Specify a file name to be saved and then click the Start button STEP 7 After a pro...

Page 399: ...ation refer to the appropriate manual at tached to the TFTP server program Data Assignment on Serial Console STEP 7 Power on 8LC Card STEP 8 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 9 After a prompt is displayed enter usrConsole STEP 10 After a prompt MC SIP is displayed enter get configdata TFTP s IP Ad dre...

Page 400: ...at is downloaded from TFTP server save it by entering save configdata and reboot 8LC Card by entering reboot STEP 13 Exit the HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit Confirmation of 8LC Card STEP 14 Connect the 8LC Card to the network STEP 15 Confirm that 8LC Card is normally registered in system after reboot Use the DISD FPTS commands in PCPro For more information refer to the Command Manual STEP 16...

Page 401: ...rt the TFTP server program STEP 3 Assign the folder as root folder and then permit write and read behavior of this directory For more information refer to the appropriate manual attached to the TFTP server program Data Assignment on PCPro STEP 4 To search for the LENS of the target 8LC Card use the IPAN command MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 ALM PWR ON LINE Ether OPERATION MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 MC1 MC3...

Page 402: ...n specify them as you like STEP 6 After completing the above click the Set button Data Assignment on Telnet PC STEP 7 Start a command prompt and enter telnet 8LC Card s IP Address to connect 8LC Card via Telnet STEP 8 Log in to the target 8LC Card by entering the userID and the password which are set in the AUTD command STEP 9 After a prompt is displayed enter usrConsole STEP 10 After a prompt MC ...

Page 403: ...C Card Specify a user ID and a password which are required for logging in 8LC Card via Telnet Input any letter for USER LEVEL because 8LC Card does not use USERLEVEL For VALID TIME input a total of time required for completing this procedures Note A user ID and a password are temporary ones for download you can specify them as you like STEP 6 After completing the above click the Set button MC1 MC3...

Page 404: ...Ad dress to download configuration data into 8LC Card STEP 11 Confirm that successfully completed is displayed in the command prompt indicating the upload to TFTP server is completed normally STEP 12 To reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from TFTP server save it by entering save configdata and reboot 8LC Card by entering reboot STEP 13 Exit the HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit C...

Page 405: ...al is required TFTP server has to be installed in advance STEP 1 Disconnect the 8LC Card from the network STEP 2 Connect PC s to 8LC Card with LAN connector and CONSOLE cable both STEP 3 Put the firmware file for upgrade in the root folder of TFTP server MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 ALM PWR ON LINE Ether OPERATION MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC8 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET 8LC Card Serial Conso...

Page 406: ...None STEP 9 Enter usrConsole following the OS prompt STEP 10 When the 8MC Card s prompt 8MC SIP is displayed enter download STEP 11 When the message Do you need download is displayed enter y STEP 12 The current setting of 8LC Card is displayed and then the screen asks you to input TFTP server IP address Enter the IP address of TFTP server SP3893 xxx SP3893 8amcmwlist txt SP3893 SP3893 002 root dir...

Page 407: ...r of the 8LC Card STEP 19 After a prompt is displayed enter dispver to display the firmware information of 8LC Card STEP 20 Make sure that new firmware has been installed The following is an example STEP 21 Enter usrConsole again following the OS prompt STEP 22 Enter SHOW CONFIGDATA to confirm the config data Confirmation of 8LC Card STEP 23 Connect the 8LC Card to a network dispver Boot program v...

Page 408: ...ed firmware make a call to the 8LC Card Check that you can hear RBT STEP 25 Receive a call via the 8LC Card and confirm that you can talk to each other STEP 26 After all the tasks are completed write down label the firmware version in the front of the 8LC Card For example 2A is indicated for Version 2 3A is indicated for Version 3 ...

Page 409: ...rmware file for upgrade in the root folder of FTP server and then start the FTP server program Note The following files have to be located in the root folder MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 ALM PWR ON LINE Ether OPERATION MC0 MC2 MC4 MC6 MC1 MC3 MC5 MC7 MC8 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET 8LC Card IP Network FTP Server PCPro SYSTEM 3 Download firmware via FTP Firmware 2 Make environment setting for firmwa...

Page 410: ...ight times in the box To avoid setting upgrade task to the target 8LC Card eight times select either one of the channels used in the 8LC Card by checking LENS STEP 7 Click the Close button to go back to the main screen STEP 8 Click the Exe button to upgrade the firmware to the target 8LC Cards Upgrade is succeeded is displayed Note that version information in the screen is not updat ed at this tim...

Page 411: ...rogram and use maintenance command Enter usrConsole after the OS prompt When the maintenance command is started the following prompt is indicated on the screen MC SIP _ machine name usually An example of indication is shown below MC ID 00301caf2c1d Boot program version Main program version H W PKG information H W PKG information DSP information DSP information SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A 03 00 0...

Page 412: ... SET commands Analog Media Converter Firmware SP 3893 01 00 00 00 Compiled on Jan 6 2006 17 04 27 RegistrationMode 8MC SIP SP Mode MC Initializing usrConsole MC Maintenance command MC SIP MC SIP SET IPADDRESS 123 201 18 45 255 255 255 0 1 2 3 4 1 Command 2 Sub Command 3 Parameter 1 P1 4 Parameter 2 P2 Note The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command ...

Page 413: ...R Setting Health Check Receive Timer 14 INTERFACE Setting the communication speed for LAN interface 15 IPADDRESS Setting IP Address and Net Mask of 8LC Card 16 MUSICTYPE Setting Internal Music on Hold type 17 MW_LAMP Setting Message Waiting Lamp control type 18 ONE_TIME_PASS Setting One Time Password for security 19 OPEN Setting Open Reverse mode 20 OWN_NAME Setting Host Name of 8LC Card 21 PAD Se...

Page 414: ...n Hold type 17 MW_LAMP To show Message Waiting Lamp control type 18 ONE_TIME_PASS To show One Time Password for security 19 OPEN To show Open Reverse mode 20 OWN_NAME To show Host Name of 8LC Card 21 PAD To show default receiver PAD value 22 PRERINGING To show Pre Ringing 23 RINGFREQ To show Ringer Frequency 24 SENDPAD To show default sender PAD value 25 SIGNALING_PORT_NO To show signaling port nu...

Page 415: ...er key The example below shows the screen when requesting a list of SET commands COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SAVE CONFIGDATA To save the configuration data to Flash ROM COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS GET CONFIGDATA To download Configuration Data file from specified TFTP server COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS PUT CONFIGDATA To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP ser...

Page 416: ...enter abnormal data the SETUP command quits discarding all the entered data Note When you quit the SETUP command entry halfway through the setting all the entered data is to be discard ed F To startup SETUP SP F Setting DHCP server enable disable MC SIP MC SIP SETUP SP Enter SETUP SP following the prompt DHCP Interface set Current DHCP Interface ENABLE Change DHCP Interface Y change N current Q qu...

Page 417: ...ble E Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Specify whether to use DNS server E Use DNS server default D Not use DNS server DNS IP Address set Current DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 Change DNS IP Address Y change N current Q quit Y Input new DNS IP Address 10 41 1 150 Line 2 The current setting is displ...

Page 418: ... 255 0 0 Example 3 Broadcast address cannot be assigned as IP address of 8LC Card IP address 192 168 1 255 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Example 4 Broadcast address cannot be assigned as IP address of 8LC Card IP address 172 16 255 255 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Change IP Address Subnetmask Y change N current Q quit Y I...

Page 419: ...e 2 The current setting is displayed Is there the Host Name Y N Y Line 3 Asked whether to use host name Y Use host name N Not use host name Input new Host Name mcsip nec com Line 4 Enter new host name of 8LC Card in full domain format Default Gateway IP Address set Current Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Change Default Gateway Y change N current Q quit Y Input new Default Gateway 10 41 1 254 Line 2 The cu...

Page 420: ... 10 41 1 200 Input new Port Number 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit N Line 4 Line 9 The current setting of the Telephony Server information IP address port number and host name is displayed Line 10 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 11 Enter the number of SIP server 1 20 Line 12 E...

Page 421: ...ntinue N exit N Line 4 Line 9 The current setting of the Telephony Server information host name is displayed Line 10 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 11 Enter the number of SIP server 1 20 Line 12 Asked whether to use host name Y Use host name N Not use host name Line 13 Enter new host name of the Telephony Server in full domain format Up...

Page 422: ...change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Select the communication speed of LAN interface 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100Mbps fixed mode 3 10Mbps fixed mode Line 5 Select the Duplex mode of LAN interface F Full duplex mode H Half duplex mode Don t power off in progress Do you save the configuration data Y N Y Line 2 Asked whether to save the assigned data Y Sav...

Page 423: ...econds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 4 seconds ON 3 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 4 0 2 seconds ON 0 4 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 5 0 25 seconds ON 0 25 seconds OFF 0 25 seconds ON 0 25 seconds OFF Burst Ringer Pattern setting succeeded Result is shown MC SIP SET CH_ATTRIBUTE P1 P1 Enter the Line Number 0 7 FAX PROTOCOL OFF T30 BYPASS OFF OFF S...

Page 424: ...hown in the following table North America Australia MC SIP SET CID_SEND_WAIT CallerID Send Wait Timer 5 20 6 10 Enter the Caller ID send wait timer 5 20 default 6 5 20 100 milliseconds CallerID Send Wait Timer setting succeeded Result is shown MC SIP SET CODEC_COEF CODEC Coefficient CH No 0 7 0 Enter the Line Number 0 7 CODEC Coefficient 0 5 0 0 Enter the setting value 0 5 default 0 Note 1 CODEC C...

Page 425: ...nd and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 300Ω 1000Ω 220nF 600Ω 0 default 300Ω 1000Ω 220nF 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 600Ω 0 default 900Ω 900Ω 1 900Ω 800Ω 50nF 2 600Ω 600Ω 3 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 600Ω 0 default 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 600Ω 3 ...

Page 426: ... setting line of DNS IP Address is not displayed Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MC SIP SET DEFAULTROUTE P1 P1 Enter the IP address of Default Gateway e g 10 41 1 254 Default Gateway setting succeeded Result is shown MC SIP SET DHCP P1 P1 Enter ENABLE or DISABLE ENABLE DHCP is valid default DISABLE DHCP is invalid DHCP...

Page 427: ...nd restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MC SIP SET DSP_ECFB P1 P1 Select FAX echo canceller setting 0 1 0 FAX echo canceller is ON default 1 FAX echo canceller is OFF DSP ECFB setting succeeded Result is shown MC SIP SET EC_TRAINING P1 P1 Select the Training feature mode of EC ON OFF ON Training function is valid OFF Training function is invalid default EC Training setting succeeded Res...

Page 428: ...IP direction when Fax signal is detected Note The total PAD value Sender PAD Fax Sender PAD is limited to 20dB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 13 Setting Health Check Receive Timer Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MC SIP SET FAXRECVPAD P1 P1...

Page 429: ...ive use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 16 Setting Internal Music on Hold type Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MC SIP SET INTERFACE SPEED AUTO 100M 10M AUTO 100M Select the communication speed AUTO Auto Negotiation default 100M 100 Mbps fixed mode 10M 10 Mbps fixed mode DUPLEX FULL ...

Page 430: ...LAY 1 RVS 0 0 Select the control method of Message Waiting Lamp 0 Relay control 1 Reverse control Mode 0 Follow 1 FixedBlink 2 FixedLighting 0 0 Select the operation of Message Waiting Lamp 0 Follows the Telephony Server setting 1 Flashes 2 Steady lights Music on Hold Type setting succeeded Result is shown MC SIP SET ONE_TIME_PASS One Time Password 123456 Enter the password in numeric 4 10 digits ...

Page 431: ... PAD Fax Receiver PAD is limited to 20dB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 22 Setting Pre Ringing Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MC SIP SET OWN_NAME P1 P1 Enter the host name of 8LC Card in full domain format within 63 characters of alphanum...

Page 432: ...ctive use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 25 Setting signaling port number for SIP Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MC SIP SET RINGFREQ P1 P1 Select the Ringer Frequency 0 1 0 20 Hz default 1 25 Hz Frequency of Ringer setting succeeded frequency is 20Hz Result is shown MC SIP SET SEN...

Page 433: ...ve use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MC SIP SET SIGNALING_QOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS TOS Select QoS setting type TOS DIFFSERV default TOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Precedence 0 7 low high default 6 DELAY 0 1 0 0 Delay 0 1 Normal default Low Delay ON THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Throughput 0 1 Normal default High Throughput ON RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 Reliability 0 1 Normal default H...

Page 434: ...ON of Installation Manual 28 Setting DSP smooth PAD mode Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MC SIP SET SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server 1 20 1 Enter the SIP server s number 1 20 Up to 20 SIP servers can be used in one network IP Address 0 0 0 0 10 41 2 100 Enter the IP address of SIP server Note 1 e g 10 41 2 100 default 0 0 0 ...

Page 435: ... 31 Setting Synchronous Ringer mode Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MC SIP SET STARTPORT P1 P1 Enter the number of RTP Start Port 1024 64510 default 1024 RTP Start Port Number setting succeeded Result is shown MC SIP SET STUTTERDT P1 P1 Select whether to use Stutter Dial Tone ENABLE Stutter Dial Tone is valid DISABLE S...

Page 436: ...ignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MC SIP SET VLAN Please enter a parameter VLAN ID 1 4094 1 Enter the VLAN_ID 1 4094 COS 0 7 0 Enter the COS setting 0 7 VLAN setting succeeded Result is shown MC SIP SET WARNING_TONE P1 P1 Specify the mode default 3 0 Warning Tone is not sent 1 Warning Tone is sent to IP Network 2 Warning Tone is sent to TDM ...

Page 437: ...ON The current setting of Burst Ringer Pattern is shown MC SIP SHOW CH_ATTRIBUTE CH FAX PROTOCOL ECM FAX RATE CH00 CH01 CH02 CH03 CH04 CH05 CH06 CH07 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 14400 14400 14400 14400 14400 14400 14400 14400 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW CID_SEND_WAIT CallerID Send Wait Timer is 600ms The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW CODEC_CO...

Page 438: ...MODE SP FILE_INFO 2005 11 11 IP OWN_NAME OWN_ADDR 0 0 0 0 SUBNET_MASK 255 255 255 255 DEFAULT_GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 DNS_ADDR 0 0 0 0 SIGNALING_PORT 5060 SIP SIPSV_ADDR1 0 0 0 0 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW DHCP DHCP is DISABLE The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW DNS_SW DNS interface ENABLE DNS IP Address 10 40 2 101 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW DSP_ECFB DSP ECFB Mode is 0 Th...

Page 439: ...F The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW FAXERRORDETECT FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW FAXRECVPAD Fax Receiver PAD is 0 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW FAXSENDPAD Fax Sender PAD is 3 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW HC_TIMER Health Check Timer Timeout is 150 seconds The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW INTERFACE Setting 100Mbps Full Dup...

Page 440: ... 8LC Card MC SIP SHOW IPADDRESS IP Address 10 40 218 87 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 40 218 1 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW MUSICTYPE Music on Hold Type is 0 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW MW_LAMP Control method is RELAY Follow Mode The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW ONE_TIME_PASS One Time Password 123456 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW OPEN Open is ...

Page 441: ...t setting is shown MC SIP SHOW PRIRINGING Pre Ringing is ON The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW RINGFREQ Frequency of Ringer is 20Hz The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW SENDPAD Default Sender PAD is 0 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW SIGNALING_PORT_NO Signaling Port Number is 5060 The current setting is shown MC SIP SET SIGNALING_QOS Signaling QoS is 0xC0 QOS TOS The current sett...

Page 442: ...tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual 28 To show DSP smooth PAD mode 29 To show RTP Start Port MC SIP SHOW SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name 1 2 3 20 10 41 1 150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5060 5060 5060 5060 SVR1 nec com The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW SMOOTH_PAD Smooth PAD Mode is 1 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW STARTPORT RTP Start Port Number is...

Page 443: ... Default Gateway DNS Mode DNS Server Address Host Name Current Sipsv Name Current Sipsv Address Encryption SP 00 00 4c a4 9c d3 Up 100Mbps Half Disable Enable 10 41 1 100 255 255 255 0 10 41 1 254 Enable 10 41 2 101 name1 sip_sv1 10 41 1 150 The current setting is shown SIP Encrypt RTP Encrypt Registration Status Online MC SIP SHOW STUTTERDT Stutter Dial Tone is DISABLE The current setting is show...

Page 444: ...nance Command Version Information 8LCCard sfirmware and hardware version information is listed Hardware Main Hardware Sub CA CC12 1A PX CC171 1A Boot program Firmware SP 3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A 03 00 00 00 SP 3893 8MC PROG A 01 00 00 00 MC SIP SHOW VLAN VLAN is ENABLE DEVICE VLAN1 ID 1 COS 0 IPADDRESS 10 40 218 87 SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 The current setting is shown MC SIP SHOW WARNING_TONE W...

Page 445: ... 64 bytes from 100 100 100 4 icmp_seq 1 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 100 100 100 4 icmp_seq 2 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 100 100 100 4 icmp_seq 3 time 0 ms 100 100 100 4 PING Statistics 4 packets transmitted 4 packets received 0 packet loss round trip ms min avg max 0 0 0 Connection status of the accessing system is displayed 4 lines MC SIP PING 100 100 100 4 PING 100 100 100 4 56 data bytes ping timeout ...

Page 446: ...tion data to factory default value MC SIP GET CONFIGDATA P1 P1 Enter the IP address of TFTP server Configuration data has been downloaded Result is shown MC SIP PUT CONFIGDATA P1 P1 Enter the IP address of TFTP server Configuration data has been uploaded Result is shown MC SIP INIT CONFIGDATA Warning This command is for initialize config data If this command is executed your configuration is delet...

Page 447: ...uted on the OS prompt key operation turns unaccepted In this case press the CTRL C keys simultaneously to display the OS prompt again Note The screen returns to the prompt of the configuration command MC SIP if any error occurs after se lecting Y MC SIP REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y Enter Y to reboot the 8LC Card MC SIP EXIT Finished MC SIP EXIT Configuration data was changed Don t power off in ...

Page 448: ... is entered in incorrect form VLAN ID is no more registered VLAN ID cannot be registered because the number of VLAN exceeds the maximum Sub command is missing Sub command is not entered when entering command Invalid parameter value The range of entered parameter is incorrect Invalid sub command Entered sub command is incorrect Command is abnormally terminated Command is terminated illegally Parame...

Page 449: ...nd conventional Voice Data the MC connected conventional terminal side Media Gateway MG is an interface between IP network with PSTN MC MG with PFT can be placed in remote office MC and MG usually work independently In the case of some failure of MC MG with PFT Power Failure Transfer PFT connects C O lines and Analog terminals directly Outerview of MC MG COT with PFT FRONT VIEW TEL 0 TEL 1 TEL 2 T...

Page 450: ...nalog PSTN line MG COT is controlled by Internal PHI BRI Note 1 Note MC MG with PFT is referred to as MC MG in this manual Note 1 The functions of Internal PHE and Internal PHI BRI are built in the Telephony Server to control MC MG The call controlling signal between Internal PHE PHI BRI and MC MG is carried via the TCP IP trans mission port of the Telephony Server Note 2 MG is referred to as MG C...

Page 451: ...ction status when health check time out timer 150 sec onds expires on MG side a when both MG side and MC side are not used immediately switched to PFT available as PFT line b when any calls are in progress on MG side and MC side is not used switched to PFT after cut ting off MG side available as PFT line c when MG side is not used and any calls are in progress on MC side switched to PFT after re b...

Page 452: ... Release of the lines activating over PFT function are supervised PFT is canceled starting from the recovered lines activated by PFT function LC COT VoIP CODER Interface to LAN TEL 0 TEL 1 LINE 0 LINE 1 TEL 2 PSTN MC MG PFT TEL 3 MC MG with PFT IP Network Change over when failure occurs Change over when failure occurs LC Line Circuit COT Central Office Trunk PFT Power Failure Transfer ...

Page 453: ...e IP network and also whether voice com pression device is accommodated The figure below shows a network configuration example Note For detailed procedure and data assignment for Fax connections refer to I 44 IP Control FAX service in the Data Programming Manual MC MG MC MG connection and MC LC connection via IP PAD including CCIS FAX communication within self node FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX MC MG MC MG ...

Page 454: ... ODT FAX FAX MC MG PSTN Private Network IP Network IP PAD Internal PHC Internal PHE G 711 or ADPCM G 726 is recommended PH to control this operation FAX relay T30 between IPTRK cards COT PRT BRT DTI TLT ODT FAX IPTRK IPTRK FAX FAX FAX MC MG MC MG PSTN Private Network WAN LC IP PAD IPPAD G 711 or ADPCM G 726 is recommended MC MG Trunk connection via IPPAD excluding CCIS over IP ...

Page 455: ...DL and also setting VLAN to each MC MG by the maintenance command is required see 2 MG Data Assignment in page 227 The figure below shows an example network configuration when an MC MG is used in VLAN VLAN Example Note For detailed explanation of the VLAN feature refer to Data Programming Manual VLAN data can be set from the maintenance terminal by using maintenance command SW Router VLAN for Voic...

Page 456: ...rogramming Manual Business Paging Access Dialing the access code of Paging Access on station ATTCON the caller can access the paging equipment to page anyone over the speaker The paged person can answer the call by dialing the Paging Answer access code on any station Mr OO amplifier speaker MC MG 1 2 1 After dialing the access code of Paging the caller pages Mr OO over the speaker Non Delay system...

Page 457: ...ansferring party pages Mr OO over the speaker Non Delay system wait Delay system wait after hang up Paging Transfer Supervision release 3 Mr OO answers by dialing the access code of Paging Answer 4 Non Delay system After connecting to the transferring party Mr OO can talk to the held party when the transferring party releases Delay Operation After ringing and connecting to the transferring party M...

Page 458: ...ty Paging the station ATTCON is allowed to access paging trunk in terrupting other user s paging in progress interrupted Mr OO amplifier speaker MC MG 1 2 1 during paging trunk is used 2 Dial the access code of Priority Paging first and then dial the access code of Paging Access ...

Page 459: ...n as voice data G 711 G 726 ADPCM FAX Relay T 30 VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagging VLAN VLAN bit Priority bit Echo Canceller MC Side G 168 G165 NLP func tion available Tail Length is 64 milliseconds MG Side G 168 G165 NLP func tion available Tail Length is 64 milliseconds Control Protocol LP PM over IP Signaling between Analog MC and Internal PHE MGC Signaling between MG COT and Internal PHI BRI MGC 170 Un...

Page 460: ...recedence DiffServ IP Address Assignment DHCP is supported Operation Maintenance Program download Console Connecting through RS 232C Cable LAN Interface 100 Mbps 10 Mbps auto negotia tion Half Full Duplex RJ 45 Connector 1 Port Serial Interface RS 232C D Sub 9 Pin Audible Tone Generator 16 types DTMF detection generation Supported Holding Tone Supported Internal and External Safety Standard UL6095...

Page 461: ...DTMF only DP is not supported BNW 600Ω Default setting Available for North America Australia China and Brazil PAD Control for voice transmis sion 0 15 dB One dB step Default value analog LAN 0 dB LAN analog 3 dB FAX PAD for data transmission as voice data 0 15 dB One dB step FAX PAD value is added to Voice PAD The sum of FAX PAD and Voice PAD is limited to 15 dB Default value analog LAN 0 dB LAN a...

Page 462: ...terminals are ANALOG PB telephone and FAX DP telephone can not be used and Calling Number Display feature is not supported If you connect ANALOG telephone that has Calling Number Display feature the feature must be set off by the terminal side ...

Page 463: ...rts Note 1 Signaling Method Loop Start Ground Start is not sup ported Reverse Detection Supported Grounding less than 10 Ω is required Note 2 Caller ID Not Supported Call Metering Pulse Detection Not Supported Line Fault Detection Not Supported AC Clearing Not Supported Selection Signal DTMF only DP is not supported Automatic Polarity Reverse Supported except for North America Terminal Impedance a...

Page 464: ...ted RJ 11 Connected to C O Line when PFT is activated TEL1 Analog terminal or fax is connected RJ 11 Connected to C O Line when PFT is activated TEL2 Analog terminal or fax is connected RJ 11 TEL3 Analog terminal or fax is connected RJ 11 MC4A MG2A MC4A MG2A PWR ON LINE MC LINK 100M OPERATION Tx Rx 0 1 0 1 2 3 TEL 1 TEL 2 TEL 3 TEL 0 TEL 1 TEL 2 TEL 3 TEL 0 Front View PFT is provided PWR ON LINE M...

Page 465: ...reen MG COT ON LINE MG Green OPERATION MG0 Green OPERATION MG1 Green LINK TxRx Green Lights when establishing Layer 1 Link Note Lights when physically connected to IP network Flash Flashes green in 0 67 second cycle when sending receiving IP Packet between MC MG and MGC PH while establishing the connection or between MC MG and distant terminal dur ing a call OFF Layer 1 Link is not established 100...

Page 466: ...Waiting for entering of ESC key L L L L BOOT has been completed Fs Fs Fs Fs Registration of MC has started Fs Fs Registration of MG has started L Fs Fs Fs Fs Registration of MC has been completed L Fs Fs Registration of MG has been completed L CH0 MC is vacant L CH1 MC is vacant L CH2 MC is vacant L CH3 MC is vacant L CH0 MG is vacant L CH1 MG is vacant L Fr CH0 MC is Make Busy L Fr CH1 MC is Make...

Page 467: ...thout Ground connection CONNECTOR FUNCTION NOTE LINE0 PSTN Interface RJ 11 Connected to Analog Line TEL0 when PFT is activated LINE1 PSTN Interface RJ 11 Connected to Analog Line TEL1 when PFT is activated PFTRD Not used Ether LAN Interface RJ 45 100Mbps 10Mbps auto negotiation Half Full Duplex RS 232C Connected to Maintenance Console D Sub 9 Pin MUSIC For external Music On Hold 3 5 φ mini jack mo...

Page 468: ...Telephony Server LAN1 iLP PM Changed by using PCPro belonging to the Telephony Server ADTM 64000 UDP Internal PHI Telephony Server LAN1 iLP PM Changed by using PCPro belonging to the Telephony Server ADTM 50000 UDP MC MG MC side iLP PM 50001 UDP MC MG MG side iLP PM 10001 UDP Peer to Peer MC side Pre H 245 negotiation 10002 UDP Peer to Peer MG Side Pre H 245 negotiation 1024 TCP Peer to Peer H 245...

Page 469: ...ght through Cable Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100 m Line Cable For the connection between an Analog Terminal and an MC use a Modular Cable with an RJ 11 Modular Jack For the connection to PSTN network use a Modular Cable with an RJ 11 Modular Jack Serial Cable RS 232C Straight through Cable for Maintenance Console Audio Cable Microphone Output for external Music On Hold source 3 5 φ mini jac...

Page 470: ...e MC function must always be used together with MG COT function Be sure to enable MG COT function prior to programming the MC function Note Be sure to enable MG0 function prior to programming the MC0 function Be sure to enable MG1 function prior to programming the MC1 function 2 When the setting of ASYDL SYS1 INDEX880 Bit 1 Internal PHI PRI BRI Bit 3 Internal PHE is modified initialize the Interna...

Page 471: ...ACCESS TO SYSTEM R 2 or AUTOMATED ATTENDANT A 82 Virtual Register in the LMG to which Virtual Speech Channel is registered is seized Register in the other LMG cannot be seized If Virtual Register cannot be seized Physical Register in the LMG to which Virtual Speech Channel is registered is seized i e ORT IRT PBR for Automated Attendant Service When Virtual Physical Register cannot be seized callin...

Page 472: ... activated if any failure that is described in conditions 5 and 6 occurs 8 IP address and Subnet Mask of Internal PHI BRI are LAN1 IP address ACT of the Telephony Server Port number is modified by ADTM command default is 64000 shown as Internal PHI BRI Modified data is automatically reflected on System Data Note 1 Port number of Internal PHI BRI is shared with that of Internal PHI PRI Note 1 After...

Page 473: ...ake calling party hear some announcement The announcement can be sent only once Note 8 or 9 must not be assigned to EQP Note 1 This value includes the followings RT 902 ORT RT 903 IRT RT 906 PBR for Automated Attendant Ser vice RT 933 CRT 18 System Messages 33 R 33 T are output when packet transmission failure is detected in Internal PHI BRI 19 Assign the following parameter in ARTI command when u...

Page 474: ...lling Override System S 61 2 Speed Calling Station S 21 3 All features which use the additional digits information by AACD command 4 Last Number Called D L 6D Note 2 A pause which is inserted per one pause is about three seconds The plural pauses can be inserted For the number of the digit which can be inserted see each feature conditions Note 2 This feature is available when 1 2 or 3 is stored in...

Page 475: ...C MG Select the horizontal or vertical setting for keeping the MC MG operating at optimal performance F Desktop horizontal setting MC MG Horizontal Setting F Desktop vertical setting with stand MC MG Vertical Setting with Stand MC4A MG2A TEL 1 TEL 2 TEL 3 TEL 0 PWR ON LINE MC MG LINK 100M OPERATION TxRx 0 1 0 1 2 3 ...

Page 476: ...connection to the MC MG The MC MG provides the following interfaces Connection to LAN Connection to PSTN Connection of Analog Telephone G3 Fax Machine Power Supply Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console Connection to Audio Equipment for external music Connection to Ground ...

Page 477: ...tion MC MG Cable Connection Diagram Rear View RS 232C MUSIC Ether LINE 0 LINE 1 PFTRD Audio Equipment Maintenance Console PC D Sub 9 Pin RS 232C Straight through Cable MGC LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX PSTN AC Adapter RJ 45 Connector Pin Assignment 4 Not Used 3 B 2 A 1 Not Used RJ 11 Connector Pin Assignment D IP term D IP term to Earth System ...

Page 478: ...T MC MG Cable Connection Diagram Front View MC4A MG2A MC4A MG2A TEL 1 TEL 2 TEL 3 TEL 0 Analog Terminals FAX 4 Not Used 3 B 2 A 1 Not Used RJ 11 Connector Pin Assignment PWR ON LINE MC MG LINK 100M OPERATION TxRx 0 1 0 1 2 3 ...

Page 479: ...signment 4 MC Data Assignment STEP 1 Data Assignment by PCPro 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 1 Ground Cable Connection 2 AC DC Adapter Connection STEP 3 Power ON 1 Selection whether to use DHCP server 2 Network Data Assignment STEP 4 Configuration...

Page 480: ... PHI BRI data assignment refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including Internal PHI BRI is also there 2 MG Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG COT ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 186 b6 1 ISDN MG COT is in service INDEX 187 00 Fixed INDEX 474 Guard Timer For Originating Call MTC TC bit 0 3 MTC bit 4 6...

Page 481: ...2 Jitter Buffer Size for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Size for IP FAX ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data for Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting procedure is shown below Note Virtual trunk occupies one group For example if one channel is registered for Virtual Trunk the group is occupied exclusively for the Virtual Trunk Note Do not assign an...

Page 482: ... 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 G05 LV0 LV7 2 0 2 RT TK LENS 1 255 1 255 MG U G 00 07 0 3 LV 0 7 00 23 1 2 0 2 0 0 5 0 1 2 0 1 2 6 2 0 5 0 1 2 3 0 5 0 1 2 0 5 0 1 2 Virtual Speech Channel 4 2 0 2 1 2 1 3 7 1 0 5 0 1 2 0 5 0 1 2 Virtual Speech Channel RT 20 Terminal A B RT 21 Terminal C Line 1 of terminal C Line 0 of terminal C Not used Note 1 Line 1 of terminal B Line 0 of term...

Page 483: ...r to assigning AMGIL data MG ID MAC Address of MC MG KIND Kind of MG Trunk Select MC MG COT LINE MG Line Number 0 1 CH MG Channel Number Assign 0 LENS Assign Virtual Speech Channel for MG COT SETTING OF SERVICE TYPE EXISTS SIGNALING PACKET Type of service for MG COT Music on hold exists External Music on hold default setting Internal Music on hold1 Internal Music on hold2 External music on hold in...

Page 484: ...ified B RT MG Storing Displayed when TYPE Route Specified is selected Physical Route Number for Virtual Speech Channel of terminal connected to MG B LOC ID Location ID of IP terminal connected to MG COT Displayed when TYPE Location ID Specified is selected Setting of Jitter Buffer JB_MIN Jitter Buffer Minimum JB_MAX Jitter Buffer Maximum Setting Type of Voice Packet Service Type of service for MG ...

Page 485: ...erver About the pro cedure for the Internal PHE data assignment refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including Internal PHE is also there 4 MC Data Assignment Assign the system data according to the station numbering plan Refer to the following for the prerequisite min imum data ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 4 b2 b3 Assign the Re...

Page 486: ...nds TL 1 080 milli seconds For details refer to Command Manual ASYDL Assignment of System Data LDM SYS1 INDEX 811 Assign the Tone Code by countries For more information refer to the Command Manual SYS1 INDEX 813 Assign the PAD value of MC 00 No PAD control conforms to the setting on ASYD SYS1 INDEX 4 b5 01 PAD OFF 0dB 02 3dB 03 6dB AUNT Assignment of Unit Data MG Module Group Number TYPE 1 Select ...

Page 487: ...S Allocate the IP station to the Virtual LENS within Virtual PIR or to the LENS of a vacant slot that the Station Trunk is not mounted an IP station cannot be assigned to a registered station multiple times Note For a detailed explanation of data assignment for a Virtual PIR see the Data Programming Manual MC ID ID of the MC MG enter the fixed MAC Address of the MC MG MC CH Channel Number of the M...

Page 488: ...n location 0 4095 Setting of Jitter Buffer Click the check box to assign the Jitter Buffer data JB_MIN Jitter Buffer minimum value 0 30 10 milliseconds JB_MAX Jitter Buffer maximum value 0 30 10 milliseconds Note Default settings JB_MIN 1 10 ms JB_MAX 30 300 ms is applied when the check box is not clicked Setting of Type of Service Voice Packet Click the check box to assign the ToS data for voice ...

Page 489: ...equired for Voice Traffic Setting of PAD Click the check box to assign the PAD data manually If not checked default value 0 is applied KIND2 Specify the PAD value of Analog MC in the range of 0 3 No PAD control determined by ASYD SYS1 INDEX 4 bit5 5 dB PAD PAD OFF 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB KIND3 Specify the PAD No of IPPAD in the range of 0 15 PAD value is determined by this PAD No 0 15 and the setting of SW...

Page 490: ...d Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including SP PHI is also there 3 MG Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG COT ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 186 b6 1 ISDN MG COT is in service INDEX 187 00 Fixed INDEX 474 Guard Timer For Originating Call MTC TC bit 0 3 MTC bit 4 6 TC Note When assigning 1H TC 64 msec ARTD Assignment of Route Class Da...

Page 491: ...FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Seize for IP FAX ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data for Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting procedure is shown below Note Virtual trunk occupies one group For example if one channel is registered for Virtual Trunk the group is occupied exclusively for the Virtual Trunk Note Do not assign any trunk data to Group 0 of ...

Page 492: ...08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 G05 LV0 LV7 2 0 2 RT TK LENS 1 255 1 255 MG U G 00 07 0 3 LV 0 7 00 23 1 2 0 2 0 0 5 0 1 2 0 ...

Page 493: ...ode Australia Hong Kong Japan Korea Malaysia Mexico New Zealand North America Singapore Taiwan U K Law of A D conversion Australia A law Hong Kong μ law Japan μ law Korea μ Α law Malaysia A law Mexico A law New Zealand A law North America μ law Singapore A law Taiwan μ law U K A law Other μ Α law Receive complete timing of PB direct In 0 15 Default value is 0 False answer timing 0 15 Default value...

Page 494: ...ng of PAD is ON No 1 The PAD value of MG when DtermIP Soft Phone INASET is connected No 2 The PAD value of MG when Analog MC Digital MC is connected No 3 The PAD value of MG when IPPAD is connected No 4 The PAD value of MG when MG is connected Note The PAD value of MG COT is valid only when you select Setting from the drop down box of Setting of Detail to specify the detail PAD value AIVCL Assignm...

Page 495: ... line terminates to a station Normally 21 is assigned in hexadecimal 1 second ringing 2 second pause For details refer to Command Manual SYS3 INDEX 1 Assign the ringing pattern when a station is called from another station Ringing Pattern 1 Normally 42 is assigned in hexadecimal 2 second ringing 4 second pause For details refer to Command Manual SYS3 INDEX 2 Assign Station Release Timer TS release...

Page 496: ...gn the fixed Tenant Number of 1 for both OGTN and TMTN TRI 0 for Station to Station Calling OGTN Number of Originating Tenant TMTN Number of Terminating Tenant RES 0 for restriction 1 for permission Note For a Station to Outgoing Trunk Connection allow the Route Restriction for each trunk by the ARSC com mand AISTL Assignment of IP Station Data LDM Assign the IP Station Data of each terminal conne...

Page 497: ...ciated with the IP Address When IP Ad dress 0 0 0 0 LOC ID 0 is automatically set the value cannot be changed Note LOC ID 0 is predetermined to the Location ID of the Telephony Server i e IPPAD Setting Type of Signaling Packet Service Click the check box to assign the ToS for signaling packet IP PRECEDENCE DIFFSERV When IP PRECEDENCE is selected Priority Specify the precedence in the range of 0 7 ...

Page 498: ...oad size in the combo box according to the Payload Type No data 10 milliseconds 20 milliseconds 30 milliseconds 40 milliseconds 60 milliseconds Note If payload type G 711 is specified to more than two priorities in PRI1 through PRI4 assign different payload size to each priority When payload types G 723 1 5 3K 6 3K and G 723 1 6 3K 5 3K are to be assigned on the same terminal specify the same valu...

Page 499: ... EC ON B EC ON A EC ON B EC OFF A EC OFF B EC ON A EC OFF B EC OFF Note When the same value is assigned to both A LOC ID and B LOC ID parameters select either A EC ON B EC ON or A EC OFF B EC OFF Note MC MG needs to be rebooted after station data is assigned to reflect the change Confirm that there is no conversation in progress when rebooting ...

Page 500: ... as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual 6 3 3 Power ON STEP 1 Connect the Ground Cable to the Frame Ground FG ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ...

Page 501: ...ate normal status PWR LED lights green Boot program automatically starts ON LINE LED light green when the sequence is completed LINE 0 LINE 1 PFTRD Ether RS 232C MUSIC MC MG REAR VIEW AC DC Adapter To AC Outlet 100V 240V MC MG FRONT VIEW TEL 0 TEL 1 TEL 2 TEL 3 PWR ON LINE MC MG 0 1 2 3 0 1 OPERATION LINK Tx Rx PWR lamp ...

Page 502: ... The setting data here is an example Assign the network data according to your network configuration STEP 1 When the boot program is started the initial display below is displayed on the screen MC MG Initial Display STEP 2 Type usrConsole at the indicated OS prompt and press the ENTER key How to Start MC MG Maintenance Command MCMG ID xxxxxx Starting MC MG COT Bootprogram Online program Initial st...

Page 503: ...ET DHCP ENABLE command to set the data and move on to STEP 5 Set DHCP data When using DHCP server Note Assign the default gateway and primary secondary of DRS to DHCP server in this case Note Confirm IP address saved in DHCP server so as to get IP address of MC MG anytime MCMG ID xxxxxx Starting MC MG COT Bootprogram Online program Initial start wait 30sec usrConsole MC MG Maintenance command Vers...

Page 504: ... SET DRSADDRESS command to set the IP address and port number of the DRS Note 1 Set IP Address of DRS When DHCP server is not used Note 1 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual MC MG SET IPADDRESS 193 122 10 5 255 255 255 0 IP Address setting succeeded MC MG SET DEFAULTROUTE 193 122 10 254 Default Gat...

Page 505: ...e SAVE CONFIGDATA Save the Assigned Data MC MG SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off in progress Do you need save N Y Y erase start erase OK write start write OK Checksum write OK Configuration data has been saved Re starting is required for making a setup reflect MC MG ...

Page 506: ...to LINE0 and LINE1 on the rear panel STEP 4 Connect analog terminals to TEL0 through TEL3 on the front panel Note that TEL0 and TEL1 pro vide PFT function STEP 5 Connect the power cable to turn on the MC MG again ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required to LAN REAR VIEW LINE 0 LINE 1 PFTRD Ether RS 232C MUSIC LINE 0 LINE 1 PFTRD Ether RS 232C MUSIC MC MG REAR VIEW C O Line...

Page 507: ... Make sure the LEDs on the front panel are normal status Note Refer to Layout of Connectors and Lamps in this section MC MG FRONT VIEW LINE 0 LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 3 PWR ON LINE MC MG 0 1 2 3 0 1 OPERATION LINK Tx Rx to Analog Terminals ...

Page 508: ... LAN Cable between the MC MG and Network Device Use a LAN Cable straight through Test the continuity in the LAN Cable Make sure the network device SW HUB or Router is turned ON If the problem is not cleared change the LAN Cable or change the network device Confirm the data setting of MGC and MC MG MGC Confirm the data setting of ASYD ASYDL ALOCL ADTM ALIDL ARTD ARTI ATRK AMGIL and AMGVL MGC Confir...

Page 509: ...p lights Note 1 Note 2 4 Go to the Speech Test Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally Is speech quality okay Confirm the system message of MGC Is MG COT connected to PSTN physically Is MC connected to analog terminal fax physically Confirm the line cable between MDF and MC MG Test the continuity in the line cable Confirm the data of MGC and MC MG Confirm the...

Page 510: ...to TEL 0 1 perform the incoming call from PSTN connected to LINE 0 1 b Perform this test when WAN error has occurred STEP 1 Turn on the MC MG by connecting the power cable And then confirm that initialization has been completed and ON LINE lamp lights on STEP 2 Disconnect the LAN cable and then wait until MC MG detects WAN error about for four minutes STEP 3 Perform the following operation Can ana...

Page 511: ... the screen MC MG _ machine name usually An example of indication is shown below MC ID 00004ca41cfd Boot program version SP3777 MCMG BOOT PROG A 05 00 00 00 Main program version SP3778 MCMG PROG A 10 00 00 00 DSP kernel version DSP K AC48104ak 03 10 00 00 DSP program version DSP P AC48104ae3 03 10 00 00 DSP kernel version DSP K AC48302ck 03 10 00 00 DSP program version DSP P AC48302ce6 03 10 00 00...

Page 512: ...e Console uses the commands listed in the table below COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SET both MC and MG sides 1 DEFAULTROUTE Setting Default Gateway 2 DHCP Setting DHCP 3 DRSADDRESS Setting DRS Address 4 DRSTOS Setting ToS of DRS session 5 HC_TIMER Setting Health Check Receive Timer 6 INTERFACE Setting communication speed for LAN interface 7 IPADDRESS Setting IP Address and Subnet Mask 8 ...

Page 513: ...AD value 14 SMOOTH_PAD Setting DSP smooth PAD mode 15 STUTTERDT Setting Stutter Dial Tone 16 SYNCRINGING Setting synchronous Ringer mode COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SET MG side 1 CAR_DETECT Setting CAR Detection 2 CODEC_COEF_MG Setting CODEC Coefficiency 3 DSP_ECFB_MG Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication 4 DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME Setting DTMF Cutoff Timer 5 EC_TRAINING_MG Setting ...

Page 514: ... SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SHOW MC side 1 BURSTPATTERN To show Burst Ringer Pattern 2 CODEC_COEF To show CODEC Coefficiency 3 DSP_ECFB To show DSP echo canceller for FAX communication 4 EC_TRAINING To show Training feature mode of echo canceller 5 FAXERRORDETECT To show FAX enable timer 6 FAXRECVPAD To show FAX receiver PAD value 7 FAXSENDPAD To show FAX sender PAD value 8 MUSICTYPE To show Int...

Page 515: ...ME To show Loop Prohibition timer 11 RELEASE_SIGNAL To show Release Signal 12 SMOOTH_PAD_MG To show DSP smooth PAD mode 13 RVS_AUST To show RVS mode for Australia 14 AUTO_POLARITY To show Auto Polarity COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS DELETE VLAN To delete VLAN COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SAVE CONFIGDATA To save the configuration data in RAM drive to Flash ROM COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNC...

Page 516: ...een To finish this program input EXIT after a prompt Note When the maintenance command program is activated it provides a Help Function for referring to avail able commands and sub commands After a prompt is shown request to list up the Target Help by entering or command name SET or SHOW and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when requesting a list of SET commands MC MG SET BUR...

Page 517: ... Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual Line 1 Enter Default Gateway Address e g 150 10 1 254 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DEFAULTROUTE 150 10 1 254 Default Gateway setting succeeded Line 1 Enter ENABLE or DISABLE after the command name ENABLE DHCP is valid default DISABLE DHCP is invalid Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DHCP ENABLE DHCP setting succeeded Lin...

Page 518: ... Throughput 0 1 Normal default High Throughput ON Line 5 Reliability 0 1 Normal default High Reliability ON Line 6 Cost 0 1 Normal default Cost Precedence ON Line 7 Result is shown MC MG SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 DELAY 0 1 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 RELIABILITY 0 1 0 COST 0 1 0 DRS TOS setting succeeded 0xC0 Prec PRECEDENCE 3 bits D Delay T Throughput R Reliability C Cost 0 not used Prec D T ...

Page 519: ...g the maintenance com mand Note The designated IP address cannot be applied when the DHCP is set to Enabled Assign the DHCP setting to Disable before performing this IP address assignment Line 1 Line 2 Select the communication speed AUTO Auto Negotiation default 100M 100 Mbps fixed mode 10M 10 Mbps fixed mode Line 3 Select the Duplex mode FULL Full Duplex mode HALF Half Duplex mode Line 4 Result i...

Page 520: ...e maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter the number of RTP Start Port in the range of 1024 64510 default 1024 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET STARTPORT 1024 RTP Start Port Number setting succeeded Line 1 Line 2 Enter the VLAN_ID in the range of 1 4094 Line 3 Enter the COS in the range of 0 7 Line 4 Enter the IP Address of VLAN Line 5 Enter the Subnet Mask of VLAN Line 6 Result is shown MC MG SET VLAN ...

Page 521: ...20Ω 120nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 Line 1 Select the Ringer Pattern from the following 1 0 35 seconds ON 0 3 seconds OFF 0 35 seconds ON default 2 0 4 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 4 seconds ON 3 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 2 sec onds ON 4 0 2 seconds ON 0 4 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 5 0 25 seconds ON 0 25 seconds OFF 0 25 seconds ON 0 25 seconds OFF Line 2...

Page 522: ...Ω 1000Ω 220nF 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 600Ω 0 default 900Ω 900Ω 1 900Ω 800Ω 50nF 2 600Ω 600Ω 3 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 600Ω 0 default 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 600Ω 3 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 4 600Ω 600Ω 5 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω 600Ω 0 default 600Ω 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 1 ...

Page 523: ... exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 0 FAX echo canceller is ON default 1 FAX echo canceller is OFF Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DSP_ECFB 0 DSP ECFB Mode setting complete Line 1 Select the Training feature mode of EC ON Training function is valid OFF Training function is invalid default Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET EC_TRAINING ON EC Training setting succeeded Line 1 Enter ...

Page 524: ...nder PAD Fax Sender PAD is limited to 20dB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 8 Setting Internal Music on Hold type Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter the Fax Receiver PAD value in the range of 0 20 after the command name default 3 L...

Page 525: ...ing the maintenance com mand 11 Setting Pre Ringing Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter ON or OFF after the command name ON Open valid Reverse invalid OFF Open invalid Reverse valid default Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET OPEN ON Open Reverse setting succeeded Line 1 Enter the PAD value in the range of 10dB 2...

Page 526: ...and 14 Setting DSP smooth PAD mode Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 to specify the Frequency of Ringer 0 20 Hz default 1 25 Hz Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET RINGFREQ 0 Frequency of Ringer setting succeeded frequency is 20Hz Line 1 Enter the PAD value in the range of 10dB 20dB after the command nam...

Page 527: ... exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter ENABLE or DISABLE ENABLE Stutter Dial Tone is valid DISABLE Stutter Dial Tone is invalid default Line 2 result is shown MC MG SET STUTTERDT ENABLE Stutter Dial Tone setting succeeded Line 1 Enter ON or OFF whether the ringer of both channels ring simultaneously or not ON Ringer timing synchronizes OFF Ringer timing does not synchronize de fault Line 2...

Page 528: ... VALUE 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 2 16μF 0 default 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 1 600Ω 2 16μF 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 2 600Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 2 16μF 3 600Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 4 600Ω 2 16μF 800Ω 100Ω 50nF 5 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 220Ω 820Ω 120nF 220Ω 820Ω 120nF 0 default 220Ω 820Ω 120nF 600Ω 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 Line 1 Select the Number Detection OFF Invalid default ON Valid Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET CAR_DETECT OFF CAR Detecti...

Page 529: ...IND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 0 default 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 1 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 2 16μF 0 default 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 1 600Ω 2 16μF 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 2 600Ω 2 16μF 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 3 600Ω 600Ω 2 16μF 4 600Ω 600Ω 5 600Ω 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 6 600Ω 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 7 900Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 2 16μF 8 900Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 9 900Ω 2 16μF 800Ω 100Ω 50nF ...

Page 530: ... assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 0 FAX echo canceller is ON default 1 FAX echo canceller is OFF Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DSP_ECFB_MG 0 DSP ECFB Mode setting complete Line 1 Select DTMF Cutoff Timer 0 20 ms default 1 10 ms Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME 0 DTMF Cutoff Time setting succeeded L...

Page 531: ...IP to PSTN direction when Fax signal is detected Note 2 The total PAD value Sender PAD Fax Sender PAD is limited to 20dB Note 3 To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter the Change Effective Timer 0 Invalid to change to Fax mode 1 5 Possible to change to Fax mode within 1 5 minutes default 1 minute OFF Always possible to...

Page 532: ...2 Setting DSP smooth PAD mode Line 1 Enter the Incoming call abandon timer 0 2 0 6 seconds default 1 3 seconds 2 1 second Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET IC_ABANDON_TIME 0 I C Call Abandon Timer setting succeeded Line 1 Enter the Loop Prohibition timer 0 15 0 608 ms default 1 128 ms 2 176 ms 3 224 ms 4 272 ms 5 320 ms 6 368 ms 7 416 ms 8 464 ms 9 512 ms 10 560 ms 11 656 ms 12 704 ms 13 752 ms 14 ...

Page 533: ... before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter a value of smooth PAD 1 5 OFF OFF Set smooth PAD mode to OFF 1 2 0dBm default 2 5 2dBm 3 2 1dBm 4 0dBm 5 4 2dBm Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET SMOOTH_PAD_MG 1 Smooth PAD Model setting succeeded Line 1 Line 2 Enter RVS mode ROA Reversal on Answer default ROS Reversal on Seizure Line 3 Result is shown MC MG SET RVS_AUST Reverse Watch ROA ROS RO...

Page 534: ...4 To show Health Check Receive Timer The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE The current setting of DRS address and port number is shown MC MG SHOW DRSADDRESS IP Address Port Number Primary 150 10 1 100 3456 Secondary 0 0 0 0 3456 Tertiary 0 0 0 0 3456 Fourth 0 0 0 0 3456 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DRSTOS DRS TOS is 0xC0 PRECEDENCE 6 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILIT...

Page 535: ...ine 4 Default Gateway is shown MC MG SHOW IPADDRESS IP Address 150 10 1 101 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 150 10 1 254 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW STARTPORT RTP Start Port Number is 1024 Line 4 7 Version information of hardware boot program and firmware is shown respectively MC MG SHOW VERSION MC MG COT Maintenance command Version 1 00 2003 06 03 Version information Hardware MC...

Page 536: ...splayed 10 To show Warning Tone control The current VLAN setting is shown MC MG SHOW VLAN DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 1 0 10 123 123 123 255 255 255 0 MC MG SHOW VLAN DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK MC MG SHOW WARNING_TONE Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP TDM side The current setting is shown ...

Page 537: ...mode of echo canceller Currently registered Burst Ringer Pattern is shown MC MG SHOW BURSTPATTERN Burst Ringer Pattern number is 5 0 25s ON 0 25s OFF 0 25s ON 0 25s OFF The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW CODEC_COEF CH00 0 CH01 5 CH02 1 CH03 0 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DSP_ECFB DSP ECFB Mode is 0 MC MG SHOW EC_TRAINING EC Training is ON The current setting is shown ...

Page 538: ... FAXERRORDETECT FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute MC MG SHOW FAXRECVPAD FAX Receiver PAD is 4 The current FAX receiver PAD value LAN terminal direction setting is shown MC MG SHOW FAXSENDPAD FAX Sender PAD is 0 The current FAX sender PAD value terminal LAN direction setting is shown The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW MUSICTYPE Music on Hold Type is 1 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW OPEN Op...

Page 539: ... of the analog terminal to the IP The current receiver PAD value LAN terminal direction setting is shown MC MG SHOW PAD Default Receiver PAD is 3 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW PRERINGING Pre Ringing is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW RINGFREQ Frequency of Ringer is 20Hz MC MG SHOW SENDPAD Default Sender PAD is 0 The current sender PAD value terminal LAN direction setting is sh...

Page 540: ...tter Dial Tone 16 To show Synchronous Ringing The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW SMOOTH_PAD Smooth PAD Mode is 3 Registered setting is shown MC MG SHOW STUTTERDT Stutter Dial Tone is DISABLE Registered setting is shown MC MG SHOW SYNCRINGING Synchronous Ringing is ON ...

Page 541: ...feature mode of echo canceller The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW CAR_DETECT CAR Detecting is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW CODEC_COEF_MG CH00 0 CH01 3 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DSP_ECFB_MG DSP ECFB Mode is 0 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME DTMF Cutoff Timer is 0 20ms The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW EC_TRAINING_MG EC Training is ON ...

Page 542: ...MG FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute MC MG SHOW FAXRECVPAD_MG FAX Receiver PAD is 4 The current FAX receiver PAD value PSTN LAN direction setting is shown MC MG SHOW FAXSENDPAD_MG FAX Sender PAD is 0 The current FAX sender PAD value LAN PSTN direction setting is shown The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW IC_ABANDON_TIME I C Call Abandon Timer is 0 6sec The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW NO_LOOP...

Page 543: ... To show Auto Polarity The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW RELEASE_SIGNAL Release Signal is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW SMOOTH_PAD_MG Smooth PAD Mode is 3 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW RVS_AUST Reverse Watch AU is ROA The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW AUTO_POLARITY Auto Polarity is ON ...

Page 544: ...TP server When the destination file name is not entered file name of transferred folder is used automatically Line 1 Specify the VLAN_ID to be deleted in the range of 1 4095 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG DELETE VLAN 1 VLAN deleting succeeded Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Select either Y or N i e Yes No Line 4 Result is shown Line 5 MC MG SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off in progress Do you need save N Y Y Con...

Page 545: ...MMAND F To exit the maintenance command Normal occasion without any change to be saved Note When the exit command is executed on the OS prompt key operation turns unaccepted In this case press the CTRL C keys simultaneously to display the OS prompt again Line 1 Specify the IP Address of TFTP Server after the Command Name e g 10 41 1 150 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG PUT CONFIGDATA 10 41 1 150 Confi...

Page 546: ...Line 1 Line 2 When SAVE command is not ex ecuted after changing configura tion data Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Select Y to make the changed configuration data effective and exit the maintenance command Line 8 Result is shown Line 9 Back to the OS prompt MC MG EXIT Configuration data was changed Don t power off in progress y Saves and Exit n Exit without saving c Cancel y n c y Configuratio...

Page 547: ...entering command IP address form is incorrect IP address is entered in incorrect form VLAN ID is no more registered VLAN ID is not registered because entered value is over the maxi mum Sub command is missing Sub command is not entered when entering command Invalid parameter value Entered sub command value is incorrect Invalid sub command Entered sub command is incorrect Command is abnormally termi...

Page 548: ...ently In the case of some failure of MCMG Power Failure Transfer PFT connects C O lines and analog terminals directly and provides emergency line Note Note For the PFT service on the UG50 a station line connected to the PFT port cannot be used as a station line for the system Be sure to connect a terminal that can be used as telephone to the PFT port Terminals such as a FAX terminal are not allowe...

Page 549: ... in the System Note Internal PHI BRI controls the signaling data which is accommodated in Telephony Server Call control between Internal PHI BRI and MCMG is executed via TCP IP port of the system Signaling Control Data Voice Data Analog Telephone Analog Telephone MCMG Card Box IPT erminal Telephony Server Internal PHI BRI PSTN PH to control this operation ...

Page 550: ...time out timer 150 sec onds expires on MG side a when both MG side and MC side are not used immediately switched to PFT available as PFT line b when any calls are in progress on MG side and MC side is not used switched to PFT after cut ting off MG side available as PFT line c when MG side is not used and any calls are in progress on MC side switched to PFT after re booting on detecting the call co...

Page 551: ...ver is established Release of the lines activating over PFT function are supervised PFT is canceled starting from the recovered lines activated by PFT function LC COT VoIP CODER Interface to LAN MC0 MC1 MG0 MG1 MC2 PSTN MC MG PFT MC3 MCMG IP Network Change over when failure occurs Change over when failure occurs LC Line Circuit COT Central Office Trunk PFT Power Failure Transfer ...

Page 552: ... Data Programming Manual Business Paging Access Dialing the access code of Paging Access on station ATTCON the caller can access the paging equipment to page anyone over the speaker The paged person can answer the call by dialing the Paging Answer access code on any station Mr OO amplifier speaker MCMG 1 2 1 After dialing the access code of Paging the caller pages Mr OO over the speaker Non Delay ...

Page 553: ... the transferring party pages Mr OO over the speaker Non Delay system wait Delay system wait after hang up Paging Transfer Supervision release 3 Mr OO answers by dialing the access code of Paging Answer 4 Non Delay system After connecting to the transferring party Mr OO can talk to the held party when the transferring party releases Delay Operation After ringing and connecting to the transferring ...

Page 554: ...f Priority Paging the station ATTCON is allowed to access paging trunk in terrupting other user s paging in progress interrupted Mr OO amplifier speaker MCMG 1 2 1 during paging trunk is used 2 Dial the access code of Priority Paging first and then dial the access code of Paging Access ...

Page 555: ...all Forwarding Don t Answer is activated the LCD on the DtermIP does not display to inform the execution of call forwarding d Analog C O line corresponding to PB signal is only applicable e DtermIP stations must assign a My Line on Line Feature key beforehand f All the virtual lines of C O trunk excepting My Line can be assigned as Trunk Line Appearance D lines on one DtermIP station e g On 16 but...

Page 556: ...ndication on DtermIP l This feature is not applied to the outside call via ISDN line m To send out Hooking signal to the destination party assign the Route Class data of COT route to HKS 1 n When originating a call DtermIP station hears dummy tone from the own system Assign the dummy tone by the 2nd DT parameter of ASPA command ASPA 2nd DT 0 Second DT is not sent 1 2nd DT Second DT is sent o Numbe...

Page 557: ...1U MPC MCMG Box MG 4LC2COTA Size of MCMG Box Unit mm inch 400 0 1 3 75 43 8 1 72 430 0 1 4 93 MG1 MC1 MC3 MG MC MG0 MC0 MC2 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MC1 MC0 MC2 MC3 MG1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC 297 0 11 6 43 0 1 72 210 0 8 26 Unit mm inch MG1 MC1 MC3 MG MC MG0 MC0 MC2 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MC1 MC0 MC2 MC3 MG1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC ...

Page 558: ...X auto detect is activated on timer timeout Timer 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 0M fixed to voice mode Jitter Buffer Static 10 300 msec in 10 msec steps Dynamic 10 300 msec Quality of Service QoS ToS IP Precedence Supported DiffServ Supported VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagging VLAN VLAN bit Priority bit LAN Interface 100 Mbps 10 Mbps auto negotiation Half Full Duplex RJ 45 Connector 1 Port IP Address Assignment DHCP is su...

Page 559: ...nd Brazil PAD Control for voice transmission 10 20 dB 1dB step Default value analog LAN 0 dB LAN analog 0 dB FAX PAD for data transmis sion as voice data 0 20 dB 1 dB step FAX PAD value is added to Voice PAD The sum of FAX PAD and Voice PAD is limited to 15 dB Default value analog LAN 0 dB LAN analog 3 dB Stutter Dial Tone Supported Caller ID Only for North America Not supported Momentary Open Sup...

Page 560: ...ed Available in idle or loop closing state Caller ID for North Ameri ca Not Supported Call Metering Pulse Detec tion for Australia Not Supported Line Fault Detection for Australia Not Supported AC Clearing for Australia Not Supported Selection Signal DTMF only DP is not supported Automatic Polarity Reverse Supported except for North America REVERSAL ON IDLE Not Supported REVERSAL ON ANSWER REVERSA...

Page 561: ...LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC MC0 MC3 connector MG0 MG1 connector Ether connector PWR lamp ALM lamp PFTRD connector RESET switch CONSOLE connector MUSIC connector MC MG OPERATION lamp MC MG ON LINE lamp PFT is provided MG1 MC1 MC3 MG MC MG0 MC0 MC2 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MC1 MC0 MC2 MC3 MG1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC MC0 MC3 connector MG0 MG1 connector Ether connec...

Page 562: ...N Interface RJ 11 Connected to Analog Line MC0 MC1 when PFT is acti vated MG1 MC0 Analog terminal or fax is con nected RJ 11 Connected to C O Line when PFT is activated MC1 MC2 RJ 11 MC3 CONSOLE Interface for Maintenance Console RJ 45 serial connection CONSOLE cable RJ 45 RS 232C is used MUSIC External Music On Hold con nection 3 5 φ mini jack monaural type PFTRD Not used ...

Page 563: ...rt link Note Lights when physically connected to IP network Flash Flashes green in 0 67 second cycle when sending receiving IP Packet OFF Port link is not established 100M Green Lights when transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Remains OFF when transmission speed is 10 Mbps MC ON LINE MC Green See Lamp Indication and Status for the detail explanations of the lamp indication OPERATION MC0 Green OPERAT...

Page 564: ...d L L L BOOT Waiting for entering of ESC key L L L L BOOT has been completed Fs Fs Fs Fs Registration of MC has started Fs Fs Registration of MG has started L Fs Fs Fs Fs Registration of MC has been completed L Fs Fs Registration of MG has been completed L CH0 MC is vacant L CH1 MC is vacant L CH2 MC is vacant L CH3 MC is vacant L CH0 MG is vacant L CH1 MG is vacant L Fr CH0 MC is Make Busy L Fr C...

Page 565: ...e to make proper connection to grounding less than 10Ω As MCMG has PSTN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MCMG and AC power adapter without Ground connection NAME FUNCTION AC power inlet Connected to AC DC adapter with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft AC 100V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 230V...

Page 566: ...TM command 3456 UDP MCMG MC side Registration 3457 UDP MCMG MG side Registration 50000 UDP MCMG MC side iLP PM 50001 UDP MCMG MG side iLP PM 10001 UDP Peer to Peer MC side Pre H 245 negotiation 10002 UDP Peer to Peer MG Side Pre H 245 negotiation 1024 TCP Peer to Peer H 245 Allocated by Operating System 1024 64510 UDP Peer to Peer RTP Changing an initial value by using the configuration command SE...

Page 567: ... 5 or higher a maximum of 100 m Line Cable For the connection between an Analog Terminal and an MC use a Modular Cable with an RJ 11 Modular Jack For the connection to PSTN network use a Modular Cable with an RJ 11 Modular Jack CONSOLE Cable RJ 45 RS 232C serial cable for maintenance console Audio Cable Microphone Input for external Music On Hold source 3 5 φ mini jack monaural type 2 Firmware Pro...

Page 568: ...I BRI Internal PHE module with the ADPM command 3 The connection via NAT and dial up access is not available 4 Internal PHI BRI performs the Health Check of MCMG between Internal PHI BRI and MCMG 5 PFT connects the following port MC0 MG0 MC1 MG1 PFT does not connect MC2 and MC3 to any port 6 PFT operation is released when registration of MG has been completed and call origination is ready 7 The MC...

Page 569: ... command Data is reflected to Sys tem Data after this assignment 9 Assign Quality of Service QoS setting for Internal PHI BRI in ALOCL command LOC ID 0 Assign QoS of signaling packet for MG in AMGIL command and QoS of voice packet in AMGVL AIVCL com mand 10 PAD value and Echo Canceler data assigned in APDIL APDCL command has priority When assigning the Echo Canceler per location ID use AMGVL comma...

Page 570: ...d external internal music resources as Music on Hold External internal Music on Hold data is assigned by AMGIL command per MG 21 MCMG does not support Caller ID Display Number Display When connecting a terminal having its function to MG turned off the function of the terminal 22 When Trunk Soft Hold Timer is effective the call originating party will be charged when the timer expires 23 A Conferenc...

Page 571: ...rence If conference leader will use line connected to MCMG use a line that can send release signal 2 When using Blind Transfer If you transfer a call to a line connected to MCMG the following are required to perform call transfer The destination responds to the call The destination receives polarity inversion signal 3 When using Location Diversity MG data need to be assigned to all channels althou...

Page 572: ...o 1U MPC fixing two screws on right and left sides ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required MCMG Card SCA 4LC2COTA bracket to mount on 19 inch rack 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis MG1 MC1 MC3 MG MC MG0 MC0 MC2 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MC1 MC0 MC2 MC3 MG1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC MG1 MC1 MC3 MG MC MG0 MC0 MC2 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MC1 MC0 MC2 MC3 M...

Page 573: ...connection to the MCMG Card Box MCMG Card Box provides the following in terfaces Connection to LAN Connection to PSTN Connection of Analog Telephone G3 Fax Machine Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console Connection to Audio Equipment for external music Power Supply MG1 MC1 MC3 MG MC MG0 MC0 MC2 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MC1 MC0 MC2 MC3 MG1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC ...

Page 574: ...one source Input impedance from the external hold tone source needs to be within the ranges of 8Ω 50kΩ Make sure not to exceed this range Note 2 If audio equipment has a ground terminal be sure to make proper connection to grounding of audio equip ment Note 3 Do not connect LAN and PSTN line here These cables are connected in 7 3 Startup MCMG and Basic Tests MG1 MC1 MC3 MG MC MG0 MC0 MC2 ALM PWR E...

Page 575: ...P 1 AC power cable connection Connect AC power cable to AC Power Inlet on the rear panel of MCMG Fix the AC power cable with the stopper MCMG Card SCA 4LC2COTA MCMG Box MG 4LC2COTA REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected to AC Power supply connected to AC Power supply AC power cable stopper REAR ...

Page 576: ...ONSOLE cable STEP 3 Connect analog terminals to MC0 through MC3 connectors on the front panel Note that MC0 and MC1 provides PFT function Note PSTN lines and LAN cables are connected in 7 3 Startup MCMG and Basic Tests Do not connect these cables here MG1 MC1 MC3 MG MC MG0 MC0 MC2 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MC1 MC0 MC2 MC3 MG1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC CONSOLE cable CONSOLE conn...

Page 577: ...l PHI BRI Data Assignment 2 MG Data Assignment Note 1 3 Internal PHE Data Assignment 4 MC Data Assignment STEP 1 Data Assignment by PCPro 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 1 Selection whether to use DHCP server 2 Network Data Assignment STEP 4 Config...

Page 578: ...BRI data assignment is necessary About the procedure for the Internal PHI BRI data assignment refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including Internal PHI BRI is also there 2 MG Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 186 b6 1 ISDN MG COT is in service INDEX 187 00 Fixed INDE...

Page 579: ...ing assignment is necessary CDN 71 IP FAX data CDN 72 Jitter Buffer Size for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Size for IP FAX ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data for Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting procedure is shown below Note Virtual trunk occupies one group For example if even one channel is registered for Virtual Trunk the group is occupie...

Page 580: ...2 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 G05 LV0 LV7 2 0 2 RT TK LENS 1 255 1 255 MG U G 00 07 0 3 LV 0 7 00 23 1 2 0...

Page 581: ... hold input gain adjustment 0 0dB 1 10dB gain 2 15dB gain 3 20dB gain 4 15 Not used Country Code Australia Hong Kong Japan Korea Malaysia Mexico New Zealand North America Singapore Taiwan U K Law of A D conversion Australia A law Hong Kong μ law Japan μ law Korea μ Α law Malaysia A law Mexico A law New Zealand A law North America μ law Singapore A law Taiwan μ law U K A law Other μ Α law Receive c...

Page 582: ...his check box when setting data for PAD value of MG PAD Information This parameter is available only when the check box of Setting of PAD is ON No 1 The PAD value of MG when DtermIP Soft Phone INASET is connected No 2 The PAD value of MG when Analog MC Digital MC is connected No 3 The PAD value of MG when IPPAD is connected No 4 The PAD value of MG when MG is connected Note The PAD value of MG COT...

Page 583: ...l on station number composition b0 0 1 1 digit station number is not used used b1 0 1 2 digit station number is not used used b2 0 1 3 digit station number is not used used b3 0 1 4 digit station number is not used used b4 0 1 5 digit station number is not used used SYS3 INDEX 0 Assign the ringing pattern when a call from the C O line terminates to a station Normally 21 is assigned in hexadecimal ...

Page 584: ...mbers NND Assign the total station number digits ASPA Assignment of Special Access Code ACC Assign the Access Code using the 1st DC specified by the ANPD command ATNR Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class Data Assign the Connection Restriction Data between Originating Tenant OGTN and Terminating Tenant TMTN When ASYD SYS1 INDEX 94 b0 0 is assigned Multiple Tenant Service is in service assign the ...

Page 585: ... T 30 in the combo box PAYSIZ x Select the Payload Size 10ms 40ms required for G 711 and G 726 ALOCL Assignment of Location ID Data LDM Each IP terminal is allocated a Location ID to identify its location within the network on Network Address basis By using the Location ID IP services such as Bandwidth Control and ToS Control are provided for each IP terminal TYPE Select Network Address IP ADDRESS...

Page 586: ...mark to set Cost Precedence to ON When DiffServ is selected DSCP Specify the DiffServ Code Point in the range of 0 63 Note Default settings IP Precedence Precedence 5 Low Delay OFF Throughput OFF Reliability OFF Min Cost OFF are applied when the check box is not clicked Setting of Payload Click the check box to assign the Payload data Specify the Payload Type and Payload Size in the order of prior...

Page 587: ...y this PAD No 0 15 and the setting of SW10 6 7 on IPPAD card Refer to the Circuit Card Description for more details Setting of Echo Canceller Click the check box to assign the Echo Canceller data and select one of the ra dio buttons A EC ON B EC ON A EC ON B EC OFF A EC OFF B EC ON A EC OFF B EC OFF Note When the same value is assigned to both A LOC ID and B LOC ID parameters select either A EC ON...

Page 588: ...P Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including SP PHI is also there 3 MG Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 186 b6 1 ISDN MG COT is in service INDEX 187 00 Fixed INDEX 474 Guard Timer For Originating Call MTC TC bit 0 3 MTC bit 4 6 TC Note When assigning 1H TC 64 msec ARTD Assignment of Route Clas...

Page 589: ...or IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Size for IP FAX ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data for Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting procedure is shown below Note Virtual trunk occupies one group For example if even one channel is registered for Virtual Trunk the group is occupied exclusively for the Virtual Trunk Note Do not assign any trunk data to G...

Page 590: ...2 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 G05 LV0 LV7 2 0 2 RT TK LENS 1 255 1 255 MG U G 00 07 0 3 LV 0 7 00 23 1 2 0...

Page 591: ... hold input gain adjustment 0 0dB 1 10dB gain 2 15dB gain 3 20dB gain 4 15 Not used Country Code Australia Hong Kong Japan Korea Malaysia Mexico New Zealand North America Singapore Taiwan U K Law of A D conversion Australia A law Hong Kong μ law Japan μ law Korea μ Α law Malaysia A law Mexico A law New Zealand A law North America μ law Singapore A law Taiwan μ law U K A law Other μ Α law Receive c...

Page 592: ...ick this check box when setting data for PAD value of MG PAD Information This parameter is available only when the check box of Setting of PAD is ON No 1 The PAD value of MG when DtermIP Soft Phone INASET is connected No 2 The PAD value of MG when Analog MC Digital MC is connected No 3 The PAD value of MG when IPPAD is connected No 4 The PAD value of MG when MG is connected Note The PAD value of M...

Page 593: ...1 5 digit station number is not used used SYS3 INDEX 0 Assign the ringing pattern when a call from the C O line terminates to a station Normally 21 is assigned in hexadecimal 1 second ringing 2 second pause For details refer to the Command Manual SYS3 INDEX 1 Assign the ringing pattern when a station is called from another station Ringing Pattern 1 Normally 42 is assigned in hexadecimal 2 second r...

Page 594: ...ting Tenant TMTN When ASYD SYS1 INDEX 94 b0 0 is assigned Multiple Tenant Service is in service assign the respective Tenant Number of OGTN and TMTN If not when the data is 1 assign the fixed Tenant Number of 1 for both OGTN and TMTN TRI 0 for Station to Station Calling OGTN Number of Originating Tenant TMTN Number of Terminating Tenant RES 0 for restriction 1 for permission Note For a Station to ...

Page 595: ...r IPPAD assign 0 0 0 0 MASK BIT Enter the Mask Bit in the range of 1 31 except when IP Address 0 0 0 0 is determined Mask Bit 32 is automatically set when IP Address 0 0 0 0 NETWORK ADDRESS Display only LOC ID Assign the Location ID in the range of 0 4095 associated with the IP Address When IP Ad dress 0 0 0 0 LOC ID 0 is automatically set the value cannot be changed Note LOC ID 0 is predetermined...

Page 596: ...Payload Type and Payload Size in the order of priority 1 to 4 PRI1 through PRI4 Payload Type Select one of the payload type in the combo box No data G 711 G 729 a G 723 1 5 3K 6 3K G 723 1 6 3K 5 3K Payload Size Select one of the payload size in the combo box according to the Payload Type No data 10 milliseconds 20 milliseconds 30 milliseconds 40 milliseconds 60 milliseconds Note If payload type G...

Page 597: ...Echo Canceller Click the check box to assign the Echo Canceller data and select one of the ra dio buttons A EC ON B EC ON A EC ON B EC OFF A EC OFF B EC ON A EC OFF B EC OFF Note When the same value is assigned to both A LOC ID and B LOC ID parameters select either A EC ON B EC ON or A EC OFF B EC OFF Note MCMG needs to be rebooted after station data is assigned to reflect change Confirm that ther...

Page 598: ...on the Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Req...

Page 599: ...e sure the LEDs indicate normal status PWR LED lights green Boot program automatically starts ON LINE LED light green when the sequence is completed ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT MCMG Card REAR Turn ON the power switch UP Turn ON the power switch UP MCMG Box REAR MCMG Card Box FRONT MG1 MC1 MC3 MG MC MG0 MC0 MC2 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MC1 MC0 MC2 MC3 M...

Page 600: ...er The Telephony Server acts as DRS for MCMG using Proprietary Protocol Note The setting data here is an example Assign the network data according to your network configuration STEP 1 When the boot program is started the initial display below is displayed on the screen STEP 2 Type usrConsole at the indicated OS prompt and press the ENTER key MCMG ID xxxxxx Starting MC MG COT Bootprogram Online pro...

Page 601: ...ears as follows STEP 4 Set the network data depending on your LAN environment There are two ways to set the network data DHCP server is used or not used When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used usrConsole MC MG Maintenance command Version 1 00 2005 5 16 MC MG ...

Page 602: ...TEP 5 Note Assign the IP address of default gateway and DRS to DHCP server in this case About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual Note Confirm IP address saved in DHCP server as to get IP address of MCMG anytime MC MG SET DHCP ENABLE DHCP setting succeeded ...

Page 603: ...o Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual Use SET IPADDRESS command to set the data IP address and Subnet mask of MCMG Use SET DEFAULTROUTE command to set the IP address of default gateway Use SET DRSADDRESS command to set the IP address and port number of DRS Telephony Server MC MG SET IPADDRESS 192 168 0 11 255 255 255 0 IP Address setting succeeded...

Page 604: ...gned data using SAVE CONFIGDATA command MC MG SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off in progress Do you need save N Y Y erase start erase OK write start write OK Checksum write OK Configuration data has been saved Restarting is required for making a setup reflect MC MG ...

Page 605: ... MG1 STEP 3 Check the lamp indication on the front panel of MCMG ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required MG1 MC1 MC3 MG MC MG0 MC0 MC2 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MC1 MC0 MC2 MC3 MG1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC to LAN Ether connector RJ 45 pin assignment S S R R 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FRONT Ether connector MCMG Card BOX B A 2 1 RJ 11connector pin assignment MG1 M...

Page 606: ...MC lamp OFF ON LINE MG lamp OFF OPERATION MC lamp flashes green OPERATION MG0 MG6 flashes green Note After the data assignment MCMG entry incoming originating outside call data on the Telephony Server side has been completed the corresponding ON LINE MC MG lamp lights green and OPERATION MC MG lamp will go out ...

Page 607: ... to the LAN Check the LAN Cable between the MCMG and Network Device Use a LAN Cable straight through Test the continuity in the LAN Cable Make sure the network device SW HUB or Router is turned ON If the problem is not cleared change the LAN Cable or change the network device Confirm the data setting of MGC Telephony Server and MCMG MGC Confirm the data setting of ASYD ASYDL ALOCL ADTM ALIDL ARTD ...

Page 608: ...ON Lamp lights Note 1 Note 2 4 Go to the Speech Test Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally Is speech quality okay Confirm the system message of MGC Is MG connected to PSTN physically Is MC connected to analog terminal fax physically Confirm the line cable between MDF and MCMG Test the continuity in the line cable Confirm the data of MGC and MCMG Confirm the...

Page 609: ...onnected to MC0 MC1 perform the incoming call from PSTN connected to MG0 MG1 b Perform this test when WAN error occurs STEP 1 Turn on the MCMG by switching on the Power Switch UP on the rear panel of MCMG And then confirm that initialization has been completed and ON LINE lamp lights on STEP 2 Disconnect the LAN cable and then wait until MCMG detects WAN error about three minutes STEP 3 Perform th...

Page 610: ...l Note When MCMG reboots itself due to such as an occurrence of health check timeout while maintenance com mands are executed it takes about five minutes to start rebooting On a serial connection client e g HyperTerminal start up the program and use maintenance command Enter usrConsole after the OS prompt When the maintenance command is started the following prompt is indicated on the screen MC MG...

Page 611: ... DSP P AC48104ae3 03 10 00 00 DSP kernel version DSP K AC48302ck 03 10 00 00 DSP program version DSP P AC48302ce6 03 10 00 00 MUSIC information SM0901 0900 0000 0000 H W information TEST PKG MC H W information TEST PKG MG Starting MC MG Boot program Online program Initial start wait 30sec Attached TCP IP interface to axDev unit 0 Attaching interface lo0 done Adding 7914 symbols for standalone Medi...

Page 612: ...SCA 4LC2COTA MG 4LC2COTA MC MG SET IPADDRESS 123 201 18 45 255 255 255 0 1 2 3 4 1 Command 2 Sub Command 3 Parameter 1 4 Parameter 2 Note The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command ...

Page 613: ...e control COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SET MC side 1 BURSTPATTERN Setting Burst Ringer Pattern 2 CODEC_COEF Setting CODEC Coefficiency 3 DSP_ECFB Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication 4 EC_TRAINING Setting Training feature mode of echo canceller 5 FAXERRORDETECT Setting Fax enable timer 6 FAXRECVPAD Setting Fax receiver PAD value 7 FAXSENDPAD Setting Fax sender PAD value 8 MU...

Page 614: ...w DRS Address and Port Number 3 DRSTOS To show ToS setting of DRS session 4 HC_TIMER To show Health Check Receive Timer 5 INTERFACE To show communication speed for LAN interface 6 IPADDRESS To show IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway 7 STARTPORT To show RTP Start Port 8 VERSION To show the version information 9 VLAN To show VLAN setting 10 WARNING_TONE To show Warning Tone control COMMAND N...

Page 615: ...P_TIME To show Loop Prohibition timer 12 RELEASE_SIGNAL To show Release Signal 13 RTP_STOP_DETECT To show RTP Reception Timer 14 SMOOTH_PAD_MG To show DSP smooth PAD mode 15 RVS_AUST To show RVS mode for Australia 16 AUTO_POLARITY To show Auto Polarity COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS DELETE VLAN To delete VLAN COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SAVE CONFIGDATA To save the configuration data...

Page 616: ...the screen To finish this program input EXIT after a prompt Note When the maintenance command program is activated it provides a Help Function for referring to avail able commands and sub commands After a prompt is shown request to list up the Target Help by entering or command name SET or SHOW and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when requesting a list of SET commands MC MG ...

Page 617: ...ony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual Line 1 Enter Default Gateway Address e g 150 10 1 254 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DEFAULTROUTE 150 10 1 254 Default Gateway setting succeeded Line 1 Enter ENABLE or DISABLE after the command name ENABLE DHCP is valid default DISABLE DHCP is invalid Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DHCP E...

Page 618: ... 0 1 Normal default Low Delay ON Line 4 Throughput 0 1 Normal default High Throughput ON Line 5 Reliability 0 1 Normal default High Reliability ON Line 6 Cost 0 1 Normal default Cost Precedence ON Line 7 Result is shown MC MG SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 DELAY 0 1 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 RELIABILITY 0 1 0 COST 0 1 0 DRS TOS setting succeeded 0xC0 Prec PRECEDENCE 3 bits D Delay T Throughput R ...

Page 619: ...e the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Note Port number must be the even number RTCP port number is assigned to start port number 1 odd num ber Line 1 Line 2 Select the communication speed AUTO Auto Negotiation default 100M 100 Mbps fixed mode 10M 10 Mbps fixed mode Line 3 Select the Duplex mode FULL Full Duplex mode HALF Half Duplex mode Line 4 Result is shown MC M...

Page 620: ... use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Line 2 Enter the VLAN_ID in the range of 1 4095 Line 3 Enter the COS in the range of 0 7 Line 4 Enter the IP Address of VLAN Line 5 Enter the Subnet Mask of VLAN Line 6 Result is shown VLAN ID 1 4095 1 COS 0 7 0 subnet mask 255 255 255 0 VLAN setting succeeded IP Address 172 16 1 1 MC MG SET VLAN MC MG SET WARNING_TON...

Page 621: ...nF 220Ω 820Ω 120nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 Line 1 Select the Ringer Pattern from the following 1 0 35 seconds ON 0 3 seconds OFF 0 35 seconds ON default 2 0 4 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 4 seconds ON 3 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 2 sec onds ON 4 0 2 seconds ON 0 4 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 5 0 25 seconds ON 0 25 seconds OFF 0 25 seconds ON 0 25 seconds O...

Page 622: ...ult 300Ω 1000Ω 220nF 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 600Ω 0 default 900Ω 900Ω 1 900Ω 800Ω 50nF 2 600Ω 600Ω 3 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 600Ω 0 default 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 600Ω 3 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 4 600Ω 600Ω 5 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω 600Ω 0 default 600Ω 350Ω 1000Ω 2...

Page 623: ... before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 0 FAX echo canceller is ON default 1 FAX echo canceller is OFF Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DSP_ECFB 0 DSP ECFB Mode setting succeeded Line 1 Select the Training feature mode of EC ON Training function is valid OFF Training function is invalid default Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET EC_TRAINING ON EC Training setting succeeded Line ...

Page 624: ...alue Sender PAD Fax Sender PAD is limited to 20dB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 8 Setting Internal Music on Hold type Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter the Fax Receiver PAD value in the range of 0 20 after the command name defa...

Page 625: ...ore exiting the maintenance com mand 11 Setting Pre Ringing Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter ON or OFF after the command name ON Open valid Reverse invalid OFF Open invalid Reverse valid default Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET OPEN ON Open Reverse setting succeeded Line 1 Enter the PAD value in the range o...

Page 626: ...ce com mand 14 Setting DSP smooth PAD mode Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 to specify the Frequency of Ringer 0 20 Hz default 1 25 Hz Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET RINGFREQ 0 Frequency of Ringer setting succeeded frequency is 20Hz Line 1 Enter the PAD value in the range of 10dB 20dB after the com...

Page 627: ...t before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter ENABLE or DISABLE ENABLE Stutter Dial Tone is valid DISABLE Stutter Dial Tone is invalid default Line 2 result is shown MC MG SET STUTTERDT ENABLE Stutter Dial Tone setting succeeded Line 1 Enter ON or OFF whether the ringer of both channels ring simultaneously or not ON Ringer timing synchronizes OFF Ringer timing does not synchronize de faul...

Page 628: ... mand 3 Setting CODEC Coefficiency Note The setting values are shown in the following table Setting value 2 is assigned when the product is shipped Change the data if required North America RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 2 16μF 0 default 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 1 Line 1 Select the Call Hold setting DISABLE Call Hold Mode is invalid default ENABLE Call Hold Mode is valid Line 2 Result...

Page 629: ...F 0 default 220Ω 820Ω 120nF 600Ω 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 800Ω 50nF 0 default 900Ω 900Ω 1 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 0 default 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 1 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 2 16μF 0 default 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 1 600Ω 2 16μF 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 2 600Ω 2 16μF 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 3 600Ω 600Ω 2 16μF 4 60...

Page 630: ...ive use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 900Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 9 900Ω 2 16μF 800Ω 100Ω 50nF 10 900Ω 900Ω 2 16μF 11 900Ω 900Ω 12 900Ω 800Ω 100Ω 50nF 13 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 600Ω 14 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 15 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 0 FAX echo canceller is ON default 1 FAX echo canceller is OFF Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DSP_ECFB...

Page 631: ...s limited to 20dB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Select the Training feature mode of EC OFF Training function is invalid default ON Training function is valid Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET EC_TRAINING_MG OFF EC Training setting succeeded Line 1 Enter the Change Effective Timer 0 Invalid to change to Fax mode...

Page 632: ...estart before exiting the maintenance com mand 10 Setting I C call abandon timer Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter the Fax Sender PAD value in the range of 0 20 after the command name default 3 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET FAXSENDPAD_MG 3 Fax Sender PAD setting succeeded Line 1 Enter the Incoming call ab...

Page 633: ...leased if RTP is not received exceeding the assigned timer value dur ing call retention Line 1 Enter the Loop Propitiation timer 0 15 0 608 ms default 1 128 ms 2 176 ms 3 224 ms 4 272 ms 5 320 ms 6 368 ms 7 416 ms 8 464 ms 9 512 ms 10 560 ms 11 656 ms 12 704 ms 13 752 ms 14 800 ms 15 848 ms Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET NO_LOOP_TIME 0 Loop Prohibition Timer setting succeeded Line 1 Select Relea...

Page 634: ...AVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter a value of smooth PAD 1 5 OFF OFF Set smooth PAD mode to OFF 1 2 0dBm default 2 5 2dBm 3 2 1dBm 4 0dBm 5 4 2dBm Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET SMOOTH_PAD_MG 1 Smooth PAD Mode setting succeeded Line 1 Line 2 Enter RVS mode ROA Reversal on Answer default ROS Reversal on Seizure Line 3 Result is shown MC MG SET RVS_AUST Re...

Page 635: ...session 4 To show Health Check Receive Timer The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE The current setting of DRS Address and Port Number is shown MC MG SHOW DRSADDRESS IP Address Port Number Primary 150 10 1 100 3456 Secondary 0 0 0 0 3456 Tertiary 0 0 0 0 3456 Forth 0 0 0 0 3456 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DRSTOS DRS TOS is 0xC0 PRECEDENCE 6 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 REL...

Page 636: ...hown Line 4 Default Gateway is shown MC MG SHOW IPADDRESS IP Address 150 10 1 101 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 150 10 1 254 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW STARTPORT RTP Start Port Number is 1024 Line 4 7 Version information of hardware boot program and firmware is shown respectively MC MG SHOW VERSION MC MG COT Maintenance command Version 1 00 2003 06 03 Version information Hardw...

Page 637: ... AD DRESS and SUBNETMASK are not displayed 10 To show Warning Tone control The current VLAN setting is shown MC MG SHOW VLAN DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 1 0 10 123 123 123 255 255 255 0 MC MG SHOW VLAN DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK MC MG SHOW WARNING_TONE Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP TDM side The current setting is shown ...

Page 638: ...feature mode of echo canceller Currently registered Burst Ringer Pattern is shown MC MG SHOW BURSTPATTERN Burst Ringer Pattern number is 5 0 25s ON 0 25s OFF 0 25s ON 0 25s OFF The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW CODEC_COEF CH00 0 CH01 5 CH02 1 CH03 0 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DSP_ECFB DSP ECFB Mode is 0 MC MG SHOW EC_TRAINING EC Training is ON The current setting is shown ...

Page 639: ...MG SHOW FAXERRORDETECT FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute MC MG SHOW FAXRECVPAD FAX Receiver PAD is 4 The current FAX receiver PAD value LAN terminal direction setting is shown MC MG SHOW FAXSENDPAD FAX Sender PAD is 0 The current FAX sender PAD value terminal LAN direction setting is shown The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW MUSICTYPE Music on Hold Type is 1 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW ...

Page 640: ... DSP smooth PAD mode The current receiver PAD value LAN terminal direction setting is shown MC MG SHOW PAD Default Receiver PAD is 3 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW PRERINGING Pre Ringing is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW RINGFREQ Frequency of Ringer is 20Hz MC MG SHOW SENDPAD Default Sender PAD is 0 The current sender PAD value terminal LAN direction setting is shown The curre...

Page 641: ...A MG 4LC2COTA 15 To show Stutter Dial Tone 16 To show Synchronous Ringing Registered setting is shown MC MG SHOW STUTTERDT Stutter Dial Tone is DISABLE Registered setting is shown MC MG SHOW SYNCRINGING Synchronous Ringing is ON ...

Page 642: ...iency 4 To show DSP echo canceller for FAX communication The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW CALL_HOLD CALL HOLD is DISABLE The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW CAR_DETECT CAR Detecting is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW CODEC_COEF_MG CH00 0 CH01 3 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DSP_ECFB_MG DSP ECFB Mode is 0 ...

Page 643: ...G SHOW DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME DTMF Cutoff Timer is 0 20ms The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW EC_TRAINING_MG EC Training is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW FAXERRORDETECT_MG FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute MC MG SHOW FAXRECVPAD_MG FAX Receiver PAD is 4 The current FAX receiver PAD value PSTN LAN direction setting is shown MC MG SHOW FAXSENDPAD_MG FAX Sender PAD is 0 The current FAX sender PA...

Page 644: ...rrent setting is shown MC MG SHOW IC_ABANDON_TIME I C Call Abandon Timer is 0 6sec The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW NO_LOOP_TIME Loop Prohibition Timer is 0 608ms The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW RELEASE_SIGNAL Release Signal is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW RTP_STOP_DETECT RTP Stop Detect Timer is 3sec The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW SMOOTH_PAD_MG Smooth PAD Mod...

Page 645: ...2COTA MG 4LC2COTA 15 To show RVS mode for Australia 16 To show Auto Polarity The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW RVS_AUST Reverse Watch AU is ROA The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW AUTO_POLARITY Auto Polarity is ON ...

Page 646: ...fied TFTP server When the destination file name is not entered file name of transferred folder is used automatically Line 1 Specify the VLAN_ID to be deleted in the range of 1 4095 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG DELETE VLAN 1 VLAN deleting succeeded Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Select either Y or N i e Yes No Line 4 Result is shown Line 5 MC MG SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y ...

Page 647: ...ND F To exit the maintenance command Normal occasion without any change to be saved Note When the exit command is executed on the OS prompt key operation turns unaccepted In this case press the CTRL C keys simultaneously to display the OS prompt again Line 1 Specify the IP Address of TFTP Server af ter the Command Name e g 10 41 1 150 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG PUT CONFIGDATA 10 41 1 150 Configu...

Page 648: ...ted after changing the configuration data Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Select Y to make the changed con figuration data effective and exit the maintenance command Line 8 Result is shown Line 9 Back to the OS prompt MC MG EXIT Don t power off in progress y Save and Exit n Exit without saving Configuration data was changed c Cancel y n c y Configuration data has been saved ...

Page 649: ...d when entering command IP address form is incorrect IP address is entered in incorrect form VLAN ID is no more registered VLAN ID is not registered because entered value is over the maxi mum Sub command is missing Sub command is not entered when entering command Invalid parameter value Entered sub command value is incorrect Invalid sub command Entered sub command is incorrect Command is abnormall...

Page 650: ...g PSTN Interface MG has seven analog ports and connects IP Network and PSTN Any IP terminals can originate and receive call to from analog PSTN line MC and MG usually work independently In the case of some failure of MCMG Power Failure Transfer PFT connects C O lines and analog terminals directly and provides emergency line There are following two shapes for MCMG such as Card Type and Box Type Out...

Page 651: ...signaling and is accommodated in the Telephony Server to control MCMG Call control between Internal PHI BRI and MCMG is executed via TCP IP port of the system Signaling Control Data Voice Data Analog Telephone Analog Telephone MCMG Card SCA 7COTA IPT erminal Telephony Server Internal PHI BRI PSTN PH to control this operation ...

Page 652: ... MG side a when both MG side and MC side are not used immediately switched to PFT available as PFT line b when any calls are in progress on MG side and MC side is not used switched to PFT after cut ting off MG side available as PFT line c when MG side is not used and any calls are in progress on MC side switched to PFT after re booting on detecting the call completion supervising the lines recover...

Page 653: ...established Release of the lines activating over PFT function are supervised PFT is canceled starting from the recovered lines activated by PFT function LC COT MC MG0 MG1 MC MG PFT MCMG IP Network Change over when failure occurs Change over when failure occurs LC Line Circuit COT Central Office Trunk PFT Power Failure Transfer MG2 MG3 MG4 MG5 MG6 PSTN VoIP CODER Interface to LAN ...

Page 654: ... Programming Manual Business Paging Access Dialing the access code of Paging Access on station ATTCON the caller can access the paging equipment to page anyone over the speaker The paged person can answer the call by dialing the Paging Answer access code on any station Mr OO amplifier speaker MCMG 1 2 1 After dialing the access code of Paging the caller pages Mr OO over the speaker Non Delay syste...

Page 655: ...transferring party pages Mr OO over the speaker Non Delay system wait Delay system wait after hang up Paging Transfer Supervision release 3 Mr OO answers by dialing the access code of Paging Answer 4 Non Delay system After connecting to the transferring party Mr OO can talk to the held party when the transferring party releases Delay Operation After ringing and connecting to the transferring party...

Page 656: ...ority Paging the station ATTCON is allowed to access paging trunk in terrupting other user s paging in progress interrupted Mr OO amplifier speaker MCMG 1 2 1 during paging trunk is used 2 Dial the access code of Priority Paging first and then dial the access code of Paging Access ...

Page 657: ...ine corresponding to PB signal is only applicable e DtermIP stations must assign a My Line on Line Feature key beforehand f All the virtual lines of C O trunk excepting My Line can be assigned as Trunk Line Appearance D lines on one DtermIP station e g On 16 button type of DtermIP station a maximum of 15 lines can be accommodated as Trunk Line Appearance D The remaining one line is the My Line g U...

Page 658: ...SDN line m To send out Hooking signal to the destination party assign the Route Class data of COT route to HKS 1 n When originating a call DtermIP station hears dummy tone from the own system Assign the dummy tone by the 2nd DT parameter of ASPA command ASPA 2nd DT 0 Second DT is not sent 1 2nd DT Second DT is sent o Numbering plan data for the call origination via COT must be assigned by the LCR ...

Page 659: ...U MPC module 19 inch rack mount 1U box Size of MCMG Card in 1U MPC 400 0 1 3 75 43 8 1 72 430 0 1 4 93 Unit mm inch Ether1 100M LINK 100M LINK Ether2 PWR ACT ALM LOAD MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MC MG MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MG7MC1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC ...

Page 660: ...to detect is activated on timer timeout Timer 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 0M fixed to voice mode Jitter Buffer Static 10 300 milliseconds assignable in 10 msec step Dynamic 10 300 milliseconds Quality of Service QoS ToS IP Precedence Supported DiffServ Supported VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagging VLAN VLAN bit Priority bit LAN Interface 100 Mbps 10 Mbps auto negotiation Half Full Duplex RJ 45 Connector 1 Port IP Address...

Page 661: ...il PAD Control for voice transmission 10dB 20dB 1dB step Default value analog LAN 0 dB LAN analog 0 dB FAX PAD for data transmis sion as voice data 0dB 20dB 1dB step FAX PAD value is added to Voice PAD The sum of FAX PAD and Voice PAD is limited to 20dB Default value analog LAN 0 dB LAN analog 3 dB Stutter Dial Tone Supported Caller ID Only for North America Not supported Momentary Open Supported ...

Page 662: ...vailable in idle or loop closing state Caller ID for North Ameri ca Not Supported Call Metering Pulse Detec tion for Australia Not Supported Line Fault Detection for Australia Not Supported AC Clearing for Australia Not Supported Selection Signal DTMF only DP is not supported Automatic Polarity Reverse Supported except for North America REVERSAL ON IDLE Not Supported REVERSAL ON ANSWER REVERSAL ON...

Page 663: ...MCMG Card SCA 7COTA MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MC MG MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MG7MC1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC MG1 MG6 connector MC MG0 connector PFT is provided Ether connector PFTRD connector RESET switch PWR lamp ALM lamp CONSOLE connector MUSIC connector MC MG OPERATION lamp MC MG ON LINE lamp ...

Page 664: ...ace RJ 11 Connected to Analog Line MC when PFT is activated MG1 RJ 11 MG2 MG3 MG4 MG5 MG6 MC Analog terminal or fax is con nected RJ 11 Connected to C O Line MG0 when PFT is activated CONSOLE Interface for Maintenance Console RJ 45 serial connection CONSOLE cable RJ 45 RS 232C is used MUSIC External Music On Hold con nection 3 5 φ mini jack monaural type PFTRD Not used ...

Page 665: ...rk Flash Flashes green in 0 67 second cycle when sending receiving IP Packet OFF Port link is not established 100M Green Lights when transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Remains OFF when transmission speed is 10 Mbps MC ON LINE MC Green See Lamp Indication and Status for the detail explanations of the lamp indication OPERATION MC Green MG ON LINE MG Green OPERATION MG0 Green OPERATION MG1 Green OPER...

Page 666: ... up Fs Fs Fs Fs Fs Fs Fs Fs Registration of MG has started L Fs Registration of MG has com pleted L Fs Registration of MC has started L L Registration of MC has com pleted L CH0 MC is vacant L CH0 MG is vacant L CH1 MG is vacant L CH2 MG is vacant L CH3 MG is vacant L CH4 MG is vacant L CH5 MG is vacant L CH6 MG is vacant L Fr CH0 MC is Make Busy L Fr CH0 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH1 MG is Make Busy L...

Page 667: ...roper connection to grounding less than 10Ω As MCMG has PSTN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MCMG and AC power adapter without Ground connection NAME FUNCTION AC power inlet Connected to AC DC adapter with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft AC 100V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 230V 50 60 Hz 1...

Page 668: ...mmand 3456 UDP MCMG MC side Registration 3457 UDP MCMG MG side Registration 50000 UDP MCMG MC side iLP PM 50001 UDP MCMG MG side iLP PM 10001 UDP Peer to Peer MC side Pre H 245 negotiation 10002 UDP Peer to Peer MG Side Pre H 245 negotiation 1024 TCP Peer to Peer H 245 Allocated by Operating System 1024 64510 UDP Peer to Peer RTP Changing an initial value by using the configuration command SET STA...

Page 669: ...ble Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100 m Line Cable For the connection between an Analog Terminal and an MC use a Modular Cable with an RJ 11 Modular Jack For the connection to PSTN network use a Modular Cable with an RJ 11 Modular Jack CONSOLE Cable RJ 45 RS 232C serial cable for maintenance console Audio Cable Microphone Input for external Music On Hold source 3 5 φ mini jack monaural type 2 ...

Page 670: ... the ADPM command 4 The connection via NAT and dial up access are not available 5 Internal PHI BRI performs the Health Check of MCMG between Internal PHI BRI and MCMG 6 PFT connects the following port MC MG0 PFT does not connect MG1 MG6 to any port 7 PFT operation is released when registration of MG has been completed and call origination is ready 8 The MC part cannot be used until registration of...

Page 671: ...DPM command Data is reflected to Sys tem Data after this assignment 10 Assign Quality of Service QoS setting for Internal PHI BRI in ALOCL command LOC ID 0 Assign QoS of signaling packet for MG in AMGIL command and QoS of voice packet in AMGVL AIVCL com mand 11 PAD value and Echo Canceler data assigned in APDIL APDCL command has priority When assigning the Echo Canceler per location ID use AMGVL c...

Page 672: ... G 711 or G 726 is specified in the FXPT parameter 21 When analog terminal is connected to outside via MG the terminal user can send external internal music resources as Music on Hold External internal Music on Hold data is assigned by AMGIL command per MG 22 MCMG does not support Caller ID Display Number Display When connecting a terminal having its function to MG turned off the function of the t...

Page 673: ...VOL 2 420 MCMG Card SCA 7COTA 3 When using Location Diversity MG data need to be assigned to all channels although physical connection with lines is not necessary ...

Page 674: ... to 1U MPC ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required bracket to mount on 19 inch rack 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis Ether1 100M LINK 100M LINK Ether2 PWR ACT ALM LOAD MCMG Card SCA 7COTA MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MC MG MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MG7MC1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC Ether1 100M LINK 100M LINK Ether2 PWR ACT ALM ...

Page 675: ...des the following interfaces Connection to LAN Connection to PSTN Connection of Analog Telephone G3 Fax Machine Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console Connection to Audio Equipment for external music on hold Power Supply MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MC MG MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MG7MC1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC Phillips Screw Driver ...

Page 676: ...and tuning the output level of external hold tone source Input impedance from the external hold tone source needs to be within the ranges of 8Ω 50kΩ Make sure not to exceed this range Note 2 If audio equipment has a ground terminal be sure to take proper connection to grounding of audio equip ment Note 3 Do not connect LAN and PSTN line here These cables are connected in Section 8 3 Startup MCMG a...

Page 677: ...e proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MCMG has PSTN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MCMG and AC power cable without Ground connection STEP 2 Connect a Maintenance Console PC to CONSOLE connector using CONSOLE cable REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected to AC Power supply FRONT MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MC MG MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 ALM...

Page 678: ... LAN cables are connected in Section 8 3 Startup MCMG and Basic Tests Do not connect these cables here B A 1 RJ 11 connector pin assignment 2 FRONT MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MC MG MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MG7MC1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC FRONT to FAX or Analog Terminals Analog TEL MC connector RJ 11 ...

Page 679: ... BRI Data Assignment 2 MG Data Assignment Note 1 3 Internal PHE Data Assignment 4 MC Data Assignment STEP 1 Data Assignment by PCPro 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 1 Selection whether to use DHCP server 2 Network Data Assignment STEP 4 Configurati...

Page 680: ...or the Internal PHI BRI data assignment refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including Internal PHI BRI is also there 1 MG Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 186 b6 1 ISDN MC MG COT is in service INDEX 187 00 Fixed INDEX 474 Guard Timer For Originating Call MTC TC bit 0...

Page 681: ... CDN 71 IP FAX data CDN 72 Jitter Buffer Size for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 74 Payload Size for IP FAX Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data for Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting procedure is shown below Note Virtual trunk occupies 1HW ...

Page 682: ...W6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 G05 LV0 LV7 2 0 RT TK LENS 1 255 1 255 MG U G 00 ...

Page 683: ...n hold exists External Music on hold default setting Internal Music on hold1 Internal Music on hold2 External music on hold input gain adjustment 0 0dB 1 10dB gain 2 15dB gain 3 20dB gain 4 15 Not used Note The gain value decreases when the PAD is assigned at minus value to turn up the level of external mu sic on hold Country Code Australia Hong Kong Japan Korea Malaysia Mexico New Zealand North A...

Page 684: ...r Minimum JB_MAX Jitter Buffer Maximum Setting Type of Voice Packet Service Type of service for MG COT Setting of Payload TYPE SIZE Setting of PAD Click this check box when setting data for PAD value of MG PAD Information This parameter is available only when the check box of Setting of PAD is ON No 1 The PAD value of MG when DtermIP Soft Phone INASET is connected No 2 The PAD value of MG when Ana...

Page 685: ...tation Calling Service 00 Calling Party release 01 Called Party release 10 First Party release 11 Both Party release Normally 10 First Party release is assigned SYS1 INDEX 16 Assign the number level on station number composition b0 0 1 1 digit station number is not used used b1 0 1 2 digit station number is not used used b2 0 1 3 digit station number is not used used b3 0 1 4 digit station number ...

Page 686: ...alue of MC 00 No PAD control conforms to the setting on ASYD SYS1 INDEX 4 b5 01 PAD OFF 0dB 02 3dB 03 6dB AUNT Assignment of Unit Data MG Module Group Number TYPE 1 Select 1 for Unit data assignment UNIT0 1 2 Unit 0 is used not used UNIT1 1 2 Unit 1 is used not used UNIT2 1 2 Unit 2 is used not used UNIT3 1 2 Unit 3 is used not used ANPD Assignment of Numbering Plan 1st DC Assign the 1st DC of the...

Page 687: ...t mounted an IP station cannot be assigned to a registered station multiple times Note For a detailed explanation of data assignment for a Virtual PIR see the Data Programming Manual MC ID ID of the MCMG enter the fixed MAC Address of the MCMG MC CH Channel Number of the MC assign 0 for each analog terminal connected to the MCMG FAX Data Setting Click the check box to ON when manual data setting i...

Page 688: ...onds JB_MAX Jitter Buffer maximum value 0 30 10 milliseconds Note Default settings JB_MIN 1 10 ms JB_MAX 30 300 ms is applied when the check box is not clicked Setting of Type of Service Voice Packet Click the check box to assign the ToS data for voice packet IP Precedence DiffServ Select either of the radio buttons When IP Precedence is selected Precedence Specify the precedence in the range of 0...

Page 689: ...ck box to assign the PAD data manually If not checked default value 0 is applied KIND2 Specify the PAD value of Analog MC in the range of 0 3 No PAD control determined by ASYD SYS1 INDEX 4 bit5 5 dB PAD PAD OFF 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB KIND3 Specify the PAD No of IPPAD in the range of 0 15 PAD value is determined by this PAD No 0 15 and the setting of SW10 6 7 on IPPAD card Refer to the Circuit Card Descrip...

Page 690: ...l 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including SP PHI is also there 3 MG Data Assignment ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 186 b6 1 ISDN MC MG COT is in service INDEX 187 00 Fixed INDEX 474 Guard Timer For Originating Call MTC TC bit 0 3 MTC bit 4 6 TC Note When assigning 1H TC 64 msec ARTD Assignment of Route Class Data Assign the Route Class ...

Page 691: ... FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 74 Payload Seize for IP FAX Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data for Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting procedure is shown below Note Virtual trunk occupies 1HW 4 Group For example if one channel is registered fo...

Page 692: ...W6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 G05 LV0 LV7 2 0 RT TK LENS 1 255 1 255 MG U G 00 ...

Page 693: ...n hold exists External Music on hold default setting Internal Music on hold1 Internal Music on hold2 External music on hold input gain adjustment 0 0dB 1 10dB gain 2 15dB gain 3 20dB gain 4 15 Not used Note The gain value decreases when the PAD is assigned at minus value to turn up the level of external mu sic on hold Country Code Australia Hong Kong Japan Korea Malaysia Mexico New Zealand North A...

Page 694: ...r Minimum JB_MAX Jitter Buffer Maximum Setting Type of Voice Packet Service Type of service for MG COT Setting of Payload TYPE SIZE Setting of PAD Click this check box when setting data for PAD value of MG PAD Information This parameter is available only when the check box of Setting of PAD is ON No 1 The PAD value of MG when DtermIP Soft Phone INASET is connected No 2 The PAD value of MG when Ana...

Page 695: ...ed b1 0 1 2 digit station number is not used used b2 0 1 3 digit station number is not used used b3 0 1 4 digit station number is not used used b4 0 1 5 digit station number is not used used SYS3 INDEX 0 Assign the ringing pattern when a call from the C O line terminates to a station Normally 21 is assigned in hexadecimal 1 second ringing 2 second pause For details refer to the Command Manual SYS3...

Page 696: ...ND Assign the total station number digits ASPA Assignment of Special Access Code ACC Assign the access code using the 1st DC specified by the ANPD command ATNR Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class Data Assign the Connection Restriction Data between Originating Tenant OGTN and Terminating Tenant TMTN When ASYD SYS1 INDEX 94 b0 0 is assigned Multiple Tenant Service is in service assign the respect...

Page 697: ... ID Data LDM Each IP terminal is allocated a Location ID to identify its location within the network on Network Address basis By using the Location ID IP services such as Bandwidth Control and ToS Control are provided for each IP terminal Select Network Address radio button in ALIDL command TYPE Select Network Address IP ADDRESS Enter the IP Address For the Telephony Server IPPAD assign 0 0 0 0 MA...

Page 698: ...ings IP Precedence Precedence 5 Low Delay OFF Throughput OFF Reliability OFF Min Cost OFF is applied when the check box is not clicked Setting of Payload Click the check box to assign the Payload data Specify the Payload Type and Payload Size in the order of priority 1 to 4 PRI1 through PRI4 Payload Type Select one of the payload type in the combo box No data G 711 G 729 a G 723 1 5 3K 6 3K G 723 ...

Page 699: ... Refer to the Circuit Card Description for more details Setting of Echo Canceller Click the check box to assign the Echo Canceller data and select one of the ra dio buttons A EC ON B EC ON A EC ON B EC OFF A EC OFF B EC ON A EC OFF B EC OFF Note When the same value is assigned to both A LOC ID and B LOC ID parameters select either A EC ON B EC ON or A EC OFF B EC OFF Note MC MG needs to be reboote...

Page 700: ... Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual 8 3 3 Power On STEP 1 Turn ON the power switch UP on the rear panel of MCMG MCMG Card SCA 7COTA Note When the 1U MPC has already turned on press RESET button on the front panel of MCMG to restart the ...

Page 701: ...ED lights green Boot program automatically starts ON LINE LED light green when the sequence is completed FRONT MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MC MG MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MG7MC1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRD RESET MUSIC FRONT PWR lamp Terminal Software ...

Page 702: ...on STEP 1 When the boot program is started the initial display below is displayed on the screen STEP 2 Type usrConsole at the indicated OS prompt and press the ENTER key STEP 3 MCMG command prompt appears as follows STEP 4 Set the network data depending on your LAN environment There are two ways to set the network data DHCP server is used or not used When DHCP server is used Set the following data...

Page 703: ...ress of MCMG to assign the MAC address on PCPro com mand AMGIL and AISTL 2 When DHCP Option is not used MC MG setup Input setup and press Enter key MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa MCMG s MAC address is displayed Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Set whether to use DHCP server Input y here and press Enter key Use DHCP option Get DRS address Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Set whether to use DHCP option This opt...

Page 704: ...HCP option Get DRS address Input Y Yes N No Q Quit n Set whether to use DHCP option This option is the function to get DRS address from DHCP server Input n here and press Enter key DRS1 ADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX 192 168 0 10 Assign the IP address of DRS MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa DHCP ENABLE DRS1 ADDRESS 192 168 0 10 Input Y OK N Change Q Quit y Confirm the assigned data Input y and press Enter key The...

Page 705: ...Input setup and press Enter key MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa MCMG s MAC address is displayed Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit n Set whether to use DHCP server Input n here and press Enter key OWN IP ADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX 192 168 0 11 Input the IP address of MCMG SUBNET MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX 255 255 255 0 Input the Subnet Mask of MCMG DEFAULT GATEWAY XXX XXX XXX XXX 192 168 0 254 Input the Default Gate...

Page 706: ...VOL 2 453 MCMG Card SCA 7COTA Note 1 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual ...

Page 707: ...e other device having the same IP address overlapped Is the new IP address assigned correct Connecting LAN Cable to Ether Connector ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required to LAN Ether connector RJ 45 pin assignment S S R R 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FRONT MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MC MG MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MG7MC1 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFT...

Page 708: ...een OPERATION MG0 MG6 flashes green Note After the data assignment MCMG entry incoming originating outside call data on the Telephony Server side has been completed the corresponding ON LINE MC MG lamp lights green and OPERATION MC MG lamp will go out B A 2 1 RJ 11connector pin assignment to C O line 100M LINK FRONT MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MC MG MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 MC MG...

Page 709: ... the LAN Check the LAN Cable between the MCMG and Network Device Use a LAN Cable straight through Test the continuity in the LAN Cable Make sure the network device SW HUB or Router is turned ON If the problem is not cleared change the LAN Cable or change the network device Confirm the data setting of MGC telephony server and MCMG MGC Confirm the data setting of ASYD ASYDL ALOCL ADTM ALIDL ARTD ART...

Page 710: ... Lamp lights Note 1 Note 2 4 Go to the Speech Test Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally Is speech quality okay Confirm the system message of MGC Is MG connected to PSTN physically Is MC connected to analog terminal fax physically Confirm the line cable between MDF and MCMG Test the continuity in the line cable Confirm the data of MGC and MCMG Confirm the c...

Page 711: ...rom PSTN connected to MG0 b Perform this test when WAN error occurs STEP 1 Turn on the MCMG by switching on the Power Switch UP on the rear panel of MCMG And then confirm that initialization has been completed and ON LINE lamp lights on STEP 2 Disconnect the LAN cable and then wait until MCMG detects WAN error about for three minutes STEP 3 Perform the following operation Can analog terminal conne...

Page 712: ...tenance command is started the following prompt is indicated on the screen MC MG _ machine name usually An example of indication is shown below MG ID 00004c292930 Boot program version SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A 01 00 00 00 Main program version SP3849 MCMG PROG A 01 00 00 00 H W PKG information CA CC04 001 H W PKG information CA CC05 001 DSP information DSP K AC48302ck 03 11 00 00 DSP informatio...

Page 713: ...eral components The following describes these components using one of the SET commands MC MG SET IPADDRESS 123 201 18 45 255 255 255 0 1 2 3 4 1 Command 2 Sub Command 3 Parameter 1 4 Parameter 2 Note The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command ...

Page 714: ... Setting the Warning Tone for LAN failure COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SET MC side 1 BURSTPATTERN Setting Burst Ringer Pattern 2 CODEC_COEF Setting CODEC Coefficiency 3 DSP_ECFB Setting DSP echo canceller for FAX communication 4 EC_TRAINING Setting Training feature mode of echo canceller 5 FAXERRORDETECT Setting FAX enable timer 6 FAXRECVPAD Setting Fax receiver PAD value 7 FAXSENDPAD S...

Page 715: ...ng feature mode of echo canceller 6 FAXERRORDETECT_MG Setting FAX enable timer 7 FAXRECVPAD_MG Setting Fax receiver PAD value 8 FAXSENDPAD_MG Setting Fax sender PAD value 9 IC_ABANDON_TIME Setting I C call abandon timer 10 NO_LOOP_TIME Setting Loop Prohibition timer 11 RELEASE_SIGNAL Setting Release Signal 12 SMOOTH_PAD_MG Setting DSP smooth PAD mode 13 RVS_AUST Setting RVS mode for Australia 14 A...

Page 716: ...alue 7 FAXSENDPAD To show Fax sender PAD value 8 MUSICTYPE To show Internal Music on Hold type 9 OPEN To show Open Reverse mode 10 PAD To show default receiver PAD value 11 PRERINGING To show Pre Ringing 12 RINGFREQ To show frequency of Ringer 13 SENDPAD To show default sender PAD value 14 SMOOTH_PAD To show DSP smooth PAD mode 15 STUTTERDT To show Stutter Dial Tone COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION...

Page 717: ...ND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SAVE CONFIG To save the configuration data to Flash ROM COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS GET CONFIGDATA To download Configuration Data file from specified TFTP server COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS PUT CONFIGDATA To upload Configuration Data file to specified TFTP server COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS REBOOT To reboot the MCMG COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUN...

Page 718: ...creen To finish this program input EXIT after a prompt Note When the maintenance command program is activated it provides a Help Function for referring to avail able commands and sub commands After a prompt is shown request to list up the Target Help by entering or command name SET or SHOW and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when requesting a list of SET commands MC MG SET B...

Page 719: ...erver refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual Line 1 Enter Default Gateway Address Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DEFAULTROUTE 150 10 1 254 Default Gateway setting succeeded Line 1 Enter ENABLE or DISABLE after the command name ENABLE DHCP is valid default DISABLE DHCP is invalid Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DHCP ENABLE DHCP setting suc...

Page 720: ...Normal default Low Delay ON Line 4 Throughput 0 1 Normal default High Throughput ON Line 5 Reliability 0 1 Normal default High Reliability ON Line 6 Cost 0 1 Normal default Cost Precedence ON Line 7 Result is shown MC MG SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 DELAY 0 1 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 RELIABILITY 0 1 0 COST 0 1 0 DRS TOS setting succeeded 0xC0 Prec PRECEDENCE 3 bits D Delay T Throughput R Relia...

Page 721: ...ress cannot be applied when the DHCP is set to Enabled Assign the DHCP setting to Disable before performing this IP address assignment Line 1 Line 2 Select the communication speed AUTO Auto Negotiation default 100M 100 Mbps fixed mode 10M 10 Mbps fixed mode Line 3 Select the Duplex mode FULL Full Duplex mode HALF Half Duplex mode Line 4 Result is shown MC MG SET INTERFACE SPEED AUTO 100M 10M 10M D...

Page 722: ... before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter the number of RTP Start Port in the range of 1024 64510 default 1024 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET STARTPORT 1024 RTP start port number setting succeeded Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Enter the VLAN_ID in the range of 1 4095 Line 4 Enter the COS in the range of 0 7 Line 5 Result is shown MC MG SET VLAN VLAN_ID 1 4095 1 COS 0 7 0 VLAN setting succeede...

Page 723: ...20Ω 820Ω 120nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 Line 1 Select the Ringer Pattern from the following 1 0 35 seconds ON 0 3 seconds OFF 0 35 seconds ON default 2 0 4 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 4 seconds ON 3 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 4 0 2 seconds ON 0 4 seconds OFF 0 2 seconds ON 0 2 seconds OFF 5 0 25 seconds ON 0 25 seconds OFF 0 25 seconds ON 0 25 seconds OFF Li...

Page 724: ...00Ω 1000Ω 220nF 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 900Ω 600Ω 0 default 900Ω 900Ω 1 900Ω 800Ω 50nF 2 600Ω 600Ω 3 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 600Ω 0 default 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 600Ω 3 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 200Ω 560Ω 100nF 4 600Ω 600Ω 5 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω 600Ω 0 default 600Ω 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF ...

Page 725: ...ke this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 0 FAX echo canceller is ON default 1 FAX echo canceller is OFF Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DSP_ECFB 0 DSP ECFB Mode setting succeeded Line 1 Select the Training feature mode of EC ON Training function is valid OFF Training function is invalid default Line 2 Result is shown...

Page 726: ... sender analog ter minal to IP direction when Fax signal is detected Note The total PAD value Sender PAD Fax Sender PAD is limited to 20dB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter the Change Effective Timer 0 Invalid to change to Fax mode 1 5 Possible to change to Fax mode within 1 5 minutes default 1 minute OFF Al...

Page 727: ...AD value Receiver PAD Fax Receiver PAD is limited to 20dB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Select the Music on Hold type in the range of 0 1 0 Minuet default 1 For Elise Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET MUSICTYPE 1 Music on Hold Type setting succeeded Line 1 Enter ON or OFF after the command name ON Open valid Re...

Page 728: ...l PAD value Sender PAD Fax Sender PAD is limited to 20dB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter ON or OFF ON Pre Ringing is valid default OFF Pre Ringing is invalid Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET PRERINGING ON Pre Ringing setting succeeded Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 to specify the Frequency of Ringer 0 20 Hz default 1...

Page 729: ...mmand and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter a value of smooth PAD 1 5 OFF OFF Set smooth PAD mode to OFF 1 2 0dBm default 2 5 2dBm 3 2 1dBm 4 0dBm 5 4 2dBm Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET SMOOTH_PAD 3 Smooth PAD Mode setting succeeded Line 1 Enter ENABLE or DISABLE ENABLE Stutter Dial Tone is valid DISABLE Stutter Dial Tone is invalid default Line 2 Result is shown MC M...

Page 730: ...G VALUE 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 2 16μF 0 default 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 1 600Ω 2 16μF 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 2 600Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 2 16μF 3 600Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 4 600Ω 2 16μF 800Ω 100Ω 50nF 5 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 220Ω 820Ω 120nF 220Ω 820Ω 120nF 0 default 220Ω 820Ω 120nF 600Ω 1 600Ω 600Ω 2 Line 1 Select the Number Detection OFF Invalid default ON Valid Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET CAR_DETECT OFF CAR Detect...

Page 731: ... KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 0 default 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 1 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 2 16μF 0 default 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 1 600Ω 2 16μF 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 2 600Ω 2 16μF 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 3 600Ω 600Ω 2 16μF 4 600Ω 600Ω 5 600Ω 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 6 600Ω 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 7 900Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 2 16μF 8 900Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 9 900Ω 2 16μF 800Ω 100Ω 50n...

Page 732: ...is assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 0 FAX echo canceller is ON default 1 FAX echo canceller is OFF Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DSP_ECFB_MG 0 DSP ECFB Mode setting succeeded Line 1 Select DTMF Cutoff Timer 0 20 ms default 1 10 ms Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME 0 DTMF Cutoff Time setting succeede...

Page 733: ...er IP to PSTN direction when Fax signal is detected Note The total PAD value Sender PAD Fax Sender PAD is limited to 20dB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Line 1 Enter the Change Effective Timer 0 Invalid to change to Fax mode 1 5 Possible to change to Fax mode within 1 5 minutes default 1 minute OFF Always possible to ...

Page 734: ...ter the Incoming call abandon timer 0 2 0 6 seconds default 1 3 seconds 2 1 second Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET IC_ABANDON_TIME 0 I C Call Abandon Timer setting succeeded Line 1 Enter the Loop Prohibition timer 0 15 0 608 ms default 1 128 ms 2 176 ms 3 224 ms 4 272 ms 5 320 ms 6 368 ms 7 416 ms 8 464 ms 9 512 ms 10 560 ms 11 656 ms 12 704 ms 13 752 ms 14 800 ms 15 848 ms Line 2 Result is shown...

Page 735: ...nd Line 1 Enter a value of smooth PAD 1 5 OFF OFF Set smooth PAD mode to OFF 1 2 0dBm default 2 5 2dBm 3 2 1dBm 4 0dBm 5 4 2dBm Line 2 Result is shown MC MG SET SMOOTH_PAD_MG 3 Smooth PAD Model setting succeeded Line 1 Line 2 Enter RVS mode ROA Reversal on Answer default ROS Reversal on Seizure Line 3 Result is shown MC MG SET RVS_AUST Reverse Watch AU setting succeeded Reverse Watch ROA ROS ROA L...

Page 736: ...enance com mand 2 Setting RTP Receive Stop Detect timer used for MG Based Call Retention Note This timer value is one of the conditions to determine the end of an ongoing call When receiving no RTP signal for longer than the set value MG determines that a call ends Note Execute SAVE command before exiting the maintenance command and reboot MCMG to enable the new setting P1 ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE MG...

Page 737: ...on 4 To show Health Check Receive Timer The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE The current setting of DRS Address and Port Number is shown MC MG SHOW DRSADDRESS IP Address Port Number Primary 10 41 1 100 3456 Secondary 0 0 0 0 3456 Tertiary 0 0 0 0 3456 Forth 0 0 0 0 3456 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DRSTOS DRS TOS is 0xC0 PRECEDENCE 6 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILI...

Page 738: ... is shown Line 4 Default Gateway is shown MC MG SHOW IPADDRESS IP Address 10 4 128 5 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 4 128 254 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW STARTPORT RTP Start Port Number is 1024 Line 4 7 Version information of hardware boot program and firmware is shown respectively MC MG SHOW VERSION MC MG COT Maintenance command Version 1 00 2004 11 04 Version information Ha...

Page 739: ...To show Warning Tone control The current VLAN setting is shown MC MG SHOW VLAN DEVICE ID COS VLAN1 1 0 MC MG SHOW VLAN DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK MC MG SHOW WARNING_TONE Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP TDM side The current setting is shown ...

Page 740: ...ning feature mode of echo canceller Currently registered Burst Ringer Pattern is shown MC MG SHOW BURSTPATTERN Burst Ringer Pattern number is 5 0 25s ON 0 25s OFF 0 25s ON 0 25s OFF The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW CODEC_COEF CH00 0 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DSP_ECFB DSP ECFB Mode is 0 MC MG SHOW EC_TRAINING EC Training is ON The current setting is shown ...

Page 741: ...OW FAXERRORDETECT FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute MC MG SHOW FAXRECVPAD FAX Receiver PAD is 4 The current FAX receiver PAD value LAN terminal direction setting is shown MC MG SHOW FAXSENDPAD FAX Sender PAD is 0 The current FAX sender PAD value terminal LAN direction setting is shown The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW MUSICTYPE Music on Hold Type is 1 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW OPEN ...

Page 742: ...smooth PAD mode The current receiver PAD value LAN terminal direction setting is shown MC MG SHOW PAD Default Receiver PAD is 3 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW PRERINGING Pre Ringing is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW RINGFREQ Frequency of Ringer is 20Hz MC MG SHOW SENDPAD Default Sender PAD is 0 The current sender PAD value terminal LAN direction setting is shown The current se...

Page 743: ...VOL 2 490 MCMG Card SCA 7COTA 15 To show Stutter Dial Tone Registered setting is shown MC MG SHOW STUTTERDT Stutter Dial Tone is DISABLE ...

Page 744: ...4 To show DTMF Cutoff Timer The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW CAR_DETECT CAR Detecting is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW CODEC_COEF_MG CH00 0 CH01 3 CH02 3 CH03 0 CH04 0 CH05 3 CH06 0 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DSP_ECFB_MG DSP ECFB Mode is 0 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME DTMF Cutoff Time is 0 20ms ...

Page 745: ...OW EC_TRAINING_MG EC Training is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW FAXERRORDETECT_MG FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute MC MG SHOW FAXRECVPAD_MG FAX Receiver PAD is 4 The current FAX receiver PAD value PSTN LAN direction setting is shown MC MG SHOW FAXSENDPAD_MG FAX Sender PAD is 0 The current FAX sender PAD value LAN PSTN direction setting is shown The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW IC_AB...

Page 746: ...he current setting is shown MC MG SHOW NO_LOOP_TIME Loop Prohibition Timer is 0 608ms The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW RELEASE_SIGNAL Release Signal is ON The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW SMOOTH_PAD_MG Smooth PAD Mode is 3 The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW RVS_AUST Reverse Watch AU is ROA The current setting is shown MC MG SHOW AUTO_POLARITY Auto Polarity is ON ...

Page 747: ...ater 1 To show the current setting of MG Based Call Retention 2 To show the current setting of Receive Stop Detect timer Displays the current setting of MG Based Call Reten tion MC MG SHOW CALL_HOLD P1 CALL HOLD is DISABLE Displays the current setting of Receive Stop Detect timer MC MG SHOW RTP_STOP_DETECT RTP Stop Detect Timer is 3 sec ...

Page 748: ...is downloaded from the specified TFTP server When the destination file name is not entered file name of transferred folder is used automatically Line 1 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG DELETE VLAN VLAN deleting succeeded Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Select either Y or N Line 4 Result is shown Line 5 MC MG SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y N Y Configuration data has been saved Re s...

Page 749: ...urns to the prompt of the maintenance command MC MG in default if any error occurs when Y is selected after changing the configuration data Line 1 Specify the IP Address of TFTP Server af ter the Command Name Example 10 41 1 150 Line 2 Result is shown MC MG PUT CONFIGDATA 10 41 1 150 Configuration data has been uploaded Line 1 Line 2 Enter Y or N to confirm Y Reboot N Not reboot MC MG REBOOT Do yo...

Page 750: ...tenance command MC MG in default if any error occurs when Y is selected after changing the configuration data Line 1 Normal occasion Line 2 Display changes to the OS prompt MC MG EXIT Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Select Y to make the changed con figuration data effective and exit the maintenance command Line 8 Result is shown Line 9 Display changes to the OS prompt MC MG EXIT D...

Page 751: ... Enter y Use DHCP option Get DRS address Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Enter y MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa DHCP ENABLE Setting result is displayed Input Y OK N Change Q Quit y Enter y when the assigned data is correct MC MG setup MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa MAC address is displayed Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Enter y Use DHCP option Get DRS address Input Y Yes N No Q Quit n Enter n DRS1 ADDRESS XXX XXX...

Page 752: ...UBNET MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX 255 255 255 0 Enter the Subnet mask DEFAULT GATEWAY XXX XXX XXX XXX 1 1 1 254 Enter the default gateway DRS1 ADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX 1 1 1 1 Enter the IP address of DRS Note 1 MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa DHCP DISABLE OWN IPADDRESS 1 1 1 10 OWN SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 DEFAULT ROUTE 1 1 1 254 DRS1 ADDRESS 1 1 1 1 Setting result is displayed Input Y OK N Change Q Quit y Enter ...

Page 753: ...ned configuration data OWN IPADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX 1 1 1 10 IP address is entered SUBNET MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask is entered DEFAULT ROUTE XXX XXX XXX XXX b Enter b to change the Subnet mask setting SUBNET MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX Returns to Subnet mask setting line MC MG CLEAR CONFIG SYSTEM LONG_TIMEOUT 30 SHORT_TIMEOUT 5 Configuration data initial setting succeeded Reboot ...

Page 754: ...when entering command IP address form is incorrect IP address is entered in incorrect form VLAN ID is no more registered VLAN ID is not registered because entered value is over the maxi mum Please enter sub command Sub command is not entered when entering command Invalid parameter value Entered sub command value is incorrect Invalid sub command Entered sub command is incorrect Command is abnormall...

Page 755: ...on the UG50 a station line connected to the PFT port cannot be used as a station line for the system Be sure to connect a terminal that can be used as telephone to the PFT port Terminals such as a FAX terminal are not allowed Outerview of MG COT Note MG COT Card is mounted on 1U MPC Multi Purpose Chassis module One unit of 1U MPC module can accommodate a maximum of two cards MG COT Card is mounted...

Page 756: ...system In some cases signaling data can be controlled by SP PHI even though MG COT operates in Proprietary Protocol mode For the detail refer to Consideration for SP PHI Data Assignment in Data Program ming Manual Business Note For SIP mode SP PHI which is accommodated in MPH Multi Protocol Handler of the Telephony Server handles the control signal from to MG COT MPH is the interface for the contr...

Page 757: ... time out timer 150 sec onds expires a when any calls are not in progress on MG COT immediately switched to PFT PFT line be comes available b when any calls are in progress on MG COT switched to PFT after cutting off MG side PFT line becomes available Note The PFT service is not available for the UG50 Connecting Diagram of PFT Function Release of PFT PFT is released under the following conditions ...

Page 758: ... Programming Man ual Business Paging Access Dialing the access code of Paging Access on station the caller can access the paging equipment to page anyone over the speaker The paged person can answer the call by dialing the Paging Answer access code on any station Mr OO amplifier speaker MG COT 1 2 1 After dialing the access code of Paging the caller pages Mr OO over the speaker Non Delay system wa...

Page 759: ...ng the transferring party pages Mr OO over the speaker Non Delay system wait Delay system wait after hang up Paging Transfer Supervision release 3 Mr OO answers by dialing the access code of Paging Answer 4 Non Delay system After connecting to the transferring party Mr OO can talk to the held party when the transferring party releases Delay Operation After ringing and connecting to the transferrin...

Page 760: ...f Priority Paging the station ATTCON is allowed to access paging trunk in terrupting other user s paging in progress interrupted Mr OO amplifier speaker MG COT 1 2 1 during paging trunk is used 2 Dial the access code of Priority Paging first and then dial the access code of Paging Access ...

Page 761: ...ormed Calling Name exceeds 24 characters only the Calling Number is displayed Any characters of Call ing Name are not considered c The display on the called terminal is shown like below e g When the Calling Name display takes priority Note When the Calling Number display is assigned to take priority over Calling Name display the displayed lines for the Calling Number and the Calling Name are inver...

Page 762: ...ts by Call For warding When the intermediate station hangs up the Caller information can be displayed e When Caller ID has not been received any Caller information cannot be displayed f Calling Name is not displayed even when Calling Name has been received but Calling Number has not been informed or cannot be displayed Note Refer to Data Programming Manual Business for the data assignment and oper...

Page 763: ...the LCD on the DtermIP does not display to inform the execution of call forwarding d Analog C O line corresponding to PB signal is only applicable e DtermIP stations must assign a My Line on Line Feature key beforehand f All the virtual lines of C O trunk excepting My Line can be assigned as Trunk Line Appearance D lines on one DtermIP station e g On 16 button type of DtermIP station a maximum of ...

Page 764: ...d to the outside call via ISDN line m To send out Hooking signal to the destination party assign the Route Class data of COT route to HKS 1 n When originating a call DtermIP station hears dummy tone from the own system Assign the dummy tone by the 2nd DT parameter of ASPA command ASPA 2nd DT 0 Second DT is not sent 1 2nd DT Second DT is sent o Numbering plan data for the call origination via COT m...

Page 765: ...ension MG COT Card is mounted on 1U MPC module 19 inch rack mount 1U box Size of MG COT Card in 1U MPC Unit mm inch 400 0 1 3 75 43 8 1 72 430 0 1 4 93 MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether MG6 OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC ...

Page 766: ...ct is activated on timer timeout Timer 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 0M Invalid to change to Fax mode OFF Always possible to change to Fax mode Jitter Buffer Static 10 300 milliseconds assignable in 10 msec steps Dynamic 10 300 milliseconds Quality of Service QoS ToS IP Precedence Supported DiffServ Supported VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagging VLAN VLAN bit Priority bit LAN Interface 100 Mbps 10 Mbps auto negotiation Half...

Page 767: ...upported Call Metering Pulse Detec tion Not Supported Line Fault Detection Not Supported AC Clearing Not Supported Selection Signal DTMF only DP is not supported Automatic Polarity Reverse Not Supported REVERSAL ON IDLE Not Supported REVERSAL ON ANSWER REVERSAL ON SEIZURE Not Supported PROCEED TO SEND WINK START LOOP OUT CALLS Not supported Terminal Impedance and BNW for North America 600Ω Default...

Page 768: ... PFT PFT port for emergency tele phone RJ 11 Connected to C O Line MG0 when PFT is activated without MC connection CONSOLE Interface for Maintenance Console RJ 45 serial connection CONSOLE cable RJ 45 RS 232C is used MUSIC External Music On Hold con nection φ 3 5 mini jack monaural type Grounding Terminal AWG28 14 Grounding Terminal for communication Required for Ground Start MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 M...

Page 769: ...k Note Lights when physically connected to IP network Flash Flashes green in 0 67 second cycle when sending receiving IP Packet OFF Port link is not established 100M Green Lights when transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Remains OFF when transmission speed is 10 Mbps MG ON LINE Green See for the detail explanations of the lamp indication OPERATION MG0 Green OPERATION MG1 Green OPERATION MG2 Green OP...

Page 770: ... is starting up Fs Fs Fs Fs Fs Fs Registration of MG has started L Registration of MG has been completed L CH0 MG is vacant L CH1 MG is vacant L CH2 MG is vacant L CH3 MG is vacant L CH4 MG is vacant L CH5 MG is vacant L Fr CH0 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH1 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH2 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH3 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH4 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH5 MG is Make Busy L L CH0 MG is in use L L CH1 MG...

Page 771: ...ke proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG COT has PSTN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG COT and AC power adapter without Ground connection NAME FUNCTION AC power inlet Connected to AC DC adapter with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft AC 100V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 230V 5...

Page 772: ...itial value by using ADTM command 3457 UDP MG COT Registration 50001 UDP MG COT iLP PM 1024 TCP Peer to Peer H 245 Allocated by Operating System 1024 64510 UDP Peer to Peer RTP Changing an initial value by using the configuration command SET STARTPORT from a local con sole Function TP side SP side LAN Port default Port Number default Command to Change Setting Port Number default Command to Change ...

Page 773: ...unning Terminal Software for Maintenance Console Cables LAN cable Use any of the following cables for connecting to LAN 10BASE T Unshielded Twisted pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 3 or higher a maximum of 100 m 100BASE TX Unshielded Twisted pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100 m Line Cable For the connection between an Analog Terminal for PFT use a Modular...

Page 774: ...are SCA 6COTC 3 Environmental Requirements Temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Humidity 20 90 not condensing Main Source Power AC100V 120V 230V 240V 50 60 Hz 10 Mode Installed Firmware Proprietary Protocol Mode SP 3875 6MGCOT PROG A Issue 2 0 0 0 version or later Mode Installed Firmware Proprietary Protocol Mode SIP Mode SP 3948 6MGCOT PROG A Issue 1 0 0 0 version or later ...

Page 775: ...t has priority For details refer to PAD EC Control IP PHC Support in Data Programming Manual Business 9 If the data assignment by PAD EC Control IP PHC Support is invalid PAD value and Echo Canceler data assigned in AMGVL AIVCL has priority 10 Assign CODEC in AMGVL command If AMGVL data is not assigned AIVCL data is applied For available payload type payload size refer to Peripheral Equipment Desc...

Page 776: ...e failure Therefore MG COT Card tries to originate a call regardless of Trunk failure As far as MG COT Card works correctly 20 If MG COT Card is a Conference Leader for VS32 Conference Server Multiple Party Conference RESET PROGRESSIVE the line which can send the release signal should be used 21 Hooking cannot be performed until MG COT Card receives Polarity Reverse Signal for called party answer ...

Page 777: ...mmand Data is reflected to Sys tem Data after this assignment 9 Assign Quality of Service QoS setting for Internal PHI BRI in ALOCL command LOC ID 0 Assign QoS of signaling packet for MG in AMGIL command and QoS of voice packet in AMGVL AIVCL com mand Service Conditions particular to SIP Mode 1 MG COT Card is controlled by SP PHI To activate SP PHI it is required to register Internal PHE To turn S...

Page 778: ...ard to 1U MPC fixing two screws on right and left sides ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required MG COT Card SCA 6COTA bracket to mount on 19 inch rack 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether MG6 OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5...

Page 779: ...is section shows the cable connection to the MG COT MG COT provides the following interfaces Connection to LAN Connection to PSTN Connection of Analog Telephone Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console Connection to Audio Equipment for external music Power Supply ...

Page 780: ...es of 8Ω 50kΩ Make sure not to exceed this range Note 2 If audio equipment has a ground terminal be sure to take proper connection to grounding of audio equip ment Note 3 Do not connect LAN and PSTN line here These cables are connected in Section 9 3 Startup MG COT and Basic Tests Note 4 When you turn off the power disconnect the CONSOLE cable in advance of turning off the power FRONT FRONT connec...

Page 781: ...able to appropriate AC supply Note For the safety measures against static electricity lightning struck and other electrical surges be sure to take proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG COT has PSTN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG COT and AC power cable without Ground connection REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connect...

Page 782: ...Basic Tests Do not connect these cables here FRONT FRONT MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether MG6 OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC CONSOLE cable CONSOLE connector RJ 45 serial RS 232C D sub 9 pin B A 1 RJ 11 connector pin assignment 2 FRONT FRONT MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether MG6 OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RES...

Page 783: ... 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console When Proprietary Protocol mode 1 Selection whether to use DHCP server 2 Network Data Assignment When SIP mode 1 One Time Password Assignment 2 Selection whether to use DHCP DNS server 3 Network Data Assignment STEP ...

Page 784: ...nal PHI BRI embedded in the Telephony Server So Internal PHI BRI data assignment is necessary About the procedure for the Internal PHI BRI data assignment refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including Internal PHI BRI is also there 2 MG COT Card Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG ASYD Assignment of System Data...

Page 785: ... fax connection via MG following assignment is necessary CDN 71 IP FAX data CDN 72 Jitter Buffer Size for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 74 Payload Size for IP FAX Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data for Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting p...

Page 786: ...t MG 6COT LINE MG Line Number 0 5 PIR HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17...

Page 787: ...efault setting Internal Music on hold1 Internal Music on hold2 External music on hold input gain adjustment 0 0dB 1 10dB gain 2 15dB gain 3 20dB gain 4 15 Not used Country Code Australia Hong Kong Japan Korea Malaysia Mexico New Zealand North America Singapore Taiwan U K Law of A D conversion Australia A law Hong Kong μ law Japan μ law Korea μ Α law Malaysia A law Mexico A law New Zealand A law No...

Page 788: ...ng of Payload TYPE SIZE Setting of PAD Click this check box when setting data for PAD value of MG PAD Information This parameter is available only when the check box of Setting of PAD is ON No 1 The PAD value of MG when DtermIP Soft Phone INASET is connected No 2 The PAD value of MG when Analog MC Digital MC is connected No 3 The PAD value of MG when IPPAD is connected No 4 The PAD value of MG whe...

Page 789: ...o ON Reliability Place a checkmark to set High Reliability to ON MIN Cost Place a checkmark to set Cost Precedence to ON When DIFFSERV is selected Priority Specify the DiffServ Code Point in the range of 0 63 Note Default settings IP PRECEDENCE Priority 6 Low Delay OFF Throughput OFF Reliability OFF Min Cost OFF is applied when the check box is not clicked AIVCL Assignment of IP Service Voice Cont...

Page 790: ... specify the same value to the payload size of both types It is not necessary to assign the payload type size to the whole priorities Specifying the first priority only is allowed For available payload type payload size refer to Peripheral Equipment Description Volume 1 Chapter 2 3 1 1 Bandwidth Required for Voice Traffic Setting of PAD Click the check box to assign the PAD data manually If not ch...

Page 791: ...there is no con versation in progress when rebooting Data Deletion Deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment Make sure to delete in the order of AMGIL ATRK Confirm there is no data left in AMGIL before deleting ATRK Operate the ASYD ASYDL ALIDL deletion carefully because these commands are also used by other euip ments ...

Page 792: ...assignment refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The expla nation of PHs including SP PHI is also there 3 MG COT Card Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 186 b6 1 ISDN MG COT is in service INDEX 187 00 Fixed INDEX 474 Guard Timer For Originating Call MTC TC bit 0 3 MTC bit 4 6 TC Note When assi...

Page 793: ... fax connection via MG following assignment is necessary CDN 71 IP FAX data CDN 72 Jitter Buffer Size for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 74 Payload Size for IP FAX ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data for Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting procedure is shown below Note Virtual trunk occupies one group For example if one channel is registered for Virtual Tr...

Page 794: ...MG 6COT SIP LINE MG Line Number 0 5 PIR HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ...

Page 795: ...old default setting Internal Music on hold1 Internal Music on hold2 External music on hold input gain adjustment 0 0dB 1 10dB gain 2 15dB gain 3 20dB gain 4 15 Not used Country Code Australia Hong Kong Japan Korea Malaysia Mexico New Zealand North America Singapore Taiwan U K Law of A D conversion Australia A law Hong Kong μ law Japan μ law Korea μ Α law Malaysia A law Mexico A law New Zealand A l...

Page 796: ...ng of Payload TYPE SIZE Setting of PAD Click this check box when setting data for PAD value of MG PAD Information This parameter is available only when the check box of Setting of PAD is ON No 1 The PAD value of MG when DtermIP Soft Phone INASET is connected No 2 The PAD value of MG when Analog MC Digital MC is connected No 3 The PAD value of MG when IPPAD is connected No 4 The PAD value of MG whe...

Page 797: ...e in the order of priority 1 to 4 PRI1 through PRI4 Payload Type Select one of the payload type in the combo box No data G 711 G 729 a G 723 1 5 3K 6 3K G 723 1 6 3K 5 3K Payload Size Select one of the payload size in the combo box according to the Payload Type No data 10 milliseconds 20 milliseconds 30 milliseconds 40 milliseconds 60 milliseconds Note If payload type G 711 is specified to more th...

Page 798: ... versation in progress when rebooting 4 Security Data Assignment Assign authentication data for SIP Mode ASECL Assignment of Security Data LDM Assign the One Time Password to be used for authentication procedure in MG 6COT registration ONE TIME PASSWORD One Time Password to be used for authentication procedure 4 10 digits with numerics hyphen period Note 1 AVAILABLE PERIOD Expiration date of One T...

Page 799: ...service Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 AAND Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data Assign ANI sending digit as per the Route Number and the number of digits of the Caller s Number RT Outgoing Route Number AT 0 Station outgoing CC 0 1 Self Office Distant Office KT 0 1 Expansion of Station Number Length...

Page 800: ... on the Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Re...

Page 801: ... and start its boot program STEP 2 Make sure the LEDs indicate normal status PWR LED lights green Boot program automatically starts ON LINE LED light green when the sequence is completed ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT REAR Turn ON the power switch UP FRONT MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether MG6 OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSO...

Page 802: ...ure by each mode Note DRS Device Registration Server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When MG COT Card works in Proprietary Protocol mode the Telephony Server acts as DRS which is controlling function of the Telephony Server Note SIP server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When MG COT Card works in SIP mode the Telephony Server acts as SIP server Note The sett...

Page 803: ...indicated OS prompt and press the ENTER key STEP 3 MG COT command prompt appears as follows STEP 4 Type SETUP TP to set the network data depending on your LAN environment Note 1 There are two ways to set the network data When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used Note 1 If the firmware version is earlier than SP 3875 6MG COT PROG A Ver 3 0 0 0 type SETUP to set the network data MG ID xx...

Page 804: ... 2 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual Note If DHCP server is set for use DHCP option will be set for use automatically SP 3875 6MGCOT PROG A Ver 2 0 0 0 or later If you do not assign the IP address of DRS to DHCP server It must be assigned by SET DRSADDRESS command individually Note Write down the...

Page 805: ...IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Use DHCP option Get DRS address Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Set whether to use DHCP option This option is the function to get DRS address from DHCP server Input y here and press Enter key MG ID xx xx xx xx xx xx DHCP ENABLE Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Use DHCP option Get DRS...

Page 806: ...s enter key to apply the current setting show in MG COT setup tp Input setup tp and press Enter key Note 1 MG ID xx xx xx xx xx xx MG COT Card s MAC address is displayed Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit n Set whether to use DHCP server Input n here and press Enter key OWN IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 10 Input the IP address of MG COT Card SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 Input the Subnet Mask...

Page 807: ...C Note 1 Type setup here for a firmware version of earlier than SP 3875 6MG COT PROG A Ver 3 0 0 0 Note 2 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual ...

Page 808: ... as you do not enter the one time password you cannot move on to the next step STEP 2 Type usrConsole at the indicated OS prompt and press the ENTER key MG ID xxxxxxxxxxxx Boot program version SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A 04 00 00 00 Main program version SP3948 6MGCOT PROG A 01 00 00 00 H W PKG information CA CC07 001 H W PKG information CA CC08 001 DSP information DSP K AC48302ck 03 11 00 00 DSP...

Page 809: ...er enable disable setting STEP 6 Assign network data according to the setting of DHCP server and DNS server When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used DNS server is used When DHCP server is NOT used DNS server is NOT used usrConsole MG COT Maintenance command MG COT MG COT MG COT SETUP SP DHCP Interface set Current DHCP Interface ENABLE Change DHCP Interface Y change N current Q quit Y ...

Page 810: ...lly gets IP address from DHCP server it is not required to set IP address and Default Gateway on MG COT Card Set the Ethernet Speed as follows Ethernet Speed Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed AUTO Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 2 Input new DUPLEX F full H half F ...

Page 811: ... starting the IP address setting 1 DNS server IP Address 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask of MG COT Card 3 Host name of MG COT Card Note Enter the host name in full domain format DNS IP Address set Current DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 Change DNS IP Address Y change N current Q quit Y Input new DNS IP Address 10 41 1 150 IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Ch...

Page 812: ...lt Gateway 10 41 1 254 SIP Server Host Name set Current SIP Server and Host Name SIP Server 1 2 3 20 Host Name Change SIP Server Information Y change N current Q quit Y Input new SIP Server 1 20 1 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit N Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed AUTO Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 ...

Page 813: ...ON of Installation Manual Note When the DHCP is set to ENABLE IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect Be sure to assign SET DHCP DISABLE before starting the IP address setting 1 IP Address and Subnet Mask of MG COT Card 2 Default Gateway IP Address IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Change IP Address Subnetmask Y change N current Q quit Y In...

Page 814: ...nformation Y change N current Q quit Y Input new SIP Server 1 20 1 Input new IP Address 10 41 1 200 Input new Port Number 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit N Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed AUTO Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 2 Input new DUPLEX F full H half F Don t power off in progr...

Page 815: ...ck the followings Is there other device having the same IP address overlapped Is the new IP address assigned correct Connecting LAN Cable to Ether Connector ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Ether connector RJ 45 pin assignment S S R R 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FRONT MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether MG6 OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESE...

Page 816: ... MG5 flashes green Note After the data assignment MG COT Card entry incoming originating outside call data on the Telephony Server side has been completed ON LINE lamp lights green and the corresponding OPERATION MG lamps will go out B A 2 1 RJ 11connector pin assignment 100M LINK FRONT MG0 MG5 connector MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether MG6 OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M L...

Page 817: ...cted to the LAN Check the LAN Cable between the MG COT and Network Device Use a LAN Cable straight through Test the continuity in the LAN Cable Make sure the network device SW HUB or Router is turned ON If the problem is not cleared change the LAN Cable or change the network device Confirm the data setting of MGC Telephony S erver and MG COT MGC Confirm the data setting of ASYD ASYDL ALOCL ADTM AL...

Page 818: ...RATION Lamp lights Note 1 Note 2 4 Go to the Speech Test Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally Is speech quality okay Confirm the system message of MGC Is MG connected to PSTN physically Is PFT connected to analog terminal physically Confirm the line cable between MDF and MG COT Test the continuity in the line cable Confirm the data of MGC and MG COT Confir...

Page 819: ...all from PSTN connected to MG0 b Perform this test when WAN error occurs STEP 1 Turn on the MG COT Card by switching on the Power Switch UP on the rear panel of MG COT Card And then confirm that initialization has been completed and ON LINE lamp lights on STEP 2 Disconnect the LAN cable and then wait until MG COT Card detects WAN error about for three minutes STEP 3 Perform the following operation...

Page 820: ...ted on the screen When Proprietary Protocol mode is Used MG COT _ machine name usually When SP mode is Used MG COT SIP _ machine name SIP usually Note DRS Device Registration Server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When MG COT Card works in Proprietary Protocol mode the Telephony Server acts as DRS which is controlling function of the Telephony Server Note SIP server used in thi...

Page 821: ...H W PKG information CA CC08 001 DSP information DSP K AC48302ck 03 11 00 00 DSP information DSP P AC48302ce6 03 11 00 00 Starting Boot program Online program Initial start Wait for a while Attached TCP IP interface to null unit 0 Attaching interface lo0 done Adding 10739 symbols for standalone Media Gateway COT Interface Enabled Grand Start Firmware SP 3948 01 00 00 00 Compiled on Aug 23 2006 11 2...

Page 822: ...everal components The following describes these components using one of the SET commands MG COT SET IPADDRESS 123 201 18 45 255 255 255 0 1 2 3 4 1 Command 2 Sub Command 3 Parameter 1 P1 4 Parameter 2 P2 Note The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command ...

Page 823: ... DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME Setting DTMF Cutoff Timer 9 EC_TRAINING_MG Setting Training feature mode of echo canceller 10 FAXERRORDETECT_MG Setting FAX enable timer 11 FAXRECVPAD_MG Setting Fax receiver PAD value 12 FAXSENDPAD_MG Setting Fax sender PAD value 13 HC_TIMER Setting Health Check Receive Timer 14 IC_ABANDON_TIME Setting I C call abandon timer 15 INTERFACE Setting the communication speed for LAN i...

Page 824: ...18 OWN_NAME To show Host Name of MG COT Card 19 RELEASE_SIGNAL To show Release Signal 20 SIGNALING_PORT_NO To show signaling port number for SIP 21 SIGNALING_QOS To show QoS setting for SIP signaling session 22 SIPSV_IPADDRESS To show IP address port number and host name of SIP serv er 23 SMOOTH_PAD_MG About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices ...

Page 825: ... to specified TFTP server COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS REBOOT To reboot the MG COT Card COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS EXIT To exit the maintenance command COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS SETUP To setup IP related data in dialog format This command is used to simply assign the data related to IP address COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS INIT or CLEAR CONFIG To initialize the ...

Page 826: ... the screen To finish this program input EXIT after a prompt Note When the maintenance command program is activated it provides a Help Function for referring to avail able commands and sub commands After a prompt is shown request to list up the Target Help by entering or command name SET or SHOW and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when requesting a list of SET commands MG CO...

Page 827: ...ter When DHCP is used Note If DHCP server is set for use DHCP Option will be set for use automatically If you do not assign the IP address of DRS to DHCP server It must be assigned by SET DRSADDRESS command individually MG COT setup tp MG ID xx xx xx xx xx xx MAC Address is displayed Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Enter y MG ID xx xx xx xx xx xx DHCP ENABLE Input Y OK N Change Q Quit y Enter y...

Page 828: ...5 255 0 Enter the Subnet mask Note 1 DEFAULT GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 254 Enter the default gateway Note 1 DRS1 ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Enter the IP address of DRS Note 1 Note 2 MG ID xx xx xx xx xx xx DHCP DISABLE OWN IPADDRESS 1 1 1 10 OWN SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 DEFAULT ROUTE 1 1 1 254 DRS1 ADDRESS 1 1 1 1 Setting result is displayed Input Y OK N Change Q Quit y Enter y when the assigned data is ...

Page 829: ...875 6MG COT PROG A Ver 3 0 0 0 or later Note When any abnormal data is entered the dialog asks to enter proper data until three times In the third time you enter abnormal data the SETUP command quits discarding all the entered data Note When you quit the SETUP command entry halfway through the setting all the entered data is to be discard ed F Startup SETUP SIP Input Y OK N Change Q Quit n Enter n...

Page 830: ... server E Use DHCP server default D Not use DHCP server DNS Interface set Current DNS Interface DISABLE Change DNS Interface Y change N current Q quit Y Input new DNS Interface E enable D disable E Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Specify whether to use DNS server E Use DNS server default D...

Page 831: ...e 3 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Enter new IP address of MG COT Card e g 10 41 1 100 Line 5 Enter new Subnet Mask e g 255 255 255 0 Host Name set Current Host Name No Value Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name mgcot nec com Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether to use host name Y Use host name N No...

Page 832: ...N exit N Line 4 Line 9 The current setting of the Telephony Server information host name is displayed Line 10 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 11 Enter the number of SIP server 1 20 Line 12 Asked whether to use host name Y Use host name N Not use host name Line 13 Enter new host name of Telephony Server in full domain format Up to 63 char...

Page 833: ...t Number 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit N Line 4 Line 9 The current setting of the Telephony Server information IP address port number and host name is displayed Line 10 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 11 Enter the number of SIP server 1 20 Line 12 Enter the IP address of SIP...

Page 834: ...Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 2 Input new DUPLEX F full H half F Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Select the communication speed of LAN interface 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100Mbps fixed mode 3 10Mbps fixed mode Line 5 Select the Duplex mode of LAN interface F Full duplex mode H Half duplex m...

Page 835: ...t y Enter y Use DHCP option Get DRS address Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Enter y MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa DHCP ENABLE Setting result is displayed Input Y OK N Change Q Quit y Enter y when the assigned data is correct MG COT setup MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa MAC address is displayed Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Enter y Use DHCP option Get DRS address Input Y Yes N No Q Quit n Enter n DRS1 ADDRESS XXX...

Page 836: ...n will be set for use automatically SP 3875 6MGCOT PROG A Ver 2 0 0 0 or later If you do not assign the IP address of DRS to DHCP server It must be assigned by SET DRSADDRESS command individually MG COT setup MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa DHCP ENABLE Input Y OK N Change Q Quit y ...

Page 837: ...COT Card SUBNET MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX 255 255 255 0 Enter the Subnet mask DEFAULT GATEWAY XXX XXX XXX XXX 1 1 1 254 Enter the default gateway DRS1 ADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX 1 1 1 1 Enter the IP address of DRS Note 1 MG ID 00 30 13 16 ae fa DHCP DISABLE OWN IPADDRESS 1 1 1 10 OWN SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 DEFAULT ROUTE 1 1 1 254 DRS1 ADDRESS 1 1 1 1 Setting result is displayed Input Y OK N Change Q Qui...

Page 838: ...in the former steps e g When DHCP server is not used OWN IPADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX 1 1 1 10 IP address is entered SUBNET MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask is entered DEFAULT ROUTE XXX XXX XXX XXX b Enter b to change the Subnet mask setting SUBNET MASK XXX XXX XXX XXX Returns to Subnet mask setting line ...

Page 839: ... the Line Number 0 5 And then enter the setting value default is 2 after the space CODEC Coefficient CH00 setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 2 16μF 0 default 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 1 600Ω 2 16μF 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 2 900Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 2 16μF 3 900Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 4 900Ω 2 16μF 800Ω 100Ω 50nF 5 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 220Ω 820Ω 120nF 220Ω 820Ω...

Page 840: ...0Ω 100nF 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 0 default 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 200Ω 680Ω 100nF 1 RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 2 16μF 0 default 600Ω 2 16μF 600Ω 1 600Ω 2 16μF 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 2 600Ω 2 16μF 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 3 600Ω 600Ω 2 16μF 4 600Ω 600Ω 5 600Ω 350Ω 1000Ω 210nF 6 600Ω 370Ω 620Ω 310nF 7 900Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 2 16μF 8 900Ω 2 16μF 900Ω 9 900Ω 2 16μF 800Ω 100Ω 50nF 10 900Ω 900Ω 2 16μF 11 900Ω 900Ω...

Page 841: ... in Note When DISABLE is selected the setting line of DNS IP Address is not displayed Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MG COT SET DEFAULTROUTE P1 Line 1 Enter Default Gateway Address Default Gateway setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SET DHCP P1 Line 1 Enter ENABLE or DISABLE after the command name ENABLE D...

Page 842: ... Tertiary 4 Forth 1 DRS IP Address 0 0 0 0 150 10 1 100 DRS Port Number 1024 65535 3456 3456 Line 2 Select 1 for the Telephony Server in normal condition Line 3 Enter IP Address of DRS e g 150 10 1 100 Note 1 Line 4 Enter Port Number of DRS 1024 65535 default 3456 DRS setting succeeded Line 5 Result is shown MG COT SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 DELAY 0 1 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 RELIABILITY 0 1...

Page 843: ...before exiting the maintenance com mand 8 Setting DTMF Cutoff Timer Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MG COT SET DRSATOS VALUE TOS 00 FF C0 Line 1 Enter the sub command name VALUE to set the DRS setting value Directly Line 2 Specify the value in the range of 00 FF default C0 DRS TOS setting succeeded 0xC0 Line 3 Result i...

Page 844: ...and and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 12 Setting Fax sender PAD value MG COT SET EC_TRAINING_MG P1 Line 1 Select the Training feature mode of EC OFF Training function is invalid default ON Training function is valid EC Training setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SET FAXERRORDETECT_MG P1 Line 1 Enter the Change Effective Timer 0 Invalid to change to Fax mode 1 5 Possi...

Page 845: ...ignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 13 Setting Health Check Receive Timer Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Fax Sender PAD setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SET HC_TIMER P1 Line 1 Enter the time second in the range of 120 240 at intervals of 30 seconds ...

Page 846: ... set to Enabled Assign the DHCP setting to Disable before executing this IP address setting Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MG COT SET IC_ABANDON_TIME P1 Line 1 Enter the Incoming call abandon timer 0 2 0 6 seconds default 1 3 seconds 2 1 second I C Call Abandon Timer setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SET...

Page 847: ...e use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 20 Setting signaling port number for SIP Note The designated Signaling Port Number cannot be applied when Proprietary Protocol mode Assign the SP mode before executing this Signaling Port Number setting MG COT SIP SET ONE_TIME_PASS One Time Password 123456 Line 2 Enter the password in numeric 4 10 digits 0 9 can be used One...

Page 848: ...S setting type default TOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Line 3 Precedence 0 7 low high default 6 DELAY 0 1 0 0 Line 4 Delay 0 1 Normal default Low Delay ON THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Line 5 Throughput 0 1 Normal default High Throughput ON RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 Line 6 Reliability 0 1 Normal default High Reliability ON COST 0 1 0 0 Line 7 Cost 0 1 Normal default Cost Precedence ON Signaling QoS setting succeeded 0xC0 L...

Page 849: ... value in shows the current setting Press enter key to apply the current setting shown in Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Note 1 About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual MG COT SIP SET SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server 1 20...

Page 850: ...maintenance com mand Note Port number must be the even number RTCP port number is assigned to start port number 1 odd num ber MG COT SET SMOOTH_PAD_MG P1 Line 1 Enter a value of smooth PAD 1 5 OFF OFF Set smooth PAD mode to OFF 1 2 0dBm default 2 5 2dBm 3 2 1dBm 4 0dBm 5 4 2dBm Smooth PAD Mode setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SET STARTPORT P1 Line 1 Enter the number of RTP Start Por...

Page 851: ...ting the maintenance com mand MG COT SET VLAN Please enter a parameter VLAN_ID 1 4094 1 COS 0 7 0 Line 3 Line 3 Enter the VLAN_ID in the range of 1 4094 Line 4 Enter the COS in the range of 0 7 VLAN setting succeeded Line 5 Result is shown MG COT SET WARNING_TONE P1 Line 1 Specify the mode 0 Warning Tone is not sent 1 Warning Tone is sent to IP Network 2 Warning Tone is sent to PSTN 3 Warning Tone...

Page 852: ...ONNECT_TIME E911 Connection Signal Detection Timer 0 3 0 Line 2 Enter the Connection Signal Detection Timer 0 56ms default 1 96ms 2 136ms 3 176ms E911 Connection Signal Detection Timer setting succeeded Line 3 Result is shown MG COT SET ANSWER_TIME E911 Reception Signal Detection Timer 0 3 0 Line 2 Enter the Reception Signal Detection Timer 0 56ms default 1 96ms 2 136ms 3 176ms E911 Reception Sign...

Page 853: ...5 3 The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW CONFIGDATA SYSTEM REGISTER_MODE TP FILE_INFO 2006 07 14 IP OWN_ADDR 0 0 0 0 SUBNET_MASK 255 255 255 255 DEFAULT_GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 DRS_ADDR1 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT1 3456 DRS_ADDR2 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT2 3456 DRS_ADDR3 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT3 3456 DRS_ADDR4 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT4 3456 DRS_TOS 0xC0 NETWORK LAN_SPEED AUTO DHCP_SW ENABLE The current setting is shown ...

Page 854: ...s in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual 6 To show ToS setting of DRS session Note The designated DRS TOS cannot refer when SP mode Assign the Proprietary Protocol mode before exe cuting this DRS TOS shown MG COT SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE The current setting is shown MG COT SIP SHOW DNS_SW DNS interface ENABLE DNS IP Address 10 41 2 101 The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW DRSADDRESS IP Address...

Page 855: ...n MG COT SHOW DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME DTMF Cutoff Time is 0 20ms The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW EC_TRAINING_MG EC Training is ON The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW FAXERRORDETECT_MG FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW FAXRECVPAD_MG FAX Receiver PAD is 4 The current FAX receiver PAD value PSTN LAN direction setting is shown MG COT SHOW FAXSENDPAD_MG FAX Se...

Page 856: ...hown 19 To show Release Signal MG COT SHOW IC_ABANDON_TIME I C Call Abandon Timer is 0 6sec The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW INTERFACE Setting 100Mbps Full Duplex Current setting of connection state is shown Status Speed is 100Mbps Half Duplex Link Up Actual operating state is shown MG COT SHOW IPADDRESS IP Address 10 4 128 5 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 4 128 254 Line 1 Enter ...

Page 857: ...roprietary Protocol mode Assign the SP mode before exe cuting this SIP Server shown Note About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual MG COT SIP SHOW SIGNALING_PORT_NO Signaling Port Number is 5060 The current setting is shown MG COT SIP SHOW SIGNALING_QOS Signaling QoS is 0xC0 QOS TOS PRECEDENCE 6 ...

Page 858: ...e current setting is shown MG COT SHOW STARTPORT RTP Start Port Number is 1024 The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW STATUS Register Mode TP MAC Address 00 30 13 6e f4 e4 Link State Up Speed 100Mbps Duplex Full VLAN Mode Disable DHCP Mode Enable IP Address 172 16 2 103 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 172 16 1 254 Current Drs Name Primary Current Drs Address 0 0 0 0 Registration Status n...

Page 859: ...ddress 172 16 2 103 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 172 16 1 254 DNS Mode Disable Current Sipsv Address 172 16 4 1 Encryption SIP Encrypt RTP Encrypt Registration Status Offline Registration is Started Now The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW VERSION MG COT Maintenance Command Version Infomation Hardware Main CA CC07 001 Hardware Sub CA CC08 001 Boot program SP 3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PRO...

Page 860: ...K VLAN1 1 0 0 4 128 5 255 255 255 0 The current VLAN setting is shown MG COT SHOW WARNING_TONE Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP TDM side The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW RVS_AUST Reverse Watch AU is ROA The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW CONNECT_TIME E911 Connection Signal Detection Timer is 0 The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW ANSWER_TIME E911 Reception Signal Detect...

Page 861: ...00 100 4 icmp_seq 3 time 0 ms 100 100 100 4 PING Statistics 4 packets transmitted 4 packets received 0 packet loss round trip ms min avg max 0 0 0 Line 1 Enter the IP address of the system to access Line 4 7 Connection status of the accessing system is displayed 4 lines MC SIP PING 100 100 100 4 PING 100 100 100 4 56 data bytes ping timeout no answer from 100 100 100 4 When the MG COT Card cannot ...

Page 862: ...figuration data file is downloaded from the specified TFTP server When the destination file name is not entered file name of transferred folder is used automatically MG COT DELETE VLAN VLAN deleting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y N Y Configuration data has been saved Re starting is required for making a setup reflect Line 3 Se...

Page 863: ...he prompt of the maintenance command MG COT Card in default if any error oc curs when Y is selected after changing the configuration data MG COT PUT CONFIGDATA P1 check sum 58694 0xe546 Configuration data has been uploaded Line 1 Specify the IP Address of TFTP server after the Command Name e g 10 41 1 150 Line 2 Check sum is shown Line 3 Result is shown MG COT REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y Line ...

Page 864: ...intenance command MG COT Card in default if any error oc curs when Y is selected after changing the configuration data MG COT EXIT Finished value 11 0xb Line 1 Normal occasion Line 2 Result is shown Line 3 Display changes to the OS prompt MG COT EXIT Configration data was changed Don t power off in progress Y Save and Exit N Exit without saving C Cancel Y N C Y Configration data has been saved Lin...

Page 865: ...G COT PROG A Ver 3 0 0 0 or earlier MG COT INIT CONFIGDATA Warning This command is for initialize config data If this command is executed your configuration is deleted OK Y N y It s recommended to back up your configuration really OK Y N y Initialize of configuration data was successful You need to setup config data MG COT MG COT CLEAR CONFIG SYSTEM LONG_TIMEOUT 30 SHORT_TIMEOUT 5 Configuration da...

Page 866: ...ntered in incorrect form VLAN ID is no more registered VLAN ID cannot be registered because the number of VLAN exceeds the maximum Sub command is missing Sub command is not entered when entering command Invalid parameter value The range of entered parameter is incorrect Invalid sub command Entered sub command is incorrect Command is abnormally terminated Command is terminated illegally Parameter s...

Page 867: ...G50 a station line connected to the PFT port cannot be used as a station line for the system Be sure to connect a terminal that can be used as telephone to the PFT port Terminals such as a FAX terminal are not allowed Outerview of MG COT Note MG COT Card is mounted on 1U MPC Multi Purpose Chassis module One unit of 1U MPC module can accommodate a maximum of two cards MG COT Card is mounted in the ...

Page 868: ...gnaling data can be controlled by SP PHI even though MG COT operates in Proprietary Protocol mode For the detail refer to Consideration for SP PHI Data Assignment in Data Program ming Manual Business Note For SIP mode SP PHI which is accommodated in MPH Multi Protocol Handler of the Telephony Server handles the control signal from to MG COT MPH is the interface for the control signal Call control ...

Page 869: ... out timer 150 sec onds expires a when any calls are not in progress on MG COT immediately switched to PFT PFT line be comes available b when any calls are in progress on MG COT switched to PFT after cutting off MG side PFT line becomes available Note The PFT service is not available for the UG50 Connecting Diagram of PFT Function Release of PFT PFT is released under the following conditions After...

Page 870: ...ramming Man ual Business Paging Access Dialing the access code of Paging Access on station the caller can access the paging equipment to page anyone over the speaker The paged person can answer the call by dialing the Paging Answer access code on any station Mr OO amplifier speaker MG COT 1 2 1 After dialing the access code of Paging the caller pages Mr OO over the speaker Non Delay system wait De...

Page 871: ...e transferring party pages Mr OO over the speaker Non Delay system wait Delay system wait after hang up Paging Transfer Supervision release 3 Mr OO answers by dialing the access code of Paging Answer 4 Non Delay system After connecting to the transferring party Mr OO can talk to the held party when the transferring party releases Delay Operation After ringing and connecting to the transferring par...

Page 872: ...ority Paging the station ATTCON is allowed to access paging trunk in terrupting other user s paging in progress interrupted Mr OO amplifier speaker MG COT 1 2 1 during paging trunk is used 2 Dial the access code of Priority Paging first and then dial the access code of Paging Access ...

Page 873: ...rminal is shown like below e g When the Calling Name display takes priority Note When the Calling Number display is assigned to take priority over Calling Name display the displayed lines for the Calling Number and the Calling Name are inverted In this case the first eight characters of Calling Name company name can be displayed d Caller information display is available only for the incoming call ...

Page 874: ...r information cannot be displayed f Calling Name is not displayed even when Calling Name has been received but Calling Number has not been informed or cannot be displayed Note Refer to Data Programming Manual Business for the data assignment and operating procedure of this feature ...

Page 875: ...rding Don t Answer is activated the LCD on the DtermIP does not display to inform the execution of call forwarding d Analog C O line corresponding to PB signal is only applicable e DtermIP stations must assign a My Line on Line Feature key beforehand f All the virtual lines of C O trunk excepting My Line can be assigned as Trunk Line Appearance D lines on one DtermIP station e g On 16 button type ...

Page 876: ... l This feature is not applied to the outside call via ISDN line m To send out Hooking signal to the destination party assign the Route Class data of COT route to HKS 1 n When originating a call DtermIP station hears dummy tone from the own system Assign the dummy tone by the 2nd DT parameter of ASPA command ASPA 2nd DT 0 Second DT is not sent 1 2nd DT Second DT is sent o Numbering plan data for t...

Page 877: ...on MG COT Card is mounted on 1U MPC module 19 inch rack mount 1U box Size of MG COT Card in 1U MPC Unit mm inch 400 0 1 3 75 43 8 1 72 430 0 1 4 93 MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MG6 MUSIC ...

Page 878: ... FAX auto detect is activated on timer timeout Timer 1M 2M 3M 4M 5M 0M Invalid to change to Fax mode OFF Always possible to change to Fax mode Jitter Buffer Static 10 300 milliseconds assignable in 10 msec steps Dynamic 10 300 milliseconds Quality of Service QoS ToS IP Precedence Supported DiffServ Supported VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagging VLAN VLAN bit Priority bit LAN Interface 100 Mbps 10 Mbps auto ne...

Page 879: ...ed AC Clearing Not Supported Selection Signal DTMF only DP is not supported Automatic Polarity Reverse Supported REVERSAL ON IDLE Not Supported REVERSAL ON ANSWER REVERSAL ON SEIZURE Not Supported PROCEED TO SEND WINK START LOOP OUT CALLS Not supported Terminal Impedance and BNW 600Ω Default setting PAD Control for voice transmission 10dB 20dB Default value analog LAN 0 dB LAN analog 0 dB Echo Can...

Page 880: ...ector MG5 connector PFT connector PFT port for emergency tele phone RJ 11 Connected to C O Line MG0 when PFT is activated without MC connection CONSOLE connec tor Interface for Maintenance Console RJ 45 serial connection CONSOLE cable RJ 45 RS 232C is used MUSIC connector External Music On Hold con nection φ 3 5 mini jack monaural type RESET switch MG COT Card reset switch Boot program is started ...

Page 881: ...e Lights when physically connected to IP network Flash Flashes green in 0 67 second cycle when sending receiving IP Packet OFF Port link is not established 100M Green Lights when transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Remains OFF when transmission speed is 10 Mbps MG ON LINE Green See for the detail explanations of the lamp indication OPERATION MG0 Green OPERATION MG1 Green OPERATION MG2 Green OPERATI...

Page 882: ...tarting up Fs Fs Fs Fs Fs Fs Registration of MG has started L Registration of MG has been completed L CH0 MG is vacant L CH1 MG is vacant L CH2 MG is vacant L CH3 MG is vacant L CH4 MG is vacant L CH5 MG is vacant L Fr CH0 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH1 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH2 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH3 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH4 MG is Make Busy L Fr CH5 MG is Make Busy L L CH0 MG is in use L L CH1 MG is i...

Page 883: ...roper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG COT has PSTN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG COT and AC power cable without Ground connection NAME FUNCTION AC power inlet Connected to AC DC adapter with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft AC 100V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 230V 50 60 H...

Page 884: ...l value by using ADTM command 3457 UDP MG COT Registration 50001 UDP MG COT iLP PM 1024 TCP Peer to Peer H 245 Allocated by Operating System 1024 64510 UDP Peer to Peer RTP Changing an initial value by using the configuration command SET STARTPORT from a local console Function TP side SP side LAN Port default Port Number default Command to Change Setting Port Number default Command to Change Setti...

Page 885: ...ction the following hardware is required PC running Terminal Software for Maintenance Console Cables LAN cable Use any of the following cables for connecting to LAN 10BASE T Unshielded Twisted pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 3 or higher a maximum of 100 m 100BASE TX Unshielded Twisted pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100 m Line Cable For the connection bet...

Page 886: ...MG COT SCA 6COTB Installed Firmware 3 Environmental Requirements Temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Humidity 20 90 not condensing Main Source Power AC100V 120V 230V 240V 50 60 Hz 10 Mode Installed Firmware Proprietary Protocol Mode SIP Mode SP 3948 6MGCOT PROG A Issue 1 0 0 0 version or later ...

Page 887: ... priority For details refer to PAD EC Control IP PHC Support in Data Programming Manual Business 9 If the data assignment by PAD EC Control IP PHC Support is invalid PAD value and Echo Canceler data assigned in AMGVL AIVCL has priority 10 Assign CODEC in AMGVL command If AMGVL data is not assigned AIVCL data is applied For available payload type payload size refer to Peripheral Equipment Descripti...

Page 888: ...refore MG COT Card tries to originate a call regardless of Trunk failure As far as MG COT Card works correctly 20 If MG COT Card is a Conference Leader for VS32 Conference Server Multiple Party Conference RESET PROGRESSIVE the line which can send the release signal should be used 21 Hooking cannot be performed until MG COT Card receives Polarity Reverse Signal for called party answer However hooki...

Page 889: ...reset the buffer by ADPM command Data is reflected to Sys tem Data after this assignment 9 Assign Quality of Service QoS setting for Internal PHI BRI in ALOCL command LOC ID 0 Assign QoS of signaling packet for MG in AMGIL command and QoS of voice packet in AMGVL AIVCL com mand Service Conditions particular to SIP Mode 1 MG COT Card is controlled by SP PHI To activate SP PHI required to register I...

Page 890: ...6COTB When timer timeout of control packet transmission between Internal PHE and SP PHI occurs eight times consecutively System Message 33 R is output to the Internal PHE accommodated location LENS 8 SR MGC supports MG COT Card ...

Page 891: ...screws on right and left sides ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required MG COT Card SCA 6COTB bracket to mount on 19 inch rack 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MG6 MUSIC MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOL...

Page 892: ...ection shows the cable connection to the MG COT MG COT provides the following interfaces Connection to LAN Connection to PSTN Connection of Analog Telephone Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console Connection to Audio Equipment for external music Power Supply ...

Page 893: ...ithin the ranges of 8Ω 50kΩ Make sure not to exceed this range Note 2 If audio equipment has a ground terminal be sure to take proper connection to grounding of audio equip ment Note 3 Do not connect LAN and PSTN line here These cables are connected in Section 10 3 Startup MG COT and Basic Tests Note 4 When you turn off the power disconnect the CONSOLE cable in advance of turning off the power FRO...

Page 894: ...to appropriate AC supply Note For the safety measures against static electricity lightning struck and other electrical surges be sure to take proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG COT has PSTN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG COT and AC power cable without Ground connection REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected to...

Page 895: ... Basic Tests Do not con nect these cables here FRONT MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE MG6 RESET MUSIC CONSOLE cable CONSOLE connector RJ 45 serial RS 232C D sub 9 pin B A 1 RJ 11 connector pin assignment 2 FRONT MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE MG6 RESET MUSIC P...

Page 896: ...nnection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console When Proprietary Protocol mode 1 Selection whether to use DHCP server 2 Network Data Assignment When SIP mode 1 One Time Password Assignment 2 Selection whether to use DHCP DNS server 3 Network Data Assignment STEP 4 Con...

Page 897: ...HI BRI embedded in the Telephony Server So Internal PHI BRI data assignment is necessary About the procedure for the Internal PHI BRI data assignment refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including Internal PHI BRI is also there 2 MG COT Card Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1...

Page 898: ...ction via MG following assignment is necessary CDN 71 IP FAX data CDN 72 Jitter Buffer Size for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 74 Payload Size for IP FAX Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data for Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting procedure i...

Page 899: ...COT LINE MG Line Number 0 5 PIR HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1...

Page 900: ...n 0 15 Default value is 0 False answer timing 0 15 Default value is 0 AMGVL Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control LDM Assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to MG 6COT When AMGVL data is not as signed AIVCL data setting is applied A RT MG Storing Physical Route Number for Virtual Speech Channel of MG 6COT TYPE Select one of the followings Route Specified Location ID Speci...

Page 901: ...OAD SIZE ALOCL Assignment of Location ID Data LDM Each IP terminal is allocated a Location ID to identify its location within the network on Network Address basis By using the Location ID IP services such as Bandwidth Control and ToS Control are provided for each IP terminal Select Network Address radio button in ALIDL command TYPE Select Network Address IP ADDRESS Enter the IP Address For the Tel...

Page 902: ...recedence in the range of 0 7 low high Low Delay Place a checkmark to set Low Delay to ON Through Put Place a checkmark to set High Throughput to ON Reliability Place a checkmark to set High Reliability to ON MIN Cost Place a checkmark to set Cost Precedence to ON When DiffServ is selected DSCP Specify the DiffServ Code Point in the range of 0 63 Note Default settings IP Precedence Precedence 5 Lo...

Page 903: ... 15 and the setting of SW10 6 7 on IPPAD card Refer to the Circuit Card Description for more details Setting of Echo Canceller Click the check box to assign the Echo Canceller data and select one of the ra dio buttons A EC ON B EC ON A EC ON B EC OFF A EC OFF B EC ON A EC OFF B EC OFF Note When the same value is assigned to both A LOC ID and B LOC ID parameters select either A EC ON B EC ON or A E...

Page 904: ...P PHI data assignment refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The expla nation of PHs including SP PHI is also there 3 MG COT Card Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 186 b6 1 ISDN MG COT is in service INDEX 187 00 Fixed INDEX 474 Guard Timer For Originating Call MTC TC bit 0 3 MTC bit 4 6 TC Not...

Page 905: ...en using fax connection via MG following assignment is necessary CDN 71 IP FAX data CDN 72 Jitter Buffer Size for IP FAX CDN 73 Payload Type for IP FAX CDN 74 Payload Size for IP FAX ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data for Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting procedure is shown below Note Virtual trunk occupies one group For example if one channel is registered for Vi...

Page 906: ...T SIP LINE MG Line Number 0 5 PIR HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18...

Page 907: ...ct In 0 15 Default value is 0 False answer timing 0 15 Default value is 0 AMGVL Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control LDM Assign the voice control data for terminal that is connected to MG 6COT When AMGVL data is not as signed AIVCL data setting is applied A RT MG Storing Physical Route Number for Virtual Speech Channel of MG 6COT TYPE Select one of the followings Route Specified Location ID S...

Page 908: ...r MG 6COT SETTING OF PAYLOAD PAYLOAD TYPE PAYLOAD SIZE Note Default settings JB_MIN 1 10 ms JB_MAX 30 300 ms is applied when the check box is not clicked Setting of Type of Service Voice Packet Click the check box to assign the ToS data for voice packet IP Precedence DiffServ Select either of the radio buttons When IP Precedence is selected Precedence Specify the precedence in the range of 0 7 low...

Page 909: ... not checked default value 0 is applied KIND2 Specify the PAD value of Analog MC in the range of 0 3 No PAD control determined by ASYD SYS1 INDEX 4 bit5 5 dB PAD PAD OFF 0 dB 3 dB 6 dB KIND3 Specify the PAD No of IPPAD in the range of 0 15 PAD value is determined by this PAD No 0 15 and the setting of SW10 6 7 on IPPAD card Refer to the Circuit Card Description for more details Setting of Echo Can...

Page 910: ...te Authentication Data Assignment is used only for SIP Mode Note 1 Assign the same One Time Password to MG 6COT by configuration command setting Data Deletion Deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment Make sure to delete in the order of AMGIL ATRK Confirm there is no data left in AMGIL before deleting ATRK Operate the ASYD ASYDL ALIDL deletion carefully because these commands ar...

Page 911: ...he Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Require...

Page 912: ... start its boot program STEP 2 Make sure the LEDs indicate normal status PWR LED lights green Boot program automatically starts ON LINE LED light green when the sequence is completed ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT REAR Turn ON the power switch UP FRONT MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET...

Page 913: ...by each mode Note DRS Device Registration Server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When MG COT Card works in Proprietary Protocol mode the Telephony Server acts as DRS which is controlling function of the Telephony Server Note SIP server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When MG COT Card works in SIP mode the Telephony Server acts as SIP server Note The setting ...

Page 914: ...is displayed on the screen STEP 2 Type usrConsole at the indicated OS prompt and press the ENTER key STEP 3 MG COT command prompt appears as follows STEP 4 Type SETUP TP to set the network data depending on your LAN environment There are two ways to set the network data When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used MG ID xxxxxxxxxxxx Starting Bootprogram Online program Initial start wait f...

Page 915: ...more information on DHCP option setting Note 2 About IP address of DRS refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual Note If DHCP server is set for use DHCP Option will be set for use automatically If you do not assign the IP address of DRS to DHCP server It must be assigned by SET DRSADDRESS command individually Note Write down the displayed MG ID MAC address of MG COT Ca...

Page 916: ...enter key to apply the current setting show in MG COT setup tp Input setup tp and press Enter key MG ID xx xx xx xx xx xx MG COT Card s MAC address is displayed Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit n Set whether to use DHCP server Input n here and press Enter key OWN IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 10 Input the IP address of MG COT Card SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 0 Input the Subnet Mask of MG CO...

Page 917: ...VOL 2 664 MG COT Card SCA 6COTB Note 1 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual ...

Page 918: ...assword you cannot move on to the next step STEP 2 Type usrConsole at the indicated OS prompt and press the ENTER key STEP 3 MG COT Card command prompt MG COT appears as follows MG ID xxxxxxxxxxxx Boot program version SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A 04 00 00 00 Main program version SP3948 6MGCOT PROG A 01 00 00 00 H W PKG information CA CC07 001 H W PKG information CA CC08 001 DSP information DSP K ...

Page 919: ...sign network data according to the setting of DHCP server and DNS server When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used DNS server is used When DHCP server is NOT used DNS server is NOT used usrConsole MG COT Maintenance command MG COT MG COT MG COT SETUP SP DHCP Interface set Current DHCP Interface ENABLE Change DHCP Interface Y change N current Q quit Y Input new DHCP Interface E enable D...

Page 920: ...ets IP address from DHCP server it is not required to set IP address and Default Gateway on MG COT Card Set the Ethernet Speed as follows Ethernet Speed Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed AUTO Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 2 Input new DUPLEX F full H half F ...

Page 921: ...ting the IP address setting 1 DNS server IP Address 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask of MG COT Card 3 Host name of MG COT Card Note Enter the host name in full domain format DNS IP Address set Current DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 Change DNS IP Address Y change N current Q quit Y Input new DNS IP Address 10 41 1 150 IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Change ...

Page 922: ...teway 10 41 1 254 SIP Server Host Name set Current SIP Server and Host Name SIP Server 1 2 3 20 Host Name Change SIP Server Information Y change N current Q quit Y Input new SIP Server 1 20 1 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit N Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed AUTO Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M ...

Page 923: ... Installation Manual Note When the DHCP is set to ENABLE IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect Be sure to assign SET DHCP DISABLE before starting the IP address setting 1 IP Address and Subnet Mask of MG COT Card 2 Default Gateway IP Address IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Change IP Address Subnetmask Y change N current Q quit Y Input n...

Page 924: ...ation Y change N current Q quit Y Input new SIP Server 1 20 1 Input new IP Address 10 41 1 200 Input new Port Number 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit N Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed AUTO Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 2 Input new DUPLEX F full H half F Don t power off in progress D...

Page 925: ...he followings Is there other device having the same IP address overlapped Is the new IP address assigned correct Connecting LAN Cable to Ether Connector ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Ether connector RJ 45 pin assignment S S R R 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FRONT MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET to LAN...

Page 926: ...ashes green Note After the data assignment MG COT Card entry incoming originating outside call data on the Telephony Server side has been completed ON LINE lamp lights green and the corresponding OPERATION MG lamps will go out RJ 11connector pin assignment FRONT MG1 MG3 MG5 MG0 MG2 MG4 ALM PWR Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 PFT MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MG6 MUSIC to C O line MG0 MG5...

Page 927: ... to the LAN Check the LAN Cable between the MG COT and Network Device Use a LAN Cable straight through Test the continuity in the LAN Cable Make sure the network device SW HUB or Router is turned ON If the problem is not cleared change the LAN Cable or change the network device Confirm the data setting of MGC Telephony Server and MG COT MGC Confirm the data setting of ASYD ASYDL ALOCL ADTM ALIDL A...

Page 928: ...ON Lamp lights Note 1 Note 2 4 Go to the Speech Test Are Call Originations and Incoming Calls between terminals processing normally Is speech quality okay Confirm the system message of MGC Is MG connected to PSTN physically Is PFT connected to analog terminal physically Confirm the line cable between MDF and MG COT Test the continuity in the line cable Confirm the data of MGC and MG COT Confirm th...

Page 929: ...rom PSTN connected to MG0 b Perform this test when WAN error occurs STEP 1 Turn on the MG COT Card by switching on the Power Switch UP on the rear panel of MG COT Card And then confirm that initialization has been completed and ON LINE lamp lights on STEP 2 Disconnect the LAN cable and then wait until MG COT Card detects WAN error about for three minutes STEP 3 Perform the following operation Can ...

Page 930: ...on the screen When Proprietary Protocol mode is Used MG COT _ machine name usually When SIP mode is Used MG COT SIP _ machine name SIP usually Note DRS Device Registration Server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When MG COT Card works in Proprietary Protocol mode the Telephony Server acts as DRS which is controlling function of the Telephony Server Note SIP server used in this s...

Page 931: ...KG information CA CC08 001 DSP information DSP K AC48302ck 03 11 00 00 DSP information DSP P AC48302ce6 03 11 00 00 Starting Boot program Online program Initial start Wait for a while Attached TCP IP interface to null unit 0 Attaching interface lo0 done Adding 10739 symbols for standalone Media Gateway COT Interface Enabled Grand Start Firmware SP 3948 01 00 00 00 Compiled on Aug 23 2006 11 23 39 ...

Page 932: ...l components The following describes these components using one of the SET commands MG COT SET IPADDRESS 123 201 18 45 255 255 255 0 1 2 3 4 1 Command 2 Sub Command 3 Parameter 1 P1 4 Parameter 2 P2 Note The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command ...

Page 933: ... FAX enable timer 11 FAXRECVPAD_MG Setting Fax receiver PAD value 12 FAXSENDPAD_MG Setting Fax sender PAD value 13 HC_TIMER Setting Health Check Receive Timer 14 IC_ABANDON_TIME Setting I C call abandon timer 15 INTERFACE Setting the communication speed for LAN interface 16 IPADDRESS Setting IP Address and Net Mask 17 ONE_TIME_PASS Setting One Time Password for security 18 OWN_NAME Setting Host Na...

Page 934: ...sword for security 18 OWN_NAME To show Host Name of MG COT Card 19 RELEASE_SIGNAL To show Release Signal 20 SIGNALING_PORT_NO To show signaling port number for SIP 21 SIGNALING_QOS To show QoS setting for SIP signaling session 22 SIPSV_IPADDRESS To show IP address port number and host name of SIP serv er 23 SMOOTH_PAD_MG About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destina...

Page 935: ...ion Data file to specified TFTP server COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS REBOOT To reboot the MG COT Card COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS EXIT To exit the maintenance command COMMAND SUB COMMAND FUNCTION REMARKS INIT or CLEAR CONFIGDATA To initialize the configuration data to factory default value ...

Page 936: ...screen To finish this program input EXIT after a prompt Note When the maintenance command program is activated it provides a Help Function for referring to avail able commands and sub commands After a prompt is shown request to list up the Target Help by entering or command name SET or SHOW and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when requesting a list of SET commands MG COT SET...

Page 937: ...If DHCP server is set for use DHCP Option will be set for use automatically If you do not assign the IP address of DRS to DHCP server It must be assigned by SET DRSADDRESS command individually MG COT setup tp MG ID xx xx xx xx xx xx MAC Address is displayed Use DHCP Input Y Yes N No Q Quit y Enter y MG ID xx xx xx xx xx xx DHCP ENABLE Input Y OK N Change Q Quit y Enter y when the assigned data is ...

Page 938: ... 0 Enter the Subnet mask Note 1 DEFAULT GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 254 Enter the default gateway Note 1 DRS1 ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Enter the IP address of DRS Note 1 Note 2 MG ID xx xx xx xx xx xx DHCP DISABLE OWN IPADDRESS 1 1 1 10 OWN SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 DEFAULT ROUTE 1 1 1 254 DRS1 ADDRESS 1 1 1 1 Setting result is displayed Input Y OK N Change Q Quit y Enter y when the assigned data is cor r...

Page 939: ... N Change Q Quit n Enter n Change list DHCP input 1 OWN IPADDRESS input 2 OWN SUBNETMASK input 3 DEFAULT ROUTE input 4 DRS1 ADDRESS input 5 Data items to change are listed Input Q Quit 1 Enter the item number to be changed OWN IP ADDRESS 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 12 IP address is entered SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 255 255 0 0 Subnet mask is entered DEFAULT GATEWAY 1 1 1 254 b Enter b to change the Subnet mask...

Page 940: ... all the entered data is to be discard ed F Startup SETUP SIP F Setting DHCP server enable disable F Setting DNS server enable disable MG COT MG COT setup sp Enter SETUP SP following the prompt DHCP Interface set Current DHCP Interface ENABLE Change DHCP Interface Y change N current Q quit Y Input new DHCP Interface E enable D disable D Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether ...

Page 941: ... N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Enter new IP address of DNS server e g 10 41 1 150 IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Change IP Address Subnetmask Y change N current Q quit Y Input new IP Address 10 41 1 100 Input new Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y ch...

Page 942: ...ateway IP Address set Current Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Change Default Gateway Y change N current Q quit Y Input new Default Gateway 10 41 1 254 Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Enter new IP address of Default Gateway e g 10 41 1 254 ...

Page 943: ...N Line 4 Line 9 The current setting of the Telephony Server information host name is displayed Line 10 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 11 Enter the number of SIP server 1 20 Line 12 Asked whether to use host name Y Use host name N Not use host name Line 13 Enter new host name of the Telephony Server in full domain format Up to 63 charact...

Page 944: ...ber 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit N Line 4 Line 9 The current setting of the Telephony Server information IP address port number and host name is displayed Line 10 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 11 Enter the number of SIP server 1 20 Line 12 Enter the IP address of SIP serv...

Page 945: ...ayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Select the communication speed of LAN interface 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100Mbps fixed mode 3 10Mbps fixed mode Line 5 Select the Duplex mode of LAN interface F Full duplex mode H Half duplex mode Don t power off in progress Do you save the configuration data Y N Y Configuration data has been saved Restarting is required for making ...

Page 946: ...ce com mand 3 Setting DHCP Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MG COT SET CODEC_COEF_MG P1 P2 Line 1 Enter the Line Number 0 5 And then enter the setting value default is 2 after the space CODEC Coefficient CH00 setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown RESISTER KIND OF BNW SETTING VALUE 600Ω 600Ω 2 default MG COT SET DEFAU...

Page 947: ...apply the current setting shown in Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Note 1 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual MG COT SIP SET DNS_SW DNS Interface ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 10 41 2 101 Line2 ENA...

Page 948: ...Y 0 1 0 COST 0 1 0 Line 1 Enter sub command name PRECEDENCE to set the parameters such as Delay Throughput Reliability and Cost Specify the value to each parameter Line 2 Precedence 0 7 low high default 6 Line 3 Delay 0 1 Nomal default Low Delay ON Line 4 Throughput 0 1 Nomal default High Throughput ON Line 5 Reliability 0 1 Nomal default High Reliability ON Line 6 Cost 0 1 Nomal default Cost Prec...

Page 949: ...xiting the maintenance com mand MG COT SET DSP_ECFB_MG P1 Line 1 Enter 0 or 1 0 FAX echo canceller is ON default 1 FAX echo canceller is OFF DSP ECFB setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SET DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME P1 Line 1 Select DTMF Cutoff Timer 0 20ms default 1 10ms DTMF Cutoff Time setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SET EC_TRAINING_MG P1 Line 1 Select the Training feature mo...

Page 950: ...command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 13 Setting Health Check Receive Timer Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 14 Setting I C call abandon timer MG COT SET FAXRECVPAD_MG P1 Line 1 Enter the Fax Receiver PAD value in the range of 0 20 after the command name default 0 Fax Receiver PAD setting succeeded...

Page 951: ...and and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 17 Setting One Time Password for security Note The designated One Time Password cannot be applied when Proprietary Protocol mode Assign the SP mode before executing this One Time Password setting I C Call Abandon Timer setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SET INTERFACE SPEED AUTO 100M 10M AUTO 10M DUPLEX FULL HALF HALF HALF Line 2 ...

Page 952: ...nnot be applied when Proprietary Protocol mode Assign the SP mode before executing this Signaling Port Number setting Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand 21 Setting QoS for SIP signaling session When ToS is selected in QoS setting type MG COT SIP SET OWN_NAME P1 Line1 Enter the host name of MG COT Card in full domain forma...

Page 953: ... setting shown in Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Line 3 Precedence 0 7 low high default 6 DELAY 0 1 0 0 Line 4 Delay 0 1 Normal default Low Delay ON THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Line 5 Throughput 0 1 Normal default High Throughput ON RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 Line 6 Reliability 0 1 Normal default High Reliability O...

Page 954: ...E command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MG COT SIP SET SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server 1 20 1 Line 2 Enter the SIP server number Up to 20 SIP servers can be used in one network IP Address 0 0 0 0 10 41 2 100 Line 3 Enter the IP address of SIP server e g 10 41 2 100 default 0 0 0 0 Note 1 Port Number 5060 5060 Line 4 Enter the port number default 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N N Y...

Page 955: ...tting Auto Polarity MG COT SET STARTPORT P1 Line 1 Enter the number of RTP Start Port in the range of 1024 64510 default 1024 RTP Start Port Number setting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SET VLAN Please enter a parameter VLAN_ID 1 4094 1 COS 0 7 0 Line 3 Line 3 Enter the VLAN_ID in the range of 1 4094 Line 4 Enter the COS in the range of 0 7 VLAN setting succeeded Line 5 Result is shown M...

Page 956: ...VOL 2 703 MG COT Card SCA 6COTB Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand ...

Page 957: ...he current setting is shown MG COT SHOW CONFIGDATA SYSTEM REGISTER_MODE TP FILE_INFO 2006 07 14 IP OWN_ADDR 0 0 0 0 SUBNET_MASK 255 255 255 255 DEFAULT_GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 DRS_ADDR1 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT1 3456 DRS_ADDR2 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT2 3456 DRS_ADDR3 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT3 3456 DRS_ADDR4 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT4 3456 DRS_TOS 0xC0 NETWORK LAN_SPEED AUTO DHCP_SW ENABLE The current setting is shown ...

Page 958: ...INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual 6 To show ToS setting of DRS session Note The designated DRS TOS cannot refer when SP mode Assign the Proprietary Protocol mode before exe cuting this DRS TOS shown MG COT SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE The current setting is shown MG COT SIP SHOW DNS_SW DNS interface ENABLE DNS IP Address 10 41 2 101 The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW DRSADDRESS IP Address Port...

Page 959: ...COT SHOW DTMF_CUTOFF_TIME DTMF Cutoff Time is 0 20ms The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW EC_TRAINING_MG EC Training is ON The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW FAXERRORDETECT_MG FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW FAXRECVPAD_MG FAX Receiver PAD is 4 The current FAX receiver PAD value PSTN LAN direction setting is shown MG COT SHOW FAXSENDPAD_MG FAX Sender ...

Page 960: ...19 To show Release Signal MG COT SHOW IC_ABANDON_TIME I C Call Abandon Timer is 0 6sec The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW INTERFACE Setting 100Mbps Full Duplex Current setting of connection state is shown Status Speed is 100Mbps Half Duplex Link Up Actual operating state is shown MG COT SHOW IPADDRESS IP Address 10 4 128 5 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 4 128 254 Line 1 Enter the i...

Page 961: ...etary Protocol mode Assign the SP mode before exe cuting this SIP Server shown Note About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual MG COT SIP SHOW SIGNALING_PORT_NO Signaling Port Number is 5060 The current setting is shown MG COT SIP SHOW SIGNALING_QOS Signaling QoS is 0xC0 QOS TOS PRECEDENCE 6 DELAY...

Page 962: ...rent setting is shown MG COT SHOW STARTPORT RTP Start Port Number is 1024 The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW STATUS Register Mode TP MAC Address 00 30 13 6e f4 e4 Link State Up Speed 100Mbps Duplex Full VLAN Mode Disable DHCP Mode Enable IP Address 172 16 2 103 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 172 16 1 254 Current Drs Name Primary Current Drs Address 0 0 0 0 Registration Status null T...

Page 963: ...s 172 16 2 103 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway 172 16 1 254 DNS Mode Disable Current Sipsv Address 172 16 4 1 Encryption SIP Encrypt RTP Encrypt Registration Status Offline Registration is Started Now The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW VERSION MG COT Maintenance Command Version Infomation Hardware Main CA CC07 001 Hardware Sub CA CC08 001 Boot program SP 3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A 0...

Page 964: ...G COT SHOW VLAN VLAN is ENABLE DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 1 0 10 4 128 5 255 255 255 0 The current VLAN setting is shown MG COT SHOW WARNING_TONE Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP TDM side The current setting is shown MG COT SHOW AUTO_POLARITY Auto Polarity is ON The current setting is shown ...

Page 965: ...0 4 icmp_seq 3 time 0 ms 100 100 100 4 PING Statistics 4 packets transmitted 4 packets received 0 packet loss round trip ms min avg max 0 0 0 Line 1 Enter the IP address of the system to access Line 4 7 Connection status of the accessing system is displayed 4 lines MC SIP PING 100 100 100 4 PING 100 100 100 4 56 data bytes ping timeout no answer from 100 100 100 4 When the MG COT Card cannot conne...

Page 966: ...ation data file is downloaded from the specified TFTP server When the destination file name is not entered file name of transferred folder is used automatically MG COT DELETE VLAN VLAN deleting succeeded Line 2 Result is shown MG COT SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y N Y Configuration data has been saved Re starting is required for making a setup reflect Line 3 Select ...

Page 967: ...ompt of the maintenance command MG COT Card in default if any error oc curs when Y is selected after changing the configuration data MG COT PUT CONFIGDATA P1 check sum 58694 0xe546 Configuration data has been uploaded Line 1 Specify the IP Address of TFTP server after the Command Name e g 10 41 1 150 Line 2 Check sum is shown Line 3 Result is shown MG COT REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y Line 2 Ent...

Page 968: ...ance command MG COT Card in default if any error oc curs when Y is selected after changing the configuration data MG COT EXIT Finished value 11 0xb Line 1 Normal occasion Line 2 Result is shown Line 3 Display changes to the OS prompt MG COT EXIT Configration data was changed Don t power off in progress Y Save and Exit N Exit without saving C Cancel Y N C Y Configration data has been saved Line 7 S...

Page 969: ...s cannot refer when SP 3948 6MG COT PROG A Ver 1 0 0 0 or later MG COT INIT CONFIGDATA Warning This command is for initialize config data If this command is executed your configuration is deleted OK Y N y It s recommended to back up your configuration really OK Y N y Initialize of configuration data was successful You need to setup config data MG COT ...

Page 970: ...n incorrect form VLAN ID is no more registered VLAN ID cannot be registered because the number of VLAN exceeds the maximum Sub command is missing Sub command is not entered when entering command Invalid parameter value The range of entered parameter is incorrect Invalid sub command Entered sub command is incorrect Command is abnormally terminated Command is terminated illegally Parameter s are mis...

Page 971: ...and the Telephony Server is transmitted using Proprietary Protocol In this operation PHI function embedded in the Telephony Server needs to be valid as registration desti nation for MG BRI This PHI function can be provided either by Internal PHI BRI or SP PHI which you can choose as registration destination But even though MG BRI is supposed to be registered to Internal PHI BRI registration destin...

Page 972: ...Hold tone input from the MUSIC connector jack of MG BRI backplane MG BRI Internal Hold tone is used in normal circumstances though External Hold tone can be used when jack was inserted to the backplane connector In this situ ation Gain value of external sound source can be assigned per MG BRI Two kinds of Internal Hold tone can be selected by using the AMGIL command MG Emergency Telephone By conne...

Page 973: ...ssigned to Virtual PIR Assign with ASYDL SYS1 Index556 and 557 4 Line Equipment Numbers LENS information for control signal needs to be assigned for Internal PHI BRI or SP PHI and Internal PHE by using the ALIDL command depending on registration destination for MG BRI 5 Only one Internal PHI BRI can be assigned per system 6 The maximum number of MG BRI per system varies depending on number of line...

Page 974: ...elow is required for ARTI and ARTIN command For selection of FAX payload assignment needs to be consid ered with the MG equipment setting Refer to the Command Manual for further details for command set ting CDN71 FXD FAX data enable 0 1 Disable Enable CDN72 FXJS Jitter Buffer Size for FAX 0 30 CDN73 FXPT Payload Type for FAX 0 6 CDN74 FXPS Payload Size for FAX 0 4 Note This parameter will be displ...

Page 975: ...mmand takes pre cedence 21 Echo Canceller EC training function is available between MG BRI and ISDN network Note EC training feature MG BRI sends out the EC training tone to the ISDN network when station answered a call to converge a echo on an early stage 22 Used CODEC will be assigned with AMGVL command value of AMVCL command is used when there is nothing assigned for AMGVL command Data assignme...

Page 976: ... For Hold tone to be used per each MG BRI Hold tone can be chosen from Telephony Server External Hold tone External Hold tone Expanded Hold tone or MG BRI External Hold tone But Telephony Server External Hold tone External Hold tone Expanded Hold tone or External expanded Hold tone cannot be shared within the same MG BRI 6 When MG BRI External Hold tone is selected Gain value can be assigned to ea...

Page 977: ...status which MG BRI has complete the registration towards the Telephony Server 4 Reboot request of AMGIL command is only effective when MG BRI is in ONLINE status It cannot be operated when power of MG BRI is off or Ether link is not established 5 Switching of operation mode to Emergency Telephone mode can be operated automatically when the fault was detected regardless to the setting of AMGIL com...

Page 978: ...VOL 2 725 MG BRI 10 When MG BRI is in ONLINE status mode currently being in use can be confirmed by using the DIMG command ...

Page 979: ... POWER ON ON LINE LINE LINE0 LINE0 B D LINE1 LINE1 B D Tx Rx Tx Rx LINK LINK MG 2B ISDN Line 0 ISDN Line 1 IP side link ON LINE Power ON OFF Information Information Send Receive of IP side packet Information EMA_TEL EMA_TEL LINE0 LINE0 LINE1 LINE1 Ether Ether RESET RESET MUSIC MUSIC RS 232C RS 232C RJ 45 connector for ISDN lines RJ 45 connector for Emergency Telephone connection Note 1 Ground AC A...

Page 980: ...ctor type RJ 45 Modular 1 Transmission Speed 10 Mbps 100Mbps Cable 10BASE T Category 3 or higher Max length 100 meters 100BASE TX Category 5 or higher Max length 100 meters LAN cable RJ 45 Modular cable CODEC G 729a G 711 G 723 1 Emergency Telephone connecting feature Number of Port 1 port Connector type RJ 45 Modular 1 Function Connects one emergency telephone line directly to the ISDN Network It...

Page 981: ...5 Designated by OS 1024 65534 Peer to Peer RTP Default value can be changed from the maintenance terminal PC 10001 H 245 Pre Negotia tion Default value can be changed from the maintenance terminal PC 3456 61010 MG BRI DRS Telephony Server Registra tion Default value can be changed with the ADTM com mand Note 1 64000 Telephony Server PHI BRI MG BRI iLP PM Default value can be changed with the ADTM ...

Page 982: ...g the Analog Telephone Terminal POWER POWER ON ON LINE LINE LINE0 LINE0 B D LINE1 LINE1 B D Tx Rx Tx Rx LINK LINK MG 2B Front EMA_TEL EMA_TEL LINE0 LINE0 LINE1 LINE1 Ether Ether RS 232C RS 232C RESET RESET MUSIC MUSIC Back AC Adapter Connect to LAN Connect to ground Below 10 Ohm Anti slip off stopper Stopper to fasten cabler with the tie wrap AC100V 240V Depends on each country specification Conne...

Page 983: ...ithin the ranges of 8Ω 50kΩ Make sure not to exceed this range 11 5 3 Cable connection This section explains the cable connection procedure Connect the cable following the diagram shown be low 1 Connect the Ground cable below 10Ω to the Grounding connector Name Function Note Ether RJ 45 for Ethernet connection Common use of 10 100M LINE 0 8 pin modular jack for ISDN line 0 LINE 1 8 pin modular jac...

Page 984: ... maintenance terminal PC using the RS 232C straight through cable 4 Connect a ISDN telephone terminal to be used in emergency case Connect the RJ 45 connector to EMA_TEL interface TA needs to be used when Analog telephone terminal is to be connected Backside Ether EMA TEL LINE 0 LINE 1 RS 232C RESET MUSIC AC Adapter To Ground Below 10 Ohm Ether EMA TEL LINE 0 LINE 1 RS 232C RESET MUSIC PFTRD Ether...

Page 985: ...External Maintenance PC To Ground Below 10 Ohm Power Cable Backside Connect the Emergency Telephone LINE0 1 RJ 45 Connector Pin Accommodation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 Send 4 Receive 6 Send 5 Receive 1 2 7 8 are not used Ether RJ45 Connector Pin Accommodation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 Send 2 Send 3 Receive 6 Receive 4 5 7 8 are not used EMA RJ 45 Connector Pin Accommodation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4 Send 5 Receive 7 Send...

Page 986: ...Data Assignment STEP 1 Data Assignment by PCPro 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 1 Selection whether to use DHCP server 2 Network Data Assignment STEP 4 Configuration Command Assignment 1 Connection between MG BRI and LAN 2 Connection between MG BRI...

Page 987: ... to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including Internal PHI BRI is also there 2 MG BRI Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 Index64 Bit0 1 A law used for codec Note Index186 Bit6 1 ISDN used Index187 00 Fixed Index474 Bit0 3 MTC Timer Counter Bit4 6 TC Timer Class Note This paramete...

Page 988: ...ta for Trunk in Virtual Speech Channel CDN68 VIR 2 MG connection Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data to Virtual Speech Channel Note Occupies the whole group when one channel is assigned Note Do not assign any MG BRI Trunk to Unit 0 Group 0 to even number module group...

Page 989: ...l 0 and 1 need to be assigned together Do not assign individually Same condition is applied when deleting the data AMGVL Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control LDM Assign the Voice control data when connecting to MG BRI Setting of the AIVCL command will be effec tive if this command is not assigned A RT MG Storing Assign the logical route number A for Virtual Speech Channel of MG BRI 1 TYPE Sel...

Page 990: ...onnected No 3 The PAD value of MG when IPPAD is connected No 4 The PAD value of MG when MG is connected Setting of Echo Canceller Click this check box for the setting of Echo Canceller EC TYPE This parameter is available only when the check box of Setting of Echo Canceller is ON Select either of the radio buttons for specifying the type of Echo Canceller A EC ON B EC ON Fixed when using IP BS A EC...

Page 991: ... The expla nation of PHs including SP PHI is also there 3 MG BRI Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 Index64 Bit0 1 A law used for codec Note 1 Index186 Bit6 1 ISDN used Index187 00 Fixed Index474 Bit0 3 MTC Timer Counter Bit4 6 TC Timer Class Note 1 This parameter depends on specification of country being in used For more informati...

Page 992: ...nk Application Data Assign the application data for Trunk in Virtual Speech Channel CDN68 VIR 2 MG connection Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data Assign the Trunk Data to Virtual Speech Channel The example of data setting procedure is shown below Note Virtual trunk occupies one group For ...

Page 993: ...the ATRK command data PIR HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 2...

Page 994: ...ce control data when connecting to MG BRI Setting of the AIVCL command will be effec tive if this command is not assigned A RT MG Storing Assign the logical route number A for Virtual Speech Channel of MG BRI 1 TYPE Select one of the followings Route Specified Location ID Specified B LOC ID Displayed when TYPE Route Specified is selected Specify the Location ID to which target IP station belongs P...

Page 995: ... is ON Select either of the radio buttons for specifying the type of Echo Canceller A EC ON B EC ON Fixed when using IP BS A EC ON B EC OFF Note 1 A EC OFF B EC ON Note 1 A EC OFF B EC OFF Note 1 A EC ON B EC OFF and A EC OFF B EC ON will not be effective when A RT MG Storing and B RT MG Storing is same Note The setting of the Echo Canceller may not be effective because of the Switch setting of IP...

Page 996: ...tenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ...

Page 997: ...BRI Lights come ON by plugging in the power supply AC Adapter into the socket Confirm that POWER lamp ignites in green STEP 2 Confirm that POWER lamp ignites in green ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required AC Adapter POWER B D B D ON LINE LINE 0 LINE 1 Tx Rx LINK MG 2B Front side POWER LED External Maintenance Terminal PC Terminal Software ...

Page 998: ...d Assignment Assign the configuration data by command operation on maintenance console Note DRS Device Registration Server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server The Telephony Server acts as DRS for MG BRI using Proprietary Protocol ...

Page 999: ... and message below has appeared The main menu of configuration command appears and is now available to enter the command from the maintenance terminal PC 3 Screen shown below will appear enter 1 after Input then click the Enter key 4 Prompt screen shown below will appear and is now available to enter the command from the maintenance terminal PC 5 Enable Disable of the DHCP Server needs to be assig...

Page 1000: ...ted data DHCP Server Enabled and Disabled are explained here Note When DHCP Server is Enabled When DHCP Server is Disabled Note 1 IP Addresses shown here are examples Assign the IP Address that suits your network configuration for actual assignment ...

Page 1001: ...stored on DHCP side to always ensure the IP Address of MG BRI Note 2 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual Note 3 Assign the settings below from the Add Option Type Assignment with the DHCP Server Item Assignment Name There is no need to assign this field Beware not to duplicate with other options As...

Page 1002: ... example Assign the IP Address and Port number of the DRS Telephony Server Value below is an example Assign the IP Address and Subnet Mask of the MG BRI Value below is an example Save the configuration data assigned Reboot the MG BRI Note 1 MG BRI set default_gateway 192 168 100 254 Assign the IP Address MG BRI set drs_ipaddress Please enter DRS Unit 1 Primary 2 Secondary 3 Tertiary 4 Forth 1 DRS ...

Page 1003: ...VOL 2 750 MG BRI Note 1 The MAC Address of MG BRI MG ID will be displayed after reboot Do you need reboot Y N Y Enter Y and reboot MG BRI ...

Page 1004: ...backside of the MG BRI Confirm that D Lamp in front side of MG BRI flashes steady lights in green when all process has succeeded ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Ether EMA TEL LINE 0 LINE 1 RS 232C RESET MUSIC External Maintenance Terminal PC Power Cable LAN Cable Backside Frontside POWER B D ON LINE LINE 0 ON LINE Ether EMA TEL LINE 0 LINE 1 RS 232C RESET MUSIC Ex...

Page 1005: ...d ON Confirm that correct cable is being used Use the Straight through cable Confirm that the cable is not damaged Operate the link test Replace the LAN cable or check the network environment if the problem is still not solved Turned ON This lamp will turn ON when the initial startup of the MG BRI is started and connection towards the LAN is established Proceed to STEP 3 STEP 3 Is the ON LINE lamp...

Page 1006: ...phony Server side Confirm that the MG BRI is physically connected to ISDN network Also confirm the line cable between MDF and MG BRI MDF and DSU Confirm that the cable is not damaged Operate the link test Confirm the data assignment of the Telephony Server side and MG BRI side Telephony Server Is the data assignment correct MG BRI Confirm the configuration data assigned from the maintenance consol...

Page 1007: ...nspection of its lamp display Meaning of each lamp display is explained in the table shown below Kind of MG BRI lamps Lamp kind Color Indication and meanings POWER GREEN Lit Power ON Not lit Power OFF ONLINE GREEN Refer to the table Lamp display of MG BRI for details LINE0 B GREEN LINE0 D GREEN LINE1 B GREEN LINE1 D GREEN LINK GREEN Lit IP side layer1 established Not lit IP side layer1 not establi...

Page 1008: ...N when this condition remains for more then one minute L S L S O O Failed to download the pro gram First time Turn the power OFF ON in this circumstance L S L F O O Failed to download the pro gram Second time Turn the power OFF ON in this circumstance L S L L O O Succeeded to download the program Turn the power OFF ON when this condition remains for more then one minute L S L L S O Failed to downl...

Page 1009: ...nfirm the cable connection of LINE 0 1 L L F L Layer 1 of LINE 0 normal Layer 2 established Check if the office data of LINE 0 is assigned It is normal if both two channels of LINE 0 are in Make Busy state L L F L Layer 1 of LINE 1 normal Layer 2 established Check if the office data of LINE 1 is assigned It is normal if both two channels of LINE 1 are in Make Busy state L L F L F L Layer 1 of LINE...

Page 1010: ... S L One channel LINE 0 is in Make Busy state and another in idle state Normal L L F L Both two channels of LINE 0 are in Make Busy state Normal L L L L Either one channel of LINE 0 is being used Normal L L O L Both two channels of LINE 1 are in idle state Normal L L S L One channel LINE 1 is in Make Busy state and another in idle state Normal L L F L Both two channels of LINE 1 are in Make Busy s...

Page 1011: ... See if the ISDN terminal or TA Analog Telephone can be connected directly and originate termi nate a call to from ISDN network Test of case when WAN is faulty STEP 1 Turn ON the power of MG BRI by plugging in the AC code of AC Adapter then confirm the status is in ON LINE after initialization STEP 2 Pull out the connector from the LAN and wait until MG BRI detects the WAN fault About 4 minutes ST...

Page 1012: ...C to MG BRI by using RS 232C cable STEP 3 Power on MG BRI STEP 4 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 5 Select Transfer Capture File STEP 6 Send File screen is displayed Specify a file name to be saved and then click the Start button STEP 7 At the moment that boot programming is starting While Starting M...

Page 1013: ...acking Up Config Data By Serial Connec tion STEP 9 Assign the same settings by the configuration commands seeing the config data For more in formation about the configuration command refer to How to Upgrading Firmware By FTP Remote Download STEP 10 After assigning the settings save the config data by the save config command STEP 11 Enter y in the confirmation box STEP 12 Confirm that Configuration...

Page 1014: ...older e g SP3826 STEP 4 Allow read in this directory For more information refer to the appropriate manual attached to the FTP server program STEP 5 Set network environment for the TFTP server STEP 6 Start the TFTP program STEP 7 Power on MG BRI STEP 8 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 9 Reboot MG BRI ...

Page 1015: ...nd MG BRI And then input y if they are correct STEP 18 The Program download menu is displayed Input 0 to download BSC program BSC program is downloaded and written into Flash ROM STEP 19 After all the download is completed enter q to reboot the system STEP 20 Activate HyperTerminal and connect to MG BRI If you want to confirm the version information enter show version STEP 21 Connect the MG BRI to...

Page 1016: ...826 STEP 2 Allow read in this directory For more information refer to the appropriate manual attached to the FTP server program STEP 3 Set network environment for the FTP server STEP 4 Start the FTP program Data Assignment on PCPro STEP 5 Activate the ATDL command and then specify the following Select an item of External Server in FTP Server Setup Input the IP address of FTP server Input Login Nam...

Page 1017: ...k to the target MG BRI more then once select either one of the channels used in the MG BRI by checking LENS STEP 9 Click the Add to the Terminal List button to go back to the main screen STEP 10 Click the Exe button to upgrade the firmware to the target MG BRIs Upgrade is succeeded is displayed Note that version information in the screen is not up dated at this time If the upgrade is failed click ...

Page 1018: ...ess Confirmation of MG BRI Operation STEP 15 To confirm MG BRI is properly operating with the upgraded firmware make a call to the MG BRI Make sure you are able to hear RBT STEP 16 Receive a call via the MG BRI and confirm that you are able to talk to each other STEP 17 After all the tasks are completed write down or label the firmware version installed in the MG BRI onto the back of it ...

Page 1019: ...ch When boot program has started configuration command menu shown below appears by pressing the ESC key while Starting MG BRI boot program is displayed Enter 1 and press the RETURN key Display change as follows enter the command into this prompt to modify the configuration data Note 1 Assign the communication setting of External Maintenance Terminal PC as follows 11 7 5 Basic Command Entry Display...

Page 1020: ...decimal Sample configuration is shown below Sample Configuration of Dialogue format command entry Note Other displays are omitted here MG BRI set signaling_qos QOS II IP PRECEDENCE D DIFFSERV I I I When IP PRECEDENCE was chosen PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Precedence in IP Network 0 7 6 Default DELAY 0 1 0 Order to prioritize Delay within the IP Network 0 No order Default 1 Order THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Order to...

Page 1021: ...ealth check waiting process 7 INTERFACE Assign the speed and activation mode of Ether controller 8 LAN_ERROR_CHECK Assign the interval to detect LAN cable fall off 9 OWN_IPADDRESS Assignment of IP Address and Subnet Mask of MG BRI itself 10 SIGNALING_PORT_NO Assign the port number to be used for signaling toward PHI 11 SIGNALING_QOS Assign the ToS value towards signaling DRS and H 245 Ready Packet...

Page 1022: ... with the firmware versions SP 3709 BRI MG BSC PROG A Issue 18 or later and SP 3708 BRI BOOT PROG A Issue 7 or earlier Sub command Function 1 CALL_HOLD Enable MG Based Call Retention 2 RTP_STOP_DETECT Assign RTP Receive Stop Detect timer used for MG Based Call Re tention ...

Page 1023: ...and activation mode of Ethernet controller 8 LAN_ERROR_CHECK Displays the interval to detect LAN cable fall off 9 OWN_IPADDRESS Displays the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway currently assigned 10 SIGNALING_PORT_NO Displays the Signaling Port number currently assigned 11 SIGNALING_QOS Displays the setting status for current Signaling Session 12 SMOOTH_PAD Displays the current Smooth PAD m...

Page 1024: ...s command is used to save the modified configuration data to the Flash card Sub command Function 1 This command is used to exit the MG BRI Save the latest configura tion using SAVE command and then exit from the MG BRI setting Confirmation message appears when the configuration has not been saved Sub command Function 1 This command is used to reboot the MG BRI MG BRI SET INTERFACE DHCP OWN_IPADDRE...

Page 1025: ...ic Programming in this manual Note Execute the SAVE command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change 4 SET EXTERNAL_MUSIC_LEVEL Assignment of external hold tone level control Assign input impedance of the external hold tone interface Note Execute the SAVE command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change MG BRI set dhcp P1 P1 DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE Not using DHCP...

Page 1026: ...ed Note Execute the SAVE command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change 8 SET LAN_ERROR_CHECK Assignment of interval to detect LAN cable fall off Assign the interval to detect LAN cable fall off Note Execute the SAVE command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change MG BRI set fax_detection_time P1 P1 Assignment of effective time 0 No switching to FAX 1 5 Switc...

Page 1027: ...IGNALING_QOS Assignment of ToS value towards signaling DRS and H 245 Ready Packet Session Assign the ToS value towards signaling DRS and H 245 Ready Packet Session When P1 and P2 is specified MG BRI set own_ipaddress OWN IP address 10 41 1 100 Assign the IP Address of MG BRI Default 0 0 0 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Assign the Subnet Mask of MG BRI Default 0 0 0 0 MG BRI set signaling_port_no P1 P...

Page 1028: ...NCE D DIFFSERV I I PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 DELAY 0 1 0 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 COST 0 1 0 0 P1 I D C I When IP PRECEDENCE was selected Precedence within the IP Network 0 7 Default 6 Order to prioritize Low delay within the IP Network 0 No order Default 1 Order Order to prioritize Throughput within the IP Network 0 No order Default 1 Order Order to prioritize Reliability within the IP N...

Page 1029: ... automatically assigned to Number specified 1 odd number Note Execute the SAVE command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change 15 SET VLAN Assignment of VLAN Assign the Tag VLAN information Note There will be no VLAN assignment when 0 was assigned for VLAN ID Note Execute the SAVE command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change MG BRI set smooth_pad P1 P1 Spec...

Page 1030: ...command and reboot MG BRI to enable the new setting 2 SET RTP_STOP_DETECT Assignment of RTP Receive Stop Detect timer Assign RTP Receive Stop Detect timer used for MG Based Call Retention Note This timer value is one of the conditions to determine the end of an ongoing call When receiving no RTP signal for longer than the set value MG determines that a call ends Note Execute SAVE command before ex...

Page 1031: ...ot re register to the Telephony Server Note Execute SAVE command before exiting the maintenance command and reboot MG BRI to enable the new setting 2 RTP_STOP_DETECT Assignment of RTP Receive Stop Detect timer Assign RTP Receive Stop Detect timer used for MG Based Call Retention Note Type the command in all uppercase letters Note This timer value is one of the conditions to determine the end of an...

Page 1032: ...S_ADDR2 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT2 3456 DRS_ADDR3 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT3 3456 DRS_ADDR4 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT4 3456 SIG_QOS 1 0xC0 SIGNALING_PORT 64000 START_PORT 1024 PRENEGO_PORT 10001 VLAN_NUM_1 0 FAX_TIME 1 MUSIC_LEVEL 0 SMOOTH_PAD 1 LAN_ERROR_CHECK 1000 HC_RCV_TIMER 150 WARNING_TONE_CONTROL 3 MISC_ACT 0x0000 MISC_0 0x0000 MISC_1 0x0000 MISC_2 0x0000 MISC_3 0x0000 MISC_4 0x0000 MISC_5 0x0000 MISC_6 0x0000 MISC_7...

Page 1033: ...ration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual 4 SHOW EXTERNAL_MUSIC_LEVEL Displays the current setting of external hold tone settings Displays the current setting of external hold tone settings 5 SHOW FAX_DETECTION_TIME Displays the current setting of effective switching time for FAX Displays the current setting of effective switching time for FAX MG BRI show dhc...

Page 1034: ...lays the interval to detect LAN cable fall off 9 SHOW OWN_IPADDRESS Displays the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway currently assigned Displays the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway currently assigned 10 SHOW SIGNALING_PORT_NO Displays the Signaling Port number currently assigned Displays the Signaling Port number currently assigned MG BRI show hc_rcv_timer Health Check Receive Ti...

Page 1035: ...egotiation Packet 14 SHOW RTP_START_PORT_NO Displays the RTP start port number currently assigned Displays the RTP start port number currently assigned 15 SHOW VLAN Displays the current VLAN setting status Displays the current VLAN setting status MG BRI show signaling_qos This example is assigned with IP Precedence DRS QOS is 0xC0 QOS IP PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE 6 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 C...

Page 1036: ...sue 18 or later 1 SHOW CALL_HOLD Displays the current setting of MG Based Call Retention Displays the current setting of MG Based Call Retention 2 SHOW RTP_STOP_DETECT Displays the current setting of Receive Stop Detect timer Displays the current setting of Receive Stop Detect timer MG BRI show waring_tone_control Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP ISDN side MG BRI SHOW CALL_HOLD P1 CALL H...

Page 1037: ...pears when the configuration has not been saved Note Key entry will be denied when EXIT command was executed by the OS prompt In this case OS prompt will be displayed again by pressing Ctrl key and C key simultaneously MG BRI save config Don t power of in progress Do you need save Y N Y Enter Y to execute the command Preservation of configuration data has been saved Result displays Re starting is ...

Page 1038: ...mmand This command is used to reboot the MG BRI MG BRI reboot Do you need reboot Y N Y Enter Y to execute the command createRamDrb New File System is Created Attached TCP IP interface to axDev unit 0 Boot message will be displayed ...

Page 1039: ...P address form is incorrect Input format of IP Address is invalid VLAN ID is no more registered Assignment cannot be executed Exceeding the maximum number of VLAN ID Sub command is missing Sub command was not entered during command entry Invalid parameter value The range of parameter value entered is invalid Invalid sub command Entered Sub command is invalid Command is abnormally terminated Comman...

Page 1040: ...eature The MG BRI has two types MG BRI Card SCA 2BRIA for Card Type MG BRI Box MG 2BRIA for Box Type The MG BRI Card SCA 2BRIA is mounted on 1U MPC Multi Purpose Chassis module Those ones are in the following Note 1 In this operation the Telephony Server acts as SIP server LAN1 of the Telephony Server is used as the in terface for the communication between SIP server and MG BRI In the case of Dual...

Page 1041: ...andler of the Telephony Server handles the control signal from to MG BRI MPH is the interface for the control signal Call control between SP PHI and MG COT is executed via TCP IP port of the system PH to control this operation Signaling Control Data Voice Data Telephony Server PSTN IP Terminal MG BRI Card Box Emergency Telephone Analog Telephone SP PHI MPH Internal PHE D Data Call control 16 kbps ...

Page 1042: ...his situation Gain value of external sound source can be assigned per MG BRI Emergency Telephone MG BRI can connect one emergency telephone in case MG function of the equipment is not available be cause of power failure or IP network failure In this case emergency telephone will be automatically con nected to the ISDN network and provides the communication path By connecting an ISDN terminal or TA...

Page 1043: ...nnector type RJ 45 Modular 1 Transmission Speed 10 Mbps 100 Mbps Cable 10BASE T Category 3 or higher Max length 100 meters 100BASE TX Category 5 or higher Max length 100 meters LAN cable RJ 45 Modular cable CODEC G 729a G 711 G 723 1 Emergency Telephone con necting feature Line S T point interface Number of Port 1 port Connector type RJ 45 Modular 1 Function Connects one emergency telephone line d...

Page 1044: ...th is 64 msec FAX Data transmission as voice data G 711 G 726 ADPCM FAX Relay T 30 FRF 11 FAX Relay T 38 Not supported Encryption Algorithm Supported AES Advanced Encryption Standard PAD PAD setting 0 20 dB One dB step Smooth PAD Selectable Mode1 Mode5 Jitter Buffer Static 10 300 msec in 10 msec steps Dynamic 10 300 msec Quality of Service QoS ToS IP Precedence Supported DiffServ Supported VLAN IE...

Page 1045: ... for Maintenance Con sole RJ 45 serial connection CONSOLE cable RJ 45 RS 232C is used MG BRI Card RESET switch B D B D ALM PWR ON LINE EMA TEL LINE0 LINE1 Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE MUSIC RESET LINE0 LINE1 connector for ISDN line RJ 45 PWR lamp ALM lamp ON LINE lamp Ethernet connector RJ 45 EMA TEL connector for emergency telephone line RJ 45 Note 1 CONSOLE connector MUSIC connector B D B D ALM PWR O...

Page 1046: ... Red Lights when power module failure is detected OFF Normal operation ON LINE Green See MG BRI Lamp Indication and Status for the detail expla nations of the lamp indication Ether 100M Green Lights when transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Remains OFF when transmission speed is 10 Mbps LINK Green Lights when establishing Layer 1 link Note Lights when physically connected to IP network Flash Flashes...

Page 1047: ...wer OFF ON when this condition remains for more then one minute L S L S O O Failed to download the program First time Turn the power OFF ON in this circumstance L S L F O O Failed to download the program Second time Turn the power OFF ON in this circumstance L S L L O O Succeeded to download the pro gram Turn the power OFF ON when this condition remains for more then one minute L S L L S O Failed ...

Page 1048: ...igned and confirm the cable connec tion of LINE 0 1 L L F L Layer 1 normal Layer 2 established of LINE 0 Check if the office data of LINE 0 is assigned It is normal if both two channels of LINE 0 are in Make Busy state L L F L Layer 1 normal Layer 2 established of LINE 1 Check if the office data of LINE 1 is assigned It is normal if both two channels of LINE 1 are in Make Busy state L L F L F L La...

Page 1049: ...l L L L L Either one channel of LINE 0 is being used Normal L L O L Both two channels of LINE 1 are in idle state Normal L L S L One channel LINE 1 is in Make Busy state and another in idle state Normal L L F L Both two channels of LINE 1 are in Make Busy state Normal L L L L Either one channel of LINE 1 is being used Normal Symbol L Lit O Off S Slow flash 120int F Fast Flash 240int Don t care Sta...

Page 1050: ...ctors Lamps and Switches on Rear Panel NAME FUNCTION AC power inlet Connected to AC DC adapter with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft AC 100V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 230V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 240V 50 60 Hz 10 Power switch Power ON OFF switching PACT lamp Indicates the state in power unit Lights green Normal operation OFF Power failure Cooling fan AC power...

Page 1051: ...ectricity lightning strike and other electrical surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG BRI has ISDN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG BRI and AC power cable without Ground connection ...

Page 1052: ... network 5 Available Channels See VoIP Encryption V 27 in Data Programming Manual Business for the number of available channels on the encryption status of this component Function TP side SP side LAN Port default Port Number default Command to Change Setting Port Number default Command to Change Setting TP SP Note 1 Registration LAN1 3456 ADTM Port Number only 22000 Cannot be changed iLP PM LAN1 6...

Page 1053: ... m Line Cable For the connection to ISDN network T point use a 0 5φ Twisted pair Cable for DSU with an RJ 45 Modular Jack EMA TEL Cable For the connection between Emergency telephone and MG BRI use a Modular Cable with an RJ 45 Modular Jack CONSOLE Cable RJ 45 RS 232C serial cable for maintenance console Audio Cable Microphone input for external hold tone source 3 5 φ mini jack monaural type 2 Fir...

Page 1054: ...nnel of MG BRI cannot coexist in the same group with the virtual speech channel of other type of MG devices Also the virtual speech channel cannot coexist in the same group with the virtual speech channel of CCIS over IP using Internal PHC 3 Virtual speech channel B channel can be assigned to Virtual PIR Assign with ASYDL SYS1 Indexes 556 and 557 4 Internal PHE must be assigned ASYDL SYS1 Index 88...

Page 1055: ...r 2 Call origination termination is unavailable when MG BRI is in faulty condition 11 SP PHI and MG BRI is connected by UDP IP Routine diagnosis is activated by NOTIFY message Sys tem Message 33 R IP PKG warning is output when fault is detected 12 Re routing follows the LCR feature if ISDN line or UDP IP failure occurs 13 Initialize the MG BRI by the operation below after the port number change Ch...

Page 1056: ...mand choose ISDN trunk BRI SIP LENS of LINE CH0 and CH1 need to be assigned consecutively Example CH0 020010 CH1 020011 Be sure to assign CH0 to even numbered Level LENS 000000 cannot be used 20 The Telephony Server is responsible for timing control of call originating guard timer which needs to be assigned with the System Data ASYD SYS1 Index474 Value 256ms is default 21 S 127D Serial Call D cann...

Page 1057: ...n then select the External hold tone 5 External Music on Hold External Music on Hold and Expanded hold tone of the system or MG BRI s External hold tone can be chosen But those types of hold tone cannot be used on one MG BRI 6 When MB MG BRI s External hold tone is selected Gain value can be assigned to each MG BRI indi vidually by AMGIL command Assignment per MG BRI AMGIL command External Music o...

Page 1058: ...4 Reboot request by AMGIL command is only effective when MG BRI is in on line state It cannot be operated when power of MG BRI is off or Ethernet link is not established 5 Regardless of the setting on AMGIL command MG BRI is switched from operation mode to Emergency Telephone mode automatically when any failure is detected 6 Because Emergency Telephone is connected directly to the public ISDN netw...

Page 1059: ...nsert MG BRI to 1U MPC STEP 2 Secure the MG BRI to 1U MPC fixing two screws on right and left sides ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required MG BRI Card SCA 2BRIA bracket to mount on 19 inch rack 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis B D B D ALM PWR ON LINE EMA TEL LINE0 LINE1 Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC B D B D ALM PWR ON LINE EMA TEL LINE0 LINE1 Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE R...

Page 1060: ...n This section shows the cable connection to the MG BRI MG BRI provides the following interfaces Connection to LAN Connection to ISDN Connection of Emergency Telephone Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console Connection to Audio Equipment for external music on hold Power Supply B D B D ALM PWR ON LINE EMA TEL LINE0 LINE1 Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC ...

Page 1061: ...from the telephone terminal connected over the ISDN network and tuning the output level of external hold tone source or tuning the gain with the AMGIL command Gain tuning can be done by following four steps of 0dB 10dB gain 15dB gain 20dB gain The gain value decreases when the PAD is assigned at minus value to turn up the level of external music on hold Input impedance from the external hold tone ...

Page 1062: ...her end of the power cable to appropriate AC supply Note For the safety measures against static electricity lightning strike and other electrical surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG BRI has ISDN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG BRI and AC power cable without Ground connection REAR PACT AC power...

Page 1063: ...p MG BRI and Basic Tests Do not con nect these cables here B D B D ALM PWR ON LINE EMA TEL LINE0 LINE1 Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE MUSIC RESET CONSOLE cable Maintenance Console PC CONSOLE connector RJ 45 serial RS 232C D sub 9 pin FRONT MG BRI Card Box EMA RJ 45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 Send 4 Receive 6 Send 5 Receive 1 2 7 8 are not used Connected to Emergency Telephone B D B D A...

Page 1064: ...hernet ports are not intended to be connected directly to outdoor cables 2 When installing the MG BRI connected to off premise site connect gas tube arresters across each transmit and receive lines as shown in Figure below System BRI RA RB TA TB To Digital Network OFF PREMISE G RECEIVE TRANSMIT CSU DSU RJ45 RJ45 CSU Customer Service Unit DSU Digital Service Unit MDF Main Distribution Frame System ...

Page 1065: ...TIONS Transmission bandwidth DC to 2MHz Transmission loss Less than 0 5dB Longitudinal balance More than 50dB Nominal decoupling resistance 1ohm 0 5 Operating voltage DC 60V Max Nominal DC spark over voltage 90V Impulse spark over voltage at 1 2 50μs 6kV 1500V at initial max voltage 0 to 10μs 20V at more than10μs Nominal discharge current 100 A at 10 200μs ...

Page 1066: ...between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 1 Selection whether to use DHCP DNS server 2 Network Data Assignment STEP 4 Configuration Command Assignment 1 Connection between MG BRI and LAN 2 Connection between ISDN lines and MG STEP 5 Cable Connection 1 Basic Connection Te...

Page 1067: ...G BRI Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using MG BRI ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 64 b0 0 1 μ law A law of CODEC depends on the country INDEX 186 b6 1 ISDN is in service INDEX 187 00 Fixed INDEX 474 Guard Timer for Originating Call MTC TC bit 0 3 MTC Timer Counter bit 4 6 TC Timer Class assign 1H 64 milliseconds ASYDL Assignment of System Data for LDM SYS1 INDEX 810...

Page 1068: ...h Channel Note MG BRI occupies the whole group when one channel is assigned Do not assign the trunk data to even numbered MG U 0 and G 00 It is not available for MG BRI G06 LV0 LV7 2 0 2 RT TK LENS 1 255 1 255 MG U G 00 07 0 3 LV 0 7 00 23 1 2 0 2 1 0 6 0 1 2 0 1 2 7 2 0 6 0 1 2 3 0 6 0 1 2 0 6 0 2 0 Virtual Speech Channel 4 2 1 2 3 3 0 6 0 1 2 Virtual Speech Channel B2 B1 B2 B1 B2 Line1 ch1 B1 Li...

Page 1069: ... signaling control of MG BRI IP Precedence 0 7 Diffserv 00 63 MUSIC ON HOLD EXISTS Place the check box ON to select hold tone type External Music on Hold Select Input gain adjustment 0 0dB default 1 10dB gain 2 15dB gain 3 20dB gain Internal Music on Hold 1 Internal Music on Hold 2 Note The gain value decreases when the PAD is assigned at minus value to turn up the level of external mu sic on hold...

Page 1070: ...1 The PAD value of MG when DtermIP Soft Phone INASET is connected No 2 The PAD value of MG when Analog MC Digital MC is connected No 3 The PAD value of MG when IPPAD is connected No 4 The PAD value of MG when MG is connected Setting of Echo Canceller Click this check box for the setting of Echo Canceller EC TYPE This parameter is available only when the check box of Setting of Echo Canceller is ON...

Page 1071: ...ignment Make sure to delete in the order of AMGIL ATRK Confirm there is no data left in AMGIL before deleting ATRK Note Do not delete ASYDL SYS1 Index 810 Bit2 if external hold tone provided by the system is to be used Note Other MG equipment shares the ALIDL data so be careful in deleting ...

Page 1072: ... the Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Requi...

Page 1073: ... STEP 2 Make sure the LEDs indicate normal status PWR LED lights green Boot program automatically starts ON LINE lamp lights green when the sequence is completed ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT MG SIP16 Card REAR Turn ON the power switch UP Turn ON the power switch UP MG SIP16 Box REAR B D B D ALM PWR ON LINE EMA TEL LINE0 LINE1 Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET ...

Page 1074: ...Input then press Enter key STEP 4 Main menu of the configuration mode appears Enter 1 after Input then press Enter key to start Standard mode Note Configuration command has two modes Standard mode and Custom mode Use Standard mode when start ing up MG BRI for the first time to assign the basic data for connecting network See Section 12 4 5 How to Use Maintenance Command for the detailed informatio...

Page 1075: ...n network data according to the setting of DHCP server and DNS server When DHCP Server is Enabled When DHCP Server is Disabled Current DNS Interface ENABLE Change DNS Interface Y change N current Q quit y Input new DNS Interface E enable D disable d ...

Page 1076: ...ta setting is displayed Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit y Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 2 Select the transmission speed of LAN interface 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100 Mbps fixed mode 3 10 Mbps fixed mode Input new DUPLEX F full H half f Select the Duplex mode F Full duplex mode H Half duplex mode Signaling Port Nu...

Page 1077: ...Port Number 1024 65512 1024 Enter the first port number to be used for RTP Port number 1024 65512 default 1024 Signaling QOS set Current Signaling QOS IP Precedence 0xC0 Current data setting is displayed Change Signaling QOS Y change N current Q quit y Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode QoS I IP PRECEDENCE D DIFFSERV IP PRECEDENCE d Select the QoS type I IP Precedence...

Page 1078: ...MG BRI Default Gateway and the Telephony Server is got by DHCP server there is no need to assign these network data on MG BRI side IP addresses listed below however need to be as signed on DHCP server side Note 1 IP address of Default Gateway IP address of the Telephony Server Note 2 Note 1 Check the number of IP address saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of MG BRI anytime ...

Page 1079: ...VOL 2 826 MG BRI SCA 2BRIA MG 2BRIA Note 2 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate Data IP address Array Checked Code 162 ...

Page 1080: ... the following addresses network address broadcast address to MG BRI example IP address 192 168 1 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 0 is network address improper IP address 176 16 0 0 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 176 16 0 0 is network address improper IP address 192 168 1 255 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 255 is broadcast address improper IP address 176 16 255 255 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 176 ...

Page 1081: ...rrent Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Current data setting is displayed Change Default Gateway Y change N current Q quit y Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new Default Gateway 10 40 1 254 Enter the IP address of Default Gateway SIP Server IP Address Host Name set Current SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name 1 2 3 0 0 ...

Page 1082: ...o set other SIP server N Go on to the next command Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed 100MBPS_FD Current data setting is displayed Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit y Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 1 Select the transmission speed of LAN interface 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100 Mbps fixed mode 3 10 Mbps fixed mode Si...

Page 1083: ...Port Number 1024 65512 1024 Enter the first port number to be used for RTP Port number 1024 65512 default 1024 Signaling QOS set Current Signaling QOS IP Precedence 0xC0 Current data setting is displayed Change Signaling QOS Y change N current Q quit y Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode QoS I IP PRECEDENCE D DIFFSERV IP PRECEDENCE d Select the QoS type I IP Precedence...

Page 1084: ...6 255 255 is broadcast address improper As IP address of MG BRI Default Gateway and the Telephony Server is got by DHCP server there is no need to assign these network data on MG BRI side IP addresses listed below however need to be as signed on DHCP server side Note 1 IP address of Default Gateway IP address of the Telephony Server Note 2 QoS I IP PRECEDENCE D DIFFSERV IP PRECEDENCE d DSCP 0 63 4...

Page 1085: ...ber of IP address saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of MG BRI anytime Note 2 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate Data IP address Array Checked Code 162 ...

Page 1086: ...s 0 9 asterisk pound sign is avail able Note Assigned One Time Password is deleted from the configuration setting when the first registration is com pleted STEP 9 Save the assigned configuration data STEP 10 Reboot the MG BRI by turning the power OFF ON or pressing RESET button Note MG ID MAC Address of MG BRI is displayed after rebooting The MG ID needs to be assigned in AMGIL command Configurati...

Page 1087: ... flashes steady lights in green when connection succeeded Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Send 2 Send 3 Receive 6 Receive 4 5 7 8 are not used Maintenance Console PC B D B D ALM PWR ON LINE EMA TEL LINE0 LINE1 Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC ON LINE lamp Ethernet connector FRONT MG BRI Card Box LINE0 1 RJ 45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 Send 4 Rece...

Page 1088: ...up by using IP address of SIP server registered in the configuration data of MG BRI Note 3 Configuration data is required DHCP and DNS server Network Data Acquisition Status from DHCP Network Data Acqui sitionStatus from DNS Availability of Starting up MG BRI IP Address of MG BRI and Default Gateway and Subnet Mask IP Address of SIP server IP Address of DNS and Host Name of MG BRI and SIP server I...

Page 1089: ...n MG BRI and networking device Also check the power of Switching HUB and Routers are turned ON Check that correct cable is used Use the Straight through cable Check that the cable is not damaged Test the continuity in the LAN cable Replace the LAN cable or the network device if the problem is still not cleared Lights green This lamp turns ON when MG BRI initially starts up and connection to LAN is...

Page 1090: ...ny Server Check the MG BRI is physically connected to ISDN network Also confirm the line cable between MDF and MG BRI MDF and DSU Check that the cable is not damaged Test the continuity in the LAN cable Check the data assignment of the Telephony Server side and MG BRI side Telephony server Is the data assignment on each PCPro command correct MG BRI Check the configuration data assigned from the ma...

Page 1091: ... Digital Line Warning 3 I Digital Line Failure 13 J Restoration from CCS Link Failure 33 R IP PKG Warning 33 S IP PKG Failure 33 T IP PKG Restore 3 Emergency Telephone Switching Test The general description of the Emergency Telephone is explained below Note Telephone terminal to be connected to EMA TEL is ISDN terminal or Terminal Adapter Analog Tele phone Only LINE0 is connected directly to ISDN ...

Page 1092: ...ty STEP 1 Start up the MG BRI by switching on the power switch on the rear panel of 1U MPC Check initial ization completes and the MG BRI turns to ON LINE state STEP 2 Pull out the LAN cable from the Ether connector and wait until MG BRI detects the WAN fault About 4 minutes STEP 3 Check whether call origination termination can be executed on Emergency Telephone From the ISDN terminal or TA Analog...

Page 1093: ...ng RS 232C cable STEP 3 Power on MG BRI STEP 4 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 5 Select Transfer Capture File STEP 6 Send File screen is displayed Specify a file name to be saved and then click the Start button STEP 7 At the moment that boot programming is starting While Starting MG BRI boot pro gra...

Page 1094: ...ved in the procedures of Backing Up Config Data By Serial Connection STEP 9 Assign the same settings by the configuration commands seeing the config data For more in formation about the configuration command refer to section 12 4 4 on page 846 STEP 10 After assigning the settings save the config data by the save config command STEP 11 Enter y in the confirmation box STEP 12 Confirm that Configurat...

Page 1095: ...and HUB STEP 4 Allow read in this directory For more information refer to the appropriate manual attached to the FTP server program STEP 5 Set network environment for the TFTP server STEP 6 Confirm the all files to be downloaded into an appropriate folder of the PC TFTP Server The following show the example of TONE data files STEP 7 Start the TFTP program STEP 8 Power on MG BRI File Name Remarks a...

Page 1096: ...ea number If they are correct input y STEP 19 Input n set the existing IP address for MG BRI s IP address set if the default IP address is not correct input y and enter the proper IP address STEP 20 Input n set the existing IP address for TFTP s IP address set if the default IP address is not correct input y and enter the proper IP address STEP 21 Make sure correct IP addresses are set in TFTP ser...

Page 1097: ...P3826 STEP 4 Allow read in this directory For more information refer to the appropriate manual attached to the FTP server program STEP 5 Set network environment for the TFTP server STEP 6 Start the TFTP program STEP 7 Power on MG BRI STEP 8 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 9 Reboot MG BRI OFF ON STEP...

Page 1098: ...ver and MG BRI And then input y if they are correct STEP 18 The Program download menu is displayed Input 0 to download BSC program BSC program is downloaded and written into Flash ROM STEP 19 After all the download is completed enter q to reboot the system STEP 20 Activate HyperTerminal and connect to MG BRI If you want to confirm the version information enter show version Confirmation of MG BRI O...

Page 1099: ...ion refer to the appropriate manual attached to the FTP server program STEP 3 Set network environment for the FTP server STEP 4 Start the FTP program Resetting MG BRI SIP by AMGIL Command STEP 5 Activate the AMGIL command and then input the MG ID of MG BRI SIP to reset STEP 6 Click Get to read out the registered information STEP 7 Select an item of Reset in FUNCTION STEP 8 Select an item of Activa...

Page 1100: ... narrow them down by specifying Terminal Type in the ATDL command MG BRI s will be displayed per registered channel Therefore when multiple channels are registered in an MG BRI in the box the same MG BRI is displayed more than once To avoid setting upgrade task to the target MG BRI more then once select either one of the channels used in the MG BRI by checking LENS STEP 15 Click the Add to the Ter...

Page 1101: ...perly with the upgraded firmware make a call to the MG BRI Check that you can hear RBT STEP 22 Receive a call via the MG BRI and confirm that you are able to talk to each other STEP 23 After all the tasks are completed write down or label the firmware version that you installed in the MG BRI onto the back of it ...

Page 1102: ...akes about five minutes to start the rebooting after you exit from the configu ration command or enter the last command Starting Configuration Command By using the communication software such as HyperTerminal Note 1 start a boot program by turning on the power or pressing RESET switch When boot program has started press ESC key while Starting MG BRI boot program is displayed then the boot mode mai...

Page 1103: ...put N to skip this command and go on to the next command Input new DNS IP Address 10 41 1 150 This line is displayed to assign the data only when Y is selected in the former step Input the IP address of DNS server e g 10 41 1 150 and press Enter key Note When any abnormal data is input the dialog ask to enter proper data until three times In the fourth time you enter abnormal data the command quit...

Page 1104: ...on set w o DNS server Ethernet Speed set Signaling Port Number set RTP Start Port Number set Signaling QOS set VLAN Information set w o DHCP server w DNS server DNS IP Address set IP Address Subnetmask set Host Name set Default Gateway IP Address set SIP Server Host Name set Ethernet Speed set Signaling Port Number set RTP Start Port Number set Signaling QOS set VLAN Information set w o DNS server...

Page 1105: ...P server from DNS server using the configuration data DHCP and DNS server Network Data Acquisition Status from DHCP Network Data Acqui sitionStatus from DNS Availability of Starting up MG BRI IP Address of MG BRI and Default Gateway and Subnet Mask IP Address of SIP server IP Address of DNS and Host Name of MG BRI and SIP server IP Address of SIP server Note 1 w DHCP server w DNS server Acquired A...

Page 1106: ...mmand Entry Ordinary command executes one order at a line but for some of the command value needs to be entered in dialogue format because some of the command cannot execute an order in a line For example some of the Sub command for SET Command value needs to be assigned in hexadecimal Parameter can be omit ted in this case Setting value will be decided in hexadecimal when any value was assigned i...

Page 1107: ...VOL 2 854 MG BRI SCA 2BRIA MG 2BRIA Note Other displays are omitted here COST 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Lower Cost in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified ...

Page 1108: ...rst registration af ter connected to network 10 OWN_IPADDRESS Assignment of IP Address Subnet Mask and Host Name of MG BRI itself 11 RTP_START_PORT_NO Specify the first port number to be used for RTP 12 SIGNALING_PORT_NO Assign the port number to be used for PHI signaling 13 SIGNALING_QOS Assign the ToS value added to signaling SIP server signaling ses sion 14 SIPSV_IPADDRESS Assign the IP address...

Page 1109: ...ess Subnet Mask and Host Name of MG BRI itself 12 RTP_START_PORT_NO Displays the current setting of RTP Start Port Number 13 SIGNALING_PORT_NO Displays the current setting of Signaling Port number 14 SIGNALING_QOS Displays the current setting of QoS data for signaling session 15 SIPSV_IPADDRESS Displays the current setting of SIP server s IP address port number and host name 16 SMOOTH_PAD Displays...

Page 1110: ..._RCV_TIMER WARNING_TONE_CONTROL ONE_TIME_PASS Setting Ethernet Speed Def AUTO Setting DHCP interface Def DISABLE Setting DNS Interface Def DISABLE Setting DNS IP Address Def 0 0 0 0 Setting SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name Def 0 0 0 0 5060 blank Setting IP Address Subnetmask Host Name Def 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 blank Setting Default Gateway IP Address Def 0 0 0 0 Setting Signaling QOS Def IP P...

Page 1111: ... Sub command and Parameter The values to be assigned for each Parameter depend on the Maintenance Command some of the Maintenance Commands do not require any parameter A space needs to be entered between Command Sub command and Parameter An example screen setting IP address 123 201 18 45 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 in the system data of MG BRI SIP is shown below Note The communication condition ...

Page 1112: ...work 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Throughput in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Reliability in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified COST 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Lower Cost in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified Signaling QoS setting succeeded 0xC0 The result is displayed Prec PRECEDENCE 3 bi...

Page 1113: ...ERROR_CHECK Assign the interval to detect LAN cable fall off 11 ONE_TIME_PASS Assign the one time password to be used for the first registration af ter connected to network 12 OWN_IPADDRESS Assignment of IP Address Subnet Mask and Host Name of MG BRI itself 13 RTP_START_PORT_NO Specify the first port number to be used for RTP 14 RTP_STOP_DETECT Specify a time out value for MG Based Call Retention ...

Page 1114: ...ess 10 INTERFACE Displays the current setting for speed and activation mode of Ether net controller 11 LAN_ERROR_CHECK Displays the interval to detect LAN cable fall off 12 ONE_TIME_PASS Displays the current setting of one time password 13 OWN_IPADDRESS Displays the current setting of IP Address Subnet Mask and Host Name of MG BRI itself 14 RTP_START_PORT_NO Displays the current setting of RTP Sta...

Page 1115: ...L Displays the current setting whether to send warning tone in the case of LAN failure Sub command Function 1 CONFIG This command is used to save the modified configuration data to the FlashROM Sub command Function 1 CONFIG This command is used to initialize the configuration data to factory default value Sub command Function 1 This command is used to reboot the MG BRI Sub command Function 1 This ...

Page 1116: ...onfirm the parameter after the Sub command it will be SET Command Name OWN_IPADDRESS Sub command Name Help screen of SET command is shown below as an example MG BRI SIP SET CALL_HOLD DEFAULT_GATEWAY DHCP_SV DNS_IPADDRESS DNS_SV DTMF_IN Setting Call Hold Setting Default Gateway IP address Setting DHCP Interface Setting DNS IP Address Setting DNS Interface Setting IP Address Subnetmask Host Name ...

Page 1117: ... data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new DHCP Interface E enable D disable e Specify whether to use DHCP server E DHCP server is used D DHCP server is not used default DNS Interface set Current DNS Interface Disable Current data setting is displayed Change DNS Interface Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Qui...

Page 1118: ...mode 3 10 Mbps fixed mode Input new DUPLEX F full H half f Select the Duplex mode F Full duplex mode H Half duplex mode Signaling Port Number set Current Signaling Port Number 64000 Current data setting is displayed Change Signaling Port Number Y change N cur rent Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new Signalin...

Page 1119: ...t 65535 F Signaling QOS set Assign the ToS data added to signaling session Input new RTP Start Port Number 1024 65512 1024 Enter the first port number to be used for RTP Port number 1024 65512 default 1024 Signaling QOS set Current Signaling QOS IP Precedence 0xC0 Current data setting is displayed Change Signaling QOS Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To chan...

Page 1120: ...DIFFSERV IP PRECEDENCE i PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Precedence in IP network 0 7 6 Default DELAY 0 1 0 Precedence of Low Delay in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Throughput in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Reliability in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified COST 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Lower Cost in ...

Page 1121: ...ddress of the Telephony Server Note 2 Note 3 Note 1 Check the number of IP address saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of MG BRI anytime Note 2 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate Data IP address Array Checked Code 162 Note 3 About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration ...

Page 1122: ...ge LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 3 Select the transmission speed of LAN interface 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100 Mbps fixed mode 3 10 Mbps fixed mode Input new DUPLEX F full H half h Select the Duplex mode F Full duplex mode H Half duplex mode Si...

Page 1123: ...ent RTP Start Port Number 1024 Current data setting is displayed Change RTP Start Port Number Port Number Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new RTP Start Port Number 1024 65512 1024 Enter the first port number to be used for RTP Port number 1024 65512 default 1024 Signaling QOS set Current S...

Page 1124: ...DIFFSERV IP PRECEDENCE i PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Precedence in IP network 0 7 6 Default DELAY 0 1 0 Precedence of Low Delay in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Throughput in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Reliability in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified COST 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Lower Cost in ...

Page 1125: ... Note 1 IP address of Default Gateway IP address of the Telephony Server Note 2 Note 1 Check the number of IP address saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of MG BRI anytime Note 2 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate Data IP address Array Checked Code 162 Standard mode for w o DHCP server and w DN...

Page 1126: ...ign the host name of MG BRI DNS IP Address set Current DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current data setting is displayed Change DNS IP Address Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new DNS IP Address 10 40 1 150 Enter the IP address of DNS server IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Curre...

Page 1127: ...isplayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Is there the Host Name Y N y Asked whether to use host name Y Use host name N Not use host name Input new Host Name mgbri nec com Enter the MG BRI s host name in full domain up to 63 byte of characters period and hyphen is available ...

Page 1128: ...me subnet of MG BRI Default Gateway IP Address set Current Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Current data setting is displayed Change Default Gateway Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new Default Gateway 10 40 1 254 Enter the IP address of Default Gateway ...

Page 1129: ...t data setting is displayed Change SIP Server Information Y change N cur rent Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new SIP Server 1 20 1 Enter the SIP server number Is there the Host Name Y N y Asked whether to use host name Y Use host name N Not use host name Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Enter the SIP server...

Page 1130: ... N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 1 Select the transmission speed of LAN interface 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100 Mbps fixed mode 3 10 Mbps fixed mode Signaling Port Number set Current Signaling Port Number 64000 Current data setting is displayed Change Signaling Port...

Page 1131: ...ent RTP Start Port Number 1024 Current data setting is displayed Change RTP Start Port Number Port Number Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new RTP Start Port Number 1024 65512 1024 Enter the first port number to be used for RTP Port number 1024 65512 default 1024 Signaling QOS set Current S...

Page 1132: ...DIFFSERV IP PRECEDENCE i PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Precedence in IP network 0 7 6 Default DELAY 0 1 0 Precedence of Low Delay in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Throughput in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Reliability in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified COST 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Lower Cost in ...

Page 1133: ...er need to be as signed on DHCP server side Note 1 IP address of Default Gateway IP address of the Telephony Server Note 2 Note 1 Check the number of IP address saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of MG BRI anytime Note 2 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate Data IP address Array Checked Code 162...

Page 1134: ...MG BRI IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 0 0 0 0 Current data setting is displayed Change IP Address and Subnetmask Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new IP Address 10 40 1 100 Enter the IP address of MG BRI Input new Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Enter the ...

Page 1135: ...me subnet of MG BRI Default Gateway IP Address set Current Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Current data setting is displayed Change Default Gateway Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new Default Gateway 10 40 1 254 Enter the IP address of Default Gateway ...

Page 1136: ... blank blank blank blank blank blank blank blank blank Current data setting is displayed Change SIP Server Information Y change N cur rent Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new SIP Server 1 20 1 Enter the SIP server number Input new IP Address 10 41 1 150 Enter the IP address of SIP server Note 2 Input new Por...

Page 1137: ...y the same port number assigned on SIP server Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed 100MBPS_FD Current data setting is displayed Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 1 Select the transmission speed of LAN interface 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100 M...

Page 1138: ...ent RTP Start Port Number 1024 Current data setting is displayed Change RTP Start Port Number Port Number Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To change the displayed data N Not change Q Quit Standard mode Input new RTP Start Port Number 1024 65512 1024 Enter the first port number to be used for RTP Port number 1024 65512 default 1024 Signaling QOS set Current S...

Page 1139: ...DIFFSERV IP PRECEDENCE i PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Precedence in IP network 0 7 6 Default DELAY 0 1 0 Precedence of Low Delay in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Throughput in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Reliability in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified COST 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Lower Cost in ...

Page 1140: ...er need to be as signed on DHCP server side Note 1 IP address of Default Gateway IP address of the Telephony Server Note 2 Note 1 Check the number of IP address saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of MG BRI anytime Note 2 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate Data IP address Array Checked Code 162...

Page 1141: ... default 0 0 0 0 Default configuration is 0 0 0 0 if you will not change a configuration by using this command In order to make a setup reflect and keep re starting is required after saving a configuration data by SAVE command MG BRI set dhcp_sv Input new DHCP Interface E enable D disable d DISABLE Not using DHCP server ENABLE Using DHCP server Default configuration is DISABLE if you will not chan...

Page 1142: ...BLE if you will not change a configuration by using this command In order to make a setup reflect and keep re starting is required after saving a configuration data by SAVE command MG BRI set fax_detection_time Input 0 1 5 6 9 1 0 No switching to FAX 1 5 Effective switching timer minute Default 1 minute 6 9 Switching always effective Default configuration is 1 if you will not change a configuratio...

Page 1143: ...set interface SPEED 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 1 AUTO AUTO Negotiation default 100M 100Mbps Fixed mode 10M 10Mbps Fixed mode Default configuration is AUTO if you will not change a configuration by using this command In order to make a setup reflect and keep re starting is required after saving a configuration data by SAVE command MG BRI set lan_error_check LAN Error Check Timer 100 1000 10 1000 Effective...

Page 1144: ...xt odd num bered port number is automatically assigned as the RTCP port number Note 24 ports are occupied following the RTP start port More than 24 of consecutive vacant ports must be re served from the specified port number to the last 65535 MG BRI set own_ipaddress OWN IP address 10 41 1 100 Assign the IP Address of MG BRI Default 0 0 0 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Assign the Subnet Mask of MG BR...

Page 1145: ...s required after saving a configuration data by SAVE command MG BRI set signaling_qos QOS I IP PRECEDENC D DIFFSERV IP PRECEDENCE P1 P1 I D I IP Precedence type data assignment D DIFFSERV type data assignment QOS I IP PRECEDENCE D DIFFSERV I I I When IP PRECEDENCE is selected PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Precedence in IP network 0 7 6 Default DELAY 0 1 0 0 Precedence of Low Delay in IP network 0 Not specifi...

Page 1146: ...VE command MG BRI set sipsv_ipaddress SIP Server 1 20 1 Enter the SIP server number Up to 20 SIP servers can be set in a network IP Address 10 41 1 150 Enter the IP address of SIP server Note 1 Default 0 0 0 0 e g 10 41 1 150 Port Number 5060 Enter the port number of SIP server 1024 65535 Default 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N y Asked whether to use host name Y Use host name N Not use host name I...

Page 1147: ...y Server will not be executed Note 2 CONFIG CALL_HOLD must be entered in upper case letters Note Other than ENABLE or DISABLE must not be entered for P1 Note Execute the SAVE command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change MG BRI set smooth_pad Specify the mode Input Smooth PAD 0 1 2 3 4 5 OFF 2dBm 5dBm 2dBm 0dBm 4dBm 1 0 DSP Smooth PAD is not used 1 2 dBm default 2 5 dBm 3 2 dB...

Page 1148: ... 255 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 255 is broadcast address improper IP address 176 16 255 255 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 176 16 255 255 is broadcast address improper As IP address of MG BRI Default Gateway and SIP server is gotten by DHCP server there is no need to assign these network data on MG BRI side IP addresses listed below however need to be assigned on DHCP server side Note 1 IP addre...

Page 1149: ...DUCTION of Installation Manual 18 SET WARNING_TONE_CONTROL Assign whether to use warning tone when LAN failure or not Note Execute the SAVE command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change MG BRI set warning_tone_control Setting of Mode Default 3 Warning Tone Control 0 3 3 0 Do not send warning tone 1 Send warning tone to IP network side 2 Send warning tone to ISDN side 3 Send wa...

Page 1150: ..._SPEED AUTO DHCP ENABLE OWN_ADDR 0 0 0 0 SUBNET_MASK 0 0 0 0 DEFAULT_GATEWAY 0 0 0 0 SIPSV_ADDR1 0 0 0 0 SIPSV_PORT1 64000 SIG_QOS 1 0xC0 SIGNALING_PORT 64000 START_PORT 1024 VLAN_NUM_1 0 FAX_TIME 1 MUSIC_LEVEL 0 SMOOTH_PAD 1 LAN_ERROR_CHECK 1000 HC_RCV_TIMER 150 WARNING_TONE_CONTROL 3 SINT_MODE 0 CALL_HOLD ENABLE RTP_STOP_DETECT 3 MG BRI show default_gateway Default Gateway is 10 40 1 254 MG BRI ...

Page 1151: ...ng process 8 SHOW INTERFACE Displays the current setting for speed and activation mode of Ethernet controller 9 SHOW LAN_ERROR_CHECK Displays the interval to detect LAN cable fall off MG BRI show dns_ipaddress DNS IP address is 10 40 1 150 MG BRI show dns_sv DNS is ENABLE This example shows the DNS server is Enable MG BRI show fax_detection_time FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute MG BRI show hc_rcv_time...

Page 1152: ...ng of Signaling Port number 14 SHOW SIGNALING_QOS Displays the current setting of QoS data for signaling session MG BRI show one_time_pass One Time Password is 123456 MG BRI show own_ipaddress IP Address Subnetmask Host Name 10 41 1 100 255 255 255 0 mgbri nec com MG BRI show rtp_start_port_no RTP start port number is 1024 MG BRI SHOW SIGNALING_PORT_NO Signaling port number is 64000 MG BRI show si...

Page 1153: ...ng MG BRI show sipsv_ipaddress SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 10 41 1 150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5060 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SVR1 nec com blank blank blank blank blank blank blank blank blank ...

Page 1154: ...d configuration data to the FlashROM Note Configuration data will not be saved when any error occurs while SAVE CONFIG command is in process MG BRI show waring_tone_control Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP ISDN side MG BRI save config Don t power of in progress Do you need save Y N Y Enter Y to execute data saving Preservation of configuration data has been saved Result is displayed Re s...

Page 1155: ...rs when the configuration has not been saved Note Key entry will be denied when executing EXIT command following the OS prompt In this case press Ctrl key and C key simultaneously to display OS prompt again MG BRI exit Configuration data was changed Don t power off in progress y Save and Exit n Exit without saving c Cancel y n c y Enter Y to execute this command Configuration data has been saved f...

Page 1156: ...ot save the modified data when SAVE command has not been executed MG BRI reboot Do you need reboot Y N Y Enter Y to execute the command createRamDrb New File System is Created Attached TCP IP interface to axDev unit 0 Boot message will be displayed Configuration data was changed Don t power off in progress y Save and Exit n Exit without saving c Cancel y n c y Enter y to save and execute rebooting...

Page 1157: ...e ENABLE The current setting is displayed Change DHCP Interface Y change N current Q quit Y Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Input new DHCP Interface E enable D disable D Specify whether to use DHCP server E Use DHCP server D Not use DHCP server default DNS Interface set Current DNS Interface DISABLE The current setting is displayed Change DNS...

Page 1158: ... 4 Broadcast address cannot be assigned as IP address of MG BRI IP address 172 16 255 255 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 DNS IP Address set Current DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 The current setting is displayed Change DNS IP Address Y change N cur rent Q quit Y Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Input new DNS IP Address 10 41 1 150 Enter new IP address of DNS...

Page 1159: ...st name Y change N not change Q quit this setting Input new Host Name mgbri nec com Line 4 Enter new host name of MG BRI in full domain format Note Up to 63 characters of alphanumer ics period and hyphen is available Default Gateway IP Address set Current Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 The current setting is displayed Change Default Gateway Y change N cur rent Q quit Y Asked whether to change the display...

Page 1160: ...ut new Port Number 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit N Line 4 Line 9 The current setting of SIP server IP address port number and host name is displayed Line 10 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 11 Enter the number of SIP server 1 20 Line 12 Enter the IP address of SIP server e g ...

Page 1161: ...uto negotiation default 2 100Mbps fixed mode 3 10Mbps fixed mode Input new DUPLEX F full H half F Select the Duplex mode of LAN interface Note 1 F Full duplex mode H Half duplex mode Note 1 When the communication speed of LAN interface is 1 Auto negotia tion this setting is not required Signaling Port Number set Current Signaling Port Number 5060 The current setting is displayed Change Signaling P...

Page 1162: ...ed whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Input new RTP Start Port Number 1024 65512 1024 Enter the first port number to be used for RTP Port number 1024 65512 default 1024 Signaling QOS set Current Signaling QOS IP Precedence 0xC0 Current data setting is displayed Change Signaling QOS Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data...

Page 1163: ...in IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified QoS I IP PRECEDENCE D DIFFSERV IP PRECEDENCE d DSCP 0 63 48 48 Enter DSCP value 0 63 Default 48 VLAN Information set Current VLAN Information Current data setting is displayed Device ID COS IP Address Subnetmask VLAN 1 1 7 10 41 1 200 255 255 255 0 Change VLAN Information Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed data Y To c...

Page 1164: ...mask 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 255 is broadcast address improper IP address 176 16 255 255 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 176 16 255 255 is broadcast address improper F Save the assigned configuration data at the last of SETUP SP command to complete net work setting Note If abnormal data is entered four times continuously the setup will be quit without saving all the assigned configuration data Note If the...

Page 1165: ...HCP Server or not Note Execute the SAVE command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change MG BRI SIP SET CALL_HOLD P1 P1 ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE CALL_HOLD is valid DISABLE CALL_HOLD is invalid default CALL HOLD setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required after saving a configuration data by SAVE command The result is shown MG BRI SIP SET DEFAULT_GATEWA...

Page 1166: ... the CODEC settings because the Inband DTMF Relay does not identify the type of CODEC MG BRI SIP SET DNS_IPADDRESS P1 P1 IP address of DNS server default 0 0 0 0 DNS IP address setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required after saving a configuration data by SAVE command The result is shown MG BRI SIP SET DNS_SV P1 P1 ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE Using DNS server DISABLE Not...

Page 1167: ...5 Effective switching timer minute Default 1 minute 6 9 Switching always effective FAX Enable Timer setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required after saving a configuration data by SAVE command The result is shown MG BRI SIP SET HC_RCV_TIMER P1 P1 Specify Time Second 30 sec ond interval Effective range 120 300 in 30 sec ond step default 150 seconds Health Check Recei...

Page 1168: ... Host Name of MG BRI itself MG BRI SIP SET LAN_ERROR_CHECK P1 P1 Specify Time milli second 10 milli second interval Effective range 100 1000 in 10 msec step default 1000 LAN Error Check Timer setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required after saving a configuration data by SAVE command The result is shown MG BRI SIP SET ONE_TIME_PASS P1 P1 Enter any password in 4 10 c...

Page 1169: ...t port The specified data 1 the next odd num bered port number is automatically assigned as the RTCP port number Note 24 ports are occupied following the RTP start port More than 24 of consecutive vacant ports must be re served from the specified port number to the last 65535 14 SET RTP_STOP_DETECT Specify a time out value for MG Based Call Retention IP Address setting succeeded In order to make a...

Page 1170: ... setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required after saving a configuration data by SAVE command The result is shown MG BRI SIP SET SIGNALING_QOS QOS I IP PRECEDENC D DIFFSERV IP PRECEDENCE P1 P1 I D I IP Precedence type data assignment D DIFFSERV type data assignment QOS I IP PRECEDENCE D DIFFSERV I I I When IP PRECEDENCE is selected PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Precedence in I...

Page 1171: ...MG BRI SIP response will be trans ferred to the originating IP address without using the maddr parameter The maddr parameter will not be added to Via header of SIP request to be transferred from MG BRI 1 To be used for reception If maddr parameter is in Via header of SIP request received by MG BRI SIP response will be transferred QOS I IP PRECEDENCE D DIFFSERV I D D When Diffserv is selected DSCP ...

Page 1172: ... SIP message MG BRI will operate as follows depending on the setting 0 Not to be used Even if rport parameter is in Via header of SIP request received by MG BRI SIP response will be trans ferred to the port number written in Via header of SIP request without using the rport parameter The rport parameter will not be added to Via header of SIP request to be transferred from MG BRI 1 To be used for r...

Page 1173: ...the maintenance command to reflect change MG BRI SIP SET SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server 1 20 1 Enter the SIP server number Up to 20 SIP servers can be set in a network IP Address 10 41 1 150 Enter the IP address of SIP server Default 0 0 0 0 e g 10 41 1 150 Port Number 5060 Enter the port number of SIP server Note 1 1024 65535 Default 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N y Host Name SVR1 nec com Enter the ...

Page 1174: ...55 0 192 168 1 255 is broadcast address improper IP address 176 16 255 255 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 176 16 255 255 is broadcast address improper Note Execute the SAVE command before finishing the maintenance command to reflect change Note If 0 is assigned for VLAN ID VLAN will be unavailable MG BRI SIP SET SUBSCRIBE_RETRY P1 P1 ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE Session is regenerated DISABLE Session is not reg...

Page 1175: ... to reflect change MG BRI SIP SET WARNING_TONE_CONTROL P1 P1 Setting of Mode Default 3 0 Do not send warning tone 1 Send warning tone to IP network side 2 Send warning tone to ISDN side 3 Send warning tone to IP network and ISDN Warning Tone Control setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required after saving a configuration data by SAVE command The result is shown ...

Page 1176: ...HOW CALL_HOLD CALL HOLD is DISABLE MG BRI SIP SHOW CONFIG CONFIG LAN_SPEED 100MBPS_FD DHCP_SV ENABLE DNS_SV ENABLE DNS_ADDR 192 168 1 1 OWN_ADDR 192 168 1 100 OWN_NAME mgbrisip SUBNET_MASK 255 255 255 0 DEFAULT_GATEWAY 192 168 1 254 SIPSV_ADDR1 192 168 1 10 SIPSV_PORT1 5060 SIPSV_NAME1 sipsv SIPSV_ADDR2 0 0 0 0 SIPSV_PORT2 5060 SIPSV_NAME2 blank SIPSV_ADDR3 0 0 0 0 SIPSV_PORT3 5060 SIPSV_NAME3 bla...

Page 1177: ... for FAX switching 9 SHOW HC_RCV_TIMER Displays the current setting of Time out timer for SIP server health check packet waiting process MG BRI SIP SHOW DHCP_SV DHCP is ENABLE This example shows the DHCP server is Enable MG BRI SIP SHOW DNS_IPADDRESS DNS IP address is 192 168 1 1 MG BRI SIP SHOW DNS_SV DNS is ENABLE This example shows the DNS server is Enable MG BRI SIP SHOW DTMF_IN The current se...

Page 1178: ... MG BRI itself 14 SHOW RTP_START_PORT_NO Displays the current setting of RTP Start Port Number 15 SHOW RTP_STOP_DETECT Displays the current setting of RTP Stop Detect Timer MG BRI SIP SHOW INTERFACE Ethernet SPEED DUPLEX 100MBPS FULL MG BRI SIP SHOW LAN_ERROR_CHECK LAN Error Check Timer is 1000 MG BRI SIP SHOW ONE_TIME_PASS One Time Password is 12345 MG BRI SIP SHOW OWN_IPADDRESS IP Address Subnet...

Page 1179: ...nt setting of SIP maddr 19 SHOW SIP_RPORT Displays the current setting of SIP rport MG BRI SIP SHOW SIGNALING_PORT_NO Signaling port number is 5060 MG BRI SIP SHOW SIGNALING_QOS Signaling QOS is 0xC0 QOS IP PRECEDENCE This example is assigned with IP Precedence PRECEDENCE 6 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 MG BRI SIP SHOW SIP_MADDR SIP maddr is 0x01 SEND 0 RECEIVE 1 MG BRI SIP SHOW SIP_RP...

Page 1180: ...CRIBE session MG BRI SIP SHOW SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 192 168 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060 5060...

Page 1181: ... WARNING_TONE_CONTROL Displays the current setting whether to send warning tone in the case of LAN failure MB BRI SIP SHOW VLAN DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 1 6 192 168 10 100 255 255 255 0 MG BRI SIP SHOW WARNING_TONE_CONTROL Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP ISDN side ...

Page 1182: ...G BRI SIP SAVE CONFIG Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y N Y Enter Y to execute data saving Configuration data has been saved Result is displayed Re starting is required for making a setup reflect MG BRI SIP INIT CONFIG Warning This command initializes the configuration data This deletes the current setting Recommend to back up the setting Command execute or not Y N Y Asked whether to ...

Page 1183: ...d is used to exit the configuration command Normal occasion When configuration data is changed MG BRI SIP REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y Enter Y to execute the command MG BRI SIP REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y Configuration data was changed Don t power off in progress Enter Y to execute the command y Save and Reboot n Reboot without saving c Cancel Y N C Y Enter Y to save and execute rebooting C...

Page 1184: ...the configuration command MG BRI SIP if any error occurs after selecting Y Configuration data was changed Don t power off in progress y Save and Exit n Exit without saving c Cancel Y N C Y Enter Y to save the changed configuration data Configuration data has been saved Finished ...

Page 1185: ...nd entry IP address form is incorrect Input format of IP Address is invalid VLAN ID is no more registered Assignment cannot be executed Exceeding the maximum number of VLAN ID Sub command is missing Sub command was not entered during command entry Invalid parameter value The range of parameter value entered is invalid Invalid sub command Entered Sub command is invalid Command is abnormally termina...

Page 1186: ...m Tokyo using a typical tele phone network a long distance call between Tokyo and New York is made and it costs high However using telephone network via MG PRI PRA and the Telephony Server a short distance call can be made through IP network and ISDN offering a cost effective network Media Gateway Primary Rate Access Interface T1 E1 Network Configuration PWR MUSIC Tx Rx LINK LINE 10 100 IMP TNS RC...

Page 1187: ... maximum of 768 channel which indicates 32 MG PRI PRAs if each one handles 24 channel On E1 interface the Telephony Server supports a maximum of 960 channel which indicates 32 MG PRI PRAs if each one handles 30 channel The following shows the com munication model between the Telephony Server Internal PHI PRI and MG PRI PRA Note Internal PHI PRI is installed in the Telephony Server and controls MG ...

Page 1188: ... between the Telephony Server Internal PHI PRI and MG PRI PRA Voice data based on UDP is transmitted peer to peer The following shows the signaling flow between these equip ment Signaling Flow Telephony Server IP Station Analog Telephone MG PRI PRA PSTN ISDN Signaling Control Data TCP IP Voice Data RTP RTCP Internal PHI PRI RTP RTCP Real Time Protocol Real Time Control Protocol ...

Page 1189: ...I PRA When using Virtual LAN IP Network PWR MUSIC Tx Rx LINK LINE 10 100 IMP TNS RCV MG 2M LINE LB ON LINE B D PWR MUSIC Tx Rx LINK LINE 10 100 IMP TNS RCV MG 2M LINE LB ON LINE B D MG PRI PRA 01 MG PRI PRA 03 PSTN ISDN PSTN ISDN PSTN ISDN PWR MUSIC Tx Rx LINK LINE 10 100 IMP TNS RCV MG 2M LINE LB ON LINE B D PWR MUSIC Tx Rx LINK LINE 10 100 IMP TNS RCV MG 2M LINE LB ON LINE B D MG PRI PRA 01 MG P...

Page 1190: ...shows the packet types of IP Precedence and Diffserv Note Telephony Server Internal PHI PRI does not control packets using ToS Prec PRECEDENCE 3 bits D Delay 0 1 immediate sending is emphasized T Throughput 0 1 transfer speed is emphasized R Reliability 0 1 high reliability is emphasized C Cost low cost C R T D Prec IP Precedence Diffserv 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 111 110 101 100 011 010 001...

Page 1191: ...4K Digital Communication Hold Tone 13 1 6 Specifications HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS The following shows front and rear view of MG PRI PRA There are two types of MG PRI PRA T1 Type used in North America and E1 Type used in Australia or other countries MG PRI PRA Front Rear View PWR MUSIC Tx Rx LINK LINE 10 100 IMP TNS RCV MG 2M LINE LB ON LINE B D PWR MUSIC Tx Rx LINK LINE 10 100 IMP MG 1 5M LINE LB O...

Page 1192: ...cates Layer 1 in ISDN failed to be established LINE D Green Indicates make busy of Dch Note Temporary light on the LED indicates initial settings is being specified Blink Fast blinking 120 IPM indicates Layer 2 in ISDN failed to be established Slow blinking 240 IPM indicates Make Busy on D Channel Extinction Indicates D Channel failed to be registered LB Green Indicates initial settings Usually no...

Page 1193: ...VOL 2 940 MG PRI PRA IMP T1 Not used E1 Green Indicates TNS and RCV connectors are available Extinction Indicates LINE connector is available LED COLOR DESCRIPTION ...

Page 1194: ... 30ch Other countries RS 232C To Maintenance Console The connector is in the following Connector D sub 9 pin Connector Bit Rate 9600bps Data Length 8 bit Parity check is added Error check is invalid Communication Method Asynchronous Communication Method Coaxial Cable To ISDN network E1 type only RJ 45 Pin Assignment 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 100 BASE Pin No LINE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RA RB Not used TA TB Not u...

Page 1195: ...gh ToS IP Precedence Diffserv Signaling VLAN IEEE802 1q Tagging VLAN Echo Cancellation Tail Length 36 ms G 168 NLP function This setting specified by each route data ARTD PAD PAD is specified per route data by ARTD In the case of tandem connection the data is spec ified by APAD DTMF G 711 In band Others Out band H 245 User Input Indication Tone Control 13 tones A tone can be determined in 13 tones...

Page 1196: ...install the hardware required for using MG PRI PRA How to Set MG PRI PRA MG PRI PRA is set as following Be sure to place the MG PRI PRA on the flat surface MG PRI PRA Horizontal Setting PWR ON LINE LINE MUSIC B D LB MG 2M Tx Rx LINK LINE 10 100 IMP TNS RCV Note E1 type is shown as an example ...

Page 1197: ...ance Console Connect the required cables according to your system configuration Cable Connection to MG PRI PRA PWR MUSIC Tx Rx LINK LINE 10 100 IMP TNS RCV MG 2M LINE LB ON LINE B D IP Terminal IP Terminal LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX Dsub 9 pin Straight through Cable PSTN ISDN T1 E1 E1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 100 BASE Pin No LINE T1 E1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RA RB Not used TA TB Not used Not used Not used T...

Page 1198: ...applied for not tie network but PSTN using the following protocol North America Bellcore NI 2 AT T NO5ESS DMS 100 Other Countries ETSI ETS300 102 1 The following provides the port number to be used in this system If a firewall is used in your network do not block the following ports PORT NO PATH FUNCTION NOTE 64000 65024 PHI PRI MG PRI PRA iLP PM Changed by using PCPro belonging to the Telephony S...

Page 1199: ...H323 etc 4 RTP 5 FTP HTTP etc 6 Low Other packets Tandem Connection Availability CONNECTING EQUIPMENT AVAIL ABILITY DESCRIPTION MC Note 1 Not recommended because Voice quality may be degraded due to multiple conversion Delay may be increased due to excessive jitter buffer insertion COT Note 2 Voice speech and FAX relay are available However DTMF relay is not guaranteed Input level can be lower tha...

Page 1200: ...Line Loss be tween two switches Tandem Connection Involving COT or LDT IP Network Connection between STN A and STN B cannot be guaranteed ISDN STN B STN A MC MG PRI PRA Line Loss The signal can be attenuated here 2 wire If input level at MG PRI PRA is lower than minimum DTMF detection level DTMF relay cannot be guaranteed ISDN STN B COT LDT LC LDT LC STN A MG PRI PRA If input level is smaller than...

Page 1201: ...module by ADPM STEP 5 Specify Route Data by ARTD STEP 6 Specify Application Data by ARTI STEP 7 Specify Trunk Data Bch by ATRK STEP 8 Specify Destination Node by ADPC STEP 9 Specify CSC information by ACSC STEP 10 Specify CIC information by ACIC1 STEP 11 Specify Trunk Data Dch by ATRK STEP 12 Unblock Virtual Speech Channel by MBTK STEP 13 Specify MG PRI PRA information by AMGIL STEP 14 Specify MG ...

Page 1202: ... terminals Option Note 1 STEP 23 Specify the soft key name displayed on LCD Option Note 1 STEP 24 Specify a required maximum of the digits for MA ID and DC Option Note 1 STEP 25 Specify Reverse Numbering Plan Data for LDM Option Note 1 STEP 26 Specify an OPR Option Note 1 STEP 27 Specify routes and the condition Option Note 1 Note 1 STEPs 14 to 24 are required when the Telephony Server manages mul...

Page 1203: ... using Proprietary Protocol If you need more information about these commands refer to 13 4 Operation and Maintenance for MG PRI PRA console commands or Command Manual MG PRI PRA Settings This item describes the procedures for MG PRI PRA by using the Maintenance Console which connects to MG PRI PRA For more information refer to 13 4 Operation and Maintenance STEP 1 Specify IP Addresses of DRS and ...

Page 1204: ...DISABLE Type SET DEFAULTROUTE Default Gateway IP Address IP address of Default Gateway is registered Example 150 10 1 254 Type SET DRSADDRESS DRS Address will be registered after responding to the sequential detailed settings For more informa tion refer to page 968 Type SET IPADDRESS IP Address Subnet Mask IP address of MG PRI PRA is registered The required settings by the Maintenance Console vary...

Page 1205: ...command after changing Location ID data IP ADDRESS Enter the Network Address For the Telephony Server assign 0 0 0 0 MASK BIT Enter the Mask Bit in the range of 1 31 except when IP Address 0 0 0 0 is determined Mask Bit 32 is automatically set when Network Address 0 0 0 0 LOC ID Assign the Location ID in the range of 0 4095 associated with the Network Address When Network Address 0 0 0 0 LOC ID 0 ...

Page 1206: ...l Speech Channel and Virtual Signaling Chan nel The following is an example when the Virtual Signaling Channel 10 and the Virtual Speech Channel 20 RT 10 Virtual Signaling Channel RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN60 TC EC 1 EC Virtual Speech Channel Note EC is applied only for Virtual Speech Channel Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit ...

Page 1207: ...ech Channel and Virtual Signaling Channel Note that the Point Code must be different from the Point Code for CCIS ISDN does not actually use the Point Code but it is necessary to develop the Office Data Note NDM command ADPCN cannot be used here STEP 9 Specify CSC Information Open ACSC command and assign Virtual Speech Channel into the even numbers 130 254 of the CSC group and Virtual Signaling Ch...

Page 1208: ...f E1 30B D setting CSCG CICG CCH MG 00 07 U 0 3 G 00 23 130 131 0 00 0 04 1 00 0 04 2 00 0 04 3 00 0 04 4 00 0 04 5 00 0 04 6 00 0 04 7 00 0 04 CSCG CICG CCH MG 00 07 U 0 3 G 00 23 130 131 0 00 0 04 1 00 0 04 2 00 0 04 3 00 0 04 4 00 0 04 5 00 0 04 6 00 0 04 7 00 0 04 ...

Page 1209: ...gister information regarding to MG PRI PRA as follows MG ID Specify the MAC Address 6 bytes KIND Specify an ISDN Trunk PRI 1 5M 2M LINE 0 fixed CH 0 fixed LENS Specify a Basic Accommodated Location top of HW Retry Specify a Retry Number of demanding request for MG PRI PRA connection Service Type Specify QoS settings of Signaling indicating ToS when Internal PHI PRI connects to MG PRI PRA STEP 14 S...

Page 1210: ... Jitter Buffer Minimum JB_MAX Jitter Buffer Maximum Setting Type of Voice Packet Service Specify QoS settings of Voice Speech Setting of Payload TYPE Specify a Payload type to be used SIZE Specify the Payload size to be used After registration is completed reset MG PRI PRA OFF ON RESET THE MG SYSTEM BY TURNING OFF AND ON THE POWER AFTER ASSIGNING DATA ...

Page 1211: ...ephony Server with appropriate commands ASYD ASYDL ADPM ADTM ARTD ARTI ATRK ADPC ACSC ACIC1 AMGIL AMGVL from PCPro For more information about its MGC commands refer to CHAPTER4 When confirming the Telephony Server settings refer to the Command Manual and the Data Programming Manual STEP 4 Make sure that LINE D lamp lights on If the lamp on MG PRI PRA does not light on check the following Check the...

Page 1212: ...tenance Console and check the MGC related data specified in the Telephony Server with appropriate commands ASYD ASYDL ADPM ADTM ARTD ARTI ATRK ADPC ACSC ACIC1 AMGIL AMGVL from PCPro For more information about its MGC commands refer to CHAPTER4 When confirming the Telephony Server settings refer to the Command Manual and the Data Programming Manual STEP 6 Check to see the messages output on the dis...

Page 1213: ...w and solve the prob lems LEDL POWER ON LINE LINE B LINE D LB CAUSE Pattern 1 ON BLINK ON OFF ON Initial settings related to IP has not been completed 2 ON OFF ON OFF ON Registration has not been completed 3 ON ON ON OFF ON Initial settings related to trunks have not been completed 4 ON ON OFF BLINK OFF Layer 2 in ISDN was not able to be com pleted 5 ON ON OFF OFF OFF D Channel has not been specif...

Page 1214: ...ight through cable and run terminal software e g HyperTerminal on the PC 2 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None 3 Enter usrConsole after the prompt Then the following prompt appears MG PRI _ Machine Name default An example of indication is shown below The user input command above consists of a severa...

Page 1215: ...set ipaddress 123 201 18 45 1 2 3 1 Command 2 Sub Command 3 Parameter 1 Note The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command MG PRI SET SIGQOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS TOS 5 Set Value or Default Value 5 ...

Page 1216: ... Blank P1 P2 P3 Parameters Parameter Option indicates Not essential MG PRI SET TCS_E1_1 Dch Control 0 1 1 1 Dch Mode 0 1 0 0 Dch Signal Logic 0 1 0 0 Dch 1 Drop Insert 0 1 1 1 Dch 2 Drop Insert 0 1 0 0 Drop Insert Mode 0 1 0 0 Data Transfer Speed 0 2 0 0 Drop Insert Time Slot 1 31 16 16 Dch Signaling Set 0 1 0 0 set value is 0x9080 setting complete In order to make a setup reflect re starting is r...

Page 1217: ...face page 972 13 IPADDRESS Assigns IP address and subnet mask page 973 14 MEDIAQOS Specifies QoS setting of RTP session page 974 15 PROMPT Specifies prompt page 975 16 SIGQOS Specifies QoS setting of signaling session page 976 17 SMOOTH_PAD Specifies smooth PAD mode of DSP page 977 18 STARTPORT Specifies RTP starting port page 977 19 TCP_TIMER Specifies the timer waiting for TCP link connection pa...

Page 1218: ..._E1_1 Displays function setting on Dch of E1 2M page 997 19 TCS_E1_2 Displays function setting on Dch of E1 2M page 997 20 TCS_LOOPBACK Displays MB of loopback and Dch page 998 21 TCS_PAD0 Displays PAD setting page 998 TCS_PAD1 Displays settings for flexible PAD 1 TCS_PAD2 Displays settings for flexible PAD 2 TCS_PAD3 Displays settings for flexible PAD 3 TCS_PAD4 Displays settings for flexible PAD...

Page 1219: ...regarding set and set address 13 4 3 SET Command 1 SETΔBCH_ATTRIBUTEΔP1 This command is used to set attributes for Bch To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command MG PRI set Address Setting IP address interface Setting Interface Information MG PRI set ipaddress XXX XXX XXX XXX IP Address MG PRI set ipaddress 10 ...

Page 1220: ...required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command P1 VLAN ID 1 4094 VLAN_ID P2 COS value 0 7 COS A command is executed and the re sult is displayed MG PRI SET COS 1 7 COS setup complete In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required after saving a configuration file by SAVE command P1 Specify Default Gateway ad dress A command is executed and the ...

Page 1221: ... P1 Enter the following after the com mand name ENABLE DHCP is valid default DISABLE DHCP is invalid A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET DHCP ENABLE DHCP setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required after saving a configuration file by SAVE command 1 Select the applying type for DRS 1 Primary 2 Secondary 2 Specify IP address Note 1 3 Specify p...

Page 1222: ... command is executed and the result is displayed COMMAND 2 1 Specify DIFFSERV for QOS 2 Specify Diffserv Codepoint DSCP 0 63 DSCP A command is executed and the result is displayed COMMAND 3 5 A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET DRSQOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS TOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 0 6 DELAY 0 1 0 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 COST 0 1 0 0 DRS QoS setting succeeded 0xC0...

Page 1223: ...t check the codec type Therefore make sure the codec type is G 711 when setting this value Prec PRECEDENCE 3 bits D Delay T Throughput R Reliability C Cost C R T D Prec When selecting TOS IP Precedence Type When selecting Diffserv 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DSCP Diffserv Codepoint 6 bits AF Assured Forwarding EF Expedited Forwarding 101110 BF Best Effort High Low 000010 000000 111110 BF AF EF...

Page 1224: ...m 500 to 1ms from occurring in the beginning of speech to PBX To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command P1 Specify a executing time before the training feature starts ms 0 32 Executing Time 1 counter indicates 10ms MG PRI SET E_T_TIME 1 EC Training Feature Time setting succeeded P1 Specify a waiting time befor...

Page 1225: ...t before exiting the maintenance command Note axDev0 is needed as P1 when the program version is SW 423 PRI MG PROGRAM A or earlier P1 Specify the following ON Training function is valid OFF Training function is invalid default MG PRI SET EC_TRAINING ON EC Training feature setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required after saving a configuration file by SAVE command P...

Page 1226: ...and Note The designated IP address cannot be applied when DHCP is set to Enabled Be sure to assign the DHCP setting to Disable before performing this IP address assignment P1 Specify the IP address P2 Specify the subnet mask A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET IPADDRESS 10 4 1 1 255 255 255 0 IP address set complete In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required ...

Page 1227: ...Enter the change effective timer 0 invalid to change to FAX mode 1 5 possible to change to FAX mode within 1 5 2 Specify Diffserv Codepoint 0 63 DSCP A command is executed and the result is displayed COMMAND 3 5 A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET MEDIAQOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS TOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 0 6 DELAY 0 1 0 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 COST 0 1 0 0 DRS QoS ...

Page 1228: ...s available for the prompt Prec PRECEDENCE 3 bits D Delay T Throughput R Reliability C Cost C R T D Prec When selecting TOS IP Precedence Type When selecting Diffserv 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DSCP Diffserv Codepoint 6 bits AF Assured Forwarding EF Expedited Forwarding 101110 BF Best Effort High Low 000010 000000 111110 BF AF EF 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 High Low Priority P1 A string t...

Page 1229: ... Enter the change effective timer 0 invalid to change to FAX mode 1 5 possible to change to FAX mode within 1 5 2 Specify Diffserv Codepoint DSCP 0 63 DSCP A command is executed and the result is displayed COMMAND 3 5 A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET SIGQOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS TOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 0 6 DELAY 0 1 0 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 COST 0 1 0 0 Sign...

Page 1230: ... Reliability C Cost C R T D Prec When selecting TOS IP Precedence Type When selecting Diffserv 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DSCP Diffserv Codepoint 6 bits AF Assured Forwarding EF Expedited Forwarding 101110 BF Best Effort High Low 000010 000000 111110 BF AF EF 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 High Low Priority P1 Specify a value of Smooth PAD mode 1 5 Mode Number of Smooth PAD Default 3 OFF Set...

Page 1231: ...P1 Specify the waiting time 30 seconds interval 60 80 effective waiting time Default 60 A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET TCP_TIMER P1 TCP Link Connect Timer Timeout setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect re starting is required after saving a configuration file by SAVE command ...

Page 1232: ...able default 8 Specify EC NLP Mode 0 Background Noise default 1 Fixed Level 9 Disable Enable EC 2100Hz Detect 0 1 Disable default Enable 10 Select Music Source 0 Internal default 1 External 11 Specify Music No 0 Fur Elise 1 Maiden s prayer 5 Minuet default 12 Specify clock mode 0 Secondary default 1 Primary 13 Disable Enable Layer 1 Alarm LED display 0 1 Enable Disable default A command is execute...

Page 1233: ...e 0 Fixed value default 1 Set value 7 Specify Data Transfer Speed 0 64K default 1 56K 2 48K 8 Specify the number of Time Slots 1 31 Number of Time Slots default value 16 9 Specify Dch Signaling Set 0 fixed A command is executed and the result is displayed COMMAND 2 A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET TCS_E1_1 Dch Control 0 1 1 1 Dch Mode 0 1 0 0 Dch Signal Logic 0 1 0 0 Dc...

Page 1234: ...default 1 Signaling 9 Specify Dch Mode 0 ITU T default 1 AT T 10 Specify Loop Back Pattern 0 fixed 11 Specify Alarm Detect Release Type 0 ETSI default 1 ITU T A command is executed and the result is displayed On screen the settings are set to in FCE0 setting value COMMAND 2 A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET TCS_E1_2 Multi frame Remote Alarm 0 1 0 0 Alarm Release Timing 0...

Page 1235: ...usy 0 1 Disable default Enable 5 Enable Disable Dch Loopback 0 fixed 6 Enable Disable Dch Self Test 0 fixed A command is executed and the result is displayed On screen the settings are set to in FCE0 setting value COMMAND 2 A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET TCS_LOOPBACK Local Loop Back 0 1 0 0 Line Loop Back 0 1 0 0 Payload Loop Back 0 1 0 0 Dch Make Busy 0 1 0 0 Dch Loo...

Page 1236: ...law 2 A law 3 Convert from A law to μ law 4 Convert from μ law to A law 2 Select a type of PAD selection 0 Standard default 1 Flexible 3 Select a type of PAD Control 0 Receiving Control MG PRI PRA ISDN Net work default 1 Sending Control ISDN Network MG PRI PRA 2 Fixed to ARTD 3 Sending Receiving Control 4 Select the number of PAD Pattern 0 4 Pattern Number default value 0 For more detailed informa...

Page 1237: ... 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 ARTD snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv 0 8 8 3 9 8 8 0 8 7 7 1 2 2 3 3 2 2 8 16 1 1 2 4 4 3 3 4 4 8 4 3 3 3 6 6 0 6 12 12 4 12 5 5 4 8 8 3 9 8 8 0 8 7 7 5 Data PAD Maintenance Console Settings 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAD Control Settings A Law μ Law PAD Data Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 ARTD snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv 0 8 8 0 8 8 8 8 8 8...

Page 1238: ...e PAD for receiving default value 0 Note send or receive might be 0 depending on the PAD control setting 2 Specify Flexible PAD for sending MG PRI PRA ISDN Network 0 36 Flexible PAD for sending default value 0 A command is executed and the result is displayed COMMAND 2 A command is executed and the result is displayed ARTD PAD AVAILABLE PAD No 0 4 TCS_PAD4 1 TCS_PAD1 2 TCS_PAD2 3 TCS_PAD3 5 6 7 No...

Page 1239: ...1 Flexible STEP2 TCS_PAD0 PAD Control 3 Send Receive Control STEP3 TCS_PAD4 Flexible PAD 4 Recv 0 Flexible PAD 4 Recv 24 Flexible PAD 1 4 values of ARTD PAD PAD Selection Specify PAD value for ARTD PAD Pattern 0 4 values of ARTD PAD PAD Control 0 3 Activate PAD value 1 2 3 4 1 Receive only Send PAD 0 dB 2 Send only Receive PAD 0 dB 3 ARTD only 4 Send and Receive Standard PAD Flexible PAD ...

Page 1240: ... 0 Fixed value default 1 Set value 7 Specify Data Transfer Speed 0 64K default 1 56K 2 48K 8 Specify the number of Time Slot 0 23 Time Slot Number default value 23 9 Specify Dch signaling set 0 fixed A command is executed and the result is displayed COMMAND 2 A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET TCS_T1_1 Dch Control 0 1 1 1 Dch Mode 0 1 0 0 Dch Signal Logic 0 1 0 0 Dch 1 Dr...

Page 1241: ...Suppression AMI ZCS 6 Specify Multi Frame 0 24 Multi Frame default 1 12 Multi Frame 7 Specify Signaling in Channels 0 fixed 8 Specify Dch Mode 0 ITU T default 1 AT T 9 Specify Equalizer 0 0 40m default 1 41 80m 2 81 121m 3 122 161m 4 162m or more COMMAND 2 A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET TCS_T1_2 Remote Alarm 0 1 0 0 Alarm Operation Mode AIS Remote Alarm Sending 0 1 0 ...

Page 1242: ...g FF 7E Receiving BOS Message 3 Sending FF FF Not Receiving BOS Message When 1 is specified for G 704 Mode 0 Sending 7E 7E Receiving BOS Message 1 Sending 00 00 Receiving BOS Message 2 Sending 00 00 Receiving BOS Message 3 Sending 00 00 Not Receiving BOS Message 4 Specify Signaling A Logic Recovery 1 fixed 5 Specify Signaling Pattern Recovery 2 fixed 6 Enable Disable Signaling A Logic Sending 1 fi...

Page 1243: ...P Address of LAN 4 Specify subnet mask of LAN A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SET VLAN Please enter a parameter VLAN_ID 1 4094 1 COS 0 7 0 IP Address 172 16 1 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 VLAN device setting complete 1 Specify P1 Default 3 0 No Warning Tone 1 Send Warning Tone to IPNW side 2 Send Warning Tone to ISDN side 3 Send Warning Tone to both IPNW and ISDN side MG PR...

Page 1244: ...Number ALL All the channels are displayed A command is executed and the result is displayed When specifying circuit card number COMMAND1 is displayed When specifying ALL COMMAND2 is displayed MG PRI SHOW BCH_ATTRIBUTE 00 FAX PROTOCOL ECM FAX RATE CH00 BYPASS OFF 14400 COMMAND 1 MG PRI SHOW BCH_ATTRIBUTE ALL FAX PROTOCOL ECM FAX RATE CH00 BYPASS OFF 14400 CH01 BYPASS OFF 4800 CH29 OFF ON 9600 COMMA...

Page 1245: ...d COMMAND1 is dis played When the DRS is not specified COMMAND2 is dis played MG PRI SHOW DRSADDRESS Primary DRS Address 10 41 1 100 Port 3456 Secondly DRS Address 10 41 1 101 Port 3457 COMMAND 1 MG PRI SHOW DRSADDRESS 1 Primary DRS Address 10 41 1 100 Port 3456 COMMAND 2 The current setting is displayed QOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 low high Delay 0 1 Normal Delay THROUGHPUT 0 1 Normal High Throughput RELIA...

Page 1246: ...s used to display an available time to be switched to FAX 10 SHOWΔINTERFACE This command is used to display the connection mode of LAN interface Note axDev0 is needed as P1 when the program version is SW 423 PRI MG PROGRAM A or earlier The current setting is displayed MG PRI SHOW E_T_TIME EC Training Feature time is 32 The current setting is displayed MG PRI SHOW E_T_WAITTIME Counter value of EC T...

Page 1247: ...in the case of DIFFSERV setting The current setting is displayed MG PRI SHOW IPADDRESS IP Address 222 1 2 3 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 222 1 12 254 Precedence 0 7 low high Delay 0 1 Normal Delay is ON Throughput 0 1 Normal High Throughput ON Reliability 0 1 Normal High Reliability ON Cost 0 1 Normal Cost Precedence ON Change effective timer 0 invalid to change to FAX mode 1 5 possible t...

Page 1248: ...TP 16 SHOWΔTCP_TIMER This command is used to display the setting of the timer for TCP Link Connection The current setting is displayed MG PRI SHOW SMOOTH_PAD Smooth PAD mode is 2 The current setting is displayed MG PRI SHOW STARTPORT Number of RTP start port is 1024 The current setting is displayed MG PRI SHOW TCP_TIMER TCP Link Connect Timer Timeout is 60 seconds ...

Page 1249: ...ol 0 1 Disable Enable Disable Enable EC NLP Mode 0 1 Background Noise Fixed Level Disable Enable EC 2100Hz Detect 0 1 Disable Enable Select Music Source 0 1 Internal External Music No 0 Fur Elise 1 Maiden s prayer 5 Minuet Clock mode 0 1 Secondary Primary Layer 1 Alarm LED display 0 1 Enable Disable MG PRI SHOW TCS_COMMON1 value is 0x0215 Remote Alarm Sending 0 Signal All 0 Idle Code Sending 0 Dch...

Page 1250: ...op Insert 1 Dch 2 Drop Insert 0 Drop Insert Mode 0 Data Transfer Speed 0 Drop Insert Time Slot 16 Dch Signaling Set 0 The current setting is displayed Multi frame Remote Alarm 0 1 Enable Disable Alarm Release Timing 0 1 Short Long Line Signal 0 1 HDB3 AMI CRC4 0 1 Disable Enable DTI Mode 0 Fixed CRC Multi frame Format 0 1 Disable Enable Ebit Automatic Sending 0 1 Disable Enable TS16 Control 0 1 Da...

Page 1251: ...op Back 0 Payload Loop Back 0 Dch Make Busy 0 Dch Loop Back 0 Dch Self test 0 P1 Specify the register number to be displayed 0 4 PAD Register Number The current setting is displayed CODEC 0 MGC Control PBX System Data 1 μ law 2 A law 3 Convert from A law to μ law 4 Convert from μ law to A law PAD selection 0 1 Standard Flexible PAD Control 0 Receiving Control MG PRI PRA ISDN Network 1 Sending Cont...

Page 1252: ...larm Operation Mode 0 1 Enable Disable Alarm Release Timing 0 1 Short Long Alarm Detect Release Type 0 1 Normal AT T Line Signal 0 1 B8ZS AMI ZCS Multi Frame 0 1 24 Multi Frame 12 Multi Frame Signaling in Channels 0 Fixed Dch Mode 0 1 ITU T AT T Equalizer 0 0 40m 1 41 80m 2 81 121m 3 122 161m 4 162m or more T1_3 4K Data Link 0 1 MOS BOS G 704 Mode 0 1 ITU T G 704 JG 704 BOS MOS Operation refer to ...

Page 1253: ...1 07 01 NC Version information Hardware PZ CC150 XXXX Boot program SP 3664 XXXX Firmware SP 3667 XXXX P1 Specify VLAN ID If omitted all the VLAN are displayed The current setting is displayed When specifying VLAN ID COMMAND1 is dis played When omitting VLAN ID COMMAND2 is dis played MG PRI SHOW VLAN DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 1 0 10 123 123 123 255 255 255 0 COMMAND 1 MG PRI SHOW VLA...

Page 1254: ...cted on a system Yes reflected immediately No reflected later A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI DELETE VLAN 1 VLAN deleting succeeded Is this setup made to reflect immediately Y N VLAN deleting succeeded In order to make a setup keep re starting is required after saving a configuration file by SAVE command When Y is selected In order to make a setup reflect and keep re start...

Page 1255: ...d and the result is displayed MG PRI SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y N Y Configuration data for NC has been saved Re starting is required for making a setup reflect 1 Determine that a change in trunk configuration data is reserved Y The data is saved N The data is not saved A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI SAVE TCS_CONFIGDATA Don t power in pr...

Page 1256: ...ame A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI GET CONFIGDATA 111 222 33 4 The download of configuration data for NC was successful P1 Specify the IP address of TFTP server after the command name A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI PUT TCS_CONFIGDATA 111 222 33 4 The upload of configuration data for TC was successful P1 Specify the IP address of TFTP server A com...

Page 1257: ...RI PRA 13 4 9 REBOOT Command 3 REBOOT This command is used to reboot the MG PRI PRA 1 Determine the reboot Y Reboot N Not reboot A command is executed and the result is displayed MG PRI REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y ...

Page 1258: ... PRI EXIT Configuration data for NC was changed Don t power off in progress y Save and Exit n Exit without saving c Cancel y n c y Configuration data for NC has been saved Configuration data for TC was changed Don t power in progress y Save and Exit n Exit without saving c Cancel y n c y Configuration data for TC has been saved COMMAND 2 When both configuration data for NC and TC are modified but ...

Page 1259: ...orm is incorrect An entered IP address is incorrect in the input format VLAN ID is no more registered Registered VLAN IDs exceeded a maximum Sub command is missing Sub command is necessary when the command is entered Invalid parameter value The parameter is out of range Invalid sub command The sub command is incorrect No response from CPU TC There is no response from other CPUs Command is abnormal...

Page 1260: ...g The general structure of this equipment is shown in the diagram below MG PRI can operate in either of two modes SIP mode or Proprietary Protocol mode When MG PRI works in SIP mode the controlling signal between the Telephony Server and MG PRI adopts Session Initiation Pro tocol SIP Controlling signal and voice packets are encrypted to ensure security feature MG PRI 1 5M Card SCA 24PRIA B D ALM P...

Page 1261: ...nternal PHI PRI and MG PRI is executed via TCP IP port of the system Note 2 For SIP mode the Telephony Server acts as SIP server In this operation SP PHI which is accommodated in MPH Multi Protocol Handler of the Telephony Server handles the control signal from to MG PRI MPH is the interface for the control signal Call control between SP PHI and MG PRI is executed via TCP IP port of the system ...

Page 1262: ...IA MG PRI is mounted on 1U MPC 19 inch rack mount 1U box MG PRI Box MG 24PRIA Unit mm inch 400 0 1 3 75 43 8 1 72 430 0 1 4 93 B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC 297 0 11 6 43 0 1 72 210 0 8 26 Unit mm inch B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC ...

Page 1263: ...In the case of tandem connection the data is speci fied by APDIL Smooth PAD Selectable OFF Mode1 Mode5 RTP Jitter and Buffer Static 10 300 msec in 10 msec steps Dynamic 10 300 msec Quality of Service QoS ToS IP Precedence Supported DiffServ Supported VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagging VLAN VLAN bit Priority bit Echo Canceller G 168 Tail Length is 64 msec PRI Interface 1 5M 1 544 Mbps B8ZS 23B D Specificatio...

Page 1264: ...sole RJ 45 serial connection CONSOLE cable RJ 45 RS 232C is used MUSIC External hold tone con nection 3 5 φ mini jack monaural type MG PRI B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC PWR lamp ALM lamp ON LINE lamp LB lamp MUSIC connector RESET switch CONSOLE connector LINE connector for ISDN line RJ 45 Ether connector RJ 45 B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RE...

Page 1265: ...n using two channels or more Temporary lights in initial setting Flash 120INT Flashes when using only one channel OFF Remains OFF when all the channels are idle D Green Layer 2 link is established in ISDN line Temporary lights in initial setting Flash 60INT Flashes slow when Dch is in make busy state Flash 120INT Flashes fast when Layer 2 link is not established OFF Dch is not assigned Ether LINK ...

Page 1266: ... Note 1 PACT lamp is only for SCA 24PRIA MG 24PRIA does not have PACT lamp NAME FUNCTION AC power inlet Connected to AC DC adapter with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft AC 100V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 230V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 240V 50 60 Hz 10 Power switch Power ON OFF switching PACT lamp Note 1 Indicates the state in power unit Lights green Normal opera...

Page 1267: ...c electricity lightning strike and other electrical surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG PRI has ISDN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG PRI and AC power cable without Ground connection ...

Page 1268: ...us See VoIP Encryption V 27 in Data Programming Manual Business for the number of available channels on the encryption status of this component PORT NO PATH FUNCTION NOTE 5060 SP PHI MG SIP Local console can modify the port number 1024 64510 Peer to Peer RTP Local console can modify the port number PORT NO PATH FUNCTION NOTE 7500 Internal PHI PRI MG PRI iLP PM 1024 Peer to Peer H 245 1024 64510 Pe...

Page 1269: ...ir UTP Straight through Cable Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100 m Line Cable For the connection to ISDN network T point use a 0 5φ Twisted pair Cable for DSU with an RJ 45 Modular Jack CONSOLE Cable RJ 45 RS 232C serial cable for maintenance console Audio Cable Microphone output for external hold tone source 3 5 φ mini jack monaural type 2 Firmware Program Installed Firmware SP 3884 MG PRI PRO...

Page 1270: ...d CDN71 FXD IP FAX data CDN72 FXJS Jitter Buffer size of IP FAX CDN73 FXPT Payload type for IP FAX CDN74 FXPS Payload size for IP FAX 6 The connection via NAT Network Address Translation IP masquerade internet connection and dial up access are not supported 7 Available interface is limited to Q 931 and only the public ISDN network can be used The connection to private ISDN line and PRI terminal is...

Page 1271: ...ration LAN1 must be used as the interface of the Telepho ny Server side This setting can be assigned by ADTM command QoS setting to Internal PHI PRI is assigned by AMGIL command on MG PRI basis Alternate routing is proceeded according to the LCR programming in case of TCP IP failure Echo Canceller setting on ARTD APDIL command is applied PAD setting on ARTD APDIL command is applied System Message ...

Page 1272: ...e are following restrictions when using Incoming Call with REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM R 2 or AUTOMATED ATTENDANT A 82 Virtual Register in the LMG to which Virtual Speech Channel is registered is seized Register in the other LMG cannot be seized If Virtual Register cannot be seized Physical Register in the LMG to which Virtual Speech Channel is registered is seized i e ORT IRT PBR for Automated Attend...

Page 1273: ...on 1U MPC STEP 1 Insert MG PRI to 1U MPC STEP 2 Secure the MG PRI to 1U MPC fixing two screws on right and left sides ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required MG PRI 1 5M Card SCA 24PRIA bracket to mount on 19 inch rack 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUS...

Page 1274: ...ce 14 2 2 Cable Connection This section shows the cable connection to the MG PRI MG PRI provides the following interfaces Connection to LAN Connection to ISDN Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console Connection to Audio Equipment for external music on hold Power Supply B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC ...

Page 1275: ... the output level of external hold tone source Input impedance from the external hold tone source needs to be within the ranges of 8Ω 50kΩ Make sure not to exceed this range Note 2 If audio equipment has a ground terminal be sure to make proper connection to grounding of audio equip ment Note 3 Do not connect LAN and ISDN line here These cables are connected in Section 14 3 Startup MG PRI and Basi...

Page 1276: ...e to appropriate AC supply Note For the safety measures against static electricity lightning strike and other electrical surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG PRI has ISDN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG PRI and AC power cable without Ground connection REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected ...

Page 1277: ...ase of connection to CONSOLE connector of SCA 24PRIA Note ISDN Lines and LAN cables are connected in Section 14 3 Startup MG PRI and Basic Tests Do not con nect these cables here FRONT B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC Maintenance Console PC CONSOLE connector RJ 45 serial RS 232C D sub 9 pin CONSOLE cable MG PRI Card Box ...

Page 1278: ...o 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console When Proprietary Protocol mode 1 Selection whether to use DHCP server 2 Network Data Assignment When SIP mode 1 One Time Password Assignment 2 Selection whether to use DHCP DNS server 3 Network Data Assignment STEP...

Page 1279: ...ment such as using NAT and dial up connection is not preferred Connecting ISDN is applied for not tie line but PSTN using the following protocol North America Bellcore NI 2 AT T NO5ESS DMS 100 If an access list is applied to the network looking into all the communication flows classify the priorities to make the network effective The throughput will become low if the settings are inappropriate The...

Page 1280: ...y may be increased due to excessive jitter buffer insertion COT Note 2 Voice speech and FAX relay are available However DTMF relay is not guaranteed Input level can be lower than minimum DTMF detection level 27 0 dBm because of line loss at public network side LDT Note 2 Design your private network so that DTMF input level at MG PRI may be larger than 27 0 dBm If not DTMF relay is not guaranteed 4...

Page 1281: ...n minimum DTMF detection level 27 0 dBm at MG PRI because of Line Loss between two switches Line Loss The signal can be attenuated here 2 wire If input level at MG PRI is lower than minimum DTMF detection level DTMF relay cannot be guaranteed ISDN STN B COT LDT LC LDT LC STN A MG If input level is smaller than 27 dBm DTMF relay cannot be guaranteed DTMF relay Input ...

Page 1282: ...I assigned by ADTM is independent Note 1 If the Telephony Server connected to MG PRI is in Dual Configuration this LAN Interface must be LAN1 See the following for the procedure Note 1 The Port Number is shared ADTM Assignment of Data for TCP IP Module Assign LAN Interface to be used Internal PHI PRI LAN1 fixed when Dual Configuration Note When the LAN Interface to be used is switched in this comm...

Page 1283: ...SS 6 ETSI BRI 7 NT DMS 100 DMS 250 Note 2 In the case of SUB ADDRESS ADDRESSING assign 0 Refer to SUB ADDRESS ADDRESSING S 95 in Data Programming Manual ISDN In the case of DID ADDRESSING refer to DIRECT INWARD DIALING DID ADDRESSING D 123 in Data Programming Manual ISDN RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN 2 ONSG 2 4 INSG 2 5 TF 3 6 TCL 1 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 10 SMDR 1 15 LSG 12 28 ANS 1 30 PAD 4 31 OGRL ...

Page 1284: ...notification is required Note 8 Assign 1 when the multi rate bearer service is used Note To provide the system with channel negotiation see 7 Q SIG CHANNEL NEGOTIATION in Chapter 3 of Data Programming Manual ISDN RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN 2 ONSG 2 4 INSG 2 5 TF 3 6 TCL 4 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 15 LSG 12 28 ANS 1 30 PAD 4 Note 3 31 OGRL 1 32 ICRL 1 34 GUARD 1 45 A D 1 49 TRKS 0 1 Note 4 50 DPLY 1 N...

Page 1285: ...irtual Signaling Channel RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN68 VIR 2 MG connection Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 To use FAX specify the FAX relay settings in the following CDN71 FXD CDN72 FXJS CDN73 FXPT CDN74 FXPS This parameter appears when 1 G 711 or 2 G 726 is selected in FXPT ...

Page 1286: ... before assigning trunk data by ATRK Note The total number of B channels must not exceed 460 per two Module Group MG pair i e MG2 3 MG4 5 and MG6 7 PIR HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1...

Page 1287: ...command ACSCN cannot be used here PRI 1 5M 23B D setting STEP 7 ACIC1 Assignment of CIC Code Data 1 Assign the accommodated location of Virtual Signaling Channel to the Point Code Note NDM command ACIC1N cannot be used here PC Point Code specified by ADPC CSCG CSC group of Virtual Signaling Channel specified by ACSC STEP 8 ACIC2 Assignment of CIC Code Data 2 Required only for Q SIG trunk Assign th...

Page 1288: ...onnection to MG PRI SERVICE TYPE QoS settings of signal path ToS value applied when Internal PHI PRI connects to MG PRI STEP 12 AMGVL Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control Data for LDM Assign the Voice control data to connect to MG PRI A RT Storing MG Route number of virtual speech channel used for MG PRI TYPE Select Route Specified or Location ID Specified B RT MG Storing Displayed when TYPE ...

Page 1289: ...G PRI 1 5M SCA 24PRIA MG 24PRIA Data Deletion Deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment Make sure to delete in the order of AMGIL ATRK Confirm there is no data left in AMGIL before deleting ATRK ...

Page 1290: ...y Server So SP PHI data assignment is necessary About the procedure for the SP PHI data assignment refer to Vol 1 Chap ter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs including SP PHI is also there 3 MG PRI Data Assignment Assign the necessary System Data for using the MG STEP 1 ASYD Assignment of System Data SYS1 INDEX 64 b0 0 1 μ law A law of CODEC depends on the count...

Page 1291: ...B ADDRESS ADDRESSING assign 0 Refer to SUB ADDRESS ADDRESSING S 95 in Data Programming Manual ISDN In the case of DID ADDRESSING refer to DIRECT INWARD DIALING DID ADDRESSING D 123 in Data Programming Manual ISDN RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN 2 ONSG 2 4 INSG 2 5 TF 3 6 TCL 1 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 10 SMDR 1 15 LSG 12 28 ANS 1 30 PAD 4 31 OGRL 1 32 ICRL 1 34 GUARD 1 45 A D 1 50 DPLY 1 60 TC EC 1 65 INT...

Page 1292: ...notification is required Note 8 Assign 1 when the multi rate bearer service is used Note To provide the system with channel negotiation see 7 Q SIG CHANNEL NEGOTIATION in Chapter 3 of Data Programming Manual ISDN RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN 2 ONSG 2 4 INSG 2 5 TF 3 6 TCL 4 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 15 LSG 12 28 ANS 1 30 PAD 4 Note 3 31 OGRL 1 32 ICRL 1 34 GUARD 1 45 A D 1 49 TRKS 0 1 Note 4 50 DPLY 1 N...

Page 1293: ...irtual Signaling Channel RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN68 VIR 2 MG connection Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 To use FAX specify the FAX relay settings in the following CDN71 FXD CDN72 FXJS CDN73 FXPT CDN74 FXPS This parameter appears when 1 G 711 or 2 G 726 is selected in FXPT ...

Page 1294: ... before assigning trunk data by ATRK Note The total number of B channels must not exceed 460 per two Module Group MG pair i e MG2 3 MG4 5 and MG6 7 PIR HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 1...

Page 1295: ...t be used here PRI 1 5M 23B D setting STEP 8 ACIC1 Assignment of CIC Code Data 1 Assign the accommodated location of Virtual Signaling Channel to the Point Code Note NDM command ACIC1N cannot be used here PC Point Code specified by ADPC CSCG CSC group of Virtual Signaling Channel specified by ACSC STEP 9 ACIC2 Assignment of CIC Code Data 2 Required only for Q SIG trunk Assign the CIC Number and ac...

Page 1296: ... SERVICE TYPE QoS settings of signal path ToS value applied when MG PRI connects to Internal PHI PRI STEP 13 AMGVL Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control Data for LDM Assign the Voice control data to connect to MG PRI A RT Storing MG Route number of virtual speech channel used for MG PRI TYPE Select Route Specified or Location ID Specified B RT MG Storing Displayed when TYPE Route Specified is ...

Page 1297: ...one time password and its available period Note To perform Authentication feature assign the same one time password in MG PRI At initial startup of registration mode MG PRI will ask you to input the one time password for authentication For more in formation refer to page 1053 Data Deletion Deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment Make sure to delete in the order of AMGIL ATRK C...

Page 1298: ...l on the Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions R...

Page 1299: ...I Card to restart the card and start its boot program STEP 2 Make sure the LED indicates normal status PWR LED lights green Boot program automatically starts ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT MG PRI Card REAR Turn ON the power switch UP Turn ON the power switch UP MG PRI Box REAR MG PRI Card Box FRONT B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MU...

Page 1300: ...xplains the procedure by each mode Note DRS Device Registration Server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When MG PRI works in Proprietary Protocol mode the Telephony Server acts as DRS which is controlling function of the Telephony Server Note SIP server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When MG PRI works in SIP mode the Telephony Server acts as SIP server Note ...

Page 1301: ...e MG PRI automatical ly resets its mode in 20 seconds STEP 2 Type usrConsole at the indicated OS prompt and press the ENTER key If a prompt displays on the screen press the Enter key STEP 3 MG PRI s command prompt appears as follows DP OK MG ID xxxxxx Boot program version SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A xx xx xx xx Main program version SP3884 MG PRI PROG A xx xx xx xx H W PKG information CA CC00 001...

Page 1302: ...e screen press the Enter key to display a prompt STEP 4 Type SETUP TP to set the network data referring to page 1089 also set the following network data depending on your LAN environment There are two ways to set the network data When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used ...

Page 1303: ...ddress and port number of DRS Note 2 Check the number of IP addresses saved in DHCP server is sufficient to provide IP addresses for MG PRI s anytime Note 1 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate Data IP address Array Checked Code 161 Refer to DHCP Server in Volume 1 of this manual for more information on DHCP option set...

Page 1304: ...before starting the IP address setting Note 2 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual MG PRI SET DHCP DISABLE DHCP setting succeeded MG PRI SET IPADDRESS 10 10 10 170 255 255 255 0 IP Address setting succeeded MG PRI SET DEFAULTROUTE 10 10 10 255 Default Gateway setting succeeded MG PRI SET DRSADDRESS ...

Page 1305: ... button also reset the MG PRI Note MG ID MAC Address of MG PRI is displayed after rebooting The MG ID needs to be assigned in AMGIL command MG PRI SAVE CONFIG Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y N Y Erase start Erase OK Write start Write OK Configuration data has been saved Re starting is required for making a setup reflect MG PRI REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y ...

Page 1306: ... Enter the same password with one entered in SIP server As long as you don t enter a one time password you cannot go to the next step DP OK MG ID xxxxxx Boot program version SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A xx xx xx xx Main program version SP3884 MG PRI PROG A xx xx xx xx H W PKG information CA CC00 001 DSP information DSP K AC49kernel xx xx xx xx DSP information DSP P AC490012ae3 S xx xx xx xx Start...

Page 1307: ...nd prompt appears as follows Note If a prompt does not appear on the screen press the Enter key to display a prompt STEP 4 Type SETUP SP to set the network data referring to page 1085 also set the following network data depending on your LAN environment There are two ways to set the network data When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used usrConsole MG Maintenance command MG PRI SIP ...

Page 1308: ...and port number of SIP Server Note Check the number of IP addresses saved in DHCP server is sufficient to provide IP addresses for MG PRI s anytime Note 1 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate Data IP address Array Checked Code 162 Refer to DHCP Server in Volume 1 of this manual for more information on DHCP option setti...

Page 1309: ...DNS MG PRI SIP SET DHCP DISABLE DHCP setting succeeded MG PRI SIP SET IPADDRESS 10 10 10 170 255 255 255 0 IP Address setting succeeded MG PRI SIP SET DEFAULTROUTE 10 10 10 255 Default Gateway setting succeeded MG PRI SIP SET SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server 1 20 1 IP Address 10 41 1 150 Port Number 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Host Name SRV1 nec com SIP server setting succeeded MG PRI SIP SET INTE...

Page 1310: ...ODUCTION of Installation Manual STEP 5 Save the configuration data assigned STEP 6 Reboot the MG PRI by entering reboot command Turning OFF and ON Pressing RESET button also reset the MG PRI Note MG ID MAC Address of MG PRI is displayed after rebooting The MG ID needs to be assigned in AMGIL command MG PRI SIP SET OWN_NAME mgpri nec com Own name setting succeeded MG PRI SIP SAVE CONFIG Don t power...

Page 1311: ...A FRONT B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC Maintenance Console PC ON LINE lamp Ether connector Ether RJ45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Send 2 Send 3 Receive 6 Receive 4 5 7 8 are not used Ether RJ45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Send 2 Send 3 Receive 6 Receive 4 5 7 8 are not used Maintenance Console PC B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether...

Page 1312: ...24PRIA MG 24PRIA LINE RJ 45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 RB 4 TA 1 RA 5 TB 3 6 7 8 are not used B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC D ch lamp LINE connector Maintenance Console PC FRONT LINE RJ 45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 RB 4 TA 1 RA 5 TB 3 6 7 8 are not used FRONT LINE connector Maintenance Console PC B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE E...

Page 1313: ...lash 60INT Flashes in loop back mode OFF Normal operation LINE B Green Lights when using two channels or more Temporary lights in initial setting Flash 120INT Flashes when using only one channel OFF Remains OFF when all the channels are idle D Green Layer 2 link is established in ISDN line Temporary lights in initial setting Flash 60INT Flashes slow when Dch is in make busy state Flash 120INT Flas...

Page 1314: ... not be physically connected to the LAN Check the LAN cable between MG PRI and networking device Also check the power of Switching HUB and Routers are turned ON Check that correct cable is used Use the Straight through Cable Check that the cable is not damaged Test the continuity in the LAN cable Replace the LAN cable or the network device if the problem is still not cleared Lights green This lamp...

Page 1315: ...le between MDF and MG PRI MDF and DSU Check whether the line cable is not damaged Test the continuity of the line cable Check the data assignment of Telephony Server side and MG PRI side Telephony server Is the data assignment on each PCPro command correct MG PRI Check the configuration data assigned from the maintenance console Lights green Go on to STEP 5 STEP 5 Speech test through MG PRI Call o...

Page 1316: ...nated normally Call quality is adequate Connection test is completed 2 Alarm Information Check Check the Alarm Lamps If the red lamp lights search the cause of fault and perform the appropriate operations Note ALM Lamp Check is available for SCA 24PRIA only Check the system message 1 Display the system message using DFTD command 2 See the system message and confirm whether any failure occurs on MG...

Page 1317: ...t of MG PRI Note The difference between Line Loop Back and Payload Loop Back is All the processes in Line Loop Back follow the timing of ISDN side There are some processes following the timing of system side in Payload Loop Back In other words bit error may occur when the system does not synchronize with ISDN in Payload Loop Back Bit error is not considered in Line Loop Back LAN interface speech p...

Page 1318: ...led in advance Backing Up Config Data By Serial Connection STEP 1 Power off MG PRI and disconnect it from the network STEP 2 Connect PC to MG PRI by using Console Cable RS232C RJ 45 cable STEP 3 Power on MG PRI STEP 4 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 5 Select Transfer Capture File STEP 6 Send File sc...

Page 1319: ...d to the TFTP server program Data Assignment on Serial Console STEP 7 Power on MG PRI STEP 8 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 9 After a prompt is displayed enter usrConsole STEP 10 After a prompt MG PRI or MG PRI SIP is displayed enter get configdata TFTP s IP Address to download configuration data i...

Page 1320: ... reboot MG PRI by entering reboot STEP 13 Exit the HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit Confirmation of MG PRI STEP 14 Connect the MG PRI to the network STEP 15 Confirm that MG PRI is normally registered in system after reboot Use the DISD FPTS commands in PCPro For more information refer to the Command Manual STEP 16 Check that calls via MG PRI can be made ...

Page 1321: ...Make sure that TFTP client is able to connect to FTP server Data Assignment on TFTP Server STEP 1 Create a folder to back up configuration data STEP 2 Start the TFTP server program STEP 3 Assign the folder as root folder and then permit write and read behavior for this directory For more information refer to the appropriate manual attached to the TFTP server program Data Assignment on PCPro STEP 4...

Page 1322: ...m as you like STEP 6 After completing the above click the Set button Data Assignment on Telnet PC STEP 7 Start a command prompt and enter telnet MG PRI s IP Address to connect MG PRI via Telnet STEP 8 Log in to the target MG PRI by entering the userID and the password which are set in the AUTD command STEP 9 After a prompt is displayed enter usrConsole STEP 10 After a prompt MG PRI or MG PRI SIP i...

Page 1323: ...via Telnet Input any letter for USER LEVEL because MG PRI does not use USERLEVEL For VALID TIME input a total of time required for completing this procedures Note A user ID and a password are temporary ones for download you can specify them as you like STEP 6 After completing the above click the Set button Data Assignment on Telnet PC STEP 7 Start a command prompt and enter telnet MG PRI s IP Addr...

Page 1324: ...he command prompt indicating the upload to TFTP server is completed normally STEP 12 To reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from TFTP server save it by entering save config and reboot MG PRI by entering reboot STEP 13 Exit the HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit Confirmation of MG PRI STEP 14 Confirm that MG PRI is normally registered in system after reboot Use the DISD FPTS command...

Page 1325: ...J 45 both STEP 3 Put the firmware files For example SP3884 and mpgrimwlist txt for upgrade in the root fold er of TFTP server STEP 4 Permit read behavior of this directory For more information refer to the appropriate manual attached to the TFTP server program B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC Serial Console TFTP Server IP Address 10 41 1 250 MG PRI Note Note Note TFT...

Page 1326: ...Server IP Address Enter a TFTP server IP address STEP 12 The current settings of MG PRI and TFTP server are displayed Make sure of the settings If you need to modify the settings select a number 1 4 to modify the item If all the settings are correct enter y STEP 13 Download menu is displayed and then select 1 Download of all programs STEP 14 IP address information setting is displayed and then sel...

Page 1327: ...ve a call via the MG PRI and confirm that you can talk to each other STEP 24 After all the tasks are completed write down label the firmware version in the back of the MG PRI For example 2A is indicated for Version 2 3A is indicated for Version 3 dispver Boot program version Main program version TC version DSP kernel version DSP program version Tone version Boot Number Boot Issue SP3839 SH7751R CB...

Page 1328: ...RI is already registered to system and it is operating normally Make sure of the connectivity in the following Make sure that PCPro is able to log on to the Telephony Server Check the connectivity from FTP server to the Telephony Server by using Ping command Make sure that FTP client is able to connect to FTP server IP Network TFTP Server PCPro SYSTEM MG PRI 3 Download firmware via TFTP Firmware 2...

Page 1329: ... Name and Password for logging in to FTP server if required Select an item of Parallel in Download Method Confirm PRI2 0 MG is displayed in Firmware File Name If it is not in the list create an item by clicking the Insert button Set the following attributes and then click the OK button After completing the above click the Insert button located in Terminal Information STEP 4 Select Specify Terminal...

Page 1330: ...een click the Exit button to close the ATDL command STEP 10 To confirm the firmware activate the DIPI command The file name is indicated in the following STEP 11 Select Media Converter in Functionality Type and then click the Execute button STEP 12 Confirm that the firmwares in the appropriate ones are upgraded Confirmation of MG PRI STEP 13 To confirm MG PRI is properly operating with the upgrade...

Page 1331: ...ch is controlling function of the Telephony Server Note When an event causing a restart of the device such as health check timeout occurs during startup of the configuration command it takes about five minutes to start the rebooting after you exit from the configu ration command or enter the last command Starting Configuration Command 1 Connect a PC to MG PRI using CONSOLE cable and run terminal s...

Page 1332: ...00M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC Terminal Software MG PRI MG PRI set ipaddress 123 50 18 45 255 255 255 0 IP Address setting succeeded MG PRI _ Prompt User Input Command Reply Message MG PRI B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC to CONSOLE connector Maintenance Console PC Terminal Software MG PRI set ipaddress 123 50 18 45 IP Address has set MG PRI _ MG PRI set ipaddress 123 ...

Page 1333: ...MG PRI SET DRSQOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS TOS 5 Set Value or Default Value 5 MG PRI SET PRI_T1_1 Dch Control 0 1 1 1 Dch Mode 0 1 0 0 Dch Signal Logic 0 1 0 0 Dch 1 Drop Insert 0 1 1 1 Dch 2 Drop Insert 0 1 0 0 Drop Insert Mode 0 1 0 0 Data Transfer Speed 0 2 0 0 Drop Insert Time Slot 0 23 23 23 Dch Signaling Set 0 1 0 0 set value is 0x90B8 setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect and keep ...

Page 1334: ...4PRIA How to Read Maintenance Command The commands in this section are explained with defined characters These characters meanings are in the fol lowing CHARACTERS MEANING Δ Blank P1 P2 P3 Parameters Parameter Option indicates Not essential ...

Page 1335: ..._RCV_TIMER Specifies the time recognized as timeout in receiving health check page 1097 15 INTERFACE Assigns the connection mode for LAN interface page 1097 16 IPADDRESS Assigns IP address and subnet mask page 1098 17 ONE_TIME_PASS Specifies one time password page 1098 18 OWN_NAME Assigns own host name page 1098 PAD0 Specifies PAD setting page 1099 PAD1 Specifies setting for flexible PAD 1 page 11...

Page 1336: ...le PAD 3 22 PAD4 Displays settings for flexible PAD 4 23 PRI_COMMON1 Displays common setting 1 of PRI 1 5M page 1119 24 PRI_LOOPBACK Displays MB of loopback and Dch page 1119 25 PRI_T1_1 Displays function settings on Dch of PRI 1 5M page 1120 26 PRI_T1_2 Displays function settings 1 Alarm Signaling on Dch of PRI 1 5M 27 PRI_T1_3 Displays function settings 2 Signaling on Dch of PRI 1 5M 28 RTP_STOP...

Page 1337: ... EXIT or exit after a prompt Note While the maintenance command program is activated it also provides help function for referring to avail able command and sub command After a prompt is indicated request to list up the target help by inputting command name or command name sub command name after the prompt and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when executing help function regar...

Page 1338: ...t Y 3 Select the DNS setting Y Change the setting N Remain the current setting Q Exit the command DNS IP Address set Current DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 The current setting is displayed Change DNS IP Address Y change N current Q quit y Input new DNS IP Address 10 40 1 150 3 Select the DNS setting Y Change the DNS IP Address N Remain the DNS IP Address Q Exit the command IP Address Subnetmask set Curren...

Page 1339: ...e located in the same segment with MG PRI SIP Server IP Address Host Name set Current SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name 1 0 0 0 0 5060 2 0 0 0 0 5060 3 0 0 0 0 5060 4 0 0 0 0 5060 5 0 0 0 0 5060 6 0 0 0 0 5060 7 0 0 0 0 5060 8 0 0 0 0 5060 9 0 0 0 0 5060 10 0 0 0 0 5060 11 0 0 0 0 5060 12 0 0 0 0 5060 13 0 0 0 0 5060 14 0 0 0 0 5060 15 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 1340: ...tinue Y continue N exit N 19 Select whether you continue to set up the host name or not Y Continue the SIP Server set ting N Exit the SIP Server setting Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed auto The current setting is displayed Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y 20 Select the LAN setting Y Change the setting N Remain the current setting Q Exit the command Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 ...

Page 1341: ...lue the system continues to respond to it until three times If the invalid value is entered in four times the system forcibly discards the configuration data and exits the SP Setup Note If the setup is finished by quit q command data assigned until that time will be discarded ...

Page 1342: ... Select the network setting of MG PRI Y Change the setting N Remain the current setting Q Exit the command Input new IP Address 10 41 1 100 4 Specify the IP address of MG PRI Input new Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 5 Specify the subnet mask of MG PRI Default Gateway IP Address set Current Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 The current setting is displayed Change Default Gateway Y change N current Q quit Y 6 Sele...

Page 1343: ...t 3456 Continue Y continue N exit N 12 Select whether you continue to set up the SIP Server or not Y Continue the SIP Server setting N Exit the SIP Server setting Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed auto The current setting is displayed Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y 13 Select the LAN setting Y Change the setting N Remain the current setting Q Exit the command Input new Speed 1 AUTO...

Page 1344: ...RI IP address 192 168 1 255 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Note If you enter an invalid value the system continues to respond to it until three times If the invalid value is entered in four times the system forcibly discards the configuration data and exits the SP Setup Note If the setup is finished by quit q command data assigned until that time will be discarded ...

Page 1345: ...y IP address for Default Gateway Note that default route be located at the same segment with MG PRI To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE com mand and to restart before exiting the maintenance command 4 SETΔDHCPΔP1 This command is used to enable disable DHCP server To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exit...

Page 1346: ...s assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE com mand and to restart before exiting the maintenance command When P1 is not entered MG PRI SIP SET DNS_SW DNS interface Enable Disable DISABLE ENABLE DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 10 41 1 150 P1 Enter the following after the command name ENABLE DNS is valid default DISABLE DNS is invalid DNS setting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET D...

Page 1347: ...of throughput Default 1 0 1 Normal High Throughput RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 5 Select a type of reliability Default 0 0 1 Normal High Reliability COST 0 1 0 0 6 Select a type of cost Default 0 0 1 Normal Cost Precedence DRS QoS setting succeeded 0xC0 Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET DRSQOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS DIFFSERV 1 Specify DIFFSERV for QOS DSCP 0 63 0 48 2 Specify Diffserv Codepoint DSCP 0 63 DS...

Page 1348: ...VOL 2 1095 MG PRI 1 5M SCA 24PRIA MG 24PRIA When P1 CLEAR MG PRI SIP SET DRSQOS CLEAR DRS QoS setting succeeded 0x00 Result is displayed ...

Page 1349: ...ININGΔP1 This command is used to enable disable the Training Feature mode of Echo Canceller Echo Canceller Fea ture is used to prevent initial Echo ranging from 500 to 1ms from occurring in the beginning of speech to PBX To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart be fore exiting the maintenance command MG PRI SIP SET DTMF_IN ON P1 Select either OFF ...

Page 1350: ... corre sponding to connecting network equipment To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command MG PRI SIP SET FAX_ECM ECM ON OFF OFF OFF ON FAX ECM is valid OFF FAX ECM is invalid default Fax ecm setting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET FAXERRORDETECT 1 P1 Specify the available time to switch to FAX 0 F...

Page 1351: ...RI IP address 192 168 1 255 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 17 SETΔONE_TIME_PASS This command is used to specify one time password for SIP Mode To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command 18 SETΔOWN_NAME This command is used to specify a host name for MG PRI To make this assignment effective it is required to execute ...

Page 1352: ...ta default 1 μ law 2 A law 3 Convert from A law to μ law 4 Convert from μ law to A law PAD Selection 0 1 0 0 2 Select a type of PAD selection 0 Standard default 1 Flexible PAD Control 0 3 0 0 3 Select a type of PAD Control 0 Receiving Control MG ISDN Network de fault 1 Sending Control ISDN Network MG 2 Fixed to ARTD 3 Sending Receiving Control PAD Pattern No 0 4 0 0 4 Select the number of PAD Patt...

Page 1353: ... 1 2 4 4 3 3 4 4 8 4 3 3 3 6 6 0 6 12 12 4 12 5 5 4 8 8 3 9 8 8 0 8 7 7 5 Data PAD Maintenance Console Settings 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAD Control Settings A Law μ Law PAD Data Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 ARTD snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv 0 8 8 0 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 4 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 6 6 0 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 8 8 0 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 5 Data PAD Mainten...

Page 1354: ...he available PAD number varies depending on the ARTD settings Telephony Server side Flexible PAD 1 Recv 16db 20dB 0 0 1 Specify Flexible PAD for receiving ISDN Network MG 16db 20db Flexible PAD for receiving default value 0 Note Send or receive might be 0 depending on the PAD control setting 2 Specify Flexible PAD for sending MG ISDN Network 16db 20db Flexible PAD for sending default value 0 Flexi...

Page 1355: ... SCA 24PRIA MG 24PRIA When P2 0000 MG PRI SIP SET PAD1 0000 P1 Specifying a PAD number 1 4 PAD Number P2 Specifying a set value 0000 FFFF Set value default value 0000 set value is 0x0000 setting succeeded Result is displayed ...

Page 1356: ...AD Selection 1 Flexible STEP2 PAD0 PAD Control 3 Send Receive Control STEP3 PAD4 Flexible PAD 4 Recv 0 Flexible PAD 4 Recv 24 Flexible PAD 1 4 values of ARTD PAD PAD Selection Specify PAD value for ARTD PAD Pattern 0 4 values of ARTD PAD PAD Control 0 3 Activate PAD value 1 2 3 4 1 Receive only Send PAD 0 dB 2 Send only Receive PAD 0 dB 3 ARTD only 4 Send and Receive Standard PAD Flexible PAD ...

Page 1357: ...0 0 4 Disable Enable Dch Back up 0 1 Disable default Enable Layer 1 Alarm Sending 0 1 0 0 5 Disable Enable Layer 1 Alarm Sending 0 1 Enable default Disable Haul Mode 0 1 0 0 6 Disable Enable Haul Mode 0 Short default 1 Long EC NLP Control 0 1 1 1 7 Disable Enable EC NLP Control 0 1 Disable Enable default EC NLP Mode 0 1 0 0 8 Specify EC NLP Mode 0 Background Noise default 1 Fixed Level EC 2100Hz D...

Page 1358: ...IP SET PRI_LOOPBACK Local Loop Back 0 1 0 0 1 Enable Disable Internal Loop back 0 fixed Line Loop Back 0 1 0 0 2 Enable Disable Line Loop back 0 1 Disable default Enable Payload Loop Back 0 1 0 0 3 Enable Disable Payload Loop back 0 1 Disable default Enable Dch Make Busy 0 1 0 0 4 Enable Disable Dch Make Busy 0 1 Disable default Enable Dch Loop Back 0 1 0 0 5 Enable Disable Dch Loop back 0 fixed D...

Page 1359: ...network Normally this loop back will work with the timing of ISDN b Payload Loop back The speech path control part of MG PRI sends back all the channels from ISDN network Differing from Line Loop back a part of Payload Loop back works with the timing of ISDN an error may occur unless MG PRI and ISDN are synchronized LAN interface speech path control part ISDN line interface IP network ISDN network...

Page 1360: ... 1 0 0 3 Specify Dch Signal Logic 0 Positive Logic default 1 Negative Logic Dch 1 Drop Insert 0 1 1 1 4 Enable Disable Dch 1 0 1 Disable Enable default Dch 2 Drop Insert 0 1 0 0 5 Enable Disable Dch 2 0 fixed Drop Insert Mode 0 1 0 0 6 Drop Insert Mode 0 Fixed value default 1 Set value Data Transfer Speed 0 2 0 0 7 Specify Data Transfer Speed 0 64K default 1 56K 2 48K Drop Insert Time Slot 0 23 23...

Page 1361: ... default 1 Long Alarm Detect Release Type 0 1 0 0 4 Specify Alarm Detect Release Type 0 Normal default 1 AT T Line Signal 0 1 0 0 5 Specify Line Signal 0 Binary 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS default 1 Alternate Mark Inversion with Zero Code Suppression AMI ZCS Multi Frame 0 1 0 0 6 Specify Multi Frame 0 24 Multi Frame default 1 12 Multi Frame Signaling In Channel 0 1 0 0 7 Specify Signaling in Channels...

Page 1362: ...en 1 is specified for 4K Data Link When 0 is specified for G 704 Mode 0 Sending 7E 7E Receiving BOS Message 1 Sending FF FF Receiving BOS Message 2 Sending FF 7E Receiving BOS Message 3 Sending FF FF Not Receiving BOS Message When 1 is specified for G 704 Mode 0 Sending 7E 7E Receiving BOS Message 1 Sending 00 00 Receiving BOS Message 2 Sending 00 00 Receiving BOS Message 3 Sending 00 00 Not Recei...

Page 1363: ... to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command MG PRI SIP SET RTP_STOP_DETECT 3 P1 Specify the time out value for RTP recep tion 3 32 seconds default 3 seconds Effective range RTP Stop Detect Timer setting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET SIGNALING_PORT_NO 65535 P1 Specify a port number to be used for PHI PRI 1024 65535 Port Number Default 5060 Signa...

Page 1364: ...cify a Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value 0 68 DSCP value Default 48 Signaling QoS setting succeeded 0xC0 MG PRI SIP SET SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server 1 20 1 Specify the number of SIP Servers to be used 1 20 The number of SIP Servers to be used IP Address 10 41 1 150 Specify the IP address of SIP Server Default 0 0 0 0 Note 1 Port Number 5060 Specify a port number to be used in the SIP Serv...

Page 1365: ... This command is used to specify the settings for VLAN To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command In MG one VLAN can be created per network Host Name SVR1 nec com Specify the host name by fully domain name A charac ters can be specified up to 63 bytes including hyphen and full stop SIP server setting succeeded ...

Page 1366: ...Specify VLAN ID 1 4094 VLAN ID COS 0 7 0 2 Specify COS 0 7 COS VLAN setting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET WARNING_TONE 0 P1 Specify a set value Default 0 0 No Warning Tone 1 Not Used 2 Not Used 3 Send Warning Tone Warning Tone Control setting succeeded Result is displayed ...

Page 1367: ...is used to display the status of DRS Note About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual MG PRI SIP SHOW CALL_HOLD CALL HOLD is DISABLE The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW CONFIG SYSTEM DEBUG_LEVEL 0 DHCP_BKUP OFF DHCP_SAVE OFF REGISTER_MODE SP IP OWN_ADDR 10 41 1 100 SUBNET_MASK255 255 255 0 DEF...

Page 1368: ...ss 10 41 1 101 Port 3457 Tertiary DRS Address 10 41 1 102 Port 3458 Fourth DRS Address 10 41 1 103 Port 3459 MG PRI SIP SHOW DRSADDRESS 1 P1 Select the DRS to be displayed 1 Primary DRS 2 Secondary DRS 3 Tertiary DRS 4 Fourth DRS Primary DRS Address 10 41 1 100 Port 3456 The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW DRSQOS The current setting is displayed QOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 low high Delay 0 1 N...

Page 1369: ... 24PRIA MG 24PRIA This command is used to display the waiting time ms before starting EC training feature 1 counter indi cates 10ms MG PRI SIP SHOW E_T_WAITTIME EC Training Start Wait Time is 10 The current setting is displayed ...

Page 1370: ...and is used to display the connection mode of LAN interface 15 SHOWΔIPADDRESS This command is used to display the IP address of LAN interface MG PRI SIP SHOW EC_TRAINING EC Training Feature is ON The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW FAX_ECM Fax ecm is OFF The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW FAXERRORDETECT FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute The current setting is displayed MG PRI...

Page 1371: ...me mgpri nec com The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW PAD0 P1 Specify the register number to be displayed 0 4 PAD Register Number value is 0x0000 The current setting is displayed A law u 1aw Setting 0 PAD Selection PAD Control PAD Pattern No Data PAD Pattern No 0 0 0 0 0 CODEC 0 MGC Control PBX System Data 1 μ law 2 A law 3 Convert from A law to μ law 4 Convert from μ law to A law PAD ...

Page 1372: ...ng 0 1 Disable Enable Dch Back up 0 1 Disable Enable Layer 1 Alarm Sending 0 1 Enable Disable Haul Mode 0 1 Short Long EC NLP Control 0 1 Disable Enable Disable Enable EC NLP Mode 0 1 Background Noise Fixed Level Disable Enable EC 2100Hz Detect 0 1 Disable Enable Select Music Source 0 1 Internal External Music No 0 Fur Elise 1 Maiden s prayer 5 Minuet Clock mode 0 1 Secondary Primary Layer 1 Alarm...

Page 1373: ...gic Negative Logic Dch 1 0 1 Disable Enable Dch 2 0 Fixed Mode 0 1 Fixed value Set value Data Transfer Speed 0 64K 1 56K 2 48K Time Slot 0 23 Dch Signaling Set 0 Fixed T1_2 Remote Alarm 0 1 Data Link Fs bit In Channel Alarm Operation Mode 0 1 Enable Disable Alarm Release Timing 0 1 Short Long Alarm Detect Release Type 0 1 Normal AT T Line Signal 0 1 B8ZS AMI ZCS Multi Frame 0 1 24 Multi Frame 12 M...

Page 1374: ...UCTION of Installation Manual MG PRI SIP SIGNALING_QOS Signaling QOS is 0xC0 QOS TOS PRECEDENCE 6 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name The current setting is displayed 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0...

Page 1375: ...splayed MG PRI SIP SHOW STARTPORT RTP Start Port Number is 1024 The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW STATUS Register Mode MAC Address Link State Speed Duplex VLAN Mode DHCP Mode IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Mode DNS Server Address Encryption SIP Encrypt RTP Encrypt Current Sipsv Address Registration Status SP 00 00 4c a4 00 01 Up 100Mbps Full Enable Disable 10 10 10 98 25...

Page 1376: ...Information Hardware CA CC00 2A Boot program SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A 03 00 00 00 Firmware NC SP3884 MG PRI PROG A 05 00 00 00 Firmware TC TC Program 04 00 00 00 AC490 kernel Ver Revision Patch PatchNumber Reserved Month Day year Name 01 07 06 05 09 2005 AC49kernel AC490 MainProgram Revision Patch PatchNumber Reserved Month Day year Name 01 07 08 pp 02 06 02 2005 AC490012ae3 S AC490 Driver Ve...

Page 1377: ... current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW VLAN P1 Specify VLAN ID If omitted all the VLAN are displayed DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 1 0 10 123 123 123 255 255 255 0 MG PRI SIP SHOW WARNING_TONE Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP ISDN side MG PRI SIP PING 10 41 1 100 P1 Specify IP address PING 10 41 1 100 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms PING 10 41 1 100 icmp_seq 1 time 0 ms PING 10 41...

Page 1378: ...mmand is used to download configuration data from TFTP server MG PRI SIP DELETE VLAN 1 P1 Specify VLAN ID VLAN deleting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y N Y Y The data is saved N The data is not saved Erase start Erase OK Write start Write OK Configuration data has been saved Re starting is required for making a setup reflect R...

Page 1379: ...ffective In this case press Ctrl and C together to display OS prompts MG PRI SIP PUT CONFIGDATA 10 10 10 20 P1 Specify the IP address of TFTP server after the command name The upload of configuration data was successful Result is displayed MG PRI SIP REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y Y Reboot N Not reboot MG PRI SIP EXIT Returns to OS prompt MG PRI SIP EXIT Configuration data was changed Don t power...

Page 1380: ... MG PRI SIP INIT CONFIG Warning This command is for initializing config data If this command is executed your configuration is deleted really OK Y N Y It is recommended to back up your configuration really OK Y N Y Erase start Erase OK Write start Write OK Initializing of configuration data is successful you need to setup MGPRI s config data ...

Page 1381: ...P address form is incorrect An entered IP address is incorrect in the input format VLAN ID is no more registered Registered VLAN IDs exceeded a maximum Sub command is missing Sub command is necessary when the command is entered Invalid parameter value The parameter is out of range Invalid sub command The sub command is incorrect No response from CPU TC There is no response from other CPUs Command ...

Page 1382: ... general structure of this equipment is shown in the diagram below MG PRI can operate in either two mode SIP mode or Proprietary Protocol mode When MG PRI works in SIP mode the controlling signal between the Telephony Server and MG PRI adopts Session Initiation Protocol SIP Controlling signal and voice packets are encrypted to ensure security feature B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CON...

Page 1383: ... PRI MPH is the interface for the control signal Call control between SP PHI and MG PRI is executed via TCP IP port of the system The number of channels that are processed depends on codec and payload cycle used by MG PRI in SIP mode Therefore adjustments will be needed such as placing unnecessary channels into the Make Busy status The following table shows the number of available channels dependi...

Page 1384: ...A MG PRI is mounted on 1U MPC 19 inch rack mount 1U box MG PRI Box MG 30PRIA Unit mm inch 400 0 1 3 75 43 8 1 72 430 0 1 4 93 B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC 297 0 11 6 43 0 1 72 210 0 8 26 Unit mm inch B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC ...

Page 1385: ...nection the data is speci fied by APDIL Smooth PAD Selectable OFF Mode1 Mode5 RTP Jitter and Buffer Static 10 300 msec in 10 msec steps Dynamic 10 300 msec Quality of Service QoS ToS IP Precedence Supported DiffServ Supported VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagging VLAN VLAN bit Priority bit Echo Canceller G 168 Tail Length is 64 msec PRI Interface 2M 2 048 Mbps HDB3 30B D Specifications Layer 1 ITU T I 431 ETSI...

Page 1386: ...onsole RJ 45 serial connection CONSOLE cable RJ 45 RS 232C is used MUSIC External hold tone con nection 3 5 φ mini jack monaural type MG PRI B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC PWR lamp ALM lamp ON LINE lamp LB lamp MUSIC connector RESET switch CONSOLE connector LINE connector for ISDN line RJ 45 Ether connector RJ 45 B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE ...

Page 1387: ... using two channels or more Temporary lights in initial setting Flash 120INT Flashes when using only one channel OFF Remains OFF when all the channels are idle D Green Layer 2 link is established in ISDN line Temporary lights in initial setting Flash 60INT Flashes slow when Dch is in make busy state Flash 120INT Flashes fast when Layer 2 link is not established OFF Dch is not assigned Ether LINK G...

Page 1388: ...Note 1 PACT lamp is only for SCA 30PRIA MG 30PRIA does not have PACT lamp NAME FUNCTION AC power inlet Connected to AC DC adapter with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft AC 100V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 230V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 240V 50 60 Hz 10 Power switch Power ON OFF switching PACT lamp Note 1 Indicates the state in power unit Lights green Normal operat...

Page 1389: ... electricity lightning strike and other electrical surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG PRI has ISDN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG PRI and AC power cable without Ground connection ...

Page 1390: ...us See VoIP Encryption V 27 in Data Programming Manual Business for the number of available channels on the encryption status of this component PORT NO PATH FUNCTION NOTE 5060 SP PHI MG SIP Local console can modify the port number 1024 64510 Peer to Peer RTP Local console can modify the port number PORT NO PATH FUNCTION NOTE 7500 Internal PHI PRI MG PRI iLP PM 1024 Peer to Peer H 245 1024 64510 Pe...

Page 1391: ...r UTP Straight through Cable Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100 m Line Cable For the connection to ISDN network T point use a 0 5φ Twisted pair Cable for DSU with an RJ 45 Modular Jack CONSOLE Cable RJ 45 RS 232C serial cable for maintenance console Audio Cable Microphone output for external hold tone source 3 5 φ mini jack monaural type 2 Firmware Program Installed Firmware SP 3884 MG PRI PROG...

Page 1392: ...ter Buffer size of IP FAX CDN73 FXPT Payload type for IP FAX CDN74 FXPS Payload size for IP FAX 6 The connection via NAT Network Address Translation IP masquerade internet connection and dial up access are not supported 7 Available interface is limited to Q 931 and only the public ISDN network can be used The connection to private ISDN line and PRI terminal is not supported 8 The fault detection f...

Page 1393: ...h the ADPM command When the Telephony Server is in Dual Configuration LAN1 must be used as the interface of the Telepho ny Server side This setting can be assigned by ADTM command QoS setting to Internal PHI PRI is assigned by AMGIL command on MG PRI basis Alternate routing is proceeded according to the LCR programming in case of TCP IP failure Echo Canceller setting on ARTD APDIL command is appli...

Page 1394: ...nsert MG PRI to 1U MPC STEP 2 Secure the MG PRI to 1U MPC fixing two screws on right and left sides ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required MG PRI 2M Card SCA 30PRIA bracket to mount on 19 inch rack 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC B D ALM PWR ON LI...

Page 1395: ...ction shows the cable connection to the MG PRI MG PRI provides the following interfaces Connection to LAN Connection to ISDN Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console Connection to Audio Equipment for external music on hold Power Supply ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC ...

Page 1396: ...ection Diagram Front SCA 30PRIA FRONT Maintenance Console PC used for configuration data setting connected to LAN Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX RS 232C D sub 9 pin RJ 45 serial CONSOLE cable option serial straight through cable Audio Equipment connected to PHONE LINE output of audio equipment if necessary connected to ISDN line B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE ...

Page 1397: ...l hold tone source needs to be within the ranges of 8Ω 50kΩ Make sure not to exceed this range Note 2 If audio equipment has a ground terminal be sure to make proper connection to grounding of audio equip ment Note 3 Do not connect LAN and ISDN line here These cables are connected in Section 15 3 Startup MG PRI and Basic Tests B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC FRONT N...

Page 1398: ...to appropriate AC supply Note For the safety measures against static electricity lightning strike and other electrical surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG PRI has ISDN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG PRI and AC power cable without Ground connection REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected to...

Page 1399: ...ONSOLE cable Note ISDN Lines and LAN cables are connected in Section 15 3 Startup MG PRI and Basic Tests Do not con nect these cables here FRONT B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC Maintenance Console PC CONSOLE connector RJ 45 serial RS 232C D sub 9 pin CONSOLE cable MG PRI Card Box ...

Page 1400: ... 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console When Proprietary Protocol mode 1 Selection whether to use DHCP server 2 Network Data Assignment When SIP mode 1 One Time Password Assignment 2 Selection whether to use DHCP DNS server 3 Network Data Assignment STEP ...

Page 1401: ...e by each mode Before Taking Procedures Unstable network environment such as using NAT and dial up connection is not preferred If an access list is applied to the network looking into all the communication flows classify the priorities to make the network effective The throughput will become low if the settings are inappropriate The fol lowing is an example PRIORITY PACKET KIND 1 High Network Cont...

Page 1402: ... may be increased due to excessive jitter buffer insertion COT Note 2 Voice speech and FAX relay are available However DTMF relay is not guaranteed Input level can be lower than minimum DTMF detection level 27 0 dBm because of line loss at public network side LDT Note 2 Design your private network so that DTMF input level at MG PRI may be larger than 27 0 dBm If not DTMF relay is not guaranteed 4W...

Page 1403: ... minimum DTMF detection level 27 0 dBm at MG PRI because of Line Loss between two switches Line Loss The signal can be attenuated here 2 wire If input level at MG PRI is lower than minimum DTMF detection level DTMF relay cannot be guaranteed ISDN STN B COT LDT LC LDT LC STN A MG If input level is smaller than 27 dBm DTMF relay cannot be guaranteed DTMF relay Input ...

Page 1404: ...assigned by ADTM is independent Note 1 If the Telephony Server connected to MG PRI is in Dual Configuration this LAN Interface must be LAN1 See the following for the procedure Note 1 The Port Number is shared ADTM Assignment of Data for TCP IP Module Assign LAN Interface to be used Internal PHI PRI LAN1 fixed when Dual Configuration Note When the LAN Interface to be used is switched in this comman...

Page 1405: ...SI ISDN Data Assignment in Chapter 3 of Data Programming Manual ISDN Note 3 In the case of SUB ADDRESS ADDRESSING assign 0 Refer to SUB ADDRESS ADDRESSING S 95 in Data Programming Manual ISDN In the case of DID ADDRESSING refer to DIRECT INWARD DIALING DID ADDRESSING D 123 in Data Programming Manual ISDN RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN 2 ONSG 2 4 INSG 2 5 TF 3 6 TCL 1 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 10 SMDR 1 15...

Page 1406: ... User to User Signaling notification is required Note 10 Required for EMEA To provide the system with channel negotiation see 7 Q SIG CHANNEL NEGOTIA TION in Chapter 3 of Data Programming Guide ISDN Note 11 Assign 1 when the multi rate bearer service is used RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN 2 ONSG 2 4 INSG 2 5 TF 3 6 TCL 4 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 15 LSG 12 28 ANS 1 30 PAD 4 Note 5 31 OGRL 1 32 ICRL 1 34 G...

Page 1407: ...el RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN68 VIR 2 MG connection CDN89 REGION 1 ETSI ISDN Required for EMEA Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 To use FAX specify the FAX relay settings in the following CDN71 FXD CDN72 FXJS CDN73 FXPT CDN74 FXPS This parameter appears when 1 G 711 or 2 G 726 is selected in FXPT ...

Page 1408: ...ing trunk data by ATRK Note The total number of B channels must not exceed 460 per two Module Group MG pair i e MG2 3 MG4 5 and MG6 7 PIR HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 ...

Page 1409: ...t be used here PRI 2M 30B D setting STEP 7 ACIC1 Assignment of CIC Code Data 1 Assign the accommodated location of Virtual Signaling Channel to the Point Code PC Point Code specified by ADPC CSCG CSC group of Virtual Signaling Channel specified by ACSC Note NDM command ACIC1N cannot be used here STEP 8 ACIC2 Assignment of CIC Code Data 2 Required only for Q SIG trunk Assign the CIC Number and acco...

Page 1410: ...SERVICE TYPE QoS settings of signal path ToS value applied when Internal PHI PRI connects to MG PRI STEP 12 AMGVL Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control Data for LDM Assign the Voice control data to connect to MG PRI A RT Storing MG Route number of virtual speech channel used for MG PRI TYPE Select Route Specified or Location ID Specified B RT MG Storing Displayed when TYPE Route Specified is s...

Page 1411: ...MG PRI 2M SCA 30PRIA MG 30PRIA Data Deletion Deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment Make sure to delete in the order of AMGIL ATRK Confirm there is no data left in AMGIL before deleting ATRK ...

Page 1412: ...rogram ming in this manual The explanation of PHs including Internal PHE is also there 2 SP PHI Data Assignment When MG PRI is used in SIP mode MG PRI is registered to SP PHI embedded in the Telephony Server So SP PHI data assignment is necessary About the procedure for the SP PHI data assignment refer to Vol 1 Chap ter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual The explanation of PHs includi...

Page 1413: ...Data The other data should be 0 default data Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 Note 1 INT CDN65 1 N ISDN2 2 Australia 4 ITU CCITT ETSI PRI 5 AT T 4 5 ESS 6 ETSI BRI 7 NT DMS 100 DMS 250 RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN 2 ONSG 2 4 INSG 2 5 TF 3 6 TCL 1 7 L T 1 8 RLP 2 10 SMDR 1 15 LSG 12 28 ANS 1 30 PAD 4 31 OGRL 1 3...

Page 1414: ...evel diagram of the network data 4 is standard Note 6 Each office must be assigned a different value to avoid collision at the time of call origination Note 7 Assign 1 when the number display on LCD of terminal is required Note 8 ACDD is not available if DC 15 Note 9 Assign 1 when the User to User Signaling notification is required RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN 2 ONSG 2 4 INSG 2 5 TF 3 6 TCL 4 ...

Page 1415: ...30PRIA MG 30PRIA Note 10 Required for EMEA To provide the system with channel negotiation see 7 Q SIG CHANNEL NEGOTIA TION in Chapter 3 of Data Programming Guide ISDN Note 11 Assign 1 when the multi rate bearer service is used ...

Page 1416: ...el RT 20 Virtual Speech Channel CDN68 VIR 2 MG connection CDN89 REGION 1 ETSI ISDN Required for EMEA Note To change the data for existing route RT initialize or reboot the trunk device such as circuit card MG or VS 32 To use FAX specify the FAX relay settings in the following CDN71 FXD CDN72 FXJS CDN73 FXPT CDN74 FXPS This parameter appears when 1 G 711 or 2 G 726 is selected in FXPT ...

Page 1417: ...r of B channels must not exceed 460 per two Module Group MG pair i e MG2 3 MG4 5 and MG6 7 PIR HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 1...

Page 1418: ...command ACSCN cannot be used here PRI 2M 30B D setting STEP 8 ACIC1 Assignment of CIC Code Data 1 Assign the accommodated location of Virtual Signaling Channel to the Point Code Note NDM command ACIC1N cannot be used here PC Point Code specified by ADPC CSCG CSC group of Virtual Signaling Channel specified by ACSC STEP 9 ACIC2 Assignment of CIC Code Data 2 Required only for Q SIG trunk Assign the ...

Page 1419: ...TRY Number of retry to request connection to MG PRI SERVICE TYPE QoS settings of signal path ToS value applied when MG PRI connects to Internal PHI PRI STEP 13 AMGVL Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control Data for LDM Assign the Voice control data to connect to MG PRI A RT Storing MG Route number of virtual speech channel used for MG PRI TYPE Select Route Specified or Location ID Specified B RT...

Page 1420: ...ble period This command assigns one time password and its available period Note To perform Authentication feature assign the same one time password in MG PRI At initial startup of registration mode MG PRI will ask you to input the one time password for authentication For more in formation refer to page 1176 Data Deletion Deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment Make sure to del...

Page 1421: ... on the Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Re...

Page 1422: ... Card to restart the card and start its boot program STEP 2 Make sure the LED indicates normal status PWR LED lights green Boot program automatically starts ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT MG PRI Card REAR Turn ON the power switch UP Turn ON the power switch UP MG PRI Box REAR MG PRI Card Box FRONT B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUS...

Page 1423: ...plains the procedure by each mode Note DRS Device Registration Server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When MG PRI works in Proprietary Protocol mode the Telephony Server acts as DRS which is controlling function of the Telephony Server Note SIP server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When MG PRI works in SIP mode the Telephony Server acts as SIP server Note T...

Page 1424: ... MG PRI automatical ly resets its mode in 20 seconds STEP 2 Type usrConsole at the indicated OS prompt and press the ENTER key If a prompt displays on the screen press the Enter key STEP 3 MG PRI s command prompt appears as follows DP OK MG ID xxxxxx Boot program version SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A xx xx xx xx Main program version SP3884 MG PRI PROG A xx xx xx xx H W PKG information CA CC00 001 ...

Page 1425: ... screen press the Enter key to display a prompt STEP 4 Type SETUP TP to set the network data referring to page 1211 also set the following network data depending on your LAN environment There are two ways to set the network data When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used ...

Page 1426: ... address and port number of DRS Note Check the number of IP addresses saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of MG PRI anytime Note 1 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate Data IP address Array Checked Code 161 Refer to DHCP Server in Volume 1 of this manual for more information on DHCP option settin...

Page 1427: ...efore starting the IP address setting Note 2 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual MG PRI SET DHCP DISABLE DHCP setting succeeded MG PRI SET IPADDRESS 10 10 10 170 255 255 255 0 IP Address setting succeeded MG PRI SET DEFAULTROUTE 10 10 10 255 Default Gateway setting succeeded MG PRI SET DRSADDRESS D...

Page 1428: ...button also reset the MG PRI Note MG ID MAC Address of MG PRI is displayed after rebooting The MG ID needs to be assigned in AMGIL command MG PRI SAVE CONFIG Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y N Y Erase start Erase OK Write start Write OK Configuration data has been saved Re starting is required for making a setup reflect MG PRI REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y ...

Page 1429: ...Enter the same password with one entered in SIP server As long as you don t enter a one time password you cannot go to the next step DP OK MG ID xxxxxx Boot program version SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A xx xx xx xx Main program version SP3884 MG PRI PROG A xx xx xx xx H W PKG information CA CC00 001 DSP information DSP K AC49kernel xx xx xx xx DSP information DSP P AC490012ae3 S xx xx xx xx Starti...

Page 1430: ...d prompt appears as follows Note If a prompt does not appear on the screen press the Enter key to display a prompt STEP 4 Type SETUP SP to set the network data referring to page 1208 also set the following network data depending on your LAN environment There are two ways to set the network data When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used usrConsole MG Maintenance command MG PRI SIP ...

Page 1431: ...nd port number of SIP Server Note Check the number of IP addresses saved in DHCP server is sufficient to provide IP addresses for MG PRI s anytime Note 1 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate Data IP address Array Checked Code 162 Refer to DHCP Server in Volume 1 of this manual for more information on DHCP option settin...

Page 1432: ...NS MG PRI SIP SET DHCP DISABLE DHCP setting succeeded MG PRI SIP SET IPADDRESS 10 10 10 170 255 255 255 0 IP Address setting succeeded MG PRI SIP SET DEFAULTROUTE 10 10 10 255 Default Gateway setting succeeded MG PRI SIP SET SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server 1 20 1 IP Address 10 41 1 150 Port Number 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N Y Host Name SRV1 nec com SIP server setting succeeded MG PRI SIP SET INTER...

Page 1433: ...Sta tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual STEP 5 Save the configuration data assigned STEP 6 Reboot the MG PRI by turning the power OFF ON or pressing RESET button Note MG ID MAC Address of MG PRI is displayed after rebooting The MG ID needs to be assigned in AMGIL command MG PRI SIP SET OWN_NAME mgpri nec com Own name setting succeeded MG PRI SIP SAVE CONFIG Don t power off in progress Do ...

Page 1434: ...ard MG 30PRIA Ether RJ45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Send 2 Send 3 Receive 6 Receive 4 5 7 8 are not used FRONT B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC Maintenance Console PC ON LINE lamp Ether connector Ether RJ45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Send 2 Send 3 Receive 6 Receive 4 5 7 8 are not used Maintenance Console PC B D ALM PWR ON LINE L...

Page 1435: ...30PRIA MG PRI Box MG 30PRIA LINE RJ 45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 RB 4 TA 1 RA 5 TB 3 6 7 8 are not used B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC D ch lamp LINE connector Maintenance Console PC FRONT LINE RJ 45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 RB 4 TA 1 RA 5 TB 3 6 7 8 are not used FRONT LINE connector Maintenance Console PC B D ALM PWR ON LIN...

Page 1436: ...k mode OFF Normal operation LINE B Green Lights when using two channels or more Temporary lights in initial setting Flash 120INT Flashes when using only one channel OFF Remains OFF when all the channels are idle D Green Layer 2 link is established in ISDN line Temporary lights in initial setting Flash 60INT Flashes slow when Dch is in make busy state Flash 120INT Flashes fast when Layer 2 link is ...

Page 1437: ...not be physically connected to the LAN Check the LAN cable between MG PRI and networking device Also check the power of Switching HUB and Routers are turned ON Check that correct cable is used Use the Straight through cable Check that the cable is not damaged Test the continuity in the LAN cable Replace the LAN cable or the network device if the problem is still not cleared Lights green This lamp ...

Page 1438: ...between MDF and MG PRI MDF and DSU Check whether the line cable is not damaged Test the continuity of the line cable Check the data assignment of the Telephony Server side and MG PRI side Telephony server Is the data assignment on each PCPro command correct MG PRI Check the configuration data assigned from the maintenance console Lights green Go on to STEP 5 STEP 5 Speech test through MG PRI Call ...

Page 1439: ...ated normally Call quality is adequate Connection test is completed 2 Alarm Information Check Check the Alarm Lamps If the red lamp lights search the cause of fault and perform the appropriate operations Note ALM Lamp Check is available for SCA 30PRIA only Check the system message 1 Display the system message using DFTD command 2 See the system message and confirm whether any failure occurs on MG ...

Page 1440: ... of MG PRI Note The difference between Line Loop Back and Payload Loop Back is All the processes in Line Loop Back follow the timing of ISDN side There are some processes following the timing of system side in Payload Loop Back In other words bit error may occur when the system does not synchronize with ISDN in Payload Loop Back Bit error is not considered in Line Loop Back LAN interface speech pa...

Page 1441: ...ed in advance Backing Up Config Data By Serial Connection STEP 1 Power off MG PRI and disconnect it from the network STEP 2 Connect PC to MG PRI by using Console Cable RS232C RJ 45 cable STEP 3 Power on MG PRI STEP 4 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 5 Select Transfer Capture File STEP 6 Send File scr...

Page 1442: ... to the TFTP server program Data Assignment on Serial Console STEP 7 Power on MG PRI STEP 8 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 9 After a prompt is displayed enter usrConsole STEP 10 After a prompt MG PRI or MG PRI SIP is displayed enter get configdata TFTP s IP Address to download configuration data in...

Page 1443: ...reboot MG PRI by entering reboot STEP 13 Exit the HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit Confirmation of MG PRI STEP 14 Connect the MG PRI to the network STEP 15 Confirm that MG PRI is normally registered in system after reboot Use the DISD FPTS commands in PCPro For more information refer to the Command Manual STEP 16 Check that calls via MG PRI can be made ...

Page 1444: ... TFTP Make sure of the connectivity in the following Make sure that PCPro is able to log on to the Telephony Server Check the connectivity from TFTP server to the Telephony Server by using Ping command Make sure that TFTP client is able to connect to FTP server IP Network TFTP Server PCPro Telnet PC SYSTEM MG PRI Configdata 3 Connect to control MG PRI via Telnet 3 Connect to control MG PRI via Tel...

Page 1445: ...EVEL because MG PRI does not use USERLEVEL For VALID TIME input a total of time required for completing this procedures Note A user ID and a password are temporary ones for download you can specify them as you like STEP 6 After completing the above click the Set button Data Assignment on Telnet PC STEP 7 Start a command prompt and enter telnet MG PRI s IP Address to connect MG PRI via Telnet STEP ...

Page 1446: ...ia Telnet Input any letter for USER LEVEL because MG PRI does not use USERLEVEL For VALID TIME input a total of time required for completing this procedures Note A user ID and a password are temporary ones for download you can specify them as you like STEP 6 After completing the above click the Set button Data Assignment on Telnet PC STEP 7 Start a command prompt and enter telnet MG PRI s IP Addre...

Page 1447: ...e command prompt indicating the upload to TFTP server is completed normally STEP 12 To reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from TFTP server save it by entering save config and reboot MG PRI by entering reboot STEP 13 Exit the HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit Confirmation of MG PRI STEP 14 Confirm that MG PRI is normally registered in system after reboot Use the DISD FPTS commands...

Page 1448: ... 45 both STEP 3 Put the firmware files For example SP3884 and mpgrimwlist txt for upgrade in the root fold er of TFTP server STEP 4 Permit read behavior of this directory For more information refer to the appropriate manual attached to the TFTP server program B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC Serial Console TFTP Server IP Address 10 41 1 250 MG PRI Note Note Note TFTP...

Page 1449: ...erver IP Address Enter a TFTP server IP address STEP 12 The current settings of MG PRI and TFTP server are displayed Make sure of the settings If you need to modify the settings select a number 1 4 to modify the item If all the settings are correct enter y STEP 13 Download menu is displayed and then select 1 Download of all programs STEP 14 IP address information setting is displayed and then sele...

Page 1450: ...ve a call via the MG PRI and confirm that you can talk to each other STEP 24 After all the tasks are completed write down label the firmware version in the back of the MG PRI For example 2A is indicated for Version 2 3A is indicated for Version 3 dispver Boot program version Main program version TC version DSP kernel version DSP program version Tone version Boot Number Boot Issue SP3839 SH7751R CB...

Page 1451: ...stalled in advance MG PRI is already registered to system and it is operating normally Make sure of the connectivity in the following Make sure that PCPro is able to log on to the Telephony Server Check the connectivity from FTP server to the Telephony Server by using Ping command Make sure that FTP client is able to connect to FTP server IP Network FTP Server PCPro SYSTEM MG PRI 3 Download firmwa...

Page 1452: ... Name and Password for logging in to FTP server if required Select an item of Parallel in Download Method Confirm PRI2 0 MG is displayed in Firmware File Name If it is not in the list create an item by clicking the Insert button Set the following attributes and then click the OK button After completing the above click the Insert button located in Terminal Information STEP 4 Select Specify Terminal...

Page 1453: ...en click the Exit button to close the ATDL command STEP 10 To confirm the firmware activate the DIPI command The file name is indicated in the following STEP 11 Select Media Converter in Functionality Type and then click the Execute button STEP 12 Confirm that the firmwares in the appropriate ones are upgraded Confirmation of MG PRI STEP 13 To confirm MG PRI is properly operating with the upgraded...

Page 1454: ...h is controlling function of the Telephony Server Note When an event causing a restart of the device such as health check timeout occurs during startup of the configuration command it takes about five minutes to start the rebooting after you exit from the configu ration command or enter the last command Starting Configuration Command 1 Connect a PC to MG PRI using CONSOLE cable and run terminal so...

Page 1455: ... MUSIC Terminal Software MG PRI MG PRI set ipaddress 123 50 18 45 IP Address has set MG PRI _ MG PRI set ipaddress 123 50 18 45 255 255 255 0 IP Address setting succeeded MG PRI _ Prompt User Input Command Reply Message MG PRI B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC to CONSOLE connector Maintenance Console PC Terminal Software MG PRI set ipaddress 123 50 18 45 IP Address ha...

Page 1456: ... PRI SET DRSQOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS TOS 5 Set Value or Default Value 5 MG PRI SET PRI_E1_1 Dch Control 0 1 1 1 Dch Mode 0 1 0 0 Dch Signal Logic 0 1 0 0 Dch 1 Drop Insert 0 1 1 1 Dch 2 Drop Insert 0 1 0 0 Drop Insert Mode 0 1 0 0 Data Transfer Speed 0 2 0 0 Drop Insert Time Slot 1 31 16 16 Dch Signaling Set 0 1 0 0 set value is 0x9080 setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect and keep re...

Page 1457: ...PRIA How to Read Maintenance Command The commands in this section are explained with defined characters These characters meanings are in the fol lowing CHARACTERS MEANING Δ Blank P1 P2 P3 Parameters Parameter Option indicates Not essential ...

Page 1458: ... 14 GND_OPEN_SW Assigns the state of Grand open switch ON OFF page 1219 15 HC_RCV_TIMER Specifies the time recognized as timeout in receiving health check page 1219 16 INTERFACE Assigns the connection mode for LAN interface page 1220 17 IPADDRESS Assigns IP address and subnet mask page 1220 18 ONE_TIME_PASS Specifies one time password page 1220 19 OWN_NAME Assigns own host name page 1221 PAD0 Spec...

Page 1459: ...le PAD 2 PAD3 Displays settings for flexible PAD 3 19 PAD4 Displays settings for flexible PAD 4 20 PRI_COMMON1 Displays common setting 1 of PRI 2M page 1240 21 PRI_LOOPBACK Displays MB of loopback and Dch page 1241 22 PRI_E1_1 Displays function settings on Dch of PRI 2M page 1241 23 PRI_E1_2 Displays function settings 1 Alarm Signaling on Dch of PRI 2M page 1242 24 RTP_STOP_DETECT Display the time...

Page 1460: ...input EXIT or exit after a prompt Note When the maintenance command program is activated it also provides help function for referring to avail able command and sub command After a prompt is indicated request to list up the target help by inputting command name or command name sub command name after the prompt and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when executing help function r...

Page 1461: ... Q Exit the command DNS IP Address set Current DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 The current setting is displayed Change DNS IP Address Y change N current Q quit y Input new DNS IP Address 10 40 1 150 3 Select the DNS setting Y Change the DNS IP Address N Remain the DNS IP Address Q Exit the command IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 The current setting is displayed Current Subnetmask 255 2...

Page 1462: ...er Host Name 1 0 0 0 0 5060 2 0 0 0 0 5060 3 0 0 0 0 5060 4 0 0 0 0 5060 5 0 0 0 0 5060 6 0 0 0 0 5060 7 0 0 0 0 5060 8 0 0 0 0 5060 9 0 0 0 0 5060 10 0 0 0 0 5060 11 0 0 0 0 5060 12 0 0 0 0 5060 13 0 0 0 0 5060 14 0 0 0 0 5060 15 0 0 0 0 5060 16 0 0 0 0 5060 17 0 0 0 0 5060 18 0 0 0 0 5060 19 0 0 0 0 5060 20 0 0 0 0 5060 The current setting is displayed Change SIP Server Information Y change N cu...

Page 1463: ... new Host Name SVR1 nec com 18 Specify the host name of SIP Server Continue Y continue N exit N 19 Select whether you continue to set up the host name or not Y Continue the SIP Server setting N Exit the SIP Server setting Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed auto The current setting is displayed Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y 20 Select the LAN setting Y Change the setting N Remain th...

Page 1464: ...urrent setting Q Exit the command Input new IP Address 10 41 1 100 4 Specify the IP address of MG PRI Input new Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 5 Specify the subnet mask of MG PRI Default Gateway IP Address set Current Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 The current setting is displayed Change Default Gateway Y change N current Q quit Y 6 Select the default gateway setting Y Change the setting N Remain the current ...

Page 1465: ... DRS Default 3456 Continue Y continue N exit N 12 Select whether you continue to set up the SIP Server or not Y Continue the SIP Server setting N Exit the SIP Server setting Ethernet Speed set Current LAN Speed auto The current setting is displayed Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit Y 13 Select the LAN setting Y Change the setting N Remain the current setting Q Exit the command Input new S...

Page 1466: ...ue the system continues to respond to it until three times If the invalid value is entered in four times the system forcibly discards the configuration data and exits the SP Setup Note If the setup is finished by quit q command data assigned until that time will be discarded ...

Page 1467: ... IP address for Default Gateway Note that default route be located at the same segment with MG PRI To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE com mand and to restart before exiting the maintenance command 4 SETΔDHCPΔP1 This command is used to enable disable DHCP server To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiti...

Page 1468: ...ssignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the main tenance command MG PRI SIP SET DNS_SW DNS interface Enable Disable DISABLE ENABLE DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 10 41 1 150 P1 Enter the following after the command name ENABLE DNS is valid default DISABLE DNS is invalid DNS setting succeeded Result is displayed ...

Page 1469: ... Fourth 1 DRS IP Address 150 12 0 254 DRS Port Number 3456 1 Select the applying type for DRS 1 Primary 2 Secondary 3 Tertiary 4 Fourth 2 Specify IP address Note 1 3 Specify port number of DRS default 3456 DRS setting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET DRSQOS TOS 0xC0 P1 Specify a type of services TOS IP Precedence DIFFSERV Differentiated Service CLEAR Clear the data P2 Specify a value 0...

Page 1470: ...RV When P1 CLEAR MG PRI SIP SET DRSQOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS DIFFSERV 1 Specify DIFFSERV for QOS DSCP 0 63 0 48 2 Specify Diffserv Codepoint DSCP 0 63 DSCP DRS QoS setting succeeded 0xC0 Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET DRSQOS TOS 0xC0 P2 Specify a value 0x00 0xFF In the case of TOS DRS QoS setting succeeded 0xC0 Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET DRSQOS DIFFSERV 48 P2 Specify a value 0 63 In the...

Page 1471: ...NINGΔP1 This command is used to enable disable the Training Feature mode of Echo Canceller Echo Canceller Fea ture is used to prevent initial Echo ranging from 500 to 1ms from occurring in the beginning of speech to PBX To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart be fore exiting the maintenance command MG PRI SIP SET DTMF_IN ON P1 Select either OFF D...

Page 1472: ... a value recognized as timeout in receiving health check To make this as signment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the main tenance command MG PRI SIP SET FAX_ECM ECM ON OFF OFF OFF ON FAX ECM is valid OFF FAX ECM is invalid default Fax ecm setting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET FAXERRORDETECT 1 P1 Specify the available time to switch...

Page 1473: ...ot be assigned as IP address of MG PRI IP address 192 168 1 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Example2 Broadcast address cannot be assigned as IP address of MG PRI IP address 192 168 1 255 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 18 SETΔONE_TIME_PASS This command is used to specify one time password for SIP Mode To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting ...

Page 1474: ... used to specify a host name for MG PRI To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command MG PRI SIP SET OWN_NAME nec P1 Specify a full domain name Own name setting succeeded Result is displayed ...

Page 1475: ... default 1 μ law 2 A law 3 Convert from A law to μ law 4 Convert from μ law to A law PAD Selection 0 1 0 0 2 Select a type of PAD selection 0 Standard default 1 Flexible PAD Control 0 3 0 0 3 Select a type of PAD Control 0 Receiving Control ISDN Network MG de fault 1 Sending Control MG ISDN Network 2 Fixed to ARTD 3 Sending Receiving Control PAD Pattern No 0 4 0 0 4 Select the number of PAD Patter...

Page 1476: ...1 2 4 4 3 3 4 4 8 4 3 3 3 6 6 0 6 12 12 4 12 5 5 4 8 8 3 9 8 8 0 8 7 7 5 Data PAD Maintenance Console Settings 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAD Control Settings A Law μ Law PAD Data Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 5 ARTD snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv snd rcv 0 8 8 0 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 4 0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 6 6 0 12 6 6 6 6 6 6 4 8 8 0 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 5 Data PAD Maintena...

Page 1477: ... available PAD number varies depending on the ARTD settings Telephony Server side Flexible PAD 1 Recv 16dB 20dB 0 0 1 Specify Flexible PAD for receiving ISDN Network MG 16dB 20dB Flexible PAD for receiving default value 0 Note Send or receive might be 0 depending on the PAD control setting 2 Specify Flexible PAD for sending MG ISDN Network 16dB 20dB Flexible PAD for sending default value 0 Flexibl...

Page 1478: ...SCA 30PRIA MG 30PRIA When P2 0000 MG PRI SIP SET PAD1 0000 P1 Specifying a PAD number 1 4 PAD Number P2 Specifying a set value 0000 FFFF Set value default value 0000 set value is 0x0000 setting succeeded Result is displayed ...

Page 1479: ...D Selection 1 Flexible STEP2 PAD0 PAD Control 3 Send Receive Control STEP3 PAD4 Flexible PAD 4 Recv 0 Flexible PAD 4 Recv 24 Flexible PAD 1 4 values of ARTD PAD PAD Selection Specify PAD value for ARTD PAD Pattern 0 4 values of ARTD PAD PAD Control 0 3 Activate PAD value 1 2 3 4 1 Receive only Send PAD 0 dB 2 Send only Receive PAD 0 dB 3 ARTD only 4 Send and Receive Standard PAD Flexible PAD ...

Page 1480: ...0 4 Disable Enable Dch Back up 0 1 Disable default Enable Layer 1 Alarm Sending 0 1 0 0 5 Disable Enable Layer 1 Alarm Sending 0 1 Enable default Disable Haul Mode 0 1 0 0 6 Disable Enable Haul Mode 0 Short default 1 Long EC NLP Control 0 1 1 1 7 Disable Enable EC NLP Control 0 1 Disable Enable default EC NLP Mode 0 1 0 0 8 Specify EC NLP Mode 0 Background Noise default 1 Fixed Level EC 2100Hz Det...

Page 1481: ...P SET PRI_LOOPBACK Local Loop Back 0 1 0 0 1 Enable Disable Local Loop back 0 fixed Line Loop Back 0 1 0 0 2 Enable Disable Line Loop back 0 1 Disable default Enable Payload Loop Back 0 1 0 0 3 Enable Disable Payload Loop back 0 1 Disable default Enable Dch Make Busy 0 1 0 0 4 Enable Disable Dch Make Busy 0 1 Disable default Enable Dch Loop Back 0 1 0 0 5 Enable Disable Dch Loop back 0 fixed Dch S...

Page 1482: ...etwork Normally this loop back will work with the timing of ISDN b Payload Loop back The speech path control part of MG PRI sends back all the channels from ISDN network Differing from Line Loop back a part of Payload Loop back works with the timing of ISDN an error may occur unless MG PRI and ISDN are synchronized LAN interface speech path control part ISDN line interface IP network ISDN network ...

Page 1483: ...3 Specify Dch Signal Logic 0 Positive Logic default 1 Negative Logic Dch 1 Drop Insert 0 1 1 1 4 Enable Disable Dch 1 0 1 Disable Enable default Dch 2 Drop Insert 0 1 0 0 5 Enable Disable Dch 2 0 fixed Drop Insert Mode 0 1 0 0 6 Drop Insert Mode 0 Fixed value default 1 Set value Data Transfer Speed 0 2 0 0 7 Specify Data Transfer Speed 0 64K default 1 56K 2 48K Drop Insert Time Slot 1 31 16 16 8 S...

Page 1484: ...1 4 Enable Disable CRC4 0 1 Disable Enable default DTI Mode 0 1 0 0 5 Specify DTI Mode 0 fixed CRC Multi frame Format 0 1 0 0 6 Enable Disable CRC Multi frame Format 0 1 Disable default Enable Ebit Automatic Sending 0 1 0 0 7 Enable Disable Ebit Automatic Sending 0 fixed TS16 Control 0 1 0 0 8 Specify Time Slot 16 Control 0 Data Through default 1 Signaling Dch Mode 0 1 0 0 9 Specify Dch Mode 0 ITU...

Page 1485: ...to execute the SAVE command and to restart before exiting the maintenance command MG PRI SIP SET RTP_STOP_DETECT 3 P1 Specify the time out value for RTP recep tion 3 32 seconds default 3 seconds Effective range RTP Stop Detect Timer setting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET SIGNALING_PORT_NO 65535 P1 Specify a port number to be used for PHI PRI 1024 65535 Port Number Default 5060 Signal...

Page 1486: ...oS setting succeeded 0xC0 When P1 and P2 are omitted When DIFFSERV is selected MG PRI SIP SET SIGNALING_QOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV DIFFSERV DIFFSERV DSCP 0 63 48 48 Specify a Differentiated Service Code Point value 0 68 DSCP value Default 48 Signaling QoS setting succeeded 0xC0 MG PRI SIP SET SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server 1 20 1 Specify the number of SIP Servers to be used 1 20 The number of SIP Servers to...

Page 1487: ...d and to restart before exiting the maintenance command 32 SETΔTCP_TIMERΔP1 This command is used to specify the timer waiting for TCP link connection MG PRI SIP SET SMOOTH_PAD 2 P1 Specify a value of Smooth PAD mode OFF Set Smooth PAD to OFF 1 2dBm Default 2 5dBm 3 2dBm 4 0dBm 5 4dBm Smooth PAD Mode setting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET STARTPORT 1024 P1 Specify the port number to s...

Page 1488: ...nce command In MG one VLAN can be created per network 34 SETΔWARNING_TONEΔP1 MG PRI SIP SET VLAN Please enter a parameter VLAN ID 1 4094 1 1 Specify VLAN ID 1 4094 VLAN ID COS 0 7 0 2 Specify COS 0 7 COS VLAN setting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SET WARNING_TONE P1 P1 Specify a set value Default 0 0 No Warning Tone 1 Not used 2 Not used 3 Send Warning Tone Warning Tone Control setting ...

Page 1489: ...s used to display the status of DRS Note About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual MG PRI SIP SHOW CALL_HOLD CALL HOLD is DISABLE The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW CONFIG SYSTEM DEBUG_LEVEL 0 DHCP_BKUP OFF DHCP_SAVE OFF REGISTER_MODE SP IP OWN_ADDR 10 41 1 100 SUBNET_MASK255 255 255 0 DEFA...

Page 1490: ...457 Tertiary DRS Address 10 41 1 102 Port 3458 Fourth DRS Address 10 41 1 103 Port 3459 MG PRI SIP SHOW DRSADDRESS 1 P1 Select the DRS to be displayed 1 Primary DRS 2 Secondary DRS 3 Tertiary DRS 4 Fourth DRS Primary DRS Address 10 41 1 100 Port 3456 The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW DRSQOS The current setting is displayed QOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 low high Delay 0 1 Normal Delay THROUGHPU...

Page 1491: ...etting of FAX ECM 12 SHOWΔFAXERRORDETECT This command is used to display an available time to be switched to FAX 13 SHOWΔHC_RCV_TIMER This command is used to display the time for timeout in receiving health check MG PRI SIP SHOW DTMF_IN Inband DTMF Relay is OFF The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW E_T_TIME EC Training Feature Time is 32 The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW ...

Page 1492: ...OWN_NAME This command is used to display the host name of MG PRI MG PRI SIP SHOW GND_OPEN_SW Grand Open Switch is GND The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW IMPEDANCE Impedance is 120 OHM The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW INTERFACE Setting Auto negotiation The current setting is displayed Status Speed is 100Mbps DUPLEX HALF MG PRI SIP SHOW IPADDRESS IP Address 222 1 12 3 T...

Page 1493: ...xed to ARTD 3 Sending Receiving Control PAD Pattern number 0 4 Data PAD Pattern Number 0 64K 1 4 Not available Flexible PAD N Recv 16 20 Flexible PAD N Send 16 20 MG PRI SIP SHOW PRI_COMMON1 value is 0x0215 The current setting is displayed Remote Alarm Sending Signal All 1 Idle Code Sending Dch Back up Layer 1 Alarm Sending Haul Mode EC NLP Control EC NLP Mode EC 2100Hz Detect Music Int Ext Music ...

Page 1494: ...Disable Enable Payload Loop back 0 1 Disable Enable Dch Make Busy 0 1 Disable Enable Dch Loop back0 0 Fixed Dch Self Test 0 Fixed MG PRI SIP SHOW PRI_E1_1 value is 0x9080 The current setting is displayed Dch Control Dch Mode Dch Signal Logic Dch 1 Drop Insert Dch 2 Drop Insert Drop Insert Mode Data Transfer Speed Drop Insert Time Slot Dch Signaling Set 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 16 0 Dch Control 0 1 Disable En...

Page 1495: ...TS16 Control Dch Mode Loop Back Pattern Alarm Detect Release Type 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Multi frame Remote Alarm 0 1 Enable Disable Alarm Release Timing 0 1 Short Long Line Signal 0 1 HDB3 AMI CRC4 0 1 Disable Enable DTI Mode 0 Fixed CRC Multi frame Format 0 1 Disable Enable Ebit Automatic Sending 0 Fixed TS16 Control 0 1 Data Through Signaling Dch Mode 0 1 ITU T AT T Loop Back Pattern 0 Fixed Ala...

Page 1496: ...of IP Devices Sta tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual MG PRI SIP SHOW SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name The current setting is displayed 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 17 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 0 0 19 ...

Page 1497: ...played MG PRI SIP SHOW STARTPORT RTP Start Port Number is 1024 The current setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW STATUS Register Mode MAC Address Link State Speed Duplex VLAN Mode DHCP Mode IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Mode DNS Server Address Encryption SIP Encrypt RTP Encrypt Current Sipsv Address Registration Status SP 00 00 4c a4 00 01 Up 100Mbps Full Enable Disable 10 10 10 98 255...

Page 1498: ...nformation Hardware CA CC01 1A Boot program SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A 03 00 00 00 Firmware NC SP3884 MG PRI PROG A 05 00 00 00 Firmware TC TC Program 04 00 00 00 AC490 kernel Ver Revision Patch PatchNumber Reserved Month Day year Name 01 07 06 05 09 2005 AC49kernel AC490 MainProgram Revision Patch PatchNumber Reserved Month Day year Name 01 07 08 pp 02 06 02 2005 AC490012ae3 S AC490 Driver Ver...

Page 1499: ...urrent setting is displayed MG PRI SIP SHOW VLAN 1 P1 Specify VLAN ID If omitted all the VLAN are displayed DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 1 0 10 123 123 123 255 255 255 0 MG PRI SIP SHOW WARNING_TONE Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP ISDN side MG PRI SIP PING 10 41 1 100 P1 Specify IP address PING 10 41 1 100 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms PING 10 41 1 100 icmp_seq 1 time 0 ms PING 10 41...

Page 1500: ...configuration data to specified TFTP server MG PRI SIP DELETE VLAN 1 P1 Specify VLAN ID VLAN deleting succeeded Result is displayed MG PRI SIP SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y N Y Erase start Erase OK Write start Write OK Y The data is saved N The data is not saved Configuration data has been saved Re starting is required for making a setup reflect Result is displayed...

Page 1501: ...ny key entry will not be effective In this case press Ctrl and C together to display OS prompts MG PRI SIP REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y Y Reboot N Not reboot MG PRI SIP EXIT Returns to OS prompt MG PRI SIP EXIT Configuration data was changed Don t power off in progress y Save and Exit n Exit without saving c Cancel y Save the file and exit the program n Exit the command without saving c Cancel ...

Page 1502: ...MG PRI SIP INIT CONFIG Warning This command is for initializing config data If this command is executed your configuration is deleted really OK Y N Y It is recommended to back up your configuration really OK Y N Y Erase start Erase OK Write start Write OK Initializing of configuration data is successful you need to setup MGPRI s config data ...

Page 1503: ... address form is incorrect An entered IP address is incorrect in the input format VLAN ID is no more registered Registered VLAN IDs exceeded a maximum Sub command is missing Sub command is necessary when the command is entered Invalid parameter value The parameter is out of range Invalid sub command The sub command is incorrect No response from CPU TC There is no response from other CPUs Command i...

Page 1504: ...led by SP PHI built in PH function us ing Session Initiation Protocol SIP and control signal and voice packets are encrypted to ensure security fea ture MG T1 SIP has one type MG T1 SIP Card SCA 24DTIA for card type That one is in the following Note 1 MG T1 SIP Card is a slot in type of trunk card mounted on 1U MPC Multi Purpose Chassis A 1U MPC can accommodate a maximum of two cards There is no r...

Page 1505: ...diagram below Note 1 SP PHI which is accommodated in MPH Multi Protocol Handler of the Telephony Server handles the control signal from to MG T1 SIP MPH is the interface for the control signal Call control between SP PHI and MG T1 SIP is executed via TCP IP port of the system Note 2 TFTP server is required for file downloading For details refer to Section 16 4 Operation and Mainte nance PH to cont...

Page 1506: ...A 16 1 3 Specifications 1 Dimension MG T1 SIP Card SCA 24DTIA MG T1 SIP is mounted on 1U MPC 19 inch rack mount 1U box Unit mm inch 400 0 1 3 75 43 8 1 72 430 0 1 4 93 B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC ...

Page 1507: ... 20dB one dB step FAX 0dB 20dB one dB step Smooth PAD RTP Jitter and Buffer Static 10 300 msec in 10 msec steps Dynamic 10 300 msec Quality of Service QoS ToS IP Precedence Supported DiffServ Supported VLAN IEEE 802 1Q Tagging VLAN VLAN bit Priority bit Echo Canceller G 168 Tail Length is 64 msec T1 interface See MG T1 SIP Specifi cations for T1 Interface FXO Ground Start Second Dial Tone Immediat...

Page 1508: ...ng Short Simultaneous seizure Controlled Not controlled Counter node activation when detecting simultaneous seizure ON OFF Remote alarm sending ON OFF Remote alarm signaling In channel Bit 2 Data Link Channel No tone sending on detecting alarm ON OFF Idle code sending ON OFF 4K data link MOS BOM Operation mode is selectable from the patterns PPR or 7EH Flag to be sent out and whether to receive MO...

Page 1509: ...lex LINE T1 line connection RJ 45 T1 1 5M 24ch CONSOLE Interface for Maintenance Console RJ 45 serial connection CONSOLE cable RJ 45 RS 232C is used MUSIC External hold tone con nection φ3 5 mini jack monaural type MG T1 SIP Card B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC PWR lamp ALM lamp ON LINE lamp LB lamp MUSIC connector RESET switch LINE connector for T1 line RJ 45 Ether...

Page 1510: ...rom opposite party OFF Normal operation Ether 100M Green Lights when transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Remains OFF when transmission speed is 10 Mbps LINK Green Lights when establishing Layer 1 link on IP side Physically connected to IP network Flash Flashes in 0 2 second cycle during sending receiving IP packets OFF Layer 1 link is not established on IP side LINE B Green Lights when using two or...

Page 1511: ... proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω As MG T1 SIP has PSTN interface if the line cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage on MG T1 SIP and AC power cable with out Ground connection NAME FUNCTION AC power inlet Connected to AC DC adapter with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft AC 100V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 120V 50 60 Hz 10 AC 230...

Page 1512: ...elephony Server Note 2 The packet related to SP internal control port does not flow over the network Function TP side SP side LAN Port default Port Number default Command to Change Setting Port Number default Command to Change Setting TP SP Note 1 Registration LAN1 3456 ADTM Port Number only 22000 Cannot be changed iLP PM LAN1 60130 ADTM Port Number only 64105 ALIDL SP Internal Control Port Note 2...

Page 1513: ... TX Unshielded Twisted pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100 m Line Cable For the connection to T1 carrier use a φ0 5 Twisted pair Cable for DSU with an RJ 45 Modular Jack CONSOLE Cable RJ 45 RS 232C serial cable for using maintenance console Audio Cable Microphone output for using external hold tone source φ3 5 mini jack monaural type optional 2 Firmware Program In...

Page 1514: ...nd during MG T1 SIP is in operation the channels on the corresponding trunk must be once deleted and reassigned by AMGIL command So communication is dis connected on the corresponding channels while data changing 8 The table below shows the supported signaling format on T1 interface Note that the following types of connection are NOT supported FXO Loop Start DID Immediate Start Delay Start TIE CAM...

Page 1515: ...a Programming Manual for the detailed explanation of encryption fea ture on MG T1 SIP 18 MG T1 SIP does not support FCCS features available by PA PRTC 1 5M DTI circuit card 19 MG T1 SIP is compatible with FCCS Cluster feature See L 55 Location Diversity in Data Program ming Manual Business 20 MG T1 SIP is in charge of the timing processing for outgoing guard timer Guard timer is assigned by ARTD A...

Page 1516: ...b Select MG T1 SIP under the category of SIP Media Gateway Connection status is displayed for each virtual speech channel PH tab Specify the LENS of SP PHI The number of registration login to SP PHI is displayed counting on a virtual speech channel basis DIPI to display IP equipment information Select MG T1 SIP under the category of SIP Media Gateway DPHL to display the number of registration logi...

Page 1517: ...ormation of MG Select the radio button Media Gateway Information and specify the PH LENS Information is displayed for each virtual speech channel DPTR to display the line capacity and the number of license MG T1 SIP is counted on the MG PRI s license group ...

Page 1518: ... slot on 1U MPC STEP 1 Insert MG T1 SIP to 1U MPC STEP 2 Secure the MG T1 SIP to 1U MPC fixing two screws on right and left sides ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required MG T1 SIP Card SCA 24DTIA bracket to mount on 19 inch rack 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE...

Page 1519: ...on shows the cable connection to the MG T1 SIP MG T1 SIP provides the following interfaces Power Supply Ground connection Serial Port Connection to Maintenance Console Connection to Audio Equipment for external music on hold Connection to LAN Connection to T1 carrier ...

Page 1520: ... terminal connected over the PSTN and tuning the output level of external hold tone source Input impedance from the external hold tone source needs to be within the ranges of 8Ω 50kΩ Make sure not to exceed this range Note 2 If audio equipment has a ground terminal be sure to take proper connection to grounding of audio equip ment Note 3 Do not connect LAN and T1 line here These cables are connect...

Page 1521: ...Connect the AC power cable to AC Power Inlet on the rear panel of 1U MPC Fix the AC power cable with the stopper MG T1 SIP Card SCA 24DTIA Connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate AC supply REAR PACT AC power cable stopper connected to AC Power supply ...

Page 1522: ...tning directly the lightning might cause damage to MG T1 SIP and AC power cable with out Ground connection STEP 3 Connect a maintenance terminal PC to CONSOLE connector using CONSOLE cable The following shows the case of connection to CONSOLE connector of MG T1 SIP Card SCA 24DTIA Note T1 line and LAN cables are connected in Section 16 3 Startup MG T1 SIP and Basic Tests Do not connect these cable...

Page 1523: ...PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console 1 One Time Password Assignment 2 Selection whether to use DHCP DNS server 3 Network Data Assignment STEP 4 Configuration Command Assignment 1 Connection between MG T1 SIP and LAN 2 Connection between MG T1 SIP and T1 line STEP 5 Cable Co...

Page 1524: ...Control Packet ICMP etc 2 Console Control 3 VPN Authentication H323 etc 4 RTP 5 FTP HTTP etc 6 Low Other packets Not guaranteed Available CONNECTING EQUIPMENT AVAIL ABILITY DESCRIPTION MC Note 1 Not recommended because Voice quality may be degraded due to multiple conversion Delay may be increased due to excessive jitter buffer insertion COT Note 2 Voice speech and FAX relay are available However ...

Page 1525: ...ower than minimum DTMF detection level 27 0 dBm at MG T1 SIP because of Line Loss be tween two switches IP Network Connection between STN A and STN B cannot be guaranteed PSTN STN B STN A MC MG Line Loss The signal can be attenuated here 2 wire If input level at MG T1 SIP is lower than minimum DTMF detection level DTMF relay cannot be guaranteed PSTN STN B COT LDT LC LDT LC STN A MG If input level...

Page 1526: ...is manual The expla nation of PHs including SP PHI is also there 3 MG T1 SIP Data Assignment STEP 1 ARTD Assignment of Route Class Data Assign the Route Class data of Virtual Speech Channel Any template is not prepared exclusively for MG T1 SIP As well as the route class data setting for PA PRTC 1 5M DIT card assign each parameter depending on the specification and services of the connecting T1 ca...

Page 1527: ...device s data on the same HW Note Do not assign the trunk data to even numbered MG U 0 and G 00 It is not available for MG T1 SIP Note Groups 24 and later are not available Note Be sure to assign route data by ARTD ARTI in advance before assigning trunk data by ATRK PIR HW4 HW0 HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX T...

Page 1528: ...Internal hold tone 1 Internal hold tone 2 External music on hold input gain adjustment 0 15 default 0 Country Code North America Law of A D conversion μ law is automatically displayed when North America is selected on country code STEP 6 AMGVL Assignment of Media Gateway Voice Control Data for LDM When this command is not assigned data setting on AIVCL command turns effective Assign the voice cont...

Page 1529: ...time password Note To perform authentication feature assign the same one time password on MG T1 SIP by configuration command At initial startup MG T1 SIP will ask you to input the one time password for authentication Data Deletion Deletion must be operated in the reverse order of assignment Make sure to delete in the order AMGIL ATRK Confirm there is no data left in AMGIL before deleting ATRK REST...

Page 1530: ...he Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Require...

Page 1531: ...tton on the front panel of MG T1 SIP to re start the card and start its boot program STEP 2 Make sure the LED indicates normal status PWR LED lights green Boot program automatically starts ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT REAR Turn ON the power switch UP FRONT B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC PWR lamp ...

Page 1532: ...r authentication at initial startup Enter the same pass word with the one entered in SIP server by ASECL command As long as you don t enter a one time password you cannot move on to the next step STEP 2 Type usrConsole following the OS prompt and press ENTER key DP OK MG ID xxxxxx Boot program version SPxxxx SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A xx xx xx xx Main program version SPxxxx MG DTI PROG A xx xx xx xx H...

Page 1533: ...e setting 2 DNS server enable disable setting STEP 6 Assign other network data according to the setting of DHCP server and DNS server See SETUP SP command in Section 16 4 5 How to Use Maintenance Command for the detail assignment procedure When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used and DNS server is used When DHCP server is NOT used and DNS server is NOT used usrConsole MG Maintenance c...

Page 1534: ...e to be prepared in DHCP server side Note 1 IP address of Default Gateway IP address of SIP server Note 2 Check the number of IP addresses saved in DHCP server is sufficient so as to get IP address of MG T1 SIP anytime Note 1 DHCP option setting is as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate e g SP1 Data IP address Array Checked Code 162 Note 2 Abo...

Page 1535: ...ay Host name of SIP server Communication speed of LAN interface Set the following data on DNS server side IP address of SIP server Note 1 Note When DHCP is set to ENABLE IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect Be sure to assign SET DHCP DISABLE before starting the IP address setting Note 1 About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tio...

Page 1536: ...teway IP address and port number of SIP server Note 1 Host name of SIP server can be skipped Communication speed of LAN interface Note When DHCP is set to ENABLE IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect Be sure to assign SET DHCP DISABLE before starting the IP address setting Note 1 About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tions in IN...

Page 1537: ...y entering REBOOT command Turning OFF and ON Pressing RESET button also reset the MG T1 SIP Note MG ID MAC Address of MG T1 SIP is displayed after rebooting The MG ID needs to be assigned in AMGIL command MG T1 SIP SETUP T1 MG T1 SIP SAVE CONFIG Don t power off in progress Do you need save Y N y Erase start Erase OK Write start Write OK Configuration data has been saved Re starting is required for...

Page 1538: ...P Check the D lamp on the upper right of LINE connector flashes steady lights in green when connection succeed ed MG T1 SIP Card SCA 24DTIA Ether RJ45 Connector Pin Accommodation 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Send 2 Send 3 Receive 6 Receive 4 5 7 8 are not used FRONT B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 100M LINK CONSOLE RESET MUSIC Maintenance Console PC ON LINE lamp Ether connector LINE RJ 45 Connector Pin Acc...

Page 1539: ...sh 240INT Flashes fast when receiving loopback mode request from opposite party OFF Normal operation Ether 100M Green Lights when transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Remains OFF when transmission speed is 10 Mbps LINK Green Lights when establishing Layer 1 link on IP side Physically connected to IP network Flash Flashes in 0 2 second cycle during sending receiving IP packets OFF Layer 1 link is not...

Page 1540: ...ng green No MG T1 SIP may not be physically connected to LAN Check the LAN cable between MG T1 SIP and networking device Also check the power of Switching HUB and Routers are turned ON Check that correct cable is used Use the Straight through cable Check that the cable is not damaged Test the continuity of the LAN cable Replace the LAN cable or the network device if the problem is still not cleare...

Page 1541: ...tween MDF and MG T1 SIP MDF and DSU Check whether the line cable is not damaged Test the continuity of the line cable Check the data assignment of the Telephony Server side and MG T1 SIP side Telephony Server Is the data assignment on each PCPro command correct MG T1 SIP Check the configuration data assigned from the maintenance console Lights green Go on to STEP 5 STEP 5 Speech test through MG T1...

Page 1542: ...ent B lamp on LINE connector lights flashes Flashes Only one channel is currently used Lights Two or more channels are currently used Call originated terminated normally Call quality is adequate Connection test is completed 2 Alarm Information Check Check the Alarm Lamps If the red lamp lights search the cause of fault and perform the appropriate operations Check the system message 1 Display the s...

Page 1543: ...ayload Loopback All the channels 24ch are looped back to T1 side on the speech path control part of MG T1 SIP Note The difference between Line Loopback and Payload Loopback is All the processes in Line Loopback follow the timing of T1 side There are some processes following the timing of system side in Payload Loopback In other words bit error may occur when the system does not synchronize with T1...

Page 1544: ...ower off MG T1 SIP and disconnect it from the network STEP 3 Connect PC to MG T1 SIP by using CONSOLE cable RS 232C RJ 45 STEP 4 Power on MG T1 SIP STEP 5 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 6 Select Transfer Capture File STEP 7 Send File screen is displayed Specify a file name to be saved and then clic...

Page 1545: ...the TFTP server program Data Assignment on Serial Console STEP 7 Power on MG T1 SIP STEP 8 Activate HyperTerminal and set the following Bit per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parity None Stop bit 1bit Flow control None STEP 9 After a prompt is displayed enter usrConsole STEP 10 After a prompt MG T1 SIP is displayed enter get configdata TFTP s IP Address to download configuration data into MG T1 SIP...

Page 1546: ... SIP by entering reboot STEP 13 Exit the HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit Confirmation of MG T1 SIP STEP 14 Connect the MG T1 SIP to the network STEP 15 Confirm that MG T1 SIP is normally registered in system after reboot Use the DISD com mand in PCPro For more information refer to Operation and Maintenance STEP 16 Check that calls via MG T1 SIP can be made ...

Page 1547: ...hony Server by using Ping command Make sure that TFTP client is able to connect to FTP server Data Assignment on TFTP Server STEP 1 Create a folder to back up configuration data STEP 2 Start the TFTP server program STEP 3 Assign the folder as root folder and then permit write and read behavior of this directory For more information refer to the appropriate manual attached to the TFTP server progra...

Page 1548: ...es for download you can specify them as you like STEP 6 After completing the above click the Set button Data Assignment on Telnet PC STEP 7 Start a command prompt and enter telnet MG T1 SIP s IP Address to con nect MG T1 SIP via Telnet STEP 8 Log in to the target MG T1 SIP by entering the userID and the password which are set in the ATUD command STEP 9 After a prompt is displayed enter usrConsole ...

Page 1549: ...et Input any letter for USER LEVEL because MG T1 SIP does not use USERLEVEL For VALID TIME input a total of time required for completing this procedures Note A user ID and a password are temporary ones for download you can specify them as you like STEP 6 After completing the above click the Set button Data Assignment on Telnet PC STEP 7 Start a command prompt and enter telnet MG T1 SIP s IP Addres...

Page 1550: ...ating the upload to TFTP server is completed normally STEP 12 To reflect the configuration data that is downloaded from TFTP server save it by entering save configdata and reboot MG T1 SIP by entering reboot STEP 13 Exit the HyperTerminal by selecting File Exit Confirmation of MG T1 SIP STEP 14 Confirm that MG T1 SIP is normally registered in system after reboot Use the DISD com mand For more info...

Page 1551: ...IP with LAN cable crossover and CONSOLE cable RS 232C RJ 45 both STEP 3 Put the firmware files for example SP3926 and mgdtimwlist txt for upgrade in the root folder of TFTP server Serial Console TFTP Server IP Address 10 41 1 250 IP Address 10 41 1 100 Note Note Note TFTP server and Serial Console both can be performed by single Personal Computer Console Cable LAN Cable Firmware 1 Control MG T1 SI...

Page 1552: ... 11 The current settings of MG T1 SIP are displayed and then the screen asks you to input TFTP Server IP Address Enter the TFTP server IP address STEP 12 The current settings of MG T1 SIP and TFTP server are displayed make sure the settings If you need to modify the settings select a number 1 4 to modify the item If all the settings are correct enter y STEP 13 Download menu is displayed and then s...

Page 1553: ...IP Check that you can hear RBT STEP 24 Receive a call via the MG T1 SIP and confirm that you can talk to each other STEP 25 After all the tasks are completed write down label the firmware version in the back of the MG T1 SIP For example 2A is indicated for Version 2 3A is indicated for Version 3 dispver Boot program version Main program version TC version DSP kernel version DSP program version Ton...

Page 1554: ... advance MG T1 SIP is already registered to system and it is operating normally Make sure the connectivity in the following Make sure that PCPro is able to log on to the Telephony Server Check the connectivity from FTP server to the Telephony Server by using Ping command Make sure that FTP client is able to connect to FTP server IP Network FTP Server PCPro SYSTEM 3 Download firmware via FTP Firmwa...

Page 1555: ... Setup Input the IP address of FTP server Input Login Name and Password for logging in to FTP server if required Select an item of Parallel in Download Method Confirm MG T1 SIP is displayed in Firmware File Name If it is not in the list create an item by clicking the Insert button Set the following attributes and then click the OK but ton After completing the above click the Insert button located ...

Page 1556: ...is completed click the Close button In the main screen click the Exit button to close the ATDL command STEP 10 To confirm the firmware activate the DIPI command The file name is indicated in the following STEP 11 Select Media Converter in Functionality Type and then click the Execute button STEP 12 Confirm that the firmwares in the appropriate ones are upgraded Confirmation of MG T1 SIP STEP 13 To...

Page 1557: ...ct a PC to MG T1 SIP using CONSOLE cable and run terminal software e g HyperTerminal on the PC Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None STEP 2 Enter usrConsole after the OS prompt STEP 3 MG T1 SIP s prompt appears MG T1 SIP _ to CONSOLE connector Maintenance Console PC B D ALM PWR ON LINE LB LINE Ether 1...

Page 1558: ...55 255 255 0 1 2 3 4 1 Command 2 Sub Command 3 Parameter 1 4 Parameter 2 Note The number of parameters to be specified is different depending on the command MG T1 SIP SET SIGNALING_QOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS TOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 DELAY 0 1 0 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 COST 0 1 0 0 Signaling QoS setting succeeded In order to make a setup reflect and keep re starting is required after saving a configuratio...

Page 1559: ...s in band DTMF relay page 1315 5 E_T_WAITTIME Assigns waiting time before starting echo canceller training page 1315 6 EC_TRAINING Assigns echo canceller training page 1315 7 FAXERRORDETECT Assigns the FAX switching time page 1316 8 HC_RCV_TIMER Assigns the time recognized as timeout in receiving health check page 1316 9 INTERFACE Assigns the communication speed and mode for LAN interface page 131...

Page 1560: ...ult Gateway of MG T1 SIP page 1324 11 ONE_TIME_PASS Displays the one time password page 1325 12 OWN_NAME Displays the host name of MG T1 SIP page 1325 13 LOOPBACK Displays the loopback settings page 1325 14 SIGNALING_PORT_ NO Displays the Signaling Port Number for SP PHI page 1325 15 SIGNALING_PORT_ QOS Displays the QoS setting for SIP signaling session page 1325 16 SIPSV_IPADDRESS Displays the ne...

Page 1561: ...press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when executing help function regarding set and set ipaddress History In the command line of maintenance command cursor key UP and DOWN operation shows history function You can edit the input parameters using Back Space key and change the parameter MG T1 SIP set DEFAULTROUTE DHCP DNS_SW Setting Default Gateway Setting DHCP Setting DNS MG T1 SIP...

Page 1562: ... F Setting DNS server enable disable MG T1 SIP MG T1 SIP SETUP SP Enter SETUP SP following the prompt DHCP Interface set Current DHCP Interface ENABLE The current setting is displayed Change DHCP Interface Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed set ting Y Change the setting N Remain the current setting Q Exit this setting Input new DHCP Interface E enable D disable d Spe...

Page 1563: ...5 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 F Setting host name of MG T1 SIP Input new DNS IP Address 10 40 1 150 Enter the IP address of DNS server e g 10 40 1 150 Required when DHCP server is D dis able and DNS server is E enable IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 The current setting is displayed Current Subnetmask 0 0 0 0 Change IP Address and Subnetmask Y change N cur rent Q quit y Asked wheth...

Page 1564: ...dress Host Name set Current SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name 1 2 19 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5060 5060 5060 5060 The current setting of the Telephony Server information IP address port number and host name is displayed Change SIP Server Information Y change N cur rent Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y Change th...

Page 1565: ...ent LAN Speed auto The current setting is displayed Change LAN Speed Y change N current Q quit y Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y Change the setting N Remain the current setting Q Exit this setting Input new Speed 1 AUTO 2 100M 3 10M 2 Select the communication speed of LAN inter face 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100Mbps fixed mode 3 10Mbps fixed mode Input new DUPLEX F full H half f...

Page 1566: ...EC NLP Mode 0 27 Clock Signal Mode 0 2 G 704 Mode 0 4 Remote Alarm Signaling 0 6 Alarm Release Time 0 8 Line Signal 0 10 BOM MOS Operation 0 12 4K Data Link Mode 0 14 SSD Remote Start 0 16 Call Collision Processing 0 18 ACK Detect Time 0 20 Send Signaling Pattern 0 22 Send Signaling A Logic 0 24 EC NLP Control 0 26 EC 2100Hz Detect 0 28 Idle Code Sending 0 Setting parameters and current setting ar...

Page 1567: ...4 Remote Alarm Signaling 0 6 Alarm Release Time 0 8 Line Signal 0 10 BOM MOS Operation 0 12 4K Data Link Mode 0 14 SSD Remote Start 0 16 Call Collision Processing 0 18 ACK Detect Time 0 20 Send Signaling Pattern 0 22 Send Signaling A Logic 0 24 EC NLP Control 0 26 EC 2100Hz Detect 0 28 Idle Code Sending 0 Setting parameters and their current setting are listed Change Optional setting Y change N cu...

Page 1568: ... Training Feature mode of Echo Canceller be gins Echo Canceller Feature is used to prevent initial Echo ranging from 500 to 1ms occurred in the be ginning of speech to the Telephony Server Note To make this assignment effective execute the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance command 6 SETΔEC_TRAININGΔP1 MG T1 SIP SET DNS_SW DNS Interface Enable Disable DISABLE ENABLE Enter the ...

Page 1569: ...r switch or HUB etc This data can be set also in SETUP SP com mand MG T1 SIP SET EC_TRAINING ON P1 Specify the following ON Training function is valid OFF Training function is invalid ONCE Training function is valid only once default EC Training Feature setting succeeded Result is displayed MG T1 SIP SET FAXERRORDETECT 1 P1 Specify the available time to switch to FAX 0 FAX switching is unavailable...

Page 1570: ...rk address cannot be assigned as IP address of MG T1 SIP IP address 172 16 0 0 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Example 3 Broadcast address cannot be assigned as IP address of MG T1 SIP IP address 192 168 1 255 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Example 4 Broadcast address cannot be assigned as IP address of MG T1 SIP IP address 172 16 255 255 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Note 1 To make this assignment effective execute...

Page 1571: ...es 1 Local Loopback T1 line interface part of MG T1 SIP sends back all the channels to LAN side The counter office de tects circuit failure AIS MG T1 SIP SET OWN_NAME mgt1 nec com P1 Enter the host name of MG T1 SIP in full domain format Max 63 bytes of alphanumeric characters period and hyphen e g mgt1 nec com Own name setting succeeded Result is displayed MG T1 SIP SET LOOPBACK Loopback 0 OFF 1 ...

Page 1572: ... selected in Type of Service TOS or Differentiated Service DIFFSERV either F To directly enter the setting value When P1 TOS is entered When P1 DIFFSERV is entered MG T1 SIP SET SIGNALING_PORT_NO 5060 P1 Specify a port number to be used for SP PHI 1024 65535 Port Number default 5060 Signaling port number setting succeeded Result is displayed MG T1 SIP SET SIGNALING_QOS TOS 0xC0 P1 Select the type ...

Page 1573: ...ed 0x00 Result is shown MG T1 SIP SET SIGNALING_QOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS TOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Specify the precedence in IP network 0 7 the precedence in IP network Default 6 DELAY 0 1 0 0 Enable Disable Low Delay Precedence in IP network 0 Disabled Default 1 Enabled THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Enable Disable Throughput Precedence in IP network 0 Disabled Default 1 Enabled RELIABILITY 0 1 0 0 Enable Disab...

Page 1574: ...ny Server to be used IP Address 10 41 1 150 Enter the IP address of SIP server Note 1 e g 10 41 1 150 default 0 0 0 0 Port Number 5060 Enter the port number to be used for SIP server 1024 65535 Port Number Default 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N y Select whether to use host name Y N Host Name SVR1 nec com Enter the host name in the full domain format within 63 byte of alphanumerics period and hyph...

Page 1575: ...he settings for VLAN In MG T1 SIP one VLAN can be created per network When VLAN is enabled physical LAN becomes invalid Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand MG T1 SIP SET SMOOTH_PAD 2 P1 Enter a value of Smooth PAD mode OFF Set Smooth PAD to OFF 1 2dBm default 2 5dBm 3 2dBm 4 0dBm 5 4dBm Smooth PAD Mode setting succeeded Re...

Page 1576: ...n band DTMF relay MG T1 SIP SET WARNING_TONE 0 P1 Specify a set value 0 No Warning Tone default 1 Not Used 2 Not Used 3 Send Warning Tone Warning Tone Control setting succeeded Result is displayed MG T1 SIP SHOW CONFIGDATA IP OWN_ADDR 10 41 1 100 SUBNET_MASK255 255 255 0 DEFAULT_GATEWAY 10 41 1 254 The current setting is displayed MG T1 SIP SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE The current setting is displayed...

Page 1577: ...RFACE This command is used to display the connection mode of LAN interface 10 SHOWΔIPADDRESS This command is used to display the IP address of LAN interface MG T1 SIP SHOW E_T_WAITTIME EC Training Start Wait Time is 10 The current setting is displayed MG T1 SIP SHOW EC_TRAINING EC Training Feature is ON The current setting is displayed MG T1 SIP SHOW FAXERRORDETECT FAX Enable Timer is 1 minute The...

Page 1578: ...gnaling MG T1 SIP SHOW ONE_TIME_PASS One time password is 123456 The current setting is displayed MG T1 SIP SHOW OWN_NAME Own Name mgt1 nec com The current setting is displayed MG T1 SIP SHOW LOOPBACK Loopback Setting is 1 Local Loopback The current setting is displayed When Loopback 0 OFF When Loopback 1 Local Loopback When Loopback 2 Line Loopback When Loopback 3 Payload Loopback MG T1 SIP SIGNA...

Page 1579: ...mmand is used to display the start port of RTP MG T1 SIP SHOW SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server IP Address Port Number Host Name The current setting is displayed 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 17 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 0 0 19 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 ...

Page 1580: ...ss Encryption SIP Encrypt RTP Encrypt Current Sipsv Address Registration Status SP 00 00 4c a4 00 01 Up 100Mbps Full Enable Disable 10 41 1 1 255 255 255 0 10 41 1 254 Enable 10 41 1 150 Enable 10 41 1 100 Offline The current setting is displayed LINE B 0 00 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 0 06 0 07 0 08 0 09 0 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 16 0 17 0 18 0 19 0 20 0 21 0 22 0 23 0 LINE ALM 4 PMC 0 FRM 0 M...

Page 1581: ... on the setting for G704_MODE and 4KDATA_LINK Type CR to continue A CR to show all Q CR to stop 11 Haul Mode 0 Short 1 Long 12 4K Data Link Mode 0 User Side 1 Network Side 13 Simultaneous Seizure 0 Control 1 Not Control 14 SSD Remote Start 0 Active 1 Not Active 15 Layer 1 Alarm Report 0 Enable 1 Disable 16 Call Collision Processing 0 Not Used 1 Used 17 ACK Detect Guard Time 0 48ms 1 64ms 2 80ms 3 ...

Page 1582: ...A Boot program SP3839 SH7751R CBOOT 1 PROG A 03 00 00 00 Firmware NC SP3926 MG DTI PROG A 01 00 00 00 Firmware TC TC Program 01 00 00 00 AC490 kernel Ver Revision Patch PatchNumber Reserved Month Day year Name 01 07 06 05 09 2005 AC49kernel AC490 MainProgram Revision Patch PatchNumber Reserved Month Day year Name 01 07 08 pp 02 06 02 2005 AC490012ae3 S AC490 Driver Ver SubVersion Date Comment 107 ...

Page 1583: ...N ID If omitted all the VLAN are displayed DEVICE ID COS IPADDRESS SUBNETMASK VLAN1 1 0 10 123 123 123 255 255 255 0 MG T1 SIP SHOW WARNING_TONE Warning Tone Control of IP Network is 3 IP DTI side MG T1 SIP PING 10 41 1 100 P1 Specify IP address PING 10 41 1 100 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms PING 10 41 1 100 icmp_seq 1 time 0 ms PING 10 41 1 100 icmp_seq 2 time 0 ms PING 10 41 1 100 icmp_seq 3 time 0 ms 10...

Page 1584: ... off in progress Do you need save Y N Y Y The data is saved N The data is not saved Erase start Erase OK Write start Write OK Configuration data has been saved Re starting is required for making a setup reflect Result is displayed MG T1 SIP GET CONFIGDATA 10 41 1 20 P1 Enter the IP address of TFTP server after the command name The download of configuration data was successful Result is displayed M...

Page 1585: ...try will not be effective In this case press Ctrl C keys together to display OS prompts MG T1 SIP REBOOT Do you need reboot Y N Y Y Reboot N Not reboot MG T1 SIP EXIT Returns to OS prompt MG T1 SIP EXIT Configuration data was changed Don t power off in progress y Save and Exit n Exit without saving c Cancel y Save the file and exit the program n Exit the command without saving c Cancel the command...

Page 1586: ...CONFIG Warning This command initializes the configuration data This deletes the current setting Recommend to back up the setting Command execute or not Y N y y Initialize n Not initialize Initialize authentication key or not Y N y y Clear authentication key Initialize n Not clear authentication key Command complete You need to setup configuration data ...

Page 1587: ...ess form is incorrect An entered IP address is incorrect in the input format VLAN ID is no more registered Registered VLAN IDs exceeded a maximum Sub command is missing Sub command is necessary when the command is entered Invalid parameter value The parameter is out of range Invalid sub command The sub command is incorrect No response from CPU TC There is no response from other CPUs Command is abn...

Page 1588: ...cts an IP station located on LAN with a SIP terminal based on RFC3261 located on the WAN side SIP network and maintain voice quality For details on service conditions and office data assignment see Multiple Number Service MG SIP M 113 in SV8500 Data Programming Manual Business The following table shows the number of available channels of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 60ms G 711 128ch ...

Page 1589: ...cations Remarks Connection terminal on front panel CONSOLE connector RJ 45 x 1 For maintenance LAN connectors 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T x 2 100BASE TX 10BASE T x 2 Not used CF slot x 1 USB2 0 x 1 Not used LINK ACT SPEED Ether1 Ether2 1 2 3 4 ON PWR LOAD ON LINE Ether1 Connector Ether2 Connector PWR Lamp LOAD Lamp OnLine Lamp CPU PWR Switch CONSOLE Connector USB2 0 Connector CF Slot MODE Switc...

Page 1590: ...accessing to a CF card ONLINE lamp ON green Registration is finished Flash green Abnormal state No configuration no Music Tone file OFF Registration is not finished LAN connectors Ether1 Port for LAN cable connection at LAN side Ether2 Port for LAN cable connection at WAN side Not used when using only a single port SPEED lamp Ether1 2 ON yellow 1Gbps connection ON green 100Mbps connection OFF 10Mb...

Page 1591: ...e time when MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG is working CONSOLE connector Connected with a maintenance terminal PC Note 3 CONSOLE CABLE RJ45 RS 232C serial connection not in cluded in package is used Part Description Remarks AC power inlet Connected with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft Fix the cable with the stopper to prevent it from falling out PWR switch Power swit...

Page 1592: ...s the cabling procedure Follow the following to connect cables Step1 Plug an attached AC power cable into the AC power inlet on the rear panel of an MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG fix the AC power cable with the stopper Rear Panel Note To remove the AC cable push the hook of the stopper outward and take off the fixing belt Push the tab of the stopper and slide the stopper away from the power inlet Step2 C...

Page 1593: ...SIP network in the same segment connect a LAN cable only to a connector for LAN Cable connection is completed Move on to the next section Startup and Installation Test LINK ACT SPEED Ether1 Ether2 PWR LOAD ON LINE Plug a cable to Ether1 for LAN connection Plug a cable to Ether2 for WAN connection 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T LAN Cable ...

Page 1594: ...nd connecting maintenance terminal PC Activate Windows on the maintenance terminal PC click Start point to Programs point to Ac cessories point to Communications and click HyperTerminal Note Connection Description window is opened Enter a name whatever you like here MGSIP as an example in Name field Enter OK Note Terminal software is necessary for assigning configuration data to IP devices For Win...

Page 1595: ...128 MG 128SIPMGG Note You can use any icon and name Connect To window is opened Choose a COM port which is connected to MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG in Connect using box Enter OK Note 7 Note 7 It depends on the PC MGSIP MGSIP ...

Page 1596: ...VOL 2 1343 MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Port Settings tab opens Set the values as the following figure shows ...

Page 1597: ...ear Panel Front Panel After MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG is activated the maintenance terminal PC displays mgsip login on the screen Note If an MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG is connected with a maintenance terminal PC after activat ed mgsip login does not appear Press Enter key to display mgsip login Now the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG is activated mgsip login PWR Switch LINK ACT SPEED Ether 1 Ether 2 PWR LOAD ON L...

Page 1598: ...o make this assignment effective it is required to execute the REBOOT command to save the configuration and restart the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Note 8 When other than 0 6 is entered for the template pattern number Not used is displayed 17 3 2 Setting of IP Address Here explains procedures for setting the number of ports that MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG uses and IP ad dresses and subnet masks for each po...

Page 1599: ...ork sides are assigned in the same segment use Ether1 only as shown below If you select one port in the number of port setting Ether2 setting is not necessary MG SIP set ipaddress Do you use one port only Y N n Enter n when two ports are used Ether 1 Ether 1 LAN Input IP Address default 0 0 0 0 172 16 0 1 Assign the IP address Default 0 0 0 0 for Ether 1 Input Subnet mask default 0 0 0 0 255 255 2...

Page 1600: ...t effective it is required to execute the REBOOT command to save the configuration and restart the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG MG SIP set drsaddress Primary DRS Setting Configures Primary DRS Input IP address default 0 0 0 0 172 16 253 1 Assign the IP address of the Tele phony Server Default 0 0 0 0 Input Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 Assign the UDP port number of the Telephony Server Defaul...

Page 1601: ...t 0 Input SIP server IP Address default 0 0 0 0 192 168 100 100 Assign the IP address of the proxy server Default 0 0 0 0 Input SIP server Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 5060 Assign the port number of the proxy server Default 5060 Select SIP server Router type Select a Strict router or Loose router for the proxy server Default 0 0 Strict default 1 Loose 0 Strict router 1 Loose router Input 0 ...

Page 1602: ...is used to register to the SIP server Display example Note Pressing the Enter key can skip the item To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the REBOOT command to save the configura tion and restart the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Input 1 Select FQDN 1 Input Fully Qualified Domain Name default 0 MAX63 strings Assign the FQDN of the proxy server in maximum of 63 characters Default 0 I...

Page 1603: ...uration data or not If you select Y here the default values are applied to the configuration data MG SIP reboot Do you want to save Config data Y N y Select if you want to save the configuration data y save the configuration data Note 9 n do not save the configuration data If other than the above is selected the following message is displayed Reboot command was interrupted Do you want to reboot MG...

Page 1604: ...128SIPMGG online For a one port configuration only LAN1 connection makes MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG online Step6 Checking the lamp status of LINK and SPEED at Ether1 and Ether2 of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG If the connection is established the following LINK lamps of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG will light green in a few minutes Note For a one port configuration LINK lamp at Ether 2 connector does not light Eth...

Page 1605: ...e the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG is in normal operation by the following procedure Step1 When the configuration settings are completed reboot the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG by using reboot command Step2 Make sure the following message appears on the Maintenance Console after rebooting Step3 Make sure the registration status of the Telephony Server network and SIP network by us ing show status command in t...

Page 1606: ...the LINK lamp on the SIP network side lighting Are the settings for the SIP server correct If no message appears within 3 minutes it is estimated that no communication has been established between the Telephony Server and the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Check the LAN cable connecting LAN Te lephony Server and the IP address of DRS Registration is OK DRS IP address 172 16 253 1 Note For the detailed inf...

Page 1607: ...VOL 2 1354 MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG 17 4 Operation and Maintenance This section explains MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG operation and maintenance ...

Page 1608: ...the system Please replace a cooling FAN every five years to avoid it even though the cooling FAN still works normally Replacement Procedure Note You can replace cooling FANs as the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG remains on Step1 Use a Phillips driver to loosen a screw at the left side of the FAN cover on the rear panel of an MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Step2 Slide the FAN cover to the left to remove ATTENTION ...

Page 1609: ...e time Step4 Attach new FANs perform the opposite procedure of removing Note When attaching pay attention to the direction of a FAN The label on a FAN must face toward the outside of an MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG See the following figure Test After Attaching Check if the replaced FANs work properly If either of FANs does not work properly check the cabling CAUTION Attach the FAN in the direction as de...

Page 1610: ...prompt is displayed on a screen waiting for a user input When a user inputs a char acter string the system analyzes the input data and displays a reply message Inputting commands and sub commands are necessary but whether inputting a parameter is necessary or not depends on com mands Some commands do not have any parameters The following figure shows an example of input ting a command a sub comman...

Page 1611: ...ted MG SIP set drs_qos Input type 1 IP Precedence 2 DiffServ 3 ToS 1 When IP PRECEDENCE 1 is selected Input following parameters Precedence default 5 0 7 5 Specify the precedence in an IP network Default 5 0 7 Low High Delay default 0 0 1 0 Specify the low delay priority in an IP net work 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified Throughput default 0 0 1 0 Specify the throughput priority in an IP net wo...

Page 1612: ...work when dialing 184 186 3 another_keynumber C Assigns additional three pilot numbers other than the one registered by set keynumber command 4 auth C Assigns Digest authentication information 5 auth_header C Assigns whether to enable disable the cache function of authentication header 6 call_hold C Assigns whether to enable disable the MG based call retention 7 call_id_relay C Assign Call ID noti...

Page 1613: ...wledgment PRACK information RFC3262 37 pre_negotiation_port_ no C Assigns the UDP port receiving packets for voice control path 38 privacy_pattern C Assigns the privacy pattern 39 registration_port_no C Assigns the UDP port number that receives DRS packets 40 reg_interval C Assigns the waiting time to retry after registration failure 41 response_table C Assigns response table selection 42 rtp_path...

Page 1614: ...Assigns Multi path Switch Note 1 61 name_display C Enable disable Name Display service 62 softdsp Note 2 C Note 3 Assigns the setting of A law μ law conversion feature and PAD value show Commands to Display the Contents of Configuration Data SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 arp Displays the ARP table 2 config Displays the configuration data 3 interface Displays the link and setting state of Ether conne...

Page 1615: ...ND MUST FUNCTION 1 parameter enter the ping destination IPv4 address ping command for IPv4 address ping6 Command to Use the ping for IPv6 address SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 parameter enter the ping destination IPv6 address ping command for IPv6 address traceroute Command to Use the traceroute SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 traceroute command help or Command to Use the Command Help SUB COMMAND MUST F...

Page 1616: ...ion to be used on the Ether2 port by a configuration command When SIP server exists When SIP server does not exist Telephony Server Router LAN side WAN SIP network side SIP Network IP terminal SIP server SIP terminal IPv4 network IPv6 network IPv4 communication IPv6 communication MG SIP128 MG128 SIPMGG IPv4 network IPv6 network IPv4 network Telephony Server MG SIP128 MG128 SIPMGG LAN side WAN SIP ...

Page 1617: ...8SIPMGG con nected Step8 Set other commands if needed Step9 Execute the reboot command to save the configuration and restart the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Note 4 If you change the IP version by set ip_version command you also need to change the following command settings to activate IPv6 function After those settings execute the reboot command to save the configuration and restart the MG SIP128 MG 12...

Page 1618: ...r router This function does not support allocating fixed IP addresses manually and distributing IP addresses from DHCPv6 serv er 3 When IPv6 function is in service IPv4 packets are discarded When a SIP request for IPv6 packet has any IPv4 address in its message body using SDP MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG responses to the request with returning 488 Not Acceptable Here A warning code is not added to 488 N...

Page 1619: ...nction is active MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG obtains the address within 30 minutes If the SC Health Check is performed MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG may reboot itself while attempting to obtain the IPv6 address information again So the Health Check is not performed 10 Address information is not deleted by removing and inserting Ether2 cable IPv6 information is valid if it is obtained before expiring the time ...

Page 1620: ...he dialing num bers MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG deletes the 184 non Caller ID or 186 Caller ID from the dialed numbers and transmits the message to SIP network Setting Example When Pattern 1 is set Performs forced non Caller ID for 184 forced Caller ID for 186 The first three digits of the dialed numbers 184 186 are to be deleted When Pattern 2 is set Performs forced non Caller ID for 184 forced Caller...

Page 1621: ...ot required to be changed 4 auth Setting of Digest authentication information Assigns User ID password for HTTP Digest authentication Setting Example Note Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG connects 5 auth_header Setting to enable disable cache function of authentication header MG SIP set another_keynumber Input Another Keynumber 1 d...

Page 1622: ...in the default setting 7 call_id_relay Setting to enable disable Call ID notification function MG SIP set auth_header Select Authorization Header Cache function 0 enable default 1 disable Input 0 0 Cached authentication information is added default 1 Cached authentication information is not added MG SIP set call_hold Select the setting of Call Hold function 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 0 MG ...

Page 1623: ...this command is not required to be changed 9 cc_convert Setting of calling party s country code display conversion feature When this feature is available conversion will take place as in the following table MG SIP set call_id_relay Select function of Call ID relay mode 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 0 Call ID is not sent default 1 Call ID is sent to SV8500 MG SIP set cause_table Select Cause t...

Page 1624: ...G SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Calling party Convert to 0 if first number is 81 MG SIP set cc_convert Select Country Code Convert function 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 0 Disable default 1 Enable Selected Parameter Order of priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 To P N Dest Discern To userinfo Request URI isub Request URI userinfo 1 Request URI isub P N Dest Discern Request URI isub Request URI userinfo To userinfo 2...

Page 1625: ...ced to a destination lo cated in the SIP network and the payload type is different between an intermediate station and the desti nation G711 Fax renegotiation enables a called party to receive a facsimile with Fax Pass Through when com munication is changed over to a FAX communication while a call is in progress with G 729a Setting Example MG SIP set cdn_pattern Select Called Party Number to which...

Page 1626: ...hout converting the payload size Same behavior applies to the RTP packet received from the SIP net work To use the following methods enable commands shown below ReINVITE method enable set sip_tel_service command UPDATE method enable set sip_tel_service and set update commands 13 config_template Batch Setting of MG SIP MG 128SIPMGG This command is used to assign the batch setting of MG SIP MG 128SI...

Page 1627: ...case the cpn is informed when 2 is selected Numbers from 0 to 9 or can only be obtained as a calling party number When any other characters are contained in the calling party number the order of priority will shift to the next precedence However if any characters other than the ones indicated above are detected in Displayname the next and later priority will be disregarded and the cpn will be hand...

Page 1628: ...t have to change this command if you do not use DNS server 17 dns_option Setting of the Optional Data for DNS server This command is used to enable multiple SIP servers to be supported by DNS server When IP addresses of multiple SIP servers are obtained by A record lookup an alternative route can be used for transmission NAPTR lookup RFC3263 is also enabled MG SIP set default Are you sure Y N y No...

Page 1629: ...command if you do not use DNS server 18 domain Setting of DNS domain name This command is used to specify the domain name of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG MG SIP set dns_option Select DNS type 0 A Record resolve single IP Address default 1 A Record resolve multi IP Address 2 Locating SIP servers function RFC3263 Input 0 Select DNS type Default 0 A Record resolve single IP Address MG SIP set dns_option Se...

Page 1630: ...axi mum 128 bytes MG SIP set drsaddress Primary DRS Setting Setting Primary DRS Input IP Address default 0 0 0 0 172 16 253 1 IP address of DRS server Default 0 0 0 0 Input Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 UDP Port number of DRS server Default 3456 Secondary DRS Setting Setting Secondary DRS Input IP Address default 0 0 0 0 172 16 253 2 IP address of DRS server Default 0 0 0 0 Input Port N...

Page 1631: ...e 1 IP Precedence 2 DiffServ 3 ToS 1 When IP Precedence 1 is selected Input following parameters Precedence default 5 0 7 5 Specify the precedence in an IP network Default 5 0 7 Low High Delay default 0 0 1 0 Specify the low delay priority in an IP net work 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified Throughput default 0 0 1 0 Specify the throughput priority in an IP net work 0 Not specified Default 1 Spe...

Page 1632: ...ut an even number value is dis played 21 dtmf_mode Setting of DTMF relay system SIP network This command is used to specify the DTMF relay system in SIP network MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG supports Out Band RFC2833 and In Band G 711 data transmission as voice data Ne gotiation Out Band or In Band can be assigned Setting Example MG SIP set drs_qos Input type 1 IP Precedence 2 DiffServ 3 ToS 2 When DiffS...

Page 1633: ...ayload type RFC2833 96 127 default 101 101 Specify Payload type 96 to 127 Default 101 MG SIP set dtmf_mode Select DTMF Mode 0 Negotiation default 1 Out Band 2 In Band Input 1 0 Negotiation Default 1 Out Band fixed 2 In Band fixed Input DTMF Duration value ms 50 240 default 120 120 Specify DTMF Duration 50 to 240ms Default 120ms Input DTMF Pause value ms 30 240 default 100 100 Specify DTMF Pause 30...

Page 1634: ...command is used to set the alarm function which is activated to send a warning tone when a health check timeout occurs Setting Example Input DTMF Duration value ms 50 240 default 120 120 Specify DTMF Duration 50 to 240ms Default 120ms Input DTMF Pause value ms 30 240 default 100 100 Specify DTMF Pause 30 to 240ms Default 100ms Input parameter error reason DTMF Duration DTMF Pause Min120ms MG SIP s...

Page 1635: ... not appear for interface that is specified as Automatic Negoti ation MG SIP set hc_timer Input H C timer value sec 130 65535 default 240 240 Assign the Health Check timer value Default 240 seconds MG SIP set interface Select Ether 1 speed 0 AUTO default 1 10M 2 100M 3 1000M Input 0 Assign an Ether speed type to Ether 1 Example when AUTO is set 0 Automatic Negotiation Default 1 10 Mbps fixed 2 100...

Page 1636: ... by set ip_version command and the IP addresses of both LAN and WAN are assigned in the same segment use Ether1 port only Select one port in the number of port setting and assign Ether1 s IP address only In this case Ether2 is not used For the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG where Ether2 is already registered a message of Ether 2 Port data is erased Are you sure Y N is displayed To delete the data of Ether...

Page 1637: ...64 Get by RA Displays the result Get by RA appears subsequent to the IP address and the Subnet mask generated by the Router Advertisement MG SIP set ipaddress Do you use one port only Y N n Ether 1 Setting Ether1 port Input IP Address default 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 IP address Default 0 0 0 0 Input Subnet mask default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask Default 0 0 0 0 Ether 2 Setting Ether2 port Input IP ...

Page 1638: ...P address configured with set sip_register When you change IPv4 to IPv6 IP address for Ether2 port configured with set ipaddress is generated by MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG after receiving the RA message When you change the IP version with this command see also the information in 17 5 3IPv6 Function 28 ipx_route Setting of the route information in the Telephony Server network This command is used to sp...

Page 1639: ...her than y causes the following message Route setting command was interrupted MG SIP MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 0 Exit 1 None Default 2 Static Select 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 0 Exit Exit the command without execut ing anything 1 Set route information 2 Delete route information Select 1 Select Gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default Gateway 1 0 E...

Page 1640: ...twork address invalid Input IP Address of Gateway 192 168 0 254 Specify the gateway address Default 0 0 0 0 Result Route type Static Gateway Address Destination network Prefix 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 32 Are you sure Y N y Note Pressing any key other than y displays the following message Route setting command was interrupted MG SIP MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 0 ...

Page 1641: ...MG SIP MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 0 Exit 1 None Default 2 Static Select 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 2 0 Exit Exit the command without execut ing anything 1 Set routing information 2 Delete routing information Select 2 Note When there is no information to delete here the following mes sage is displayed There is no static route table to delete No Gatew...

Page 1642: ...ad dress stays displayed after rebooting the system Example of setting Router 3 4 5 that are placed downstream of Router 1 on LAN Telephony Server side can be summarized to 10 2 0 0 16 Set the summarized network address statically Downstream of Router 2 on SIP network side cannot be specified perform the default gateway settings No Gateway Address Destination network Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 10 0 0 ...

Page 1643: ...ect Gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default Gateway 1 Input Destination network Address 10 2 0 0 Input Subnet mask bit 0 32 16 Input IP Address of Gateway 10 1 0 254 Result Route type Static Gateway Address Destination network Prefix 10 1 0 254 10 2 0 0 16 Are you sure Y N y MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select Gateway type 0...

Page 1644: ...ter to the end of the pilot number with the Copy and Paste fea tures of your personal computer and be careful not to mistype a character 0 zero or O alphabetical O for example 31 multi_regist Setting of the registration function per number This command is used to enable disable the setting of registration to SIP server per number When this function is enabled Registers to SIP server per SIP URI or...

Page 1645: ...is necessary when registration is to be done per number Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG connects 32 musictype Setting of the type of music to be sent from MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG This command is used to select music type that is sent from MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Setting Example Input Standby timer value sec 10 3600 default 30 30 Ass...

Page 1646: ...rror response This command is used to set the out of area IPX network error response Setting Example Note Normally this command is not required to be changed 35 prack Setting of PRACK Provisional Response Acknowledgment function RFC3262 This command is used to enable disable Provisional Response Acknowledgement PRA function RFC3262 When this is set enabled the 18x cyclical send of provisional resp...

Page 1647: ...privacy_pattern command and specify 2 RFC3323 3325 P Preferred ID Privacy Enable name_display command 37 pre_negotiation_port_no Setting of the UDP port receiving packets for voice control path This command is used to specify the UDP port number that receives packets regarding the voice control path Select function to add 100rel to Supported Header 0 enable default 1 disable Input 0 0 enable Defau...

Page 1648: ...s for voice control path Default 61014 MG SIP set privacy_pattern Select Privacy pattern of Calling Party Number 0 DisplayName default 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3325 0 DisplayName Default 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3323 3325 P Preferred ID Pri vacy MG SIP set privacy_pattern Select Privacy pattern of Calling Party Number 0 DisplayName default 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3325 Input 0 0 DisplayName Default 1 Re...

Page 1649: ... to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG connects 39 registration_port_no Setting of the UDP port number that receives DRS packets This command is used to specify the UDP port number that receives the registration packets Setting Example Input a Dummy string MAX32 strings anonymous Enter a dummy string specified by pro vider in maximum of 32 characters MG SIP set priv...

Page 1650: ...PMGG using the largest number within the same MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG group referring to table below 41 response_table Setting of response table selection This command is used to set the response table Setting Example Note Normally this command is not required to be changed Input Registration Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 Assign the UDP port number that receives the DRS packets Default 3...

Page 1651: ... command is used to specify the ToS value of Real Time Protocol RTP packets on SIP network side Setting Example See drs_qos command for a display example and the contents of the configuration Note Normally this command is not required to be changed 44 sdp_style This command is used to receive SDP with multiple m lines When normal style is specified When RFC4566 style is specified MG SIP set rtp_pa...

Page 1652: ... adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG connects Select SDP style setting 0 normal default 1 RFC4566 Input 1 0 normal default 1 conforms to RFC4566 Select the setting of G729 annexb no 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Specify the setting of G729 annexb no 0 G729 annexb no is disabled 1 G729 annexb no is enabled MG SIP set self_sip_domain Select Self SIP D...

Page 1653: ...n Timer is disabled MG SIP set session_timer Select the setting of Session timer 0 enable default 1 disable Input 0 Input Session expires timer value sec 0 86400 default 180 180 Set the session timer Default 180sec Select Refresher type 0 UAC default 1 UAS Input 0 Determine a point to make refresher UAC User Agent Client UAS User Agent Server Select refresher uac ini INVITE 0 disable default 1 ena...

Page 1654: ...thorized destination Also this command is used to enable the Burst Access Filter which temporarily limits the maximum num ber of incoming calls that can be received by a Telephony Server when a rush of calls from a SIP network occurs instantaneously Setting Example When IP address 0 is selected by set sip_server command IPv6 MG SIP set session_timer Select the setting of Session timer 0 enable def...

Page 1655: ...ter 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Input Burst Access limit timer value sec 1 60 default 1 30 Input Burst Access limit number value 1 1000 default 10 500 Input Burst Access reject response code 400 699 default 488 600 MG SIP Enable disable Burst Access Filter Note 14 0 Burst Access Filter is disabled default 1 Burst Access Filter is enabled Assign the period of monitoring incoming calls sec 1 ...

Page 1656: ...t displayed Select the setting of Burst Access Filter 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Input Burst Access limit timer value sec 1 60 default 1 30 Input Burst Access limit number value 1 1000 default 10 500 Input Burst Access reject response code 400 699 default 488 600 MG SIP Enable disable Burst Access Filter Note 14 0 Burst Access Filter is disabled default 1 Burst Access Filter is enabled Ass...

Page 1657: ...address of Register Server is au thorized although it is not displayed Select the setting of Burst Access Filter 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Input Burst Access limit timer value sec 1 60 default 1 30 Input Burst Access limit number value 1 1000 default 10 500 Input Burst Access reject response code 400 699 default 488 600 MG SIP Enable disable Burst Access Filter Note 14 0 Burst Access Filt...

Page 1658: ...ip_port_no Setting of the port number that receives SIP messages This command is used to specify a UDP port number that receives SIP messages Setting Example Note Normally this command is not required to be changed 50 sip_qos Setting of the ToS value for SIP signaling This command is used to specify the ToS value of IP packets for SIP signaling Setting Example See set drs_qos command for a display...

Page 1659: ...Input SIP register Expires timer value sec 1 65535 default 3600 3600 Assign the SIP registrar alive time in seconds Default 3600 MG SIP set sip_register Select SIP register type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 0 When IP address 0 is selected Input SIP register IP Address default 0 0 0 0 192 168 100 100 Assign the IP address of the SIP registrar Default 0 0 0 0 Input SIP register Port Number 1024 ...

Page 1660: ...gned to the default gateway automatically If you attempt to execute this command the following message appears Sip route data can not be set when IPv6 is enable 53 sip_rtp_port_no Setting of the RTP base port number of SIP network This command is used to assign the RTP base port number from SIP network Even numbers only Setting Example Select SIP register type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 1 Wh...

Page 1661: ...SIP domain of the SIP server The following figure shows an example of display When IP address 0 is selected IPv6 MG SIP set sip_server Select SIP server type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 0 When IP address 0 is selected Default 0 Input SIP server IP Address Input SIP server IP Address default 2001 db8 860 Assign the IP address of the proxy server Default Input SIP server Port Number 1024 65535 ...

Page 1662: ...server Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 5060 Assign the port number of the proxy server Default 5060 Select SIP server Router type 0 Strict default 1 Loose Input 0 Select a Strict router or Loose router for the proxy server Default 0 0 Strict router 1 Loose router Select 0 Select the setting of rport RFC3581 function 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 Enable disable the rport RFC3581 function D...

Page 1663: ... services The command is used to enable disable the use of additional service features Hold Retrieve Transfer from the SIP network side terminal Setting Example Input Fully Qualified Domain Name default 0 MAX63 strings Assign the FQDN of the proxy server in maximum of 63 characters default 0 Input SIP server Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 5060 Assign the port number of the proxy server Defaul...

Page 1664: ... 0 enable default 1 disable Input 0 Enable disable Replaces function 0 enable Default 1 disable Select Hold a inactive function 0 enable default 1 disable Input 0 0 a inactive hold function is enabled Default 1 a inactive hold function is disabled Select Hold put off hold function 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Enable disable hold put off hold function 0 disable Default 1 enable Select REFER N...

Page 1665: ...stem Data 1 Index 64 Bit 0 during operation the data change will be reflected after rebooting MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG 56 sip_transport Setting of SIP transport protocol This command is used to select whether SIP requests to be sent with TCP or UDP as the transport proto col Setting Example 57 slipresp Setting of error response codes used when bypassing a SIP server This command is used to determine...

Page 1666: ...tting of UPDATE method 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 0 Update method is disabled Default 1 Update method is enabled MG SIP set country_code Input Country Code 0 255 default 0 0 AUTO Set a country code 0 AUTO Follow the Telephony Server set ting 1 JP Japan 2 US North America 3 AU Australia 4 OTHER Other countries 5 HK Hong Kong 6 MY Malaysia 7 SG Singapore 8 GB England 9 MX Mexico 10 TW Taiwan...

Page 1667: ...me_display Setting of Name Display service This command is used to enable disable Name Display service using MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Setting Example 211 ES Spain 212 AT Austria 213 BE Belgium 214 GB EMEA England for EMEA 215 GR Greece 216 SZ Switzerland 217 ZA South Africa Other values xx Not used MG SIP set multisession Current Setting Multi Session setting disable Displays the current setting Sel...

Page 1668: ...med μ law μ law μ law Normal Communication Not performed μ law μ law A law Normal Communication Performed μ law μ law G 729 Error Response Not performed μ law A law A law Normal Communication Performed μ law A law μ law Normal Communication Not performed μ law A law G 729 Error Response Not performed When MG SIP places an outgoing call Station Side ASYD SYS1 INDEX64 BIT0 MG SIP Codec Convert Mode ...

Page 1669: ... according to SIP side 0 disable default 1 PCMU 2 PCMA Input 1 0 Disabled default 1 μ law 2 Α law Select the PAD setting for voice FAX 0 disable default 1 local setting 2 auto Input 0 Select the settings for PAD value adjusting 0 Disable PAD value adjusting feature 1 Adjusting PAD value according to the con figuration data setting 2 Adjusting PAD value according to the set tings on the Telephony S...

Page 1670: ...0 dB 20 Input PAD transmission setting for voice 20 dB 20 dB 20 Input PAD reception setting for FAX 20 dB 20 dB 20 Input PAD transmission setting for FAX 20 dB 20 dB 20 Assign PAD value for each setting MG SIP set softdsp Current Setting codec convert mode disable PAD setting disable Displays the current setting Select the PCM codec convert mode according to SIP side 0 disable default 1 PCMU 2 PCM...

Page 1671: ...VOL 2 1418 MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Note The A law μ law converting feature setting is also needed to be assigned when enabling the PAD value adjusting feature ...

Page 1672: ...show the configuration that has been currently specified for the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG The following shows a sample display MAC configuration data MG SIP show arp AddressNote 1 HWtype HWaddressNote 2 Flags MaskNote 3 Iface 192 168 0 250 ether 00 1D 92 9E 2A E0 C eth0 192 168 0 99 ether 00 B0 D0 31 FE 64 C eth0 192 168 0 1 ether 00 30 13 76 7B 52 C eth0 MG SIP show config 2012 05 05 14 49 29 Time ...

Page 1673: ...n of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG 0 MAC Data MAC Data MAC configuration data 1 DRS Data DRSData Configuration data of the Telephony Server 2 Common Config Data Common Config Data Common configuration data 3 Port Config Data Port Config Data Port configura tion data 4 SIP Config Data SIP Config Data SIP configura tion data 5 Route Config Data Route Config Data Route infor mation configuration data 9 Exit...

Page 1674: ...n configuration data 3 Port Config Data Port Config Data Port configura tion data 4 SIP Config Data SIP Config Data SIP configura tion data 5 Route Config Data Route Config Data Route infor mation configuration data 9 Exit End of show command Select a reference number 2 Select 2 set signaling_port_no Signaling Port Number 61012 Currently assigned config data will be displayed set registration_port...

Page 1675: ...aying about 20 lines of config data you can select if you want to see more data or not To see the config data more enter y To exit this command press n set drs_qos DRS QoS 0xa0 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 set rtp_qos RTP QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 Does it display more Y N y set sip_qos ...

Page 1676: ...play varies depending on the type that is assigned by the set hc_alarm When assigned the Telephony Server network side and SIP network side IPX and SIP side enable When assigned the Telephony Server network side IPX side enable When assigned SIP network side SIP side enable When assigned not to send Disable set hc_timer H C Timer value 240sec set musictype Music Type Type1 Display Type1 Type2 Type...

Page 1677: ...me Display service set name_display Name Display enable Displays the current setting of the IP version set ip_version IP Version IPv4 set country_code Displays the current setting of Country Code Country Code 1 JP set softdsp codec convert mode PCMU PAD setting local setting PAD reception voice 20 PAD transmission voice 20 PAD reception FAX 20 PAD transmission FAX 20 Displays the current settings ...

Page 1678: ...mmand Select a reference number 3 Select 3 Using all port Data that is set to each port num ber is displayed Ether 1 IP address 172 16 253 200 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Auto Port type IPX Side Port Ether 2 IP address 192 168 35 200 Displays the current setting of the Ether 2 information When IPv6 1 is selected by set ip_version command this IP address will be shown in IPv6 a...

Page 1679: ...t End of show command Select a reference number 4 Select 4 set sip_server Currently assigned common con fig data will be displayed Server type IP Address Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 When FQDN is set by a SET com mand sip_server SIP server FQDN not SIP server IP Address is displayed Displays the current setting of the Server IP Address When IPv6 1 is selected by set ip_version command this IP address...

Page 1680: ...r ID 0 Password 0 Does it display more Y N y After displaying about 20 lines of config data you can select if you want to see more data or not To see the config data more enter y To exit this command press n set privacy_pattern Privacy pattern DisplayName When DisplayName is selected by the SET command privacy_pattern Display Name is shown When RFC3325 Pattern 0 is selected RFC3323 3325 0 is shown...

Page 1681: ...ected for Forced mode by the SET com mand session_timer enable is displayed set prack Supported 100rel enable When disable is selected by the SET command prack disable is displayed Stop cyclical send of 18x disable enable may be displayed according to the setting When set prack is disabled nothing is displayed set cdn_pattern Prior Called Party Number pattern To userinfo When Request URI isub is s...

Page 1682: ...omain Self SIP Domain mode disable When enable is selected by the SET command self_sip_domain enable is selected as well as the set domain name Example Self SIP Domain string xxxxxxxx Does it display more Y N y set dtmf_mode DTMF Mode Negotiation SIP SDP When In Band is the mode set by a SET command dtmf_mode IN Band G 711 is displayed and when Out Band is selected Out Band RFC2833 is dis played D...

Page 1683: ...ther_keynumber Another Keynumber 1 0 Another Keynumber 2 0 Another Keynumber 3 0 Does it display more Y N y set multi_regist Multi registration mode disable When enable is selected by SET command multi regist enable is displayed as well as the follow ing Transmitting interval timer 1sec Standby timer value 30sec Contact Header type Privacy or SIP URI When disable is set nothing is displayed set si...

Page 1684: ...ause_table Cause table normal When alternate routing Route Advance is selected by the SET command cause_table alter nate routing Route Advance is displayed set response_table Response table normal When revised_table is selected by the SET command response_table revised_table is displayed set cpn_pattern Prior Calling Party Number pattern DisplayName When Userinfo is selected by the SET command cpn...

Page 1685: ...t_of_area_code Response code when out of area 408 default The number for a response code set by the SET command out_of_area_code is displayed set sdp_style SDP style setting RFC4566 When normal is selected by the SET command sdp_style nor mal is displayed G729 annexb no enable When disable is selected by the SET command sdp_style dis able is displayed set call_id_relay Call ID relay mode disable W...

Page 1686: ... Access Filter mask 255 255 255 255 When disable is selected for SIP Access Filter the above set tings are not shown Burst Access Filter disable When enable is selected for Burst Access Filter by the SET command sip_accfilter enable and the following set tings are displayed Burst Access Filter enable Burst Access limit timer value 30 Burst Access limit number value 500 Burst Access reject response...

Page 1687: ...n enable set no_media_code Response code unsupported codec 415 The number for a response code specified by no_media_code command is displayed set ppi_to_pai PAID transmission function enable When disable is selected by the SET command ppi_to_pai dis able is displayed MG SIP show config 2012 05 05 14 49 29 Time when the configuration is acquired SP 4051 01 00 00 00 Software version information of M...

Page 1688: ...s displayed below SIP telephony service function disable 3PCC function and 3PCC function codec are displayed only when 3PCC function is enabled by the SET command sip_tel_service 3 Port Config Data Port Config Data Port configura tion data 4 SIP Config Data SIP Config Data SIP configura tion data 5 Route Config Data Route Config Data Route infor mation configuration data 9 Exit End of show command...

Page 1689: ...MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG functions base system and firmware Setting Example SIP telephony service function enable Replaces function enable Hold a inactive function enable Hold put off hold function enable REFER NOTIFY function enable 3PCC function enable 3PCC function codec PCMU MG SIP show interface Using one port only The number of ports in use Ether 1 Link up Link state MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00...

Page 1690: ...ber that the route was actually used routed Note 10 MSS Indicates the Maximum Segment Size MSS Maximum data size of a TCP segment at a route Note 11 Window Indicates a window size of TCP Note 12 irtt Indicates the initial round trip time of TCP connections to each route MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG regards a TCP connection where no reply lasts for the round trip time 1 to 12000 as no connection 6 status...

Page 1691: ...t a reference number 0 IPX Port link up 100Base TX Full SIP Port link up 100Base TX Full Note 13 Port type Status of port to LAN Status of port to SIP network 1000M Full IPX port link up 1000Base T Full SIP port link up 1000Base T Full 100M Half IPX port link up 100Base TX Half SIP port link up 100Base TX Half 100M Full IPX port link up 100Base TX Full SIP port link up 100Base TX Full 10M Half IPX...

Page 1692: ... CH status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP network registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Select a reference number 2 SIP Registration Information Registration is OK Note 15 MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 3 CH status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP ne...

Page 1693: ...MG No 9 MG No 10 MG No 10 MG No 11 MG No 11 MG No 12 MG No 12 MG No 13 MG No 13 MG No 14 MG No 14 MG No 15 MG No 15 Registration OK RegIndex Information on CNTs RegIndex succeeding in registration MG No 1 MG No 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CNTs succeeding in registration MG No 2 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 3 MG No 4 MG No 4 MG No 5 MG No 5 Note 17 MG No 6 MG No 6 MG No 7 MG No 7 MG No 8 MG No 8 MG No 9 MG No 9 MG ...

Page 1694: ...efault 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP network registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Select a reference number 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 ACT S ACT S appears for a channel in use appears for a channel not in use 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 actch 1 Number of channels in use Use Session Count 1 Number of sessions in use ...

Page 1695: ...erver Transaction 0 max 1 Number of server transactions other than INVITE and their maximum number the maximum number represents the maximum number counting up to this time from when MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG is turned on The number of Filtered Messages 0 Out of Range 0 No DNS Cache 0 Number of SIP packets that were discarded by SIP Access Filter When disable is selected for SIP Access Fil ter this p...

Page 1696: ... 2 Ether2 Q quit 1 Select a port to use With the default setting select Ether1 If selecting Ether2 using two ports must be set in the set ipaddress com mand Note When IPv6 function is in ser vice download is not avail able on Ether2 So 2 Ether2 does not ap pear Current IP Address of MG SIP 10 41 1 100 Do you change IP Address of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change the IP address that is u...

Page 1697: ...t Q Input new IP Address 172 16 253 250 Enter an IP address IP Address change was completed New IP Address of MG SIP 172 16 253 100 New Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 255 0 0 New IP Address of TFTP server 172 16 253 250 Are these IP Address correct Y correct N change Q quit When the specified IP addresses are correct enter y If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE service will be stop y mgsipmwlist txt download t...

Page 1698: ... TFTP start Received Checksum matched Download was completed Please reboot after a download menu end Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 Quit Q q Input q When download is complete the menu appears again Enter q to exit download command MG SIP ...

Page 1699: ...e IP Address of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change the IP address that is used for downloading enter y If you want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP Address 172 16 253 100 Enter the IP address Current Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 0 0 0 Do you change Subnet mask of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change the subnet mask of the selected port enter y If you want t...

Page 1700: ...IP Address correct Y correct N change Q quit When the specified IP addresses are correct enter y If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE service will be stop y mgsipmwlist txt download tftpDownload User file TFTP start Received Program download Main program 0 tone data 1 music data 2 wave file 3 config data 4 Quit Q q Input 0 Select a file you want to download SP4051 MAIN main tar gz download Download starts...

Page 1701: ...ig data 4 Quit Q q Input q When download is complete the pro gram download menu appears again Enter q to exit download command Please reboot after a download menu end Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 Quit Q q Input q MG SIP ...

Page 1702: ...en create a subfolder named MUSIC to store WAVE files A WAVE file must be named as music_3 wav Place the WAVE file in the MUSIC folder a subfolder of the above mentioned firmware folder Form the download list file mgsipmwlist txt under the firmware folder as below Note When adding WAVE files to the download list mgsipmwlist txt assign sequential numbers such as 00 01 02 to all files as shown in th...

Page 1703: ...ter download in configuration mode Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 Quit Q q Input 2 Enter 2 to download a program indi vidually IP Address setting of MG SIP Select Ether Port 1 Ether1 2 Ether2 Q quit 1 Select a port to use With the default setting select Ether1 If selecting Ether2 using two ports must be set in the set ipaddress com mand Curre...

Page 1704: ...want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP Address 172 16 253 250 Enter an IP address IP Address change was completed New IP Address of MG SIP 172 16 253 100 New Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 255 0 0 New IP Address of TFTP server 172 16 253 250 Are these IP Address correct Y correct N change Q quit If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE service will be stop y Enter y after confirming the en...

Page 1705: ...051 MUSIC music_3 wav download Download starts tftpDownload User file TFTP start Received Checksum No Check Checksum of SP4051 MUSIC music_3 wav is 23915 Download was completed Program download Main program 0 tone data 1 music data 2 wave file 3 config data 4 Quit Q q Input q After the download is finished down load menu is restored Please reboot after a download menu end Download menu Download of...

Page 1706: ... No specified folder MAIN TONE MUSIC in the TFTP server Check the name of the TFTP server s folder to download files 1 File not found No download list file Check the folder setting of the down load list file in the TFTP server Error in specifying the download list file Check the contents of the download list file and the file name of the actually downloaded file 2 Access violation No access permis...

Page 1707: ...strings in the download list file Check if the download list file is proper ListDLoad Download file name is too long 91 download file name Bad length of the downloaded file name representing 92 characters or more when including the subfolder Check if the download list file is proper Transfer timed out Download failed Specifying non existing IP address Check the IP address of the TFTP serv er Speci...

Page 1708: ...G SIP exit login MG SIP reboot Do you want to save Config data Y N y Select if you want to save the running configura tion data y Saves the configuration data Note 1 Note 2 n Do not save the configuration data If other than the above is selected the following message is displayed Reboot command was interrupted Do you want to reboot MG SIP Y N y Select if you want to reboot MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG y...

Page 1709: ...rebooted 4 ping Function To attempt ping command five times to the designated IPv4 host on the network Setting Example The following setting commands are not perfect set ipaddress command IPX side If IP address for LAN side has not been assigned set ipaddress command SIP side If IP address for SIP network side has not been assigned set drsaddress command If IP address of DRS has not been assigned ...

Page 1710: ...s 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 5 ttl 128 time 0 727 ms 172 16 253 3 ping statistics 5 packets transmitted 5 received 0 packet loss time 3997ms rtt min avg max mdev 0 304 0 618 1 020 0 247 ms MG SIP MG SIP ping6 2001 db8 1 0 216 97ff fee7 a8c0 Enter ping6 com mand and designate the target IPv6 address PING 2001 db8 1 0 216 97ff fee7 a8c0 2001 db8 1 0 216 97ff fee7 a8c0 from 2001 db8 1 0 216 ...

Page 1711: ...ics 5 packets transmitted 5 received 0 packet loss time 3997ms rtt min avg max mdev 0 010 0 012 0 015 0 002 ms MG SIP MG SIP traceroute Interface number 0 IPX side 1 SIP side 0 Select if this is on the Telephony Server side or SIP side 0 Telephony Server side 1 SIP side 0 is selected Target IP Address 172 16 253 3 Designate the IP address of the target traceroute to 172 16 253 3 172 16 253 3 3 hop...

Page 1712: ...ommands that are available on MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGG Setting Example Target IP Address 172 17 253 210 Designate the IP address of the target Note 3 traceroute to 172 17 253 210 172 17 253 210 3 hops max 38 byte packets 1 172 17 253 210 172 17 253 210 0 047 ms 0 028 ms 0 010 ms MG SIP MG SIP help set sets config data of MG SIP show shows config data of MG SIP download downloads program of MG SIP pi...

Page 1713: ...rror messages ERROR MESSAGE TROUBLESHOOTING Illegal command An incorrect command is entered Enter the command correctly Illegal parameters An incorrect parameter is entered Enter the parameter correctly Illegal parameters Not IPv6 address An incorrect parameter is entered Enter the IPv6 parameter correctly Illegal parameters Not IPv4 address An incorrect parameter is entered Enter the IPv4 paramet...

Page 1714: ...to peer VoIP services MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ also connects IP stations located on LAN and maintain voice quality By connecting with MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ s Small Call Centers are operated as one Call Center virtually For details on service conditions and office data assignment see MG SIP TIE Line M 122 in SV8500 Data Programming Manual Business Office Code 820 Telephony Server 10000 03 1234 5678 ...

Page 1715: ...VOL 2 1462 MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ The following table shows the number of available channels of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 60ms G 711 128ch G 729a G 723 1 ...

Page 1716: ...cations Remarks Connection terminal on front panel CONSOLE connector RJ 45 x 1 For maintenance LAN connectors 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T x 2 100BASE TX 10BASE T x 2 Not used CF slot x 1 USB2 0 x 1 Not used LINK ACT SPEED Ether1 Ether2 1 2 3 4 ON PWR LOAD ON LINE Ether1 Connector Ether2 Connector PWR Lamp LOAD Lamp OnLine Lamp CPU PWR Switch CONSOLE Connector USB2 0 Connector CF Slot MODE Switc...

Page 1717: ...accessing to a CF card ONLINE lamp ON green Registration is finished Flash green Abnormal state No configuration no Music Tone file OFF Registration is not finished LAN connectors Ether1 Port for LAN cable connection at LAN side Ether2 Port for LAN cable connection at WAN side Not used when using only a single port SPEED lamp Ether1 2 ON yellow 1Gbps connection ON green 100Mbps connection OFF 10Mb...

Page 1718: ... same time when MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ is working CONSOLE connector Connected with a maintenance terminal PC Note 6 CONSOLE CABLE RJ45 RS 232C serial connection not in cluded in package is used Part Description Remarks AC power inlet Connected with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft Fix the cable with the stopper to prevent it from falling out PWR switch Power ...

Page 1719: ...s the cabling procedure Follow the following to connect cables Step1 Plug an attached AC power cable into the AC power inlet on the rear panel of an MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ fix the AC power cable with the stopper Rear Panel Note To remove the AC cable push the hook of the stopper outward and take off the fixing belt Push the tab of the stopper and slide the stopper away from the power inlet Step2 C...

Page 1720: ...SIP network in the same segment connect a LAN cable only to a connector for LAN Cable connection is completed Move on to the next section Startup and Installation Test LINK ACT SPEED Ether1 Ether2 PWR LOAD ON LINE 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Plug a cable to Ether1 for LAN connection Plug a cable to Ether2 for WAN connection LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T LAN Cable ...

Page 1721: ...nd connecting maintenance terminal PC Activate Windows on the maintenance terminal PC click Start point to Programs point to Ac cessories point to Communications and click HyperTerminal Note Connection Description window is opened Enter a name whatever you like here MGSIP as an example in Name field Enter OK Note Terminal software is necessary for assigning configuration data to IP devices For Win...

Page 1722: ...28 MG 128SIPMGJ Note You can use any icon and name Connect To window is opened Choose a COM port which is connected to MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ in Connect using box Enter OK Note 10 Note 10 It depends on the PC MGSIP MGSIP ...

Page 1723: ...VOL 2 1470 MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ Port Settings tab opens Set the values as the following figure shows ...

Page 1724: ...een Rear Panel Front Panel After MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ is activated the maintenance terminal PC displays mgsip login on the screen Note If an MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ is connected with a maintenance terminal PC after activat ed mgsip login does not appear Press Enter key to display mgsip login Now the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ is activated mgsip login PWR Switch LINK ACT SPEED Ether 1 Ether 2 PWR LOAD...

Page 1725: ...e To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the REBOOT command to save the configuration and restart the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ Note 11 For not using Multipoint feature select 0 For details refer to 18 6 Multipoint Feature When Enter key is pressed without entering Input set config_template is finished mgsip login mgsip login config MG SIP MG SIP set default Are you sure Y N y Be...

Page 1726: ...her2 cannot be used Display example Note Pressing the Enter key can skip the item To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the REBOOT command to save the configura tion and restart the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ MG SIP set ipaddress Do you use one port only Y N n Enter n when two ports are used Ether 1 Ether 1 LAN Input IP Address default 0 0 0 0 172 16 0 1 Assign the IP address Def...

Page 1727: ...hony Server Information Assign the IP address and port number of the Telephony Server Set the Primary DRS only and skip for Sec ondary and later DRS by pressing Enter key Display example MG SIP set drsaddress Primary DRS Setting Configures Primary DRS Input IP address default 0 0 0 0 172 16 253 1 Assign the IP address of the Tele phony Server Default 0 0 0 0 Input Port Number 1024 65535 default 34...

Page 1728: ... of the destination MG SIP to SIP server address The following figure shows an example of display When IP address 0 is selected Input Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 Quaternary DRS Setting Has not been set Input IP address default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Input Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 MG SIP set sip_server Select SIP server type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 0 Select IP address...

Page 1729: ...l O for ex ample Input 0 Select 0 Input Domain Name default 0 MAX128 strings Input a SIP domain name of 128 charac ters MG SIP set sip_server Select SIP server type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 1 Select FQDN 1 Input Fully Qualified Domain Name default 0 MAX63 strings Assign the FQDN of the proxy server in maximum of 63 characters Default 0 Input SIP server Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 5...

Page 1730: ... and SIP network side set drsaddress Assign the IP address of the Telephony Server set sip_server Assign the IP address of the SIP proxy server set keynumber Assign a pilot number MG SIP set keynumber Input Keynumber default 0 MAX32 strings 0 Assign the pilot number used by MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ Default 0 MG SIP reboot Do you want to save Config data Y N y Select if you want to save the configura...

Page 1731: ...nt panel of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ Note Before connecting MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ to the network you actually use make sure of the following by using commands such as ping Is not the IP address set to MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ already used in the network to be con nected Is the newly set IP address correct The following setting commands are not perfect The following is displayed set ipaddress command ...

Page 1732: ...ransmitting speed of 1Gbps SPEED lamp is lighting in green The MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ connects to a network with transmitting speed of 100Mbps If you expected transmitting speed of 1Gbps check a connected network device and a cable be tween them SPEED lamp is not lighting The MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ connects to a network with transmitting speed of 10Mbps If you expected transmitting speed of 1Gbps ...

Page 1733: ... correct If no message appears within 3 minutes it is estimated that no communication has been established between the Telephony Server and the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ Check the LAN cable connecting LAN Te lephony Server and the IP address of DRS MG SIP show status 0 Port status Port status Default 1 IPX status Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP status SIP network registration statu...

Page 1734: ...VOL 2 1481 MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ 18 4 Operation and Maintenance Here explains MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ operation and maintenance ...

Page 1735: ...the system Please replace a cooling FAN every five years to avoid it even though the cooling FAN still works normally Replacement Procedure Note You can replace cooling FANs as the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ remains on Step1 Use a Phillips driver to loosen a screw at the left side of the FAN cover on the rear panel of an MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ Step2 Slide the FAN cover to the left to remove ATTENTION ...

Page 1736: ... Step4 Attach new FANs perform the opposite procedure of removing Note When attaching pay attention to the direction of a FAN The label on a FAN must face toward the outside of an MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ See the following figure Test After Attaching Check if the replaced FANs work properly If either of FANs does not work properly check the cabling CAUTION Attach the FAN in the direction as describe...

Page 1737: ...prompt is displayed on a screen waiting for a user input When a user inputs a char acter string the system analyzes the input data and displays a reply message Inputting commands and sub commands are necessary but whether inputting a parameter is necessary or not depends on com mands Some commands do not have any parameters The following figure shows an example of input ting a command a sub comman...

Page 1738: ...ted MG SIP set drs_qos Input type 1 IP Precedence 2 DiffServ 3 ToS 1 When IP PRECEDENCE 1 is selected Input following parameters Precedence default 5 0 7 5 Specify the precedence in an IP network Default 5 0 7 Low High Delay default 0 0 1 0 Specify the low delay priority in an IP net work 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified Throughput default 0 0 1 0 Specify the throughput priority in an IP net wo...

Page 1739: ...when dialing 184 186 3 another_keynumber C Assigns additional three pilot numbers other than the one registered by set keynumber command 4 auth C Assigns Digest authentication information 5 auth_header C Assigns whether to enable disable the cache function of authentication header 6 call_hold C Assigns whether to enable disable the MG based call retention 7 call_id_relay C Assign Call ID notificat...

Page 1740: ...path 36 privacy_pattern C Assigns the privacy pattern 37 registration_port_no C Assigns the UDP port number that receives DRS packets 38 reg_interval C Assigns the waiting time to retry after registration failure 39 response_table C Assigns response table selection 40 rtp_pathon C Assigns Path on function by 183 Progress after receiving 180 Ringing 41 rtp_qos C Specifies the RTP on SIP network ToS...

Page 1741: ... country_code C Assigns a country code 58 multisession C Assigns Multi path Switch Note 3 59 softdsp Note 4 C Note 5 Assigns the setting of A law μ law conversion feature and PAD value show Commands to Display the Contents of Configuration Data SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 arp Displays the ARP table 2 config Displays the configuration data 3 interface Displays the link and setting state of Ether co...

Page 1742: ...OMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 Restarts MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ and saves the settings ping Command to Use the ping for IPv4 address SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 parameter enter the ping destination IPv4 address ping command for IPv4 address traceroute Command to Use the traceroute SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 traceroute command help or Command to Use the Command Help SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 help command...

Page 1743: ...he dialing num bers MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ deletes the 184 non Caller ID or 186 Caller ID from the dialed numbers and transmits the message to SIP network Setting Example When Pattern 1 is set Performs forced non Caller ID for 184 forced Caller ID for 186 The first three digits of the dialed numbers 184 186 are to be deleted When Pattern 2 is set Performs forced non Caller ID for 184 forced Caller...

Page 1744: ...ed 4 auth Setting of Digest authentication information Assigns User ID password for HTTP Digest authentication Setting Example Note The conditions of this command are as follows Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ connects 5 auth_header Setting to enable disable cache function of authentication header MG SIP set another_keynumber Inpu...

Page 1745: ..._relay Setting to enable disable Call ID notification function The command is used to specify whether to send Call ID to SV8500 MG SIP set auth_header Select Authorization Header Cache function 0 enable default 1 disable Input 0 0 Cached authentication information is added default 1 Cached authentication information is not added MG SIP set call_hold Select the setting of Call Hold function 0 disab...

Page 1746: ...y conversion feature When this feature is available conversion will take place as in the following table Setting Example MG SIP set call_id_relay Select function of Call ID relay mode 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 0 Call ID is not sent default 1 Call ID is sent to SV8500 MG SIP set cause_table Select Cause table SIP Error Response to Error Cause 0 normal default 1 alternate routing Input 0 Se...

Page 1747: ...info 1 Request URI isub P N Dest Discern Request URI isub Request URI userinfo To userinfo 2 Request URI P N Dest Discern Request URI userinfo Request URI isub To userinfo 3 P Called Party ID P Called Party ID userinfo To userinfo Request URI userinfo P N Dest Discern Request URI isub 4 P Called Par ty ID isub P Called Party ID isub P Called Party ID userinfo To userinfo Request URI userinfo P N D...

Page 1748: ...config_template Data Setting Example Note The conditions of this command are as follows By setting this command to 1 Multipoint mode set mp_mode is enabled By pressing Enter key with null entered in input set config_template is finished 13 cpn_pattern Setting of a way of obtaining information for cpn calling party number This command is used to assign how to obtain cpn calling party number and to ...

Page 1749: ...han the ones indicated above are detected in Displayname the next and later priority will be disregarded and the cpn will be handled as blocked e g From 0123ABC sip 01234567 xxx com In this case the cpn will be handled as blocked when 0 is selected 14 default Setting the default values to the configuration data The command is used to set back to the default setting of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ config...

Page 1750: ...y this command is not required to be changed To set SIP domain change the domain name from the domain name parameter of set sip_server com mand or set_self_sip_domain command 17 drsaddress Setting of IP address and port number of DRS server This command is used to assign IP address and port number of DRS server MG SIP set default Are you sure Y N y Note When other than y is selected the following ...

Page 1751: ...default 0 0 0 0 172 16 253 2 IP address of DRS server Default 0 0 0 0 Input Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 UDP Port number of DRS server Default 3456 Tertiary DRS Setting Setting Tertiary DRS Input IP Address default 0 0 0 0 172 16 253 3 IP address of DRS server Default 0 0 0 0 Input Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 UDP Port number of DRS server Default 3456 Quaternary DRS Settin...

Page 1752: ...ot specified Default 1 Specified Throughput default 0 0 1 0 Specify the throughput priority in an IP net work 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified Reliability default 0 0 1 0 Specify the reliability in an IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified Cost default 0 0 1 0 Specify the low cost priority in an IP net work 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified MG SIP set drs_qos Input type 1 IP Precedenc...

Page 1753: ...elay system in SIP network MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ supports Out Band RFC2833 and In Band G 711 data transmission as voice data Negotiation Out Band or In Band can be assigned Setting Example When Negotiation is selected MG SIP set drs_qos Input type 1 IP Precedence 2 DiffServ 3 ToS 3 When ToS 3 is selected Input ToS value with HEX format 00 FE default A0 a0 Specify the ToS field default a0 MG SIP s...

Page 1754: ...egotiation default 1 Out Band 2 In Band Input 1 0 Negotiation Default 1 Out Band fixed 2 In Band fixed Input DTMF Duration value ms 50 240 default 120 120 Specify DTMF Duration 50 to 240ms Default 120ms Input DTMF Pause value ms 30 240 default 100 100 Specify DTMF Pause 30 to 240ms Default 100ms Input Payload type RFC2833 96 127 default 101 101 Specify Payload type 96 to 127 Default 101 MG SIP set...

Page 1755: ... This command is used to specify the health check time out value Setting Example Note Normally this command is not required to be changed MG SIP set h245_base_port_no Input H245 base Port Number 1024 64511 default 40000 40000 Assign the port number for H 245 TCP server Default 40000 receiving side of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ MG SIP set hc_alarm Select H C Alarm type 0 IPX and SIP side enable default...

Page 1756: ...d subnet mask This command is used to set the number of ports MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ uses and assign an IP Address and a subnet mask to each Ether port on MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ Ports of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ are allocated as follows Ether1 LAN Telephony Server network side Ether2 WAN SIP network side MG SIP set interface Select Ether 1 speed 0 AUTO default 1 10M 2 100M 3 1000M Input 0 Assign an ...

Page 1757: ... below If you select one port in the number of port setting Ether2 setting is not performed If you select one port in the number of port setting be careful not to use the same RTP port number set by set sip_rtp_port_no or set ipx_rtp_port_no command when setting the non default SIP network RTP base port number MG SIP set ipaddress Do you use one port only Y N n Ether 1 Setting Ether1 port Input IP...

Page 1758: ...2 is selected To Assign Destination Network Address and Gateway Address Usually gateway data should be set as Static at LAN Telephony Server network side MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 0 0 Exit 1 None Default 2 Static Select 0 MG SIP Exit the command without executing any thing MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 1 0 Exit 1 None Default 2 St...

Page 1759: ...lect 1 Input Destination network Address 172 16 0 0 Specify the network address Note 4 Default 0 0 0 0 Input Subnet mask bit 0 32 16 Specify the subnet mask Note 4 Default 0 Note If an invalid value is set here the following error message is displayed Input the valid value Input destination network address invalid Input IP Address of Gateway 192 168 0 254 Specify the gateway address Default 0 0 0 ...

Page 1760: ... command without execut ing anything 1 Set routing information 2 Delete routing information Select 1 Select Gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default Gateway 2 0 Exit Exit the command without execut ing anything 1 Specify the gateway 2 Specify the default gateway Select 2 Input IP Address of Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Specify the default gateway Default 0 0 0 0 Result Route type Static Gateway Ad...

Page 1761: ...nformation 2 Delete routing information Select 2 Note When there is no information to delete here the following mes sage is displayed There is no static route table to delete No Gateway Address Destination network Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 16 2 192 168 0 254 10 0 0 0 8 Select delete No 1 Select the number No of the route infor mation you want to delete Select 1 No Gateway Address Destinati...

Page 1762: ...e summarized network address statically Downstream of Router 2 on SIP network side cannot be specified perform the default gateway settings Sample Data Setting for the above network configuration MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select Gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default Gateway 1 Input Destination network Address 10 2 0 0 I...

Page 1763: ...RTP port number set by set sip_rtp_port_no or set ipx_rtp_port_no command when setting the non default IPX network RTP base port number Gateway Address Destination network Prefix 10 1 0 254 10 2 0 0 16 Are you sure Y N y MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select Gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default Gateway 2 Input IP Address of...

Page 1764: ...ata table After setting this com mand execute set_mp_refresh for reflecting this setting without system restart Setting Example MG SIP set keynumber Input Keynumber default 0 MAX32 strings 0 Assign the pilot number when register is performed Default 0 MG SIP set mp_data Select the method to operation 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete Input 1 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete Input Search Number number of digits 7 1230200...

Page 1765: ...signed be sure to restart MG SIP before assigning the set mp_data command Input Primary Dest Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 5060 Input Primary Port Number Input Secondary Dest IP Address default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Input Secondary IP address Input Secondary Dest Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 0 Input Secondary Port Number Input Tertiary Dest IP Address default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Input Tertiary ...

Page 1766: ...set mp_mode Select the setting of Multipoint mode 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 0 Multipoint mode is disabled This setting is finished without setting Search Number digits and Server Priority 1 Multipoint mode is enabled This setting is finished after set ting Search Number digits and Server Priority If you change Number of Search Number digits update mp_data file after reboot Input Number of...

Page 1767: ...ssign the SIP server for register destination The assignment of set sip_register is necessary when registration is to be done per number Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ connects 32 musictype Setting of the type of music to be sent from MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ MG SIP set multi_regist Select Multi registration mode 0 disable default ...

Page 1768: ...d is used to enable disable Provisional Response Acknowledgement PRA function RFC3262 When this is set enabled the 18x cyclical send of provisional response function can be spec ified Setting Example MG SIP set musictype Select Music Type 0 Type1 default 1 Type2 2 Type3 3 Type4 Input 0 0 Type1 Minuet 1 Type2 For Elise 2 Type3 WAVE file 3 Type4 No sound MG SIP set out_of_area_code Input the SIP Err...

Page 1769: ...sed to specify a type of Calling Line Identification Non Presentation when calling to SIP network Setting Example When 0 is selected Select function to stop cyclical send of Provisional Response 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 0 enable 18x cyclical send 1 disable 18x cyclical send MG SIP set pre_negotiation_port_no Input Pre negotiation Port Number 1024 65535 default 61014 61014 Assign the UDP ...

Page 1770: ...eives DRS packets This command is used to specify the UDP port number that receives the registration packets Setting Example Select Privacy pattern of Calling Party Number 0 DisplayName default 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3325 Input 0 0 DisplayName Default 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3323 3325 P Preferred ID Pri vacy MG SIP set privacy_pattern Select Privacy pattern of Calling Party Number 0 DisplayName def...

Page 1771: ...PMGJ using the largest number within the same MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ group referring to table below 39 response_table Setting of response table selection This command is used to set the response table Setting Example Note Normally this command is not required to be changed Input Registration Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 Assign the UDP port number that receives the DRS packets Default 3...

Page 1772: ... on SIP network side Setting Example See drs_qos command for a display example and the contents of the configuration Note Normally this command is not required to be changed 42 sdp_style This command is used to receive SDP with multiple m lines When normal style is specified Note This command can be skipped by pressing Enter key 43 self_sip_domain Setting of SIP domain name for MG SIP128 MG 128SIP...

Page 1773: ...n_timer Setting of session timer This command is used to specify the Session Timer Setting Example When Session Timer is Enable 0 is selected MG SIP set self_sip_domain Select Self SIP Domain mode 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 0 without domain name Default 1 with domain name Input a Self SIP Domain string MAX128 strings Input the SIP domain name in maximum of 128 characters MG SIP set self_si...

Page 1774: ... UAC default 1 UAS Input 0 Determine a point to make refresher UAC User Agent Client UAS User Agent Server Select refresher uac ini INVITE 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 refresher uac addition to INVITE mes sage 0 refresher uac is not added 1 refresher uac is added Select Forced mode 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 0 Session timer will not be activated when Supported Require header does not...

Page 1775: ...ls from a SIP network occurs instantaneously Setting Example When IP address 0 is selected by set sip_server command MG SIP set sip_accfilter Select the setting of SIP Access Filter 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Enable disable SIP Access Filter 0 SIP Access Filter is disabled default 1 SIP Access Filter is enabled Input SIP Access Filter mask default 255 255 255 255 SIP server IP Address 192 ...

Page 1776: ...ls INVITE number to be received during a monitor ing period sec Note 9 1 1000 default is 10 Assign the error response code that is sent back to a SIP network when the INVITE number exceeds the limit during a monitoring period sec 400 699 default is 488 MG SIP set sip_accfilter Select the setting of SIP Access Filter 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Enable disable SIP Access Filter 0 SIP Access F...

Page 1777: ...zed destination when SIP Access Filter feature is enabled INVITE without the following header Via From To CSeq CallID Select the setting of Burst Access Filter 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Input Burst Access limit timer value sec 1 60 default 1 30 Input Burst Access limit number value 1 1000 default 10 500 Input Burst Access reject response code 400 699 default 488 600 MG SIP Enable disable ...

Page 1778: ...SIP signaling Setting Example See set drs_qos command for a display example and the contents of the configuration Note Normally this command is not required to be changed 50 sip_register Setting of the information of SIP registrar This command is used to assign an IP address or a Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN and port num ber and expiration time of the SIP registrar The following figure shows a...

Page 1779: ...er IP Address default 0 0 0 0 192 168 100 100 Assign the IP address of the SIP registrar Default 0 0 0 0 Input SIP register Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 5060 Assign the port number of the SIP registrar Default 5060 Input SIP register Expires timer value sec 1 65535 default 3600 3600 Assign the SIP registrar alive time in seconds Default 3600 MG SIP set sip_register Select SIP register type ...

Page 1780: ...or set ipx_rtp_port_no command when setting the non default SIP network RTP base port number 53 sip_server Setting of the information of SIP server This command is used to assign an IP address or a Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN and port num ber type and SIP domain of the SIP server The following figure shows an example of display When IP address 0 is selected MG SIP set sip_rtp_port_no Input SI...

Page 1781: ...1 Loose Input 0 Select a Strict router or Loose router for the proxy server Default 0 0 Strict router 1 Loose router Select 0 Input Domain Name default 0 MAX128 strings Input a SIP domain name in maximum of 128 characters MG SIP set sip_server Select SIP server type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 1 When FQDN 1 is selected Input Fully Qualified Domain Name default 0 MAX63 strings Assign the FQDN ...

Page 1782: ... bypass when all the resources of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ are busy Setting Example Note Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ connects MG SIP set sip_tel_service Select SIP telephony service function 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 0 additional service feature is disabled Default 1 additional service feature is enabled Select Replaces...

Page 1783: ...g to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ connects 57 country_code Setting of a country code This command is used to set a country code on MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ Setting Example MG SIP set update Select the setting of UPDATE method 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 0 Update method is disabled Default 1 Update method is enabled MG SIP set country_code ...

Page 1784: ...D system Setting Example Input Country Code 0 255 default 0 0 Set a country code 0 AUTO Follow the Telephony Server set ting 1 JP Japan 2 US North America 3 AU Australia 4 OTHER Other countries 5 HK Hong Kong 6 MY Malaysia 7 SG Singapore 8 GB England 9 MX Mexico 10 TW Taiwan 11 NZ New Zealand 12 KR Korea 13 BR Brazil 14 CN China 15 TH Thailand 16 TH EGAT Thailand EGAT 17 LK Sri Lanka 200 DE German...

Page 1785: ... setting enable Displays the result When MG SIP receives an incoming call Station Side ASYD SYS1 INDEX64 BIT0 MG SIP Codec Convert Mode Network Side Operating Status Conversion A law μ law μ law Normal Communication Performed A law μ law A law Normal Communication Not performed A law μ law G 729 Error Response Not performed A law A law A law Normal Communication Not performed A law A law μ law Nor...

Page 1786: ...e Not performed μ law μ law μ law Normal Communication Not performed μ law μ law A law Error Response Not performed μ law μ law G 729 Error Response Not performed μ law A law A law Normal Communication Performed μ law A law μ law Error Response Not performed μ law A law G 729 Error Response Not performed MG SIP set softdsp Current Setting codec convert mode disable PAD setting disable Displays the...

Page 1787: ... 1 PCMU 2 PCMA Input 1 0 Disabled default 1 μ law 2 Α law Select the PAD setting for voice FAX 0 disable default 1 local setting 2 auto Input 1 Select the settings for PAD value adjusting 0 Disable PAD value adjusting feature 1 Adjusting PAD value according to the con figuration data setting 2 Adjusting PAD value according to the set tings on the Telephony Server Input PAD reception setting for vo...

Page 1788: ...isable Displays the current setting Select the PCM codec convert mode according to SIP side 0 disable default 1 PCMU 2 PCMA Input 1 0 Disabled default 1 μ law 2 Α law Select the PAD setting for voice FAX 0 disable default 1 local setting 2 auto Input 2 Select the settings for PAD value adjusting 0 Disable PAD value adjusting feature 1 Adjusting PAD value according to the con figuration data settin...

Page 1789: ...how the configuration that has been currently specified for the MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ The following shows a sample display MAC configuration data MG SIP show arp Address Note 1 HWtype HWaddress Note 2 Flags MaskNote 3 Iface 192 168 0 250 ether XX XX XX XX XX XX C eth0 192 168 0 99 ether XX XX XX XX XX XX C eth0 192 168 0 1 ether XX XX XX XX XX XX C eth0 MG SIP show config 2012 05 05 14 49 29 Time...

Page 1790: ... MG SIP show config 2012 05 05 14 49 29 Time when the configuration is acquired SP 4032 01 00 00 00 Software version information of MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ 0 MAC Data MAC Data MAC configuration data 1 DRS Data DRSData Configuration data of the Telephony Server 2 Common Config Data Common Config Data Common configuration data 3 Port Config Data Port Config Data Port configura tion data 4 SIP Config ...

Page 1791: ...C Data MAC Data MAC configuration data 1 DRS Data DRSData Configuration data of the Telephony Server 2 Common Config Data Common Config Data Common configuration data 3 Port Config Data Port Config Data Port configura tion data 4 SIP Config Data SIP Config Data SIP configura tion data 5 Route Config Data Route Config Data Route infor mation configuration data 6 Multipoint Data Multipoint Data 9 Ex...

Page 1792: ...00 Does it display more Y N y After displaying about 20 lines of config data you can select if you want to see more data or not To see the config data more enter y To exit this command press n set drs_qos DRS QoS 0xa0 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 set rtp_qos RTP QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 Does it display more Y N y ...

Page 1793: ...pe IPX and SIP Side enable H C Alarm type display varies depending on the type that is assigned by the set hc_alarm When assigned the Telephony Server network side and SIP network side IPX and SIP side enable When assigned the Telephony Server network side IPX side enable When assigned SIP network side SIP side enable When assigned not to send Disable set hc_timer H C Timer value 240sec set musict...

Page 1794: ...ut RTP detect timer value and Response code to reject are not displayed set country_code Country Code 1 JP Displays the current setting of Country Code set softdsp codec convert mode PCMU PAD setting local setting PAD reception voice 20 PAD transmission voice 20 PAD reception FAX 20 PAD transmission FAX 20 Displays the current settings of codec conversion and PAD value Note 1 MG SIP show config 20...

Page 1795: ...umber 3 Select 3 Using all port Data that is set to each port num ber is displayed Ether 1 IP address 172 16 253 200 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Auto Port type IPX Side Port Ether 2 IP address 192 168 35 200 Displays the current setting of the Ether 2 information Subnet 255 255 255 0 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Auto Port type SIP Side Port MG SIP show config 2012 05 05 14 49 2...

Page 1796: ... Select 4 set sip_server Currently assigned common con fig data will be displayed Server type IP Address Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 When FQDN is set by a SET com mand sip_server SIP server FQDN not SIP server IP Address is displayed Displays the current setting of the Server IP Address SIP server Port Number 5060 SIP server Router type Strict Domain Name 0 set sip_register SIP register type IP Addr...

Page 1797: ...rivacy_pattern Display Name is displayed When RFC3325 Pattern 0 is selected RFC3323 3325 0 is dis played When Pattern 1 is dis played RFC3323 3325 1 is displayed set session_timer Session timer enable When disable is selected by the SET command Session_timer disable is displayed In this case Session expires and Refresher are not displayed Session expires 180sec Refresher UAC When UAS is selected f...

Page 1798: ...is displayed set cdn_pattern Prior Called Party Number pattern To userinfo When Request URI isub is selected by the SET command cdn_pattern Request URI isub is displayed and when Request URI userinfo is selected Request URI userinfo is displayed and P Called Party ID is selected P Called Party ID is displayed set sip_port_no SIP Port Number 5060 Does it display more Y N y set 184ToPrivacy 184 to p...

Page 1799: ... Mode Negotiation SIP SDP When In Band is the mode set by a SET command dtmf_mode IN Band G 711 is displayed and when Out Band is selected Out Band RFC2833 is dis played DTMF Duration 120ms DTMF Pause 100ms Payload type 101 When DTMF Mode is In Band Payload type is not displayed set 183rbt RBT Addition 183w oSDP enable When disable is selected by the SET command 183rbt dis able is displayed set rt...

Page 1800: ...Transmitting interval timer 1sec Standby timer value 30sec Contact Header type Privacy or SIP URI When disable is set nothing is displayed set sip_tel_service SIP telephony service function disable Note 1 set reg_interval REGISTER interval timer 5min set update UPDATE method support function disable When enable is selected by the SET command update enable is displayed set auth_header Auth Header C...

Page 1801: ...yed set cpn_pattern Prior Calling Party Number pattern DisplayName When Userinfo is selected by the SET command cpn_pattern Userinfo is displayed when Anonymous is selected Anon ymous is displayed and when P Asserted ID is selected P Asserted ID is displayed set cc_convert Country Code convert disable When enable is selected by the SET command cc_convert enable is displayed set check_number teleph...

Page 1802: ...s Filter disable When enable is selected for SIP Access Filter by the SET command sip_accfilter enable and the following set tings are displayed When IP address is assigned by the SET command sip_server SIP server IP Address 192 168 100 100 SIP Access Filter mask 255 255 255 255 When FQDN is assigned by the SET command sip_server SIP server FQDN sipserver nec com SIP Access Filter mask 255 255 255...

Page 1803: ... the following is not displayed When Replaces function is enabled Replaces function enable When Replaces function is disabled Replaces function disable When Replaces function is enabled Hold a inactive function enable When Replaces function is disabled Hold a inactive function disable Note 2 This parameter is displayed since SP 4032 MGSIP PROG E Issue 2 Burst Access Filter disable When enable is s...

Page 1804: ...tion data 3 Port Config Data Port Config Data Port configura tion data 4 SIP Config Data SIP Config Data SIP configura tion data 5 Route Config Data Route Config Data Route infor mation configuration data 6 Multipoint Data Multipoint Data 9 Exit End of show command Select a reference number 5 Select 5 Ether 1 Data currently configured to each port number will be displayed Route type Static No Gate...

Page 1805: ...P configura tion data 5 Route Config Data Route Config Data Route infor mation configuration data 6 Multipoint Data Multipoint Data 9 Exit End of show command Select a reference number 6 Select 6 mp_data file time stamp 2012 05 01 17 54 31 Time stamp of CSV file will be displayed Total data 30 The number of Multipoint data in CSV file will be displayed Failure data 2 The number of error data in CS...

Page 1806: ...4 10 xx x xxx 5060 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 430 tokyo5 xx xxx xx xx 1024 xx xxx xx xx 1024 xx xxx xx xx 1024 xx xxx xx xx 1024 Does it display more Y N y When next 5 Multipoint table is displayed select y 500 osaka1 192 168 xxx xx 5060 192 168 xxx xx 5070 192 168 xxx xx 5060 192 168 xxx xx 1024 670 osaka2 xx xx xx xxx 5060 xx xx xx xxx 5070 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 1807: ... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 800 tokyo1 172 16 xx xx 5060 172 16 xx xx 5070 172 16 xx xx 65535 0 0 0 0 0 900 tokyo2 182 168 xxx xx 5060 182 168 xxx xx 5070 182 168 xxx xx 5060 182 168 xxx xx 1024 MG SIP show interface Using one port only The number of ports in use Ether 1 Link up Link state MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 MAC address IP Address 10 1 0 1 IP address Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask Interface S...

Page 1808: ...te 1 Flags Indicates a route type U is usable H is host G is gateway Note 2 Metric Indicates route metric In the range of one to 9999 Note 3 Ref Indicates the number that the route is referred Note 4 Use Indicates the number that the route was actually used routed Note 5 MSS Indicates the Maximum Segment Size MSS Maximum data size of a TCP segment at a route Note 6 Window Indicates a window size o...

Page 1809: ...etwork registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Select a reference number 0 IPX Port link up 100Base TX Full SIP Port link up 100Base TX Full Note 1 Port type Status of port to LAN Status of port to SIP network 1000M Full IPX port link up 1000Base T Full SIP port link up 1000Base T Full 100M Half IPX port link up 100Base TX Half SIP port link up 100Base TX Half 100M Full IPX por...

Page 1810: ...gister Registration is NG Waiting Re Registration timer MG SIP128 is trying to register again When registration is disabled Register Server Configuration data is not set No setting data of set sip_register command IPX Registration Information Registration is OK DRS IP address 192 168 0 1 Note 2 Call Hold function start time Sat Aug 27 21 00 22 2011 Keep Calling count xx Cancel count IPX xxx Cancel...

Page 1811: ...status 3 CH status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP network registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Select a reference number 2 Registration NG RegIndex MG No 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 4 MG No 5 MG No 6 MG No 7 MG No 8 MG No 9 MG No 10 MG No 11 MG No 12 MG No 13 MG No 14 MG No 15 Registration OK RegIndex ...

Page 1812: ...No 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 4 MG No 5 MG No 6 MG No 7 MG No 8 MG No 9 MG No 10 MG No 11 MG No 12 MG No 13 MG No 14 MG No 15 MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 3 CH Status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP network registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Select a reference number 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 1813: ...umber Other Client Transaction 0 max 1 Number of client transactions other than INVITE and their maximum number Other Server Transaction 0 max 1 Number of server transactions other than INVITE and their maximum number the maximum number represents the maximum number counting up to this time from when MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ is turned on The number of Filtered Messages 0 Out of Range 0 No DNS Cache ...

Page 1814: ...er is displayed for SP 4032 MGSIP PROG E Issue 2 or later The number of Burst Filtered Messages 0 Number of incoming calls that are rejected by Burst Access Filter Note 6 When disable is selected for Burst Access Filter this parameter is not shown MG SIP ...

Page 1815: ...quit 1 Select a port to use With the default setting select Ether1 If selecting Ether2 using two ports must be set in the set ipaddress com mand Current IP Address of MG SIP 10 41 1 100 Do you change IP Address of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change the IP address that is used for downloading enter y If you want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP Address 172 16 253...

Page 1816: ...253 100 New Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 255 0 0 New IP Address of TFTP server 172 16 253 250 Are these IP Address correct Y correct N change Q quit When the specified IP addresses are correct enter y If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE service will be stop y mgsipmwlist txt download tftpDownload User file TFTP start Received SP4032 MAIN main tar gz download tftpDownload User file TFTP start Received Checks...

Page 1817: ...ile TFTP start Received Checksum matched Download was completed If you download except for mp_data file Please reboot after a download menu end When other than mp_data file is downloaded be sure to execute the reboot command Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 Quit Q q Input q When download is complete the menu appears again Enter q to exit downlo...

Page 1818: ...e IP Address of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change the IP address that is used for downloading enter y If you want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP Address 172 16 253 100 Enter the IP address Current Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 0 0 0 Do you change Subnet mask of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change the subnet mask of the selected port enter y If you want t...

Page 1819: ...P Address correct Y correct N change Q quit When the specified IP addresses are correct enter y If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE service will be stop y mgsipmwlist txt download tftpDownload User file TFTP start Received Program download Main program 0 tone data 1 music data 2 wave file 3 config data 4 Multipoint data 5 Quit Q q Input 0 Select a file you want to download SP4032 MAIN main tar gz downloa...

Page 1820: ...Enter q to exit download command If you download except for mp_data file Please reboot after a download menu end When other than mp_data file is downloaded be sure to execute the reboot command Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 Quit Q q Input q When download is complete the pro gram download menu appears again Enter q to exit download command MG...

Page 1821: ...en create a subfolder named MUSIC to store WAVE files A WAVE file must be named as music_3 wav Place the WAVE file in the MUSIC folder a subfolder of the above mentioned firmware folder Form the download list file mgsipmwlist txt under the firmware folder as below Note When adding WAVE files to the download list mgsipmwlist txt assign sequential numbers such as 00 01 02 to all files as shown in th...

Page 1822: ...er download in configuration mode Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 Quit Q q Input 2 Enter 2 to download a program indi vidually IP Address setting of MG SIP Select Ether Port 1 Ether1 2 Ether2 Q quit 1 Select a port to use With the default setting select Ether1 If selecting Ether2 using two ports must be set in the set ipaddress com mand Curren...

Page 1823: ...to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP Address 172 16 253 250 Enter an IP address IP Address change was completed New IP Address of MG SIP 172 16 253 100 New Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 255 0 0 New IP Address of TFTP server 172 16 253 250 Are these IP Address correct Y correct N change Q quit If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE service will be stop y Enter y after confirming the entered...

Page 1824: ...wnload Main program 0 tone data 1 music data 2 wave file 3 config data 4 Multipoint data 5 Quit Q q Input q After the download is finished down load menu is restored If you download except for mp_data file Please reboot after a download menu end When other than mp_data file is downloaded be sure to execute the reboot command Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one pr...

Page 1825: ...error codes Some errors in downloading can be classified into none of the error codes they are listed below display causes solutions Error Code Error Display Cause of Error Troubleshooting 0 Undefined error No specified folder MAIN TONE MUSIC in the TFTP server Check the name of the TFTP server s folder to download files 1 File not found No download list file Check the folder setting of the down l...

Page 1826: ...ng numbers 0 255 Check the contents of the download list file ListDLoad Comment strings too long comment strings Bad length of comment strings in the download list file Check if the download list file is proper ListDLoad Download file name is too long 91 download file name Bad length of the downloaded file name representing 92 characters or more when including the subfolder Check if the download l...

Page 1827: ...d assign 2 port setting by set ipaddress command Current IP Address of MG SIP 10 xx x xxx Do you change IP Address of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change the IP address that is used for uploading enter y If you want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP Address 172 yy yyy yyy Enter the IP address Current Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 0 0 0 Do you change Subnet mask of MG ...

Page 1828: ...of MG SIP 172 yy yyy yyy New Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 255 0 0 New IP Address of TFTP server 172 nn nnn nnn Are these IP Address correct Y correct N change Q quit When the specified IP addresses are correct enter y mp_data csv upload tftpUpload User file TFTP start Send Upload was completed Error Code Error Display Cause of Error Troubleshooting NONE File not found No multipoint data file mp_data ...

Page 1829: ...G SIP exit login MG SIP reboot Do you want to save Config data Y N y Select if you want to save the running configura tion data y Saves the configuration data Note 1 Note 2 n Do not save the configuration data If other than the above is selected the following message is displayed Reboot command was interrupted Do you want to reboot MG SIP Y N y Select if you want to reboot MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ y...

Page 1830: ...te 2 The configuration data is not saved until MG SIP128 MG 128SIPMGJ is rebooted 4 ping Function To attempt ping command five times to the designated IPv4 host on the network Setting Example The following setting commands are not perfect set ipaddress command IPX side If IP address for LAN side has not been assigned set ipaddress command SIP side If IP address for SIP network side has not been as...

Page 1831: ...tl 128 time 0 443 ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 4 ttl 128 time 0 304 ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 5 ttl 128 time 0 727 ms 172 16 253 3 ping statistics 5 packets transmitted 5 received 0 packet loss time 3997ms rtt min avg max mdev 0 304 0 618 1 020 0 247 ms MG SIP MG SIP traceroute Interface number 0 IPX side 1 SIP side 0 Select if this is on the Telephony Server side or SIP sid...

Page 1832: ...P side 0 Telephony Server side 1 SIP side 1 is selected Target IP Address 172 17 253 210 Designate the IP address of the target traceroute to 172 17 253 210 172 17 253 210 3 hops max 38 byte packets 1 172 17 253 210 172 17 253 210 0 047 ms 0 028 ms 0 010 ms MG SIP MG SIP help set sets config data of MG SIP show shows config data of MG SIP download downloads program of MG SIP upload uploads program...

Page 1833: ...n is displayed Refer to each command for the other error messages ERROR MESSAGE TROUBLESHOOTING Illegal command An incorrect command is entered Enter the command correctly Illegal parameters An incorrect parameter is entered Enter the parameter correctly Illegal parameters Not IPv4 address An incorrect parameter is entered Enter the IPv4 parameter correctly ...

Page 1834: ...tched to valid invalid 2 Up to 4 connected parties from Primary to Quaternary are registered for each Search Number 3 Up to 500 Search Numbers are registered Note Dial Number cannot be registered redundantly 4 Alternate routing is executed by Round Robin method Up to 4 can be registered Up to 500 can be registered Setting Image of Multipoint Data Table Searching No Group Name Connected Party 10 xx...

Page 1835: ...d upload with TFTP protocol 8 When Multipoint Data Table file CSV format is uploaded if there is an existing uploaded file whose name is the same with the new uploaded file the existing file is overwritten Note There is no confirmation message for overwriting the existing file 9 Fax communications support Fax Passthrough only 18 6 2 Operating Procedure Step1 Execute the set default command and the...

Page 1836: ...f mp_data file input 1 Quit Q q Input 1 To upload CSVfile enter 1 IP Address and Subnet mask setting of MG SIP Select Ether Port 1 Ether1 2 Ether2 Q quit 1 Select ether port Be sure to use Ether1 port for default set ting Assign 2 port by set ipaddress com mand for using Ether2 port Current IP Address of MG SIP 10 xx x xxx Do you change IP Address of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change IP...

Page 1837: ... quit y If you want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP Address 172 nn nnn nnn Enter IP address IP Address change was completed New IP Address of MG SIP 172 yy yyy yyy New Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 255 0 0 New IP Address of TFTP server 172 nn nnn nnn Are these IP Address correct Y correct N change Q quit y When these IP addresses are correct enter y mp_data csv upload tftpUp...

Page 1838: ...68 x xx 5060 192 168 x xx 5060 9870204 tokyo5 172 16 xx xx 5060 1230200 tokyo1 192 168 x xx 5060 1230203 tokyo4 192 168 x xx 5060 192 168 x xx 5060 192 168 x xx 5060 192 168 x xx 5060 1230201 tokyo2 192 168 x xx 5060 192 168 x xx 5060 1230202 tokyo3 192 168 x xx 5060 192 168 x xx 5060 192 168 x xx 5060 9870204 tokyo5 172 16 xx xx 5060 1230203 tokyo4 192 168 x xx 5060 192 168 x xx 5060 Search No Gr...

Page 1839: ...older as below Example Note When adding files to the download list mgsipmwlist txt assign sequential numbers such as 00 01 02 to all files as shown in the red frame in the image above Step6 Access the configuration mode and download the Multipoint data file mp_data csv Display example of individual download This is Firmware list for SN8178 00 SP4032 CONFIG mp_data csv 0 MG SIP download Enter downl...

Page 1840: ...turn to the previous step please input Q Input new IP Address 172 yy yyy yyy Enter IP address Current Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 0 0 0 Do you change Subnet mask of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change Subnet mask of the selected port enter y If you want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Enter Subnet mask IP Address setting of TFTP server Current...

Page 1841: ...be stop y mgsipmwlist txt download tftpDownload User file TFTP start Received Program download Main program 0 tone data 1 music data 2 wave file 3 config data 4 Multipoint data 5 Quit Q q Input 5 To download Multipoint data enter 5 Multipoint file download Download mp_data file Y download N skip Q skip y SP4032 CONFIG mp_data csv download The download status of Multipoint data is displayed tftpDow...

Page 1842: ..._data command Step1 Enter set mp_data in configuration mode Download was completed Program download Main program 0 tone data 1 music data 2 wave file 3 config data 4 Multipoint data 5 Quit Q q Input q If you download except for mp_data file Be sure to execute the reboot command Note 5 please reboot after a download menu end Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one pro...

Page 1843: ...a enter y Input Group Name MAX10 strings Enter Group Name tokyo1 Input Primary Dest IP Address default 0 0 0 0 Enter Primary IP address 192 168 x xx Input Primary Dest Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 Enter Primary Port Number 5060 Input Secondary Dest IP Address default 0 0 0 0 Enter Secondary IP address 0 0 0 0 Input Secondary Dest Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 Enter Secondary Port Numb...

Page 1844: ...r 1024 65535 default 5060 Enter Quaternary Port Number 0 Result Setting Result is displayed NUMBER NAME DESTINATION ERR 1230200 tokyo1 192 168 x xx 5060 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Select the method to operation 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete The method to operation is displayed again Input 0 To finish the registration enter 0 Do you want to save mp_data y n y To save these assignments enter y The data i...

Page 1845: ...o peer VoIP ser vices MG SIP96 also connects an IP station located on LAN with a SIP terminal based on RFC3261 located on the WAN side SIP network and maintain voice quality For details on service conditions and office data assignment see Multiple Number Service MG SIP M 113 in SV8500 Data Programming Manual Business SIP Network PSTN RRR SIP server MG SIP96 IP Terminal Telephony Server SIP Compati...

Page 1846: ...VOL 2 1593 MG SIP96 The following table shows the number of available channels of MG SIP96 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 60ms G 711 96ch 96ch 96ch G 729a 96ch 96ch 96ch G 723 1 ...

Page 1847: ... 1 For maintenance LAN connectors 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T x 2 100BASE TX 10BASE T x 2 Not used CF slot x 1 USB2 0 x 1 Not used Dimensions 65 H x 430 W x 297 D mm corresponds to 1 5U when mounting on a 19 inch rack with depth of A4 paper LINK ACT SPEED Ether1 Ether2 1 2 3 4 ON PWR LOAD ON LINE Ether1 Connector Ether2 Connector PWR Lamp LOAD Lamp OnLine Lamp CPU PWR Switch CONSOLE Connector U...

Page 1848: ...nfiguration no Music Tone file OFF Registration is not finished LAN connectors Ether1 Port for LAN cable connection at LAN side Ether2 Port for LAN cable connection at WAN side Not used when using only a single port SPEED lamp Ether1 2 ON yellow 1Gbps connection ON green 100Mbps connection OFF 10Mbps LINK lamp Ether1 2 ON green Layer1 link is established Flash green Transmitting receiving packets ...

Page 1849: ...eplace both of cooling FAN1 and cooling FAN2 at the same time when MG SIP96 is work ing Part Description Remarks AC power inlet Connected with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft Fix the cable with the stopper to prevent it from falling out PWR switch Power switch Note 10 PWR alarm lamp ON red Failure on power module OFF Power module works normally FAN1 alarm la...

Page 1850: ...procedure Follow the following to connect cables Step2 Plug an attached AC power cable into the AC power inlet on the rear panel of an MG SIP96 fix the AC power cable with the stopper Rear Panel Note To remove the AC cable push the hook of the stopper outward and take off the fixing belt Push the tab of the stopper and slide the stopper away from the power inlet Step3 Connect the other end of the ...

Page 1851: ...twork in the same segment connect a LAN cable only to a connector for LAN Cable connection is completed Move on to the next section Startup and Installation Test LINK ACT SPEED Ether1 Ether2 PWR LOAD ON LINE Plug a cable to Ether1 for LAN connection Plug a cable to Ether2 for WAN connection 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T LAN Cable ...

Page 1852: ...maintenance terminal PC Activate Windows on the maintenance terminal PC click Start point to Programs point to Ac cessories point to Communications and click HyperTerminal Note Connection Description window is opened Enter a name whatever you like here MGSIP as an example in Name field Enter OK Note Terminal software is necessary for assigning configuration data to IP devices For Windows com puter...

Page 1853: ... 1600 MG SIP96 Note You can use any icon and name Connect To window is opened Choose a COM port which is connected to MG SIP96 in Con nect using box Enter OK Note 13 Note 13 It depends on the PC MGSIP MGSIP ...

Page 1854: ...VOL 2 1601 MG SIP96 Port Settings tab opens Set the values as the following figure shows ...

Page 1855: ...anel Front Panel After MG SIP96 is activated the maintenance terminal PC displays mgsip login on the screen Note If an MG SIP96 is connected with a maintenance terminal PC after activated mgsip log in does not appear Press Enter key to display mgsip login Now the MG SIP96 is activated mgsip login PWR Switch LINK ACT SPEED Ether 1 Ether 2 PWR LOAD ON LINE MG SIP 1 2 3 4 ON CONSOLE CABLE To Maintena...

Page 1856: ...ddresses of both LAN and WAN are assigned in the same segment use Ether1 port only Select one port in the number of port setting and assign Ether1 s IP address only In this case Ether2 cannot be used Display example mgsip login mgsip login config MG SIP MG SIP set ipaddress Do you use one port only Y N n Enter n when two ports are used Ether 1 Ether 1 LAN Input IP Address default 0 0 0 0 172 16 0 ...

Page 1857: ...net work RTP base port number by set ipx_rtp_port_no command Set the routing information if required 19 3 2 Setting of the Telephony Server Information Assign the IP address and port number of the Telephony Server Set the Primary DRS only and skip for Sec ondary and later DRS by pressing Enter key Display example MG SIP set drsaddress Primary DRS Setting Configures Primary DRS Input IP address def...

Page 1858: ...RS Setting Has not been set Input IP address default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Input Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 Quaternary DRS Setting Has not been set Input IP address default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Input Port Nunber 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 MG SIP set sip_server Select SIP server type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 0 Select IP address Default 0 Input SIP server IP Address default 0 0 0 0 192 ...

Page 1859: ...Default 0 Input Domain Name default 0 MAX128 strings Input a string that specifies the service provider in maximum of 128 characters MG SIP set sip_server Select SIP server type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 1 Select FQDN 1 Input Fully Qualified Domain Name default 0 MAX63 strings Assign the FQDN of the proxy server in maximum of 63 characters Default 0 Input SIP server Port Number 1024 65535 d...

Page 1860: ...a to the Flash memory be sure to execute the following commands set ipaddress Assign the IP addresses for LAN network side and SIP network side set drsaddress Assign the IP address of the Telephony Server set sip_server Assign the IP address of the SIP proxy server MG SIP set keynumber Input Keynumber default 0 MAX32 strings 0 Assign the pilot number used by MG SIP96 to register Default 0 MG SIP r...

Page 1861: ...sure of the following by using commands such as ping Is not the IP address set to MG SIP96 already used in the network to be connected Is the newly set IP address correct The following setting commands are not perfect The following is displayed set ipaddress command IPX side if IP address for the system side has not been assigned set ipaddress command SIP side if IP address for SIP network side ha...

Page 1862: ...ting speed of 1Gbps SPEED lamp is lighting in green The MG SIP96 connects to a network with transmitting speed of 100Mbps If you expected transmitting speed of 1Gbps check a connected network device and a cable be tween them SPEED lamp is not lighting The MG SIP96 connects to a network with transmitting speed of 10Mbps If you expected transmitting speed of 1Gbps or 100Mbps check a connected networ...

Page 1863: ...rect If no message appears within 3 minutes it is estimated that no communication has been established between Telephony Server and the MG SIP96 Check the LAN cable connecting LAN Telephony Server and the IP address of DRS MG SIP show status 0 Port status Port status Default 1 IPX status Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP status SIP network registration status 3 CH status Informati...

Page 1864: ...VOL 2 1611 MG SIP96 19 4 Operation and Maintenance Here explains MG SIP96 operation and maintenance ...

Page 1865: ...s the CPU PWR switch for short time the MG SIP96 is shut down automatically If you cannot shut down the MG SIP96 in this way perform a forced shutdown by pressing the CPU PWR switch for 4 seconds STEP 3 Remove the CF card from the MG SIP96 and insert a new CF card for version upgrade to a CF card slot located at the front of MG SIP96 STEP 4 Turn on the power switch located on the back of the devic...

Page 1866: ...tem Please replace a cooling FAN every five years to avoid it even though the cooling FAN still works normally Replacement Procedure Note You can replace cooling FANs as the MG SIP96 remains on Step1 Use a Phillips driver to loosen a screw at the left side of the FAN cover on the rear panel of an MG SIP96 Step2 Slide the FAN cover to the left to remove ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling ...

Page 1867: ... Step4 Attach new FANs perform the opposite procedure of removing Note When attaching pay attention to the direction of a FAN The label on a FAN must face toward the outside of an MG SIP96 See the following figure Test After Attaching Check if the replaced FANs work properly If either of FANs does not work properly check the cabling CAUTION Attach the FAN in the direction as described below MG SIP...

Page 1868: ...layed on a screen waiting for a user input When a user inputs a char acter string the system analyzes the input data and displays a reply message Inputting commands and sub commands are necessary but whether inputting a parameter is necessary or not depends on com mands Some commands do not have any parameters The following figure shows an example of input ting a command a sub command and a parame...

Page 1869: ...SIP set drs_qos Input type 1 IP Precedence 2 DiffServ 3 ToS 1 When IP PRECEDENCE 1 is selected Input following parameters Precedence default 5 0 7 5 Specify the precedence in an IP network Default 5 0 7 Low High Delay default 0 0 1 0 Specify the low delay priority in an IP net work 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified Throughput default 0 0 1 0 Specify the throughput priority in an IP net work 0 No...

Page 1870: ...4 186 3 another_keynumber C Assigns additional three pilot numbers other than the one registered by set keynumber command 4 auth C Assigns Digest authentication information 5 auth_header C Assigns whether to enable disable the cache function of authentication header 6 call_hold C Assigns whether to enable disable the MG based call retention Note 1 7 call_id_relay C Assign Call ID notification func...

Page 1871: ...UDP port receiving packets for voice control path 37 privacy_pattern C Assigns the privacy pattern 38 registration_port_no C Assigns the UDP port number that receives DRS packets 39 reg_interval C Assigns the waiting time to retry after registration failure 40 response_table C Assigns response table selection 41 rtp_pathon C Assigns Path on function by 183 Progress after receiving 180 Ringing 42 r...

Page 1872: ... Note 3 show Commands to Display the Contents of Configuration Data SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 arp Displays the ARP table 2 config Displays the configuration data 3 interface Displays the link and setting state of Ether connection 4 version Displays the firmware version installed in MG SIP96 5 route Displays the Route table 6 status Displays status of the port and the registration download Comman...

Page 1873: ...ation IPv4 address ping command for IPv4 address ping6 Command to Use the ping for IPv6 address SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 parameter enter the ping destination IPv6 address ping command for IPv6 address Note 1 traceroute Command to Use the traceroute SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 traceroute command help or Command to Use the Command Help SUB COMMAND MUST FUNCTION 1 help command ...

Page 1874: ... a configuration com mand Note This function is available for SP 3987 MGSIP PROG B Issue 3 or later When SIP server exists When SIP server does not exist Telephony Server MG SIP96 Router LAN side WAN SIP network side SIP Network IP termial SIP server SIP termial IPv4 network IPv6 network IPv4 communication IPv6 communication IPv4 network IPv6 network IPv4 network Telephony Server MG SIP96 LAN side...

Page 1875: ...ge the IP version by set ip_version command you also need to change the following command settings to activate IPv6 function After those settings execute the reboot command to save the configuration and restart the MG SIP96 Changing IPv4 to IPv6 Changing IPv6 to IPv4 IPv6 Related Data Settings Exist No IPv6 Related Data Settings Exist IPv4 Related Data Settings Exist No IPv4 Related Data Settings ...

Page 1876: ...lapped To avoid it this function allows only one router to be connected in the WAN side and one prefix can be used per router This function does not support allocating fixed IP addresses manually and distributing IP addresses from DHCPv6 serv er 3 When IPv6 function is in service IPv4 packets are discarded When a SIP request for IPv6 packet has any IPv4 address in its message body using SDP MG SIP...

Page 1877: ...SIP96 may reboot itself while at tempting to obtain the IPv6 address information again So the Health Check is not performed 10 Address information is not deleted by removing and inserting Ether2 cable IPv6 information is valid if it is obtained before expiring the time limit 11 When Ether2 port attempts to obtain an IPv6 address during the system initialization the system initial ization is not co...

Page 1878: ... the 184 non Caller ID or 186 Caller ID from the dialed numbers and transmits the message to SIP network Setting Example When Pattern 1 is set Performs forced non Caller ID for 184 forced Caller ID for 186 The first three digits of the dialed numbers 184 186 are to be deleted When Pattern 2 is set Performs forced non Caller ID for 184 forced Caller ID for 186 The first three digits of the dialed n...

Page 1879: ...tting of Digest authentication information Assigns User ID password for HTTP Digest authentication Setting Example Note Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP96 connects 5 auth_header Setting to enable disable cache function of authentication header MG SIP set another_keynumber Input Another Keynumber 1 default 0 MAX32 strings 1000 Input Another Keynumb...

Page 1880: ...cceptable Here is sent in the default setting 7 call_id_relay Setting to enable disable Call ID notification function MG SIP set auth_header Select Authorization Header Cache function 0 enable default 1 disable Input 0 0 Cached authentication information is added default 1 Cached authentication information is not added MG SIP set call_hold Select the setting of Call Hold function 0 disable default...

Page 1881: ...tting Example Earlier than SP 3987 MGSIP PROG B Issue 2 Since SP 3987 MGSIP PROG B Issue 2 or later MG SIP set call_id_relay Select function of Call ID relay mode 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 0 Call ID is not sent default 1 Call ID is sent to SV8500 MG SIP set cause_table Select Cause table SIP Error Response to Error Cause 0 normal default 1 alternate routing Input 0 0 Normal table Default ...

Page 1882: ...ity order shown in the table below a If the firmware version is SP 3987 MGSIP PROG B Issue 2 or later Direction of Call termination origination Intended Number Conversion Feature Call termination via SIP Calling party Convert to 0 if first numbers are 81 or 81 Call termination via SIP Calling party Add 0 to first number if number is 8 or more digits Call origination via MG SIP96 Calling party Conv...

Page 1883: ...give priority 0 To userinfo default 1 Request URI isub 2 Request URI userinfo 3 P Called Party ID userinfo 4 P Called Party ID isub Input 0 0 userinfo part of the To header is given priority Default 1 isub of Request URI is given priority 2 userinfo part of Request URI is given priority 3 userinfo part of P Called Party ID is given priority 4 isub of P Called Party ID is given priority Selected Pa...

Page 1884: ...warding call is placed to a destination lo cated in the SIP network and the payload type is different between an intermediate station and the desti nation G711 Fax renegotiation enables a called party to receive a facsimile with Fax Pass Through when com munication is changed over to a FAX communication while a call is in progress with G 729a Setting Example MG SIP set cdn_pattern Select Called Pa...

Page 1885: ...eceived from the SIP network To use the following methods enable commands shown below ReINVITE method enable set sip_tel_service command UPDATE method enable set sip_tel_service and set update commands 13 cpn_pattern Setting of a way of obtaining information for cpn calling party number This command is used to assign how to obtain cpn calling party number and to change the priority of obtaining ca...

Page 1886: ... later priority will be disregarded and the cpn will be handled as blocked e g From 0123ABC sip 01234567 xxx com In this case the cpn will be handled as blocked when 0 is selected 14 default Setting the default values to the configuration data The command is used to set back to the default setting of MG SIP96 configuration Make sure to execute this command when updating firmware to a different fir...

Page 1887: ...SIP servers are obtained by A record lookup an alternative route can be used for transmission NAPTR lookup RFC3263 is also enabled Setting Example When Locating SIP servers function RFC3263 2 is selected Config data default set MG SIP MG SIP set dnsaddress Input DNS IP Address default 2001 db8 820 Specify DNS IP address Default MG SIP set dnsaddress Input DNS IP Address default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Spe...

Page 1888: ...6 Setting Example Note The conditions of this command are as follows Normally this command is not required to be changed To set SIP domain change the domain name from the domain name parameter of set sip_server com mand or set_self_sip_domain command 18 drsaddress Setting of IP address and port number of DRS server This command is used to assign IP address and port number of DRS server Select DNS ...

Page 1889: ... 0 0 0 0 172 16 253 2 IP address of DNS server Default 0 0 0 0 Input Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 UDP Port number of DNS server Default 3456 Tertiary DRS Setting Setting Tertiary DRS Input IP Address default 0 0 0 0 172 16 253 3 IP address of DNS server Default 0 0 0 0 Input Port Number 1024 65535 default 3456 3456 UDP Port number of DNS server Default 3456 Quaternary DRS Setting Setti...

Page 1890: ...7 Low High Delay default 0 0 1 0 Specify the low delay priority in an IP net work 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified Throughput default 0 0 1 0 Specify the throughput priority in an IP net work 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified Reliability default 0 0 1 0 Specify the reliability in an IP network 0 Not specified Default 1 Specified Cost default 0 0 1 0 Specify the low cost priority in an IP net ...

Page 1891: ...relay system SIP network This command is used to specify the DTMF relay system in SIP network MG SIP96 supports Out Band RFC2833 and In Band G 711 data transmission as voice data Negotiation Out Band or In Band can be assigned Setting Example When Negotiation is selected MG SIP set drs_qos Input type 1 IP Precedence 2 DiffServ 3 ToS 2 When DiffServ 2 is selected Input DSCP value 0 63 default 40 40...

Page 1892: ...101 MG SIP set dtmf_mode Select DTMF Mode 0 Negotiation default 1 Out Band 2 In Band Input 1 0 Negotiation Default 1 Out Band fixed 2 In Band fixed Input DTMF Duration value ms 50 240 default 120 120 Specify DTMF Duration 50 to 240ms Default 120ms Input DTMF Pause value ms 30 240 default 100 100 Specify DTMF Pause 30 to 240ms Default 100ms Input Payload type RFC2833 96 127 default 101 101 Specify ...

Page 1893: ...tination This command is used to set the alarm function which is activated to send a warning tone when a health check timeout occurs Setting Example Note Normally this command is not required to be changed Input DTMF Pause value ms 30 240 default 100 100 Specify DTMF Pause 30 to 240ms Default 100ms Input parameter error reason DTMF Duration DTMF Pause Min120ms MG SIP set h245_base_port_no Input H2...

Page 1894: ...re fore this command line will not appear for interface that is specified as 100Mbps fixed Note Normally this command is not required to be changed MG SIP set hc_timer Input H C timer value sec 130 65535 default 240 240 Assign the Health Check timer value Default 240 seconds MG SIP set interface Select Ether 1 speed 0 AUTO default 1 10M 2 100M 3 1000M Input 0 Assign an Ether speed type to Ether 1 ...

Page 1895: ...ther1 port only Select one port in the number of port setting and assign Ether1 s IP address only In this case Ether2 is not used For the MG SIP96 where Ether2 is already registered a message of Ether 2 Port data is erased Are you sure Y N is displayed To delete the data of Ether2 enter Y Setting Example IPv6 MG SIP set ipaddress Do you use one port only Y N n Select n to use IPv6 function One por...

Page 1896: ...he result Get by RA appears subsequent to the IP address and the Subnet mask generated by the Router Advertisement MG SIP set ipaddress Do you use one port only Y N n Ether 1 Setting Ether1 port Input IP Address default 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 1 IP address Default 0 0 0 0 Input Subnet mask default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask Default 0 0 0 0 Ether 2 Setting Ether2 port Input IP Address default 0 0 0 0...

Page 1897: ...d with set sip_server SIP register IP address configured with set sip_register When you change IPv4 to IPv6 IP address for Ether2 port configured with set ipaddress is generated by MG SIP96 after receiving the RA message When you change the IP version with this command see also the information in 19 5 3 IPv6 Function 27 ipx_route Setting of the route information in the Telephony Server network Thi...

Page 1898: ...r than y causes the following message Route setting command was interrupted MG SIP MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 0 Exit 1 None Default 2 Static Select 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 0 Exit Exit the command without execut ing anything 1 Set route information 2 Delete route information Select 1 Select Gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default Gateway 1 0 Exi...

Page 1899: ... error message is displayed Input the valid value Input destination network address invalid Input IP Address of Gateway 192 168 0 254 Specify the gateway address Default 0 0 0 0 Result Route type Static Gateway Address Destination network Prefix 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 32 Are you sure Y N y Note Pressing any key other than y displays the following message Route setting command was interrupted MG ...

Page 1900: ...s Destination network Prefix 192 168 0 254 0 0 0 0 32 Are you sure Y N y Note Pressing any key other than y displays the following message Route setting command was interrupted MG SIP MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 0 Exit 1 None Default 2 Static Select 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 2 0 Exit Exit the command without execut ing anything 1 Set routing informa...

Page 1901: ...ork Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 16 2 192 168 0 254 10 0 0 0 8 Select delete No 1 Select the number No of the route infor mation you want to delete Select 1 No Gateway Address Destination network Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 10 0 0 0 8 Are you sure Y N y Note Pressing any key other than y displays the following message Route setting command was interrupted MG SIP Telephony Server MG SIP96 Router 1 ...

Page 1902: ...teway settings Sample Data Setting for the above network configuration MG SIP set ipx_route Select Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select Gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default Gateway 1 Input Destination network Address 10 2 0 0 Input Subnet mask bit 0 32 16 Input IP Address of Gateway 10 1 0 254 Result Route type Static Gateway Address Destination netw...

Page 1903: ...mber for MG SIP96 The command is used to assign a pilot number of MG SIP96 for registration Setting Example Note Be sure not to enter a blank character to the end of the pilot number with the Copy and Paste fea tures of your personal computer and be careful not to mistype a character 0 zero or O al phabetical O for example 30 multi_regist Setting of the registration function per number This comman...

Page 1904: ... necessary when registration is to be done per number Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP96 connects 31 musictype Setting of the type of music to be sent from MG SIP96 This command is used to select music type that is sent from MG SIP96 MG SIP set multi_regist Select Multi registration mode 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 0 disable 1 enable Select...

Page 1905: ... only when the request message is the INVITE or UPDATE message 33 out_of_area_code Setting of the out of area error response This command is used to set the out of area IPX network error response Setting Example Note Normally this command is not required to be changed MG SIP set musictype Select Music Type 0 Type1 default 1 Type2 2 Type3 3 Type4 Input 0 0 Type1 Minuet 1 Type2 For Elise 2 Type3 WAV...

Page 1906: ...tity header PPID Setting Example Note SIP messages can be sent by converting P Preferred ID header PPID to P Asserted ID header PAID only when P Preferred ID header PPID is used for either of the following settings Enable privacy_pattern command and specify 2 RFC3323 3325 P Preferred ID Privacy Enable name_display command MG SIP set prack Select function to add 100rel to Supported Header 0 enable ...

Page 1907: ...ng to SIP network Setting Example When 0 is selected MG SIP set pre_negotiation_port_no Input Pre negotiation Port Number 1024 65535 default 61014 61014 Assign the UDP port receiving packets for voice control path Default 61014 MG SIP set privacy_pattern Select Privacy pattern of Calling Party Number 0 DisplayName default 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3325 0 DisplayName Default 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC332...

Page 1908: ...ern of Calling Party Number 0 DisplayName default 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3325 Input 1 0 DisplayName Default 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3323 3325 P Preferred ID Pri vacy Input a Dummy string MAX32 strings anonymous Enter a dummy string specified by pro vider in maximum of 32 characters MG SIP set privacy_pattern Select Privacy pattern of Calling Party Number 0 DisplayName default 1 Remote Party ID 2 RF...

Page 1909: ...ceives DRS packets This command is used to specify the UDP port number that receives the registration packets Setting Example Note Normally this command is not required to be changed 39 reg_interval Setting of the waiting time to retry after registration failure This command is used to assign the retry waiting time when failed to register due to the error response or no answer from the server when...

Page 1910: ...p_pathon Setting of Path on function by 183 Progress after receiving 180 Ringing This command is used to assign Path on function by 183Progress after receiving 180Ringing Setting Example MG SIP set reg_interval Input REGISTER interval timer value min 1 255 default 5 5 Re register waiting time min Default 5min Amount of Numbers Time minute 1 to 300 5 301 to 600 10 601 to 900 15 901 to 1000 20 MG SI...

Page 1911: ...s When normal style is specified When RFC4566 style is specified Note The conditions of this command are as follows This command is available for SP 3987 MGSIP PROG B Issue 2 or later The setting of G729 annexb no is available for SP 3987 MGSIP PROG B Issue 3 or later 44 self_sip_domain Setting of SIP domain name for MG SIP96 MG SIP set rtp_qos MG SIP set sdp_style Select SDP style setting 0 norma...

Page 1912: ...sion_timer Setting of session timer This command is used to specify the Session Timer Setting Example When Session Timer is Enable 0 is selected MG SIP set self_sip_domain Select Self SIP Domain mode 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 0 without domain name Default 1 with domain name Input a Self SIP Domain string MAX128 strings Input the SIP domain name in maximum of 128 characters MG SIP set self...

Page 1913: ... UAS Input 0 Determine a point to make refresher UAC User Agent Client UAS User Agent Server Select refresher uac ini INVITE 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 refresher uac addition to INVITE mes sage 0 refresher uac is not added 1 refresher uac is added Select Forced mode 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 0 Session timer will not be activated when Supported Require header does not exist default...

Page 1914: ...nput SIP Access Filter mask default 128 SIP server IP Address 2001 db8 860 128 When SIP Access Filter is enabled set SIP Access Filter mask Default perfect matching which means only SIP server address is authorized Result SIP Access Filter enable SIP server Address 2001 db8 860 SIP Access Filter mask 128 Displays the result When SIP Access Filter is enabled and SIP Access Filter mask is set the SI...

Page 1915: ...ask is set the SIP register IP address assigned by set sip_register is also authorized though it is not shown in the setting result of this command MG SIP set sip_accfilter Select the setting of SIP Access Filter 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Enable disable SIP Access Filter 0 SIP Access Filter is disabled default 1 SIP Access Filter is enabled Input SIP Access Filter mask default 255 255 255...

Page 1916: ... and expiration time of the SIP registrar The following figure shows an example of display When IP address 0 is selected IPv6 MG SIP set sip_port_no Input SIP Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 5060 Assign the port number that receives SIP messages Default 5060 MG SIP set sip_qos MG SIP set sip_register Select SIP register type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 0 When IP address 0 is selected Inpu...

Page 1917: ... 0 0 0 192 168 100 100 Assign the IP address of the SIP registrar Default 0 0 0 0 Input SIP register Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 5060 Assign the port number of the SIP registrar Default 5060 Input SIP register Expires timer value sec 1 65535 default 3600 3600 Assign the SIP registrar alive time in seconds Default 3600 MG SIP set sip_register Select SIP register type 0 IPAddress default 1 F...

Page 1918: ...ns of this command are as follows Normally this command is not required to be changed The system uses 192 96 2 consecutive port numbers from the RTP base port number If you select one port in the number of port setting be careful not to use the same RTP port number set by set sip_rtp_port_no or set ipx_rtp_port_no command when setting the non default SIP network RTP base port number 53 sip_server ...

Page 1919: ...ect 0 Select the setting of rport RFC3581 function 0 disable default 1 enable Input 0 Enable disable the rport RFC3581 function Default 0 Note 8 Note 5 Note 6 Input Domain Name default 0 MAX128 strings Input a string that specifies the service provider in maximum of 128 charac ters MG SIP set sip_server Select SIP server type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 0 When IP address 0 is selected Default...

Page 1920: ...8 strings Input a string that specifies the service provider in maximum of 128 charac ters MG SIP set sip_server Select SIP server type 0 IPAddress default 1 FQDN Input 1 When FQDN 1 is selected Input Fully Qualified Domain Name default 0 MAX63 strings Assign the FQDN of the proxy server in maximum of 63 characters default 0 Input SIP server Port Number 1024 65535 default 5060 5060 Assign the port...

Page 1921: ...ional service features Hold Retrieve Transfer from the SIP network side terminal Setting Example When enable 1 is selected the following screen is displayed When disable is selected no screen is dis played MG SIP set sip_tel_service Select SIP telephony service function 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 0 additional service feature is disabled Default 1 additional service feature is enabled Selec...

Page 1922: ... law information which the Telephony Server informs MG SIP96 since FP85 108 S5 Earlier than FP85 108 S5 the information to be informed by the Telephony Server is fixed to μ law In the Telephony Server side by the system data assignment ASYD System Data 1 Index 64 Bit 0 either μ law or A law can be specified as the A law μ law information which the Telephony Server informs MG SIP96 The Telephony Se...

Page 1923: ...able the use of update method Setting Example Note Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network where MG SIP96 connects 58 country_code Setting of a country code This command is used to set a country code on MG SIP96 Setting Example MG SIP set sip_transport Select the setting of SIP Transport Protocol 0 UDP default 1 TCP Input 1 Select the setting of SIP Transport Protoco...

Page 1924: ...d to enable disable Name Display service using MG SIP96 Setting Example Input Country Code 1 255 default 1 2 Set a country code 1 JP Japan Default 2 US North America 3 AU Australia 11 NZ New Zealand Note 12 MG SIP set multisession Current Setting Multi Session setting disable Displays the current setting Select Multi Session setting 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 0 Disabled default 1 Enabled R...

Page 1925: ...as been currently specified for the MG SIP96 The following shows a sample display MAC configuration data MG SIP show arp AddressNote 1 HWtype HWaddressNote 2 Flags MaskNote 3 Iface 192 168 0 250 ether 00 1D 92 9E 2A E0 C eth0 192 168 0 99 ether 00 B0 D0 31 FE 64 C eth0 192 168 0 1 ether 00 30 13 76 7B 52 C eth0 MG SIP show config 2009 03 05 14 49 29 Time when the configuration is acquired SP 3987 ...

Page 1926: ... MAC configuration data 1 DRS Data DRSData Configuration data of the Telephony Server 2 Common Config Data Common Config Data Common configuration data 3 Port Config Data Port Config Data Port configura tion data 4 SIP Config Data SIP Config Data SIP configura tion data 5 Route Config Data Route Config Data Route infor mation configuration data 9 Exit End of show command Select a reference number ...

Page 1927: ...Data Port configura tion data 4 SIP Config Data SIP Config Data SIP configura tion data 5 Route Config Data Route Config Data Route infor mation configuration data 9 Exit End of show command Select a reference number 2 Select 2 set signaling_port_no Signaling Port Number 61012 Currently assigned config data will be displayed set registration_port_no Registration Port Number 3456 set pre_negotiatio...

Page 1928: ... want to see more data or not To see the config data more enter y To exit this command press n set drs_qos DRS QoS 0xa0 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 set rtp_qos RTP QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 Does it display more Y N y set sip_qos SIP QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 ...

Page 1929: ...y the set hc_alarm When assigned the Telephony Server network side and SIP network side IPX and SIP side enable When assigned the Telephony Server network side IPX side enable When assigned SIP network side SIP side enable When assigned not to send Disable set hc_timer H C Timer value 240sec set musictype Music Type Type1 Display Type1 Type2 Type3 Type4 depends on which type you set set call_hold ...

Page 1930: ...me Display service set name_display Name Display enable Displays the current setting of the IP version Note 4 set ip_version IP Version IPv4 MG SIP show config 2009 03 05 14 49 29 Time when the configuration is acquired SP 3987 01 00 00 00 Software version information of MG SIP96 0 MAC Data MAC Data MAC configuration data 1 DRS Data DRSData Configuration data of the Telephony Server 2 Common Confi...

Page 1931: ...ess will be shown in IPv6 address format Note 4 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Auto Port type SIP Side Port MG SIP show config 2009 03 05 14 49 29 Time when the configuration is acquired SP 3987 01 00 00 00 Software version information of MG SIP96 0 MAC Data MAC Data MAC configuration data 1 DRS Data DRSData DRS configuration data 2 Common Config Data Common Config Data Common co...

Page 1932: ...elected by set ip_version command this IP address will be shown in IPv6 address format Note 4 SIP server Port Number 5060 SIP server Router type Strict rport RFC3581 function disable Note 4 Domain Name 0 set sip_register SIP register type IP Address SIP register IP Address 0 0 0 0 Displays the current setting of the SIP register IP Address When IPv6 1 is selected by set ip_version command this IP ...

Page 1933: ...elected RFC3323 3325 0 is dis played When Pattern 1 is dis played RFC3323 3325 1 is displayed set session_timer Session timer enable When disable is selected by the SET command Session_timer disable is displayed In this case Session expires and Refresher are not displayed Session expires 180sec Refresher UAC When UAS is selected for Refresher UAS is displayed Invite Refresher disable When enable i...

Page 1934: ... isub is selected by the SET command cdn_pattern Request URI isub is displayed and when Request URI userinfo is selected Request URI userinfo is displayed and P Called Party ID is selected P Called Party ID is displayed set sip_port_no SIP Port Number 5060 Does it display more Y N y set 184ToPrivacy 184 to privacy pattern disable When Pattern 1 is selected by the SET command 184toprivacy Pattern 1...

Page 1935: ...ode IN Band G 711 is displayed and when Out Band is selected Out Band RFC2833 is dis played DTMF Duration 120ms DTMF Pause 100ms Payload type 101 When DTMF Mode is In Band Payload type is not displayed set 183rbt RBT Addition 183w oSDP enable When disable is selected by the SET command 183rbt dis able is displayed set rtp_pathon Path on 183 after 180 disable When enable is selected by the SET comm...

Page 1936: ...r type Privacy or SIP URI When disable is set nothing is displayed set sip_tel_service SIP telephony service function disable Note 5 set reg_interval REGISTER interval timer 5min set update UPDATE method support function disable When enable is selected by the SET command update enable is displayed set auth_header Auth Header Cache function enable When disable is selected by the SET command auth_he...

Page 1937: ...cted by the SET command cpn_pattern Userinfo is displayed when Anonymous is selected Anon ymous is displayed and when P Asserted ID is selected P Asserted ID is displayed set cc_convert Country Code convert disable When enable is selected by the SET command cc_convert enable is displayed set check_number telephone number check function disable When enable is selected by the SET command check_numbe...

Page 1938: ...e 4 SIP Access Filter disable When enable is selected by the SET command sip_accfilter enable is displayed set sip_transport Note 4 SIP transport protocol UDP When TCP is selected by the SET command sip_transport TCP is displayed set dns_option Note 4 DNS type Locating SIP servers function RFC3263 DNS cache enable Locating SIP servers function RFC3263 data and DNS cache data are displayed set code...

Page 1939: ...re version information of MG SIP96 0 MAC Data MAC Data MAC configuration data 1 DRS Data DRS Data DRS configuration data 2 Common Config Data Common Config Data Common configuration data 3 Port Config Data Port Config Data Port configura tion data 4 SIP Config Data SIP Config Data SIP configura tion data 5 Route Config Data Route Config Data Route infor mation configuration data 9 Exit End of show...

Page 1940: ...n is enabled by the SET command sip_tel_service Settings for Hold put off hold function REFER NOTIFY function 3PCC function 3PCC function codec are available for SP 3987 MGSIP PROG B Issue 3 or later The following is an example of display when SIP telephony service function is enabled by the SET com mand sip_tel_service 3 interface Displaying of Link and Display states of Ether This command is use...

Page 1941: ...number of ports in use Ether 1 Link up Link state MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 MAC address IP Address 10 1 0 1 IP address Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask Interface Speed Duplex Auto Auto Operation speed and operation mode MG SIP show version Firmware Information SPNo Issue Base System Version Ver2 6 18 Fri Mar 6 16 45 44 JST 2009 Version information of the base system SP 3987 MGSIP PROG B S...

Page 1942: ...n This command is used to show status of ports and registration on MG SIP96 Setting Example If displaying port status Note 13 The following describes display of port status MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 3 CH status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP network registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Select...

Page 1943: ...gister Registration is NG Waiting Re Registration timer MG SIP96 is trying to register again When registration is disabled Register Server Configuration data is not set No setting data of set sip_register command MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 3 CH status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP network registration status 3 Info...

Page 1944: ...ork registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Select a reference number 2 SIP Registration Information Note 16 Registration NG RegIndex Information on CNTs RegIndex failing in reg istration MG No 1 MG No 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CNTs failing in registration MG No 2 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 3 MG No 4 MG No 4 Registration OK RegIndex Information on CNTs RegIndex succeeding in registratio...

Page 1945: ... 0 Number of INVITE client transactions and their maximum number INVITE Server Transaction 0 max 0 Number of INVITE server transactions and their maximum number Other Client Transaction 0 max 1 Number of client transactions other than INVITE and their maximum number Other Server Transaction 0 max 1 Number of server transactions other than INVITE and their maximum number the maximum number represen...

Page 1946: ...it 1 Select a port to use With the default setting select Ether1 If selecting Ether2 using two ports must be set in the set ipaddress com mand Note When IPv6 function is in ser vice download is not avail able on Ether2 So 2 Ether2 does not ap pear Current IP Address of MG SIP 10 41 1 100 Do you change IP Address of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change the IP address that is used for downlo...

Page 1947: ...ut new IP Address 172 16 253 250 Enter an IP address IP Address change was completed New IP Address of MG SIP 172 16 253 100 New Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 255 0 0 New IP Address of TFTP server 172 16 253 250 Are these IP Address correct Y correct N change Q quit When the specified IP addresses are correct enter y If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE service will be stop y mgsipmwlist txt download tftpDown...

Page 1948: ...tart Received Checksum matched Download was completed Please reboot after a download menu end Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 Quit Q q Input q When download is complete the menu appears again Enter q to exit download command MG SIP ...

Page 1949: ...dress of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change the IP address that is used for downloading enter y If you want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP Address 172 16 253 100 Enter the IP address Current Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 0 0 0 Do you change Subnet mask of MG SIP Y change N current Q quit y To change the subnet mask of the selected port enter y If you want to retur...

Page 1950: ...ess correct Y correct N change Q quit When the specified IP addresses are correct enter y If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE service will be stop y mgsipmwlist txt download tftpDownload User file TFTP start Received Program download Main program 0 tone data 1 music data 2 wave file 3 config data 4 Quit Q q Input 0 Select a file you want to download SP3987 MAIN main tar gz download Download starts tftpDo...

Page 1951: ... 4 Quit Q q Input q When download is complete the pro gram download menu appears again Enter q to exit download command Please reboot after a download menu end Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 Quit Q q Input q MG SIP ...

Page 1952: ...a subfolder named MUSIC to store WAVE files Place a WAVE file in the MUSIC folder a subfolder of the above mentioned firmware folder Form the download list file mgsipmwlist txt in a folder as shown below Example Note When adding WAVE files to the download list mgsipmwlist txt assign sequential numbers such as 00 01 02 to all files as shown in the red frame in the image above File Structure This is...

Page 1953: ...load of one program input 2 Quit Q q Input 2 Enter 2 to download a program indi vidually IP Address setting of MG SIP Select Ether Port 1 Ether1 2 Ether2 Q quit 1 Select a port to use With the default setting select Ether1 If selecting Ether2 using two ports must be set in the set ipaddress com mand Current IP Address of MG SIP 10 41 1 100 Do you change IP Address of MG SIP Y change N current Q qu...

Page 1954: ...3 250 Enter an IP address IP Address change was completed New IP Address of MG SIP 172 16 253 100 New Subnet mask of MG SIP 255 255 0 0 New IP Address of TFTP server 172 16 253 250 Are these IP Address correct Y correct N change Q quit If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE service will be stop y Enter y after confirming the entered IP address mgsipmwlist txt download tftpDownload User file TFTP start Recei...

Page 1955: ...ork address set as a static route in the routing table tftpDownload User file TFTP start Received Checksum No Check Checksum of SP3987 MUSIC music_3 wav is 23915 Download was completed Program download Main program 0 tone data 1 music data 2 wave file 3 config data 4 Quit Q q Input q After the download is finished down load menu is restored Please reboot after a download menu end Download menu Dow...

Page 1956: ...nload list file Check the contents of the download list file and the file name of the actually downloaded file 2 Access violation No access permission Check the TFTP server settings Error Display Cause of Error Troubleshooting Hardware type ERROR allDLoad ListDLoad Error Download failed Hardware type discrepancy for SN8165 Check if the downloaded file is compat ible with the hardware type for SN81...

Page 1957: ...me Bad length of the downloaded file name representing 92 characters or more when including the subfolder Check if the download list file is proper Transfer timed out Download failed Specifying non existing IP address Check the IP address of the TFTP serv er Specifying incorrect IP address Enabled Windows firewall Disable Windows firewall Disconnected LAN cable Make sure of no network problems in ...

Page 1958: ...ssigns the IP addresses on LAN side and SIP side set drsaddress Assigns the IP address of DRS set sip_server Assigns the IP address of SIP proxy server MG SIP exit login MG SIP reboot Do you want to save Config data Y N y Select if you want to save the running configura tion data y Saves the configuration data Note 17 Note 18 n Do not save the configuration data If other than the above is selected...

Page 1959: ...ide has not been assigned set ipaddress command SIP side If IP address for SIP network side has not been assigned set drsaddress command If IP address of DRS has not been assigned set sip_server command If IP address of SIP proxy server has not been assigned set keynumber command If a pilot number has not been assigned So Config data is made a default setup Is it all right Y N y You can select if ...

Page 1960: ...ev 0 304 0 618 1 020 0 247 ms MG SIP MG SIP ping6 2001 db8 1 0 216 97ff fee7 a8c0 Enter ping6 com mand and designate the target IPv6 address PING 2001 db8 1 0 216 97ff fee7 a8c0 2001 db8 1 0 216 97ff fee7 a8c0 from 2001 db8 1 0 216 97ff fee7 a8c0 eth1 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 2001 db8 1 0 216 97ff fee7 a8c0 icmp_seq 1 ttl 64 time 0 015 ms 64 bytes from 2001 db8 1 0 216 97ff fee7 a8c0 icmp_seq 2...

Page 1961: ...r 0 IPX side 1 SIP side 0 Select if this is on the Telephony Server side or SIP side 0 Telephony Server side 1 SIP side 0 is selected Target IP Address 172 16 253 3 Designate the IP address of the target traceroute to 172 16 253 3 172 16 253 3 3 hops max 38 byte packets 1 172 16 253 3 172 16 253 3 0 047 ms 0 028 ms 0 010 ms MG SIP MG SIP traceroute Interface number 0 IPX side 1 SIP side 1 Select i...

Page 1962: ...n This command is used to show the brief explanation of the configuration commands that are available on MG SIP96 Setting Example 1 172 17 253 210 172 17 253 210 0 047 ms 0 028 ms 0 010 ms MG SIP MG SIP help set sets config data of MG SIP show shows config data of MG SIP download downloads program of MG SIP ping Ping command traceroute Traceroute command exit log out command of config mode logout ...

Page 1963: ...command An incorrect command is entered Enter the command correctly Illegal parameters An incorrect parameter is entered Enter the parameter correctly Illegal parameters Not IPv6 address An incorrect parameter is entered Enter the IPv6 parameter correctly Available since SP 3987 MGSIP PROG B Issue 3 Illegal parameters Not IPv4 address An incorrect parameter is entered Enter the IPv4 parameter corr...

Page 1964: ...sing IP telephone MG SIP16 supports the SIP standard terminals based on RFC3261 Thereby MG SIP16 controlled by In ternal PHI BRI Note 1 of the Telephony Server provides a full array of the call routing capabilities to maximize network performance in the packet voice network SIP network MG SIP16 provides the system with a flexible and cost efficient network environment without wasting the accumulat...

Page 1965: ...Ether connector 100BASE TX 10BASE T 2 Port for connecting to LAN 1 Port for connecting to SIP network 1 Setting Desktop horizontal setting standard setting without any fastening hardware 19 inch rack mount SV70 RACK MTG is used Input power supply AC100V Electric power consumption Less than 10W Dimension Width 210mm Height 43mm Depth 297mm 1U half box size Weight 1 8 kg Environmental requirement Te...

Page 1966: ...REMARKS LAN interface 10Mbps 100Mbps Ethernet Communication speed 10Mbps 100Mbps auto negotiation Half Full duplex Protocol RFC3261 SIP Only UDP is supported SIP server conditions SIP Proxy Server or SIP Redirect Server Channel capability Maximum 16 channels MG SIP16 Voice CODEC G 711 transparent mode FAX relay Data transmission as voice data G 711 DTMF H 245 Alphanumeric LAN side RFC2833 SIP netw...

Page 1967: ...e during initialization Note 1 OFF Remains OFF when the initial setting is incomplete Ether connector Ether1 Ether interface for LAN Telephony Server network side Ether2 Ether interface for WAN SIP network side 100M lamp Ether1 2 Green Transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Transmission speed is 10 Mbps LINK lamp Ether1 2 Green Lights when Layer 1 link is established Flashes during IP packets are bein...

Page 1968: ...nnectors on Rear Panel Note 2 When reclosing the power supply wait for more than a second to turn on the power switch NAME DESCRIPTION REMARKS AC IN connector Plug in the attached AC power cable for main power supply POWER switch Power is supplied to MG SIP16 Up ON Down OFF Note 2 FG screw Ground cable connection AC IN POWER FG screw POWER switch AC IN connector ...

Page 1969: ...ntal setting b 19 inch rack mount Use a tray SV70 RACK MGT to mount MG SIP16 on 19 inch rack Be sure to check the SV70 RACK MGT is securely fixed on the rack before setting the MG SIP16 Front View PWR ON LINE MG SIP 19 inch Rack PWR ON LINE MG SIP Front View SV70 RACK MTG MG SIP16 ...

Page 1970: ... configuration Note Be sure to connect ground cable to AC power cable to prevent the device from lightning electric shock and external noises Note Do not connect the ground cable to gas barrel It may cause fire PWR ON LINE MG SIP Rear View Front View Maintenance Console PC RS 232C cable straight through SERENA SERENA D E S K T O P S E R E N A Enter SERENA SIP network LAN Cable Telephony Server Not...

Page 1971: ...d make sure network environment is appropriate for setting MG SIP16 1 Internal PHI BRI Data Assignment 2 MG SIP16 Data Assignment STEP 1 Data Assignment by PCPro 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 3 Power ON 1 Network Data Assignment STEP 4 Confi...

Page 1972: ...VOL 2 1719 MG SIP16 20 4 1 Data Assignment by PCPro For this information about MG SIP16 settings refer to M 111 MG SIP in Data Programming Manual ...

Page 1973: ...ntenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ...

Page 1974: ...UP on the rear panel of MG SIP16 STEP 2 Make sure the LED indicate normal status PWR lamp lights green Boot program automatically starts ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required REAR Turn ON the power switch UP PWR ON LINE MG SIP PWR lamp FRONT ...

Page 1975: ...However registration to the Telephony Server is not executed See Using Configuration Commands assign the MG SIP16 data The following data is assigned here for the usual data settings Note If the key control is not activated a communication problem between the console and the MG SIP16 might occur Make sure the connector is firmly inserted Using Configuration Commands assign the MG SIP16 data The fo...

Page 1976: ... refer to page 1738 STEP 5 Specify SIP server Open set sipserver command and assign the SIP server IP address For more information refer to page 1751 STEP 6 Specify the pilot number of MG SIP16 Open set keynumber command and assign the pilot number For more information refer to page 1744 Note Configuration data cannot be saved until the essential data above has been assigned Refer to Configura tio...

Page 1977: ...e connected to make MG SIP16 online For a one port configuration only LAN1 connection makes MG SIP16 online STEP 2 Check the lamp indication on the front panel of MG SIP16 PWR lamp lights green ON LINE lamp lights green 20 4 6 Operation Check When installation and necessary data assignment have been completed perform the following operation tests STEP 1 Reboot the MG SIP16 by using reboot command ...

Page 1978: ...er side STEP 3 Make sure of the connectivity between LAN and SIP network Open show status command to confirm the network registration status on the Telephony Server and SIP sides For more information refer to page 1763 STEP 4 Make sure of the registration status of MG SIP16 Open DIMG command on PCPro to check the registration status 20 4 7 Diagnosis STEP Diagnose the user program is working proper...

Page 1979: ...ows XP This section ex plains the procedure for setting data by using HyperTerminal as an example For Windows Vista or later operating systems prepare a communications terminal software yourself and assign the configuration data referring to the description for HyperTerminal When the program is activated messages are displayed After a prompt is displayed enter config after the prompt to login The ...

Page 1980: ...ist up all the command help by help or after the prompt and press the Enter key If you know more details about each command it is also available to list up the target help by command name Δ after the prompt and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when executing help function regarding help and set ad dress 20 5 2 How to Read Maintenance Command on This Section The commands on th...

Page 1981: ...ation page 1734 11 DNSADDRESS Assigns the DNS IP address page 1734 12 DOMAIN Specifies the domain of SIP MG page 1734 13 DRSADDRESS Assigns the DRS IP address page 1735 14 DRS_QOS Specifies the DRS ToS page 1735 15 DTMF_MODE Assigns a type of DTMF mode page 1736 16 H245_BASE_PORT_NO Assigns the H 245 base port in SIP network page 1737 17 HC_ALARM Assigns a type of Health Check pattern page 1737 18...

Page 1982: ...3 44 UPDATE Assigns the setting of update method page 1753 45 RESPONSE_TABLE Assigns the response table pattern page 1753 46 OUT_OF_AREA_CODE Assigns the error response code to inform out of area error on IPX network side page 1753 SHOW 1 ARP Displays the ARP page 1754 2 CONFIG Displays the configuration page 1754 3 INTERFACE Displays the link and setting state of Ether connection page 1762 4 ROUT...

Page 1983: ...TΔAUTH_HEADER The command is used to assign whether to add cache information to authentication header of request mes sage in updating ACK and REGISTER for re INVITE 200 OK Note Assign this setting in accordance with the specifications of connected SIP network MG SIP set 183rbt Is RBT added when 183 without SDP is received 0 enable 1 disable default 0 0 Enter 0 or 1 default 0 0 Enable local RBT con...

Page 1984: ...ining information for called number from SIP network When this command is enabled called number is obtained according to the priority order shown in the table below MG SIP set cause_table Select cause_table SIP_Error_response to Error_cause 0 normal 1 alternate routing default 0 _ Select the error translation table 0 Normal table default 1 Alternate routing table Direction of Call termination orig...

Page 1985: ...est URI userinfo To userinfo 2 Request URI P N Dest Discern Request URI userinfo Request URI isub To userinfo 3 P Called Party ID P Called Party ID userinfo To userinfo Request URI userinfo P N Dest Discern Request URI isub MG SIP set cdn_pattern Active called party number 0 To userinfo 1 isub 2 Request URI 3 P Called Party ID default 0 0 Select a type to obtain called number information 0 userinf...

Page 1986: ...ft to the next precedence However if any characters other than the ones indicated above are detected in Displayname the next and later priority will be disregarded and the cpn will be handled as blocked e g From 0123ABC sip 01234567 xxx com In this case the cpn will be handled as blocked when 0 is selected This command is available for SP 3843 SIPMG PROG B Issue 6 or later For the earlier versions...

Page 1987: ...ern 1 Obtain from Remote URL user Info section 2 Obtain from Remote Name Display Name section MG SIP set cpn_pattern What calling party number is given priority 0 displayname 1 Userinfo default 0 _ 0 Display name is given priority default 1 User info given priority MG SIP set default Are you sure Y N y Config data default set MG SIP Enter y to determine to set the default value MG SIP set dnsaddre...

Page 1988: ...56 DRS unit 3 DRS IP address 172 16 253 4 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 Assign the IP address of unit 0 Default 0 0 0 0 Assign the UDP port number for unit 0 Default 3456 Assign the IP address of unit 1 Default 0 0 0 0 Assign the UDP port number for unit 0 Default 3456 Assign the IP address of unit 2 Default 0 0 0 0 Assign the UDP port number for unit 0 Default 3456 Assign the IP address of unit...

Page 1989: ...ut type 1 PRECEDENCE 2 DIFFSERV 3 TOS 2 DSCP 0 63 40 When DIFFSERV 2 is selected Specify the ToS field of DiffServ default 40 Note b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 DSCP DSCP Differentiated Service Code Point 6 bits MG SIP set drs_qos Input type 1 PRECEDENCE 2 DIFFSERV 3 TOS 3 DSCP 00 FE a0 When TOS 3 is selected Specify the ToS field default a0 MG SIP set dtmf_mode DTMF Mode 0 Negotiation 1 Out Band 2 In B...

Page 1990: ...127 default 101 When Out Band 1 is selected Specify DTMF Duration Specify DTMF Pause Specify Payload type MG SIP set dtmf_mode DTMF Mode 0 Negotiation 1 Out Band 2 In Band default 0 2 DTMF Duration 50 240 default 120 DTMF Pause 30 240 default 100 When In Band 2 is selected Specify DTMF Duration Specify DTMF Pause Input parameter error reason DTMF Duration DTMF Pause Min120ms MG SIP set h245_base_p...

Page 1991: ...ase Ether2 is not used Note When the IP addresses of LAN and SIP network sides are assigned in the same segment use Ether1 only as shown below MG SIP set hc_timer H C timer value 130 65535 Assign the Health Check timer value default 240 seconds MG SIP set interface Ether 1 speed AUTO 0 10M 1 100M 2 0 Ether 2 speed AUTO 0 10M 1 100M 2 1 Ether 2 duplex Half 1 Full 2 1 Assign an Ether speed type to E...

Page 1992: ... the following message MG SIP set set ipx_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 0 Specify the Route type 0 Exit 1 None default 2 Static MG SIP set set ipx_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 0 MG SIP _ When Exit 0 is selected This will exit the command MG SIP set set ipx_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 1 Route type None Are you sure Y N y MG SIP _ When None 1 is selected Enter y to s...

Page 1993: ...ype 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default gateway 1 Destination network address 0 0 0 0 172 16 0 0 Input subnet mask bit 0 31 16 Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 192 168 0 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 16 Are you sure Y N y MG SIP _ When Static 2 is selected Select 1 to set the data Select Gateway 1 as a gateway type Specify the destination network addres...

Page 1994: ...0 254 0 0 0 0 0 Are you sure Y N y MG SIP _ When Static 2 is selected Select 1 to set the data Select Default gateway 2 as a gate way type Specify the default gateway IP address default 0 0 0 0 Enter y to set the data Note 1 Route setting command was interrupted MG SIP set ipx_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 2 No Gateway address Destination network Pr...

Page 1995: ...ed the following will be displayed Note 2 Pressing any key other than y displays the following message Note Routing assignment is unnecessary for network segment assigned to Ether 0 There is no static route table to delete Route setting command was interrupted ...

Page 1996: ...ateway IP address 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 10 1 0 254 10 0 0 0 8 MG SIP set sip_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default gateway 2 Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 192 168 1 254 0 0 0 0 0 1...

Page 1997: ...gn the SIP server for register destination The as signment of setΔsip_register is necessary when registration is to be done per number Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on SIP network MG SIP set ipx_rtp_port_no IPX side RTP port number 1024 65024 51000 Assign the base port number that is used for RTP at LAN side default 51000 Note 1 MG SIP set keynumber Key number MAX32 0 Assign ...

Page 1998: ...ase select the music type 0 Type1 1 Type2 default Type1 0 Select the music type to be sent from the MG SIP16 0 Type 1 Minuet default 1 Type 2 For Elise MG SIP set prack Is 100rel enable 0 enable 1 disable default 0 0 Function which stop cyclical send of Provisional Response 0 disable 1 enable default 0 0 Select enable or disable for PRACK function 0 Prack function is enabled default 1 Prack functi...

Page 1999: ...s selected MG SIP set privacy_pattern Please select calling number privacy pattern 0 DisplayName 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3325 default 0 1 Please input a dummy string MAX32 anonymous Privacy pattern Remote Party ID Dummy string anonymous When Remote Party ID 1 is selected Enter a dummy string in maximum of 32 characters Note 1 MG SIP set privacy_pattern Please select calling number privacy pattern 0...

Page 2000: ...s command adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network 32 SETΔRTP_QOS This command is used to specify the QoS of Real Time Protocol RTP The sample data setting is ex plained in 14 SET DRS_QOS command 33 SETΔSELF_SIP_DOMAIN This command is used to create SIP domain MG SIP set reg_interval REGISTER Interval timer 1 255min default 5min 5 Assign the registration retry waiting time Re register wa...

Page 2001: ... as the SIP domain of MG SIP 16 34 SETΔSESSION_TIMER This command is used to specify the Session Timer MG SIP set self_sip_domain Self SIP domain mode is disable 0 disable 1 enable default 0 0 When 0 disable is speci fied default MG SIP set self_sip_domain Self SIP domain mode is disable 0 disable 1 enable default 0 1 Please input a self SIP domain string MAX128 When 1 enable is speci fied Input t...

Page 2002: ...efresher UAC Invite Refresher disable Forced disable When Enable 0 is selected Set the session timer Determine a point to make refresher UAC User Agent Client UAS User Agent Server refresher uac addition to INVITE message 0 refresher uac is not added 1 refresher uac is added forced mode 0 Session timer will not be activated when Sup ported Require header does not exist default 1 Session timer will...

Page 2003: ..._ Select the registrar type 0 IP address 1 FQDN MG SIP set sip_register SIP register type 0 IP address 1 FQDN 0 SIP register IP address 192 168 100 100 SIP register port number 1024 65535 5060 SIP register expires time 1 65535 3600 When IP address 0 is selected Assign the IP address of the SIP registrar default 0 0 0 0 Assign the port number of the SIP registrar default 5060 Assign the registrar a...

Page 2004: ...00 Assign the RTP base port number for SIP side default 50000 Note MG SIP set sip_server SIP server type 0 IP address 1 FQDN _ Select the type of the proxy server 0 IP address 1 FQDN MG SIP set sip_server SIP server type 0 IP address 1 FQDN 0 SIP server IP address 192 168 100 100 SIP server port number 1024 65535 5060 Strict or Loose 0 1 0 Domain Name MAX128 _ When IP address 0 is selected Assign ...

Page 2005: ...er in a maximum of 62 char acters default 0 Assign the port number of the proxy server default 5060 Select a Strict router or Loose router for the proxy server default 0 0 Strict router 1 Loose router Input a string that specifies the service provider in a maximum of 128 characters MG SIP set sip_tel_service Is SIP telephony service function disable 0 disable 1 enable default 0 _ Enable disable ad...

Page 2006: ...command is not required to be changed This command is available for SP 3843 SIPMG PROG B Issue 6 or later MG SIP set slipresp SIP Server slip response code 400 699 _ Set the SLIP response code default 488 MG SIP set update Is the UPDATE method support function disable 0 disable 1 enable default 0 _ Enable disable update method 0 Update method is enabled default 1 Update method is disabled MG SIP s...

Page 2007: ...s Flags Refcnt Use Interface 90 0 0 63 08 00 3e 23 79 e7 0x405 0 82 lo0 MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Please choose a reference number _ Select a desired item 0 9 to display MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Plea...

Page 2008: ...red DRS will be displayed MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 2 set signaling_port_no Signal port number 61012 set registration_port_no Registration port number 3456 set pre_negotiation_port_no Voice path port number 61014 set ipx_rtp_port_no IPX side RTP port number 51000 set...

Page 2009: ...nable When assigned not to send Disable set drs_qos DRS QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 set rtp_qos RTP QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 Does it display more Y N y set sip_qos SIP QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 set domain Domain name 0 set dnsaddress DNS IP address 0 0 0 0 set hc_alarm H C Alarm type IP...

Page 2010: ...ed Duplex Auto Automatic Port type SIP Side Port When Port Config Data 3 is selected Information of data that is assigned for ports MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 4 set sip_server Server type 0 Sever IP address 0 0 0 0 Server port number 5060 Strict or Loose 0 Domain Name...

Page 2011: ...port_no SIP port number 5060 Does it display more Y N y set 184ToPrivacy 184 Privacy function disable set slipresp SIP Server slip response code 488 set self_sip_domain Self SIP domain mode disable Does it display more Y N y set dtmf_mode DTMF Mode Negotiation SIP SDP DTMF Duration 120 ms DTMF Pause 100 ms DTMF Payload type 101 set 183rbt RBT add 193 w o SDP enable set pathon Path on 183 after 180...

Page 2012: ...SIP telephony service function disable set reg_interval SIP telephony service function disable set update UPDATE Method support disable set auth_header Auth header cache function enable set cause_table Cause_table selection normal set response_table Response_table selection normal Does it display more Y N y set cpn_pattern Priority of Calling number Displayname set cc_convert Country code convert ...

Page 2013: ...tion Displayed as pattern shown below pertaining to the data assigned disable enable 1 enable 2 Self SIP domain mode May be displayed enabled pertaining to the data assigned Self SIP domain string Not displayed when the value of Self SIP domain mode is disable Domain name assigned will be displayed when enable DTMF Mode Displayed as pattern shown below pertaining to the data assigned Negotiation S...

Page 2014: ...ction enable Replaces function disable Replaces function setting is not displayed when disable is assigned in sip_tel_service UPDATE Method support function May be displayed enable pertaining to the data assigned Auth header cache function May be displayed disable pertaining to the data assigned Cause_table selection May be displayed alternate routing pertaining to the data assigned Item Detail ...

Page 2015: ...a reference number 5 Ether 1 Route type Static No Gateway address Destination IP address Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 16 Ether 2 Route type Static No Gateway address Destination IP address Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 0 0 0 0 0 When Route Config Data 5 is selected MG SIP show interface Use one port only Ether 1 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Auto Link status Link up MAC a...

Page 2016: ...me to display the route table information when DSN server IP address has been assigned MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 9 Exit Please choose a reference number _ 0 Port status default 1 Telephony Server network registra tion status 2 SIP network registration status 9 Exit MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 0 ...

Page 2017: ... Please choose a reference number 1 MG SIP IPX Registration Information Registration Done DRS IP address 172 16 253 1 When IPX status 1 is selected Note MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 2 MG SIP IPX Registration Information Registration Done DRS IP address 172 16 253 1 When SIP status 2 is selected Note Status Displayed Message Rema...

Page 2018: ...egistration Done MG SIP SIP Registration Information Registration NG RegIndex MG No 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 4 Registration OK RegIndex MG No 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 4 When SIP status 2 is selected registration failed CNT RegIndex information is displayed here registration failed CNTs registration OK CNT RegIndex information is displayed here registration OK CNTs...

Page 2019: ...s set Current TFTP server IP address 10 41 1 250 Change TFTP server IP address Y change N current Q quit y If you want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP address 172 16 253 250 Change IP address complete New MG SIP IP address 172 16 253 100 New TFTP IP address 172 16 253 250 Are these IP address correct Y correct N modify Q quit If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE service will be ...

Page 2020: ...nu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 input q MG SIP _ When download is complete the menu appears again Enter q to exit download command Note Be sure to reboot the MG SIP16 after downloading data ...

Page 2021: ...address 172 16 253 250 Are these IP address correct Y correct N modify Q quit y Program download Main program 0 dtmf data 1 music data 2 Quit Q q Input 0 SP3843 mgsip bin download Checksum matched Complete Program download Main program 0 dtmf data 1 music data 2 Quit Q q Input q MG SIP _ To download all programs enter 1 Select Ether1 that is used for down load To change the IP address that is used...

Page 2022: ...easures Meaning of Error Number Checksum unmatched Checksum of Filename is 12345 Not 66666 tftp Download tftp Copy ERROR errno 0x4b0007 ERROR NUMBER CAUSE COUNTERMEASURES 0x4b0007 MG SIP16 and the TFTP server is not con nected Connect MG SIP16 and TFTP server correctly 0x4b0008 The specified download file does not exist in TFTP server Check the file name of the download file Check the TFTP server ...

Page 2023: ... bytes 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 0 ttl 255 time 9 6ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 1 ttl 255 time 1 1ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 2 ttl 255 time 9 6ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 3 ttl 255 time 9 9ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 4 ttl 255 time 9 6ms 172 16 253 3 ping statistics 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0 packet loss Round trip min avg max 1...

Page 2024: ...boot start Config data can be saved before rebooting the MG SIP16 To save the running config to the Flash memory enter y y save Note 1 n not save If other than above is entered Reboot command was interrupted will be displayed Reboot the MG SIP16 or not is specified y reboot n not reboot If other than above is entered Reboot command was interrupted will be displayed The following setting commands a...

Page 2025: ... all the commands that are available on the Mainte nance Console MG SIP exit Exit ConfigMode Bye Exit from Config mode MG SIP help set Config data set command show Config data show command download MG SIP program download command ping Ping command exit Config mode exit command reboot MG SIP reboot command help Help command Help command Brief explanation is displayed ...

Page 2026: ...ommand Please set up SIP server IP address FQDN Specify SIP server by set sip_server command Please set up keynumber Assign a pilot number by set keynumber command User program download error 1 Internal error User program download error 2 Download file cannot be found User program download error 3 Network connection cannot be established User program download error 4 TFTP errors other than User pr...

Page 2027: ...phone Equivalent to 96 channel type of MG SIP MG SIP16 supports the SIP standard terminals based on RFC3261 Thereby MG SIP16 controlled by Internal PHI BRI Note 2 of the Telephony Server provides a full array of the call routing capabilities to maximize network performance in the packet voice network SIP network MG SIP16 provides the system with a flexible and cost efficient network environment wi...

Page 2028: ...VOL 2 1775 MG SIP16 SCA 16SIPMGA MG 16SIPMGA Note The following table shows the number of available channels of MG SIP16 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 60ms G 711 16ch 16ch 16ch G 729a 16ch 16ch 16ch G 723 1 ...

Page 2029: ...nd MG 16SIPMGA The figure below shows the outer view of MG SIP16 SCA 16SIPMGA and MG SIP16 MG 16SIPMGA Outerview The following shows the outerview of MG SIP16 ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP MG SIP 16 MG 16SIPMGA MG SIP 16 SCA 16SIPMGA FRONT FRONT 1U MPC ...

Page 2030: ...on ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP 400 0 1 3 75 8 26 43 8 1 72 430 0 210 0 1 72 43 0 11 6 297 0 1 4 93 Unit mm inch MG 16SIPMGA SCA 16SIPMGA ...

Page 2031: ...ort for connecting to SIP network 1 Setting Desktop horizontal setting standard setting without any fastening hardware 19 inch rack mount SV70 RACK MTG is used Input power supply AC100V 50 60Hz 10 AC120V 50 60Hz 10 AC230V 50 60Hz 10 AC240V 50 60Hz 10 Electric power consumption 15W 30VA Weight 1 8 kg Environmental requirement Temperature 0 40 C Humidity 20 90 not condensing Cooling Air cooling with...

Page 2032: ...100Mbps Ethernet Communication speed 10Mbps 100Mbps auto negotiation Half Full duplex Protocol RFC3261 SIP Only UDP is supported SIP server conditions SIP Proxy Server Channel capability Maximum 16 channels MG SIP16 Voice CODEC G 711 G 729a FAX relay Data transmission as voice data G 711 DTMF H 245 Alphanumeric LAN side RFC2833 SIP network side Data transmission as voice data G 711 Address transla...

Page 2033: ...plete Ether connector Ether1 Ether interface for LAN Ether2 Ether interface for WAN SIP network side 100M lamp Ether1 2 Green Transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Transmission speed is 10 Mbps LINK lamp Ether1 2 Green Lights when Layer 1 link is established Flashes during IP packets are being sent received OFF Remains OFF when Layer 1 link is not established CONSOLE Interface for connecting an exter...

Page 2034: ...switch again Note 2 This lamp is equipped with SCA 16SIPMGA only NAME DESCRIPTION REMARKS AC power inlet Plug in an attached three polar grounded AC power cable for main power supply Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft POWER switch Power is supplied to MG SIP16 Up ON Down OFF Note 1 PACT lamp Indicates the state of the power unit Note 2 PACT GND terminal Cooling fan AC power inlet AC power inlet Power switch ...

Page 2035: ...ch as HyperTerminal grounding less than 10 Ω MG SIP Card SCA 16SIPMGA STEP 1 Use the anti static kit STEP 2 Insert MG SIP16 Card into the 1U MPC module as shown in the figure below which shows an ex ample where the card is installed into left side of the 1U MPC STEP 3 Secure the inserted card onto the unit firmly using the two screws ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOL...

Page 2036: ...VOL 2 1783 MG SIP16 SCA 16SIPMGA MG 16SIPMGA MG SIP Box MG 16SIPMGA Install the unit on a flat and stable surface ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP FRONT ...

Page 2037: ... network LAN Power Supply Serial Port connection to Maintenance Console Connect the required cables according to your system configuration ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP RS 232C D sub 9 pin Maintenance Console PC used for configuration setting AC power source AC 100 240 V LAN SIP Network Telephony Server ...

Page 2038: ... the other end of the power cable to appropriate AC supply Note For the safety measures against static electricity lightning strike and other electrical surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10 W PACT AC power inlet AC power cable stopper AC power cable stopper REAR REAR MG 16SIPMGA SCA 16SIPMGA Secure the power cable onto the unit cable tie power cable power cable power ...

Page 2039: ...ther 2 connectors at this time Theses will be connected after setting the network data ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP MG 16SIPMGA SCA 16SIPMGA FRONT FRONT Note Note CONSOLE connector RJ 45 serial RS 232C D sub 9 pin Maintenace Console Maintenace Console CONSOLE cable ...

Page 2040: ...Business and make sure the network environment is appropriate for setting MG SIP16 1 Internal PHI PRI Data Assignment 2 MG SIP16 Data Assignment STEP 1 Data Assignment by PCPro 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 3 Power ON 1 Network Data Assignme...

Page 2041: ...VOL 2 1788 MG SIP16 SCA 16SIPMGA MG 16SIPMGA 21 4 1 Data Assignment by PCPro Please refer to M 111 MG SIP in Data Programming Manual Business ...

Page 2042: ...al on the Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions ...

Page 2043: ...re the LED indicate normal status PWR lamp lights green Boot program automatically starts ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT MG SIP16 Card REAR Turn ON the power switch UP Turn ON the power switch UP MG SIP16 Box REAR MG SIP16 Card Box FRONT ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP PWR lamp ...

Page 2044: ...irm the configuration information Press ESC key within five seconds after Main Program Start to display prompt Then input config to go into the configuration mode However registration to the Telephony Server is not executed Note If the key control is not activated a communication problem between the console and the MG SIP16 might occur Make sure the connector is firmly inserted DP OK N MG ID 00006...

Page 2045: ...nfiguration Enter in config mode STEP 1 When a prompt is displayed enter config and then press Enter key STEP 2 A prompt MG SIP is displayed indicating that you are in config mode Setting Data Configuration Command IP address of MG SIP16 s ether port set ipaddress IP address of MGC DRS set drsaddress SIP server data set sip_server Pilot number of MG SIP16 set keynumber _ config MG SIP _ ...

Page 2046: ...Ether1 and Ether2 belong to the same segment Ether1 for connecting LAN Ether2 for connecting WAN SIP network MG SIP set ipaddress Use one port only Y N n Ether 1 IP address 172 16 0 100 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Ether 2 IP address 172 16 1 100 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Enter n when two ports are used Ether 1 LAN Assign the IP address default 0 0 0 0 for Ether 1 Assign the subnet mask default 0 0 0 0 for Eth...

Page 2047: ... DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 DRS unit 2 DRS IP address 0 0 0 0 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 DRS unit 3 DRS IP address 0 0 0 0 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 Assign the IP address of DRS Assign the UDP port number DRS Default 3456 Skip this by pressing Enter key Skip this by pressing Enter key Skip this by pressing Enter key Skip this by pressing Enter key Skip this by pressing Enter key Sk...

Page 2048: ...lified Domain Name MAX63 nec com SIP server port number 1024 65535 5060 Strict or Loose 0 1 0 Domain Name MAX128 _ When FQDN 1 is selected Assign the FQDN of the proxy server in maximum of 62 charac ters default 0 Assign the port number of the proxy server default 5060 Select a Strict router or Loose router for the proxy server default 0 0 Strict route 1 Loose router Input a string that specifies ...

Page 2049: ...ata can be saved before rebooting the MG SIP16 Enter y to save the assigned data onto Flash memory Note 1 Reboot the MG SIP16 or not is specified Enter y to reboot the MG SIP16 Config data is saved rebooting the MG SIP16 the following setting commands are not perfect set ipaddress command IPX side set ipaddress command SIP side set drsaddress command set sip_server command set keynumber command So...

Page 2050: ... LAN1 and LAN2 must be connected to make MG SIP16 online For a one port configuration only LAN1 connection makes MG SIP16 online STEP 2 Make sure the ON LINE lamp lights green on the front panel MG SIP ONLINE START ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP LAN SIP Network LAN Cable LAN Cable Ether 2 fo...

Page 2051: ...using PCPro make sure the registration status of MG SIP16 by using DIMG command 21 4 7 Trouble Shooting If the message shown below appears on the console make sure of the following LAN cable is securely inserted to Ether 2 Ether 2 LINK lamp WAN side SIP network lights green If no message appears within 3 minutes it seems that no communication has been established between the Telephony Server and t...

Page 2052: ...lains the procedure for setting data by using HyperTerminal as an example For Windows Vista or later operating systems prepare a communications terminal software yourself and assign the configuration data referring to the description for HyperTerminal When the program is activated messages are displayed After a prompt is displayed enter config after the prompt to login The following prompt appears...

Page 2053: ...request to list up all the command help by help or after the prompt and press the Enter key If you know more details about each command it is also available to list up the target help by command name Δ after the prompt and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when executing help function regarding help and set ad dress 21 5 2 How to Read Maintenance Command on This Section The co...

Page 2054: ...cpn_pattern Assigns how to obtain cpn calling party number page 1807 12 default Specifies default settings of the configuration page 1808 13 dnsaddress Assigns the DNS IP address page 1808 14 domain Specifies the domain of MG SIP16 page 1808 15 drsaddress Assigns the DRS IP address page 1809 16 drs_qos Specifies the DRS ToS page 1809 17 dtmf_mode Assigns a type of DTMF mode page 1810 18 h245_base_...

Page 2055: ...e information in the SIP side page 1827 44 sip_rtp_port_no Assigns the RTP port in SIP network page 1827 45 sip_server Assigns the IP address or the Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN to SIP server page 1827 46 sip_tel_service Assigns the setting of additional services page 1828 47 slipresp Assigns a SLIP response code page 1829 48 update Assigns the setting of update method page 1829 49 response_ta...

Page 2056: ...o be assigned for each of Another keynumber 1 2 3 Assign value 0 default for parameter when nothing is to be assigned 3 SETΔAUTH The command is used to specify a User ID and a password for HTTP Digest Auth This parameter is used when the SIP server performs authentication MG SIP set 183rbt Is RBT added when 183 without SDP is received 0 enable 1 disable default 0 0 Enter 0 or 1 default 0 0 Enable ...

Page 2057: ... PROG A Issue 5 or later MG SIP set auth_header Is Authorization header cache function enable 0 enable 1 disable default 0 _ Select whether to use cache function to authentication header 0 Cached authentication information is added default 1 Cached authentication information is not added MG SIP set call_hold Select the setting of Call Hold function 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Input RTP dete...

Page 2058: ... way of obtaining information for called number from SIP network When this command is enabled a called number is obtained according to the priority order shown in the table below MG SIP set cause_table Select cause_table SIP_Error_response to Error_cause 0 normal 1 alternate routing default 0 _ Select the error translation table 0 Normal table default 1 Alternate routing table Direction of Call te...

Page 2059: ...st URI isub Request URI userinfo To userinfo 2 Request URI P N Dest Discern Request URI userinfo Request URI isub To userinfo 3 P Called Party ID P Called Party ID userinfo To userinfo Request URI userinfo P N Dest Discern Request URI isub MG SIP set cdn_pattern Active called party number 0 To userinfo 1 isub 2 Request URI 3 P Called Party ID default 0 0 Select a type to obtain called number infor...

Page 2060: ...ty will shift to the next precedence However if any characters other than the ones indicated above are detected in Displayname the next and later priority will be disregarded and the cpn will be handled as blocked e g From 0123ABC sip 01234567 xxx com In this case the cpn will be handled as blocked when 0 is selected This command is available for SP 3905 MG SIP 16 PROG A Issue 3 or later For the e...

Page 2061: ...r Info section Order of priority Obtaining pattern 1 Obtain from Remote URL user Info section 2 Obtain from Remote Name Display Name section MG SIP set cpn_pattern What calling party number is given priority 0 displayname 1 Userinfo default 0 _ 0 Display name is given priority default 1 User infois given prior ity MG SIP set default Are you sure Y N y Config data default set MG SIP Enter y to dete...

Page 2062: ...24 65535 3456 DRS unit 3 DRS IP address 172 16 253 4 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 Assign the IP address of unit 0 Default 0 0 0 0 Assign the UDP port number for unit 0 Default 3456 Assign the IP address of unit 1 Default 0 0 0 0 Assign the UDP port number for unit 0 Default 3456 Assign the IP address of unit 2 Default 0 0 0 0 Assign the UDP port number for unit 0 Default 3456 Assign the IP addr...

Page 2063: ...et drs_qos Input type 1 PRECEDENCE 2 DIFFSERV 3 TOS 2 DSCP 0 63 40 When DIFFSERV 2 is selected Specify the ToS field of DiffServ default 40 Note 1 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 DSCP DSCP Differentiated Service Code Point 6 bits MG SIP set drs_qos Input type 1 PRECEDENCE 2 DIFFSERV 3 TOS 3 DSCP 00 FE a0 When TOS 3 is selected Specify the ToS field default a0 MG SIP set dtmf_mode DTMF Mode 0 Negotiation 1...

Page 2064: ...e RFC2833 96 127 default 101 When Out Band 1 is selected Specify DTMF Duration Specify DTMF Pause Specify Payload type MG SIP set dtmf_mode DTMF Mode 0 Negotiation 1 Out Band 2 In Band default 0 2 DTMF Duration 50 240 default 120 DTMF Pause 30 240 default 100 When In Band 2 is selected Specify DTMF Duration Specify DTMF Pause Input parameter error reason DTMF Duration DTMF Pause Min120ms MG SIP se...

Page 2065: ...number of port setting and assign Ether1 s IP address only In this case Ether2 is not used MG SIP set hc_timer H C timer value 130 65535 Assign the Health Check timer value default 240 seconds MG SIP set interface Ether 1 speed AUTO 0 10M 1 100M 2 0 Ether 2 speed AUTO 0 10M 1 100M 2 1 Ether 2 duplex Half 1 Full 2 1 Assign an Ether speed type to Ether 1 0 Automatic Negotiation default 1 10 Mbps fix...

Page 2066: ...this case default values are assigned automatically When Exit Route type 0 is selected When None Route type 1 is selected MG SIP set set ipx_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 0 Specify the Route type 0 Exit 1 None default 2 Static MG SIP set set ipx_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 0 MG SIP _ When Exit 0 is selected This will exit the command MG SIP set set ipx_route Route type 0 Exit...

Page 2067: ...xit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default gateway 1 Destination network address 0 0 0 0 172 16 0 0 Input subnet mask bit 0 31 16 Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 192 168 0 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 16 Are you sure Y N y MG SIP _ When Static 2 is selected Select 1 to set the d...

Page 2068: ...px_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default gateway 2 Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 192 168 0 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 192 168 0 254 0 0 0 0 0 Are you sure Y N y MG SIP _ When Static 2 is selected Select 1 to set the data Select Default gateway 2 as a gate way type Specify th...

Page 2069: ...1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 2 No Gateway address Destination network Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 16 2 172 16 0 254 10 0 0 0 8 Select Delete No 1 No Gateway address Destination network Prefix 1 172 16 0 254 10 0 0 0 8 Are you sure Y N y MG SIP _ Select 2 to delete routing data Select 2 to delete routing data Note 1 Select No of Static Route Information you want to d...

Page 2070: ...ay IP address 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 10 1 0 254 10 0 0 0 8 MG SIP set sip_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default gateway 2 Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 192 168 1 254 0 0 0 0 0 10 4 ...

Page 2071: ...ister to assign the SIP server for register destination The as signment of setΔsip_register is necessary when registration is to be done per number Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on SIP network MG SIP set ipx_rtp_port_no IPX side RTP port number 1024 65024 51000 Assign the base port number that is used for RTP at LAN side default 51000 Note 1 MG SIP set keynumber Key number MA...

Page 2072: ...utomatically To make this assignment effective it is required to execute the SAVE command and to restart the MG SIP16 by using the REBOOT command MG SIP set musictype Please select the music type 0 Type1 1 Type2 default Type1 0 Select the music type to be sent from the MG SIP 0 Type 1 Minuet default 1 Type 2 For Elise MG SIP set prack Is 100rel enable 0 enable 1 disable default 0 0 Function which ...

Page 2073: ...y MG SIP set privacy_pattern Please select calling number privacy pattern 0 DisplayName 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3325 default 0 0 Privacy pattern DisplayName When DisplayName 0 is selected MG SIP set privacy_pattern Please select calling number privacy pattern 0 DisplayName 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3325 default 0 1 Please input a dummy string MAX32 anonymous Privacy pattern Remote Party ID Dummy strin...

Page 2074: ...g the largest number within the same MG SIP group referring to table below 33 SETΔRTP_PATHON This command is used to assign Path on function by 183Progress after receiving 180Ringing Note Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on the SIP network MG SIP set registration_port_no Registration port number 1024 65535 3456 Assign the port number default 3456 MG SIP set reg_interval REGISTER...

Page 2075: ...ted between the SIP server and MG SIP16 Note When no data has been assigned by this command the SIP domain that has been set by setΔsip_server command will be used as the SIP domain of MG SIP16 MG SIP set rtp_qos See SET DRS_QOS command for more details MG SIP set sdp_style Select SDP style setting 0 normal default 1 RFC4566 Input 0 Select SDP style setting 0 normal default 1 conforms to RFC4566 M...

Page 2076: ... in INVITE 0 disable 1 enable default 0 1 forced mode 0 disable 1 enable default 0 0 Session timer is enable Session expires 180 Refresher UAC Invite Refresher disable Forced disable When Enable 0 is selected Set the session timer Determine a point to make refresher UAC User Agent Client UAS User Agent Server refresher uac addition to INVITE message 0 refresher uac is not added 1 refresher uac is ...

Page 2077: ...00 100 255 255 255 255 Select the setting of Burst Access Filter 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Input Burst Access limit timer value sec 1 60 default 1 30 Input Burst Access limit number value 1 1000 default 10 500 Input Burst Access reject response code 400 699 default 488 600 MG SIP Enable disable SIP Access Filter Note 1 0 SIP Access Filter is disabled default 1 SIP Access Filter is enabled...

Page 2078: ...fault 1 enable Input 1 Input SIP Access Filter mask default 255 255 255 255 SIP server FQDN sipserver nec com 255 255 255 255 Select the setting of Burst Access Filter 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Input Burst Access limit timer value sec 1 60 default 1 30 Input Burst Access limit number value 1 1000 default 10 500 Input Burst Access reject response code 400 699 default 488 600 MG SIP Enable ...

Page 2079: ...P register type 0 IP address 1 FQDN _ Select the register type 0 IP address 1 FQDN MG SIP set sip_register SIP register type 0 IP address 1 FQDN 0 SIP register IP address 192 168 100 100 SIP register port number 1024 65535 5060 SIP register expires time 1 65535 3600 When IP address 0 is selected Assign the IP address of the register server default 0 0 0 0 Assign the port number of the register ser...

Page 2080: ... sip_route See SET IPX_ROUTE command for more details MG SIP set sip_rtp_port_no SIP side RTP port number 1024 65024 50000 Assign the base RTP port number for SIP side default 50000 Note 1 MG SIP set sip_server SIP server type 0 IP address 1 FQDN _ Select the type of the proxy server 0 IP address 1 FQDN MG SIP set sip_server SIP server type 0 IP address 1 FQDN 0 SIP server IP address 192 168 100 1...

Page 2081: ... the proxy server in a maximum of 62 char acters default 0 Assign the port number of the proxy server default 5060 Select a Strict router or Loose router for the proxy server default 0 0 Strict router 1 Loose router Input a string that specifies the service provider in a maximum of 128 characters MG SIP set sip_tel_service Is SIP telephony service function disable 0 disable 1 enable default 0 _ En...

Page 2082: ...ote Generally this command is not required to be changed This command is available for SP 3905 MG SIP 16 PROG A Issue 3 or later MG SIP set slipresp SIP Server slip response code 400 699 _ Set the SLIP response code default 488 MG SIP set update Is the UPDATE method support function disable 0 disable 1 enable default 0 _ Enable disable update method 0 Update method is enabled default 1 Update meth...

Page 2083: ... using MG SIP16 Note This command is available for SP 3905 MG SIP 16 PROG A 02 01 00 00 or later MG SIP set multisession The multi session setting is disable Is the multi session setting enable 0 disable 1 enable default 0 1 The multi session setting is enable MG SIP The current setting is displayed 0 disable default 1 enable The result is displayed ...

Page 2084: ...n LL Address Flags Refcnt Use Interface 90 0 0 63 08 00 3e 23 79 e7 0x405 0 82 lo0 MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Please choose a reference number _ Select a desired item 0 9 to display MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data ...

Page 2085: ...ntly configured DRS will be displayed MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 2 set signaling_port_no Signal port number 61012 set registration_port_no Registration port number 3456 set pre_negotiation_port_no Voice path port number 61014 set ipx_rtp_port_no IPX side RTP port numb...

Page 2086: ...0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 set rtp_qos RTP QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 Does it display more Y N y set sip_qos SIP QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 set domain Domain name 0 set dnsaddress DNS IP address 0 0 0 0 set hc_alarm H C Alarm type IPX and SIP side enable set hc_timer H C Timer value 240 set m...

Page 2087: ...ata 3 is selected MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 3 Ether 1 IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet 0 0 0 0 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Automatic Port type IPX Side Port Ether 2 MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet 0 0 0 0 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Automatic Port ty...

Page 2088: ...ata 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 4 set sip_server Server type 0 Sever IP address 0 0 0 0 Server port number 5060 Strict or Loose 0 Domain Name 0 set sip_register Register IP address 0 0 0 0 Register port number 5060 Expires time 3060 set keynumber Key number 0 set auth User ID 0 Password 0 Does it display more Y N y When SipConfig Data 4 is selected SIP config data will be displayed ...

Page 2089: ...nfo set sip_port_no SIP port number 5060 Does it display more Y N y set 184ToPrivacy 184 Privacy function disable set slipresp SIP Server slip response code 488 set self_sip_domain Self SIP domain mode disable Does it display more Y N y set dtmf_mode DTMF Mode Negotiation SIP SDP DTMF Duration 120 ms DTMF Pause 100 ms DTMF Payload type 101 set 183rbt RBT add 193 w o SDP enable set pathon Path on 1...

Page 2090: ...ction disable set update UPDATE Method support disable set auth_header Auth header cache function enable set cause_table Cause_table selection normal set response_table Response_table selection normal Does it display more Y N y set cpn_pattern Priority of Calling number Displayname set cc_convert Country code convert disable set check number Number cheek function disable set out_of_area_code Respo...

Page 2091: ...lter enable Burst Access limit timer value 30 Burst Access limit number value 500 Burst Access reject response code 600 When disable is selected for Burst Access Filter the above settings are not shown Additional Information when SIP Config Data 4 is selected Item Detail Server type Server IP address may be displayed as Server FQDN pertaining to the data assigned Register IP Address Register IP ad...

Page 2092: ...ayed enabled pertaining to the data assigned Transmitting Interval timer Not displayed when the value of Multi registration mode is disable Standby timer value Not displayed when the value of Multi registration mode is disable Contact header type Not displayed when the value of Multi registration mode is disable May be displayed SIP URI pertaining to the data assigned Multi_regist When enable is s...

Page 2093: ...lease choose a reference number 5 Ether 1 Route type Static No Gateway address Destination IP address Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 16 Ether 2 Route type Static No Gateway address Destination IP address Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 0 0 0 0 0 When Route Config Data 5 is selected MG SIP show interface Use one port only Ether 1 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Auto Link status ...

Page 2094: ... 205 100 0x101 0 0 dp0 10 41 207 0 10 41 207 100 0x101 0 0 dp1 ROUTE HOST TABELE Destination Gateway Flags Refcnt Use Interface 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 0x101 0 0 lo0 It may take time to display the route table information when DNS server IP address has been assigned MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 9 Exit Please choose a reference number _ 0 Port status default 1 Telephony Se...

Page 2095: ...Half 10M Full IPX port link up 10Base TX Full SIP port link up 10Base TX Full Link Down IPX port link down SIP port link down MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 1 MG SIP IPX Registration Information Registration Done DRS IP address 172 16 253 1 When IPX status 1 is selected Note 2 MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP st...

Page 2096: ...6 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 4 MG No 5 MG No 6 MG No 7 MG No 8 MG No 9 MG No 10 MG No 11 MG No 12 MG No 13 MG No 14 MG No 15 Registration OK RegIndex MG No 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 4 MG No 5 MG No 6 MG No 7 When SIP status 2 is selected registration failed CNT RegIndex information is displayed here registration failed CNTs MG No 5 15 are displayed for SP 3905 MG SIP 16 PROG A Issue 6 or ...

Page 2097: ...s 2 SIP status 3 CH status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP network registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 0 IPX Port link up 100Base TX Full SIP Port link up 100Base TX Full Note 1 Port type Status of port to LAN Status of port to SIP network 100M Half IPX port link up 100Base TX Half SIP port l...

Page 2098: ...egistration timer MG SIP16 is trying to register again When registration is disabled Register Server Configuration data is not set No setting data of set sip_register command 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 3 CH status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP network registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Please choose a referen...

Page 2099: ...ion Note 4 Registration NG RegIndex Information on CNTs RegIndex failing in reg istration MG No 1 MG No 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CNTs failing in registration MG No 2 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 3 MG No 4 MG No 4 MG No 5 MG No 5 Note 5 MG No 6 MG No 6 MG No 7 MG No 7 MG No 8 MG No 8 MG No 9 MG No 9 MG No 10 MG No 10 MG No 11 MG No 11 MG No 12 MG No 12 MG No 13 MG No 13 MG No 14 MG No 14 MG No 15 MG No 15...

Page 2100: ...o 5 Note 5 MG No 6 MG No 6 MG No 7 MG No 7 MG No 8 MG No 8 MG No 9 MG No 9 MG No 10 MG No 10 MG No 11 MG No 11 MG No 12 MG No 12 MG No 13 MG No 13 MG No 14 MG No 14 MG No 15 MG No 15 MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 3 CH status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP network registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 E...

Page 2101: ... of server transactions other than INVITE and their maximum number the maximum number represents the maximum number counting up to this time from when MG SIP16 is turned on The number of Filtered Messages 0 Out of Range 0 No DNS Cache 0 Number of SIP packets that were discarded by SIP Access Filter Note 1 When disable is selected for SIP Access Fil ter this parameter is not shown The number of Bur...

Page 2102: ...0 TFTP IP address set Current TFTP server IP address 10 41 1 250 Change TFTP server IP address Y change N current Q quit y If you want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP address 172 16 253 250 Change IP address complete New MG SIP IP address 172 16 253 100 New TFTP IP address 172 16 253 250 Are these IP address correct Y correct N modify Q quit If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE ...

Page 2103: ... Download menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 input q MG SIP _ When download is complete the menu appears again Enter q to exit download command Note Be sure to reboot the MG SIP16 after downloading data ...

Page 2104: ...ew TFTP IP address 172 16 253 250 Are these IP address correct Y correct N modify Q quit y Program download Main program 0 dtmf data 1 music data 2 Quit Q q Input 0 SP3843 mgsip bin download Checksum matched Complete Program download Main program 0 dtmf data 1 music data 2 Quit Q q Input q MG SIP _ To download one program enter 2 Select Ether1 that is used for down load To change the IP address th...

Page 2105: ...s Meaning of Error Number Checksum unmatched Checksum of Filename is 12345 Not 66666 tftp Download tftp Copy ERROR errno 0x4b0007 ERROR NUMBER CAUSE COUNTERMEASURES 0x4b0007 The MG SIP16 and the TFTP server are not con nected Connect MG SIP16 and TFTP server correctly 0x4b0008 The specified download file does not exist in the TFTP server Check the file name of the download file Check the TFTP serv...

Page 2106: ... 3 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 0 ttl 255 time 9 6ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 1 ttl 255 time 1 1ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 2 ttl 255 time 9 6ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 3 ttl 255 time 9 9ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 4 ttl 255 time 9 6ms 172 16 253 3 ping statistics 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0 packet loss Round trip min...

Page 2107: ...P reboot start Config data can be saved before rebooting the MG SIP16 To save the running config to the Flash memory enter y y save Note 1 n not save If other than above is entered Reboot command was interrupted will be displayed Reboot the MG SIP16 or not is specified y reboot n not reboot If other than above is entered Reboot command was interrupted will be displayed The following setting comman...

Page 2108: ...planation of all the commands that are available on the Mainte nance Console MG SIP exit Exit ConfigMode Bye Exits from Config mode MG SIP help set Config data set command show Config data show command download MG SIP program download command ping Ping command exit Config mode exit command reboot MG SIP reboot command help Help command Help command Brief explanation is displayed ...

Page 2109: ...rsaddress command Please set up SIP server IP address FQDN Specify a SIP server by set sip_server command Please set up keynumber Assign a pilot number by set keynumber command User program download error 1 Internal error User program download error 2 Download file cannot be found User program download error 3 Network connection cannot be established User program download error 4 TFTP errors other...

Page 2110: ...telephone Equivalent to 96 channel type of MG SIP MG SIP16 supports the SIP standard terminals based on RFC3261 Thereby MG SIP16 controlled by Internal PHI BRI Note 2 of Telephony Server provides a full array of the call routing capabilities to maximize network performance in the packet voice network SIP network MG SIP16 provides the system with a flexible and cost efficient network environment wi...

Page 2111: ... SCA 16SIPMG US Note Connection test with common carrier is required Note The following table shows the number of available channels of MG SIP16 10ms 20ms 30ms 40ms 60ms G 711 16ch 16ch 16ch G 729a 16ch 16ch 16ch G 723 1 ...

Page 2112: ...e figure below shows the outer view of MG SIP16 SCA 16SIPMG US Outerview The following shows the outerview of MG SIP16 Dimension ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP MG SIP 16 SCA 16SIPMG US FRONT 1U MPC ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP 400 0 1 3 75 43 8 1 72 430 0 1 4 93 Unit mm inch ...

Page 2113: ...or connecting to SIP network 1 Setting Desktop horizontal setting standard setting without any fastening hardware 19 inch rack mount SV70 RACK MTG is used Input power supply AC100V 50 60Hz 10 AC120V 50 60Hz 10 AC230V 50 60Hz 10 AC240V 50 60Hz 10 Electric power consumption 15W 30VA Weight 1 8 kg Environmental requirement Temperature 0 40 C Humidity 20 90 not condensing Cooling Air cooling without F...

Page 2114: ...hernet Communication speed 10Mbps 100Mbps auto negotiation Half Full duplex Protocol RFC3261 SIP Only UDP is supported SIP server conditions SIP Proxy Server Channel capability Maximum 16 channels MG SIP16 Voice CODEC G 711 G 729a FAX relay Data transmission as voice data G 711 DTMF H 245 Alphanumeric LAN side RFC2833 SIP network side Data transmission as voice data G 711 Address translation IP ma...

Page 2115: ...state during initialization Note 1 OFF Remains OFF when the initial setting is incomplete Ether connector Ether1 Ether interface for LAN Ether2 Ether interface for WAN SIP network side 100M lamp Ether1 2 Green Transmission speed is 100 Mbps OFF Transmission speed is 10 Mbps LINK lamp Ether1 2 Green Lights when Layer 1 link is established Flashes during IP packets are being sent received OFF Remain...

Page 2116: ...rning off the power supply wait for more than one second to turn on the power switch again NAME DESCRIPTION REMARKS AC power inlet Plug in an attached grounded AC power cable for main power supply Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft POWER switch Power is supplied to MG SIP16 Up ON Down OFF Note 1 PACT lamp Indicates the state of the power unit PACT Cooling fan AC power inlet Power switch PACT lamp AC power ca...

Page 2117: ...ware such as HyperTerminal grounding less than 10 Ω STEP 1 Use the anti static kit STEP 2 Insert MG SIP16 Card into the 1U MPC module as shown in the figure below which shows an ex ample where the card is installed into left side of the 1U MPC STEP 3 Secure the inserted card onto the unit firmly using the two screws ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP MG SIP 16...

Page 2118: ...ork LAN Power Supply Serial Port connection to Maintenance Console Connect the required cables according to your system configuration ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP RS 232C D sub 9 pin Maintenance Console PC used for configuration setting AC power source AC 100 240 V LAN SIP Network Telephony Server ...

Page 2119: ... the stopper STEP 2 Connect the other end of the power cable to appropriate AC supply Note For the safety measures against static electricity lightning strike and other electrical surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10 Ω PACT AC power inlet AC power cable stopper REAR Secure the power cable onto the unit cable tie power cable power cable ...

Page 2120: ...ble Note LAN cables should not be connected to Ether1 and Ether 2 connectors at this time Theses will be connected after setting the network data ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP FRONT Note CONSOLE connector RJ 45 serial RS 232C D sub 9 pin Maintenace Console CONSOLE cable ...

Page 2121: ...ness and make sure the network environment is appropriate for setting MG SIP16 1 Internal PHI BRI Data Assignment 2 MG SIP16 Data Assignment STEP 1 Data Assignment by PCPro 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console STEP 3 Power ON 1 Network Data Assignment S...

Page 2122: ...VOL 2 1869 MG SIP16 SCA 16SIPMG US 22 4 1 Data Assignment by PCPro Please refer to M 111 MG SIP in Data Programming Manual Business ...

Page 2123: ... the Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Requi...

Page 2124: ...nel of MG SIP16 STEP 2 Make sure the LED indicate normal status PWR lamp lights green Boot program automatically starts ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT MG SIP16 Card REAR Turn ON the power switch UP ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP PWR lamp ...

Page 2125: ...he configuration information Press ESC key within five seconds after Main Program Start to display prompt Then input config to go into the configuration mode However registration to the Telephony Server is not executed Note If the key control is not activated a communication problem between the console and the MG SIP16 might occur Make sure the connector is firmly inserted DP OK N MG ID 000064e9a6...

Page 2126: ...ration Enter in config mode STEP 1 When a prompt is displayed enter config and then press Enter key STEP 2 A prompt MG SIP is displayed indicating that you are in config mode Setting Data Configuration Command IP address of MG SIP16 s ether port set ipaddress IP address of MGC DRS set drsaddress SIP server data set sip_server Pilot number of MG SIP16 set keynumber _ config MG SIP _ ...

Page 2127: ...1 and Ether2 belong to the same segment Ether1 for connecting LAN Ether2 for connecting WAN SIP network MG SIP set ipaddress Use one port only Y N n Ether 1 IP address 172 16 0 100 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Ether 2 IP address 172 16 1 100 Subnet 255 255 255 0 Enter n when two ports are used Ether 1 LAN Assign the IP address default 0 0 0 0 for Ether 1 Assign the subnet mask default 0 0 0 0 for Ether 1 ...

Page 2128: ...sing set sipserver command This data can be assigned by using IP address or Full Qualified Domain Name FQDN MG SIP set drsaddress DRS unit 0 DRS IP address 172 16 0 1 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 DRS unit 1 DRS IP address 0 0 0 0 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 DRS unit 2 DRS IP address 0 0 0 0 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 DRS unit 3 DRS IP address 0 0 0 0 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 Ass...

Page 2129: ...e proxy server default 5060 Select a Strict router or Loose router for the proxy server default 0 0 Strict route 1 Loose router Enable disable the rport RFC3581 function default 0 Input a string that specifies the service provider in maximum of 128 characters MG SIP set sip_server SIP server type 0 IP address 1 FQDN 1 Fully Qualified Domain Name MAX63 nec com SIP server port number 1024 65535 5060...

Page 2130: ...an be saved before rebooting the MG SIP16 Enter y to save the assigned data onto Flash memory Note 1 Reboot the MG SIP16 or not is specified Enter y to reboot the MG SIP16 Config data is saved rebooting the MG SIP16 the following setting commands are not perfect set ipaddress command IPX side set ipaddress command SIP side set drsaddress command set sip_server command set keynumber command So Conf...

Page 2131: ... and LAN2 must be connected to make MG SIP16 online For a one port configuration only LAN1 connection makes MG SIP16 online STEP 2 Make sure the ON LINE lamp lights green on the front panel MG SIP ONLINE START ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 1 Ether 2 100M LINK 100M LINK RESET CONSOLE MG SIP LAN SIP Network LAN Cable LAN Cable Ether 2 for con...

Page 2132: ... PCPro make sure the registration status of MG SIP16 by using DIMG command 22 4 7 Trouble Shooting If the message shown below appears on the console make sure of the following LAN cable is securely inserted to Ether 2 Ether 2 LINK lamp WAN side SIP network lights green If no message appears within 3 minutes it seems that no communication has been established between the Telephony Server and the MG...

Page 2133: ... the procedure for setting data by using HyperTerminal as an example For Windows Vista or later operating systems prepare a communications terminal software yourself and assign the configuration data referring to the description for HyperTerminal When the program is activated messages are displayed After a prompt is displayed enter config after the prompt to login The following prompt appears indi...

Page 2134: ...st to list up all the command help by help or after the prompt and press the Enter key If you know more details about each command it is also available to list up the target help by command name Δ after the prompt and press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when executing help function regarding help and set ad dress 22 5 2 How to Read Maintenance Command on This Section The command...

Page 2135: ...Fax renegotiation Note 3 page 1887 12 cpn_pattern Assigns how to obtain cpn calling party number page 1888 13 default Specifies default settings of the configuration page 1889 14 dnsaddress Assigns the DNS IP address page 1889 15 dns_option Assigns the Optional Data for DNS server Note 3 page 1890 16 domain Specifies the domain of MG SIP16 page 1890 17 drsaddress Assigns the DRS IP address page 18...

Page 2136: ...11 48 sip_rtp_port_no Assigns the RTP port in SIP network page 1911 49 sip_server Assigns the IP address or the Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN to SIP server page 1911 50 sip_tel_service Assigns the setting of additional services page 1913 51 sip_transport Specifies a SIP transport protocol Note 3 page 1914 52 slipresp Assigns a SLIP response code page 1915 53 update Assigns the setting of update...

Page 2137: ...assword for HTTP Digest Auth This parameter is used when the SIP server performs authentication 4 SETΔAUTH_HEADER The command is used to assign whether to add cache information to authentication header of request mes sage in updating ACK and REGISTER for re INVITE 200 OK MG SIP set 183rbt Is RBT added when 183 without SDP is received 0 enable 1 disable default 0 0 Enter 0 or 1 default 0 0 Enable l...

Page 2138: ...SIP network as error response Earlier than SP 3988 MGSIP 16 PROG G Issue 2 MG SIP set call_hold Select the setting of Call Hold function 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Input RTP detect timer value sec 3 32 default 3 3 Input SIP Error Response code to reject new session 400 606 default 488 488 Enable disable the MG based call retention 0 MG based call retention is invalid default 1 MG based cal...

Page 2139: ...ained according to the priority order shown in the table below MG SIP set cause_table Select cause_table SIP_Error_response to Error_cause 0 normal default 1 alternate routing 2 customized pattern1 3 Route Advance Input 3 Select the error translation table 0 Normal table default 1 Alternate routing table 2 This setting is prohibited 3 Route Advance Direction of Call termination origination Intende...

Page 2140: ...ediate station and the destina 1 isub P N Dest Discern Request URI isub Request URI userinfo To userinfo 2 Request URI P N Dest Discern Request URI userinfo Request URI isub To userinfo 3 P Called Party ID P Called Party ID userinfo To userinfo Request URI userinfo P N Dest Discern Request URI isub MG SIP set cdn_pattern Active called party number 0 To userinfo 1 isub 2 Request URI 3 P Called Part...

Page 2141: ...d to the SIP network without converting the payload size Same behavior applies to the RTP packet received from the SIP network To use the following methods enable commands shown below ReINVITE method enable set sip_tel_service command UPDATE method enable set sip_tel_service and set update commands 12 SETΔCPN_PATTERN This command is used to assign how to obtain cpn calling party number It is possi...

Page 2142: ...om 0123ABC sip 01234567 xxx com In this case the cpn will be handled as blocked when 0 is selected Note Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on SIP network 13 SETΔDEFAULT The command is used to set back to the default setting of MG SIP16 configuration Executing this com mand saves the default setting to the flash memory Make sure to execute this command when updating firmware to a d...

Page 2143: ... routed in an alternative routing function by A SRV record You do not have to change this command if you do not use DNS server This command is available for SP 3988 MG SIP 16 PROG G Issue 3 or later 16 SETΔDOMAIN This command is used to specify the domain of MG SIP16 MG SIP set dns_option Select DNS type 0 A Record resolve single IP Address default 1 A Record resolve multi IP Address 2 Locating SI...

Page 2144: ...RS IP address 172 16 253 1 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 DRS unit 1 DRS IP address 172 16 253 2 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 DRS unit 2 DRS IP address 172 16 253 3 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 DRS unit 3 DRS IP address 172 16 253 4 DRS port number 1024 65535 3456 Assign the IP address of unit 0 Default 0 0 0 0 Assign the UDP port number for unit 0 Default 3456 Assign the IP address of unit...

Page 2145: ...lay default 0 0 1 Normal Delay Specify the throughput default 0 0 1 Normal High Throughput Specify the reliability default 0 0 1 Normal High Reliability Specify the cost default 0 0 1 Normal Cost Precedence b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 Prec D T R C Prec PRECEDENCE 3 bits D Delay T Throughput R Reliability C Cost MG SIP set drs_qos Input type 1 PRECEDENCE 2 DIFFSERV 3 TOS 2 DSCP 0 63 40 When DIFFSERV 2 ...

Page 2146: ...iation 1 Out Band 2 In Band default 0 0 DTMF Duration 50 240 default 120 DTMF Pause 30 240 default 100 Payload type RFC2833 96 127 default 101 When Negotiation 0 is selected Specify DTMF Duration Specify DTMF Pause Specify Payload type MG SIP set dtmf_mode DTMF Mode 0 Negotiation 1 Out Band 2 In Band default 0 1 DTMF Duration 50 240 default 120 DTMF Pause 30 240 default 100 Payload type RFC2833 96...

Page 2147: ... used to specify the health check time out Input parameter error reason DTMF Duration DTMF Pause Min120ms MG SIP set h245_base_port_no H245 base port number 1024 65535 40000 Assign the negotiation port number default 40000 MG SIP set hs_alarm Please select H C alarm type default 0 0 IPX and SIP side enable 1 IPX side enable 2 SIP side enable 3 disable Select a type of Health Check Alarm 0 Warning ...

Page 2148: ...t in the number of port setting and assign Ether1 s IP address only In this case Ether2 is not used MG SIP set interface Ether 1 speed AUTO 0 10M 1 100M 2 0 Ether 2 speed AUTO 0 10M 1 100M 2 1 Ether 2 duplex Half 1 Full 2 1 Assign an Ether speed type to Ether 1 0 Automatic Negotiation default 1 10 Mbps fixed 2 100 Mbps fixed Assign an Ether speed type to Ether 2 0 Automatic Negotiation default 1 1...

Page 2149: ...case default values are assigned automatically When Exit Route type 0 is selected When None Route type 1 is selected MG SIP set set ipx_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 0 Specify the Route type 0 Exit 1 None default 2 Static MG SIP set set ipx_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 0 MG SIP _ When Exit 0 is selected This will exit the command MG SIP set set ipx_route Route type 0 Exit 1 No...

Page 2150: ... None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default gateway 1 Destination network address 0 0 0 0 172 16 0 0 Input subnet mask bit 0 31 16 Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 192 168 0 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 16 Are you sure Y N y MG SIP _ When Static 2 is selected Select 1 to set the data S...

Page 2151: ...ute Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default gateway 2 Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 192 168 0 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 192 168 0 254 0 0 0 0 0 Are you sure Y N y MG SIP _ When Static 2 is selected Select 1 to set the data Select Default gateway 2 as a gate way type Specify the def...

Page 2152: ...e 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 2 No Gateway address Destination network Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 16 2 172 16 0 254 10 0 0 0 8 Select Delete No 1 No Gateway address Destination network Prefix 1 172 16 0 254 10 0 0 0 8 Are you sure Y N y MG SIP _ Select 2 to delete routing data Select 2 to delete routing data Note 1 Select No of Static Route Information you want to delete...

Page 2153: ... address 0 0 0 0 10 1 0 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 10 1 0 254 10 0 0 0 8 MG SIP set sip_route Route type 0 Exit 1 None 2 Static 2 Select command 0 Exit 1 Set 2 Delete 1 Select gateway type 0 Exit 1 Gateway 2 Default gateway 2 Gateway IP address 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 254 Route type Static Gateway address Destination network Prefix 192 168 1 254 0 0 0 0 0 10 4 0 0 1...

Page 2154: ... to assign the SIP server for register destination The as signment of setΔsip_register is necessary when registration is to be done per number Assign this command adjusting to the specifications on SIP network MG SIP set ipx_rtp_port_no IPX side RTP port number 1024 65024 51000 Assign the base port number that is used for RTP at LAN side default 51000 Note 1 MG SIP set keynumber Key number MAX32 0...

Page 2155: ... P Preferred Identity header PPID Note This command is available for SP 3988 MG SIP 16 PROG G Issue 3 or later Note SIP messages can be sent by converting P Preferred ID header PPID to P Asserted ID header PAID only when P Preferred ID header PPID is used for either of the following settings Enable privacy_pattern command and specify 2 RFC3323 3325 P Preferred ID Privacy Enable name_display comman...

Page 2156: ...able default 0 0 Function which stop cyclical send of Provisional Response 0 disable 1 enable default 0 0 Select enable or disable for PRACK function 0 Prack function is enabled default 1 Prack function is disabled Select enable or disable for stopping cyclical send of provisional response This line appears when 0 is set in the previous line 0 disable cyclical 18x send will occur 1 enable cyclical...

Page 2157: ...pattern 0 DisplayName 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3325 default 0 1 Please input a dummy string MAX32 anonymous Privacy pattern Remote Party ID Dummy string anonymous When Remote Party ID 1 is selected Enter a dummy string in a maximum of 32 characters Note 1 MG SIP set privacy_pattern Please select calling number privacy pattern 0 DisplayName 1 Remote Party ID 2 RFC3325 default 0 2 Please select RFC332...

Page 2158: ...SETΔRTP_QOS This command is used to specify the QoS of Real Time Protocol RTP The sample data setting is ex plained in 18 SETDDRS_QOS 39 SETΔSDP_STYLE This command is used to receive SDP with multiple m lines When normal 0 style is specified Amount of Numbers Time minute 1 300 5 301 600 10 601 900 15 901 1000 20 MG SIP set rtp_pathon Path on 183 after 180 0 disable 1 enable default 0 0 Assign Path...

Page 2159: ...is command the SIP domain that has been set by setΔsip_server command will be used as the SIP domain of MG SIP16 MG SIP set sdp_style Select SDP style setting 0 normal default 1 RFC4566 Input 1 Select the setting of G729 annexb no 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Select SDP style setting 0 normal default 1 conforms to RFC4566 Specify the setting of G729 annexb no 0 G729 annexb no is dis abled 1 ...

Page 2160: ...in INVITE 0 disable 1 enable default 0 1 forced mode 0 disable 1 enable default 0 0 Session timer is enable Session expires 180 Refresher UAC Invite Refresher disable Forced disable When Enable 0 is selected Set the session timer Determine a point to make refresher UAC User Agent Client UAS User Agent Server refresher uac addition to INVITE message 0 refresher uac is not added 1 refresher uac is a...

Page 2161: ...t timer value sec 1 60 default 1 30 Input Burst Access limit number value 1 1000 default 10 500 Input Burst Access reject response code 400 699 default 488 600 MG SIP Enable disable SIP Access Filter Note 1 0 SIP Access Filter is disabled default 1 SIP Access Filter is enabled When SIP Access Filter is enabled set SIP Access Fil ter mask Default perfect matching which means only SIP server address...

Page 2162: ... 1 enable Input 1 Input SIP Access Filter mask default 255 255 255 255 SIP server FQDN sipserver nec com 255 255 255 255 Select the setting of Burst Access Filter 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 Input Burst Access limit timer value sec 1 60 default 1 30 Input Burst Access limit number value 1 1000 default 10 500 Input Burst Access reject response code 400 699 default 488 600 MG SIP Enable disab...

Page 2163: ...ister type 0 IP address 1 FQDN _ Select the register type 0 IP address 1 FQDN MG SIP set sip_register SIP register type 0 IP address 1 FQDN 0 SIP register IP address 192 168 100 100 SIP register port number 1024 65535 5060 SIP register expires time 1 65535 3600 When IP address 0 is selected Assign the IP address of the register server default 0 0 0 0 Assign the port number of the register server d...

Page 2164: ...r 49 SETΔSIP_SERVER The command specifies the IP address or the Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN of a SIP proxy server Note 1 Pressing the Enter key can skip the item SIP server type and IPaddress FQDN cannot be skipped MG SIP set sip_route See SET IPX_ROUTE command for more details MG SIP set sip_rtp_port_no SIP side RTP port number 1024 65024 50000 Assign the base RTP port number for SIP side de...

Page 2165: ...IP address 0 is selected Assign the IP address of the proxy server default 0 0 0 0 Assign the port number of the proxy server default 5060 Select a Strict router or Loose router for the proxy server default 0 0 Strict router 1 Loose router Enable disable the rport RFC3581 function default 0 Note 1 Input a string that specifies the service provider in a maximum of 128 characters MG SIP set sip_serv...

Page 2166: ...Is Replaces function enable 0 enable 1 disable default 0 _ Is hold a inactive function enable 0 enable 1 dis able default 0 _ Is hold put off hold function enable 0 disable 1 enable default 0 _ Is REFER NOTIFY function enable 0 enable 1 disable default 1 _ Is 3PCC function enable 0 enable 1 disable default 1 _ When enable 1 is selected Enable disable Replaces function 0 enable default 1 disable En...

Page 2167: ...ephony Server is fixed to μ law In the Telephony Server side by the system data assignment ASYD System Data 1 Index 64 Bit 0 either μ law or A law can be specified as the A law μ law information which the Telephony Server informs MG SIP16 The Telephony Server informs MG SIP16 the A law μ law information only when the MG SIP16 performs registration When you change the system data ASYD SYS1 Index64 ...

Page 2168: ...enerally this command is not required to be changed MG SIP set slipresp SIP Server slip response code 400 699 _ Set the SLIP response code default 488 MG SIP set update Is the UPDATE method support function disable 0 disable 1 enable default 0 _ Enable disable update method 0 Update method is enabled default 1 Update method is disabled MG SIP set response_table Select Response_table Error_cause to...

Page 2169: ...Name Display service using MG SIP16 MG SIP set multisession The multi session setting is disable Is the multi session setting enable 0 disable 1 enable default 0 1 The multi session setting is enable MG SIP The current setting is displayed 0 disable default 1 enable The result is displayed MG SIP set name_display Select function of Name Display 0 disable default 1 enable Input 1 MG SIP 0 disable d...

Page 2170: ...Address Flags Refcnt Use Interface 90 0 0 63 08 00 3e 23 79 e7 0x405 0 82 lo0 MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Please choose a reference number _ Select a desired item 0 9 to display MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exi...

Page 2171: ...configured DRS will be displayed MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 2 set signaling_port_no Signal port number 61012 set registration_port_no Registration port number 3456 set pre_negotiation_port_no Voice path port number 61014 set ipx_rtp_port_no IPX side RTP port number 51...

Page 2172: ...Y 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 set rtp_qos RTP QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 Does it display more Y N y set sip_qos SIP QOS 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT 0 RELIABILITY 0 COST 0 set domain Domain name 0 set dnsaddress DNS IP address 0 0 0 0 set hc_alarm H C Alarm type IPX and SIP side enable set hc_timer H C Timer value 240 set musictype Music Type Ty...

Page 2173: ... is selected MG SIP show config 0 MAC Data 1 DRS Data 2 Common Config Data 3 Port Config Data 4 SIP Config Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 3 Ether 1 IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet 0 0 0 0 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Automatic Port type IPX Side Port Ether 2 MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet 0 0 0 0 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Automatic Port type SI...

Page 2174: ...ig Data 5 Route Config Data 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 4 set sip_server Server type 0 Sever IP address 0 0 0 0 Server port number 5060 Strict or Loose 0 rport RFC3581 function disable Domain Name 0 set sip_register Register IP address 0 0 0 0 Register port number 5060 Expires time 3060 set keynumber Key number 0 set auth User ID 0 Password 0 Does it display more Y N y When SipConfig D...

Page 2175: ...et sip_port_no SIP port number 5060 Does it display more Y N y set 184ToPrivacy 184 Privacy function disable set slipresp SIP Server slip response code 488 set self_sip_domain Self SIP domain mode disable Does it display more Y N y set dtmf_mode DTMF Mode Negotiation SIP SDP DTMF Duration 120 ms DTMF Pause 100 ms DTMF Payload type 101 set 183rbt RBT add 193 w o SDP enable set pathon Path on 183 af...

Page 2176: ...Multi registration mode disable Set sip_tel_service SIP telephony service function disable set reg_interval SIP telephony service function disable set update UPDATE Method support disable set auth_header Auth header cache function enable set cause_table Cause_table selection normal set response_table Response_table selection normal Does it display more Y N y set cpn_pattern Priority of Calling num...

Page 2177: ...P Access Filter mask 255 255 255 255 When FQDN is assigned by the SET command sip_server SIP server FQDN sipserver nec com SIP Access Filter mask 255 255 255 255 set sdp_style SDP style setting RFC4566 G729 annexb no enable set call_id_relay Call ID relay mode disable set sip_accfilter SIP Access Filter disable Burst Access Filter disable set sip_transport SIP transport protocol UDP set dns_option...

Page 2178: ...taining to the data assigned Session expires Not displayed when the value of Session timer is disable Refresher Not displayed when the value of Session timer is disable May be displayed UAS pertaining to the data assigned Invite Refresher Not displayed when the value of Session timer is disable May be displayed disabled pertaining to the data assigned Forced Displayed as enabled when Forced sectio...

Page 2179: ...nd sip_tel_service enable is displayed as well as enablement disablement of the following settings Replaces function hold a inactive function hold put off hold function REFER NOTIFY function 3PCC function For 3PCC function codec the selected data by the SET command sip_tel_service is displayed When SIP telephony service function is disabled by the SET command sip_tel_service the following is displ...

Page 2180: ...t off hold function REFER NOTIFY function 3PCC function 3PCC function codec are available for SP 3988 MG SIP 16 PROG G Issue 3 or later Note 9 3PCC function and 3PCC function codec are displayed only when 3PCC function is enabled by the SET command sip_tel_service ...

Page 2181: ... choose a reference number 5 Ether 1 Route type Static No Gateway address Destination IP address Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 172 16 0 0 16 Ether 2 Route type Static No Gateway address Destination IP address Prefix 1 192 168 0 254 0 0 0 0 0 When Route Config Data 5 is selected MG SIP show interface Use one port only Ether 1 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Interface Speed Duplex Auto Auto Link status Link ...

Page 2182: ...100 0x101 0 0 dp0 10 41 207 0 10 41 207 100 0x101 0 0 dp1 ROUTE HOST TABELE Destination Gateway Flags Refcnt Use Interface 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 0x101 0 0 lo0 It may take time to display the route table information when DNS server IP address has been assigned MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 9 Exit Please choose a reference number _ 0 Port status default 1 Telephony Server ...

Page 2183: ...10M Full IPX port link up 10Base TX Full SIP port link up 10Base TX Full Link Down IPX port link down SIP port link down MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 1 MG SIP IPX Registration Information Registration Done DRS IP address 172 16 253 1 When IPX status 1 is selected Note 1 MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status ...

Page 2184: ... MG No 3 MG No 4 MG No 5 MG No 6 MG No 7 MG No 8 MG No 9 MG No 10 MG No 11 MG No 12 MG No 13 MG No 14 MG No 15 Registration OK RegIndex MG No 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 4 MG No 5 MG No 6 MG No 7 MG No 8 When SIP status 2 is selected registration failed CNT RegIndex information is displayed here registration failed CNTs MG No 5 15 are displayed for SP 3988 MG SIP 16 PROG G Issue 4 or l...

Page 2185: ...etwork registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 0 IPX Port link up 100Base TX Full SIP Port link up 100Base TX Full Note 1 Port type Status of port to LAN Status of port to SIP network 100M Half IPX port link up 100Base TX Half SIP port link up 100Base TX Half 100M Full IPX port link up 100Base TX Full SIP port link up 100Base TX Full 10M Half IP...

Page 2186: ...d Register Server Configuration data is not set No setting data of set sip_register command When SIP status 2 is selected Multi Registration Mode is enabled Please choose a reference number 1 IPX Registration Information Registration Done DRS IP address 192 168 0 1 Note 2 MG SIP show status 0 Port status 1 IPX status 2 SIP status 3 CH status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network ...

Page 2187: ...MG No 7 MG No 7 MG No 8 MG No 8 MG No 9 MG No 9 MG No 10 MG No 10 MG No 11 MG No 11 MG No 12 MG No 12 MG No 13 MG No 13 MG No 14 MG No 14 MG No 15 MG No 15 Registration OK RegIndex Information on CNTs RegIndex succeeding in registration MG No 1 MG No 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CNTs succeeding in registration MG No 2 MG No 2 MG No 3 MG No 3 MG No 4 MG No 4 MG No 5 MG No 5 Note 5 MG No 6 MG No 6 MG No 7 MG N...

Page 2188: ...atus 3 CH Status 9 Exit 0 Port status Default 1 Telephony Server network registration status 2 SIP network registration status 3 Information of channels in use 9 Exit Please choose a reference number 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 ACT S ACT S appears for a channel in use appears for a channel not in use 8 actch 1 Number of channels in use Use Session Count 1 Number of sessions in use INVITE Client Transactio...

Page 2189: ...number of Filtered Messages 0 Out of Range 0 No DNS Cache 0 Number of SIP packets that were discarded by SIP Access Filter Note 1 When disable is selected for SIP Access Fil ter this parameter is not shown The number of Burst Filtered Messages 0 Number of incoming calls that are rejcected by Burst Access Filter Note 2 When disable is selected for Burst Access Filter this parameter is not shown MG ...

Page 2190: ...P IP address set Current TFTP server IP address 10 41 1 250 Change TFTP server IP address Y change N current Q quit y If you want to return to the previous step please input Q Input new IP address 172 16 253 250 Change IP address complete New MG SIP IP address 172 16 253 100 New TFTP IP address 172 16 253 250 Are these IP address correct Y correct N modify Q quit If you enter Y MG SIP ONLINE servi...

Page 2191: ...load menu Download of all programs default input 1 Download of one program input 2 input q MG SIP _ When download is complete the menu appears again Enter q to exit download command Note Be sure to reboot the MG SIP16 after downloading data ...

Page 2192: ...New MG SIP IP address 172 16 253 100 New TFTP IP address 172 16 253 250 Are these IP address correct Y correct N modify Q quit y Program download Main program 0 dtmf data 1 music data 2 Quit Q q Input 0 SP3988 mgsip bin download Checksum matched Complete Program download Main program 0 dtmf data 1 music data 2 Quit Q q Input q MG SIP _ To download all programs enter 1 Select Ether1 that is used fo...

Page 2193: ...cksum of Filename is 12345 Not 66666 tftp Download tftp Copy ERROR errno 0x4b0007 ERROR NUMBER CAUSE COUNTERMEASURES 0x4b0007 The MG SIP16 and the TFTP server are not con nected Connect MG SIP16 and TFTP server correctly 0x4b0008 The specified download file does not exist in the TFTP server Check the file name of the download file Check the TFTP server setting 0x41 The IP addresses of the MG SIP16...

Page 2194: ... data bytes 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 0 ttl 255 time 9 6ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 1 ttl 255 time 1 1ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 2 ttl 255 time 9 6ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 3 ttl 255 time 9 9ms 64 bytes from 172 16 253 3 icmp_seq 4 ttl 255 time 9 6ms 172 16 253 3 ping statistics 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0 packet loss Round trip min avg ...

Page 2195: ...oot start Config data can be saved before rebooting the MG SIP16 To save the running config to the Flash memory enter y y save Note 1 n not save If other than above is entered Reboot command was interrupted will be displayed Reboot the MG SIP16 or not is specified y reboot n not reboot If other than above is entered Reboot command was interrupted will be displayed The following setting commands ar...

Page 2196: ...tion of all the commands that are available on the Mainte nance Console MG SIP exit Exit ConfigMode Bye Exits from Config mode MG SIP help set Config data set command show Config data show command download MG SIP program download command ping Ping command exit Config mode exit command reboot MG SIP reboot command help Help command Help command Brief explanation is displayed ...

Page 2197: ...ress command Please set up SIP server IP address FQDN Specify a SIP server by set sip_server command Please set up keynumber Assign a pilot number by set keynumber command User program download error 1 Internal error User program download error 2 Download file cannot be found User program download error 3 Network connection cannot be established User program download error 4 TFTP errors other than...

Page 2198: ... up due to fault and it establishes the call connection VS 32 Conference Server keeps providing the Announcement feature External Hold tone feature and Conference feature in con junction with the activated SR MGC VS 32 Conference Server requires Internal PHE VS 32 Conference Server registration is performed by Internal PH Priority Hunting Method Position of VS 32 Conference Server within the netwo...

Page 2199: ...ASE CASE 1 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party CASE 2 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 8 party 8 party CASE 3 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 16 party CASE 4 8 party 8 party 8 party 8 party CASE 5 8 party 8 party 16 party CASE 6 16 party 16 party CASE 7 32 party CASE 8 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party Announcement IP External Hold T...

Page 2200: ...hony Server and SR MGC can provide Announcement Service in conjunction with VS 32 Conference Server Wave sound files in the internal Flash ROM or CF Memory of VS 32 Conference Server is used for the Announcement Wave sound files edited by PC are also available For more information refer to page 1974 Announcement PSTN Private Network IP Network SW HUB Firewall IP Station IP Station Firewall MG MG I...

Page 2201: ... sound files in the internal Flash ROM or CF Memory of VS 32 Conference Server are used in the External Hold tone For more information refer to page 1969 Besides MUSIC equipment can be used as the external sound source via External Input Interface Music Jack Hold tone Conversation PSTN Private Network IP Network SW HUB Firewall IP Station IP Station Firewall MG MG IP Station Non IP Terminal VS 32 ...

Page 2202: ...uch as ringing tone in stead of TSW ROM and EMA PLO ROM This feature can be performed by fixing the connection between Music on Hold MOH of VS 32 and Speech Path Memory SPM This feature requires IPPAD circuit card External Audible Sound SW HUB IP Station Non IP Terminal 3 way CONF 8 way CONF DAT External Hold Tone IPPAD VS 32 ...

Page 2203: ... Three Way Conference may be es tablished This service is called Consultation Hold Three Way Conference is also used as UMS conversation recording to record the conversation between two parties Position of VS 32 Conference Server when using the Three Way Calling Feature Three Way Calling established by VS 32 Dual PSTN Private Network IP Network SW HUB Firewall IP Station IP Station Firewall MG MG ...

Page 2204: ... the conferees and connecting them to the conference Conference Leader calls them one by one until all the members are summoned 3 MEET ME There are two ways to establish the MEET ME conference Conference Leader dials Conferees and then transfers Conferees answering the call to a specific port reserved for the conference by dialing the conference station pilot number Conference Leader and Conferees...

Page 2205: ...end and receive the packets peer to peer Thereby the following can be achieved The problem of voice quality such as delays in transferring the voice signals might be solved The redundant number of packets over the WLAN can be reduced to a minimum The use of VS 32s that are far from an originating terminal can be restricted MA ID PSTN Private Network IP Network IP Station IP Station MG MG VS 32 IP ...

Page 2206: ...CONF ON LINE ANNC BUSY MOH CF PWR CF MEMORY CARD RS 232C Ether 100M LINK Front View Rear View 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 6 14 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 CF MEMORY CARD VS 32 V 4 Note VS 32 manufactured in R17 which has no VCT is labelled as VS 32 Note Size Weight 210 W 297 D 43 H mm 1 8kg Maximum Power Consumption 25 0 VA 12 3W 26 4 VA 12 4W 33 6 VA 13 2W AC 50 60Hz ...

Page 2207: ...rminal program via serial interface 3 External Input In terface Music Jack External Sound Source Input Jack 3 5 Monaural Jack 4 Compact Flash Slot Before removing CF Memory Card from VS 32 turn off the power of the VS 32 or push CF MBR key to turn the CF LED off 1 CFMBR Switch This switch is used to turn off CF lamp 2 Eject Lever This lever is used to eject a Compact Flash card 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 FUN...

Page 2208: ...ver 5 AC power inlet AC 100V 120V 240V 50 60Hz The power varies depending on the country Plug in an attached three polar grounded AC power cable for main power supply Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft 6 Power Switch No NAME SPECIFICATIONS NOTE ...

Page 2209: ... no assigned data Data is assigned but all make busy OFF All channels are available for confer ence feature 10 ANNC Status of the announcement feature ON One or more channel is used for announcement feature FLASH No registration or no assigned data Data is assigned but all make busy OFF All channels are available for announcement feature 11 MOH Status of the external music on hold feature ON One o...

Page 2210: ...SH CF access Internal Flash ROM access Do not turn off the power during flash ing OFF CF is not mounted CF MBR 13 100 M Transmission Speed ON 100 M bps OFF 10 M bps 14 LINK Ethernet Link Status ON Ethernet Link has been established FLASH Sending Receiving data OFF Ethernet Link has not been estab lished No LAMP MEANING STATUS ...

Page 2211: ...arding Unused Number Level All Calls Announcement Extension Function For single connection only Unused Number Dead Level Number Announcement For single connection only Call Forwarding Intercept Announcement For single connection only Delay Announcement UCD For single connection only Automatic Announcement Called PS Out of Zone For single connection only Conference Call Group Call Automatic Confere...

Page 2212: ...st be installed within an IP Network FTP Server required for downloading files Cables LAN Cable Use either of the following cables for connecting to LAN 10BASE T Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 3 or higher a maximum of 100m 100BASE TX Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100m Serial Cable Straight through Cable for Mainten...

Page 2213: ...r The Telephony Server acts as DRS for VS 32 Conference Server using Proprietary Protocol START END VS 32 Network Settings Maintenance Console PCPro Refer to VS 32 Conference Server V 26 in Data Programming Manual Business Note that Service Conditions for VS 32 are included in the manuals DHCP Setting IP Address DRS Address Default Route VS 32 Hardware Settings Mounting Setting Cable Connection Te...

Page 2214: ...unting Location VS 32 Conference Server can only be set horizontally Vertical setting is not available Desktop horizontal setting Horizontal setting of VS 32 Conference Server 19 inch rack horizontal setting Figure below describes the image when VS 32 Conference Server is mounted on 19 inch rack 19 inch Rack Horizontal Setting Front 19 inch Rack VS 32 VS 32 CONF ON LINE ANNC BUSY MOH CF PWR ...

Page 2215: ... cables according to the system configuration An example of cable configuration is shown as follows Cable Connection to VS 32 Conference Server PC for Maintenance Console LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX D Sub 9 Pin Straight through Cable Network Device SW HUB Router etc To AC Outlet VS 32 Conference Server Terminal program setting must be in the following Bits per second 9600bps Data bits 8bit Parit...

Page 2216: ...te 1 Note Confirm the DHCP server reserves IP addresses resource for the clients including VS 32 Conference Serv er Note 1 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual When DHCP server is not installed in your network Type SET DHCP DISABLE Type SET DEFAULTROUTE Default Gateway IP Address IP address of Defau...

Page 2217: ...e Maintenance Command some of the Maintenance Commands do not require any parameter A space needs to be entered between the Command the Sub command and the Pa rameter An example screen setting IP address 10 10 15 5 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 in the system data of VS 32 Conference Server is shown below Note When the maintenance command program is activated it provides a Help Function for referri...

Page 2218: ... follows system wave cf wave wave2 root Indicates Configuration data are stored Indicates Wave sound files moderate priority in the Flash ROM Indicates Wave sound files high priority in Compact Flash card Indicates Wave sound files low priority in Compact Flash card ...

Page 2219: ... Number 8 VLAN Setting VLANs COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION SHOW 1 COUNTRYCODE To show Country Code 2 DHCP To show DHCP setting 3 DRSADDRESS To show DRS Address and Port Number Note 1 4 DRSTOS To show TOS setting of DRS session 5 INTERFACE To show setting and status of INTERFACE 6 IPADDRESS To show the registered IP Address Net Mask and Default Gateway 7 PORTNUMBER To show settings of each port 8...

Page 2220: ...f data to the specified TFTP server COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION PING 1 To check network conditions COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION CD 1 To change the current directory COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION PWD 1 To display the current directory COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION RM 1 To delete the files COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION LS 1 To display detailed information for directories and files COMMA...

Page 2221: ... VS 32 SETUP IP Input DHCP Dynamic host Control Protocol parameter ENABLE or DISABLE DHCP DISABLE Input IP address IPADDRESS 10 10 10 150 Input Netmask NETMASK 255 255 255 0 Input DEFAULTROUTE DEFAULT ROUTE is the gateway to other subnet DEFAULT ROUTE 10 10 10 254 Input DRS address parameters If you need to setup secondary DRS address you may use SET DRSADDRESS command Primary DRS ADDRESS 10 10 10...

Page 2222: ...d its capacity adds up to approximately 8M byte however it includes management domain for file system so that the actual capacity is less than 8M byte Note If the same number of wave files exist in Internal Flash ROM and CF card of VS 32 the file to be played back will be the following When wave sound files with the same number exist in Internal Flash ROM and CF card directory cf wave CF card take...

Page 2223: ...tem is changed Do you save it Don t power off during save May I save Y N y Complete Wave file system has been saved STEP1 Enter an IP address for an FTP server STEP2 Enter a user name STEP3 Enter a password STEP4 Enter 2 to display the files stored in the FTP server STEP5 Enter 3 and specify a file name to down load the file STEP6 Enter 10 to adjust the wave sound file to the system and then save ...

Page 2224: ...l Format Codec 0x0001 Illegal Format Channel 2 Illegal Format Rate 44100 Illegal Format Byte Per Sec 176400 Illegal Format Byte Per Block 4 Illegal Format Byte Per Sample 16 Codec Data Size Play Time Result ANP mu law 80000Byte 1s OK NG 0 STEP1 Enter 9 STEP2 Enter a directory name to be checked in Data verification against the files in VS 32 is automatically performed For information about error m...

Page 2225: ... following explains how to make a sound file on Windows Operating System STEP1 Select Start Programs Accessories Entertainment SoundRecorder STEP2 Select File Properties STEP3 Click the Convert Now button on the Properties for Sound window ...

Page 2226: ...d name by clicking the Save As button and then specify the CCITTμ law or CCITTA law for format and 8kHz 8Bit Mono for Attributes STEP5 Click the Record button STEP6 Click the Stop button STEP7 Select File Save As to save the file in the appropriate location ...

Page 2227: ...n of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual Note 2 The default value of DRS Port Number is 3456 STEP 1 Enter Default Gateway Address Result is shown VS 32 SET DEFAULTROUTE 10 4 128 254 The default gateway setting succeeded STEP1 STEP 1 Enter ENABLE or DISABLE after the command Default ENABLE ENABLE DHCP is valid DISABLE DHCP is invalid Result is shown VS 32 SET DHCP ENABLE DHCP...

Page 2228: ...Throughput ON STEP4 Determine reliability 0 1 Normal Default High Reliability ON STEP5 Determine cost 0 1 Normal Default Cost Precedence ON Result is shown VS 32 SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 DELAY 0 1 0 THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 RELIABILITY 0 1 0 COST 0 1 0 DRS TOS setting succeeded 0xC0 STEP2 STEP3 STEP4 STEP1 STEP5 VS 32 SET DRSTOS VALUE TOS 00 FF C0 DRS TOS setting succeeded 0xC0 STEP1 CASE1 W...

Page 2229: ...assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand STEP1 Select the communication speed AUTO Auto Negotiation Default 100M 100 Mbps fixed mode 10M 10 Mbps fixed mode STEP2 Select the Duplex mode FULL Full Duplex mode HALF Half Duplex mode Result is shown VS 32 SET INTERFACE dp0 SPEED AUTO 100M 10M 100M DUPLEX FULL HALF FULL Ethernet Speed setting succeede...

Page 2230: ...ing the maintenance com mand STEP1 Enter an IP address and a subnet mask Result is shown VS 32 SET IPADDRESS 10 4 128 5 255 255 255 0 IP address set complete STEP1 STEP1 Enter the communication port number Default 3456 STEP2 Enter the PHE communication port number Default 60130 STEP3 Enter the PtoP communication port number Default 62000 STEP4 Enter the H 245 Start port Default 60000 STEP5 Enter t...

Page 2231: ...o show setting and status of INTERFACE VS 32 SHOW COUNTRYCODE Use country is JPN Japan code 0x0001 VS 32 VS 32 SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE VS 32 VS 32 SHOW DRSADDRESS Primary DRS Address 10 41 1 100 Port 3456 Secondary DRS Address 10 41 1 101 port 3457 Tertiary DRS Address 10 41 1 102 port 3457 Fourth DRS Address 10 41 1 103 port 3457 VS 32 SHOW DRSTOS DRS TOS is 0xC0 PRECEDENCE 6 DELAY 0 THROUGHPUT ...

Page 2232: ...Port Number is 60310 Voice Control Port Number 62000 H245 Start Port Number is 60000 RTP Start port Number is 1024 VS 32 SHOW VERSION Hardware PZ CCxxx 1A Boot program SP 3788 01 00 Firmware SP 3789 01 00 AC490 Kernel Ver Revision Patch PatchNumber Reserved Month Day Year Name AC490 MainProgram Revision Patch PatchNumber Reserved Month Day Year Name AC490 Driver Ver SubVersion Date Comment 0 105 0...

Page 2233: ...VOL 2 1980 VS 32 Conference Server 9 To show the status of VS 32 Conference Server 10 To show VLAN settings VS 32 SHOW STATUS VS32 is ONLINE VS ID 003013266666 VS 32 SHOW VLAN DEVICE VLAN5 ID COS 5 3 ...

Page 2234: ...EP1 Select Y or N Y Save N Cancel Result is shown VS 32 SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off during save May I save Y N Y Complete Preservation of configuration data was successful Re starting is required for making a setup reflect STEP1 STEP1 Select Y or N Y Save N Cancel Result is shown VS 32 SAVE WAVEFILE Don t power off during save May I save Y N Y Complete Wave file system has been saved STEP1 ...

Page 2235: ...e the INIT CONFIG command to initialize the settings first and then set a correct one PUT 1 To upload the configuration of data to the specified TFTP server VS 32 INIT CONFIG Warning This command is for initialize config data If this command is executed your configuration is deleted OK Y N Y It s recommended to back up your configuration really OK Y N Y Complete reboot STEP1 Your configuration is ...

Page 2236: ...d four times If the connection has a prob lem no answer message will be dis played PING 100 100 100 4 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 100 100 100 4 icmp_seq 0 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 100 100 100 4 icmp_seq 1 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 100 100 100 4 icmp_seq 2 time 0 ms 64 bytes from 100 100 100 4 icmp_seq 3 time 0 ms 100 100 100 4 PING Statistics 4 packets transmitted 4 packets received 0 packet loss rou...

Page 2237: ...ly file VS 32 rm 001 wav STEP1 Enter a file name after the rm command STEP1 VS 32 ls cf STEP1 Enter a directory after ls command If omitted the directory wil be set to system For the directory tree refer to page 1965 Listing Directory cf drwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 4096 May 31 16 51 log drwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 4096 May 31 11 33 WAVE rwxrwxrwx 1 0 0 240074 Feb 26 14 34 001 wav VS 32 cp cf 001 wav wave 001 wave STEP1...

Page 2238: ... Conference Server in default STEP1 Select Y N or C Y Save settings and exit N Exit without saving C Cancel VS 32 EXIT VS 32 EXIT Configuration data is changed Does it save and end Y It saves and ends N It ends without saving C Cancel Y N C Y COnfiguration data has been changed CASE1 Normal CASE2 When the Save command is not executed after changing settings STEP1 Finished Finished ...

Page 2239: ...he specified range of parameter is illegal Confirm the range of data entered Sorry the system data files sysdata looks corrupt ed You may initialize system data with INT CON FIG command The system data file is corrupted Initialize the system data using the INIT CONFIG command Sub command not found The entered sub command is not supported Enter the supported sub command This command cannot be disti...

Page 2240: ...Assign data following the data setting de scribed in the manual E1 Message Receive Time Out Network congestion might occur Check network conditions MGC might be down while registration is performed This status con tinues check the MGC Waiting Response from DHCP Now Waiting for IP address offering Check it again after a while No Response from DHCP VS 32 cannot receive any response from DHCP Server ...

Page 2241: ...ual Card SCA VS32VA and VS 32 Dual Box MG VS32VA for box type VS 32 Dual Card is accommodated in Multi Purposes Chassis MPC Those ones are shown in the following figure Note 1 VS 32 Dual Card is a slot in type of line card mounted on 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis A 1U MPC can accommodate a maximum of two cards There is no restriction on the combination of mounting card types any other MG MC card c...

Page 2242: ...s are encrypted to ensure security feature Confer ence three way calling announcement and external hold tone features are provided on IP network with secu rity Note Registration mode can be selected when SP 3891 CA VS32 PROG A Issue 3A or later version of firmware is installed on VS 32 Dual When SP3891 CA VS32 PROG A Issue 2A or earlier version of firmware is installed VS 32 Dual works in Propriet...

Page 2243: ... party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party CASE 2 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 8 party 8 party CASE 3 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 16 party CASE 4 8 party 8 party 8 party 8 party CASE 5 8 party 8 party 16 party CASE 6 16 party 16 party CASE 7 32 party CASE 8 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party 3 party Announcement IP External Hold Tone CASE 9 8 party 8 party Announcem...

Page 2244: ...available Create WAVE files on PC conforming to the specified format Download these WAVE files via FTP and save them on internal Flash ROM of VS 32 Dual For more details see SETUP WAVEFILE command in Section 24 4 1 How To Use Maintenance Command The following are the details about the VS 32 Dual features CF ANNC MOH CONF ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 100M LINK RESET MUSIC CONSOLE VS 32 V Maintenance Conso...

Page 2245: ...rmed without IPPAD circuit card Music source files in the internal Flash ROM or CF Memory Card of VS 32 Dual are used for the an nouncement sound source Music source files edited by PC are also available For more information refer to page 2050 Announcement PSTN Private Network IP Network SW HUB Firewall IP Terminal IP Terminal Firewall MG MG VS 32 Dual IP Terminal Non IP Terminal ...

Page 2246: ...iles in the internal Flash ROM or CF Memory Card of VS 32 Dual are used in the External hold tone sound source For more information refer to page 2050 Besides MUSIC equipment can be used as the external sound source via External Input Interface Music Jack Hold tone Conversation PSTN Private Network IP Network SW HUB Firewall IP Terminal IP Terminal Firewall MG MG VS 32 Dual IP Terminal Non IP Term...

Page 2247: ...e to non IP terminals instead of TSW ROM and EMA PLO ROM This feature can be performed by fixing the connection between Music on Hold MOH of VS 32 Dual and Speech Path Memory SPM This feature requires IPPAD circuit card External Audible Sound SW HUB VS 32 Dual IP Terminal Non IP Terminal 3 way CONF 8 way CONF DAT External Hold Tone IPPAD ...

Page 2248: ...additional station user holds the call Three Way Calling may be established this service is called Consultation Hold Three Way Conference is also used as UMS conversation recording to record the conversation between two parties Three Way Calling established by VS 32 Dual PSTN Private Network IP Network SW HUB Firewall IP Terminal IP Terminal Firewall MG MG VS 32 Dual IP Terminal Non IP Terminal ...

Page 2249: ... conferees and connecting them to the conference Conference Leader calls them one by one until all the members are summoned 3 MEET ME There are two ways to establish the MEET ME conference Conference Leader dials Conferees and then transfers Conferees answering the call to a specific port reserved for the conference by dialing the conference station pilot number Conference Leader and Conferees dec...

Page 2250: ...est routing to send and receive the packets peer to peer Thereby the follow ing can be achieved The problem of voice quality such as delays in transferring the voice signals might be solved The redundant number of packets over the WLAN can be reduced to a minimum The use of VS 32 Dual s that are far from an originating terminal can be restricted MA ID PSTN Private Network IP Network IP Terminal IP...

Page 2251: ... is mounted on 1U MPC 19 inch rack mount 1U box VS 32 Dual Box MG VS32VA Unit mm inch 400 0 1 3 75 43 8 1 72 430 0 1 4 93 CF ANNC MOH CONF ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 100M LINK RESET MUSIC CONSOLE VS 32 V 297 0 11 6 43 0 1 69 210 0 8 26 Unit mm inch CF ANNC MOH CONF ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 100M LINK RESET MUSIC CONSOLE VS 32 V ...

Page 2252: ...single power configuration Prepare one more power unit for dual power configuration See the Installation Manual for the mounting procedure of power unit Rear View Cooling fan PACT 7 6 17 CF ANNC MOH CONF ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 100M LINK RESET MUSIC CONSOLE VS 32 V 16 15 8 9 10 11 13 Front View 5 1 5 2 5 4 3 2 1 12 14 Size Weight 1U MPC mount maximum 2 cards unit 7 0 kg at the maximum mount on 1U MP...

Page 2253: ... SCA VS32VA MG VS32VA Front View Rear View CF ANNC MOH CONF ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 100M LINK RESET MUSIC CONSOLE VS 32 V AC IN POWER ON OFF 5 1 5 2 5 1 3 2 7 6 16 15 8 9 10 11 12 13 4 14 Size Weight 210 W 297 D 43 H mm 1 8kg ...

Page 2254: ...2 Dual reset switch Boot program is started 5 Compact Flash Card Slot CF Memory Card slot for storing announce and music on hold sound source TYPE I of CF Memory Card is available Before ejecting CF Memory Card from VS 32 Dual turn off the power of the VS 32 Dual or push CFMBR switch to turn the CF LED off 1 CFMBR Switch Make busy of CF Memory Card This switch is used to turn off CF lamp 2 Eject L...

Page 2255: ...re idle for conference feature 12 ANNC Status of the announcement fea ture Green One or more channels are used for announcement feature FLASH No registration or no assigned data Data is assigned but all make busy OFF All channels are idle for announcement feature 13 MOH Status of the external music on hold feature Green One or more channels are used for external music on hold feature FLASH No regi...

Page 2256: ...ue can be changed by ADTM command iLP PM 60130 Default value can be changed by ADTM command Peer to Peer P2P communication control port 62000 Default value can be changed by the configuration com mand SET PORTNUMBER RTP start port 1024 H 245 start port 60000 Port Number in SIP mode Function TP side SP side LAN Port default Port Number default Command to Change Setting Port Number default Command t...

Page 2257: ...ction Three Way Calling Extension Function Supervisory Call Attendant Override Busy Verification Attendant Override Monitoring CCIS Announcement Call Forwarding Unused Number Level All Calls Announcement Extension Function For single connection only Unused Number Dead Level Number Announcement For single connection only Call Forwarding Intercept Announcement For single connection only Delay Announ...

Page 2258: ...ontrol VS32 Conference Server Three Way Calling Multiple Party Conference External IP Music on Hold Announce ment External Multiple Music On Hold Source Least Cost Routing for VS32 Payload Change DTMF Playback in RTP Information Output feature ITEMS FEATURE NAME REMARKS ...

Page 2259: ...Unshielded Twisted Pair UTP Straight through Cable Category 5 or higher a maximum of 100m CONSOLE Cable RJ 45 RS232C serial cable for using maintenance console Audio Cable Microphone input for using external hold tone source φ3 5 mini jack monaural type optional 2 Firmware Program The following program is installed in VS 32 Dual Installed Firmware SP 3891 CA VS32 PROG A Issue 3A or later for dual ...

Page 2260: ...ck mount 1U box See the Installation Manual for the procedure to mount 1U MPC on 19 inch rack Note This figure is an example to mount a VS 32 Dual Card in the left slot on 1U MPC STEP 1 Insert VS 32 Dual Card into 1U MPC VS 32 Dual Card SCA VS32VA bracket to mount on 19 inch rack 1U MPC Multi Purposes Chassis CF ANNC MOH CONF ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 100M LINK RESET MUSIC CONSOLE VS 32 V VS 32 V CF A...

Page 2261: ...xing two screws on right and left sides VS 32 Dual Box desktop horizontal setting Desktop Horizontal Setting CF ANNC MOH CONF ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 100M LINK RESET MUSIC CONSOLE VS 32 V Phillips screw driver CF ANNC MOH CONF ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 100M LINK RESET MUSIC CONSOLE FRONT VS 32 V ...

Page 2262: ...nt The tuning of volume level is to be done by monitoring from the telephone terminal connected over PSTN line and tuning the output level of external hold tone source Input impedance from the external hold tone source needs to be within the range of 8Ω 50kΩ Make sure not to exceed this range Note 2 If audio equipment has a ground terminal be sure to make proper connection to grounding of audio eq...

Page 2263: ... surges be sure to make proper connection to grounding less than 10Ω If the cable is struck by lightning directly the light ning might cause damage to VS 32 Dual and AC power cable without Ground connection To AC power supply AC code stopper attached REAR PACT Connect the AC power cable to AC power inlet on the rear panel of VS 32 Dual Fix the AC power cable with the stopper ...

Page 2264: ...ce Input impedance from the external hold tone source needs to be within the range of 8Ω 50kΩ Make sure not to exceed this range Note 2 If audio equipment has a ground terminal be sure to make proper connection to grounding of audio equip ment PC for Maintenance Console LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX connect to PHONE LINE output of audio equipment if necessary CONSOLE cable serial straight Network ...

Page 2265: ... be sure to take proper connection to grounding less than 10Ω If the cable is struck by lightning directly the lightning might cause damage to VS 32 Dual and AC power cable without Ground connection REAR AC IN POWER ON OFF To AC power supply AC code stopper attached Connect the AC power cable to AC power inlet on the rear panel of VS 32 Dual Fix the AC power cable with the stopper ...

Page 2266: ...signment 3 VS32 Dual Data Assignment Note 1 4 Security Data Assignment When Proprietary Protocol mode 1 Internal PHE Data Assignment 2 VS32 Dual Data Assignment Note 1 STEP 1 Data Assignment by PCPro 1 Connection between PC maintenance console and CONSOLE Connector 2 Terminal Software Activation 3 Setting of Terminal Software STEP 2 Terminal Software Setting on Maintenance Console When Proprietary...

Page 2267: ...ement three way calling multiple party confer ence external music on hold feature on the Telephony Server Depending on the using maintenance applica tion see the following manuals for the data programming procedure by PCPro Data Programming Manual Business V 26 VS32 Conference Server Data Programming Manual SIP V 27 VoIP Encryption ...

Page 2268: ...l on the Maintenance Console STEP 3 Set the parameter of the terminal software as follows Port COM1 depending on PC setting Baud Rate 9600 bps Data 8 bits Parity None Stop Bit 1 Flow Control None Note For the detailed procedure of Terminal Software HyperTerminal setting refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions R...

Page 2269: ... LEDs indicate normal status PWR lamp lights green Boot program automatically starts ON LINE lamp lights green when the startup sequence is completed ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT VS 32 Dual Card REAR Note 1 Turn ON the power switch UP Turn ON the power switch UP VS 32 Dual Box REAR CF ANNC MOH CONF ALM PWR ON LINE Ether 100M LINK RESET MUSIC CONSOLE VS 32 ...

Page 2270: ...ntrolling function of the Telephony Server Note SIP server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server When VS 32 Dual works in SIP mode the Telephony Server acts as SIP server Note The setting data here is an example Assign the network data adjusting to your network configuration Startup maintenance command STEP 1 When the boot program is started the initial display below is displayed on ...

Page 2271: ...and is executed Proprietary Protocol mode starts with the prompt VS 32 in default setting STEP 2 Assign whether to use DHCP server The required setting in SETUP TP command differs whether to use the DHCP server STEP 3 Assign other network data according to the setting of DHCP server When DHCP server is used When DHCP server is NOT used VS 32 SETUP TP DHCP Interface set Current DHCP Interface ENABL...

Page 2272: ... 1 Assign the required DHCP option in Add Option Type dialog box as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate e g DRS2 Data IP address Array Checked Code 003 IP address of Default Gateway 161 DHCP option for IP address of the Telephony Server Refer to DHCP Server in Volume 1 of this manual for more information on DHCP option setting Note 2 When Defa...

Page 2273: ...t mask of VS 32 Dual IP address of Default Gateway IP address and port number of DRS Note 1 Communication speed of LAN interface Note When the DHCP is set to ENABLE IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect Be sure to assign SET DHCP DISABLE before starting the IP address setting Note 1 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODU...

Page 2274: ...UP TP command to complete network setting If you exit the SETUP TP command without saving the con figuration data the assigned data is all canceled after rebooting Don t power off in progress Do you save the configuration data Y N y Configuration data has been saved Re starting is required for making a setup reflect TP mode setting succeeded ...

Page 2275: ... the Telephony Server side by PCPro Note As long as you don t enter the one time password you cannot move on to the next step When invalid pass word is entered error message Illegal parameter is displayed and asked to enter again STEP 3 Assign whether to use DHCP server and DNS server The required setting in SETUP SP command differs whether to use each server 1 DHCP server enable disable setting V...

Page 2276: ...mand for the detail assignment procedure When DHCP server and DNS server are used When DHCP server is used and DNS server is NOT used When DHCP server is NOT used and DNS server is used When DHCP server is NOT used and DNS server is NOT used DNS Interface set Current DNS Interface DISABLE Change DNS Interface Y change N current Q quit y Input new DNS Interface E enable D disable e Input new DNS IP...

Page 2277: ...og box as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate e g SP1 Data IP address Array Checked Code See the table below Refer to DHCP Server in Volume 2 of this manual for more information on DHCP option setting Note 2 VS 32 Dual need not assign host name of SIP server in configuration setting because the host name as signed on DHCP server side is applie...

Page 2278: ...ess of VS 32 Du al anytime Note 2 Assign the required DHCP option in Add Option Type dialog box as follows Class Global Name Not specified but do not enter the same option name in duplicate e g SP1 Data IP address Array Checked Code See the table below Refer to DHCP Server in Volume 2 of this manual for more information on DHCP option setting Note 3 About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server ...

Page 2279: ...Gateway Host name of SIP server Communication Speed of LAN Interface Set the following data on DNS server IP address of SIP server Note 1 Note When the DHCP is set to ENABLE IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect Be sure to assign SET DHCP DISABLE before starting the IP address setting Note 1 About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta...

Page 2280: ...Gateway IP address and port number of SIP server Note 1 Host name of SIP server can be skipped Communication Speed of LAN Interface Note When the DHCP is set to ENABLE IP addresses assigned here cannot take effect Be sure to assign SET DHCP DISABLE before starting the IP address setting Note 1 About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tions...

Page 2281: ...es by SETUP WAVEFILE command Be sure to save the music source files to in ternal Flash ROM of VS 32 Dual If not the assigned data is all canceled after rebooting See SET UP WAVEFILE command in 24 4 1 How To Use Maintenance Command for the detail assignment procedure STEP 7 Reboot VS 32 Dual after saving the configuration data Use REBOOT command or turn the POWER switch OFF ON to reboot VS 32 Dual ...

Page 2282: ...st Note Data memory backup is recommended after confirming the VS 32 Dual assignment on the Telephony Server See the procedure below 1 Execute ASECL command to confirm the setting 2 On Certified Terminal Assignment tab check Certified Terminal and then click Read button 3 Certified Terminal List is displayed Confirm the MAC address of assigned VS 32 Dual is listed 4 Execute MEM_HDD MEM_HDD_N comma...

Page 2283: ...network device switching HUB router etc is turned ON Check the correct cable is used use straight through cable Check the cable is not damaged Test the continuity in the LAN cable Replace the LAN cable or the network device if the problem is still not cleared Lights green This lamp turns ON when VS 32 Dual initially starts up and connects to LAN Go on to STEP 3 STEP 3 Is the ON LINE lamp lighting ...

Page 2284: ... to STEP 6 STEP 6 Speech quality test through VS 32 Dual Any abnormal delay or noise are found Call quality is not adequate Check the call quality is good on station to station call Note 1 Adjust the setting of PAD payload and jitter buffer Check the sound quality of music source files Check the configuration data assigned from the maintenance console Call quality is adequate Go on to STEP 7 when ...

Page 2285: ...even when the VS 32 Dual operates in redundant power con figuration Note ALM Lamp Check is available for VS32 Dual card only Note ALM lamp always lights red when the VS 32 Dual operates in single power configuration Check the system message 1 Display the system message using DFTD command 2 See the system message and confirm whether VS 32 Dual error occurs or not If an error occurs perform the faul...

Page 2286: ...section refers to the Telephony Server When VS 32 Dual works in Proprietary Protocol mode the Telephony Server acts as DRS which is controlling function of the Telephony Server Run terminal software e g HyperTerminal to start maintenance program Maintenance command launches by entering usrConsole following the OS prompt Note 1 When the system is ready the following prompt is shown on the screen VS...

Page 2287: ...pt switches to VS 32 SIP after completing the configuration setting to SIP mode by SETUP SP command Data setting is explained using the prompt of Proprietary Protocol mode here VS 32 set ipaddress 10 10 15 5 255 255 255 0 Command Sub Command Parameter 1 Parameter 2 ...

Page 2288: ...sk of VS 32 Dual X X 8 ONE_TIME_PASS Setting One Time Password for security N X 9 OWN_NAME Setting Host Name of VS 32 Dual N X 10 PORTNUMBER Setting port number of each application X X 11 SIGNALING_PORT_NO Setting signaling port number for SIP N X 12 SIGNALING_QOS Setting QoS for SIP signaling session N X 13 SIPSV_IPADDRESS Setting IP address port number and host name of SIP serv er N X 14 VLAN Se...

Page 2289: ...source files on the RAM to VS 32 Dual in ternal Flash ROM X X List of INIT Command COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION Proprie tary SIP INIT 1 CONFIGDATA To initialize configuration data to the factory default set ting X X List of REBOOT Command COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION Proprie tary SIP REBOOT 1 To reboot VS 32 Dual X X List of GET Command COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION Proprie tary SIP GET 1 ...

Page 2290: ...mand COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION Proprie tary SIP PWD 1 To display the current directory X X List of RM Command COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION Proprie tary SIP RM 1 To delete file X X List of LS Command COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION Proprie tary SIP LS 1 To display detailed information for directories and files X X List of CP Command COMMAND No SUB COMMAND FUNCTION Proprie tary SIP CP 1 To ...

Page 2291: ...d press the Enter key The example below shows the screen when requesting the list of SET commands History In the command line of Maintenance Command cursor key UP and DOWN operation shows history function You can edit the input parameters using Back Space key and change the parameter VS 32 set Subcommand Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter3 DEFAULTROUTE DefaultGateway DHCP ENABLE DISABLE VS 32 set ipa...

Page 2292: ... until three times The third time you enter illegal data the SETUP command quits discarding all the entered data Note When you quit the SETUP command entry halfway through the setting all the entered data is to be discard ed 1 Setting basic IP data for SIP mode F To startup SETUP SP command F Setting one time password this setting is displayed when one time password has not been assigned yet VS 32...

Page 2293: ...CP server E Use DHCP server default D Not use DHCP server DNS Interfase set Current DNS Interface DISABLE Change DNS Interface Y change N current Q quit y Input new DNS Interface E enable D disable e Input new DNS IP Address 10 41 1 150 Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Specify whether to us...

Page 2294: ...mple 3 Broadcast address cannot be assigned as IP address of VS 32 Dual IP address 192 168 1 255 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Example 4 Broadcast address cannot be assigned as IP address of VS 32 Dual IP address 172 16 255 255 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 0 0 0 0 Change IP Address and Subnetmask Y change N current Q quit y Input new I...

Page 2295: ...st Name vs32 nec com Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Enter new host name of VS 32 Dual in full domain format Up to 63 bytes of alphanumeric characters period and hyphen is available Default Gateway IP Address set Current Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Change Default Gateway Y change N current Q q...

Page 2296: ...Number 5060 Is there the Host Name Y N y Input new Host Name SVR1 nec com Continue Y continue N exit n Line 4 Line 9 The current setting of SIP server information IP address port number and host name is displayed Line 10 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 11 Enter the number of SIP server 1 20 Line 12 Enter the IP address of SIP server e g ...

Page 2297: ...Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Select the communication speed of LAN interface 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100Mbps fixed mode 3 10Mbps fixed mode Line 5 Select the Duplex mode of LAN interface not required for auto negotiation F Full duplex mode H Half duplex mode Don t power off in progress Do you save the configuration data Y N y C...

Page 2298: ... IP address setting through the Telephony Server IP address setting VS 32 VS 32 SETUP TP Enter SETUP TP following the prompt DHCP Interfase set Current DHCP Interface ENABLE Change DHCP Interface Y change N current Q quit y Input new DHCP Interface E enable D disable d Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this set...

Page 2299: ...mple 3 Broadcast address cannot be assigned as IP address of VS 32 Dual IP address 192 168 1 255 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Example 4 Broadcast address cannot be assigned as IP address of VS 32 Dual IP address 172 16 255 255 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 IP Address Subnetmask set Current IP Address 0 0 0 0 Current Subnetmask 0 0 0 0 Change IP Address and Subnetmask Y change N current Q quit y Input new I...

Page 2300: ...ork segment where VS 32 Dual belongs Default Gateway IP Address set Current Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Change Default Gateway Y change N current Q quit y Input new Default Gateway 10 41 1 254 Line 2 The current setting is displayed Line 3 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Enter new IP address of Default Gateway e g 10 41 1 254 ...

Page 2301: ...56 Port 3456 Port 3456 Change DRS Information Y change N current Q quit y Input DRS unit 1 Primary 2 Secondary 3 Tertiary 4 Fourth 1 Input DRS IP Address 10 41 1 200 Input DRS Port Number 3456 Continue Y continue N exit n Line 3 Line 6 The current setting of DRS information IP address and port number is displayed Line 7 Asked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit thi...

Page 2302: ...ked whether to change the displayed setting Y change N not change Q quit this setting Line 4 Select the communication speed of LAN interface 1 Auto negotiation default 2 100Mbps fixed mode 3 10Mbps fixed mode Line 5 Select the Duplex mode of LAN interface not required for auto negotiation F Full duplex mode H Half duplex mode Don t power off in progress Do you save the configuration data Y N y Con...

Page 2303: ...e identifier must be wav or mdt The number of files is up to 250 and its capacity adds up to approximately 8M byte however it in cludes management domain for file system so that the actual capacity is less than 8M byte Note If the same serial number of wave files exist in internal Flash ROM and CF card of VS 32 Dual the system cannot find the file to play back Make sure not to name the same serial...

Page 2304: ...VA MG VS32VA How to make a sound file on Windows Operating System STEP1 Select Start Programs Accessories Entertainment SoundRecorder STEP2 Select File Properties STEP3 Click the Convert Now button on the Properties for Sound window ...

Page 2305: ...sound name by clicking the Save As button and then specify the CCITTμ law or CCITTA law for format and 8kHz 8Bit Mono for Attributes STEP5 Click the Record button STEP6 Click the Stop button STEP7 Select File Save As to save the file in the appropriate location ...

Page 2306: ...rnal music on hold features VS 32 SETUP WAVEFILE 10 10 10 96 Enter the IP address of FTP server ftp 10 10 10 96 User vs32 Password Enter user name and password to login FTP server is displayed for password Please enter item number 1 Change remote working directory 2 List contents of remote directory 3 Receive remote file 4 List contents of local directory 5 Send local file 6 Copy local file 7 Rena...

Page 2307: ... wave file name to download Please enter item number 1 Change remote working directory 2 List contents of remote directory 3 Receive remote file 4 List contents of local directory 5 Send local file 6 Copy local file 7 Rename local file 8 Delete local file 9 Check wave file for VS 32 10 Terminate ftp session and exit Enter the parameter 10 to adjust the wave file to the system The wave file is save...

Page 2308: ...gal Format Byte Per Sec 176400 Illegal Format Byte Per Block 4 Illegal Format Bit Per Sample 16 Error report is dis played when format er ror is detected See the table Errors for WAVE file format 002 wav mu law 80000Byte 10s OK 2 Directory Name wave wave is the data direc tory of internal Flash ROM the directory of second priority File Name Codec Data Size Play Time Result ANP 000 wav 001 wav 250_...

Page 2309: ...restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Errors for WAVE file format ILLEGAL FORMAT NORMAL VALUE COUNTERMEASERS Codec 0x0006 A law 0x0007 μ law Create wave file with μ law or A law of PCM codec Channel 1 monaural Create wave file with monaural channel Rate 8000 8kHz Create wave file with 8kHz of sampling period Byte Per Sec 8000 Create wave file with 8kHz and 8 bit of sampling Byte Per Bloc...

Page 2310: ...mmand Port number can be set in SET PORTNUMBER command Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Note 1 About IP address of DRS Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual VS 32 SIP SET DNS_SW DNS Interface ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DNS server is used...

Page 2311: ...ted Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand VS 32 SET DRSTOS P1 P1 PRECEDENCE VALUE VS 32 SET DRSTOS PRECEDENCE Enter PRECEDENCE following the sub command PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 Precedence 0 7 low high default 6 DELAY 0 1 0 Delay 0 1 Normal default Low delay THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 Throughput 0 1 Normal default High throughput ON RELIABILI...

Page 2312: ...TUP SP command Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand Note The designated IP address cannot be applied when DHCP is set to ENABLE Be sure to assign the DHCP setting to DISABLE before performing this IP address assignment VS 32 SET INTERFACE P1 P1 Enter interface name can be skipped SPEED AUTO 100M 10M 100M Select the communic...

Page 2313: ...e maintenance com mand Note The value in shows the current setting Press Enter key to skip changing the displayed port number VS 32 SIP SET ONE_TIME_PASS One Time Password P1 P1 Enter the password in numeric 4 10 digits 0 9 can be used e g OTP 12345 One time password setting succeeded Result is shown VS 32 SIP SET OWN_NAME P1 P1 Enter the host name of VS 32 Dual in full domain format within 63 byt...

Page 2314: ...fore exiting the maintenance com mand 12 Setting QoS for SIP signaling session This command assigns quality of service data for SIP signaling session for SIP mode only VS 32 SIP SET PORTNUMBER RTP Start port number 1024 1024 Enter RTP start port default 1024 Port Number setting succeeded Result is shown VS 32 SIP SET SIGNALING_PORT_NO P1 P1 Enter the port number used for SP PHI 1024 65535 default ...

Page 2315: ...ey to apply the current setting shown in Note To make this assignment effective use the SAVE command and restart before exiting the maintenance com mand VS 32 SIP SET SIGNALING_QOS QOS TOS DIFFSERV TOS TOS Select TOS for QoS setting type TOS DIFFSERV default TOS PRECEDENCE 0 7 6 6 Precedence 0 7 low high default 6 DELAY 0 1 0 0 Delay 0 1 Normal default Low Delay ON THROUGHPUT 0 1 0 0 Throughput 0 ...

Page 2316: ...succeeded 0xC0 Result is shown VS 32 SIP SET SIGNALING_QOS DIFFSERV 48 P1 Enter DIFFSERV to set Diffserv data value P2 Enter the DSCP setting value 0 63 Signaling QoS setting succeeded 0xC0 Result is shown VS 32 SIP SET SIGNALING_QOS CLEAR P1 Enter CLEAR to clear QoS setting Signaling QoS clearing succeeded 0x00 Result is shown VS 32 SIP SET SIPSV_IPADDRESS SIP Server 1 20 1 Enter the SIP server s...

Page 2317: ...t before exiting the maintenance com mand VS 32 SET VLAN Please enter a parameter VLAN set ENABLE or DISABLE enable ENABLE VLAN is used DISABLE VLAN is not used default VLAN ID 1 4094 5 Enter the VLAN_ID 1 4094 COS 0 7 3 Enter the Class of Service COS setting 0 7 VLAN device setting complete Result is shown VS 32 SET VLAN VLAN ID and COS exist already Is it all right although overwritten Y write N...

Page 2318: ... xx xx SUBNET_MASK xxx xxx xxx xxx DEFAULT_GATEWAY xx xx xx xxx DRS_ADDR1 xxx xxx xxx xxx DRS_PORT1 3456 DRS_ADDR2 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT2 3456 DRS_ADDR3 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT3 3456 DRS_ADDR4 0 0 0 0 DRS_PORT4 3456 LPPM_PORT 60130 SWITCH_CTRL_PORT 62000 DRS_TOS 0xC0 Type CR to continue A CR to show all Q CR to stop H245START_PORT 60000 DRS_RCV_PORT 3456 NETWORK LAN_SPEED auto DHCP_SW enable MEDIA RTPSTART_PO...

Page 2319: ...xxx xxx xxx xxx DEFAULT_GATEWAY xxx xxx xxx xxx OWN_NAME DNS_ADDR 0 0 0 0 SIGNALING_PORT 5060 SIP SIPSV_ADDR1 xxx xxx xxx xxx SIPSV_PORT1 5060 SIPSV_NAME1 SIG_QOS 1 0xC0 NETWORK LAN_SPEED auto DHCP_SW DISABLE DNS_SW DISABLE MEDIA RTPSTART_PORT 1024 VLAN VLAN_SW DISABLE VLAN_DATA OTP Expired_OTP The current setting related to SIP mode is shown ...

Page 2320: ...OW COUNTRYCODE Use country is JPN Japan code 0x0001 The current setting is shown VS 32 SHOW DHCP DHCP is ENABLE The current setting is shown VS 32 SIP SHOW DNS_SW Used for SIP mode only DNS interface DISABLE DNS IP Address 10 41 1 150 The current setting is shown VS 32 SHOW DRSADDRESS P1 P1 Specify the DRS 1 4 1 Primary 2 Secondary 3 Tertiary 4 Fourth Primary DRS Address 10 41 1 100 Port 3456 The ...

Page 2321: ... INTERFACE P1 P1 Enter the interface name can be skipped Setting Auto negotiation Current setting of communication state is shown Status Speed is 100Mbps Half Duplex Link Up Actual operating state is shown VS 32 SHOW IPADDRESS P1 P1 Enter the interface name can be skipped IP Address 10 41 1 100 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 10 41 1 254 The current setting is shown VS 32 SIP SHOW ONE_TIME_P...

Page 2322: ...H245 Start Port Number is 60000 RTP Start Port Number is 1024 The current setting of communication port number for DRS Internal PHE P2P H 245 start port and RTP start port is shown for Proprietary Protocol mode VS 32 SIP SHOW PORTNUMBER RTP Start Port Number is 1024 The current setting of RTP start port is shown for SIP mode VS 32 SIP SHOW SIGNALING_PORT_NO Used for SIP mode only Signaling port nu...

Page 2323: ...gistration Status In the case of offline the cause of registration error is to be displayed See Error Messages related to registration in Proprietary Protocol mode for the reason and the countermeasures of registration error 1 2 3 20 10 41 1 150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5060 5060 5060 5060 SVR1 nec com The current setting is shown VS 32 SHOW STATUS Register Mode MAC Address Link State Speed Duplex ...

Page 2324: ...e for the reason and the counter measures of registration error VS 32 SIP SHOW STATUS Register Mode MAC Address Link State Speed Duplex VLAN Mode DHCP Mode IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Mode Encryption SP 00 00 xx xx xx xx Up 100Mbps Full Disable Disable 10 41 1 100 255 255 255 0 10 41 1 254 Disable The current operating state is shown SIP Encrypt RTP Encrypt All Current Sipsv Address...

Page 2325: ...n information is listed AC490 Kernel Ver Revision Patch PatchNumber Reserved Month Day Year Name xx xx xx xx xx 200x AC490Kernel AC490 MainProgram Revision Patch PatchNumber Reserved Month Day Year Name xx xx xx xx xx 200x AC490012ae3 AC490 Driver Ver SubVersion Date Comment xxx xx xx xx xxxx VS 32 SHOW VLAN DEVICE VLAN1 ID 5 COS 3 IPADDRESS 10 4 128 5 SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 Device name VLAN ID ...

Page 2326: ...y I save Y N y Enter y to save the assigned configuration data to Flash ROM Complete Preservation of configuration data was successful Re starting is required for making a setup reflect Result is shown VS 32 SAVE CONFIGDATA Don t power off during save May I save Y N n Enter n to cancel Configuration data has not been saved Result is shown VS 32 SAVE WAVEFILE Don t power off during save May I save ...

Page 2327: ...Write start Write OK Writing to Flash ROM is executed Command complete Result is shown You need to setup configuration data VS 32 SIP INIT CONFIGDATA Warning This command initializes the configuration data This deletes the current setting Recommend to back up the setting Command execute or not Y N y Asked whether to execute initialization Y Initialize N Not execute Initializes authentication key o...

Page 2328: ...nfiguration data is downloaded first use the INIT CONFIGDATA command to initialize the set tings and then set a correct one PUT 1 To upload the configuration data file to specified TFTP server The configuration file is uploaded to the route directory of TFTP server with a file name sysdata VS 32 REBOOT May I do reboot Y N y Asked whether to execute reboot Y Reboot N Cancel VS 32 GET CONFIGDATA P1 ...

Page 2329: ...ts transmitted 4 packets received 0 packet loss round trip ms min avg max 0 0 0 Connection status will be displayed four times VS 32 PING P1 P1 Enter the IP address of the system to access PING 100 100 100 4 56 data bytes ping timeout no answer from 100 100 100 4 When the connection has a problem no answer message will be displayed VS 32 CD P1 P1 Enter the directory name following the CD command s...

Page 2330: ...efer to page 2050 system configuration data is stored wave wave file is stored cf CF memory card When P1 is omitted current directory and file name is displayed VS 32 CP P1 P2 Specify the source and destination files to copy following the CP command P1 Source directory and file name P2 Destination directory and file name to be copied to e g cf 001 wav for P1 and wave 001 wav for P2 copying file cf...

Page 2331: ...pt of mainte nance command VS 32 in default VS 32 EXIT Finished When no configuration data is changed VS 32 EXIT Configuration data is changed Does it save and end When configuration data is changed and the setting has not been saved by SAVE command yet Y It saves and ends N It ends without saving C Cancel Y N C y Select Y N or C Y Save settings and exit N Exit without saving C Cancel Configuratio...

Page 2332: ...nds for TP mode cannot be used 2 Change the register mode by SETUP TP or SETUP SP command and then use appropriate command for TP or SP mode respectively Enter sub command Required sub command has not been entered Enter the required sub command Invalid address The form of the entered address is different Enter with the correct address format Invalid character Any illegal character is entered Confi...

Page 2333: ...Hz Illegal Format Byte Per Sec XXXXXX The sampling period of music source must be 8kHz and 8bits 8000 Please change it to 8 bit and 8kHz Illegal Format Byte Per Block XXXXXX The digitalization sampling type of music source must be mono 1 Please change it to mono type Illegal Format Bit Per Sample XXXXXX The digitalization sampling of music source must be 8 bits 8 Please specify it within 8bits Err...

Page 2334: ... operating state later When the VS32 Dual keeps this state continuously there is a possibility that op eration error may occur Try power OFF ON Receive Result is not Support Messages from DRS include some data impossible to analyze Unacceptable setting on VS 32 Dual firmware is informed from DRS Investigate the DRS not to be out of control Confirm the VS 32 Dual s firmware version complies with sy...

Page 2335: ...rror Messages related to registration in SIP mode ERROR MESSAGE STATE SOLUTION Registration is Started Now VS32 Dual is trying registration Wait for a while and then check the operating state later When the VS32 Dual keeps this states continuously there is a possibility that op eration error may occur Try power OFF ON SIP Initialize Error Data setting related to SIP is not assigned or incorrect da...

Page 2336: ...VOL 2 2083 SR MGC E 25 SR MGC E Here explains an SR MGC E function overview configuration installation procedure ...

Page 2337: ...ers from a network failure or something If detecting the recover terminals under con trol of the SR MGC E register back to and work under control of the Telephony Server the SR MGC E switches its operation to standby in case of another failure on the Telephony Server Note For Service Conditions for SR MGC E refer to Survivable Remote MGC S 141 of Data Program ming Manual Business For Service Condi...

Page 2338: ...responds to 1 5U when mounting on a 19 inch rack with depth of A4 paper Weight 3 8kg Input Power Source AC100V 10 to 240V 10 Maximum Power Consumption 75W LINK ACT SPEED Ether1 Ether2 1 2 3 4 ON PWR LOAD ON LINE Ether1 Connector Ether2 Connector not used Ether4 Connector not used PWR Lamp LOAD Lamp OnLine Lamp CPU PWR Switch CONSOLE Connector USB2 0 Connector CF Slot MODE Switch Ether3 Connector n...

Page 2339: ...h Press to turn on when powered off Works when the PWR switch on the rear panel is turned off Press to execute auto shutdown Note 3 Press four sec to turn off when powered on PWR lamp ON green CPU is powered on OFF CPU is powered off LOAD lamp Flash red Accessing to a CF card OFF No access to a CF card ONLINE lamp ON green SP runs operates properly Slow flash green TP runs SP is not Rapid flash gr...

Page 2340: ...hed Not used Flash green Accessing OFF Connection is not estab lished SPEED ON green 100Mbps ON or ange 1Gbps OFF 10Mbps Ether3 connector Note 6 LINK ON green Connection is established Not used Flash green Accessing OFF Connection is not estab lished SPEED ON green 100Mbps ON or ange 1Gbps OFF 10Mbps Ether4 connector Note 6 LINK ON green Connection is established Not used Flash green Accessing OFF...

Page 2341: ...enu PCPro Tools may not be available de pending on the system state Note 5 Telephony Server Maintenance Menu is available since FP85 109 S6 For FP85 108 S5 or earlier use only PCPro tools Note 6 Do not connect any cable to the Ether2 Ether3 and Ether4 connectors 3 Rear panel Part Condition Description Remarks PWR switch Hold down O to turn off Hold down l to turn on AC power inlet Connected with a...

Page 2342: ... Check Re ceive MGC SR MGC Serv er ADTM command 60120 SR MGC E to MGC A port for Health Check Send MGC SR MGC Client ADTM command 60140 MGC to SR MGC E A port for SR MGC Charge MGC Side ADTM command 60150 SR MGC E to MGC A port for SR MGC Charge SR MGC Side ADTM command 22 MGC to SR MGC E A port for SR MGC File Up date SSH Not available ...

Page 2343: ... UNIVERGE SV8500 Installation Manual 25 3 2 Cabling Procedure Here describes the cabling procedure Follow the following to connect cables STEP 1 Plug an attached AC power cable into the AC power inlet on the rear panel of an SR MGC E fix the AC power cable with the stopper Rear Panel STEP 2 Connect the other end of the AC power cable with an appropriate AC source ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitiv...

Page 2344: ...Plug a LAN cable into the Ether1 connector RJ 45 Front Panel Now you are done Move on to the next section Startup LINK ACT SPEED Ether1 Ether2 PWR LOAD ON LINE LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Plug into the LAN connector ...

Page 2345: ...ceding states STEP 3 Connect PCPro PC outside your LAN Connect a PC with PCPro installed to the SR MGC E through the Ether1 connector on it so that you can assign office data to the SR MGC E Note If connecting them directly use a LAN cable crossover cable if connecting via a HUB use LAN cables straight through cables STEP 4 Configure PCPro Set data to connect PCPro to the SR MGC E PCPro Connection...

Page 2346: ...ual Business STEP 7 Set SP configuration data on the SR MGC E Set the following SP configuration data depending on the MGC SIP server ID registration MPH ID registration For the procedure to set SP configuration data see the UNIVERGE SV8500 Data Programming Manual Business STEP 8 Backup data on an SR MGC s CF card Backup the data set to the SR MGC E on a CF card perform the MEM_HDD command check S...

Page 2347: ... to the software version of your system For FP85 109 S6 or later version Office Data Copy Load Perform the CMNT command open the File Control tab Select Of fice Data Copy Load from PROCESS TYPE to copy the office data Select All button Click the Select All button to execute office data or program copy to all the SR MGCs in the network Clear All button Click the Clear All button to return all the S...

Page 2348: ...ice data are successfully copied the MGC is supposed to request the SR MGC E to initialize So after finishing copy process wait for the SR MGC E to be initialized about five minutes without any action STEP 17 Paste the label Paste the label attached to the CF card onto the main unit of SR MGC E Note The location where to paste the label is stated on the pasteboard of the label Now you are done SR ...

Page 2349: ...mmand open the Initialize tab All Initial Initializes all SR MGCs at the same time Individual Initial Initializes only SR MGCs specified with an SR MGC number SR MGC Number If selecting Individual Initial specify an SR MGC number 0 255 2 Perform the SINZ command to restart the SR MGC E ...

Page 2350: ...VOL 2 2097 SR MGC E 25 5 Office Data Assignment For information about office data assignment refer to Programming section for Survivable Remote MGC S 141 in the Data Programming Manual Business ...

Page 2351: ...ection Failure between the Te lephony Server and SR MGC Is the SR MGC E connected to a network device such as a switching hub or a router Is the power of the network device turned on Do you use a straight through cable Is not the cable broken Test the conduction If none of the above helps you to solve the problem try another LAN cable and check the opera tions of the network devices Yes Indicates ...

Page 2352: ...the SR MGC E The following is an example of a call test for an SR MGC E 1 Prepare a test environment which provides a connection to an MGC 2 Disconnect the test environment from the MGC the SR MGC should start its operation 3 Call with an IP terminal for test to another to check connectivity Note Perform the call test in an environment where no other network device is involved If there is a proble...

Page 2353: ...e MGC and each SR MGC If there is an NG state perform test 2 Connect CNT Indicates the total value consisting of the number of terminals IP stations con nected to each SR MGC and the number of channels consumed by other devic es IP BS MG Analog MC VS 32 etc that are also connected to the SR MGC Note Every IP station is counted as 1 Note As for other devices every channel consumed by the devices is...

Page 2354: ...m Please replace a cooling FAN every five years to avoid it even though the cooling FAN still works normally Replacement Procedure Note You can replace cooling FANs as the SR MGC E remains on STEP 1 Use a Phillips driver to loosen a screw at the left side of the FAN cover on the rear panel of an SR MGC E STEP 2 Slide the FAN cover to the left to remove ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling ...

Page 2355: ...ot at the same time STEP 4 Attach new FANs perform the opposite procedure of removing Note When attaching pay attention to the direction of a FAN The label on a FAN must face toward the outside of an SR MGC E Test After Attaching Check if the replaced FANs work properly If either of FANs does not work properly check the cabling CAUTION Toward SR MGC E inside Toward FAN Cover outside Top Face of FA...

Page 2356: ...e that PWR lamp goes out and then turn off power of the SR MGC E The following explains how to shut down the SR MGC E when PCPro is not available but Telephony Server Maintenance Menu can be connected to the SR MGC E STEP 1 Start up Telephony Server Maintenance Menu Start the Internet Explorer on a maintenance PC and then enter http xxx xxx xxx 9801 in the address bar An IP address of the SR MGC h...

Page 2357: ...GC E automatically shuts down 2 Make sure that the PWR lamp goes out after the shutdown and then turn off the power switch on the rear of SR MGC E Telephony Server Maintenance Menu Program Office Data License Patch Log files Language Data Upload Download Delete Shutdown Reboot Switch image Read Version Advanced Menu SYSTEM CONTROL System Status Memory XX X used CPU XX Load Average XXX XXX XXX LAN1...

Page 2358: ... the SR MGC E Insert a CF card supplied for the version upgrade into the CF slot on the front panel of the SR MGC E STEP 5 Turn on the SR MGC E Turn on power of the SR MGC E where its operation is the following booting up the system reading default office data Note The IP address set in default office data is 172 16 253 0 16 STEP 6 Check the lamps Make sure that lamp states are as follow PWR ON gr...

Page 2359: ...upposed to be able to login to the SR MGC E Perform the following to check the connectivity between the PC and SR MGC E 1 Open a DOS window enter ping 172 16 253 0 press the Enter key 2 Make sure that you get replies from the SR MGC E 172 16 253 0 3 Turn on PCPro and login to the SR MGC E Now you can assign office data STEP 9 Set an IP address on the SR MGC E Set network data including an IP addre...

Page 2360: ...rform Office Data Load System Initialize with the SINZ com mand STEP 14 Connect PCPro PC to your LAN After setting necessary data on SR MGC E including an IP address matching your LAN connect the PC to the LAN 4 Set an IP address of the PC with PCPro matching your LAN environment an IP address be fore changed 5 Restart the PC 6 Connect the PC to the LAN STEP 15 Connect the SR MGC E to the LAN Conn...

Page 2361: ...trol tab Select Of fice Data Copy Load from PROCESS TYPE to copy the office data Select All button Click the Select All button to execute office data or program copy to all the SR MGCs in the network Clear All button Click the Clear All button to return all the SR MGC Numbers to the state of No Processing Request Specifying SR MGC Specify the target SR MGC number 0 255 the box of specified SR MGC ...

Page 2362: ... data are successfully copied the MGC is supposed to request the SR MGC E to ini tialize So after finishing copy process wait for the SR MGC E to be initialized about five minutes without any action STEP 21 Paste the label Paste the label if attached to the CF card onto the main unit of SR MGC E Note The location where to paste the label is stated on the pasteboard of the label Now you are done SR...

Page 2363: ...R MGC E to the status before upgraded SR MGC E Version Downgrade Procedure STEP 1 Turn off an SR MGC E Perform the SINZ command to shutdown an SR MGC E make sure that the ONLINE lamp goes off turn off power of the SR MGC E STEP 2 Remove a current CF card from the SR MGC E Remove an CF card now you are using from the CF slot on the front panel of the SR MGC E STEP 3 Insert an old CF into the SR MGC...

Page 2364: ...h SR MGC from Operation Mode to Standby Mode before executing a Remote Version Upgrade Confirm SIP Server ID before executing a Remote Version Upgrade SIP Server ID must be reconfig ured after executing a Remote Version Upgrade This reconfiguration is not required for Swtichback SR MGC E Remote Version Upgrade Procedure For details on hardware information see Specifications FTP server must be prep...

Page 2365: ...te Select System 0 from System in the ASPC command and then click the Read button to confirm the cur rent SIP Server ID This SIP Server ID will be needed when reconfiguring the ASPC command after a Remote Version Upgrade STEP 4 Disconnect PCPro from SR MGC Disconnect the connection with SR MGC from PCPro STEP 5 Connect PCPro to SV8500 Connect to SV8500 using the Connection Account for SV8500 set i...

Page 2366: ...An example Program file name is 4123_060_XXXX_120525 User ID 4 to 16 characters Enter the user name to log in to the FTP server 0 9 A Z a z _ User Password 4 to 16 characters Enter the user password to log in to the FTP server 0 9 A Z a z _ For personal security asterisks are displayed on the screen instead of the password 3 Click the Set button after filling in each parameter STEP 7 Set the Setti...

Page 2367: ...con currently to all SR MGCs that are selected However when the FTP server has a limitation on con current connection the download of a program file may fail due to a connection denial of multiple SR MGCs 4 Click the Execute button A confirmation dialog box asking whether to start the Pro gram Copy appears Click OK to start the Program Copy Note Click the Cancel button to cancel the Program Copy 5...

Page 2368: ...GC After the SR MGC boots up connect to SR MGC using the Connection Account for SR MGC set in Step1 STEP 12 Set SIP Server ID Execute the ASPC command on PCPro select System 0 from System and then reconfigure SIP Server ID which was confirmed previously in Step3 STEP 13 Disconnect PCPro from SR MGC Disconnect the connection with SR MGC from PCPro Now you are done SR MGC E should be upgraded remote...

Page 2369: ...e target SR MGC number to perform a Program Switch A box of the number you have specified will turn to yellow Click the number again to cancel the designa tion When the designation is cancelled the color of the box turns to white meaning No Processing Request again 3 Click the Execute button A confirmation dialog box asking whether to start the Pro gram Switch appears Click OK to start the Program...

Page 2370: ... S Here explains SR MGC S function overview configuration installation procedure The following supposes that the SR MGC S is inserted in a 1U MPC though a SR MGC is delivered with out the 1U MPC For details on 1U MPC see APPENDIX A ...

Page 2371: ...s from a network failure or something If detecting the recover terminals under con trol of the SR MGC S register back to and work under control of the Telephony Server the SR MGC S switches its operation to standby in case of another failure on the Telephony Server Note For Service Conditions for SR MGC S refer to Survivable Remote MGC S 141 of Data Program ming Manual Business For Service Conditi...

Page 2372: ...H x 430 W x 400 D mm corresponds to 1U when mounting on a 19 inch rack Weight Approximately 7kg SR MGC S circuit card Input Power Source AC100V 50 60Hz 10 Maximum Power Consumption 75W CPU maximum load Ether1 100M LINK 100M LINK Ether2 PWR ONLINE ALM LOAD PWR Lamp PC CARD Slot LOAD Lamp Front Cover Ether1 Connector Ether2 Connector not used ALM Lamp OnLine Lamp PC CARD USB USB Connector System Swi...

Page 2373: ...sh green TP runs a program is not installed Flash green Cannot be activated because of bad li cense Flash pattern flashes twice off two sec OFF The system does not run LOAD lamp ON red Accessing to a CF card OFF No access to a CF card USB connector Not used PC CARD slot For inserting a CF card SYSTEM switch 1 ON Off line modeNote1Note2 OFF Normal Basic setting 2 Not used 3 Not used 4 Not used Ethe...

Page 2374: ...nect PCPro Tools to the SR MGC S as it is still operating In this case there is no change on its IP address Note 3 Do not connect any cable to this connector 3 Rear panel Part Condition Description Remarks AC power inlet Connected with an attached three polar grounded AC power cable Cable Length 3 m 9 8 ft Fix the cable with the stopper to pre vent it from falling out PWR switch Hold down O to tur...

Page 2375: ... Check Re ceive MGC SR MGC Serv er ADTM command 60120 SR MGC S to MGC A port for Health Check Send MGC SR MGC Client ADTM command 60140 MGC to SR MGC S A port for SR MGC Charge MGC Side ADTM command 60150 SR MGC S to MGC A port for SR MGC Charge SR MGC Side ADTM command 22 MGC to SR MGC S A port for SR MGC File Up date SSH Not available ...

Page 2376: ...Manual 26 3 2 Cabling Procedure Here describes the cabling procedure Follow the following to connect cables STEP 1 Plug an attached AC power cable into the AC power inlet on the rear panel of an SR MGC S fix the AC power cable with the stopper Rear Panel STEP 2 Connect the other end of the AC power cable with an appropriate AC source STEP 3 Plug a LAN cable into the Ether1 connector RJ 45 ATTENTIO...

Page 2377: ... SR MGC S Front Panel Now you are done Move on to the next section Startup LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX Plug into the LAN connector Ether1 100M LINK 100M LINK Ether2 PWR ONLINE ALM LOAD PC CARD USB ON 1 2 3 4 25 ...

Page 2378: ...VOL 2 2125 SR MGC S 26 4 Office Data Assignment For information about office data assignment refer to Programming section for Survivable Remote MGC S 141 in the Data Programming Manual Business ...

Page 2379: ... SR MGC S through the Ether1 connector on it so that you can assign office data to the SR MGC S Note If connecting them directly use a LAN cable crossover cable if connecting via a HUB use LAN cables straight through cables STEP 4 Configure PCPro Set data to connect PCPro to the SR MGC S PCPro Connection Account Setting On the Main Menu click on System click on Connection Account Setting set the f...

Page 2380: ... SP configuration data depending on the MGC SIP server ID registration MPH ID registration For the procedure to set SP configuration data see the UNIVERGE SV8500 Data Programming Manual Business STEP 8 Backup data on an SR MGC s CF card Backup the data set to the SR MGC S on a CF card perform the MEM_HDD command check SR MGC Data and Data Memory STEP 9 Restart the SR MGC S Restart the SR MGC S per...

Page 2381: ... For FP85 109 S6 or later version Office Data Copy Load Perform the CMNT command open the File Control tab Select Of fice Data Copy Load from PROCESS TYPE to copy the office data Select All button Click the Select All button to execute office data or program copy to all the SR MGCs in the network Clear All button Click the Clear All button to return all the SR MGC Numbers to the state of No Proces...

Page 2382: ...ice data are successfully copied the MGC is supposed to request the SR MGC S to initialize So after finishing copy process wait for the SR MGC S to be initialized about five minutes without any action STEP 17 Paste the label Paste the label attached to the CF card onto the main unit of SR MGC S Note The location where to paste the label is stated on the pasteboard of the label Now you are done SR ...

Page 2383: ...mmand open the Initialize tab All Initial Initializes all SR MGCs at the same time Individual Initial Initializes only SR MGCs specified with an SR MGC number SR MGC Number If selecting Individual Initial specify an SR MGC number 0 255 2 Perform the SINZ command to restart the SR MGC S ...

Page 2384: ... MGC SR MGC Network Failure Is the SR MGC S connected to a network device such as a switching hub or a router Is the power of the network device turned on Do you use a straight through cable Is not the cable broken Test the conduction If none of the above helps you to solve the problem try another LAN cable and check the opera tions of the network devices Yes Indicates that the SR MGC S has establ...

Page 2385: ... Note Perform the call test in an environment where no other network device is involved If there is a problem with an outgoing incoming call Do both the SR MGC S and IP terminals for testing belong to the same network Is SR MGC S data set properly Check the assigned data such as IP address by using the AIPA command If there are no problem a call can be sent and received properly and the call quali...

Page 2386: ...ach SR MGC and the number of channels consumed by other devic es IP BS MG Analog MC VS 32 etc that are also connected to the SR MGC Note Every IP station is counted as 1 Note As for other devices every channel consumed by the devices is counted as 1 however MG PRI in pro prietary protocol mode is counted on a device basis 1 MG PRI 1 Office Name IP Address SR MGC address Mode Fixed to 1 Office Data...

Page 2387: ...ces the system Please replace a cooling FAN every three years to avoid it even though the cooling FAN still works normally Replacement Procedure FAN replacement means to replace the power unit itself on the rear panel of an SR MGC S STEP 1 Turn OFF the system STEP 2 Loosen the screws on the cover STEP 3 Remove the power unit ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT PA...

Page 2388: ... screws STEP 5 Turn on the Power Unit Test After Attaching Check if the replaced FANs work properly If the FAN does not work properly remove the power unit to insert it again If it does not help the power unit may be broken Replace it with another power unit PACT PACT ...

Page 2389: ...onfirm the LOAD lamp is not lighted or flashing before turing off the power switch on the rear panel of SR MGC S The following explains how to shut down the SR MGC S when PCPro is not available but the Telephony Serv er Maintenance Menu can be connected to the SR MGC S STEP 1 Start up Telephony Server Maintenance Start the Internet Explorer on a maintenance PC and then enter http xxx xxx xxx 9801 ...

Page 2390: ...tenance Menu Program Office Data License Patch Log files Language Data Upload Download Delete Shutdown Reboot Switch image Read Version Advanced Menu SYSTEM CONTROL System Status Memory XX X used CPU XX Load Average XXX XXX XXX LAN1 IP XXX XXX XXX XXX Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX Mask XXX XXX XXX XXX LAN2 IP XXX XXX XXX XXX Image Capacity XX X used CF Capacity XX X used XXXXMB Total XXXMB Free XXXXMB Tota...

Page 2391: ...rd from the CF slot on the front panel of the SR MGC S STEP 4 Insert a new CF into the SR MGC S Insert a CF card supplied for the version upgrade into the CF slot on the front panel of the SR MGC S STEP 5 Expand the memory and check the memory size Upgrade from FP85 107 S4 or earlier ver sion to FP85 108 S5 or later version For the memory expansion procedure see the guide accompanying EXP MEM 2GB ...

Page 2392: ...umber 60000 PC Setting A PC with PCPro needs to have an IP address subnet mask and default gateway address set as follow After you finish setting restart the PC IP address 172 16 253 253 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway address 172 16 253 0 a default IP address of an SR MGC S Now you are supposed to be able to login to the SR MGC S Perform the following to check the connectivity between the...

Page 2393: ...rform Office Data Load System Initialize with the SINZ com mand STEP 14 Connect PCPro PC to your LAN After setting necessary data on SR MGC S including an IP address matching your LAN connect the PC to the LAN 4 Set an IP address of the PC with PCPro matching your LAN environment an IP address be fore changed 5 Restart the PC 6 Connect the PC to the LAN STEP 15 Connect the SR MGC S to the LAN Conn...

Page 2394: ...trol tab Select Of fice Data Copy Load from PROCESS TYPE to copy the office data Select All button Click the Select All button to execute office data or program copy to all the SR MGCs in the network Clear All button Click the Clear All button to return all the SR MGC Numbers to the state of No Processing Request Specifying SR MGC Specify the target SR MGC number 0 255 the box of specified SR MGC ...

Page 2395: ... data are successfully copied the MGC is supposed to request the SR MGC S to ini tialize So after finishing copy process wait for the SR MGC S to be initialized about five minutes without any action STEP 21 Paste the label Paste the label if attached to the CF card onto the main unit of SR MGC S Note The location where to paste the label is stated on the pasteboard of the label Now you are done SR...

Page 2396: ...R MGC S to status before upgraded SR MGC S Version Downgrade Procedure STEP 22 Turn off an SR MGC S Perform the SINZ command to shutdown an SR MGC S make sure that the ONLINE lamp goes off turn off power of the SR MGC S STEP 23 Remove a current CF card from the SR MGC S Remove an CF card now you are using from the CF slot on the front panel of the SR MGC S STEP 24 Insert an old CF into the SR MGC ...

Page 2397: ...or Version Upgrade Upgrading from S6 to S7 Check whether SR MGC is in Standby Mode when executing a Remote Version Upgrade If not switch SR MGC from Operation Mode to Standby Mode before executing a Remote Version Upgrade Confirm SIP Server ID before executing a Remote Version Upgrade SIP Server ID must be reconfig ured after executing a Remote Version Upgrade This reconfiguration is not required ...

Page 2398: ...rm SIP Server ID Execute the ASPC command on PCPro to confirm the current SIP Server ID Note Select System 0 from System in the ASPC command and then click the Read button to confirm the cur rent SIP Server ID This SIP Server ID will be needed when reconfiguring the ASPC command after a Remote Version Upgrade STEP 4 Disconnect PCPro from SR MGC Disconnect the connection with SR MGC from PCPro STEP...

Page 2399: ...program file name stored in the FTP server 0 9 A Z a z _ An example Program file name is 4123_060_XXXX_120525 User ID 4 to 16 characters Enter the user name to log in to the FTP server 0 9 A Z a z _ User Password 4 to 16 characters Enter the user password to log in to the FTP server 0 9 A Z a z _ For personal security asterisks are displayed on the screen instead of the password 3 Click the Set bu...

Page 2400: ...e of 1 to 255 When the Restrict Concurrent Number is disabled a download of a program file will be executed con currently to all SR MGCs that are selected However when the FTP server has a limitation on con current connection the download of a program file may fail due to a connection denial of multiple SR MGCs 4 Click the Execute button A confirmation dialog box asking whether to start the Pro gr...

Page 2401: ... an upgraded version STEP 11 Connect PCPro to SR MGC After the SR MGC boots up connect to SR MGC using the Connection Account for SR MGC set in STEP1 STEP 12 Set SIP Server ID Execute the ASPC command on PCPro select System 0 from System and then reconfigure SIP Server ID which was confirmed previously in STEP3 STEP 13 Disconnect PCPro from SR MGC Disconnect the connection with SR MGC from PCPro N...

Page 2402: ...the target SR MGC number to perform a Program Switch A box of the number you have specified will turn to yellow Click the number again to cancel the designa tion When the designation is cancelled the color of the box turns to white meaning No Processing Request again 3 Click the Execute button A confirmation dialog box asking whether to start the Pro gram Switch appears Click OK to start the Progr...

Page 2403: ... Location Diversity refer to Location Diver sity L 55 of Data Programming Manual Business Note Two Unit SR MGC is only available for FP85 106 S3 or earlier SR MGC Outer View Note 1 Network failure must include failure of communication between SR MGC and LAN1 port of the Te lephony Server in order to switch operation over to SR MGC because network failure is diagnosed by communication failure betwe...

Page 2404: ...e of network failure In this case SR MGC installed in Office B automatically starts operation to control IP stations on the LAN IP Network SR MGC in Operation Failure SR MGC in Stand by Telephony Server IP stations controlled by SR MGC in operation IP stations controlled by Telephony Server Office Segment Office A Office B Office C ...

Page 2405: ...erver as the interface of the Telephony Server side Note 1 SR MGC starts its operation when Health Check packet has not been received from the Telephony Server after Health Check time out timer expires Then the registration is taken over to the SR MGC When the SR MGC receives Health Check packet from the Telephony Server again the SR MGC enters stand by mode Note 1 Failure only between LAN2 of the...

Page 2406: ...est packet it is assumed as connection failure between Telephony Server and SR MGC Health Check request packet Telephony Server SR MGC Health Check request packet Health Check response packet Health Check request packet Health Check response packet Health Check sequence during the SR MGC is in stand by mode Telephony Server sends a Health Check request packet to SR MGC at intervals of 30 seconds d...

Page 2407: ...se packet ACK Health Check returns to Telephony Server operation The SR MGC releases registration of IP terminals and turns stand by mode again Health Check request packet Telephony Server sends Health Check request packet to SR MGC at intervals of 30 seconds default 30 seconds determined by ASYDL SYS1 Index 850 Telephony Server returns to normal operation Health Check request packet Health Check ...

Page 2408: ...ntrol data same as the Telephony Server The figure below shows how SP PHD works between SR MGC and terminals in remote office SR MGC Series Number of Terminals IP Stations to be Rescued IP Terminals SIP Terminals 200S Rx 200 DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm Soft Phone Proprietary Protocol DtermIP INASET DtermIP SIP Soft Phone SIP DT700 Series 500S Rx 500 1000S Rx 1 000 2000S Rx 2 000 SR MGC IP Station IP ...

Page 2409: ...stored on the SR MGC in the Call Base Table CBT format the same as in main office When the Telephony Server recovers to normal operation the collected CBT file is transferred to the Telephony Server using polling method Telephony Server Polling to send billing information SR MGC Transferring the CBT to Telephony Server ...

Page 2410: ... Local Data Memory NDM Network Data Memory CF Call Forwarding Data SPD Speed Dialing Data RCF Wireless Call Forwarding Data ND Name DisplayData ACD DM ACD Data Memory GPLP Application Data Memory managed by LP GPSP Application Data Memory managed by SP GPCM Application Data Memory managed by CM SR MGC 1 SR MGC 2 Data copy request UDP Periodic office data copy from Telephony Server to SR MGC Teleph...

Page 2411: ...ng conditions When manual switchover ASYDL SYS1 INDEX853 Bit5 0 is executed When MGC SR MGC Condition in Change Operating tab in the CMNT command is executed Besides switchback by the CMNT command is available when automatic switchover ASYDL SYS1 INDEX853 Bit5 1 is set Telephony Server SR MGC releases the registration of all the IP terminals on receiving the request for changeover from Telephony S...

Page 2412: ...egotiation QoS IEEE802 1p ToS Field DiffServ Mounting Condition Two Unit SR MGC 19 inch rack mount 1U box 2 Environmental Requirement for Proper Operation Temperature 0 40 C Humidity 20 90 Not condensing Regulatory Compliance EMI VCCI Class B FCC Part15 Class B AUSTEL Category B EN55022 JPN USA CAN AUS EMEA Immunity EN55024 EMEA Safety Standard UL60950 CSA C22 2 AS 3260 TS 001 EN60950 USA CAN AUS ...

Page 2413: ...he front and rear view of Two Unit SR MGC Size of SR MGC 346 mm 13 62 inch 1 69 inch 430 mm 1 4 93 inch 43 mm 1 72 inch 43 8 mm LOAD LAN1 LAN2 TxRx LINK TxRx LINK LOAD LAN1 LAN2 TxRx LINK TxRx LINK SR T20 SR S20 3 41 inch 86 8 mm Two Unit SR MGC USB USB PWR ACT ALM PWR ACT ALM ...

Page 2414: ... SR T20 SR S20 FRONT VIEW TxRx LINK PC Card Slot Ether Connector USB Port LOAD PWR ACT ALM PWR LOAD LAN1 LAN2 TxRx LINK TxRx LINK LOAD LAN1 LAN2 TxRx LINK TxRx LINK SR T20 Connectors Lamps SR S20 USB USB PWR ACT ALM PWR ACT ALM Connector for Dual Power System inside AC Power Inlet Connectors Switches ...

Page 2415: ...ed This is only for SR MGC MPS USB Port USB2 0 Specifications Not used Connector for Dual Power System Not used LED COLOR DESCRIPTION PWR Green Power ON OFF Power OFF Red Lights when Watchdog Timer time out is detected ACT Green Lights when the SR MGC is operable ALM Flashes red in 2 second cycle Temporary Minor Alarm such as FAN failure Red Major Alarm OFF No failure LOAD Red Lights red when the ...

Page 2416: ...tup Procedure Overview Note For Service Conditions refer to the Data Programming Manual Business STEP 1 Preparation before Starting Up SR MGC STEP 2 Starting Up SR T of SR MGC 1 Data Assignment on Telephony Server MGC 2 Data Assignment on SR MGC 3 Data Assignment on Terminals STEP 4 Office Data Assignment STEP 5 Installation Test STEP 3 Starting Up SR S of SR MGC END ...

Page 2417: ...ation before Starting Up SR MGC PCPro Preparation Prepare a PC running Windows XP Vista Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008 used as PCPro connecting to SR MGC for data assignment and management Install PCPro software on the PC ...

Page 2418: ... second cycle temporary minor alarm indication 5 PCPro Connection Local Connection Connect the PCPro PC PCPro software has been installed directly to LAN1 port on the front panel of SR T with LAN cable crossover 6 Connection Account Setting Create a connection account used to establish a communication link between SR T and PCPro In the PCPro window select one of the following On the Main Menu clic...

Page 2419: ...rd data If IP Address or NIC card data is changed use the MEM_HDD com mand and select SR MGC in the Data Type Select in the command to save the data then turn off and on to initialize the system 12 PCPro Connection to Network After the actual network configuration data setting of SR T such as IP address has been completed con nect the PCPro PC to the network STEP 1 Change the IP address of PCPro P...

Page 2420: ... S before SR T 4 Lamp Check When the SR S operates normally LEDs on the front panel indicate as follows PWR Lights Green ACT Lights Green ALM Flashes Red in 2 second cycle temporary minor alarm indication 5 PCPro Connection Local Connection Connect the PCPro PC PCPro software has been installed directly to LAN1 port on the front panel of SR S with LAN cable crossover 6 Connection Check between PCP...

Page 2421: ...SP MPH ID 1 SR MGC TP IP address 10 41 1 151 SR MGC TP Drs Port Number 3456 The Current Data is listed When setting the CONFIG while the Telephony Server is operating the Current value for each parameter is dis played in brackets only if pre registered Note If setting the CONFIG at the time of setup for SR S the default value for each param eter is displayed in brackets Each one listed here is def...

Page 2422: ...value needs to be changed selecting y change or n no change No Area Name GMT 1 Dateline Standard Time GMT 12 00 2 Samoa Standard Time GMT 12 00 3 Dateline Standard Time DST GMT 11 00 4 Hawaiian Standard Time GMT 10 00 5 Samoa Standard Time DST GMT 10 00 6 Alaskan Standard Time GMT 09 00 7 Hawaiian Standard Time GMT 09 00 8 Pacific Standard Time GMT 08 00 9 Alaskan Standard Time DST GMT 08 00 10 Me...

Page 2423: ...elect No old 52 Entry the Area Number New Data List SR MGC SP IP address 10 40 182 126 SR MGC SP Netmask 255 255 255 0 SR MGC SP default gateway 10 40 182 254 SR MGC SP nameserver 10 40 182 124 SR MGC SP hostname sv7000 SR MGC SP SIP ID 1 SR MGC SP MPH ID 1 SR MGC TP IP address 10 41 207 125 SR MGC TP Drs Port Number 3456 The New Data to be registered is listed before finally confirming whether th...

Page 2424: ...ss of PCPro PC corresponding to the actual network STEP 2 Restart the PCPro PC STEP 3 Connect the PCPro PC to the network with a LAN cable 10 SR S Connection to Network Connect LAN1 port to the actual network by using a LAN cable 11 Network Connection Check Execute ping program from DOS prompt on the PCPro PC to ensure the network connection Verify the IP addresses of SR S ping 172 16 253 1 as an ...

Page 2425: ...ffice The Telephony Server MGC is required to recognize the SR MGC in remote office by assigning the IP address office name and sys tem data for Health Check This explains each of those procedures as follows 1 Data Assignment on the Telephony Server MGC 2 Data Assignment on SR MGC 3 Data Assignment on Terminals ...

Page 2426: ...xecuted per day Index 846 Determine the way of finding a pilot terminal bits 0 and 1 range of LAN interface for change over bit2 and enable disable terminal reset function of the terminal registered in SR MGC bit4 bit0 Specify a pilot terminal for connectivity check PING which can trigger switchback Note 1 0 1 None Search for Media Gateway bit1 Specify a pilot terminal for connectivity check PING ...

Page 2427: ... system conditions such as during construction periods Note 3 When MGC 0 is down MGC 1 is specified Note 4 Even if the data files in MGC 0 and MGC 1 are identical the different time stamps may be written into the data files because Standby side MGC data is backed up after the backup of the Active side MGC data Therefore the office data copy after the system changeover is available for the data fil...

Page 2428: ... Out of service In service bit5 IP terminal registration changeover from SR MGC to the Telephony Server MGC 0 1 Manual Automatic changeover Indexes 853 and 854 Assign Port Number of SR MGC Health Check receiving side Note 6 Note 7 Index 855 Assign CBT polling cycle from MGC to SR MGC for SMDR Information management 00 5 seconds default 01 FF 1 255 seconds Indexes 856 and 857 Assign Port Number of ...

Page 2429: ...e 2 Automatically switched to SR MGC operation when communication failure has been detected between the Telephony Server MGC and SR MGC Automatically switched back to the Telephony Server MGC operation when communi cation recovery between the Telephony Server MGC and SR MGC and normality of communication between the Telephony Server MGC and a selected terminal have been detected In FCCS Cluster ne...

Page 2430: ... allows terminals to register to SR MGC This parameter does not switch all the terminals regis tered in the Telephony Server MGC to SR MGC Note 10 After the mode of SR MGC has been switched by this parameter the SR MGC will be in operating mode To switch the SR MGC into stand by mode use SR MGC MGC Note that the ASYDL set tings ASYDL SYS1 INDEX852 Bit 5 Error Detection are not valid to this operat...

Page 2431: ...o operating mode All the terminals registered in the Telephony Server MGC are allowed to register to SR MGC regardless of network conditions Note that it takes one cycle of health check time 30 seconds at default to send a request 2 When fault occurs When terminals located in Remote Office detect the network failure Terminal Reset is performed and then the terminals re register to SR MGC Telephony...

Page 2432: ... and fault recovery often occur the terminals are available using SR MGC 4 Back to normal operation Select SR MGC MGC to switch SR MGC into stand by mode which sends Terminal Reset to cause terminals registration to the Telephony Server MGC Telephony Server MGC SR MGC IP Station Main Office Remote Office Recovered Registration Destination Telephony Server MGC IP Station PC Pro SR MGC Main Office R...

Page 2433: ... MGC KYI 1 Function Key FKY 156 Visitor 5 Use the ADSL command Option Assign the Visitor feature to the Soft key of the terminal which makes it re register to Primary Telephony Server MGC SN 0 Status Display FKY 156 Visitor 6 Use the MEM_HDD command Back up the office data into the Flash card in the Telephony Server MGC Note Do not select SR MGC in the Data Type Select ...

Page 2434: ...ed in Speed Office Data Copy Settings FTP Login Name Specify the login name assigned at the Telephony Server MGC side FTP Login Password Specify the password assigned at the Telephony Server MGC side 2 Use the MEM_HDD command Assign the office data backup to the Flash card in the SR MGC Select SR MGC alone in the Data Type Select to back up the data 3 Turn off and on to reset the SR MGC After all ...

Page 2435: ...data copy check the data as follows STEP1 Use CMNT command to check the normality of communication between SR MGC and the Te lephony Server MGC STEP2 If the status of the communication is normal copy the Office Data into SR MGC If the com munication is not established set network settings of SR MGC and then copy the Office Data into SR MGC When none of the above is performed at the situation it is...

Page 2436: ... see that a prompt is changed 3 Restart the SR S If you want to perform the installation test refer to Section 27 3 6 Installation Test SR MGC telnet PCPro telnet 172 16 253 1 Type an IP address of SR S after the command login SV7000 password SV7000 SRMGC_SP Type SV7000 for login account Type SV7000 for password A prompt is changed to the root prompt SV7000 SRMGC_SP sudo shutdown r now Type sudo s...

Page 2437: ...RL of SR S of the SR MGC 4 Select OK and then select Save on the main menu In the case of DtermIP Proprietary Protocol 1 Select 3 BackUp DRS Address on the main menu 2 Select a server type and enter an IP Address of SR T 3 Select OK and then select Save on the main menu If Visitor key is set to your terminal the terminal will be the following conditions when registered in SR MGC Line Feature key T...

Page 2438: ...button to list up the state of all the SR MGCs in the network managed by the Telephony Server MGC List up parameters are SR MGC No SR MGC Number 0 255 STS State of SR MGC OK NG OK Connection between Telephony Server MGC and SR MGC has been established normally SR MGC is in stand by mode NG SR MGC power OFF or communication error between the Telephony Server MGC and SR MGC Connect CNT The number of...

Page 2439: ...network device such as SW HUB Router Use a LAN cable straight through Test the continuity in the LAN cable Make sure the network device SW HUB or Router is turned ON If the problem is not cleared change the LAN cable or change the network device Considered to be network connection failure if System Message 10 F is output on Telephony Server MGC check the LAN cables and network device Check whether...

Page 2440: ...T command can forcibly change the operation mode of the Telephony Server MGC and SR MGC For more information about it refer to the Operations and Maintenance Manual 27 4 4 Change of Switch Settings on CPU Board ASSW command changes or displays the setting of software switches on the CPU board of SR MGC This command can be used on the SR MGC side only For more information about it refer to the Oper...

Page 2441: ... FAN cover to the chassis Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw STEP 2 Slide the FAN cover slightly to the right and detach it by pulling toward you STEP 3 Disconnect the FAN cables from the connector and unscrew the screws that fasten the FAN using a Phillips screw driver ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Phillips screwdriver screw FAN cover REAR SIDE FAN ...

Page 2442: ...ee all the FANs in the SR MGC are normally working by powering it on Note When replacing the FAN while the SR MGC is operating there s a possibility of heating up inside the chassis Be sure to replace the FAN one by one Do not replace the two FANs simultaneously ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required screw FAN cables An arrow in the FAN has to be directed in this way Tow...

Page 2443: ... the power switch Turn off the power switch at the rear of the SR MGC SR T The following explains how to shut down an SR MGC SR S STEP 1 Power off the SR MGC SR S 1 Log on to the SR MGC SR S with the telnet command 2 Type the shutdown command and then press the Enter key I 3 After shutdown make sure that the ACT lamp is off and then turn off the switch at the rear of the SR MGC SR S SV7000 SRMGC_S...

Page 2444: ...slot 5 Power ON Turn on power for SR T SR T starts up with System Boot and default office data loading Note 1 Note 1 IP address is set to 172 16 253 0 by default office data 6 Lamp Check Verify that the LEDs on the front panel indicate as follows refer to Section 27 2 2 Layout of Switches Connectors and Lamps PWR Lights Green ACT Lights Green ALM Flashes Red in 2 second cycle temporary minor alarm...

Page 2445: ...and health check refer to the beginning of this chapter for details on assigning IP address for SR T 10 Backup Data to SR T s Compact Flash Card Use Compact Flash Card to backup the data assigned to SR T Use MEM_HDD command and select SR MGC Data in the Data Type Select window 11 Reset SR T Reset SR T by turning the PWR switch OFF ON 12 Connect PC PCPro to Network After the actual network configur...

Page 2446: ...h System Boot and default office data loading 4 Lamp Check When SR S operates normally LEDs on the front panel indicate as follows refer to 19 2 2 Layout of Switches Connectors and Lamps PWR Lights Green ACT Lights Green ALM Flashes Red in 2 second cycle temporary minor alarm indication 5 PC Connection Local Connection To set office data connect PC directly to LAN1 port on the front panel of SR S ...

Page 2447: ... Type SV7000 for password Take note that the entered password is not displayed When login is successful display will be as shown on the left SV7000 SRMGC_SP sudo SP_CONFIG password Type the command on the left Type SV7000 for password SR MGC SP config script Current Data List SR MGC SP IP address 172 16 253 1 SR MGC SP Netmask 255 255 255 0 SR MGC SP default gateway 172 16 253 254 SR MGC SP namese...

Page 2448: ...ing any values the value displayed in brackets will be used When re entering a value an asterisk will be displayed at the beginning of the pre entered data Note 1 Note 1 If value is entered in incorrect form an error message is displayed The system will be in waiting mode for correct data to be re entered Example is shown below SR MGC TP IP address 172 16 253 0 10 41 207 Input Error ...

Page 2449: ...er case letters and a hyphen may be used Underbar _ may not be used SR MGC SP SIP ID 1 1 Assign a value from 1 127 Enter key mandatory Note 2 SR MGC SP MPH ID 1 1 Assign a value from 1 4095 Enter ID Enter key mandatory Note 3 SR MGC TP IP address 172 16 253 0 10 41 207 125 Type the IP address of SR T Enter key mandatory SR MGC TP Drs Port Number 3456 Type SR T s DRS port number 3456 default value ...

Page 2450: ... 14 Canada Central Standard Time GMT 06 00 15 Central America Standard Time GMT 06 00 16 Central Standard Time GMT 06 00 17 Mexico Standard Time GMT 06 00 18 Mexico Standard Time 2 DST GMT 06 00 19 Mountain Standard Time DST GMT 06 00 20 US Mountain Standard Time DST GMT 06 00 The list of No Area Name and time difference from Greenwich Mean Time GMT are displayed The system confirms whether or not...

Page 2451: ...MGC SP default gateway 10 40 182 254 SR MGC SP nameserver 10 40 182 124 SR MGC SP hostname srmgc sp SR MGC SP SIP ID 1 SR MGC SP MPH ID 1 SR MGC TP IP address 10 41 207 125 SR MGC TP Drs Port Number 3456 Network Setting Data SR MGC SP Standard SIP terminal TimeZone GMT Standard Time SIP terminal TimeZone Data Do you register new data in config files Yes y Retry r Quit q Confirm whether New Data ne...

Page 2452: ...ning the PWR switch OFF ON on the rear side Then reset SR S as follows STEP 1 Use telnet to log on to SR S STEP 2 Type SV7000 twice for login and password Make sure the prompt has changed STEP 3 Reboot SR S 8 Connect SR S to Network Connect LAN1 ports to the actual network by using LAN cables 9 Connect PC PCPro to Network Connect the PC PCPro via the network STEP 1 Change the IP address of PC PCPr...

Page 2453: ...alize SR MGC SR T and SR S After finishing office data copy the Telephony Server MGC requests the SR MGC to initialize Wait for the SR MGC to be initialized which takes about five minutes About SR MGC initialization If Office Data Copy is performed in the following status initialization of SR MGC is required when office data file does not exist on the CF card of SR MGC after the change of the offi...

Page 2454: ...reset SR S as follows STEP 1 Use telnet to log on to SR S STEP 2 Type SV7000 twice for login and password Make sure the prompt has changed STEP 3 Reset SR S telnet 172 16 253 1 Type the IP address of SR S after the telnet command login SV7000 password SV7000 SRMGC_SP Type SV7000 for login account Type SV7000 for password SV7000 SRMGC_SP sudo shutdown r now password Type sudo shutdown r now Type SV...

Page 2455: ...grade to the PC CARD slot 4 Power ON Turn on power for SR T 5 Lamp Check Verify that the LEDs on the front panel indicate as follows refer to Section 27 2 2 Layout of Switches Connectors and Lamps PWR Lights Green ACT Lights Green ALM Flashes Red in 2 second cycle temporary minor alarm indication 27 7 2 Returning SR S to Status Before Version Upgrade Procedure 1 Turn Power Switch OFF ON Turn SR S ...

Page 2456: ...strength to add the optional brackets ensures 1 1G Note 1 STEP 1 Attach the brackets to both sides of 1U MPC by using a Phillips screw driver Fixing Bracket ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PACT Rear Front 㪙㫉㪸㪺㫂㪼㫋 B 㪙㫉㪸㪺㫂㪼㫋 B 㪙㫉㪸㪺㫂㪼㫋 A 㪙㫉㪸㪺㫂㪼㫋 A 㪙㫉㪸㪺㫂㪼㫋 C 㪙㫉㪸㪺㫂㪼㫋 C M4 screw M4 screw M4 screw M4 screw M4 screw attached on the module M4 screw attached on the module a...

Page 2457: ... brackets first change the fixing position of the Bracket B as shown below Fixing Bracket to Mount on Open Rack 1 slightly move up the bracket Front 2 fix the upper screw to this hole leave the lower screw here PACT Rear Front 㪙㫉㪸㪺㫂㪼㫋 B 㪙㫉㪸㪺㫂㪼㫋 B attached on the module M4 screw attached on the module M4 screw ...

Page 2458: ...ent You can add an other power unit on the left slot making the system a dual power configuration Note You can mount an additional power unit even while the existing power unit is operating 19 inch rack inch type M5 screws Ether1 100M LINK 100M LINK Ether2 PWR ACT ALM LOAD MC MG1 MG3 MG5 MC MG MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 ALM ALM Ether OPERATION MG0 MG2 MG4 MG6 MC MG1 MG3 MG5 ON LINE 100M LINK CONSOLE PFTRC RE...

Page 2459: ...APP 4 APPENDIX A STEP 1 Unfasten the left screw STEP 2 Take off the blank plate STEP 3 Insert an optional power unit REAR PACT Phillips screw driver PACT PACT PACT ...

Page 2460: ...n the power switch on the added power unit STEP 5 Check the power unit if it works properly turn on the power unit make sure that the PACT lamp lights up Note Dual power configuration Does not operate in ACT Standby switching method Supplies mounted cards with power properly unless both units stop working PACT lamps go OFF Has an AC input on each of units Should have its AC power cords connected t...

Page 2461: ...6 Not changed by executing set config_template Sub Command Parameter Value 0 default 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Note 1 183rbt enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable 184toprivacy disable disable disable disable disable disable disable disable another_keynumber Another Keynumber 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Another Keynumber 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Another Keynumber 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 auth User ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0...

Page 2462: ...playName dnsaddress 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dns_option A Record re solve single IP Ad dress Locating SIP serversfunction RFC3263 A Record re solve single IP Ad dress A Record re solve single IP Ad dress A Record re solve single IP Ad dress A Record re solve single IP Ad dress A Record re solve single IP Ad dress A Record re solve single IP Ad dress DNS cache...

Page 2463: ... 101 101 h245_base_port_no 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 40000 hc_alarm IPX and SIP side enable IPX and SIP side enable IPX and SIP side enable IPX and SIP side enable IPX and SIP side enable IPX and SIP side enable IPX and SIP side enable IPX and SIP side enable hc_timer 240 sec 240 sec 240 sec 240 sec 240 sec 240 sec 240 sec 240 sec interface Ether 1 speed Ether 1 duplex Ether 2 spee...

Page 2464: ...pattern Privacy pattern DisplayName DisplayName RFC3325 TEL URI DisplayName DisplayName Remote Party ID RFC3325 SIP URI SIP URI no privacy Dummy string anonymous registration_port_no 3456 3456 3456 3456 3456 3456 3456 3456 reg_interval 5 min 5 min 5 min 5 min 5 min 5 min 5 min 5 min response_table normal normal normal normal normal normal normal normal rtp_pathon disable disable enable enable enab...

Page 2465: ...e disable disable signaling_port_no 61012 61012 61012 61012 61012 61012 61012 61012 sip_accfilter disable disable enable disable disable disable disable disable SIP Access Filter mask Burst Access Filter disable disable disable disable disable disable disable disable Burst Access limit tim er value Burst Access limit number value Burst Access reject re sponse code sip_port_no 5060 5060 5060 5060 5...

Page 2466: ...nc tion Domain Name sip_tel_service disable enable disable enable enable enable enable enable Replaces function enable disable disable disable disable enable Hold a inactive function enable enable enable enable enable enable Hold put off hold function enable disable disable disable disable disable REFER NOTIFY function enable disable disable disable disable disable 3PCC function enable disable dis...

Page 2467: ...ble disable disable disable disable disable PAD reception voice 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAD transmission voice 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAD reception FAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAD transmission FAX 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 update disable disable enable disable disable disable disable disable country_code 0 AUTO 0 AUTO 0 AUTO 0 AUTO 0 AUTO 0 AUTO 0 AUTO 0 AUTO name_display disable enable disable disable disable disable disable dis...

Page 2468: ...her Keynumber 1 0 0 Another Keynumber 2 0 0 Another Keynumber 3 0 0 auth User ID 0 0 Password 0 0 auth_header enable enable call_hold disable disable RTP detect timer value Response code to reject call_id_relay disable disable cause_table normal Route Advance cc_convert disable disable cdn_pattern To userinfo Request URI userinfo check_number disable disable cpn_pattern DisplayName P Asserted ID d...

Page 2469: ... 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 5 DELAY 0 0 THROUGHPUT 0 0 RELIABILITY 0 0 COST 0 0 dtmf_mode Negotiation SIP SDP Negotiation SIP SDP DTMF Duration 120 ms 120 ms DTMF Pause 100 ms 100 ms Payload type 101 101 h245_base_port_no 40000 40000 hc_alarm IPX and SIP side enable IPX and SIP side enable hc_timer 240 sec 240 sec interface Ether 1 speed Ether 1 duplex Ether 2 speed Ether 2 duplex Sub Command Parameter Val...

Page 2470: ...d mp_refresh multi_regist disable disable Transmitting interval timer Standby timer value Contact Header type musictype Type1 Type1 out_of_area_code 408 408 prack Supported 100rel enable disable Stop cyclical send of 18x disable pre_negotiation_port_no 61014 61014 privacy_pattern Privacy pattern DisplayName DisplayName Dummy string Tel number registration_port_no 3456 3456 reg_interval 5 min 5 min...

Page 2471: ...main string session_timer enable enable Session expires 180 sec 180 sec Refresher UAC UAC Invite Refresher disable enable Forced mode disable disable signaling_port_no 61012 61012 sip_accfilter disable disable SIP server IP Address sip_domain sip_port_no 5060 5060 sip_qos SIP QoS 0xa0 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 5 DELAY 0 0 THROUGHPUT 0 0 RELIABILITY 0 0 COST 0 0 Sub Command Parameter Value 0 default 1 temp...

Page 2472: ...000 50000 sip_server SIP server type SIP server IP Address SIP server FQDN SIP server Port Number SIP server Router type Domain Name sip_tel_service disable enable Replaces function enable Hold a inactive func tion enable slipresp 488 503 softdsp Note 2 codec convert mode disable disable PAD setting 0 disable PAD reception voice 0 0 PAD transmission voice 0 0 PAD reception FAX 0 0 PAD transmission...

Page 2473: ...S Port No Quaternary DRS Address Quaternary DRS Port No signaling_port_no 61012 61012 61012 registration_port_no 3456 3456 3456 pre_negotiation_port_no 61014 61014 61014 ipx_rtp_port_no 51000 51000 51000 sip_rtp_port_no 50000 50000 50000 h245_base_port_no 40000 40000 40000 drs_qos DRS QoS 0xa0 0xa0 0xa0 PRECEDENCE 5 5 5 DELAY 0 0 0 THROUGHPUT 0 0 0 RELIABILITY 0 0 0 COST 0 0 0 rtp_qos RTP QoS 0xa0...

Page 2474: ...e enable hc_timer 240 240 240 musictype Type1 Type1 Type1 call_hold disable disable disable RTP detect timer value Response code to reject name_display disable enable disable ip_version IPv4 IPv4 IPv4 country_code 0 AUTO 0 AUTO 0 AUTO ipaddress one port only Ether 1 IP Address Ether 1 Subnet mask Ether 2 IP Address Ether 2 Subnet mask interface Ether 1 speed Ether 1 duplex Ether 2 speed Ether 2 du...

Page 2475: ...pattern Privacy pattern Display Name Display Name RFC3325 TEL URI Dummy string session_timer enable enable enable Session expires 180 180 180 Refresher UAC UAC UAC Invite Refresher disable enable disable Forced disable disable disable prack 100rel enable disable enable Stop cyclical send of 18x disable disable cdn_pattern To userinfo Request URI userinfo To userinfo sip_port_no 5060 5060 5060 184 ...

Page 2476: ...Keynumber 3 0 0 0 multi_regist disable disable disable Transmitting interval timer Standby timer value Contact Header type sip_tel_service disable enable disable Replaces function enable Hold a inactive function enable Hold put off hold func tion enable REFER NOTIFY function enable 3PCC function enable 3PCC function codec AUTO reg_interval 5 min 5 min 5 min update disable disable enable auth_heade...

Page 2477: ...ilter disable disable enable SIP server IP Address sip_transport UDP UDP UDP dns_option A Record resolve single IP Address Locating SIP servers function RFC3263 A Record resolve single IP Address DNS cache enable codec_change disable enable disable G711 Fax renegotiation disable enable disable no_media_code 488 415 488 ppi_to_pai disable enable enable ipx_route Route type sip_route Route type Sub ...

Page 2478: ...5 253 314 329 332 333 339 342 343 352 416 431 434 435 441 444 445 454 520 535 536 543 544 562 632 647 648 649 654 655 672 674 727 731 736 737 741 742 752 759 761 790 791 800 817 836 837 839 840 844 944 945 952 953 956 957 961 1016 1035 1043 1044 1061 1062 1065 1072 1138 1157 1166 1167 1184 1185 1188 1195 1260 1275 1287 1288 1291 1298 1337 1340 1351 1359 1361 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374...

Page 2479: ...437 1438 1439 1440 1441 1442 1443 1444 1445 1446 1447 1448 1449 1450 1451 1452 1453 1454 1455 1456 1457 1458 1459 1460 1461 1462 1463 1464 1465 1466 1467 1468 1469 1470 1471 1472 1473 1474 1475 1476 1477 1478 1479 1480 1481 1482 1483 1484 1485 1486 1487 1488 1489 1490 1491 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1497 1498 1499 1500 1501 1502 1503 1504 1505 1506 1507 1508 1509 1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1...

Page 2480: ...5 809 937 1005 1007 1008 1027 1028 1029 1032 1142 1143 1145 1150 1151 1153 1246 1248 1323 1326 1343 1347 1351 1352 1355 1360 1364 1366 1374 1380 1384 1385 1386 1391 1392 1395 1399 1401 1402 1403 1416 1420 1421 1422 1425 1446 1492 1493 1494 1495 1496 1505 1507 1516 1517 1518 1520 1521 1522 1527 1528 1530 1532 1533 1535 1536 1537 1539 1540 1542 1543 1544 1553 1556 1558 1559 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 ...

Page 2481: ...17 1 6 1 Equipment Overview 18 1 6 2 Installation of 16LD ADM 19 1 6 3 Feature Description of 16LD ADM when Used as DSS Mode 24 1 6 4 Feature Description of 16LD ADM when Used as Phone Book Mode 28 2 IP Enabled Dterm 31 2 1 General 31 2 2 Installation Procedure 31 2 3 How to Install IP Interface Adapter 32 3 Digital Terminal 35 3 1 General 35 3 1 1 DT300 Series 36 3 2 Installation Procedure 40 3 3...

Page 2482: ...odation 89 CHAPTER 2 Terminal Related Devices 90 1 Trunk Answer from Any Station TAS Indicator 90 1 1 General 90 1 2 Installation Procedure 90 2 Announcement Machine 93 2 1 General 93 2 2 Installation Procedure 93 3 Paging Equipment 95 3 1 General 95 3 2 Installation Procedure 95 4 Alarm Indicating Panel and External Music On Hold 97 4 1 General 97 4 2 Installation Procedure for Alarm Indicating P...

Page 2483: ...ote Loop Back Test 226 7 7 3 Installation Test Procedure 228 7 8 Loop Back Test Execution Required Not Required 231 7 8 1 Mounting of Cover 233 7 9 Maintenance Procedure 235 7 9 1 General 235 7 9 2 System Message 235 7 9 3 Technical Terms for Explaining Message Detail Data 236 7 9 4 Circuit Card Location Information 237 7 9 5 How to Proceed with Diagnostic Work from System Message 240 7 9 6 System...

Page 2484: ...8 8 1 System Messages 355 8 8 2 Fault Diagnosis 356 8 8 3 Circuit Card Replacement Procedure 358 CHAPTER 3 Network Interface 361 1 Analog C O Line 361 1 1 General 361 1 2 Installation Procedure 361 2 Analog TIE Line 362 2 1 General 362 2 2 Installation Procedure 362 3 Digital TIE Line 365 3 1 General 365 3 2 Installation Procedure 365 4 CCIS Interface 369 4 1 General 369 4 2 Installation Procedure...

Page 2485: ...age for Time Display 456 1 4 12 How to Switch DTMF RTP Alarm ON and OFF 458 1 5 Program Download 461 1 5 1 Confirmation of File to be Downloaded 462 1 5 2 TFTP FTP Server IP Address Setting 464 1 5 3 Program Downloading 466 1 6 Changing Port Number 480 1 7 Error Messages 482 2 AutoConfig Feature of DtermIP 487 2 1 Overview 487 2 2 Setting Procedure 488 2 3 Applied Setting 496 2 4 Enable Disable Au...

Page 2486: ...s Information 612 5 2 4 Maintenance Settings Information 614 5 2 5 Terminal Information 615 5 3 Ping 616 6 DT700 Series 618 6 1 How to Start Configuration Setting 619 6 1 1 Configuration Setup on Terminal 619 6 1 2 Configuration Setup by Web Programming 636 6 2 Configuration Data Setting Procedure 638 6 2 1 IP Address of DT700 Series and SIP server 638 6 2 2 PC Port Remote Control 663 6 2 3 Type o...

Page 2487: ... FW 1 0 0 0 or later 843 6 6 Configuration Menu List FW 5 0 0 0 or later 871 6 7 Configuration Menu List for DT770G 902 6 8 Error Messages 914 6 9 How to Create Terminal Phonebook File 917 6 9 1 When Switching from Dual Configuration to Single Configuration 921 6 9 2 When Using DT700 Series DT730 DT730G 12 24DG DT710 DESI Less 922 6 9 3 When Using DT700 Series DT730 12 24CG 924 6 9 4 When Using DT...

Page 2488: ... such as DtermIP and DtermIP INASET to a LAN is described here Follow the procedure below Each terminal is equipped with 2 port switching HUB function One port is used for connect ing to the LAN and the other is for connecting to a PC IP Station DtermIP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 DtermIP INASET DT700 Series ...

Page 2489: ...e used as a Line key Direct Station Selection DSS key Speed Dialing SPD key or Feature key A 4 line LCD displays various information as well DT700 Series Number of Line Feature Keys DT700 Series DT750 Color LCD display type 32 8x4 virtual DT730 8 button type DESI LESS 32 8x4 virtual 24 button type with 8LK Unit 32 24 8 24 button type 24 12 button type with PSA Unit 12 12 button type 12 DT730G 12 b...

Page 2490: ...ground indicates a currently displayed page 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 White background indicates a page without any event happening 3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing indicates a page where an event is happening such as call termination to a Line key or call back 4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 White background indicates a page without any event happening 1 2 3 4 scroll button PAGE 1 Tanaka Busy 1 1 5 Su...

Page 2491: ...signment of SPD dial key for DESI LESS terminal The name data itself needs to be assigned on the terminal side each button and name information will be related on terminal side but it is required to assign a designated key either onto a Line Feature Key or Software Key to start name data assignment on the terminal Data Assignment method and Service Conditions for DESI LESS including SPD dial Featu...

Page 2492: ...mail indication online directories and other expanded functions con figured in addition to the features provided to DtermIP Note DtermIP INASET is equipped with the virtual line feature programmable key The following shows the series of DtermIP INASET INASET Classic INASET 240G INASET 320C INASET 320G INASET 320C XML version DtermIP INASET ...

Page 2493: ... Point to Point or CCIS Networking via IP Point to Point you need to check the IP equipment used as the connected destination If the version installed in the equipment is older than the required version you need to upgrade it to the proper version Note that all of the IP equipment other than devices mentioned below is compatible since the first re lease Type Items Product Name Corresponding Firmwa...

Page 2494: ...0 FE Version 7 0 0 5 or later enables the device to make a con nection with SIP compatible equipment Note 5 Upgrading the firmware SP 3629 to SP 3753 enables the device to make a connection with SIP com patible equipment IPPAD IPPAD PKG SPA 32IPPAD 7 SPA 32IPPAD B 8 SPA 32IPPAD C 6 Type Items Product Name Corresponding Firmware Version Remarks ...

Page 2495: ... STEP 5 Connect the AC DC adapter to the terminal When powered HUB PoE switch is used skip this step For more information about the powered HUB PoE switch refer to APPENDIX A STEP 6 Set the configuration data of the terminal See Chapter 4 Configuration Setup How to Connect LAN Cable to DtermIP DtermIP Swithing HUB to LAN LAN PC to PC LAN Cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight through Optional Connecti...

Page 2496: ...on the wall to prevent the telephone set from falling out It can cause injury To mount the telephone set on the wall the following space is required Do not mount the telephone on the wall made of materials such as gypsum board The location needs to be con sidered whether the wall bears the weight of telephone and maintains stability even during operations Mounting Telephone Space Note DT730 CG 156...

Page 2497: ...dset once Turn it upside down and then insert the hanger until you hear it clicks STEP 2 Turn the telephone set upside down and widen the tilt leg 1 Turn the telephone set upside down 2 Lower the tilt leg to first level 3 While lifting the center of the stopper adjust the tilt leg in the direction of the arrow until you hear it clicks Handset Hanger Telpehone Stopper Tilt Leg ...

Page 2498: ...STEP 3 Attach WM L UNIT to the wall directly or the wall plate When attaching WM L UNIT to the wall directly Secure WM L UNIT with the six screws included with the telephone set or hang WM L UNIT on the wall with the two screws purchased separately inserted into the wall Stopper a A B b Tilt Leg Wall Wall Screws suppulied Screws WM L UNIT WM L UNIT ...

Page 2499: ...ries Go to the next step In the case of DT700 Series Go to Step 8 after the LAN cable is connected to the telephone For the procedure how to connect LAN cable refer to 1 4 3DT700 Series Cabling STEP 4 Attach the modular terminal to the wall as shown in the following figure If the modular connector is attached directly on the wall or the wall plate is used instead of modular terminal skip this step...

Page 2500: ...ine cord plug into the LINE connector on the back of the telephone until you hear it clicks Wrap the excess cord and secure it with a tie wrap STEP 7 Thread the coiled cord through the groove on the back of the telephone as shown in the figure below Line Code Modular Terminal Wall Line Cord WM L Line Connector Telephone Groove Modular Plug ...

Page 2501: ...VOL 3 14 CHAPTER 1 TERMINALS STEP 8 Insert the four tabs on WM L UNIT in the tab slots on the back of the telephone Tuck the excess cord into WM L UNIT Wall Tabs Tab Slots ...

Page 2502: ...or on the back of the telephone Note The insertion and removal of the DC plug of the AC adapter must be made with LAN cables disconnected from the telephone STEP 2 Thread the DC cord of the AC adapter through the groove on the back of the telephone STEP 3 Connect the telephone to the network device using a LAN cable When you connect the telephone to a PC connect them through a connector on the bac...

Page 2503: ...ies Note 1 When a powered Hub PoE switch is not used AC adapter needs to be connected to the terminal MDF To C O Line LT cable COT PIR NCU NCU LT LT cable LT cable DT700 Series NCU COT MDF LT cable LT cable C O Line A B T R Ｒ Analog Ｔ Analog Modular Rosette 1 3 2 4 Line Connector for Power Failure Transfer Terminal cradle side T R Modular Plug TI TI 01 01 AO 00 TO BO AI 00 TO 00 00 AI 01 01 BO 00 ...

Page 2504: ... DSS mode and the other is Phone book mode DSS mode operates as an option unit for Non IP termi nals and IP Terminals and it enables the 16 LCD display Line Feature key expansion This terminal nor mally operates as DSS mode but it can be switched over to Phone book mode by pressing the DIR EXIT button located in bottom of the 16LD ADM terminal Dterm Series Connected with 16LD ADM DtermIP DESI less...

Page 2505: ...ana Character 2 10 7 dot and 8 5 7dot 8 lines per display 2 4 PC Interface USB Type B connector 1 5 Body color Black or White 6 Body PWB Interface PWB connect cable 20 pin Length 39cm 7 Bit switch for model change 8 bit 1 8 Body size W82 3 H91 2 D199 5 9 Line length System terminal Non IP connection 920 meter 48V 150 meter 24V IP connection 100 meters 10 Appending accessories Fitting metal piece 1...

Page 2506: ...d position DSW1 Position Note indicates the Destination code Example A Australia U Europe Series Keyset Name Dip Switch Position Dterm Series i DTR 8 8D 16D 2 WH BL TEL DTR 16LD 2 WH BL TEL DTR 16D 2 BL TEL DtermIP ITR 8D 16D 2 WH BL TEL ITR 8D 16D 2A WH BL TEL ITR 8D 16D 2P WH BL TEL ITR 8D 16D 2U WH BL TEL ITR 8D 16D 32D 3 WH BL TEL ITR 16LD 3 WH BL TEL INASET ITR 320C 1 BK TEL ITR 320G 1 BK TEL...

Page 2507: ...odule connection will need to be moved to the left in order to accommodate the adapter cable 4 Plug the 16 Button Add On Module into the connector on the bottom of the terminal 5 Push the cable from the module into the cable channel 6 Install the connector plate provided with the 16 Button Add On Module to join the two sets together STEP 2 Secure 16LD ADM unit to the terminal by using the Phillip ...

Page 2508: ...VOL 3 21 CHAPTER 1 TERMINALS STEP 3 Plug in the 16LD ADM module lines on the backside of 16LD ADM module and mount other side onto the terminal side Plug into ...

Page 2509: ...o terminal as shown in the figure below STEP 5 Wall Mounting 1 On the terminals base remove the cutout corresponding to the position that the 16ADM adapter attachment unit will be installed on the under side of the terminal 16LD ADM After Installation Remove cutout ...

Page 2510: ... as illustrated and feed the line cord threw the terminal base cutout Mount the both wall units using the 8 screws for proper support 3 Install the telephone and the 16 Button Add On Module over the four tabs on the Base Covers push down until it locks into place ...

Page 2511: ...ode are as follows AKYD command only supports 32 buttons in maximum so connection is only available to the terminal with 16 feature programming keys in maximum Terminal connectability Refer to the table below for the terminal connectability Terminal connectability Series Name Connectability PBX Model B Non IP TEL Dterm Series i DTR 8 2 WH BK TEL X DTR 8D 2 WH BK TEL X DTR 16D 2 WH BK TEL X DTR 32D...

Page 2512: ...rted terminals 5 The display contrast of the LCD can be changed either by two adjustment button of the 16LD ADM itself or by the volume control button of the telephone side except for INASET 320G 6 Tilting and wall mounting is available 7 Terminal back light function is not supported 8 Low power consumption mode is not supported 9 16LD ADM firmware can be upgraded by connecting to PC via USB port ...

Page 2513: ...hile the 16LD ADM is in phone book mode be cause LCD of 16LD ADM is controlled locally while it is in phone book mode Line Key Pattern This section explains the key pattern of 16LD ADM The key pattern of 16LD ADM will be as shown below no matter what terminal to be connected 1 Pattern 1 16 line keys 16 DSS keys Key number 1 to key number 16 of 16LD ADM will be the DSS key 1 to DSS key 16 DSS key 1...

Page 2514: ... 1 to key number 16 of 16LD ADM will be the Line key 17 to Line key 32 Line key DSS key 17 19 21 23 18 20 22 24 DtermIP with 16LD LCD 1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8 16LD ADM Exit HELP Feature Mic 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Recall Redial Answer Speaker Transfer Hold Message Directory Conf 17 19 21 23 18 20 22 24 25 27 29 31 26 28 30 32 Line key 16LD ADM DtermIP with 16LD LCD Exit HELP Feature Mic 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Rec...

Page 2515: ... the terminal connectability Terminal connectability Series Name Connectability PBX Model B Non IP TEL Dterm85 DTR 8 2 WH BK TEL X DTR 8D 2 WH BK TEL X DTR 16D 2 WH BK TEL X DTR 32D 1 WH BK TEL N DTR 16LD 2 WH BK TEL X PBX Model B DtermIP ITR 8D 2 WH BK TEL C ITR 16D 2 WH BK TEL C ITR 8D 3 WH BK TEL C ITR 16D 3 WH BK TEL C ITR 32D 3 WH BK TEL N ITR 16LD 3 WH BK TEL C PBX Model B Back Light TEL Dte...

Page 2516: ... using the directory mode because the control of 16LD ADM will be separated from the system once the DIR EXIT key is pressed Operating Procedure when using the Add On Module Using ADM Directory STEP 1 Press DIR Exit key to enter the Phonebook Directory The top row of the ADM LCD will show the total number of stored entries stored 100 maximum entries Note Other in the bottom row will indicate the l...

Page 2517: ... call from Dialed History STEP 1 Press DIR Exit to enter the Phonebook Directory STEP 2 Selecting the Dialed will show the history of the last 16 dialed calls STEP 3 Select the Dialed History entry that you want to make call Deleting a Dialed Number Entry STEP 1 From the Dial History Menu select the Delete Button STEP 2 Select the entry that you wish to delete STEP 3 Press ALL button All Clear or ...

Page 2518: ...face Adapter STEP 2 Prepare LAN cable 10BASE T 100BASE TX straight through for connecting the IP Enabled Dterm to network device such as PoE Switch STEP 3 Connect the IP Enabled Dterm to the network device using the LAN cable STEP 4 Connect a PC to the IP Enabled Dterm if required STEP 5 Connect the AC DC adapter to the IP Enabled Dterm When powered HUB PoE switch is used skip this step For more i...

Page 2519: ...screw driver about 10mm into taper a 1 3 Raise the rubber portion of the tilt leg 4 Release the lock of tab b 1 6 Insert the screw driver about 10mm into taper a 2 7 Raise the rubber portion of the tilt leg 8 Release the lock of tab b 2 5 Release tab C of the other side and press down the tilt leg 9 Turn over the tilt leg as follows then remove the blind cover from the tilt leg In case of version ...

Page 2520: ...lt 2 Otherwise set it to 1 1 Make sure that SW1 on the IP Interface Adapter is set to 2 Then plug the adapter into connector 1 as shown below Note 2 Adjust the tilt leg again tilt leg 3 Plug the modular plug into the jack securely 4 Reconnect the AC adapter to the power outlet Line Cord Modular Plug 1 2 SW 1 SW1 IP Interface Adapter IP Interface Adapter Connector 3 Connector 2 Connector 1 Switch 1...

Page 2521: ... D MAIN UNIT term hook D Series i term base mold tilt leg 1 Press the two hooks of the base mold 2 Slide the base mold to forward by pressing the hooks main unit base mold 3 Remove the base mold from the main unit 4 Insert the lower hooks of the adapter to the unit 5 Insert the upper hooks to the main unit so that the adapter may be firmly locked 6 Mount the base mold again on to the unit base mol...

Page 2522: ...on cable must be 24 AWG 0 5 mm diameter or larger DT300 Series Dterm Series i and Dterm Series E Dterm 75 Note 1 Add on module is available to mount on Dterm Series i See DtermIP section for further details on ADM specifications and installation Example Attaching ADM to Dterm Series i DESI LESS 16LD Phone 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 N E C Fea ture Fea ture 4 5 6 GH I JKL MN O 7 8 9 PQ RS TU V WX YZ 0 OP E...

Page 2523: ... a call arrives while the terminal is in another call the ringer of the DT330 Base Unit is enabled but the ringer of the Bluetooth Handset is disabled When Off Hook Ringing is set to the terminal the ringer of the DT330 Base Unit is also disabled Off Hook Ringing cannot be set to the Bluetooth Handset While the DT330 Base Unit displays the Menu of Bluetooth setting Setting Side Option Blue tooth t...

Page 2524: ...ven if less than 4 access points are installed detect ing the radio wave and confirm the operations before install the Cordless Terminal DT330 12BT Note 2 When IEEE802 11b is used it is recommended that the frequency of WLAN access point is set to 14ch Note 3 Install Cordless Terminal DT330 12BT at more than 5 meter 16 4 feet away from the Microwave oven for business use Note 4 Install Cordless Te...

Page 2525: ...ram shows the example of a Wireless Headset connection Example of a Wireless Headset WT100 EHS NE Connection Note For the details on how to connect a telephone and Wireless Headset see the manual attached to the Wire less Headset 1 Wireless Headset is available for DT300 Series DT330 However DT330 DTL 32D 1 and DT330 DTL 8LD 1 are not supported 2 Before using Wireless Headset be sure to assign LKP...

Page 2526: ... Note When you attach the microphone to the telephone remove the sticker of the microphone and connect the sticker to the center of the speaker correctly After that connect the microphone plug to the cable jack For the details see the manual attached to the Headset ...

Page 2527: ...inal locations refer to LT Connector Lead Accommodation of the circuit card in the Circuit Card Description STEP 5 Provide the necessary cross connection on the MDF referring to the following figure Figure 1 3 How to Connect Digital terminal Note Be sure to use 2 wire cable 1 pair cable If using 4 wire cable 2 pair cable connect the wire to No 2 and No 3 and disconnect from No 1 and No 4 on the mo...

Page 2528: ...y is 900m Local power supply Note Cordless Terminal DT330 12BT is available only for Local power supply Note When using the Bluetooth Handset with DT330 be sure to use the designated AC adapter AC L UNIT AC 2R UNIT DT300 Series Dterm Series i Dterm Series E Dterm 75 φ 0 4 600 m 500 m φ 0 5 850 m Note 1 Note 2 φ 0 65 1400 m φ 0 9 1800 m DT300 Series Dterm Series i Dterm Series E Dterm 75 φ 0 4 700 ...

Page 2529: ...B T R A00 Digital B00 Digital Ｒ Analog Ｔ Analog 1 3 2 4 1 3 2 4 A00 B00 T R DT300 Series ELC card COT card PIR LT LT MDF NCU card NCU TI TI 01 01 AO 00 TO BO AI 00 TO 00 00 AI 01 01 BO 00 Modular Rosette Modular Rosette To C O Line C O Line Modular Connector Modular Connector LT connector cable LT connector cable LT cable LT cable LT cable LT cable LT cable The pin number is corresponding to the n...

Page 2530: ...cable LT cable LT cable A B A B MDF T TI00 TI01 AO00 AO01 TO00 TO01 BO01 AI01 AI00 BO00 R Modular Rosette Modular Connector C O Line Dterm Series i ELC card COT card PIR LT LT MDF NCU card NCU To C O Line LT cable LT cable LT cable LT cable NCU card ELC card COT card 3 1 2 4 The pin number is corresponding to the number shown in the Modular Rosette above This drawing indicates the case that the Mo...

Page 2531: ...or connecting analog stations For more information about LC circuit card refer to the Circuit Card Description When the analog station is connected to a vacant port of the existing LC card this step is not necessary STEP 2 Check the terminal locations on the MDF To identify the lead names and the lead s terminal locations refer to LT Connector Lead Accommodation of the circuit card in the Circuit ...

Page 2532: ...Handset connectivity Recorder connectivity Allows recording of a conversation Note Maximum distance between the PIR and Desk Console is as follows 350 m 0 5φ 500 m 0 65φ for PIR Power Supply and 1200 m 0 5φ 1500 m 0 65φ for Local Power Supply Desk Console Outer View 5 2 Installation Procedure STEP 1 Install the Attendant Console Interface ATI PA CS33 circuit card Mount the card in slot 12 of PIR S...

Page 2533: ...m distance M between the ATI circuit card and the Modular Rosette is shown below For more information refer to the next page SOURCE 0 5 φ CABLE 0 65 φ CABLE Telephony Server 350 m 1148 ft 500 m 1640 ft GND GND A B BN4830 BN4831 A3 B3 GND GND A B A2 b c M a Telephony Server ATI MDF IDF Installation Cable B2 BN4820 BN4821 48V 48V BN4820 BN4821 BN4830 BN4831 Earth Bar Desk Console 6 core Modular Rose...

Page 2534: ... and c using the following formulae Note You are not required to use cable lengths in meters However units of resistance that match the units of length must be used For example if feet are used as units of length DC resistance per foot must be used u Direct Current resistance per meter Ω m in the range of A v Direct Current resistance per meter Ω m in the range of B w Direct Current resistance per...

Page 2535: ...sing a local power supply The maximum distance between the ATI circuit card and a Desk Console is shown below SOURCE 0 5 φ CABLE 0 65 φ CABLE Local Power Supply 1 200 m 3937 ft 1 500 m 4921 ft FE E G A2 Telephony Server ATI MDF IDF Installation Cable B2 Desk Console 6 core Modular Rosette 6 core Modular Cable A B Desk Console A3 B3 A B Installation Cable Installation Cable GND GND GND GND Earth Ba...

Page 2536: ...signment Pins are assigned as follows for the ATI circuit card 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 26 27 PIN No PA CS33 Pin Assignment LEAD NAME PIN No LEAD NAME BN4800 BN4820 TAS1B BN4810 TAS0B BN4830 B0 B2 B1 B3 BN4801 BN4821 TAS1A BN4811 TAS0A BN4831 A0 A2 A1 A3 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 for Desk Console 0 for Desk Console 1 for Desk Console 0 for...

Page 2537: ...e LINE 6 core REC 8 core 6 core Modular Cable 6 core Modular Block IDF MDF Viewed from direction to be inserted 1 2 3 4 5 6 Desk Console Transformer Surge Protection DC DC Convertor GND 48V 24V Desk Console Modular Jack 6 core Modular Cable 6 core Modular Block GND Ax Bx GND IDF MDF Note x represents 2 or 3 BN48 0 48V BN48 1 48V GND BN48 0 48V Ax Bx GND BN48 1 48V 1 2 3 4 5 6 Note Note ...

Page 2538: ...Optional The headset cable is connected to one of the modular jacks HAND H S 0 or H S 1 on the bottom of Desk Console Headset Wideband SupraPlus NC Polaris Modular Plug PIN1 Head Band Ear Pad Quick Disconnect PIN1 TX 2 RX 3 RX 4 TX HAND H S0 H S1 Slide ...

Page 2539: ...HAND H S0 H S1 Voice Tube Note In daily use use Quick Disconnect when connecting disconnecting the headset Slide Closing Clip Quick Disconnect PIN1 TX 2 RX 3 RX 4 TX PIN1 Modular Plug Note Slide Ear Pad Slide Head Band Capsule Unit Microphone and Speaker ...

Page 2540: ...g a Handset left side of a Desk Console 1 3 1 Put the handset code through the hole as shown below Desk Console side Handset side Handset code Hole Side View Alarm LDN TIE Busy ATND ANANS Recall EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC PAGE Start REC Night Postion Busy Mute DEST SRC 3 DEF 2 ABC 1 L 6 L 5 L 4 L 3 L 2 L 1 6 MNO 5 JKL 4 GHI 9 WXYZ 8 TUV 0 7 PQRS Cancel Talk Answer Hold Release Postion Availtabl...

Page 2541: ...ounting a Handset left side of a Desk Console 2 3 2 Connect the handset code to the HAND H S 0 connector as shown below H S 1 is not used for the handset Bottom View of Desk Console H S1 HAND H S 0 Handset code Top View Bottom View ...

Page 2542: ...ft side of a Desk Console 3 3 3 Mount the handset support to a Desk Console with three screws as shown below Handset Support Projection Projection 3 Mount the handset support to a Desk Console with three screws as shown below Handset Support Projection ...

Page 2543: ...Screw 2 Screw 2 Handset Metal Plate Metal Plate Handset When mounting at the left side When mounting at the right side Turn over the metal plate Desk Console Hole Handset code Desk Console side Handset side Side View 2 Put the handset code through the hole as shown below 1 Remove the metal plate from the handset turn the metal plate over and then mount it on the handset again Refer to the figure ...

Page 2544: ...ALS Mounting a Handset right side of a Desk Console 2 3 3 Connect the handset code to the HAND H S0 connector as shown below H S1 is not used for the handset Bottom View of Desk Console Bottom view Top view Code HAND H S0 H S1 ...

Page 2545: ...VOL 3 58 CHAPTER 1 TERMINALS Mounting a Handset right side of a Desk Console 3 3 4 Mount the handset support on a Desk Console with three screws as shown below Handset Support Projection Projection ...

Page 2546: ...aging Equipment A MDF Recording Paging Equipment Circuit Card Front Connector 8 core Line Cable B LA LB KA KB A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B Installation Cable MDF PIR Note 5 Note 2 Speech Signal Leads Note 1 Note 1 Recording equipment is positioned between the C O line and telephones Note 2 For speech signal output leads toward Recording Paging equipment Note 3 For control signal output leads toward Recor...

Page 2547: ... to Blue for information on the cable connection Note 2 The connections of Circuits 1 through 5 are the same as those of Circuit 0 Note 3 The recording device is positioned between the C O line and telephones Desk Console Note 1 MDF Note 1 PIR RECC PGADP card Circuit 0 Note 2 Front Connector A B LA LB KA KB A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B Circuit 1 Circuit 2 L0A L0B T0A T0B Circuit 3 Circuit 4 Circuit 5 L1A...

Page 2548: ...les and One Recording Paging Device Note 1 Refer to Blue for information on the cable connection Note 2 The connections of Circuit 1 through 5 are the same as those of Circuit 0 Note 3 The recording device is positioned between the C O line and telephones Desk Console Note 1 MDF A B LA LB KA KB A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Circuit 4 Circuit 5 L0A L0B T0A T0B C O line side le...

Page 2549: ...re to check the polarity of pin numbers 7 LA and 8 LB Speech Speech Not used Not used Recording Paging Start Signal Relay Contact Recording Paging Start Signal Relay Contact Recording Paging Lamp Signal Recording Paging Lamp Signal A B KA KB LA Note 2 LB Note 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 pin Modular Connector Rosette side 8 pin Modular Connector Desk Console side Note 1 8 core Line Cable Installation Cable...

Page 2550: ...5 7 Connecting AC DC Adapter Optional The AC DC adapter is required when power supply from the system is not available AC DC Adapter Connection The connector for the AC DC adapter is on the rear side of a Desk Console AC DC Adapter ...

Page 2551: ...ines appear on the first and third line of LCD LCD Recovering Procedure 1 Press the Position Busy key to turn ON The Position Busy lamp lights in red If the Desk Console has been already in Position Busy state release the state by pressing Position Busy key Then press again to turn ON 2 Check the LCD recovers To return to normal operation press the Position Busy key to turn OFF 3 When the LCD does...

Page 2552: ...and the MDF Protect the cables by using cable ducts etc STEP 2 Install an ELC circuit card into a proper slot of PIR for connecting Dterms For more information about ELC circuit card refer to the Circuit Card Description When the Dterm is connected to a vacant port of the existing ELC card this step is not necessary STEP 3 Terminate the installation cables to the MDF and the modular blocks STEP 4 ...

Page 2553: ...er is supplied from the Telephony Server Add On Console Cable Connection Diagram when the power Is supplied from the Telephony Server GND GND A1 B1 BN4810 BN4811 A1 B1 GND GND A0 B0 A0 b c M a Telephony Server ATI MDF IDF Installation Cable B0 BN4800 BN4801 48V 48V BN4800 BN4801 BN4810 BN4811 RPT1 Add on Console 6 core Modular Rosette 6 core Modular Rosette Add on Console 6 core Modular Cable 6 co...

Page 2554: ...wer supply a Desk Console cannot be used in the event of a power failure Add On Console Cable Connection Diagram when using a local power supply A0 Telephony Server ATI MDF IDF Installation Cable B0 Add on Console 6 core Modular Rosette 6 core Modular Cable A B Add on Console A1 B1 A B Installation Cable Installation Cable GND GND GND GND RPT 1 ...

Page 2555: ... 6 core 6 core Modular Cable 6 core Modular Block IDF MDF Viewed from direction to be inserted 1 2 3 4 5 6 Transformer Surge Protection DC DC Convertor GND 48V 24V Add On Console Modular Jack 6 core Modular Cable 6 core Modular Block GND Ax Bx GND IDF MDF Note 1 x represents 0 or 1 BN48 0 48V BN48 1 48V GND BN48 0 48V Ax Bx GND BN48 1 48V 1 2 3 4 5 6 Note 1 Note 1 Add on Console Note 1 ...

Page 2556: ... Cancel Talk SRC Answer DEST Release Hold Position Busy Position Busy Night Night PAGE REC Start Mute TF Recall NANS ADM Busy TIE LDN Alarm Position Available HWC HP DD GST LT ICPT TRKSL SVC SC DDC WUS WUR DDR RCR MWR STS DDS RCS MWS HWS BV MR CLR TG1 TG6 TG7 TG8 TG9 TG10 TG5 TG4 TG3 TG2 Enter Clear Exit TRKSL SVC SC DDC WUS WUR DDR RCR MWR STS DDS RCS MWS HWS BV MR CLR TG1 TG6 TG7 TG8 TG9 TG10 TG...

Page 2557: ...70 CHAPTER 1 TERMINALS Mounting an Add On Console right side of a Desk Console 2 2 Mount the Add on Console to a Desk Console with three screws as shown below Projection Projection Add on Console Desk Console ...

Page 2558: ... DDR RCR MWR STS DDS RCS MWS HWS BV MR CLR TG1 TG6 TG7 TG8 TG9 TG10 TG5 TG4 TG3 TG2 Enter Clear Exit 1 Remove the metal plate from the Add on Console turn the metal plate over Turn over the metal plate When mounting at the right side When mounting at the left side Screw 2 Screw 2 Screw 4 Screw 4 Screw 5 Screw 5 Screw 1 Screw 1 Screw 3 Screw 3 Screw 6 Screw 6 Add on Console Add on Console Metal Pla...

Page 2559: ...sole 2 2 TRKSL SVC SC DDC WUS WUR DDR RCR MWR STS DDS RCS MWS HWS BV MR CLR TG1 TG6 TG7 TG8 TG9 TG10 TG5 TG4 TG3 TG2 Enter Clear Exit Top View Bottom View 2 Mount the Add on Console to Desk Console with three screws as shown below Projection Projection Desk Console Add on Console ...

Page 2560: ... Add on Console Optional The AC DC adapter is required when the distant PBX power supply is not available AC DC Adapter Connection for an Add On Console The connector for the AC DC adapter is on the rear side of Add on Console Connector for AC DC Adapter AC DC Adapter ...

Page 2561: ...ith information associated with the Direct Station Selection DSS console The figure below shows the outer view of DSS console Note Since FP85 106 S3 DSS console can be connected to DT700 Series terminal For more information re fer to Direct Station Selection DSS Console D 149 in Data Programming Manual Business Outer View of DSS Console ...

Page 2562: ...iate key on the console while the caller is automatically placed on hold This mode is called Direct Station Selection DSS Also each key on the console has a Light Emitting Diode LED so that DSS console can indicate the Busy Idle status of each assigned station This mode is called Busy Lamp Field BLF mode Direct Station Selection DSS Busy Lamp Field BLF Mode DSS function Digital terminal user can t...

Page 2563: ...ies terminal the DSS console activates in ADM mode only Add On Module ADM Mode Relationship between the Mode Designation and Mounting Level Numbers MODE ALLOWABLE LEVEL NUMBERS DSS mode Even Number LV0 LV2 LV4 LV6 ADM mode Odd Number LV1 LV3 LV5 LV7 DSS console ADM In this DSS console ADM each key can be used as a desired Line Feature access key as shown below CALL BACK VOICE CALL I USE INDICATION...

Page 2564: ...Interface Card to the Telephony Server For DT300 Series PA 16ELCN PA 16ELCJ B For Dterm Series i mode only Dimensions Width 137 0 mm 5 4 in Depth 224 0 mm 8 8 in Height 1 57 0 mm 2 2 in When tilt legs are folded Height 2 82 0 mm 3 2 in When tilt legs are raised Weight 0 6 kg ITEM SPECIFICATIONS Number of Keys 60 Number of Light Emitting Diodes LEDs 60 RED 60 GREEN Allowable Cable Length Note 1 120...

Page 2565: ...ard to the Telephony Server PA 16ELCN PA 16ELCJ B PA 16ELCJ PA DAIJ A Dimensions Width 177 mm 7 0 in Depth 218 2 mm 8 6 in Height 1 74 2 mm 2 9 in When tilt legs are folded Height 2 101 8 mm 4 0 in When tilt legs are raised Weight 0 69 kg CABLE LOCATION CABLE 0 4 mm 26 AWG 0 5 mm 24 AWG UNIT METERS FEET METERS FEET Telephony Server DSS Console Power supply from System 540 1771 7 850 2788 7 Local P...

Page 2566: ...Server MDF Champ Connector 25 Pair installation Cable Rosette DSS Console REAR VIEW Cable Distance between Telephony Server and DSS Console Station Wire 0 4mm 26AWG 0 5mm 24AWG As illustrated below the allowable cable distance includes the 25 pair installation cable ...

Page 2567: ...nnecting the DSS console to the DT300 Series Terminal STEP 1 Carefully insert a pointed instrument into the slot located on the right side of the face panel of the Desktop terminal STEP 2 Gently pry out the panel and remove the key sheet STEP 3 Turn the Desktop terminal upside down Bracket with five screws for attaching the DSS console to the Desktop terminal provided Phillips screwdriver for fast...

Page 2568: ...et to the Desktop terminal with provided three mounting screws as shown in the figure STEP 6 Turn the Desktop terminal upside down STEP 7 Mount the DSS console to the Desktop terminal by using the provided two screws as shown in the figure indentation side panel ᄙᯏ 㔚 ᯏ ࡀࠫ㧔 ᧄ㧕 ㅪ ຠ ࡀࠫⓣ ࡀࠫⓣ screw bracket Desktop terminal screw hole connecting part DSS console Desktop terminal screw bracket ...

Page 2569: ... tilt leg can be adjusted in four levels For details see 3 Adjusting the Tilt Leg STEP 11 Attach the side panel that you removed in STEP 4 to the right side of the DSS console For details see 4 Installing the Side Panel STEP 12 Turn the Desktop terminal and DSS console right side up STEP 13 Set the key sheet in place STEP 14 Align the face panel correctly on the key sheet and push down the four co...

Page 2570: ...ure STEP 3 Thread the telephone connection cable through the groove on the back of the DSS console When the 8LK Unit is connected to the Desktop terminal thread the cable through the groove on the back of the 8LK Unit as well STEP 4 Mount the DSS console to the Desktop terminal by using the provided two screws Mount the DSS console to the Desktop terminal by using the provided two screws as shown ...

Page 2571: ...Insert the AC adapter plug to the DC input connector on the back of the DSS console STEP 9 Thread the AC adapter cable through the groove on the back of the DSS console as shown in the figure above STEP 10 Perform STEPs 10 to 14 described in 1 Connecting the DSS console to the DT300 Series Terminal This completes the process of mounting the DSS console to the DT700 Series terminal DSS console Desk...

Page 2572: ... 2 Pull the tilt leg toward you until you hear a click STEP 3 Turn the Desktop terminal right side up Lowering the angle of the tilt leg STEP 1 Turn the Desktop terminal upside down STEP 2 While lifting the center of the stopper push the tilt leg away from you until you hear a click STEP 3 Turn the Desktop terminal right side up 4th level 3rd level 2nd level 1st level tilt leg tilt leg stopper ...

Page 2573: ...lling the Side Panel STEP 1 Align the side panel on the left or right side of the Desktop terminal DSS console STEP 2 Push the side panel until you hear a click STEP 3 Make sure it fits tightly and snugly into place side panel side panel ...

Page 2574: ...below Connecting Diagram of DSS Console DSS BLF Connecting Diagram PIR ELC LT Connector MDF Installation Cable A0 A0 B0 B0 Modular Rosette DSS BLF Connection of Modular Rosette A0 B0 Polarity can be reversed Modular Rosette Modular Plug DSS Console 4 Core Modular Jack As viewed from inserting direction 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 Yellow 2 Green 3 Red 4 Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Black 4 Blue ...

Page 2575: ...nsole ADM Connecting Diagram PIR ELC LT Connector MDF Installation Cable A0 A0 B0 B0 Modular Rosette Dterm Modular Rosette Add On Module A1 B1 A1 B1 Connection of Modular Rosette A0 B0 Polarity can be reversed Modular Rosette Modular Plug DSS Console 4 Core Modular Jack As viewed from inserting direction 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 Red 2 Green 3 Black 4 Blue 1 Yellow 2 Green 3 Red 4 Black ...

Page 2576: ...26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 E RB POUTB TB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24...

Page 2577: ...nstallation Procedure STEP 1 Install the TAS Indicator by using AY plugs curl plugs board plugs etc and protect the cables by us ing cable ducts etc STEP 2 Run the cables between the TAS Indicator and the MDF STEP 3 Terminate the installed cables to the TAS Indicator and the MDF STEP 4 Referring to the Port Accommodation Sheet and the description of the ATI PA CS33 circuit card in the Circuit Manu...

Page 2578: ...0B BN4830 B2 B3 BN4801 BN4821 TAS1A BN4811 TAS0A BN4831 A2 A3 LT Connector for TAS 1 for TAS 0 PA CS33 Pin Assignment PWR 0 TSW MUX ATI TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 LT5 LT cable Pin assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the LT connector for the ATI circuit card The ATI PA CS33 circuit card is the interface for connecting Desk Consoles The ...

Page 2579: ...DEVICES Cable Connection Diagram Provide the following connections at the MDF TAS Cable Connection Diagram MDF Installation Cable 1P TAS Indicator TAS Indicator TAS0A0 TAS0B0 TAS0A1 TAS0B1 Telephony Server LT connector Cable LT connector ...

Page 2580: ...nnouncement machine by using AY plugs curl plugs board plugs etc and protect the cables by using cable ducts etc STEP 2 Run the cables between the announcement machine and the MDF STEP 3 Terminate the installed cables to the announcement machine and the MDF STEP 4 Referring to the Port Accommodation Sheet and the description of the 16COT circuit card in the Cir cuit Card Description identify the l...

Page 2581: ... Trunk Announcement Machine Cabling Diagram TSW MDF Speech Wires ANTK COT Starting Wire LT Connector Cable 25P The connections are made using installation cable A total of three wires are required per line two wires for speech and one starting wire For a loop start system only two wires are required When using 16COT BE connect to ground NO OF CKT LEAD B A B0 A0 B1 A1 B2 A2 B3 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 NO OF ...

Page 2582: ...ard plugs etc STEP 2 Run the cables between the paging equipment and the MDF and protect the cables by using cable ducts etc STEP 3 Terminate the installed cables to the paging equipment and the MDF STEP 4 Referring to the Port Accommodation Sheet and the description of the 16COT circuit card in the Cir cuit Card Description identify the lead names of the paging trunk PGT and the leads terminal lo...

Page 2583: ...gram TSW MDF Speech Wires ANTK COT Starting Wire LT Connector Cable 25P The connections are made using installation cable A total of three wires are required per line two wires for speech and one starting wire For a loop start system only two wires are required AMP SP Speech Wires Starting Wire When using 16 COT BE connect to ground NO OF CKT LEAD B A NO OF CKT LEAD B A B0 A0 B1 A1 B2 A2 B3 A3 B4 ...

Page 2584: ...n the Telephony Server This card is also equipped with terminals FM and E for receiving external Music On Hold tone Alarm Indicating Panel and External Music On Hold Telephony Server Telephony Server MDF External Music On Hold Music On Hold External Music On Hold Music Source Music Source 1 AC Powered Model 1 IMG of DC Powered Model 2 4 IMG of DC Powered Model Alarm Information MDF Alarm Indicatin...

Page 2585: ...ment and the MDF and protect the cables by using cable ducts etc STEP 3 Connect the cable for EMASUB A card to the proper connector of the Telephony Server Note 2 STEP 4 Provide the necessary cross connections on the MDF Note 1 Only an Alarm Indicating Panel can ring the BELL Note 2 Depending on the type of EMA SUB A card the connecting cable changes Connecting with CG M03 use D25 EXALM CA A Conne...

Page 2586: ... 2 wires GND lead more than 2 wires φ φ φ Note 1 This connection is for power deeding from Telephony Server The following shows the maximum distance between PBX and Alarm Indicating Panel based on Quantity of Cables and Cable Diameter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Cable Diameter Quantity of 48 V GND Cables 0 65 φ mm 22 AWG 0 5 φ mm 24 AWG 0 4 φ mm 26 AWG 72 m 236 feet 108 m 354 feet 144 m 473 feet 180 m 591 fee...

Page 2587: ...te 1 If DAT circuit card is used as an External Music On Hold source refer to Circuit Card Description Note To probide external Music on Hold to IP terminals set ASYDL Index 810 b2 1 and employ an IPPAD circuit card SPA 32IPPAD 14 25 G 5 12 48V PIN No PIN No LEAD NAME LEAD NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 G G G G G G G G G G G G MJ MN INT 48V 48V 48V 48V 48V 4...

Page 2588: ...ss Connections to EXALM Note Signals colored blue are used for controlling Alarm Indicating Panel PIN No PIN No LEAD NAME LEAD NAME 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 22 48 49 50 23 24 25 E E MJB 29 MJB MNB 30 MNB FM_P FM_P FM_N FM_N MJA 4 MJA 1 MJ 2 MN 3 INT 14 25 G 5 12 48V MNA 5 MNA BELL PIN No PIN No LEAD NAME LEAD NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2...

Page 2589: ...usic on Hold MMG MDF PLO 1 EXCLK0 Slot 14 EXCLK1 Slot 15 PLO 0 FM0 E FM0 E D37PH EXCLK CA A D37PH EXCLK CA A D37PH EXCLK CA A Pin Assignment Installation Cable PH CK16 D PIN No PIN No LEAD NAME LEAD NAME 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 E E FM0 ...

Page 2590: ...MG 2 LMG 3 MDF D37 EXCLK CA A To MDF To MDF To MDF 1 2 FM 0 26 27 DIU 3B 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B DCS B SYN 1B SYN 0B 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 28 34 13 DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A DCS A SYN 1A SYN 0A E D37 EXCLK CA A Cable Lead TACT A TACT B FM 0 E Installation Cable FM 0 E FM E Accommodation ...

Page 2591: ...MN4B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 FM_P E MJ1A MN1A SUPA BELLA MJ2A MN2A MJ3A MN3A MJ4A MN4A FM_N E MJ1B MN1B SUPB BELLB MJ2B MN2B MJ3B MN3B MJ4B MN4B BR B1 BR R1 Y R1 Y B1 GR B1 GR R1 GY B1 GY R1 W B1 W R1 BR B2 BR R2 Y R2 Y B2 GR B2 GR R2 GY B2 GY R2 W B2 W R2 BR B3 BR R3 Y R3 Y B3 A EX...

Page 2592: ... 4 3 feet 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FM0P FM0P FM0N FM0N MJA MJA MJB MJB MNA MNA MNB MNB BELL BELL E E E E EXALM A A B B OR B1 OR R1 Y B1 Y R1 GR B1 GY B1 GY R1 W B1 OR B2 OR R2 W R1 ...

Page 2593: ... OFF Normal operation MN Red Miner Alarm ON Miner failure occurs OFF Normal operation SUP Yellow Supervisor Alarm ON Monitoring is required OFF Normal operation Item Specification Environmental Requirements Same as Environmental Requirements of the Telephony Server Operating Temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Humidity 20 90 non condensing Non operating Temperature 20 C 60 C 12 F 124 F Humidity 20 90 ...

Page 2594: ...on an IMG adjacent to a 19 inch rack accommodating the Telephony Server D15 ST FF CA C cable is required to connect the Telephony Server and the Alarm Display Panel Its cable length is 6000 mm 19 7 feet Be sure to avoid connecting the cable too tightly Consumption Current Delivered by adding up the consumption current of the Telephony Server When the Telephony Server is configured with AC powered ...

Page 2595: ... Run the cables between the equipment and the MDF referring to the figure listed on the next page STEP 3 Run the cables between the External Switch and the PRT terminal on the BASEU STEP 4 Protect the cables by using cable duct etc STEP 5 Terminate the installed cables to the External Switch and the MDF STEP 6 Referring to Port Accommodation Sheet and the Circuit Card Manual identify the lead name...

Page 2596: ...2 External Switch No 0 1 2 External Switch No 1 Rear View SV8500 BASEU G RPT1 01 02 03 04 05 MDF Pin Assignment 1 Pin Assignment 2 PIN No 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 LEAD NAME KY1 KY3 KY5 KY7 LEAD NAME KY0 KY2 KY4 KY6 PIN No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 E E E E E E E E PIR Backplane Server ...

Page 2597: ...ains the procedures for the following operations The installation procedure of the system equipment including the Module Group PCPro Attendant Console terminal equipment etc The procedure for starting up the system by turning on the operating power The testing procedures used to verify that each system feature operates according to the assigned office data UNIVERGE SV8500 Operations and Maintenanc...

Page 2598: ...ds and decentralizes the Line Circuits LC ELC that have previously been accommodated in the PIR of the Telephony Server using a Digital Line Interface The figure below shows an outline of the system when the DRU DAU is used Outline of the System when DRU DAU is used DRU DAU Analog Telephone Dterm Analog Telephone Dterm Max 23 or 30 Dterms Max 30 Analog Telephone 1 Pair Cable DAI ELC LC NEC Distrib...

Page 2599: ...a such as a factory university etc the distance be tween the Telephony Server and the DRU DAU can be extended using a digital line Only one DRU DAU can be connected to a maximum of 23 or 30 Dterms 30 Analog PB TELs When increasing the number of Dterms Analog PB TELs installation work is required only between the DRU DAU and Dterms Analog PB TELs and no installation work is required between the Tel...

Page 2600: ... Digital Remote Unit DRU Distributed Access Unit DAU Batteries Functions of circuit cards for the DRU DAU DRU Digital Remote Unit DAU Distributed Access Unit Outer View of DRU DAU The figure below shows the outer view of the DRU DAU Outer View of a DRU DAU Unit mm inch NEC Digital Remote Unit Distributed Access Unit 350 60 430 1 4 9 10 1 1 4 5 2 2 5 ...

Page 2601: ...A AUSTRALIA ASIA LATIN AMERICA MIDDLE EAST and RUSSIA Analog Terminal μ law DRU 30A B SN880 DRE B DAU 30 AU SN880 DRE A DAU 30 AU A SN880 DRE B PA DAIA A law DAU 30A B SN877 DRE B DAU 30 AA A SN904 DREA B Dterm Series E Dterm75 μ law DRU 23 SE SN886 DRE B Both μ law and A law DAU 23 D75 SN886 DRE B PA DAIJ A Dterm Series E Dterm75 Dterm Series i μ law DRU 30 SI UA SN8061 DREH A Both μ law and A la...

Page 2602: ...tions of a DRU DAU Example Installation of a DRU DAU Wall Mounting Example Installation of a DRU DAU Floor Installation using STAND ASSEM Optional DRU DAU Wall DRU DAU Wall BATT BOX ASSEM Note The external battery and the BATT BOX ASSEM must be locally provided When the battery is set inside the DRU DAU When the battery is installed externally BATT BOX ASSEM STAND ASSEM STAND ASSEM DRU DAU DRU DAU...

Page 2603: ...AU DRU DAU DRU DAU DRU DAU BATT BOX UNIT Special DRU DAU DRU DAU DRU DAU 19 inch Rack IEC Spec BATT BOX ASSEM Standard When installing 4 sets of DRU DAU When installing 3 sets of DRU DAU Note 1 The 19 inch rack should be provided by the installer Note 2 The external battery and the BATT BOX ASSEM must be locally provided ...

Page 2604: ... each ambient temperature Under 25 C 77 F about 3 years 25 C 77 F 30 C 86 F about 2 years 30 C 86 F 40 C 104 F about 1 year The battery label is shown below BATTERY REPLACEMENT TABLE INSTALLATION DATE REPLACEMENT DATE AMBIENT TEMPERTURE SYSTEM Under 25 C 77 F 25 C 77 F 30 C 86 F 30 C 86 F 40 C 104 F REPLACEMENT INTERVAL 3 YEARS 2 YEARS 1 YEAR ELECTROLYTE LEAKAGE FIRE SMOKE OR OTHER HAZARDS MAY RES...

Page 2605: ...log port 2W Dterm and DtermSeriesE Dterm75 2W Dterm DtermSeriesE Dterm75 2W Dterm DtermSeriesE Dterm75 and DtermSeries i Distance between DRU DAU and Analog PB Tel Dterm 350Ω including TEL resis tance Max 200 meters 609 feet Max 200 meters 609 feet Max 200 meters 609 feet Specifications of the Interface between the Telephony Server and DRU DAU ITEM SPECIFICATIONS SN886 DRE A SN886 DRE B SN880 DRE ...

Page 2606: ...f each DRE card The tables on the next page show the meaning of lamp indications on the DRE DRE Card in SN880 DRE A SN880 DRE A DRE Card in SN880 DRE B SN880 DRE B DRE Card in SN877 DRE B SN904 DREA B SN877 DRE B SN904 DREA B DRE Card in SN886 DRE A SN886 DRE A DRE Card in SN885 DRE A SN885 DRE A DRE Card in SN887 DRE A SN887 DRE A DRE Card in SN886 DRE B SN886 DRE B DRE Card in SN885 DRE B SN885 ...

Page 2607: ...le LAMP NAME COLOR STATE REMARKS LINK Green Signal link with the Telephony Server is established ALM Red Such an alarm as a clock failure frame loss etc has oc curred LB Red Loop back test is in progress SW3 CNP0 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 30LCP CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC63 SW1 IMP SW2 ALM LINK LB SW0 CNP1 ...

Page 2608: ...VOL 3 121 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES SN880 DRE B CNP0 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 30LCP A CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC63 B SW62 CNP1 SW63 SW61 IMP SW60 ALM LINK LB ...

Page 2609: ... BATT0 LED PZ 30LCM A PZ 30LCQ A CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC93 A PZ CC63 B SW61 IMP SW62 SW60 CNP1 RGHZ Note 2 Note 1 Note 1 SW CN RC TR ALM LINK LB Note 1 For Australia PZ CC93 A and PZ 30LCM A For the countries that employs A law interface PZ CC63 B and PZ 30LCQ A Note 2 Assembled only PZ 30LCQ A ...

Page 2610: ...VOL 3 123 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES SN886 DRE A SW70 SW71 LB ALM LINK IVDCN CN3 CN1 CN2 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 23ELCK CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC94 SW73 SW74 ...

Page 2611: ...VOL 3 124 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES SN885 DRE A SW70 SW71 LB ALM LINK IVDCN SW72 CN3 CN1 CN2 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 30ELCL CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC79 ...

Page 2612: ...VOL 3 125 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES SN887 DRE A SW70 SW71 LB ALM LINK IVDCN CN3 CN1 CN2 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 30ELCM CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC95 SW72 SW CN RC TR SW75 ...

Page 2613: ...VOL 3 126 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES SN886 DRE B SW70 SW71 PWR LB ALM LINK IVDCN BATT0 BATT1 LED PZ 23ELCN CHAMP0 CHAMP1 ...

Page 2614: ...VOL 3 127 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES SN885 DRE B SW70 SW71 SW72 PWR LB ALM LINK IVDCN BATT0 BATT1 LED PZ 30ELCP CHAMP0 CHAMP1 ...

Page 2615: ...VOL 3 128 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES SN887 DRE B SN905 DREB B IVDCN PZ 30ELCR CHAMP0 CHAMP1 LED BATT1 BATT0 PWR SW75 SW70 SW71 SW72 SW CN RC TR LB ALM LINK ...

Page 2616: ...VOL 3 129 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES SN8061 DREH A SW70 SW71 SW72 SW CN SW75 PWR LB ALM LINK IVDCN BATT0 BATT1 LED PZ 30ELCU CHAMP0 CHAMP1 ...

Page 2617: ... explains the method of mounting the battery and the kinds of batteries that can be used How to Mount the Battery The battery can be mounted inside the DRU DAU or installed externally When installing the battery externally it must be mounted on the BATT BOX ASSEM For the location of the BATT BOX ASSEM refer to Example Installation of a DRU DAU Wall Mounting The BATT BOX ASSEM must be pro vided by ...

Page 2618: ...ery BATTERY LOCATION Q TY FEED DURATION REQUIREMENT FOR THE BATTERY TO BE USED When equipping the battery inside the DRU DAU 2 10 minutes Internal 2 each 12V 8AH Stock 240543 NP0 8 12 Battery External Provided by installer The company advises NP7 12 Part E43 200711 87 made by Yuasa Bat tery America Inc or PE12V6 5 made by GS Battery When GS battery is used the DRU BATT CA E NR 550988 005 2 are nee...

Page 2619: ...SN880 DRE B SN877 DRE B SN904 DRE B Analog PB Telephone PA DAIJ A Provides the interface between the Telephony Server and DRU DAU SN886 DRE A SN886 DRE B Dterm Series E Dterm75 23ch PA DAIU Provides the interface between the Telephony Server and DRU DAU SN8061 DREH A SN8063 DREJ A SN8064 DREK A Dterm Series E Dterm75 or Dterm Series i 30ch TSW PH SW10 When the DRU DAU is remotely installed using t...

Page 2620: ...des the interface between the Telephony Server and the following DRU DAU North America SN880 DRE B Australia SN877 DRE B Asia Latin America Middle East Russia SN880 DRE A SN880 DRE B SN904 DREA B Interface Communication Speed 2 048 Mbps Line Impedance 75 120 ohms The interface wires for this circuit card are accommodated by the LT Terminal on the PIR backplane as sociated with the DLI DAI card mou...

Page 2621: ...TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Front View Front View of PA DAIA shows a front view of the PA DAIA card Front View of PA DAIA LB OPE N OPE LINK CRC PCM FRM MFRM RMT BLUE PALM MB BL7 BL BL4 BL3 BL0 SW3 R G R G R R R R R R R R R R ...

Page 2622: ...he data from the DRU DAU has been detected MFRM Red Indicates that a Multi Frame Loss due to the data from the DRU DAU has been detected RMT Red Indicates that the DRU DAU has detected a Frame Loss and it has been alerted from the remote office as a Remote Office Alarm BLUE Red This lamp lights upon detecting a blue signal from the DRU DAU It is an indication that the DRU DAU is under a local loop...

Page 2623: ...nterface between the Telephony Server and the DRU DAU SN886 DRE A SN886 DRE B Interface Communication Speed 1 544 Mbps Line Impedance 100 Ω The interface wires for this circuit card are accommodated by the LT Terminal on the PIR backplane as sociated with the DLI DAI card mounting slot Mounting Location Please refer to the Circuit Card Description ...

Page 2624: ...2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Front View Front View of PA DAIJ A shows a front view of the PA DAIJ A card Front View of PA DAIJ A LB OPE LINK CRC PCM FRM RMT BLUE PALM SW00 MB BL7 BL BL4 BL3 BL0 SW01 R G G R R R R R R G G G ...

Page 2625: ... due to the data from the DRU DAU has been detected RMT Red Indicates that the DRU DAU has detected a Frame Loss and it has been alerted from the remote office as a Remote Office Alarm BLUE Red This lamp lights upon detecting a Blue Signal from the DRU DAU This is an indication that the DRU DAU is under a local loop back test PALM Red The power supply to a Dterm is abnormal at more than one circui...

Page 2626: ...llowing DRU DAU North America SN8061 DREH A Australia SN8063 DREJ A Asia Latin America Middle East russia SN8064 DREK A Interface Communication Speed 2 048 Mbps Line Impedance 75 120 Ω The interface wires for this circuit card are accommodated by the LT Terminal on the PIR backplane as sociated with the DLI DAI card mounting slot Mounting Location Please refer to the Circuit Card Description ...

Page 2627: ...ELATED DEVICES Front View Front View of PA DAIU shows a front view of the PA DAIU card Front View of PA DAIU MFRM LB OPE LINK CRC PCM FRM AIS RMT PALM SW00 MB BL03 BL00 BL07 BL04 BL11 BL08 BL15 BL12 SW02 R G G R R R R R R R G G G G ...

Page 2628: ...Red Indicates that bit error rate CRC error count exceeds the defined threshold value PCM Red Indicates that a failure of clock supply from the DRU DAU has been de tected FRM Red Indicates that a Frame Loss due to the data from the DRU DAU has been detected MFRM Red Indicates that a Multi Frame Loss due to the data from the DRU DAU has been detected AIS Red Lights on detecting a Blue Signal from t...

Page 2629: ...DAIA PA DAIJ A 30 LC 30 ELC MODE 15 DLC MODE 23 ELC MODE 11 DLC 1 ELC MODE Odd Number Group 01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 7 VOICE 15 Not used DATA 7 Not used VOICE 15 Not used DATA 7 Not used 6 14 6 DATA 14 14 6 5 13 VOICE 29 5 13 13 5 4 12 28 4 12 12 4 3 11 27 VOICE 7 Not used 11 VOICE 7 2 10 26 6 VOICE 14 10 6 1 9 25 5 13 9 5 0 8 24 4 12 8 4 Even Number Group 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 ...

Page 2630: ...XX131 XXX132 XXX133 XXX134 XXX135 XXX136 XXX137 XXX140 XXX141 XXX142 XXX143 XXX144 XXX145 XXX146 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 3 Champ 0 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 Champ 1 Dterm Dterm Dterm Dterm A DA A DA A DA A DA Dterm Dterm Dterm Dterm A DA A DA A DA A DA Dterm Dterm Dterm Dterm A DA A DA A DA 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 ...

Page 2631: ...y Server and the DRU DAU and between the DRU DAU and Dterms Analog PB TELs For procedures not explained in this manual refer to the Installation Manual Circuit Card Description 7 3 2 Precautions on Installation The figure below is an example of a Static Caution Indicator A Static Caution Indicator is shown on pages when work involving static sensitive components are described Static Caution Indica...

Page 2632: ...nnected to the frame which is not coated by an insulating material LOAD LAN1 LAN2 PWR ACT ALM EMA TxRx LINK TxRx LINK SV7000 APEX TP S LOAD LAN1 LAN2 PWR ACT ALM TxRx LINK TxRx LINK SV7000 APEX SP S U P U P U P U P S P 2 3 4 S P 2 3 4 SP 234 SP 234 SN1234 SN1234 Connect ground wire to the frame Note 1 Place the circuit card on a conductive sheet wrist strap conductive sheet wrist strap Connector B...

Page 2633: ...er Cable of DRU DAU make sure the power cable is connected properly to the DRU DAU Referring to Mounting of Battery Optional set the battery and connect the cable between the battery and the DRU DAU Referring to Mounting of COAX TERM Optional connect the COAX TERM between the LT Connector and the Coaxial Cable Referring to Switch Setting of DRE Card make the switch set ting on the DRE card in the ...

Page 2634: ...to figures on the next page drill holes at the locations marked for the DRU DAU Put wood screws CRWS 4 1 20 15BF into the drilled holes leaving the top portion of each screw above level by five millimeters 430 1 4 9 10 390 1 3 2 5 20 4 5 20 4 5 Floor 37 1 1 2 11 1 5 285 28 1 1 10 350 1 1 4 5 100 3 9 10 Wall Unit mm inch Note Set the position above 100 millimeters 3 9 10 from the floor surface allo...

Page 2635: ...ll bit of 7Φ 3 Inset an anchor Carl PC plug into each drilled hole Specifications of Carl PC Plug are as shown below PART NUMBER COLOR OUTER DIAMETER LENGTH OUTER DIAMETER OF WOOD SCREW DRILL SIZE PULL OUT STRENGTH 7 Green Ø7 0 25 millimeters 1 0 Ø4 1 Ø4 8 Ø7 0 450 kilograms 993 pounds Ø7 0 35 millimeters 1 4 500 kilograms 1104 pounds 50mm 2 inches 50mm 2 inches 1 Drill with a drill bit of 1Φ 3Φ 2...

Page 2636: ... for STAND ASSEM START Marking Drilling END Referring to the figure below mark the STAND ASSEM setting locations Referring to the figure on the next page drill holes at the loca tions marked for the STAND ASSEM Fasten the STAND ASSEM onto the floor DRU DAU 15 3 5 500 1 7 7 10 15 3 5 3 9 10 100 240 9 2 5 Wall Unit mm inch ...

Page 2637: ...l with a drill bit of 7Φ 3 Inset an anchor Carl PC plug into each drilled hole Specifications of Carl PC plug are as shown below PART NUMBER COLOR OUTER DIAMETER LENGTH OUTER DIAMETER OF WOOD SCREW DRILL SIZE PULL OUT STRENGTH 7 Green Ø7 0 25 millimeters 1 0 Ø4 1 Ø4 8 Ø7 0 450 kilograms 993 pounds Ø7 0 35 millimeters 1 4 500 kilograms 1104 pounds ...

Page 2638: ...VOL 3 151 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Fastening of STAND ASSEM STAND ASSEM Set Screw Set Screw ...

Page 2639: ...DAU on the Wall Removal of DRU DAU Cover START Referring to the figure below remove the cover off the DRU DAU Referring to the figure on the next page hook up the DRU DAU onto the wood screws inset on the wall Fasten the DRU DAU onto the wall by tightening the wood screws END DRU DAU ...

Page 2640: ...VOL 3 153 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Installation of DRU DAU Wall Mounting DRU DAU Wood screw Wood screw ...

Page 2641: ...tion of DRU DAU Floor Installation by the STAND ASSEM START Remove the cover of the DRU DAU Referring to the figure below hook up the DRU DAU onto the screws PL C P IMS 4 10 15BF pro vided at the four corners of the STAND ASSEM Fasten the DRU DAU onto the STAND ASSEM by tightening the screws END DRU DAU STAND ASSEM Screw ...

Page 2642: ...g to the following two figures Note The 19 inch rack should be provided by the installer Installation of DRU DAU When Mounting Four Sets of DRU DAUs onto a 19 inch Rack 2100 mm 7 10 inches 1958 mm 7 5 inches BATT BOX UNIT Special Batteries DRU DAU Mounting M T G DRU DAU 19 inch Rack IEC Spec Note The battery and the BATT BOX ASSEM are locally provided ...

Page 2643: ...RU DAU When Mounting Three Sets of DRU DAUs onto a 19 inch Rack 2100 mm 7 10 inches 1958 mm 7 5 inches DRU DAU Mounting M T G 19 inch Rack IEC Spec BATT BOX UNIT Standard BATT BOX ASSEM Standard DRU DAU Note The battery and the BATT BOX ASSEM are locally provided ...

Page 2644: ...200V terminals on the power supply in the DRU DAU If a short piece of circuiting cable is not connected across the above mentioned terminals connect it Note When the operating voltage to be used is 200V 260V remove the short piece of circuiting cable connected across 100V 200V terminals Verification of Circuiting Cable Short Piece 100V 200V AC L AC N FG Confirm that a short piece is connected here...

Page 2645: ...l When Mounting Battery within the DRU DAU Battery Connection When Mounting Battery within the DRU DAU START Referring to the figure below mount the battery to the DRU DAU Referring to the figure on the next page connect the battery cable END Battery Cover Set screw Battery ...

Page 2646: ...VOL 3 159 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Battery Cable Connection When Mounting Battery within the DRU DAU BATT0 BATT1 Battery Cable DRE card Battery DRU DAU ...

Page 2647: ...D DEVICES 7 4 1 When Mounting Battery Externally Battery Mounting START Referring to the figure below mount the battery onto the BATT BOX ASSEM Referring to the figure on the next page connect the battery cable END Battery BATT BOX ASSEM ...

Page 2648: ...U DRE Card Note 1 In regard to the battery cables use the following North America DRU EX Battery Lau Stock 240542 Australia Asia Latin America Middle East and Russia For wall mounting DRU BATT CA D NR 550988 004 For floor installation using STAND ASSEM DRU BATT CA C NR 550988 003 Note 2 For the terminals at the battery side use terminals of Fasten Terminal 187 Series ...

Page 2649: ...Layout of COAX TERM Refer to the figure on the next page DAI Circuit Card mounting conditions For Australia refer to Mounting Conditions of DAI Card for Australia For Asia Latin America Middle East and Russia refer to Mounting Conditions of DAI Card for Asia Latin America Middle East and Russia Mounting of the COAX TERM Refer to Mounting of COAX TERM END Type of COAX TERM Function Name Country to ...

Page 2650: ...ircuit Card Mounting Conditions Please refer to the Circuit Card Description To LT Connector PZ M401 A PZ M406 A RCV0 CLK TNS0 SW5 SW4 SW3 RA A B C SW2 POUTB A B C SW5 TB A B C SW1 POUTA A B C SW4 TA A B C SW0 RB A B C SW3 SW2 SW1 SW0 Note Note Jumper settings vary depending on the mounting slot of the DAI card ...

Page 2651: ...VOL 3 164 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES c Mounting of the COAX TERM Mounting of the COAX TERM LT CONNECTOR B W B COAX TERM COAXIAL CABLE ...

Page 2652: ... prevent dam age to static sensitive components For example a 3M Model 8012 consists of a 2 2 VELOSTAT work mat a 15 ft ground card and a CHARGE GUARD wrist strap with alligator clip If a CHARGE GUARD wrist strap is to be used connect the wrist strap to the frame or other ground using the provided cable 2 Handling Circuit Cards Whenever possible do not handle circuit cards with bare hands Do not t...

Page 2653: ... CARD SN880 DRE A DRE PZ CC63 PZ 30LCP ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required SW3 CNP0 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 30LCP CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC63 SW1 IMP SW2 ALM LINK LB SW0 CNP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 6 Note 5 Note 4 Note 7 ON SW0 SW1 SW3 ON OFF Note 3 Note 2 SW2 4 3 2 1 ON Fixed to all OFF OFF ...

Page 2654: ...PZ CC63 B PZ 30LCP A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required CNP0 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 30LCP A CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC63 B SW62 CNP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 6 ON SW60 SW61 SW63 ON OFF SW62 4 3 2 1 ON OFF SW63 SW61 IMP SW60 ALM LINK LB Fixed to all OFF ...

Page 2655: ...g the channel number of the signal data link to 6 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 7 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 8 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIA card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN880 DRE A SN880 DRE B DRE PZ CC63 PZ 30LCP PZ CC63 B PZ 30LCP A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions...

Page 2656: ...er of the signal data link to 15 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 16 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 17 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIA card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN880 DRE A SN880 DRE B DRE PZ CC63 PZ 30LCP PZ CC63 B PZ 30LCP A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3...

Page 2657: ...channel number of the signal data link to 22 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 23 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIA card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN880 DRE A SN880 DRE B DRE PZ CC63 PZ 30LCP PZ CC63 B PZ 30LCP A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW0 SW60 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW0 SW60 ON...

Page 2658: ...ing the channel number of the signal data link to 30 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 31 standard setting This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIA card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN880 DRE A SN880 DRE B DRE PZ CC63 PZ 30LCP PZ CC63 B PZ 30LCP A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW0 SW60 ON 1 ...

Page 2659: ... Sequence SW0 3 SW60 3 When CRC4 Check Sequence is disabled OFF normal setting When CRC4 Check Sequence is enabled ON Note 4 Switch setting for Repeater connection SW1 4 SW61 4 Repeater not connected OFF Repeater connected ON Note 5 Switch setting for E bit send control SW1 5 SW61 5 Fixed 1 no error OFF normal setting CRC4 Check Result automatically sent ON SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN880 DRE A SN880 DR...

Page 2660: ...ng the DRE to remote loop back ON OFF When setting the DRE to local loop back test OFF ON When setting the DRE to remote loop back test ON ON Note 7 Switch setting for connection to digital trunk interface SW3 SW63 120 Ω OFF 75 Ω ON SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN880 DRE A SN880 DRE B DRE PZ CC63 PZ 30LCP PZ CC63 B PZ 30LCP A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ...

Page 2661: ... B PZ 30LCQ A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required SW63 CNP0 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 30LCM A PZ 30LCQ A CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC93 A PZ CC63 B SW61 IMP SW62 SW60 CNP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 6 ON SW60 SW61 SW63 ON OFF Note 8 SW CN RC TR SW Up Down Note 9 RGHZ OFF 20HZ ON 25HZ RGHZ Note 10 Note 4 Note 5 Note 2 Note 3 SW62 Note 7 4 3 2 1 ON OFF ALM LINK ...

Page 2662: ... 5 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 6 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 7 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 8 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIA card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN877 DRE B SN904 DREA B DRE PZ CC93 A PZ 30LCM A PZ CC63 B PZ 30LCQ A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive H...

Page 2663: ...of the signal data link to 14 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 15 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 16 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIA card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN877 DRE B SN904 DREA B DRE PZ CC93 A PZ 30LCM A PZ CC63 B PZ 30LCQ A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2...

Page 2664: ...link to 21 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 22 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 23 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIA card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN877 DRE B SN904 DREA B DRE PZ CC93 A PZ 30LCM A PZ CC63 B PZ 30LCQ A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW60 O...

Page 2665: ...29 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 30 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 31 standard setting This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIA card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN877 DRE B SN904 DREA B DRE PZ CC93 A PZ 30LCM A PZ CC63 B PZ 30LCQ A ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7...

Page 2666: ...heck Sequence SW60 3 When CRC4 Check Sequence is disabled OFF normal setting When CRC4 Check Sequence is enabled ON Note 4 Switch setting for Repeater connection SW61 4 Repeater not connected OFF Repeater connected ON Note 5 Switch setting for E bit send control SW61 5 Fixed 1 no error OFF normal setting CRC4 Check Result automatically sent ON SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN877 DRE B SN904 DREA B DRE PZ CC...

Page 2667: ...lia When Battery Control is disabled OFF When Battery Control is enabled ON For the Asia Latin America Middle East and Russia OFF Note 8 Switch setting for connection to digital trunk interface SW63 120 Ω OFF 75 Ω ON Note 9 Switch setting for connection to digital trunk interface SW CHAMP 120 Ω Twisted Pair Wiring Down RC TR 75 Ω Coaxial Wiring Up Note 10 Switch setting for ringing frequency RGHZ ...

Page 2668: ...6 DRE A DRE PZ CC94 PZ 23ELCK ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required SW70 SW71 LB ALM LINK IVDCN CN3 CN1 CN2 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 23ELCK CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC94 SW73 SW74 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 5 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 ON SW71 SW70 Note 4 Note 3 Note 2 Note 7 Note 8 Note 10 Note 11 Note 9 Note 6 SW73 SW74 Left Right ...

Page 2669: ...ARD SN886 DRE B DRE PZ 23ELCN ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required SW70 SW71 PWR LB ALM LINK IVDCN BATT0 BATT1 LED PZ 23ELCN CHAMP0 CHAMP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 5 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 ON SW71 SW70 Note 4 Note 3 Note 2 Note 8 Note 9 Note 6 Note 7 ...

Page 2670: ...f the signal data link to 5 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 6 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 7 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 8 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIJ A card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN886 DRE A SN886 DRE B DRE PZ CC94 PZ 23ELCK PZ 23ELCN ATTENTION Contents Static...

Page 2671: ...tting the channel number of the signal data link to 15 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 16 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 17 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIJ A card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN886 DRE A SN886 DRE B DRE PZ CC94 PZ 23ELCK PZ 23ELCN ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions ...

Page 2672: ...setting the channel number of the signal data link to 23 standard setting This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIJ A card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN886 DRE A SN886 DRE B DRE PZ CC94 PZ 23ELCK PZ 23ELCN ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW70 ...

Page 2673: ...70 2 12 Multi Frame Format D4 ON 24 Multi Frame Format ESF OFF Note 4 Switch setting of M bit 4 kbps data link system of 24 multi frame format SW70 3 Bit Oriented Signals BOS System ON Message Oriented Signals MOS System OFF This switch setting is valid only when SW70 2 has been set to OFF When SW70 2 has been set to ON SW70 3 must be set to OFF SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN886 DRE A SN886 DRE B DRE PZ C...

Page 2674: ...ON 800 1066 feet ON OFF OFF 1066 1310 feet OFF ON ON For in premises direct installation OFF ON ON Note 6 Switch setting for Repeater connection SW71 4 Repeater not connected OFF Repeater connected ON Note 7 Switch setting for Transmission Line Code ZCS SW71 5 B7 Stuffing ON B8ZS OFF SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN886 DRE A SN886 DRE B DRE PZ CC94 PZ 23ELCK PZ 23ELCN ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Han...

Page 2675: ... Switch setting for IVD DAU connection SW71 8 IVD DAU connected OFF IVD DAU not connected ON Note 10 Switch setting for middle point of the transmit side transformer assembled only PZ CC94 SW73 Ground Left side No connection Right side Note 11 Switch setting for middle point of the receive side transformer assembled only PZ CC94 SW74 Ground Left side No connection Right side SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN...

Page 2676: ... CIRCUIT CARD SN885 DRE A DRE PZ CC79 PZ 30ELCL ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required SW70 SW71 LB ALM LINK IVDCN SW72 CN3 CN1 CN2 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 30ELCL CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC79 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 6 Note 8 Note 7 Note 4 Note 5 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 Note 3 Note 2 ON SW71 SW70 Up Down SW72 ...

Page 2677: ...N885 DRE B DRE PZ 30ELCP ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required SW70 SW71 SW72 PWT LB ALM LINK IVDCN BATT0 BATT1 LED PZ 30ELCP CHAMP0 CHAMP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 6 Note 7 Note 5 Note 4 Note 8 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 ON SW71 SW70 Up Down SW72 ...

Page 2678: ...ting the channel number of the signal data link to 5 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 6 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 7 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 8 SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN885 DRE A SN885 DRE B DRE PZ CC79 PZ 30ELCL PZ 30ELCP ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW7...

Page 2679: ...number of the signal data link to 14 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 15 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 16 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 17 SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN885 DRE A SN885 DRE B DRE PZ CC79 PZ 30ELCL PZ 30ELCP ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW70 1 2 3 4 5 6...

Page 2680: ...annel number of the signal data link to 21 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 22 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 23 SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN885 DRE A SN885 DRE B DRE PZ CC79 PZ 30ELCL PZ 30ELCP ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON ...

Page 2681: ...ing the channel number of the signal data link to 29 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 30 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 31 standard setting SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN885 DRE A SN885 DRE B DRE PZ CC79 PZ 30ELCL PZ 30ELCP ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW70 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 2682: ... CRC4 Check Sequence SW70 3 When CRC4 Check Sequence is disabled OFF normal setting When CRC4 Check Sequence is enabled ON Note 4 Switch setting for Repeater connection SW71 4 Repeater not connected OFF Repeater connected ON Note 5 Switch setting for E bit send control SW71 5 Fixed 1 no error OFF normal setting CRC4 Check Result automatically sent ON SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN885 DRE A SN885 DRE B DRE...

Page 2683: ... the DRE to local loop back check OFF ON When setting the DRE to remote loop back check ON ON Note 7 Switch setting for IVD DAU connection SW71 8 IVD DAU connected OFF IVD DAU not connected ON Note 8 Switch setting for connection to digital trunk interface SW72 120 Ω Down 75 Ω Up SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN885 DRE A SN885 DRE B DRE PZ CC79 PZ 30ELCL PZ 30ELCP ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handlin...

Page 2684: ...PZ CC95 and PZ 30ELCM ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required SW70 SW71 LB ALM LINK IVDCN SW72 CN3 CN1 CN2 PWR BATT1 BATT0 LED PZ 30ELCM CHAMP0 CHAMP1 PZ CC95 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 6 Note 4 Note 5 Note 7 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 ON SW71 SW70 Up Down SW72 SW CN RC TR SW Up Down Note 10 SW75 1 2 Note 9 Note Note 8 ON SW75 ...

Page 2685: ...DRE B SN905 DREB B DRE PZ 30ELCR ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required IVDCN PZ 30ELCR CHAMP0 CHAMP1 LED LINK ALM LB SW CN RC TR 1 ON Up Down SW71 SW75 SW72 Note 6 Note 4 Note 5 Note 8 Note 7 Note 9 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON 1 ON SW70 Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 10 Up Down SW BATT1 BATT0 PWR SW75 SW70 SW71 SW72 Note 2 Note 3 ...

Page 2686: ...he channel number of the signal data link to 5 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 6 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 7 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 8 SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN887 DRE A SN887 DRE B SN905 DREB B DRE PZ CC95 PZ 30ELCM PZ 30ELCR ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...

Page 2687: ... link to 13 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 14 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 15 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 16 SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN887 DRE A SN887 DRE B SN905 DREB B DRE PZ CC95 PZ 30ELCM PZ 30ELCR ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW70 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW70 ON...

Page 2688: ...tting the channel number of the signal data link to 21 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 22 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 23 SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN887 DRE A SN887 DRE B SN905 DREB B DRE PZ CC95 PZ 30ELCM PZ 30ELCR ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW70 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW70 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW...

Page 2689: ...e channel number of the signal data link to 29 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 30 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 31 standard setting SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN887 DRE A SN887 DRE B SN905 DREB B DRE PZ CC95 PZ 30ELCM PZ 30ELCR ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW70 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW70 ON 1 2 3 4 5...

Page 2690: ...Check Sequence SW70 3 When CRC4 Check Sequence is disabled OFF normal setting When CRC4 Check Sequence is enabled ON Note 4 Switch setting for Repeater connection SW71 4 Repeater not connected OFF Repeater connected ON Note 5 Switch setting for E bit send control SW71 5 Fixed 1 no error OFF normal setting CRC4 Check Result automatically sent ON SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN887 DRE A SN887 DRE B SN905 DRE...

Page 2691: ...F IVD DAU not connected ON Note 8 Switch setting for connection to digital trunk interface SW72 120 Ω Down 75 Ω Up Note 9 Switch setting for Battery Control SW75 2 For Australia When Battery Control is disabled OFF When Battery Control is enabled ON For Asia Latin America Middle East and Russia OFF Note 10 Switch setting for connection to digital trunk interface SW CHAMP 120 Ω Twisted Pair Wiring ...

Page 2692: ...31 SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN8061 DREH A SN8063 DREJ A SN8064 DREK A DRE PZ 30ELCU ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required IVDCN PZ 30ELCU CHAMP0 CHAMP1 LED LINK ALM LB SW CN RC TR 1 ON Up Down SW71 SW75 SW72 Note 6 Note 4 Note 5 Note 7 Note 8 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON 1 ON SW70 Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 9 Up Down SW BATT1 BATT0 PWR SW75 SW70 SW71 SW72 Note 2 Note 3 ...

Page 2693: ...link to 5 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 6 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 7 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 8 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIU card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN8061 DREH A SN8063 DREJ A SN8064 DREK A DRE PZ 30ELCU ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling ...

Page 2694: ...number of the signal data link to 14 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 15 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 16 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIU card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN8061 DREH A SN8063 DREJ A SN8064 DREK A DRE PZ 30ELCU ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6...

Page 2695: ...al data link to 21 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 22 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 23 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIU card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN8061 DREH A SN8063 DREJ A SN8064 DREK A DRE PZ 30ELCU ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW70 ON 1 2 3...

Page 2696: ...ink to 29 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 30 When setting the channel number of the signal data link to 31 standard setting This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated PA DAIU card SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN8061 DREH A SN8063 DREJ A SN8064 DREK A DRE PZ 30ELCU ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW70 ...

Page 2697: ... CRC4 Check Sequence SW70 3 When CRC4 Check Sequence is disabled OFF normal setting When CRC4 Check Sequence is enabled ON Note 4 Switch setting for Repeater connection SW71 4 Repeater not connected OFF Repeater connected ON Note 5 Switch setting for E bit send control SW71 5 Fixed 1 no error OFF normal setting CRC4 Check Result automatically sent ON SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD SN8061 DREH A SN8063 DREJ A...

Page 2698: ...n to digital trunk interface SW72 120 Ω Down 75 Ω Up Note 8 Switch setting for Battery Control SW75 2 For Australia When Battery Control is disabled OFF When Battery Control is enabled ON For North America Asia Latin America Middle East and Russia OFF Note 9 Switch setting for connection to digital trunk interface SW CHAMP 120 Ω Twisted Pair Wiring Down RC TR 75 Ω Coaxial Wiring Up For North Ameri...

Page 2699: ... cards first spread out the work mat then connect the ground cord to the frame or other ground source If a CHARGE GUARD wrist strap is to be used connect the wrist strap to the frame or other ground using the provided cable 2 Handling Circuit Cards Whenever possible do not handle circuit cards with bare hands Do not touch the surface or the mounted components Touching the surface may damage the ca...

Page 2700: ...t or dust remains on the connector after cleaning Verify the mounting position of each circuit card by referring to the module face layout Verify that the color code of the card puller tab coincides with that of the card mounting slot Verify the slot number on the module Slot numbers are indicat ed at the top of each module and range from 00 to 23 Set the required switches according to the Circuit...

Page 2701: ...VOL 3 214 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Circuit Card Mounting Partial Insertion ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required About 50 mm 2 inches PIR PIR ...

Page 2702: ...VOL 3 215 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES 7 5 1 DAI DLI Card Switch Setting Refer to the Circuit Card Description for setting switches on the following Circuit Cards PA DAIA PA DAIJ A PA DAIU ...

Page 2703: ... B cannot be remotely installed by means of a digital interface 7 5 2 Cable Termination and Cross Connection from MDF to DRU DAU For more information on LT Connector Pin Accommodation please refer to the Circuit Card Description START Running cable Cable termination Check terminal locations on the Te lephony Server side of the MDF Cross Connections END While referring to the figure on the next pag...

Page 2704: ...ER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Cross Connections for Digital Interface When remotely installing DRU DAU by Digital Interface Connecting Route Diagram for DLI DAI TA MDF DLI DAI DRU DAU TB TA TB RA RB RA RB PoutA PoutB ...

Page 2705: ...e IDF Protect the cables using cable ducts etc While referring to two figures listed on the following pages ter minate the installed cables to the IDF and the modular blocks While referring to Champ Connector Pin Accommodation identify the lead names for the CHAMP Connector of DRU DAU and the terminal locations of the leads While referring to figures Detailed of Dterm Analog PB TEL Connection prov...

Page 2706: ...VOL 3 219 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Details of Analog PB TEL Connection BX AX IDF CABLE PAIR MODULAR CABLE MODULAR BLOCK JACK L1 L2 Analog PB TEL A B MODULAR JACK CHAMP Connector Lead ...

Page 2707: ...OL 3 220 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Details of Dterm Connection BX AX IDF CABLE PAIR MODULAR CABLE MODULAR BLOCK JACK H2 H1 G L2 E L1 BK Y R G Dterm RB RA TB TA MODULAR JACK CHAMP Connector Lead ...

Page 2708: ...9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 PIN No RA TA A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 LEAD NAME To the PBX No 0 CKT No 1 CKT No 2 CKT No 3 CKT No 4 CKT No 5 CKT No 6 CKT No 7 CKT No 8 CKT No 9 CKT No 10 CKT No 11 CKT No 12 CKT No 13 CKT No 14 CKT No 15 CKT No 16 CKT No 17 CKT No 18 CKT No 19 CKT No 20 CKT No 21 CKT PIN No 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 ...

Page 2709: ...rotect the cables using cable ducts etc While referring to Figure CHAMP Connector Pin Accommo dation terminate the installed cables to the IDF and the mod ular blocks While referring to Figure CHAMP Connector Pin Accommo dation identify the lead names for the CHAMP Connector of DRU DAU and the terminal locations of the leads While referring to Figure Detailed of Dterm Analog PB TEL Connection prov...

Page 2710: ...6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 PIN No RA TA A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 LEAD NAME To the PBX No 0 CKT No 1 CKT No 2 CKT No 3 CKT No 4 CKT No 5 CKT No 6 CKT No 7 CKT No 8 CKT No 9 CKT No 10 CKT No 11 CKT No 12 CKT No 13 CKT No 14 CKT No 15 CKT No 16 CKT No 17 CKT No 18 CKT No 19 CKT No 20 CKT No 21 CKT PIN No 26 27 28 29 30 ...

Page 2711: ...AU Rectifier and MDF IDF Clean the location for the field office Dispose of dust trash etc Make sure that DLI DAI mounted in the Telephony Server is partially inserted Make sure that all connectors are correctly and completely se cured Make sure that the installation cables are arranged neatly Make sure that all fanning soldering and cross connections are complete at the MDF IDF ...

Page 2712: ...op back tests are shown be low Note that there is no loop back test on a per telephone set basis Local Loop Back Check Test Remote Loop Back Check Test Remote Loop Back The loop back test method is according to the switch setting on the DLI DAI card and on the DRE card in the DRU DAU Local Loop Back Test This test loops back the signals inside the line at the line interface portion of the self off...

Page 2713: ...his test is performed the remote office must be in remote loop back status When this test is performed from the DLI DAI setting cancelling of remote loop back can be made from the DLI DAI to the DRU DAU This test can be controlled only at the DLI DAI side Remote Loop Back Test DLI DAI Telephony Server Telephony Server DRU DAU DRU DAU is Remote Loop Back status DLI DAI DRU DAU DLI DAI is Remote Loo...

Page 2714: ...LI DAI and the DRU DAU by remote loop back test The self office sets loop back but cannot verify that line is working properly In case transmission equipment is provided between the DLI DAI and the DRU DAU this test is to be set in answer to a loop back request from the transmission equipment Remote Loop Back DLI DAI DRU DAU DLI DAI DRU DAU Telephony Server Telephony Server When remote loop back i...

Page 2715: ...tart up of DRU DAU start up the DRU DAU Referring to Test of Lamp Indications and System Messages see if there is any lamp indication or system message that indi cates abnormality after the DRU DAU has started up Referring to Loop Back Test Execution Required Not Re quired see if there is any abnormality on the transmission line between the DRU DAU and the Telephony Server after the DRU DAU has st...

Page 2716: ...ounting slot Plug the AC cord of the DRU DAU into the AC outlet Turn ON the operating power to the DRU DAU Set the MB switch of the DLI DAI card DOWN Assign the office data of the DRU DAU Lift the handset of a Dterm Analog PB TEL and see if Dial Tone can be heard Save the office data onto a hard disk or a floppy disk using the backup command END ...

Page 2717: ...the OPE lamp G on the DLI DAI card lights If any lamp is indicating abnormality check the switch setting on the DLI DAI card mounting slot of the DLI DAI card cable connection to the MDF and setting of the office data etc for ac curacy For an explanation of the TOPU Lamp Indications refer to Sys tem Operations and Maintenance Manual Display system messages using the DFTD command If a system messag...

Page 2718: ...amp indications on the DLI DAI card are as shown below When the lamp indications are as shown above perform the fol lowing loop back tests Loop back test from the DLI DAI to the DRU DAU Loop back test between the DLI DAI and the transmission equipment CIRCUIT CARD LAMP NAME LAMP INDICATION PA DAIA PA DAIU LINK G ON CRC R OFF PCM R FRM R MFRM R RMT R BLUE AIS R LB R PA DAIJ A LINK G ON CRC R OFF PC...

Page 2719: ...card as shown below When the lamp indications are as shown above perform the fol lowing loop back tests Loop back test between the DRU DAU and the transmis sion equipment LAMP NAME LAMP INDICATION LINK G ON ALM R OFF LB R OFF START Unplug the AC cord of the DRU DAU from the AC outlet Plug the AC cord of the DRU DAU into the AC outlet END Make sure that the System Message 13 Q is displayed Make sur...

Page 2720: ...ains the method of mounting the cover of the DRU DAU after the installation tests have been completed Mounting of DRU DAU Cover START Referring to the figure below mount the cover of the DRU DAU When the battery is externally installed mount the cover onto the BATT BOX ASSEM END DRU DAU ...

Page 2721: ...VOL 3 234 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Mounting of BATT BOX ASSEM Cover BATT BOX ASSEM ...

Page 2722: ...eration status controlling and fault occur rences This section explains for each system message related to DRU DAU shown in table listed on the next page the following items Meaning Related System Message Example of Printout Message Detail Data Note 1 Diagnostic from System Message Note 2 For system messages that are not explained in this chapter refer to the Operations and Maintenance Manual Note...

Page 2723: ...3 N Digital Line Warning During data transfer from the Telephony Server to the DRU DAU a fault such as Frame Loss Multi Frame Loss Signal Link Down Detect etc has occurred 13 O Digital Line Failure A fault represented by the system message 13 N has occurred more than 16 times consecutively within a one hour period 13 P Digital Line Restore A fault indicated by the System Message 13 N or 13 Q has b...

Page 2724: ...Location Information The accommodated location information of each circuit card is given by a hexadecimal number Relation between Accommodated Location Information and Mounting Location MG U G 1 XX00 00 MG U G Module Group Number Even or Odd Unit Number Group Number ...

Page 2725: ...3 7 08 00 0 8 28 00 1 8 48 00 2 8 68 00 3 8 09 00 0 9 29 00 1 9 49 00 2 9 69 00 3 9 0A 00 0 10 2A 00 1 10 4A 00 2 10 6A 00 3 10 0B 00 0 11 2B 00 1 11 4B 00 2 11 6B 00 3 11 0C 00 0 12 2C 00 1 12 4C 00 2 12 6C 00 3 12 0D 00 0 13 2D 00 1 13 4D 00 2 13 6D 00 3 13 0E 00 0 14 2E 00 1 14 4E 00 2 14 6E 00 3 14 0F 00 0 15 2F 00 1 15 4F 00 2 15 6F 00 3 15 10 00 0 16 30 00 1 16 50 00 2 16 70 00 3 16 11 00 0 ...

Page 2726: ...7 01 3 7 88 01 0 8 A8 01 1 8 C8 01 2 8 E8 01 3 8 89 01 0 9 A9 01 1 9 C9 01 2 9 E9 01 3 9 8A 01 0 10 AA 01 1 10 CA 01 2 10 EA 01 3 10 8B 01 0 11 AB 01 1 11 CB 01 2 11 EB 01 3 11 8C 01 0 12 AC 01 1 12 CC 01 2 12 EC 01 3 12 8D 01 0 13 AD 01 1 13 CD 01 2 13 ED 01 3 13 8E 01 0 14 AE 01 1 14 CE 01 2 14 EE 01 3 14 8F 01 0 15 AF 01 1 15 CF 01 2 15 EF 01 3 15 90 01 0 16 B0 01 1 16 D0 01 2 16 F0 01 3 16 91 ...

Page 2727: ...6 or by 2 If not proceed to the next step Note While a fault repair is in progress perform various operations such as system changeover initialization etc When such operations are performed they may affect the normally operating station lines attendant consoles trunks etc in the form of momentary disconnection speech interruption forced release of calls in progress etc By comparing the urgency of ...

Page 2728: ...ION 5 When FAULT is faulty 2 is faulty Note 1 Judgement of faulty status 2 When the fault status coincides with the indication the cause for the fault is indicated 3 Section number for repairing the fault 4 Operating items for diagnosis 5 Branching of the result of the operation 6 When the operating method is unknown refer to the System Operations and Maintenance Man ual ...

Page 2729: ... from the Telephony Server to the DRU DAU 2 Related system messages If this fault has occurred more than 16 times consecutively within a one hour period the System Message 13 O is printed out If the fault of the digital line is restored to normal the System Message 13 P is printed out 3 Example of Printout SYSTEM MESSAGE 13 N SUP DIGITAL LINE WARNING NEC TOKYO MAY 14 10 30 LP00 0 ACT 1 0701 0000 0...

Page 2730: ...lip Detected Minor 05 Signal Link Down Detected 06 Multi Frame Loss Minor 11 Frame Loss PCM Down Major 12 Bit Error 10 4 13 Slip Detected Major 14 Remote Office Alarm Detected 16 Multi Frame Loss Major 17 Frame Loss PCM Down Continuous 18 Multi Frame Loss Continuous Accommodated location of detected DLI DAI card MG Module Group U Unit G Group MG U G ...

Page 2731: ...em Message 13 N 13 O is indicating the following data and the PCM Lamp red FRM Lamp red MFRM Lamp red or CRC Lamp red lights System Message 13 N 17 Frame Loss PCM Down Continuous 18 Multi Frame Loss Continuous System Message 13 O 07 Frame loss PCM Down Continuous 08 Multi Frame Loss Continuous END FAULT SUPERVISION The remote office DRU DAU in the DLI DAI card or the transmission equipment has det...

Page 2732: ...Message 13 P is printed out 3 Example of printout 4 Message detail data 5 Diagnostic from system message Refer to System Message 13 N SYSTEM MESSAGE 13 O MN DIGITAL LINE FAILURE NEC TOKYO MAY 14 10 30 LP00 0 ACT 1 0701 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 XX 0X Kind of fault 01 Frame Loss PCM Down 02 Bit Error more than 10 4 03 Slip Detected 04 Remote Office Alarm Detected ...

Page 2733: ...e 13 N or 13 O has been re paired 3 Example of printout 4 Message detail data SYSTEM MESSAGE 13 P DIGITAL LINE RESTORE NEC TOKYO MAY 14 10 30 LP00 0 ACT 1 0701 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 XX 0X Kind of fault 01 Frame Loss PCM Down Restored 02 Bit Error less than 10 4 04 Remote Office Alarm Clear Detected 05 Signal Link Restored 06 Multi Frame Loss Restored Accommod...

Page 2734: ...e System Message 13 Q the System Message 13 R is printed out 3 Example of printout 4 Message detail data 5 Diagnostic from system message SYSTEM MESSAGE 13 Q SUP DRU DAU BATTERY OPERATION NEC TOKYO MAY 14 10 30 LP00 0 ACT 1 0700 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 XX 00 Accommodated location of detected DLI DAI card Refer to Section 7 9 4 MG Module Group U Unit G Group MG ...

Page 2735: ...f the AC power supply to the DRU DAU stops and the DRU DAU starts operating on the battery the System Message 13 Q is printed out 3 Example of printout 4 Message detail data SYSTEM MESSAGE 13 R AC LINE OPERATION NEC TOKYO MAY 14 10 30 LP00 0 ACT 1 0700 0000 0000 0000 2 0000 0000 0000 0000 3 0000 0000 0000 0000 1 XX 00 Accommodated location of detected DLI DAI card MG Module Group U Unit G Group MG...

Page 2736: ... between DLI DAI and Transmission Equipment Loop Back Diagnosis between DRU DAU and Transmission Equipment Loop Back Diagnosis from DLI DAI to DRU DAU This section explains the procedure of loop back diagnosis from the DLI DAI to the DRU DAU When the DLI DAI and the DRU DAU are connected via the transmission equipment loop back diagnosis between the DLI DAI and the transmission equipment and betwe...

Page 2737: ... loop back check On the DLI DAI card various lamps are indicat ing as follows a PA DAIA PA DAIU card LINK G ON flashing or OFF CRC R PCM R FRM R One or more than one MFRM R lamp lights RMT R BLUE AIS R A See if the power supply to the DRU DAU is nor mal and test the connection of the transmission line between the DLI DAI and the DRU DAU FAULT DLI DAI is faulty Refer to DLI DAI Fault CIRCUIT CARD N...

Page 2738: ...ing to the table below Switch setting for remote loop back A One or more than one lamp lights CIRCUIT CARD NAME SWITCH NAME PA DAIA SW3 1 SW3 2 PA DAIJ A SW01 1 SW01 2 PA DAIU SW02 1 SW02 2 DRU DAU CIRCUIT CARD NAME SWITCH NAME SN880 DRE A PZ CC63 SW1 6 SN880 DRE B SN904 DREA B PZ CC63 B SW61 6 SN877 DRE B PZ CC93 A SW61 6 SN880 DRE B PZ CC63 B SW61 6 SN885 DRE A B PZ CC79 PZ 30ELCP SW71 6 SN886 D...

Page 2739: ...as follows a PA DAIA PA DAIU LINK G ON flashing or OFF CRC R PCM R FRM R One or more than one MFRM R lamp lights RMT R BLUE AIS R b PA DAIJ A card LINK G ON flashing or OFF CRC R PCM R FRM R RMT R BLUE R END B OFF One or more than one lamp lights Make sure that the DLI DAI card and DRE card in the DRU DAU match the switch settings for signal link channel and for transmission speed of the signal li...

Page 2740: ...card lights Set the corresponding switch of the DLI DAI card UP ON referring to the table below Switch setting for local loop back check On the DLI DAI card various lamps are indicat ing as follows LINK G ON flashing or OFF CRC R PCM R FRM R MFRM R Note RMT R BLUE AIS R CIRCUIT CARD NAME SWITCH NAME PA DAIA SW3 1 PA DAIJ A SW01 1 PA DAIU SW02 1 One or more than one lamp lights A See if the power s...

Page 2741: ...R FRM R MFRM R Note RMT R BLUE AIS R END A CIRCUIT CARD NAME SWITCH NAME PA DAIA SW3 1 SW3 2 PA DAIJ A SW01 1 SW01 2 PA DAIU SW02 1 SW02 2 OFF One or more than one lamp lights FAULT The signal link channel of the DLI DAI is not being transmit ted transparently by the trans mission equipment 1 Test the transmission equipment 2 The DLI DAI card and the DRE card in the DRU DAU do not match with the s...

Page 2742: ... SN885 DRE A B PZ CC79 PZ 30ELCP SW71 6 SW71 7 SN886 DRE A B PZ CC94 PZ 23ELCN SW71 6 SW71 7 SN887 DRE A B PZ CC95 PZ 30ELCR SW71 6 SW71 7 SN905 DREB B PZ 30ELCR SW71 6 SW71 7 SN8061 DREH A SN8063 DREJ A SN8064 DREK A PZ 30ELCU SW71 6 SW71 7 A FAULT The signal link channel of the DLI DAI is not being transmitted transpar ently by the transmission equipment 1 Check the transmission equip ment 2 The...

Page 2743: ...DRE card UP ON referring to the table below Switch setting for local loop back check Lamps on the DRE card are indicating as follows LINK G ON flashing or OFF ALM R ON or flickering DRU DAU CIRCUIT CARD NAME SWITCH NAME SN880 DRE A PZ CC63 SW1 7 SN880 DRE B SN904 DREA B PZ CC63 B SW61 7 SN877 DRE B PZ CC93 A SW61 7 SN885 DRE A B PZ CC79 PZ 30ELCP SW71 7 SN886 DRE A B PZ CC94 PZ 23ELCN SW71 7 SN887...

Page 2744: ...DAU Fault Battery Fault DLI DAI Fault START On the DLI DAI card set the MB switch UP and remote the DLI DAI card from its mounting slot On a spare DLI DAI card set the switches On a spare DLI DAI card set the MB switch UP and insert the DLI DAI card into its mounting slot On the spare DLI DAI card set the MB switch DOWN See if the fault is still indicated END ...

Page 2745: ...ove the cable connected with the CHAMP connectors of the DRE card Remove the DRE card from the DRU DAU On a spare DRE card set the switches and insert the DRE card into the DRU DAU Connect the cable to PWR LED BATT0 and BATT1 connectors of the spare DRE card Connect the cable to the CHAMP connectors of the spare DRE card Mount the cover back onto the DRU DAU Plug the AC cord of the DRU DAU into th...

Page 2746: ... are fastening the battery cover Lift the battery cover and remove it from battery Replace the battery with a spare Place the cover onto the spare battery Fasten the battery cover using the three screws Connect the cable to BATT0 and BATT1 connectors of the DRE card Mount the cover back onto the DRU DAU Turn ON the power supply to the DRU DAU On the DLI DAI set the MB switch DOWN Unplug the AC cor...

Page 2747: ...ATT BOX ASSEM Remove the cable connected to the battery Replace the battery with a spare and mount it onto the BATTBOX ASSEM Connect the cable to the battery Mount the cover back onto the BATT BOX ASSEM Turn ON the power supply to the DRU DAU Unplug the AC cord of the DRU DAU from the AC outlet See if the DRU DAU is operating on the battery Plug the AC cord of the DRU DAU back into the AC outlet E...

Page 2748: ...allation of the Telephony Server and other necessary equipment the initial power on and start up of installed Telephony Server confirmation of the system s normal operations post installation test UNIVERGE SV8500 Operations and Maintenance Manual This manual explains how to operate and maintain the installed system The contents in clude The way to detect diagnose a fault Measure s to be taken in c...

Page 2749: ...aximum configuration ac commodating 240 ports In the minimum configuration the system has a single rack having 120 ports The fig ure below shows the connection between DCS and the Telephony Server Outline of DCS NEC Distributed Communications Server Fusion Networking NEC Distributed Communications Server Fusion Networking Analog Telephone x 30 DAP Optical Fiber Cable SMF MMF Max 240 ports Optical ...

Page 2750: ...M AMI Max 30 D s Max 30 Analog PB TELs Max 2km MMF Max 15km SMF DAI 0 DAI 1 DAI 2 DAI 3 DAI 4 DAI 5 DAI 6 DAI 7 OPTMUX PA CC109 SMF PA CC110 MMF PA CC111 SMF PA CC112 MMF 52M SDH Optical Fiber Cable SMF MMF DAI OPTMUX ROPTMUX DAP MMF SMF MMF SMF digital analog digital analog FUNCTION TYPE PA DAIA PA DAIG A PA CC109 PA CC110 PA CC111 PA CC112 SN4044 DAPK A SN4046 DAPM A CIRCUIT CARD Digital Access ...

Page 2751: ...N AC DC PWR1 PWR0 Power Receiving Terminal PWR1 DC source NFIL FAN AC DC PWR1 DARD 0 DARD 0 DARD 1 DARD 1 PA PW55 B PA PW54 B PA PW64 PWR0 PWR1 AC DC FUNCTION CIRCUIT CARD REMARKS Used for DC power system only Used for AC power system only Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 3 Note 1 Note 2 AC 120V AC 120V DCS operating power is supplied in two ways Note 1 Power Receiving Terminal is used for DC power suppl...

Page 2752: ... DAP2 DAP3 PWR0 PWR1 DAP0 DAP1 DAP2 DAP3 PWR0 PWR1 TERM NFIL TERM NFIL TERM NFIL 120 Ports of DC Power Supply System 240 Ports of DC Power Supply System DARD 0 DARD 0 DARD 1 PWR0 PA PW55 B PWR1 PA PW54 B ROPTMUX PA CC111 CC112 PWR0 PA PW55 B PWR1 PA PW54 B ROPTMUX PA CC111 CC112 DARD Distributed Access Rack TERM Power Receiving Terminal NFIL Noise Filter Unit 120 ports 240 ports To DC Power Source...

Page 2753: ...PWR0 AC PWR1 FAN DAP0 DAP1 DAP2 DAP3 PWR0 AC PWR1 FAN ROPTMUX DAP0 DAP1 DAP2 DAP3 PWR0 AC PWR1 FAN 120 Ports of AC Power Supply System 240 Ports of AC Power Supply System DARD 0 DARD 0 DARD 1 Air Duct Air Duct Air Duct PWR0 PA PW64 PWR1 PA PW55 B ROPTMUX PA CC111 CC112 PWR0 PA PW64 PWR1 PA PW55 B ROPTMUX PA CC111 CC112 DARD Distributed Access Rack 120 ports 240 ports AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V ...

Page 2754: ...1 LT0 30ELC SN4045 DAP B PWR0 PWR1 ROPT DCNT 48V COM OUT 48V COM IN PWR INT LT1 LT0 30ELC SN4045 DAP B PWR INT LT1 LT0 30ELC SN4045 DAP B PWR INT LT1 LT0 30ELC SN4045 DAP B PWR INT LT1 LT0 30ELC SN4045 DAP B Air Duct FAN ROPT DCNT DC Power Type AC Power Type AC SW ON 80V ALM 48V ALM 80VOUT 1A 125V AC DC 48VOUT 2A 125V AC DC CONN 48VOUT FAN AC1 FAN AC2 ACIN U P PA PW64 PA CC111 SMF PA CC112 MMF PWR...

Page 2755: ... DCS and Terminals SN4046 DAPM A Analog DAP max 350 Ω SN4044 DAPK A Digital DAP max 200 m 0 65 φ cable Power Source DC 48 V 80 V AC 120 V Power Consumption max 192 W Dimensions Width 480 mm Height 443 mm Depth 448 mm Weight 35 kg Temperature Normal Operations 0 C 40 C 10 C 50 C Short Period Humidity Normal Operations 40 80 30 90 Short Period Cooling Down DC Power Supply Natural Cooling Down Coolin...

Page 2756: ... NG 049406 1 PWR0 card PA PW54 B DC only NG 049405 1 PWR1 card PA PW64 AC only NG 049465 001 1 AC DC card FAN AC only Cooling FAN PA CC111 NR 575225 SMF 1 ROPTMUX card PA CC112 NR 575226 MMF 1 SN4044 DAPK A NR 572790 The kind of DAP can be selected optionally Digital DAP SN4046 DAPM A NR 572792 Analog DAP Front Cover 1 Rear Cover 1 PBX Interface PA CC109 NR 575222 SMF OPTMUX PA CC110 NR 575223 MMF...

Page 2757: ...MINAL 6P 48V 48V COM 48V G 80 80 80 OUT 48 COM G 48V G DCCON BATALM OUT 48 PWRA PWR IN PWR OUT OPTPW DCSALM DCSALM 48V0 48V1 2M10 2M11 2M12 2M13 2M00 2M01 2M02 2M03 PWR00 PWR01 PWR10 PWR11 PWR20 PWR21 PWR30 PWR31 48V IN 48V IN 3 pin 3 pin 3 pin 3 pin 8 pin DARD 1 DARD 0 Telephony Server 6 pin 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 2 pin 6 pin 2 pin 6 pin 2 pin 6 pin 3 pin 3 P 9 pin NOISE FILTER 7P 4 P 4 P 7P 7P ...

Page 2758: ...80 80 80 OUT 48 COM G 48V G DCCON BATALM OUT 48 PWRA PWR IN PWR OUT OPTPW DCSALM DCSALM 48V0 48V1 2M10 2M11 2M12 2M13 2M10 2M11 2M12 2M13 2M00 2M01 2M02 2M03 PWR00 PWR01 PWR10 PWR11 PWR20 PWR21 PWR30 PWR31 48V IN 48V IN 3 pin 3 pin 3 pin 3 pin DARD 0 DARD 1 2 pin 6 pin 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 2 pin 6 pin 2 pin 6 pin 2 pin 6 pin 3 pin 3 P 9 pin 9 pin NOISE FILTER 7P 7P 7P 7P LT0 LT1 INT LT0 LT1 INT...

Page 2759: ...OPTPW OPTPW DCSALM DCSALM 48V0 48V1 2M10 2M11 2M12 2M13 2M00 2M01 2M02 2M03 PWR00 PWR01 PWR10 PWR11 PWR20 PWR21 PWR30 PWR31 48V OUT 48V IN 3 pin 3 pin 3 pin 8 pin DARD 1 DARD 0 Telephony Server 2 pin 6 pin 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 2 pin 6 pin 2 pin 6 pin 2 pin 6 pin 3 pin 9 pin 9 pin 7P 4 P 4 P 7P 7P 7P LT0 LT1 INT LT0 LT1 INT LT0 LT1 INT LT0 LT1 INT To Terminals BZ M23 To DAP in DARD 1 Circuit Car...

Page 2760: ...OUT 48 PWRA PWR IN PWR OUT OPTPW OPTPW DCSALM DCSALM 48V0 48V1 2M10 2M11 2M12 2M13 2M00 2M01 2M02 2M03 PWR00 PWR01 PWR10 PWR11 PWR20 PWR21 PWR30 PWR31 48V OUT 48V IN 3 pin 3 pin 3 pin 8 pin DARD 0 DCS1 2 pin 6 pin 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 9 pin 2 pin 6 pin 2 pin 6 pin 2 pin 6 pin 3 pin 9 pin 9 pin 7P 7P 7P 7P LT0 LT1 INT LT0 LT1 INT LT0 LT1 INT LT0 LT1 INT To Terminals BZ M23 Circuit Card LT cables AC po...

Page 2761: ... DEVICES Warnings when Installing the DCS The following are the warnings when installing the DCS system Don t look into the light emitting point of the SMF MMF connectors Make sure not to wind optical fiber cables to less than 3cm radius ...

Page 2762: ...ections and attachment of covers 8 4 2 Precautions on Installation This manual provides Static Caution indicator on pages where work involving static sensitive components Static Caution Indication OPTMUX PA CC109 and ROPTMUX PA CC111 are CLASS1 LASER PRODUCTs The figure below shows CLASS1 LASER indication CLASS1 Caution Indication ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ...

Page 2763: ...e countermeasure against static elec tricity The kit is available from NEC How to use the Service Kit Note 1 A ground wire should be connected to the frame which is not coated by an insulating material Connect ground wire to the frame Note 1 Place the circuit card on the conductive sheet conductive sheet wrist strap DCS ...

Page 2764: ...UX and DAI cards 4 Connection of Optical Fiber Cable STEP 1 Installation Procedure for Telephony Server side 1 Mounting of the DCS 2 Inserting of PWR and PWR Cable Connections 3 Cable Connection for PWR cards 4 Inserting of DAP 5 Cable Connection for DAP 6 Connection of Optical Fiber Cable to ROPTMUX 7 Connection of Power and Ground Cables 8 Attachment of Rear Cover STEP 2 Installation Procedure f...

Page 2765: ...n procedure at the Telephony Server side related to DCS system Refer to Installation Manual as to the procedure for installing the Telephony Server Setting of the Switch on OPTMUX card Perform the switch setting referring to 8 5Circuit Card Mounting of OPTMUX and DAI cards Mount the OPTMUX and DAI cards into the universal slots of PIR ...

Page 2766: ...fiber cable MMF Multi Mode Fi ber SMF Single Mode Fiber to RX TX connectors on the front of OPTMUX card Connection of Optical Fiber Cable to OPTMUX ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required OPTMUX RX TX Optical Fiber Cable SMF MMF TO DCS ROPTMUX PA CC111 PA CC112 OPTMUX PA CC109 SMF PA CC110 MMF PIR Telephony Server ...

Page 2767: ...r Cable to PIR FRAME Use PIR cable window when it runs to the other IMG Tie Optical Fiber Cable to FRONT BRACKET Use BASEU cable hole for Optical Fiber Cable outlet Note When leading Optical Fiber cable don t tie up the Optical Fiber cable with LT cables Note Wind the remaining Optical Fiber cable to circle 15 20cm diameter then tie it to PIR Frame ...

Page 2768: ...BER CABLE TYING MATERIAL CLEARANCE TIE MOUNT TIE BRACKET Note 1 Secure Optical Fiber Cable at TIE MOUNT remaining enough room for circuit card handling Note 2 Try to make gradually bends the Optical Fiber Cable Consult your cable supplier about the maxi mum curve Note 3 If Optical Fiber Cable can not be run through CABLE DUCT hold the Optical Fiber Cable by CODE KEEP ...

Page 2769: ... This Section explains the installation procedure of the DCS Mounting of the DCS Secure the 19 inch Rack firmly as to each rack s specification then mount the DCS SN1551 DARD A BZ M23 on the rack Mounting of the DCS DCS Note Any 19 inch Rack which fit for IEC standard can be used ...

Page 2770: ... cables Note that OPT PWR CA A is used for AC Power systems only Connecting Cables between DARDs ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required DARD 0 DARD 1 DCS ALM CA A OPT PWR CA A DCSALM BZ M23 OPTPWR OPTPWR DCSALM REAR SIDE BZ M23 Note Note Used for AC power systems only ...

Page 2771: ...tents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required Air Duct PWR0 PWR1 ROPT DCNT Cable Duct DCS Circuit Card Stopper FRONT VIEW 1 PWR0 PA PW55 B 1 PWR0 PA PW55 B 2 PWR1 PA PW54 B 2 PWR1 PA PW54 B 3 ROPTMUX PA CC111 CC112 3 ROPT PA CC111 CC112 For DC Power System 1 AC DC PA PW64 2 PWR PA PW55 B 3 ROPTMUX PA CC111 CC112 For AC Power System PWR0 PWR1 ROPT DCNT Cable Duct Terminal Air Duct FAN PWR0 P...

Page 2772: ...Receiving Terminal Noise Filter PA PWR54 PA PWR55 3P PWR CA T 3P PWR CA S DAR PWR CA A DAR PWR CA B 48VIN 48VIN BZ M23 FRONT VIEW NFIL 48V G 48V G DC Power Connection Connect the following cables FAN PWR Cable AC SW ON 80V ALM 48V ALM 80VOUT 1A 125V AC DC 48VOUT 2A 125V AC DC CONN 48VOUT FAN AC1 FAN AC2 ACIN PA PW64 AC DC PA PW55 B PWR CONN 48VIN 48VOUT 2A 125V AC DC 80VOUT 1A 125V AC DC 48VOUT 20...

Page 2773: ...Single on the BZ M23 card Connector Locations on BCS Backplane BZ M23 BATALM Note PWR31 PWR30 PWR20 PWR21 PWR11 PWR10 PWR00 PWR IN PWR IN PWR OUT PWR OUT 2M10 2M11 2M12 2M13 2M00 2M01 2M02 2M03 48V0 OPTPW 48V1 DCCON PWRA OUT 48 DCSALM PWR01 BZ M23 Not Used Not Used Not Used JP00 JP01 JP02 JP03 Note Set to S Single fixed ...

Page 2774: ... DAP card by tightening the screws Inserting DAP cards ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required PWR0 PWR1 ROPT DCNT STEP 1 Set the switch setting of DAP STEP 2 Insert the DAP card in the slot STEP 3 Fix the DAP card by tightening the screws SCREW DCS DAP card FRONT VIEW PWR INT LT1 LT0 30ELC SN4045 DAP B PWR INT LT1 LT0 30ELC SN4045 DAP B slot Antistatic Kit ...

Page 2775: ...WR LT to MDF SIDE VIEW UPPER CABLE DUCT LOWER CABLE DUCT DAP card DAP card LT cable FRONT VIEW Connect 2M AMI cables I1 2PSA IV SMM L2 from INT connector to BWB through the upper cable duct Connect DAP DC CA A cable from PWR connector to BWB through the upper duct 2M AMI cable DAP DC CA A Connect an LT cable to the LT connector on the DAP and run the LT cable through the lower duct up to the cutti...

Page 2776: ... OUT 2M10 2M11 2M12 2M13 2M00 2M01 2M02 2M03 48V0 OPTPW 48V1 DCCON PWRA OUT 48 PWR01 DARD 0 FRONT VIEW PA CC111 112 BZ M23 Upper Cable Duct Under Cable Duct I1 2PSA IV SMM L2 DAP DC CA A PWR0 PWR1 PWR INT LT1 LT0 PWR INT LT1 LT0 PWR INT LT1 LT0 PWR INT LT1 LT0 PWR 00 PWR 30 PWR 20 PWR 10 to DAP2 DARD 1 to DAP3 DARD 1 to DAP1 DARD 1 to DAP0 DARD1 Connect the following cables ...

Page 2777: ...les to ROPTMUX and lead the cable to OPTMUX through the cutting of front Connection of Optical Fiber Cable to ROPTMUX ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required RX Optical Fiber Cable SMF MMF TO PBX OPTMUX PA CC109 PA CC110 ROPTMUX PA CC111 SMF PA CC112 MMF DCS PBX PA PW55 B 20A U P PA PW55 B 20A U P PA PW55 B PA PW54 B TX DCS ROPTMUX ...

Page 2778: ... CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES How to Lead the Optical Fiber Cable through the Cutting for DC power system Cutting Optical Fiber Cable DC SOURCE POWER CABLE O U T I N 4 8 V 8 0 V C O M 4 8 V C O M DC Power ...

Page 2779: ...BASER POWER RECEIVING TERMINAL 48V COM 80V CV IV Red CV IV Black CV IV Green RECTIFIER Main Cable Note 2 E1 Note 3 48V G E FE A A Note 1 If the cover of CV cable to be used is black use the following clamp terminal covers so that they can easily be identified 48V Red Cover G Black Cover E Green Cover Note 2 If the leads E and FE are connected within the rectifier connect the cable to earth bar dir...

Page 2780: ... below Details on clamping the conductor is described in the figure on the next page Cable Connection to Power Receiving Terminal for DC power system PWR0 PWR1 ROPT DCNT DAP 0 DAP 1 OUT IN 48V COM 48V COM 80V FG CABLE OPTICAL FIBER CABLES DC SOURCE POWER CABLES Push insert the cable Pull fix the cable FRONT VIEW WITHOUT FRONT COVER DC power ...

Page 2781: ...h L L Take the following procedures to clamp the cable to the terminal a Open the spring inserting a driver 1 Push the driver into driver slot 2 When the tip reach the spring push the driver to the end tilting the grip to inside in the direction of A 3 The spring is opened and the driver is kept inside the terminal b Check the stripped length of conductor and fix the looseness bending ...

Page 2782: ...ex 2 Prepare the scale L L L Note The example of the way to check stripped length is as follows 1 Insert the stripped wire into the terminal then stop when the tip reach the end Be sure not to push the wire too hard 2 Holding the inserted conductor pull the driver then the spring is closed and the conductor is clamped 3 Confirm the conductor is connected firmly c Connect the Conductor ...

Page 2783: ...NAL RELATED DEVICES Attachment of Rear Cover Attach the rear cover referring the figure below Attachment of Rear Cover Rear Cover Rear Side screw Air Duct Cutting for cables Attach the rear cover fastening with the four screws ...

Page 2784: ...he DCS system Note Apply the anti static kit as protection against static electricity when handling circuit cards Circuit Cards for DCS system SYSTEM SYMBOL CIRCUIT CARD NAME REMARKS PBX OPTMUX PA CC109 PA CC110 DAI PA DAIA for analog DAP for digital DAP DCS ROPTMUX PA CC111 PA CC112 DAP SN4046 DAPM A SN4044 DAPK A analog digital PWR PA PW54 B PA PW55 B Used for DC power supplied system only AD DC...

Page 2785: ...X DARD 0 DARD 1 Max 2km MMF Max 15km SMF Optical Fiber Cable SMF MMF Optical Fiber Cable SMF MMF NEC Feature 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 OPER Help MIC 1 2 3 ABC DEF NEC Feature 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 OPER Help MIC 1 2 3 ABC DEF NEC Feature 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 OPER Help MIC 1 2 3 ABC DEF NEC Feature 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 OPER Help M...

Page 2786: ...ches and connectors on this card is shown below Face Layout of OPTMUX card PWR PWR MUX0 MUX1 01 00 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 universal slots universal slots PIM Note Mount PA CC109 110 card so that the leads may not appear from the same LT cables used by analog line trunk card OPT OPE MB SYNC CLKALM OBP LALM13 LALM12 LALM11 LALM10 LALM03 LALM02 LALM01 LALM00...

Page 2787: ...lure is detected OFF In Normal Operation LALM00 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 00 OFF In Normal Operation LALM01 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 01 OFF In Normal Operation LALM02 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 02 OFF In Normal Operation LALM03 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 03 OFF In Normal Operation LALM10 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 10 OFF In Normal Operation LALM11 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 11...

Page 2788: ...CH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING SW02 1 ON E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Line 00 OFF E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Cancel 2 ON E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Line 01 OFF E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Cancel 3 ON E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Line 02 OFF E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Cancel 4 ON E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Line 03 OFF E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Cancel 5 ON...

Page 2789: ...N OFF 4 ON TMPR Jitter Attenuator Fixed to ON 5 6 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 7 ON Number of E1 Line Circuits 4 8 circuits 4 circuits OFF 8 circuits 8 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING SW20 1 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 3 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 5 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 6 OFF Not Used Fixed to O...

Page 2790: ... 06 04 02 00 11 09 07 05 03 01 10 08 06 04 02 00 HW11 HW10 HW9 HW8 HW7 HW6 HW5 HW4 HW3 HW2 HW1 HW0 Group No Slot No LT Connector PIM Highway Block LT 1 3 5 7 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 49 50 24 25 RB00 TB00 Accommodated in LT 0 2 4 8 10 Connector RB01 TB01 Accommodated in RB02 TB02 RB...

Page 2791: ...modated in LT 0 2 4 8 10 Connector RB11 TB11 RB12 TB12 RB13 TB13 LT 1 3 5 7 11 Connector 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 23 19 15 22 18 14 21 17 13 20 16 12 23 19 15 22 18 14 21 17 13 20 16 12 11 09 07 05 03 01 10 08 06 04 02 00 11 09 07 05 03 01 10 08 06 04 02 00 HW11 HW10 HW9 HW8 HW7 HW6 HW5 HW4 HW3 HW2 HW1...

Page 2792: ...RA01 RB01 TA01 TB01 RA01 RB01 DAI TA02 TB02 RA02 RB02 TA02 TB02 RA02 RB02 DAI OPTMUX PA CC109 or PA CC110 ROPTMUX PA CC111 or PA CC112 TA03 TB03 RA03 RB03 TA03 TB03 RA03 RB03 DAI TA10 TB10 RA10 RB10 TA10 TB10 RA10 RB10 DAI TA11 TB11 RA11 RB11 TA11 TB11 RA11 RB11 DAI TA12 TB12 RA12 RB12 TA12 TB12 RA12 RB12 DAI TA13 TB13 RA13 RB13 TA13 TB13 RA13 RB13 DAI ...

Page 2793: ...ERFACE Communication Speed 2 048 Mbps Line Impedance 120 ohms The interface wires for this circuit card are accommodated by the LT terminal on the PIM backplane as sociated with the DAI card s mounting slot PBX DAP0 DAP1 DAP2 DAP3 DAP0 DAP1 DAP2 DAP3 OPTMUX ROPTMUX DARD 0 DARD 1 Optical Fiber Cable SMF MMF DAI PA DAIA PA CC109 SMF PA CC110 MMF PA CC111 SMF PA CC112 MMF SN4046 DAPM A Max 30 Analog ...

Page 2794: ...mps switches and connectors on this card is shown below Face Layout of PA DAIA PWR PWR MUX0 MUX1 01 00 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 universal slots universal slots PIM Note Indicates the mounting locations of this circuit card SW 0 CON2 LB OPE N OPE LINK CRC PCM FRM RMT MFRM BLUE PALM BL BL7 BL6 BL5 BL4 BL3 BL2 BL1 BL0 MB CON1 SW 2 SW 1 SW 3 ...

Page 2795: ...s been detected MFRM Red Indicates that a multi frame loss due to the data from the DAP has been detected RMT Red Indicates that the DAP has detected a frame loss and it has been alerted from the remote office as an remote office alarm BLUE Red This lamp lights upon detecting a blue signal from the DAP Indication of a state in which the DAP is under a local loop back testing PALM Red Power supply ...

Page 2796: ...A DAIA ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required CON2 3 2 1 LB OPE N OPE LINK CRC PCM FRM RMT BLUE PALM BL MB BL4 7 BL0 3 CON1 SW0 SW2 SW1 SW3 MB DOWN CON1 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 2 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 ON SW1 SW2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 6 ON SW3 Note 5 Note 7 1 2 3 4 ON SW0 Note 4 CON2 Note 3 MFRM ...

Page 2797: ...umber of the signal data link to 5 When setting channel number of the signal data link to 6 When setting channel number of the signal data link to 7 When setting channel number of the signal data link to 8 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated DRE card in DRU 30 A DRU 30 B DRU 30 S3 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...

Page 2798: ... data link to 14 When setting channel number of the signal data link to 15 When setting channel number of the signal data link to 16 When setting channel number of the signal data link to 17 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated DRE card in DRU 30 A DRU 30 B DRU 30 S3 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 ON 1 2 3 4...

Page 2799: ...signal data link to 21 When setting channel number of the signal data link to 22 When setting channel number of the signal data link to 23 This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated DRE card in DRU 30 A DRU 30 B DRU 30 S3 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7...

Page 2800: ...r of the signal data link to 29 When setting channel number of the signal data link to 30 When setting channel number of the signal data link to 31 Standard Setting This switch setting must agree with the switch setting on the associated DRE card in DRU 30 A DRU 30 B DRU 30 S3 ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 ON 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 2801: ... 15DLC Mode OFF Note 3 Switch setting for selection of stutter DT MW Lamp SW1 7 Stutter DT and MW Lamp ON MW Lamp OFF Note 4 Switch setting for bit rate of Dterm Data Port SW0 3 SW0 4 For DRU 30 S3 64 K Standard Setting OFF OFF 64 K INV ON OFF 56 K OFF ON 48 K ON ON For DRU 30 A DRU 30 B OFF OFF ATTENTION Contents Static Sensitive Handling Precautions Required ...

Page 2802: ... 7 circuit SW3 5 for No 8 14 circuit SW3 3 3 4 3 5 When simultaneous communications of voice and APA APR ON Analog Port Adapter are performed In this case the Data Adapter cannot be used When the Data Adapter is used OFF This switch setting is effective when using DRU 30 S3 by 15DLC mode When the type of the DRU is DRU 30 A DRU 30 B or when DRU 30 S3 is used by 30ELC mode set these switches to OFF...

Page 2803: ...en setting the DAI to Remote Loop Back Check ON ON Note 7 Switch setting specifying BL lamp indications SW3 7 SW3 8 The BL lamp indicates the status of No 0 through OFF OFF No 7 channel The BL lamp indicates the status of No 8 through ON OFF No 15 channel The BL lamp indicates the status of No 16 through OFF ON No 23 channel The BL lamp indicates the status of No 24 through ON ON No 29 channel ATT...

Page 2804: ...0 21 22 23 24 25 E RA POUTA TA LT 2 4 8 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 E RB POUTB TB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 E RA POUTA TA LT 3 5 9 11 Connector 01 03 05 07 09 11 15 19 23 01 03 05 07 09 11 15 19 23 00 02 04 06 08 10 13 17 21 00 02 04 06 08 10 13 17 21 14 18 22 14 18 22 12 16 20 12 16 20 00 01 02 03 ...

Page 2805: ... ROPTMUX DARD 0 DARD 1 Max 2km MMF Max 15km SMF Optical Fiber Cable SMF MMF NEC Feature 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 OPER Help MIC 1 2 3 ABC DEF NEC Feature 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 OPER Help MIC 1 2 3 ABC DEF NEC Feature 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 OPER Help MIC 1 2 3 ABC DEF NEC Feature 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 OPER Help MIC 1 2 3 ABC DEF NEC ...

Page 2806: ...nectors The face layout of lamps switches and connectors on this card is shown below Face Layout of ROPTMUX DAP 1 DAP 2 DAP 3 DAP 0 PWR 1 ROPTMUX PWR 0 CABLE DUCT CABLE DUCT PWR0 PWR1 ROPT LT0 LT1 LT0 LT1 LT0 LT1 LT0 LT1 OPT OPE MB SYNC CLKALM OBP PWR LALM13 LALM12 LALM11 LALM10 LALM03 LALM02 LALM01 LALM00 LB SW01 SW02 SCTL RX TX SW10 SW20 ...

Page 2807: ...Power OBP failure is detected OFF In Normal Operation LALM00 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 00 OFF In Normal Operation LALM01 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 01 OFF In Normal Operation LALM02 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 02 OFF In Normal Operation LALM03 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 03 OFF In Normal Operation LALM10 Red Alarm detected on E1 Line 10 OFF In Normal Operation LALM11 Red Alarm detected ...

Page 2808: ...rnal Loop Back Mode Line 00 OFF E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Cancel 2 ON E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Line 01 OFF E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Cancel 3 ON E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Line 02 OFF E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Cancel 4 ON E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Line 03 OFF E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Cancel 5 ON E1 Line External Loop Back Mode Line 10 OFF E1 Line External...

Page 2809: ...N OFF 4 ON TMPR Jitter Attenuator Fixed to ON 5 6 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 7 ON Number of E1 Line Circuits 4 8 circuits 4 circuits OFF 8 circuits 8 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING SW20 1 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 3 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 5 OFF Not Used Fixed to OFF 6 OFF Not Used Fixed to O...

Page 2810: ...single DAP card Location of SN4046 DAPM A DAP within the DCS System PBX DAP0 DAP1 DAP2 DAP3 DAP0 DAP1 DAP2 DAP3 OPTMUX ROPTMUX DARD 0 DARD 1 Optical Fiber Cable SMF MMF DAI PA DAIA PA CC109 SMF PA CC110 MMF PA CC111 SMF PA CC112 MMF SN4046 DAPM A Max 30 Analog PB TELs Analog DAP DAI 0 DAI 1 DAI 2 DAI 3 DAI 4 DAI 5 DAI 6 DAI 7 52M SDH 2M AMI Note PA DAIA Analog DAI card is mounted on PIM correspond...

Page 2811: ...H Number of Common Channels 1CH 64Kbps 1CH Multiplexing form Time Division Octet Multiplexing Input Output Impedance 120Ω Terminal Interface Number of Circuit 30 Circuits Connectable Terminal Analog PB TEL Impedance between DAP and Dterm Max 350Ω Number of Incoming Call 8 calls Terminal Connector Champ Connector Power Source 48V mA Power Consumption 65 56 23 76 N N the number of circuit DAP 1 DAP ...

Page 2812: ... DAPM A Lamp Indications NAME COLOR STATE REFERENCE LINK GREEN On line Signalling Link is established ALM RED Lights when alarm occurs PCM FRM MFRM RMT BLUE CRC LB RED Lights when Loop back is set SN4046 DAPM A PWR 30LC INT LT0 LT1 CHAMP 0 CHAMP 1 SW60 SW63 LINK SW61 SW62 ALM LB ...

Page 2813: ...n timer sequence 3 ON Designate CRC4 check sequence OFF Not designate CRC4 check sequence 4 ON Time Slot Designation on transmission line See the table below OFF 5 ON OFF 6 ON OFF 7 ON OFF 8 ON OFF Time Slot Designation SW60 Time Slot Number No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF TS1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF TS2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF TS3 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF TS4 ON OFF ON OFF OFF TS5 OFF ON ON OFF OFF TS...

Page 2814: ...F ON OFF TS11 OFF OFF ON ON OFF TS12 ON ON OFF ON OFF TS13 OFF ON ON ON OFF TS14 ON ON ON ON OFF TS15 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON TS16 ON OFF OFF OFF ON TS17 OFF ON OFF OFF ON TS18 ON ON OFF OFF ON TS19 OFF OFF ON OFF ON TS20 ON OFF ON OFF ON TS21 OFF ON ON OFF ON TS22 ON ON ON OFF ON TS23 OFF OFF OFF ON ON TS24 ON OFF OFF ON ON TS25 OFF ON OFF ON ON TS26 ON ON OFF ON ON TS27 OFF OFF ON ON ON TS28 Note 2 O...

Page 2815: ...ontrol Fixed to 1 no error 6 ON Loop Back Mode Designation See the table below OFF 7 ON OFF 8 OFF Fixed to OFF SW61 Loop Back Mode Designation No 6 No 7 OFF OFF Normal Operation No Loop Back ON OFF Remote Loop Back OFF ON Local Loop Back ON ON Remote Loop Back Check SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING SW62 1 OFF Fixed to all OFF 2 OFF 3 OFF 4 OFF SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SET...

Page 2816: ...19 20 21 22 23 24 25 PIN No RA TA A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 LEAD NAME To RCLAD No 0 CKT No 1 CKT No 2 CKT No 3 CKT No 4 CKT No 5 CKT No 6 CKT No 7 CKT No 8 CKT No 9 CKT No 10 CKT No 11 CKT No 12 CKT No 13 CKT No 14 CKT No 15 CKT No 16 CKT No 17 CKT No 18 CKT No 19 CKT No 20 CKT No 21 CKT PIN No 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 4...

Page 2817: ...t Output Impedance 120Ω Terminal Inter face Number of Circuit 30 Circuits Connectable Terminal Dterm Series E Dterm 75 Distance between the DAP and Dterm Max 200 meters 0 65φ cable Terminal Connector Champ Connector Power Source 48V mA NE C Featur e Featur e 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 OPER Help MIC MIC 1 2 3 ABC DEF NE C Featur e Featur e 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9 PQRS TUV WXYZ 0 OPER H...

Page 2818: ...Power Consumption 163 8 9 6 N N the number of circuit Specification of SN4044 DAPK A ITEM SPECIFICATIONS DAP 1 DAP 2 DAP 3 DAP 0 PWR 1 PWR 0 ROPTMUX CABLE DUCT CABLE DUCT 00 01 02 03 LT0 LT1 LT0 LT1 LT0 LT1 LT0 LT1 PWR0 PWR1 ROPT SN4044 DAPK A PWR 30ELC INT LT0 LT1 CHAMP 0 CHAMP 1 PWR OUT PWR IN PWR SW70 SW72 SW71 LB0 ALM0 LINK0 ...

Page 2819: ...M RMT BLUE CRC LB0 RED Loop back mode SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING SW70 1 ON Fixed to ON 2 ON Designate CRC synchronization detection timer sequence OFF Not designate CRC synchronization detection timer sequence 3 ON Designate CRC4 check sequence OFF Not designate CRC4 check sequence 4 ON Time Slot Designation on transmission line See the table below OFF 5 ON OFF 6 ON OFF...

Page 2820: ...6 ON ON ON OFF OFF TS7 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF TS8 Time Slot Designation SW70 Time Slot Number No 4 No 5 No 6 No 7 No 8 ON OFF OFF ON OFF TS9 OFF ON OFF ON OFF TS10 ON ON OFF ON OFF TS11 OFF OFF ON ON OFF TS12 ON ON OFF ON OFF TS13 OFF ON ON ON OFF TS14 ON ON ON ON OFF TS15 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON TS16 ON OFF OFF OFF ON TS17 OFF ON OFF OFF ON TS18 ON ON OFF OFF ON TS19 OFF OFF ON OFF ON TS20 ON OFF ON OFF O...

Page 2821: ...ON ON ON ON TS31 Standard SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING SW71 1 ON Fixed to ON 2 ON Fixed to ON 3 ON Fixed to ON 4 OFF Fixed to OFF 5 ON E bit Send Control CRC4 Check Result Automatic Send OFF E bit Send Control Fixed to 1 no error 6 ON Loop Back Mode Designation See the table below OFF 7 ON OFF 8 ON Fixed to ON SW71 Loop Back Mode Designation No 6 No 7 OFF OFF Normal Opera...

Page 2822: ... 3 335 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES OFF ON Local Loop Back ON ON Remote Loop Back Check SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING SW72 DOWN Fixed to DOWN SW71 Loop Back Mode Designation No 6 No 7 ...

Page 2823: ...8 A19 A20 A21 LEAD NAME To RCLAD No 0 CKT No 1 CKT No 2 CKT No 3 CKT No 4 CKT No 5 CKT No 6 CKT No 7 CKT No 8 CKT No 9 CKT No 10 CKT No 11 CKT No 12 CKT No 13 CKT No 14 CKT No 15 CKT No 16 CKT No 17 CKT No 18 CKT No 19 CKT No 20 CKT No 21 CKT PIN No 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 LEAD NAME 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 ...

Page 2824: ... also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit RGU whose output frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz 25Hz 75Vrms 90Vrms by key setting on this card In addition a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card Location of PA PW54 B DPWR card within the System 5V 12V 5V CR For LC HOW For LC 48 V For LC TRK 48 V NFB NFB REL REL PA PW54 B DPWR DC DC RGU HOW SUB PWR PA PW55 B PWR DC DC RGU HOW SUB ...

Page 2825: ...elow Face Layout of PA PW54 B DPWR card DAP0 DAP1 DAP2 DAP3 PWR0 PWR1 ROPT PA PW54 B CABLE DUCT CABLE DUCT FRONT VIEW This card is mounted to slot labeled PWR1 Note that the card is used for DC power type only 48V SW FUSE FUSE SIDE VIEW SW4 FRONT VIEW PA PW54 B PWR CONN 48VIN 48VOUT 2A 125V AC DC 80VOUT 1A 125V AC DC 48VOUT 20A AC250V DC125V U P MB RST 20A 80V ON 48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC...

Page 2826: ...output normally OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated DCALM Red Lights in the case of 5 V 12 V or 5 V outputs alarm RGUALM Red Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm HOWALM Red Lights in the case of howler alarm SWITCH NAME SWITCH No SETTING STANDARD SETTING DESCRIPTION 48V SW ON 48V input power is...

Page 2827: ...VOL 3 340 CHAPTER 2 TERMINAL RELATED DEVICES Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS 48 V RESET MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel SW4 20 Hz 90 Vrms ON 1 2 ...

Page 2828: ...rd is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit RGU whose output frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz 25Hz 75Vrms 90Vrms by key setting on this card In addition a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card Location of PA PW55 B PWR card within the System 5V 12V 5V CR For LC HOW For LC 48 V For LC TRK NFB NFB REL REL PA PW54 B DPWR RGU HOW SUB PWR PA PW55 B PWR RGU HOW SUB PWR 80 V For ...

Page 2829: ...DAP2 DAP3 PWR0 PWR1 ROPT PA PW55 B DC Power Type Mount this card to PWR0 DAP0 DAP1 DAP2 DAP3 PWR0 PWR1 ROPT PA PW55 B AC Power Type Mount this card to PWR1 CABLE DUCT CABLE DUCT CABLE DUCT CABLE DUCT FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW This card is mounted to slot labeled PWR0 or PWR1 depending on the power supply type ...

Page 2830: ...t of lamps switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown below Face Layout of PA PW55 B 48V SW FUSE FUSE SIDE VIEW SW4 FRONT VIEW PA PW55 B PWR CONN 48VIN 48VOUT 2A 125V AC DC 80VOUT 1A 125V AC DC 48VOUT 20A AC250V DC125V MB RST 20A 80V ON 48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC ALM RGU ALM HOW ALM U P ...

Page 2831: ...reen Remains lit while 48 V input power is being supplied RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress DC ON Green Remains lit while 5 V 12 V and 5 V are being output normally OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated DCALM Red Lights in the case of 5 V 12 V or 5 V outputs alarm RGUALM Red L...

Page 2832: ...lied OFF 48V input power is not supplied RESET PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card Normal setting MB ON Make busy of the circuit card OFF Normal setting SW4 1 ON Frequency of Ringing Signal 25 Hz OFF Frequency of Ringing Signal 20 Hz 2 ON Voltage of Ringing Signal 90 Vrms OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal 75 Vrms SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS 48 V RESET MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel SW4...

Page 2833: ...rcuit card converts AC input to DC for supplying operating power to the DCS system Note that the card is used for AC power systems only Block Diagram of PA PW64 PWR ALM 3P connector PSDN FUSE ALM FAN ALM G L N FE G 48V 48V 48VD 80V out 80V converter ALM CONT AC DC converter PF module ...

Page 2834: ...ation This card is mounted in the following slot shown below Mounting Location of PA PW64 DAP0 DAP1 DAP2 DAP3 PWR0 PWR1 ROPT PA PW64 CABLE DUCT CABLE DUCT FRONT VIEW Note AC DC PA PW64 is used for AC power system only This card is mounted to slot labeled PWR0 ...

Page 2835: ...s Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown below Face Layout of PA PW64 AC SW PA PW64 ON 80V ALM 48V ALM 80VOUT 1A 125V AC DC 48VOUT 2A 125V AC DC CONN 48VOUT FAN CN1 FAN CN2 ACIN U P SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW ...

Page 2836: ... The following a listing of AC DC card Switch Settings Switch Setting Sheet STATE LAMP ON 48V ALM 80V ALM PWR is OFF OFF Normal Operation ON 48V Low Voltage OFF ON 48V Over Voltage OFF ON 80V Low Voltage ON OFF 80V Over Voltage ON OFF ON SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING DESCRIPTION ACSW ON AC power is ON OFF AC power is OFF SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ACSW ...

Page 2837: ...ssign Analog PB TEL Dterm to the station Relationship between Each Circuit on the DAI and LENS GROUP LEVEL PA DAIA 30 LC 30 ELC MODE 15 DLC MODE ODD No GROUP 01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 7 VOICE 15 Not used DATA 7 Not used 6 14 6 DATA 14 5 13 VOICE 29 5 13 4 12 28 4 12 3 11 27 VOICE 7 Not used 2 10 26 6 VOICE 14 1 9 25 5 13 0 8 24 4 12 EVEN No GROUP 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 7 VOI...

Page 2838: ...0 6 TCL 4 30 PAD 7 54 GW 0 7 L T 1 31 OGRL 1 55 TCMA 0 8 RLP 2 32 ICRL 1 56 SMDR3 0 9 TQ 1 33 HD 0 57 HDT 0 10 SMDR 0 34 GUARD 1 58 CD 0 11 TD 0 35 WINK 0 59 CCH 0 12 DR 0 36 VAD 0 60 TC EC 0 13 AC 0 37 CLD 0 61 IRE 0 14 TNT 0 38 FA 0 62 SCR 0 15 LSG 4 39 BC 0 63 LYER1 0 16 SMDR2 0 40 TCM 0 64 NET 0 17 H M 0 41 TDMQ 0 65 INT 0 18 MC 0 42 TRSC 0 66 DC 0 19 ANI 0 43 BT 0 67 HKS 0 20 D 0 44 PRV 0 68 ...

Page 2839: ... HW1 HW2 HW3 HW5 HW6 HW7 HW8 HW9 HW10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 17 18 19 20 21 22 14 15 16 PWR 0 TSW MUX TSW MUX PWR 1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 15 16 19 20 23 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 17 21 18 19 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 22 23 TSW MUX TSW MUX 00 01 02 03 04 ...

Page 2840: ... all lighting green on the DAI OPTMUX card of the Telephony Server side DAI OPE CRC When PA DAIA analog is in use OPTMUX PA CC109 110 OPE lights green and LALM00 13 are OFF Note When checking the above lamps be sure to confirm that no alarm lamps are lit on these cards too Check the light level at both the ROPTMUX and OPTMUX sides by referring to 8 7 2 Light Level Check Lift the handset of Dterm A...

Page 2841: ...m cannot coexist in a system Normal Light Level MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN PBX and DCS POWER LEVEL SEND POWER LEVEL RECEIVE MMF Note 2 km 20 14 dBm 27 14 dBm SMF 15 km 15 8 dBm 27 8 dBm RX TX Telephony Server DCS0 DCS1 TX RX TX RX OPTMUX ROPTMUX Outbound Inbound PA CC109 PA CC110 PA CC111 PA CC112 Error at Check Point 1 Replace OPTMUX Error at Check Point 3 Replace ROPTMUX Error at Check Point 4 Che...

Page 2842: ... Manual System Messages Related to DCS 33 L OPTMUX Line Failure Indicates abnormality on cabling between OPTMUX and ROPTMUX 33 M OPTMUX Line Failure Restore Indicates the failure was recovered 33 N DCS Alarm Indicates a failure occurs at DCS 33 O DCS Alarm Restore Indicates the failure was recovered 33 P OPTMUX MBR Key turn ON Indicates MBR key was turned ON on OPTMUX card 33 Q OPTMUX MBR Key turn...

Page 2843: ... is output perform the procedure on the next page for fault diagnosis Note that a light level measurement tool is required for this procedure Light Level Check Points DCS Telephony Server Outbound Inbound OPTMUX ROPTMUX PA CC109 110 PA CC111 112 Send Receive Send Fiber Optic Cable Receive 1 4 2 3 ...

Page 2844: ...card is faulty Replace ROPT MUX card with a spare Check the light level at Point 2 The OPTMUX card is faulty Replace OPT MUX card with a spare No No Yes Yes Note 1 Note 1 The lamp lights red on the OPTMUX card only Check the light level at Point 3 The result is normal The result is normal The inbound fiber optic cable is faulty Check the inbound fiber cable The OPTMUX card is faulty Replace OPT MU...

Page 2845: ...d START END Set the MB key UP ON on the ROPTMUX card Set the MBR SW01 1 key ON on the ROPTMUX card Remove the fiber optic cable from the ROPTMUX card Extract the ROPTMUX card Confirm switch settings on the new ROPTMUX card referring to the extracted card Set the MB key UP ON on the new ROPTMUX card and then mount it to the DCS Connect the fiber optic cable to the new ROPTMUX card Set the MB key DO...

Page 2846: ...SW 60 61 SW 62 SW 63 b SN4044 DAPK A Digital DAP SW 70 71 SW 72 START Detach the DCS front panel Remove the PWR 2M AMI Champ cables Remove the screws Remove the DAP from DCS pulling the handle Insert the new DAP and fasten the screws Connect the cables Make sure the system operates normally Attach the front cover END Confirm the switch settings of DAP card Adjust the switch settings of new DAP car...

Page 2847: ...Required START END Replace the FAN Remove the FAN power cable Connect the FAN power cable Remove the two screws from the FAN mount Fasten the two screws onto the FAN mount Pull out the FAN mount Insert the FAN mount again FAN FRONT VIEW PA CC111 112 Upper Cable Duct PA PWR64 PA PWR55 48VOUT 48VIN AC DC FAN power Cable To FAN1 FAN PWR Cable FAN1 FAN2 To FAN CN1 To FAN CN2 FAN Mount FAN CN1 FAN CN2 ...

Page 2848: ...nnecting analog C O Line For more infor mation about COT circuit card refer to the Circuit Card Description When the analog C O Line is connected to an available port of the already installed COT card this step is not necessary STEP 2 Check the terminal locations on the MDF To identify the lead names and the lead s terminal locations refer to LT Connector Lead Accommodation of the circuit card in ...

Page 2849: ...ircuit card into a proper slot of PIR for connecting analog TIE Line For more informa tion about TLT circuit card refer to the Circuit Card Manual When the analog Tie Line is connected to an available port of the already installed TLT card this step is not necessary STEP 2 Check the terminal locations on the MDF To identify the lead names and the lead s terminal locations refer to LT Connector Lea...

Page 2850: ... M A4 B4 A B E4 E M4 M A7 B7 A B E7 E M7 M 2 Wire Carrier Equipment 2 Wire Carrier Equipment 2 Wire Carrier Equipment 2 Wire Carrier Equipment 2400 ODT CABLE This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA 8TLTR is used as a loop dialing or DID trunk This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA 8TLTR is used as a 2 wire E M trunk In this instance E M leads for Channels 4 7 appea...

Page 2851: ...pment 4 Wire Carrier Equipment 4 Wire Carrier Equipment 2400 ODT CABLE ODT connector E0 E M0 M A4 TA4 B4 TB4 TA TB RA4 RA RB4 RB E4 E M4 M A7 TA7 B7 TB7 TA TB RA7 RA RB7 RB E7 E M7 M This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA 8TLTR is used as a 4 wire E M trunk In this instance RA RB and E M leads for Channels 4 7 appear from the ODT connector equipped on the front edge of this card M...

Page 2852: ...ore informa tion about DTI circuit card refer to the Circuit Card Manual STEP 2 Check the terminal locations on the MDF To identify the lead names and the lead s terminal locations refer to LT Connector Lead Accommodation of the circuit card in the Circuit Card Manual STEP 3 Provide the necessary cross connection on the MDF referring to the following figure Perform the cross connections for digita...

Page 2853: ... 30 31 32 33 LEAD NAME DCSB0 DIU0B0 DIU1B0 DIU2B0 DIU3B0 SYN0B0 SYN1B0 LEAD NAME DCSA0 DIU0A0 DIU1A0 DIU2A0 DIU3A0 SYN0A0 SYN1A0 PIN No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PIN No 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 LEAD NAME DCSB0 DIU0B0 DIU1B0 DIU2B0 DIU3B0 SYN0B0 SYN1B0 LEAD NAME DCSA0 DIU0A0 DIU1A0 DIU2A0 DIU3A0 SYN0A0 SYN1A0 PIN No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 DCSB1 DIU0B1...

Page 2854: ...le DCSB1 DCSA1 TSW BASEU maximum 400 meters 1320 feet 24AWG External High Stability Oscillator 0 CLK External High Stability Oscillator 1 CLK Cable Connection Diagram Provide the following connections at the MDF The diagram shows an example of a system with the TSW circuit cards in a dual configuration Note This diagram shows the connections for a system with dual TSW circuit cards PLO the Telehny...

Page 2855: ...DIU3B1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 for PLO 0 for PLO 1 Installation Cable Installation Cable Digital Interface 24AWG Note 1 A PLO has a maximum of four inputs Use the DIU0xx leads for the first clock distribution routes Use the DIU3xx leads for the fourth The first input has the highest priority Note 2 This connection is required for a dual TSW system Cable Connection Diagram Provide the following connections...

Page 2856: ...er face one of the following configuration is available 1 Using Common Channel Trunk CCT 2 Using Digital Trunk Interface DTI and Common Channel Handler CCH 3 Using Analog Trunk and Common Channel Handler CCH with Modem Configuring CCIS Interface CCH DTI CCT CCH MODEM analog CCIS line PLO Telephony Server MDF IDF Front Cable DSU digital CCIS line digital CCIS line 1 2 3 ...

Page 2857: ...f PIR for connecting digital CCIS line For more informa tion about DTI circuit card refer to the Circuit Card Manual STEP 2 Install a CCH circuit card into a proper slot of PIR for dropping inserting CCIS control signal from to the DTI circuit card STEP 3 Connect the two cards by using the flat cable on the front edge of the cards STEP 4 Check the terminal locations on the MDF To identify the lead...

Page 2858: ...ations on the MDF To identify the lead names and the lead s terminal locations refer to LT Connector Lead Accommodation of the circuit card in the Circuit Card Manual STEP 5 Provide the necessary cross connection on the MDF to connect the CCH circuit card and the modem referring to the following figure DTI TA TB TA TB Telephony Server MDF RA RA RB RB POUTA POUTB To PLO TRK DCH CCH TRK DCH CCH TRK ...

Page 2859: ...RK INTERFACE Analog CCIS by CCH via MODEM RD SG RD SG Telephony Server MDF ER ER RT RT ST2 RS MODEM ST2 RS SD SD 15 m 50 feet cable limit Available MODEM synchronous 2400 4800 9600 bps 4 wire Full Duplex CCH Installation Cable ...

Page 2860: ...ard and Cable Connections For configuring ISDN Inter face one of the following configuration is available 1 Using PRT 2 Using Digital Trunk Interface DTI and Common Channel Handler DCH Configuring ISDN Interface DTI PRT DCH PLO Telephony Server MDF IDF Front Cable DSU 1 2 ISDN Network receiving clock signal from Network ...

Page 2861: ...per slot of PIR for connecting ISDN line For more information about DTI circuit card refer to the Circuit Card Manual STEP 2 Install a DCH circuit card into a proper slot of PIR for dropping inserting ISDN control signal from to the DTI circuit card STEP 3 Connect the two cards by using the flat cable on the front edge of the cards STEP 4 Check the terminal locations on the MDF To identify the lea...

Page 2862: ...VOL 3 375 CHAPTER 3 NETWORK INTERFACE ISDN by DTI and CCH DTI TA TB TA TB Telephony Server MDF RA RA RB RB POUTA POUTB To PLO DCH PCM Carrier Equipment TRK DCH CCH CN2 DTI DCH FRONT VIEW OUT IN ...

Page 2863: ...MDF For this function PA M69 A circuit card is required When using PFT function of IP devices including MC MG COT with PFT this circuit card is not required Power Failure Transfer Analog Telephone COT C O Line Telephony Server LC PFT PSTN PFT is activated when a failure occurs in the system Then a dedicated analog station is directly connected to the C O line ...

Page 2864: ...ting the cross con nected PFT circuit card See the figure below PFT Mounting Locations STEP 2 Check the terminal locations on the MDF To identify the lead names and the lead s terminal locations refer to LT Connector Lead Accommodation of the circuit card in the Circuit Card Manual STEP 3 Provide the necessary cross connection on the MDF referring to the following figure Mount the PFT circuit card...

Page 2865: ...VOL 3 378 CHAPTER 3 NETWORK INTERFACE PFT Cross Connections 1 2 Telephony Server MDF PFT LC COT AO00 BO00 A B A B A B A B AI00 BI00 RO00 TO00 RI00 TI00 C O Line Analog Station Front Connector NCU0 NCU1 ...

Page 2866: ...ACE PFT Cross Connections 2 2 Telephony Server MDF PFT ELC COT AI00 AI01 AO00 AO01 A B A B A00 Digital B00 Digital R Analog T Analog A B BO00 BO01 TO00 TO01 TI00 TI01 C O Line Desktop Terminal with PFT Adapter Front Connector NCU0 NCU1 ...

Page 2867: ...TION SETUP CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP 1 DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm 2 AutoConfig Feature of DtermIP 3 Desk Console 4 DtermIP SIP 5 Online Monitoring Feature of DtermIP SIP 6 DT700 Series 7 Firmware Auto Update Tool for DT700 Series ...

Page 2868: ...er to Registration Destination of IP Devices Stations in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual DtermIP and IP Enabled Dterm Configuration Data Assignment User Menu Set DHCP to Enable DRS IP Address Primary BackUp DRS Address Set this data when required User Menu Set DHCP to Enable User Menu Set DHCP to Disable DRS IP Address Primary BackUp DRS Address Set the Terminal IP Address Set Default Gateway ...

Page 2869: ...ter the data assignment connect the terminal to the network that has DHCP server and FTP TFTP server DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm Data Assignment Preparation Note 1 For detailed information about PHs including SP PHD refer to Vol 1 Chapter 2 2 IP Related Basic Programming in this manual LAN DHCP server FTP TFTP server DtermIP connect 0 7 9 8 6 5 2 4 3 1 Mes sage Dire ctory Spea ker Answ er Red ial Con...

Page 2870: ...Mode 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 Soft Reset 7 Factory Value 8 Type of Service 9 Language 0 Next Page P1 P2 1 Ping 2 Music Select 3 AutoConfig Mode 4 DTMF 5 RTP Alarm 0 Next Page P2 P1 User Menu User Menu Administrator Menu Administrator Menu Page 1 Two lines of menu items can be displayed at a time Use Up or Down key to scroll the item Up Down Up Down Up Down Exit Administrato...

Page 2871: ...ering IP address of Primary DRS Note 1 0 0 0 0 3 BackUp DRS Address Displaying or entering IP address of Backup DRS Note 1 1 DRS Address 2nd Displaying or entering IP address of the second DRS Note 1 0 0 0 0 2 DRS Address 3rd Displaying or entering IP address of the third DRS Note 1 0 0 0 0 3 DRS Address 4th Displaying or entering IP address of the fourth DRS Note 1 0 0 0 0 4 IP Address Displaying...

Page 2872: ...eed Autonego 1 Autonego Auto Negotiation 2 100M Full Fixed to 100 Mbps and Full Duplex mode 3 100M Half Fixed to 100 Mbps and Half Duplex mode 4 10M Full Fixed to 10 Mbps and Full Duplex mode 5 10M Half Fixed to 10 Mbps and Half Duplex mode 2 VLAN Mode PC Enable or disable Port VLAN for PC port Disable 1 Disable Disable PC Port VLAN 2 Enable Enable PC Port VLAN 3 VLAN ID PC Setting PC Port VLAN ID...

Page 2873: ... receiving message from DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm DRS Self Port DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm port for sending receiving message to from DRS IP Address IP address of the terminal Default Gateway IP address of Default Gateway Subnet Mask Subnet Mask Download Address IP address of TFTP FTP server used for downloading Dter mIP IP Enabled Dterm software Area ID Area Country Setting Language Language for Tim...

Page 2874: ...sed not used VLAN ID Displaying or entering the Virtual LAN Identifier 2 4094 VLAN Priority Displaying or entering the user priority to voice packet 0 7 DNS Address IP address of DNS server DRS Name Host name of DRS DNS Access Domain Domain name of DNS server PROTIMS Self Port PHD Send Receive port RTP Self Port DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm port for sending receiving RTP signal Voice Ctrl Self Port Dt...

Page 2875: ...l 2 Download Address Displaying or entering FTP TFTP server address 0 0 0 0 3 Area ID Displaying or setting the area country using DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm Note 1 Automatic 0 Automatic Automated Setting 1 Japan Japan 2 America North America 3 Australia Australia 4 Others Other Countries 5 HongKong Hong Kong 6 Malaysia Malaysian 7 Singapore Singapore 8 England England 9 Mexico Mexico 10 Taiwan Taiw...

Page 2876: ...ameter Description Default 5 Download Downloading the program 1 Program Executing the Program firmware downloading ramhp2pw tgz 2 Config Executing the Configuration data downloading config ini 3 Input File Name Executing the Program firmware downloading by specifying the file name No Data 4 Boot Program Boot and F W Program download romw tgz 5 Music Executing the Music On Hold downloading music tg...

Page 2877: ...arameters on Administrator Menu Page 2 For Dterm Series i 9 Language Note 3 Setting Language for Time Display Automatic Automatic Automatic according to the System Data setting 0 English Japan English 1 Portuguese Portuguese 2 Spanish Spanish 3 French French 4 German German 5 Italian Italian 6 Dutch Dutch 7 Norwegian Norwegian 8 Danish Danish 9 Swedish Swedish 0 Next Page P1 P2 Go to Administrator...

Page 2878: ...able or disable the AutoConfig Mode Enable 1 Disable Disable the AutoConfig Mode 2 Enable Enable the AutoConfig Mode 5 DTMF Switch DTMFAlarm ON and OFF Automatic 0 Automatic Follow the setting on the System If no setting is made in the Sys tem DTMF Alarm is automatically set to OFF 1 ON Follow the setting on the terminal ON 2 OFF Follow the setting on the terminal OFF 6 RTP Alarm Switch DTMF RTP A...

Page 2879: ...ata Downloaded Music On Hold 2 Default Data Default Music On Hold 3 AutoConfig Mode Enable or disable the AutoConfig Mode Enable 1 Disable Disable the AutoConfig Mode 2 Enable Enable the AutoConfig Mode 4 DTMF Switch DTMFAlarm ON and OFF Automatic 0 Automatic Follow the setting on the System If no setting is made in the Sys tem DTMF Alarm is automatically set to OFF 1 ON Follow the setting on the ...

Page 2880: ...HCP server 2 When trying to set up a DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm with another DRS after having connected to a former DRS be sure to perform Software Reset from Config Menu Administrator Menu 6 Soft Reset DHCP Connecting 1 Observe the following while DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm is downloading data The display of DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm indicates Downloading while downloading data If one of the following...

Page 2881: ... the desired idle port will be used 3 When changing port numbers of DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm be sure to assign a unique port number for each port If a duplicate port number is assigned the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm cannot start up After the port number change is completed an error message Port Number Duplicate will be issued 4 A total of 64 ports are used for the RTP Self Port For example when 3462...

Page 2882: ...to LAN 10BASE T 100BASE TX Category Category 3 or higher Category Category 5 or higher Maximum Length 100 m Maximum Length 100 m Cable Type Straight through Cable Type Straight through UTP UTP The duplex modes on the hub equipped on the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm and the destination hub must be set to auto negotiation The use of full duplex or half duplex on the devices may cause sound loss Note 1 T...

Page 2883: ... The related messages are not dis played on the terminal Duplicate IP address is assigned to multiple DtermIP IP Enabled Dterms on the same network If key operations on the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm have no effect terminal reset is required In this case the LAN communication is also likely to be lost Check the following items and connect the terminal to the LAN again LAN cable is securely connected...

Page 2884: ...System Caution Observe the following while performing this procedure Do Not Turn OFF the power of the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm the Telephony Server DHCP server Do Not Unplug or Plug the LAN cable connecting to the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm the Telephony Server DHCP Do Not Turn OFF the power of the HUB connecting to the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm Telephony Server DHCP STEP 1 Turn ON the Dterm IP IP En...

Page 2885: ...nu 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value Up Down Exit Administrator Menu 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value Up Down Exit Administrator Menu Factory Value Set Cancel OK STEP 3 Open the Administrator Menu by pressing Hold 0 on the User Menu The following Administrator Menu is displayed 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 SoftReset 7 Factory V...

Page 2886: ...ser Menu List User Menu Up Down STEP 7 Select DHCP Mode by pressing 1 key on the User Menu STEP 9 Press Save key to save the data change When the data saving ends successfully configuration data assignment is completed User Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Note By pressing Cancel key at this time all assigned data is discarded returning to the previous setting END Up Down Cancel Save Up Down...

Page 2887: ...layed on the terminal Note If any data has been assigned to the terminal the displayed message may differ from the above A 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save User Menu DRS 1st Connecting DHCP Connecting or Ex STEP 4 Select 7 Factory Value by pressing 7 key on the Administrator Menu 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value Up Down Exit Administrator Menu STEP 3 Open the Administrator Menu by ...

Page 2888: ...isable 2 Enable 3 Enable w Spare IP 4 Enable Auto BackUp Up Down 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary User Menu Up Down Cancel Save On the Administrator Menu press Exit key to return to the User Menu 3 Enable w Spare IP 4 Enable Auto BackUp Cancel OK Up Down Up Down Cancel Save Check to see that 4 Enable Auto BackUp is flashing and press OK key to return to the User Menu STEP 8 Press Save key to save...

Page 2889: ...ve A 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save User Menu DRS 1st Connecting DHCP Connecting or Ex STEP 4 Select 7 Factory Value by pressing 7 key on the Administrator Menu 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value Up Down Exit Administrator Menu STEP 3 Open the Administrator Menu by pressing Hold 0 on the User Menu The following Administrator Menu is displayed 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Do...

Page 2890: ...IP by pressing 3 key 1 Disable 2 Enable 3 Enable w Spare IP 4 Enable Auto BackUp Up Down 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary User Menu Up Down Cancel Save On the Administrator Menu press Exit key to return to the User Menu 2 Enable 3 Enable w Spare IP Cancel OK Up Down Up Down Cancel Save STEP 8 Enter an alternative IP address Then press OK key to return to the previous display Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX F...

Page 2891: ...TEP 11 Enter the IP address of the DRS connected to the LAN User Menu Note The same address is to be set to the DHCP server When the IP address is entered press OK key and return to the User Menu OK key entry while the data input is incomplete will be ignored To stop data entry press Cancel key User Menu STEP 12 Select 3 BackUp DRS Address by pressing 3 key 2 DRS Address Primary 3 BackUp DRS Addre...

Page 2892: ...13 Select a desired Redundancy Configuration System and assign its IP address STEP 14 Press the OK Key to return to the Backup DRS Selection Menu Backup DRS Selection Menu 1 DRS Address 2nd 2 DRS Address 3rd UP Down Exit STEP 15 After all the necessary IP addresses are set press the Exit Key to return to the User Menu STEP 17 Select 5 Default Gateway on the User Menu by pressing 5 when a default g...

Page 2893: ... D STEP 18 Enter the IP Address of the Default Gateway when a default gateway is used STEP 19 Select 6 Subnet Mask on the User Menu by pressing 6 when a subnet mask is used STEP 20 Enter the subnet mask data when a subnet mask is used User Menu 6 Subnet Mask 7 DNS Up Down Cancel Save Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX For BK Cancel OK Note 0 0 0 0 or 255 255 255 255 cannot be entered STEP 21 Press Save key to sa...

Page 2894: ...erm the Telephony Server DHCP server Do Not Unplug or Plug the LAN cable connecting to the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm the Telephony Server DHCP Do Not Turn OFF the power of the HUB connecting to the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm the Telephony Server DHCP STEP 1 Turn ON the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm STEP 2 While indicating Connecting or DRS 1st Connecting on the display press Hold Transfer on the terminal ...

Page 2895: ...ue Set Cancel OK STEP 4 Select 7 Factory Value by pressing 7 key on the Administrator Menu 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value Up Down Exit Administrator Menu STEP 3 Open the Administrator Menu by pressing Hold 0 on the User Menu The following Administrator Menu is displayed 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 SoftReset 7 Factory V...

Page 2896: ...hat 2 Enable is flashing and press OK key 1 Disable 2 Enable By pressing the OK key the display automatically returns to the User Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary 3 BackUp DRS Address 4 IP Address 5 Default Gateway 6 Subnet Mask 7 DNS 8 Ether Port Settings 9 System Information Up Down Cancel Save User Menu List User Menu Up Down Cancel Up Down Cancel Save Up...

Page 2897: ...uration System and assign its IP address STEP 13 Press the OK Key to return to the Backup DRS Selection Menu 1 DRS Address 2nd 2 DRS Address 3rd UP Down Exit 1 DRS Address 2nd 2 DRS Address 3rd UP Down Exit Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX For BK Cancel OK IP addresses of a maximum of three Redundancy Configuration Systems can be set here STEP 14 After all the necessary IP addresses are set press the Exit Key ...

Page 2898: ...ress Primary Up Down Cancel Save User Menu STEP 15 Press Save key to save the data change After saving the data the configuration data assignment is complete D END When STEP 15 is performed the IP Enabled Dterm starts setup process with the DRS on the same network If data assignment is not proper an error message is displayed In this case correct the data assignment ...

Page 2899: ...d on the terminal Note If any data has been assigned to the terminal the displayed message may differ from the above A 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save User Menu DRS 1st Connecting DHCP Connecting or Ex STEP 4 Select 7 Factory Value by pressing 7 key on the Administrator Menu 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value Up Down Exit Administrator Menu STEP 3 Open the Administrator Menu by pres...

Page 2900: ...3 Enable w Spare IP 4 Enable Auto BackUp 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary 1 Disable 2 Enable 3 Enable w Spare IP 4 Enable Auto BackUp User Menu Up Down Cancel Up Down Cancel Save OK On the Administrator Menu press Exit key to return to the User Menu Up Down Up Down Cancel Save Check to see that 4 Enable Auto BackUp is flashing and press OK key to return to the User Menu STEP 8 Select 2 DRS Addres...

Page 2901: ...elect 3 BackUp DRS Address by pressing 3 key 2 DRS Address Primary 3 BackUp DRS Address UP Down Cancel Save 1 DRS Address 2nd 2 DRS Address 3rd 3 DRS Address 4th Up Down Backup DRS Menu List Backup DRS Selection Menu 1 DRS Address 2nd 2 DRS Address 3rd UP Down Exit Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX For BK Cancel OK IP addresses of a maximum of three Redundancy Configuration Systems can be set here STEP 11 Selec...

Page 2902: ... addresses are set press the Exit Key to return to the User Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save User Menu STEP 14 Press Save key to save the data change After saving the data the configuration data assignment is complete Note By pressing Cancel Key at this time all assigned data is discarded returning to the previous setting END ...

Page 2903: ...assigned to the terminal the displayed message may differ from the above A 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save User Menu DRS 1st Connecting DHCP Connecting or Ex STEP 4 Select 7 Factory Value by pressing 7 key on the Administrator Menu 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value Up Down Exit Administrator Menu STEP 3 Open the Administrator Menu by pressing Hold 0 on the User Menu The following A...

Page 2904: ...le 3 Enable w Spare IP 4 Enable Auto BackUp Up Down 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary User Menu Up Down Cancel Save On the Administrator Menu press Exit key to return to the User Menu 2 Enable 3 Enable w Spare IP Cancel OK Up Down Up Down Cancel Save STEP 8 Enter an alternative IP address Then press OK key to return to the previous display Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX For BK Cancel OK OK key entry while th...

Page 2905: ...ng 2 key on the User Menu STEP 11 Enter the IP address of the DRS connected to the LAN User Menu When the IP address is entered press OK key and return to the User Menu OK key entry while the data input is incomplete will be ignored To stop data entry press Cancel key User Menu STEP 12 Select 3 BackUp DRS Address by pressing 3 key 2 DRS Address Primary 3 BackUp DRS Address Up Down Cancel Save 2 DR...

Page 2906: ...ems can be set here C D STEP 13 Select a desired Redundancy Configuration System and assign its IP address STEP 14 Press OK key to return to the Backup DRS Selection Menu Backup DRS Selection Menu 1 DRS Address 2nd 2 DRS Address 3rd UP Down Exit STEP 15 After all the necessary IP addresses are set press the Exit Key to return to the User Menu STEP 17 Select 5 Default Gateway on the User Menu by pr...

Page 2907: ... D STEP 18 Enter the IP Address of the Default Gateway when a default gateway is used STEP 19 Select 6 Subnet Mask on the User Menu by pressing 6 when a subnet mask is used STEP 20 Enter the subnet mask data when a subnet mask is used User Menu 6 Subnet Mask 7 DNS Up Down Cancel Save Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX For BK Cancel OK Note 0 0 0 0 or 255 255 255 255 cannot be entered STEP 21 Press Save key to sa...

Page 2908: ...ndicating DHCP Connecting or DRS 1st Connecting on the display press Hold Transfer on the terminal and open the User Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save Note If any data has been assigned to the terminal the displayed message may differ from the above User Menu Two items are displayed on the terminal at a time DRS 1st Connecting DHCP Connecting STEP 3 Open the Administrator ...

Page 2909: ... OK key the display automatically returns to the Administrator Menu Factory Value Set Cancel OK 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary 3 Backup DRS Address 4 IP Address 5 Default Gateway 6 Subnet Mask 7 DNS 8 Ether Port Settings 9 System Information Up Down Cancel Save User Menu List User Menu Up Down STEP 4 Select Factory Value by pressing 7 key on the Administrator M...

Page 2910: ...K Cancel OK 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary 3 BackUp DRS Address 4 IP Address 5 Default Gateway 6 Subnet Mask 7 DNS 8 Ether Port Settings 9 System Information Up Down Cancel Save Up Down User Menu List User Menu STEP 8 Select 1 DHCP Disable on the terminal and press the OK key 1 Disable 2 Enable Cancel OK When an item is selected the selected item changes to blink indication Press OK key to conf...

Page 2911: ...stem and assign its IP address STEP 13 Press the OK Key to return to the Backup DRS Selection Menu 1 DRS Address 2nd 2 DRS Address 3rd UP Down Exit 1 DRS Address 2nd 2 DRS Address 3rd UP Down Exit Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX For BK Cancel OK IP addresses of a maximum of three Redundancy Configuration Systems can be set here STEP 14 After all the necessary IP addresses are set press the Exit Key to return ...

Page 2912: ...t is incomplete will be ignored To stop data entry press Cancel key When the IP address is entered press OK key to confirm your entry By pressing OK key the display returns to the User Menu OK key entry while the data input is incomplete will be ignored To stop data entry press Cancel key 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary 3 BackUp DRS Address 4 IP Address 5 Default Gateway 6 Subnet Mask 7 DNS 8 Et...

Page 2913: ...configuration data assignment is complete Note By pressing Cancel key at this time all assigned data is discarded returning to the previous setting 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save User Menu Note At this time if the IP addresses of the terminal and the Default Gateway belong to different segments the user cannot exist from the Configuration Mode END When the IP address is ente...

Page 2914: ... When the terminal power is ON it requests the user to enter Login Name and Password By entering the login code and the password the termi nal becomes operational 7 35 AM MON 22 MAR 2004 MIC DND Login Passwd Cancel Set OK MAC Authentication Login Mode BK Caution Observe the following while performing this procedure Do Not Turn OFF the power of the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm the Telephony Server DHCP...

Page 2915: ...ey Note 1 STEP 2 Enter the password and press OK key Note 2 STEP 3 After a while the current time is appeared on the display indicating that the terminal is in service Login Passwd Note The entered password is indicated in a string of on the display 7 35 AM MON 27 AUG 2000 MIC DND START END Note 2 When logging to DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm for the first time or when the password is not assigned on t...

Page 2916: ...ssigned to a function key and or a soft key by data setting at Telephony Server Ask the maintenance personnel for the location of the Logout button The Logout button is moved to the leftmost soft key for 5 seconds END STEP 3 After Logout is complete the display changes as follows Note 1 This location is an example Logout button Note 1 7 35 AM MON 27 AUG 2000 MIC DND L OUT 7 35 AM MON 27 AUG 2000 L...

Page 2917: ...gain using different Station number STEP 1 Press Yes button The overridden DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm becomes inoperative STEP 2 Start up the overridden terminal again and log in by using different Station Number STEP 1 Press No button Override Yes No Choice 1 Use the Station number for the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm with Override indication Choice 2 Start up the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm with Override...

Page 2918: ...an be assigned from the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm only Note When starting up Login Mode on IP terminal for the first time Station Number is used for a password If an arbitrary number is set as Login Code by the ALGCL ALGCN command enter registered Login Code instead of Station Number for a password Note The password assigned here is not for the line to be used but for the terminal itself ...

Page 2919: ...ess code receive SPDT The LCD indicates NEW PASSWORD prompt 10 31 AM FRI 30 MAR 2001 MIC DND Enter your new password receive DT Replace the handset REPEAT prompt appears Enter your new password again to confirm your entry receive SST SET indication appears when your new password has been set new password new password REPEAT prompt Lift the handset and dial IP Enabled Dterm Password Entry access co...

Page 2920: ...ND Enter your old password receive SPDT Replace the handset NEW PASSWORD prompt appears Enter your new password receive DT REPEAT 10 31 AM FRI 30 MAR 2001 MIC DND REPEAT prompt appears Enter your new password again to confirm your entry receive SST REPEAT prompt Lift the handset and dial IP Enabled Dterm Password Entry access code receive SPDT The LCD indicaters OLD PASSWORD prompt SET indication ...

Page 2921: ...Password Deletion Passwords stored in System memory can be deleted from PCPro only Use the RDPD Remove of DtermIP Pass word command Select either STN TN and STN or TELN UGN and TELN for specifying terminal on which the password to be removed ...

Page 2922: ...cting or DRS 4th Connect ing will be displayed instead of DRS 1st Connecting STEP 2 Select 8 Ether Port Settings by pressing 8 key STEP 3 The following Port Setting Menu is displayed Select 1 LAN Port Settings by pressing 1 key LAN Port Setting STEP 4 When 1 LAN Port Settings is selected in STEP 3 the display changes as follows LAN Port Settings includes the following four setting items The data s...

Page 2923: ...ps and Half Duplex mode b 2 VLAN Mode LAN The display changes as follows when 2 VLAN Mode LAN is selected Determine whether VLAN is enabled or disabled by pressing each digit key and then press OK key 1 Disable VLAN is disabled Default 2 Enable VLAN is enabled c 3 VLAN ID LAN The display changes as follows when 3 VLAN ID LAN is selected Set VLAN ID in the range from 0 to 4094 The default value is ...

Page 2924: ...ack to the display of STEP 3 STEP 6 Select 2 PC Port Settings by pressing 2 key PC Port Setting STEP 7 When 2 PC Port Settings is selected in STEP 6 the display changes as follows PC Port Settings includes the following five setting items The data set here is saved when pressing Save key on the User Menu Priority 0 7 OK Cancel BK X 2 VLAN Mode LAN Up Down Exit 1 Speed Duplex LAN 1 LAN Port Setting...

Page 2925: ... Half Duplex mode b 2 VLAN Mode PC The display changes as follows when 2 VLAN Mode PC is selected Determine whether VLAN is enabled or disabled by pressing each digit key and then press OK key 1 Disable PC Port VLAN is disabled Default 2 Enable PC Port VLAN is enabled c 3 VLAN ID PC The display changes as follows when 3 VLAN ID PC is selected Set VLAN ID in the range from 0 to 4094 The default val...

Page 2926: ...ssing each digit key and then press OK key 0 Automatic According to the direction from the System If there is no direction PC port is enabled 1 ON According to the setting on terminal PC port is enabled 2 OFF According to the setting on terminal PC port is disabled STEP 8 All the necessary data is set go back to the User Menu and then press Save key Priority 0 7 OK Cancel BK X 0 Automatic 1 ON OK ...

Page 2927: ...a 3 Australia 4 Others 5 HongKong 6 Malaysia 7 Singapore 8 England 9 Mexico 10 Taiwan 11 Newzealand 12 Korea 13 Brazil 14 China 15 Thailand 16 Thailand EAGT 17 Srilanka Area ID Menu List 1 Dterm IP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit Administrator Menu 3 Area ID 4 Port Up Down Exit 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Save Cancel User Menu Two items are displayed on the terminal The followin...

Page 2928: ...n Exit Administrator Menu STEP 5 After selecting the area country and pressing the selected area name ex 3 Australia starts flashing Then press the OK key Up Down Cancel OK Flashing 3 Australia 4 Others Return to the User Menu by pressing Exit key 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Save Cancel User Menu When the data saving ends successfully Area ID data assignment is complete END A Example...

Page 2929: ...vice Menu List 1 Dterm IP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit Administrator Menu 7 Factory Value 8 Type of Service Up Down Exit 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Save Cancel User Menu Two items are displayed on the IP Enabled Dterm The following Administrator Menu is displayed A STEP 1 Open the User Menu by pressing Hold Transfer on the terminal while indicating time an error message or D...

Page 2930: ... 6 After the desired ToS value is entered press the OK key to go back to the display of Step 4 If more than one ToS value needs to be set repeat Steps 4 and 5 2 Key 2 A B C back to 2 3 Key 3 D E F back to 3 A F can be entered by means of 2 or 3 key When the appropriate number or alphanumeric character appears press the key ToS hex 0x 0B BK Cancel OK STEP 8 The Administrator Menu is displayed again...

Page 2931: ...RATION SETUP END B STEP 9 Press the Save key on the User Menu to save the assigned data 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Save Cancel User Menu When the data saving ends successfully ToS value data assignment is complete ...

Page 2932: ...N and turn ON the power of the terminal A Login prompt appears on the LCD STEP 3 Enter MAC Registration Password pre assigned by the ADTM command and press OK key STEP 4 Station Number and MAC address of the terminal are registered onto office data After a while the current time is appeared on the display indicating that the terminal is in service Login Passwd Note The entered password is indicate...

Page 2933: ...authorized Retry No Yes Note If the current data and time are not displayed and the following message is displayed the entered station number is not correct After pressing Yes key on the following display enter the correct station number again ...

Page 2934: ...termIP IP Enabled Dterm such as DRS Address IP Address of the terminal and Subnet Mask in advance STEP 4 Open the Administrator Menu by pressing Hold 0 on the User Menu Two items are displayed on the IP Enabled Dterm 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit Administrator Menu User Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save A FTP server Place the program file to be downloaded ...

Page 2935: ...he User Menu by pressing Exit key STEP 8 Press Save key to save the assigned data 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit Administrator Menu User Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save A Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX For BK Cancel OK END STEP 5 Select 2 Download Address by pressing 2 on the Administrator Menu ...

Page 2936: ...ownload by pressing 5 on the menu Download Menu is displayed STEP 4 Select 5 Music by pressing 5 on the Download Menu The display will change as follows 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit Administrator Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Save Cancel User Menu Two items are displayed on the terminal The following Administrator Menu is displayed Download Menu A 1 DtermIP Mode ...

Page 2937: ... the new Music On Hold While download is in progress Downloading is displayed Caution Do Not Turn OFF the power of the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm while Downloading is displayed If the power is turned OFF there is a possibility that the terminal cannot start up normally Download Complete is displayed when the download is complete Note 1 Note 1 In this example press FTP key for FTP A Downloading start...

Page 2938: ...e 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value 8 Type of Service 9 Language 0 Next Page P1 P2 Administrator Menu Page 1 List Up Down Administrator Menu Page 1 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Save Cancel User Menu Two items are displayed on the terminal The following Administrator Menu is displayed A STEP 4 The currently setting for Music On Hold is flashing ...

Page 2939: ...ancel User Menu STEP 5 When the above procedure is all completed the Administrator Menu is displayed again Return to the User Menu by pressing Exit key 1 Dterm IP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit Administrator Menu Step 6 Press the Save key on the User Menu to save the assigned data End ...

Page 2940: ...onnecting DRS 3rd Connecting or DRS 4th Connect ing will be displayed instead of DRS 1st Connecting STEP 2 Open the Administrator Menu Page 1 by pressing Hold 0 on the User Menu Select 0 Next Page P1 P2 by pressing 0 on the Administrator Menu Page 1 STEP 3 The Administrator Menu Page 2 is displayed Select 1 Ping by pressing 1 key STEP 4 The following Ping Menu is displayed Select 2 Destination Add...

Page 2941: ...ct either 1 4 times or 2 Endless and then press OK Key STEP 8 Ping Menu will appear again Select 4 Reply Timer by pressing 4 key STEP 9 Set the timer 1 10000 and then press OK Key Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX For BK Cancel OK 2 Destination Address 3 Requests Count Up Down Ping Menu Exit 1 4 times 2 Endless Cancel OK 3 Requests Count 4 Reply Timer Up Down Ping Menu Exit times ms Cancel OK BK XXXXX ...

Page 2942: ...is pressed the sending report will be displayed as follows STEP 12 Go back to Ping Menu by pressing Exit Key Echo Request Start 0 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXms 1 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXms 2 Request timed out 3 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXms 4 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXms 5 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXms 6 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXXXms Echo Request Start STOP Sent Received Up Down MAX 0000ms Up Down After a second Min 0000ms Ave 0000ms ...

Page 2943: ...eration indicating an error message or DHCP Connecting DRS 1st Connecting on the display 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value 8 Type of Service 9 Language 0 Next Page P1 P2 Administrator Menu List Up Down Administrator Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Save Cancel User Menu Two items ar...

Page 2944: ...ey 3 2 Spanish on the display starts to flash Up Down Cancel OK 1 English Japan 2 Spanish A Note Be sure to press the Key after entering the appropriate number When pressing the keys other than 0 9 and the entered numbers will be cleared Flashing 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Save Cancel User Menu Return to the User Menu by pressing Exit key 1 Dterm IP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down E...

Page 2945: ...trator Menu Page 1 STEP 3 The Administrator Menu Page 2 is displayed Select 5 DTMF by pressing 5 for DTMF setting Select 6 RTP Alarm by pressing 6 for RTP alarm setting STEP 4 The display changes as follows Choose either 0 Automatic 1 ON or 2 OFF by pressing each digit key Then press the OK key 0 Automatic Follow the setting on the System If no setting is made in the System the default setting DTM...

Page 2946: ...dministrator Menu Page 1 by pressing Hold 0 on the User Menu Select 0 Next Page P1 P2 by pressing 0 on the Administrator Menu Page 1 STEP 3 The Administrator Menu Page 2 is displayed Select 4 DTMF by pressing 4 key for DTMF set ting Select 5 RTP Alarm by pressing 5 key for RTP alarm setting Administrator Menu Page2 Administrator Menu Page1 Save 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Exit...

Page 2947: ...he terminal ON 2 OFF Follow the setting on the terminal OFF STEP 5 Go back to the Administrator Menu Page 1 by pressing 0 key on the Page 2 Then go back to the User Menu by pressing the Exit key On the User Menu press the Save key to save the setting data OK 0 Automatic 1 ON Up Down Cancel Administrator Menu Page2 Administrator Menu Page1 Save 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Exit ...

Page 2948: ... function such as a PC Device and cable for connecting DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm and FTP TFTP server HUB LAN ca bles Program file to be downloaded Note The ramhprt hex file applies only to the non peer to peer Protims IP phones Kind of Terminal Files to be downloaded IP Enabled Dterm Dterm Series E Dterm 75 ramhptop hex ramhprt hex IP Enabled Dterm Dterm Series i ramhp2pr hex DtermIP ramhp2pw out ...

Page 2949: ...P User Menu 8 Ether Port Settings 9 System Information Up Down Save Cancel User Menu without PtoP 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary 3 BackUp DRS Address 4 IP Address 5 Default Gateway 6 Subnet Mask 7 DNS 8 Ether Port Settings 9 System Information User Menu List Up Down STEP 3 Press the Up key twice or once and confirm the Firmware version STEP 2 Select System Information by pressing 9 or 7 on the ...

Page 2950: ...tims Before Changing After Changing ramhptop hex ramhptop hex ramhprt hex ramhprt hex Caution Observe the following while performing the downloading procedure Do Not Turn OFF the power of the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm the Telephony Server DHCP server Do Not Unplug or Plug the LAN cable connecting to the DtermIP IP Enabled Dterm the Telephony Server DHCP Do Not Turn OFF the power of the HUB connecti...

Page 2951: ...termIP Mode 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value 8 Type of Service 9 Language 0 Next Page P1 P2 Administrator Menu List Administrator Menu Up Down User Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save A FTP server Place download program file IP Enabled Dterm Dterm E Dterm 75 ramhptop hex ramhprt hex IP Enabled Dterm Dterm Series i ramhp2pr hex Dterm ...

Page 2952: ... 8 Press Save key to save the assigned data 1 Terminal ID 2 Download Address Up Down Exit Administrator Menu User Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Save A When the saving ends successfully configuration data assignment is complete Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX For BK Cancel OK END STEP 5 Select 2 Download Address by pressing 2 on the Administrator Menu ...

Page 2953: ...rogram to be downloaded When upgrading PtoP refer to Program Download 1 Upgrading PtoP When changing the program from PtoP to Protims refer to Program Download 2 Changing Program from PtoP to Protims When upgrading the program from Protims to PtoP refer to Program Download 3 Upgrading Pro gram from Protims to PtoP ...

Page 2954: ...elect 5 Download by pressing 5 on the menu Download Menu is displayed STEP 4 Select 1 Program by pressing 1 on the Download Menu The display will change as follows 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value 8 Type of Service 9 Language 0 Next Page P1 P2 Administrator Menu List Up Down Administrator Menu 1...

Page 2955: ...follows indicating the download is completed STEP 7 Press Exit key to reset the IP Enabled Dterm The terminal starts up again with the new program While download is in progress Downloading is displayed Caution Do Not Trun OFF the power of the IP Enabled Dterm while Downloading is displayed If the power is turned OFF there is a possibility that the IP Enabled Dterm cannot start up normally Download...

Page 2956: ...y pressing Hold 0 STEP 10 Select 7 Factory Value by pressing 7 key on the Administrator Menu STEP 11 Factory Value Set is displayed Press OK key STEP 12 Reassign the configuration data to each parameter as needed 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value 8 Type of Service 9 Language 0 Next Page P1 P2 Administrator Menu List Up Down User Menu Administ...

Page 2957: ...n the menu Download Menu is displayed STEP 4 Select 1 Program by pressing 1 on the Download Menu The display will change as follows 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value 8 Type of Service 9 Language 0 Next Page P1 P2 Administrator Menu List Up Down Administrator Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary...

Page 2958: ...follows indicating the download is completed STEP 7 Press Exit key to reset the IP Enabled Dterm The terminal starts up again with the new program While download is in progress Downloading is displayed Caution Do Not Trun OFF the power of the IP Enabled Dterm while Downloading is displayed If the power is turned OFF there is a possibility that the IP Enabled Dterm cannot start up normally Download...

Page 2959: ...the configuration data to each parameter User Menu Administrator Menu END B STEP 8 Wait for a while until the IP Enabled Dterm starts up again IP Enabled Dterm starts setup process with DRS on the LAN indicating DHCP Connecting DRS 1st Connecting on the display After a while the current time is appeared on the display 1 Terminal ID 2 Download Address 3 DRS Mode 4 PROTIMS Address 5 PROTIMS PORT 6 R...

Page 2960: ...icating an error message on the display STEP 3 Select 8 Download by pressing 8 on the menu Download Menu is displayed STEP 4 Select 1 Program TFTP by pressing 1 for TFTP or 2 Program FTP by pressing 2 for FTP on the Download Menu 1 Terminal ID 2 Download Address Up Down Exit 1 Terminal ID 2 Download Address 3 DRS Mode 4 PROTIMS Address 5 PROTIMS PORT 6 RTP Address 7 RTP Port 8 Download 9 SoftReset...

Page 2961: ...he terminal starts up again with the new program While download is in progress Downloading is displayed Download Complete is displayed when the download is complete A B Download Menu 1 Program TFTP 2 Program FTP Up Down Cancel Set Downloading Downloading Download Complete Exit Downloading Download Complete Exit Caution Do Not Turn OFF the power of the IP Enabled Dterm while Downloading is displaye...

Page 2962: ...Menu by pressing Hold 0 STEP 10 Select 7 Factory Value by pressing 7 key on the Administrator Menu STEP 11 Factory Value Set is displayed Press OK key STEP 12 Reassign the configuration data to each parameter 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value 8 Type of Service 9 Language 0 Next Page P1 P2 Administrator Menu List Up Down User Menu Administrato...

Page 2963: ...Download file 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The file name of the download file is correct Check Points Actions Rename the file as ramhptop hex ramhprt hex ramhp2pr hex ramhp2pw out TFTP FTP server Address assigned in the IP Enabled Dterm is correct Assign the IP address of the TFTP FTP on the network The TFTP server and the IP Enabled Dterm exist on the same subnet segment Reconnect the TFTP server and or the IP ...

Page 2964: ...necting on the display STEP 3 Select 5 Download by pressing 5 on the menu Download Menu is displayed STEP 4 Select 3 Input File Name by pressing 3 on the Download Menu The following display will appear 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down Exit Administrator Menu 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Save Cancel User Menu Two items are displayed on the IP Enabled Dterm The following Admini...

Page 2965: ...st File ramhPtoP hex TFTP Cancel FTP Downloading Downloading Download Complete Exit Downloading Download Complete Exit STEP 7 After a while the display will change as follows indicating the download is completed STEP 8 Press Exit key to reset the IP Enabled Dterm The terminal starts up again with the new program While download is in progress Downloading is displayed Caution Do Not Turn OFF the pow...

Page 2966: ...Menu by pressing Hold 0 STEP 11 Select 7 Factory Value by pressing 7 key on the Administrator Menu STEP 12 Factory Value Set is displayed Press OK key STEP 13 Reassign the configuration data to each parameter 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address 3 Area ID 4 Port 5 Download 6 SoftReset 7 Factory Value 8 Type of Service 9 Language 0 Next Page P1 P2 Administrator Menu List Up Down User Menu Administrato...

Page 2967: ...the display open the User Menu by pressing Hold Transfer on the IP Enabled Dterm User Menu STEP 4 The followings are included in the menu list select an item port from DRS Mate Port DRS Self Port Protims Self Port RTP Self Port Voice Control Port H245 Self Port 1 DRS Mate Port Select this when changing DRS Port Number used for receiving message from IP Enabled Dterm 2 DRS Self Port Select this whe...

Page 2968: ...te Port 1 65535 Default is 3456 DRS Self Port 1024 65535 Default is 3455 Protims Self Port 1024 65535 Default is 3458 RTP Self Port 1024 65472 Default is 3462 Voice Control Port 1 65535 Default is 4000 H245 Self Port 0 1024 65504 Default is 0 Any Port Note Note When assigning 0 for H245 Self Port the desired idle port will be used When another port number other than 0 is assigned a 32 port range i...

Page 2969: ...hy the DHCP server rejected the request DRS Connection Timeout No answer from DRS after sending initial setup request from the IP En abled Dterm From this indication configuration display can be shown by the ordinary configuration data assignment opera tion Connect the Telephony Server to the same network Assign the same IP address to the DRS connected to the network and the IP Enabled Dterm Conne...

Page 2970: ...led Dterm From this indication configuration display can be shown by the ordinary configuration data assignment opera tion Investigate the reason why the PH cannot be used Ask System maintenance per sonnel for the reason why PH cannot be used Registration Module Cannot Recognize Equipment Type Registration Module cannot recognize the equipment type message received from the IP Enabled Dterm From t...

Page 2971: ...he proper PH after sending initial setup request from the IP Enabled Dterm From this indication configuration display can be shown by the ordinary configuration data assignment opera tion Ask system maintenance person nel for the reason why PH cannot be used Telephony Server resource not available Registration cannot be performed be cause Telephony Server s resources are not available Please conta...

Page 2972: ...sage from the Telephony Server has been contin ued for one minute and 30 seconds Check the network status and condition Check the cable connection DHCP Server failed to renew a lease for the IP address Though DHCP Server attempted to re new a lease for the IP address the server didn t send back the response Check the setting at DHCP Serv er and cable connection An odd number is assigned as RTP Sel...

Page 2973: ... directions from DRS Login Mode of IP Enabled Dterm The IP Enabled Dterm is activated in Login mode Desired Station Number duplicates al ready registered one If Yes is pressed While the new IP Enabled Dterm is to be operative the previous one turns invalid and is rebooted If No is pressed Change the Station Number again to start up Downloading Login Passwd Cancel BK Set OK Override Yes No ...

Page 2974: ...vice such as Hub Router etc System 1 Create the Config file for DtermIP and store it into the FTP server Turn the DtermIP ON and con nect it to the network 2 DtermIP obtains the FTP server address and the Config file name from the DHCP server 3 DtermIP accesses the FTP server and downloads the Config file specified by the DHCP server 4 If the downloaded file data is not same as the existing config...

Page 2975: ...onfig Setup APL to create the Config file Refer to the Config Setup APL Instruction Manual for installation and use of the Config Setup APL Store the Config file XX ini created by Config Setup APL into the download folder of the FTP server When setting different configuration data to two or more segments each segment requires Config files differently These files are stored into the download folder...

Page 2976: ... 2 On the Predetermined Option and Values screen click the Add button STEP 3 Type FTP Server Address in the Name box and select IP Address as the Data Type Place a checkmark in the Array checkbox Enter 141 in the Code box and click the OK button ...

Page 2977: ...returned to the Predetermined Options and Values screen STEP 5 Type Config File Name in the Name box and select String as the Data Type Enter 151 in the Code box and click the OK button STEP 6 The Predetermined Options and Values screen is displayed again Click the OK button ...

Page 2978: ...ight click on the Scope Options and select Configuration Options STEP 8 On the Scope Options screen mark a checkmark in the checkbox next to 141 FTP Server Address Enter the address of FTP Server in the IP address box and click the Add button After clicking the Add button click the OK button ...

Page 2979: ...erver Address Then highlight and right click on the Scope Option and select Configuration Options again STEP 10 On the Scope Options screen mark a checkmark in the checkbox next to 151 Config File Name and enter the Config file name to be downloaded in the String Value field At this time the extension must be ini ...

Page 2980: ...UP STEP 11 Go back to the DHCP screen and confirm that the specified file name is listed on the line of 151 Config File Name Note If another scope setting needs to be set go back to the Step 9 and make the option setting for another scope ...

Page 2981: ...the following message will be displayed STEP 3 DtermIP accesses the FTP server downloads the configuration data After the downloading is complete the downloaded Configuration data file and the current DtermIP configuration data file are compared If there is a change the DtermIP will reset and return to step 1 The following message is displayed if the Configuration data files are the same STEP 4 Th...

Page 2982: ...ered in the Login Mode or MAC address is not set Login screen appears before the display of STEP 4 Note If the configuration data file cannot be downloaded properly in the STEP 2 the following message appears 7 35 AM MON 22 MAR 2004 MIC DND Login Cancel BK OK Passwd Set Config Download Failed Exit ...

Page 2983: ...fig feature is used only for the first time When the AutoConfig feature is used only for the first time and from them on FTP server is not accessed follow the procedure below STEP 1 Create the Config file sets AutoConfig Mode is disabled by using Config Setup APL STEP 2 Set the FTP server address and Config file name to DHCPOption and then connect the DtermIP to the network STEP 3 DtermIP acquires...

Page 2984: ...onfiguration setting on start up is changed When the configuration setting on start up is changed follow the procedures below STEP 1 Edit the Config file by using Config Setup APL and then store the Config file in the FTP server STEP 2 Send a reset from the System to DtermIP STEP 3 DtermIP downloads the new Config file through the AutoConfig feature and save it Note When AutoConfig Mode is disable...

Page 2985: ...e Administrator Menu Page 2 is displayed For Dterm Series i select 4 AutoConfig Mode by pressing 4 For Dterm Series E Dterm 75 select 3 Auto Config Mode by pressing 3 STEP 4 The display changes as follows When disabling the AutoConfig Mode choose 1 Disable by press ing 1 When enabling the AutoConfig Mode choose 2 Enable by pressing 2 Then press OK key Save 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down...

Page 2986: ...he User Menu by pressing the Exit key On the User Menu press the Save key to save the setting data Administrator Menu Page2 Administrator Menu Page1 Save 1 DHCP Mode 2 DRS Address Primary Up Down Cancel Exit 1 DtermIP Mode 2 Download Address Up Down 6 RTP Alarm 0 Next Page P2 P1 Up Down User Menu Press 0 key Press Exit key Press Save key ...

Page 2987: ... CONNECTION Note 1 7 REC VOLUME 8 BLF 9 HOLD START RELEASE SWAP 10 2ND RINGING 11 RINGING 12 RECEIVER VOLUME SET 13 FUNCTION KEY SWAP 14 RINGER VOLUME IN PB 15 POWER CONTROL 16 CONF TONE FOR ALL KEYS Note 1 Do not change this data 3 1 2 Selection a Configuration Item a Displaying the Configuration Menu Turn on the Position Busy lamp When the Position Busy lamp is OFF press the Position Busy key to...

Page 2988: ...C CONTROL DEST next page 2 PAGE CONTROL Release exit 3 SUP CONNECTION Note 1 Answer update CONFIG MENU P3 VER x SRC prev page 1 REC VOLUME DEST next page 2 BLF Release exit 3 HOLD START RELEASE SWAP Answer update CONFIG MENU P4 VER x SRC prev page 1 2ND RINGING DEST next page 2 RINGING Release exit Alarm LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC PAGE Start REC Night Position Busy...

Page 2989: ...ing the Release key the Configuration Menu disappears and the Desk Console returns to normal operation 3 RECEIVER VOLUME SET Answer update CONFIG MENU P5 VER x SRC prev page 1 FUNCTION KEY SWAP DEST next page 2 RINGER VOLUME IN PB Release exit 3 POWER CONTROL Answer update CONFIG MENU P6 VER x SRC prev page 1 CONF TONE FOR ALL KEYS DEST next page Release exit Answer update ...

Page 2990: ... Assign the configuration data referring to the Assigning Configuration Data section on the next page Selecting a Configuration Item Alarm LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC PAGE Start REC SRC key Night Position Busy Mute DEST SRC 3 DEF 2 ABC 1 L 6 L 5 L 4 L 3 L 2 L 1 6 MNO 5 JKL 4 GHI 9 WXYZ 8 TUV 0 7 PQRS Cancel Talk Answer Hold Release Position Position Night DEST key A...

Page 2991: ...nment for the H S1 connector is not required a Press the desired number An asterisk indicates the selection 1 The headset is connected to the HAND H S0 connector 2 The handset is connected to the HAND H S0 connector SRC Return to the Configuration Menu HEADSET HANDSET SRC menu 1 HEADSET Note 1 2 HANDSET Alarm LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC PAGE Start REC SRC key Night ...

Page 2992: ...r cable or SU PRA NC Polaris 3 The type of Headset is GN2200 SRC Return to the Configuration Menu Note 1 The default setting is 1 SUPRA NEW SIGMA b Press the SRC key The display returns to the first page of the Configuration Menu c To assign data to additional configuration items refer to the Selecting a Configuration Item section When finished proceed to the Updating the Configuration Data sectio...

Page 2993: ... the Updating the Configuration Data section 4 REC CONTROL This item specifies the operation mode of a recording device The following two modes are available Manual Mode Manual mode is available when the RECC PA M87 circuit card is mounted in the system When the REC key is pressed the system starts recording and the REC lamp lights When the REC key is pressed again the recording stops and the REC ...

Page 2994: ...anual Mode Manual mode is available when the PGADP PA M87 circuit card is mounted in the system When the PAGE key is pressed the system starts paging and the PAGE lamp lights When the PAGE key is pressed again the paging stops and the PAGE lamp goes off Automatic Mode In Automatic mode the system starts or stops paging automatically when a call is connected disconnected Note that the PAGE key is n...

Page 2995: ...umber An asterisk shows the selected number 1 2dB Up 2 0dB standard level 3 4dB Down 4 8dB Down SRC Return to the Configuration Menu Note 1 The default setting is 2 0dB b Press the SRC key The display returns to the third page of the Configuration Menu c To assign data to additional configuration items refer to the Selecting a Configuration Item section When finished proceed to the Updating the Co...

Page 2996: ...he third page of the Configuration Menu c To assign data to additional configuration items refer to the Selecting a Configuration Item section When finished proceed to the Updating the Configuration Data section 8 HOLD START RELEASE SWAP This item specifies the locations of the HOLD START and RELEASE keys a Press the desired number An asterisk shows the selected number 1 Original setting 2 Swapped...

Page 2997: ...proceed to the Updating the Configuration Data section 9 2ND RINGING This item specifies the On Off setting of the 2nd Ringing function a Press the desired number An asterisk shows the selected number 1 2nd Ringing is available 2 2nd Ringing is not available SRC Return to the Configuration Menu Note 1 The default setting is 1 ENABLE ORIGINAL SETTING SWAPPED SETTING RELEASE START HOLD RELEASE START...

Page 2998: ...ilable 2 Ringing is not available SRC Return to the Configuration Menu Note 1 The default setting is 1 ENABLE b Press the SRC key The display returns to the fourth page of the Configuration Menu c To assign data to additional configuration items refer to the Selecting a Configuration Item section When finished proceed to the Updating the Configuration Data section CONFIG MENU P4 VER x SRC menu 1 2...

Page 2999: ... set to the level 8dB lower than the System Default SRC Return to the Configuration Menu Note 1 Default setting is 1 SYSTEM DEFAULT b Press the SRC key The display returns to Configuration Menu c When configuration data assignment is completed proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA When the other item is also specified return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM RECEIVER VOLUME SET SRC menu 1 SYSTEM...

Page 3000: ... Press the SRC key The display returns to Configuration Menu FUNCTION KEY SWAP SRC menu 1 ORIGINAL Note 1 2 SWAPPED CONFIG MENU P5 VER x SRC prev page 1 FUNCTION KEY SWAP DEST next page 2 RINGER VOLUME IN PB Release exit 3 POWER CONTROL Answer update LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall TF FX PAGE REC EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC Start Mute Alarm PositionAvailable Position Busy Night ORIGINAL SETTING LD...

Page 3001: ... is the same level in the operating state 2 The ringer volume is set to the minimum level SRC Return to the Configuration Menu Note 1 Default setting is 1 NORMAL b Press the SRC key The display returns to Configuration Menu c When configuration data assignment is completed proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA When the other item is also specified return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM RINGER ...

Page 3002: ...a assignment is completed proceed to UPDATING CONFIGURATION DATA When the other item is also specified return to SELECTION OF CONFIGURATION ITEM 15 CONF TONE FOR ALL KEYS This item specifies the confirmation tone control for all keys of the CONSOLE a Press the desired number An asterisk shows the selected number 1 Confirmation tone is enable for all keys 2 Confirmation tone is disable for all keys...

Page 3003: ...ONFIGURATION ITEM 16 UPDATING THE CONFIGURATION DATA When assigning the configuration data is finished the configuration data can be updated or the update can be cancelled To update the configuration data While one of the Configuration Menu pages is displayed on the LCD press the Answer key The system updates the configuration data and then automatically restarts the Desk Console To cancel the upd...

Page 3004: ...usy ATND NANS Recall EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC PAGE Start REC Night Position Busy Mute DEST SRC 3 DEF 2 ABC 1 L 6 L 5 L 4 L 3 L 2 L 1 6 MNO 5 JKL 4 GHI 9 WXYZ 8 TUV 0 7 PQRS Cancel Talk Answer Hold Release Position Position Night Answer key Update Release key Cancel Available Busy ...

Page 3005: ...g to SIP server with VLAN Authenticating While authenticating with SIP server without VLAN Authenticating VLAN While authenticating with SIP server with VLAN Authenticating Cert While 802 1X authenticating Note 1 Login Password User Name Entry Password Entry Override Desired Station Number duplicates already registered one NETWORK BUSY No Response to the Request DHCP Server Not Found DHCP server c...

Page 3006: ...equired to display the Configuration Menu the following display appears User Mode Main Menu is displayed by entering the correct password If an invalid password is entered the display changes as follows Time Display in idle or busy state When the terminal in busy state the LCD display cannot be moved to Configuration Setting screen but it can be moved to Online Monitoring screen Up Down Cancel 1 N...

Page 3007: ...les below show the description of each parameter on the User Menu Network Settings 1 of 3 Parameter Description DHCP Mode Select whether to use DHCP protocol 1 Disable DHCP is not used 2 Enable DHCP is used IP Address Set IP address of the DtermIP SIP Default Gateway Set IP address of the default router Subnetmask Set subnet mask of the DtermIP SIP DNS Address Set IP address of the DNS server Adva...

Page 3008: ...pecify the VLAN ID VLAN Priority Specify the VLAN Priority PC Port Settings Set the PC port Speed Duplex Set the LAN speed for the PC port Autonego Autonegotiation 100M Full 100Mbps speed and full duplex mode 100M Half 100Mbps speed and half duplex mode 10M Full 10Mbps speed and full duplex mode 10M Half 10Mbps speed and half duplex mode Port VLAN Mode Select whether to enable or disable the port ...

Page 3009: ... packet from PC port Forwarding is enabled CDP Mode Select whether to send the power consumption information to the hub 1 Disable Power consumption information is not sent to the hub 2 Enable Power consumption information is sent to the hub Type of Service Set the ToS 1 RTP Set the ToS for RTP 2 SIP Set the ToS for SIP 802 1X Settings Note 3 Set the data related to 802 1X authentication 1 Supplica...

Page 3010: ...P server Note 1 2 2nd Server Set IP address or fully qualified domain name FQDN of the second registrar destination SIP server Note 1 3 3rd Server Set IP address or fully qualified domain name FQDN of the third registrar destination SIP server Note 1 4 4th Server Set IP address or fully qualified domain name FQDN of the fourth registrar destination SIP server Note 1 3 Access Mode Set the access mo...

Page 3011: ...and EGAT Thailand EGAT 15 Srilanka Sri Lanka 16 England England 17 Newzealand New Zealand 6 Encryption Set the encryption related data 1 Authentication Select whether to enable or disable the authentication mode 1 Disable Authentication mode is disabled 2 Enable Authentication mode is enabled 2 One Time Password Set the onetime password 3 Authentication Status Display the authentication status 7 E...

Page 3012: ... 6s 6s 6s 6s 6s 2s 2 Keeping Call Set whether call connection is kept up even if DtermIP SIP detects that communication failure occurs between the system and DtermIP SIP 1 Disable Call connection is not kept up even if DtermIP SIP detects that communication failure occurs between the system and DtermIP SIP 2 Enable Call connection is kept up even if DtermIP SIP detects that communication failure o...

Page 3013: ...he handset 5 Receive Bias Set the receiving bias of the handset 6 Receive Gain Set the receiving gain of the handset 7 Ring Settings Set the Ringer 1 External Call Set the Ringing Tone for External Call 2 Internal Call Set the Ringing Tone for Internal Call 8 RTP Alarm Note 1 Determine whether to send RTP Warning Tone 1 Automatic DtermIP SIP hears RTP Warning Tone according to directions from the ...

Page 3014: ...splay the local volume 1 Disable Local volume is not displayed 2 Enable Local volume is displayed 3 Language Select a language to be displayed 1 Automatic The default setting 2 English NEC Note 2 English 3 Portuguese NEC Note 2 Portuguese 4 Spanish NEC Note 2 Spanish 5 French NEC Note 2 French 6 German Note 3 German 7 Italian Note 3 Italian 8 Dutch Note 3 Dutch 9 Norwegian Note 3 Norwegian Note 4 ...

Page 3015: ... key test keys are randomly pressed 4 Key Test Seq Perform the key test keys are sequentially pressed 5 Voice Loopback Perform the voice loopback test 1 Handset Hand Speaker Send Handset Receive Handset 2 Handset Speaker Send Handset Receive Speaker 3 Headset Head Speaker Send Headset Receive Headset 4 Headset Speaker Send Headset Receive Speaker 5 MIC Handset Speaker Send Microphone Receive Hands...

Page 3016: ...ATION SETUP Terminal Information Parameter Description Hardware Version Display the hardware version of the terminal MAC Address Display the MAC address of the terminal Firmware Version Display the firmware version of the terminal ...

Page 3017: ...SIP DNS Address Set the IP address of the DNS server Advanced Settings Set the network expansion data STEP 1 To open the Network Settings Menu select 1 Network Settings by pressing 1 key on the Main Menu Main Menu STEP 2 The Network Settings Menu appears as follows Network Settings Menu Note To go back to the Main Menu press Exit key Up Down Cancel 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Audio Visual ...

Page 3018: ... displayed on the top line of each menu Up Down Exit 11 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address Up Down Exit 12 IP Address 3 Default Gateway Up Down Exit 13 Default Gateway 4 Subnetmask Press Down key Press Down key Up Down Exit 11 DHCP Mode 5 DNS Address 6 Advanced Settings 4 Subnetmask 3 Default Gateway 2 IP Address ...

Page 3019: ...CP Press 2 key to enable DHCP Note DHCP is enabled by the default setting Note The currently selected DHCP mode flashes STEP 3 After selecting a DHCP mode press OK key and go back to the Network Settings Menu STEP 4 Press Exit key on the Network Settings Menu to return to the Main Menu STEP 5 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Up Down Exit 11 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default...

Page 3020: ... 10 41 208 205 enter 10 41 208 205 separate with an asterisk Note To delete an entered character press BK key STEP 3 After entering IP address press OK key and go back to the Network Settings Menu STEP 4 Press Exit key on the Network Settings Menu to return to the Main Menu STEP 5 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Up Down Exit 11 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway 4 S...

Page 3021: ...IP address of 10 41 208 205 enter 10 41 208 205 separate with an asterisk Note To delete an entered character press BK key STEP 3 After entering IP address press OK key and go back to the Network Settings Menu STEP 4 Press Exit key on the Network Settings Menu to return to the Main Menu STEP 5 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Up Down Exit 11 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Defaul...

Page 3022: ...255 240 0 enter 255 255 240 0 separate with an asterisk Note To delete an entered character press BK key STEP 3 After entering the subnet mask press OK key and go back to the Network Settings Menu STEP 4 Press Exit key on the Network Settings Menu to return to the Main Menu STEP 5 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Up Down Exit 11 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway 4 S...

Page 3023: ...208 205 enter 10 41 208 205 separate with an asterisk Note To delete an entered character press BK key STEP 3 After entering IP address of DNS server press OK key and go back to the Network Settings Menu STEP 4 Press Exit key on the Network Settings Menu to return to the Main Menu STEP 5 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Up Down Exit 11 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gate...

Page 3024: ... appears Select 1 LAN Port Settings by pressing 1 key on the Advanced Settings Menu Advanced Settings Menu STEP 3 LAN Port Settings Menu appears Select 1 Speed Duplex by pressing 1 key to set LAN speed and communication method full duplex or half duplex Select 2 VLAN Mode by pressing 2 key to set the VLAN Mode Select 3 VLAN ID by pressing 3 key to set the VLAN ID Select 4 VLAN Priority by pressing...

Page 3025: ...ult VLAN ID is 7 When 4 VLAN Priority is selected by pressing 4 key Specify the VLAN Priority 0 7 The default VLAN Priority is 5 Note To delete an entered character press BK key STEP 5 After assigning each data press OK key and go back to the LAN Port Setting Menu Repeat Step 3 4 until all the necessary data is set STEP 6 When the all necessary data is set press Exit key on the LAN Port Setting Me...

Page 3026: ...ing 1 key to set LAN speed and communication method full duplex or half duplex for the PC port Select 2 Port VLAN Mode by pressing 2 key to set the PC port VLAN Mode Select 3 Port VLAN ID by pressing 3 key to set the PC port VLAN ID Select 4 Port VLAN Priority by pressing 4 key to set the PC port VLAN Priority Select 5 Port Available by pressing 5 key to set the PC port availability Select 6 EAPOL...

Page 3027: ...ty 0 7 The default port VLAN Priority is 5 When 5 Port Available is selected by pressing 5 key Press 1 key to set PC Port to Automatic default setting PC Port is disabled enabled according to directions from the System Press 2 key to disable the PC port Note For DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version earlier than 3 0 0 0 Select whether to enable or disable the PC port Press 1 key to disable the PC port...

Page 3028: ...ata 4 1 6 3 CDP Mode On the CDP Mode parameter set whether to send the power consumption information to the hub STEP 1 Select 6 Advanced Settings by pressing 6 key on the Network Settings Menu Network Settings Menu Up Down OK 1 Autonego 2 100M Full 3 100M Half 4 10M Full 5 10M Half Cancel Cancel OK 2 Enable 1 Disable Cancel OK 0 4094 Port VLAN ID XXXX BK Cancel OK 0 7 Port VLAN Priority X BK When ...

Page 3029: ...urrently enabled CDP Mode flashes STEP 4 After CDP Mode is set press OK key and go back to the Advanced Settings Menu STEP 5 Press Exit key on the Advanced Settings Menu to return to the Network Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the Network Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 7 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data 4 1 6 4 Type of Service On the Type of Service...

Page 3030: ...lt 0xA0 of RTP When 2 SIP is selected set ToS 0x00 0xFF default 0xC0 of SIP Note 1 Note 1 An input character or number changes depending on the number of times the digit key is pressed For de tails see the following table For example if the digit key 2 is pressed one time 2 is displayed on the LCD Then press 2 again A is displayed on the LCD Up Down Exit 11 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway...

Page 3031: ...to the Network Settings Menu STEP 8 Press Exit key on the Network Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 9 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data 4 1 6 10 802 1X Settings On the 802 1X Settings parameter set the data related to 802 1X authentication Note This parameter is available for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x or later STEP 1 Select 6 Advanced Settings ...

Page 3032: ...MD5 Select 4 Password MD5 by pressing 4 key to set password used for EAP MD5 Select 5 EAPOL VLAN Mode by pressing 5 key to enable EAPOL VLAN Mode 802 1X Settings Menu Note 2 EAP Method and 6 Certificate Delete are not supported by DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x Up Down Exit 11 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway 4 Subnetmask 5 DNS Address 6 Advanced Settings Up Down Exit 161 LAN Po...

Page 3033: ... default setting Note 2 When connecting PC equipped with Supplicant function to the DtermIP SIP PC port No data setting is required on 802 1X Settings Note 3 STEP 5 Press OK key and go back to the display of Step 3 Repeat Step 3 4 until all the necessary data is set STEP 6 When the all necessary data is set press Exit key and go back to the Advanced Settings Menu STEP 7 Press Exit key on the Advan...

Page 3034: ... 802 1X Settings However the following data setting is required on PC Port Settings For the details of PC Port Settings refer to 4 1 6 2 PC Port Settings To relay the EAPOL packet via DtermIP SIP Select Main Menu 1 Network Settings 6 Advanced Settings 2 PC Port Settings 6 EAPOL Forwarding Set 2 Enable To add the VLAN tag including EAPOL packet toward the packet received from the PC Select Main Men...

Page 3035: ...ION SETUP Note The following Operation System of PC equipped with Supplicant function can be connected to the Dter mIP SIP PC port Microsoft Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4 or later Microsoft Windows XP with Service Pack 2 or later ...

Page 3036: ...a Function Set the additional functions Note SIP server used in this section refers to the Telephony Server The Telephony Server acts as SIP server where DtermIP SIP is registered Note 1 About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual STEP 1 To open the SIP Settings Menu select 2 SIP Settings by pressi...

Page 3037: ... STEP 3 When 1 User ID is selected Enter the User ID up to 32 digits 0 9 When 2 Password is selected Enter the password of the User ID Up to 10 digits 0 9 for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version earlier than 4 1 x x Up to 24 digits 0 9 for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x or later The entered password is indicated in a string of on the display Up Down Exit 21 User 2 Server Address URI 3 Acc...

Page 3038: ...ver Address URI On the Server Address URI parameter set IP address and URI of the SIP server STEP 1 Select 2 Server Address URI by pressing 2 key on the SIP Settings Menu SIP Settings Menu STEP 2 Press 1 2 3 or 4 key to select a SIP server whose IP address or domain name is to be set Cancel OK Password BK Cancel OK User ID XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX BK When entering the User ID When entering the pas...

Page 3039: ... the URI key The display changes as follows Enter FQDN of the SIP server A maximum of 128 characters 0 9 A Z a z or _ can be entered as a domain name Note 1 Note When Adr is pressed the display returns to IP address setting screen Note To delete an entered character press BK key Note 1 An input character or number changes depending on the number of times the digit key is pressed For de tails see t...

Page 3040: ...P address and URI of the register destination SIP server Note RegistrarDestination parameter is available for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 2 0 4 0 or later Do not set this parameter except when using Firewall NAT accommodating special SIP NAT Note About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual ST...

Page 3041: ...08 205 enter 10 41 208 205 separate with an asterisk Note To delete an entered character press BK key Note The default value is 0 0 0 0 Note About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manual Up Down Exit 21 User 2 Server Address URI 3 Access Mode 4 SIP Server Port 5 Area ID 6 Encryption 7 Extra Function ...

Page 3042: ...ding on the number of times the digit key is pressed For de tails see the following table For example if the digit key 2 is pressed seven times 2 is displayed on the LCD Then press 2 again a is displayed on the LCD This key entry method is available only when entering the following Account MD5 Password MD5 URI of the SIP server File name Key Entry Method Digit Key The Number of Times Key is Presse...

Page 3043: ...tep 2 4 until all the necessary servers are set STEP 7 When all the necessary data is set press Exit key on the display of Step 2 to go back to the SIP Settings Menu STEP 8 Press Exit key on the SIP Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 9 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data ...

Page 3044: ... to Remote When selecting 2 Normal Mode the mode is set to Normal Note Normal Mode is set by the default setting Note The currently enabled access mode flashes STEP 3 Press OK key and go back to the SIP Settings Menu STEP 4 Press Exit key on the SIP Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 5 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Up Down Exit 21 User 2 Server Address URI ...

Page 3045: ...s 5060 Note To delete an entered character press BK key STEP 4 Press OK key and go back to the display of Step 2 Repeat Step 2 3 until all the necessary servers are set STEP 5 When the all necessary data is set press Exit key on the display of Step 2 to go back to the SIP Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the SIP Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu Up Down Exit 21 User 2 Server Address...

Page 3046: ...g Firewall NAT accommodating special SIP NAT STEP 1 Select 4 SIP Server Port by pressing 4 key on the SIP Settings Menu SIP Settings Menu STEP 2 Select 5 Registrar Destination by pressing 5 key STEP 2 Press 1 2 3 or 4 key to select a SIP server whose IP address and domain name are set Up Down Exit 21 User 2 Server Address URI 3 Access Mode 4 SIP Server Port 5 Area ID 6 Encryption 7 Extra Function ...

Page 3047: ...4 Press OK key and go back to the display of Step 2 Repeat Step 2 3 until all the necessary servers are set STEP 5 When the all necessary data is set press Exit key on the display of Step 2 to go back to the SIP Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the SIP Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 7 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Cancel OK 1024 65535 Port XXXXX B...

Page 3048: ...s Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Up Down Exit 21 User 2 Server Address URI 3 Access Mode 4 SIP Server Port 5 Area ID 6 Encryption 7 Extra Function OK 1 Japan 0 Automatic 2 America 3 Australia Up Down 4 Others 5 HongKong 6 Malaysia 7 Singapore 8 Mexico 9 Taiwan 10 Korea 11 Brazil 12 Chaina 13 Thailand 14 Thailand EGAT 15 Srilanka Cancel Code Country Code Country 0 Automated Set...

Page 3049: ...whether to authenticate with SIP server When selecting 1 Disable disable the authentication mode When selecting 2 Enable enable the authentication mode Authentication Mode is disabled by the default setting Note The currently enabled Authentication Mode flashes STEP 4 After Authentication Mode is set press OK key and go back to the Encryption Menu STEP 5 Press Exit key on the Encryption Menu to re...

Page 3050: ...ntered password is indicated in a string of on the display Note To delete an entered character press BK key STEP 4 After entering the onetime password press OK key and go back to the Encryption Menu STEP 5 Press Exit key on the Encryption Menu to return to the SIP Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the SIP Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 7 Press Save key on the Main Menu to sav...

Page 3051: ...he authentication status Acceptable is displayed when the authentication with SIP server has been finished and the T PASS is saved in DtermIP SIP Not Acceptable is displayed when the authentication with SIP server has not been finished STEP 4 After displaying the authentication status press Exit key and go back to the Encryption Menu Up Down Exit 21 User 2 Server Address URI 3 Access Mode 4 SIP Se...

Page 3052: ...lect 1 Retransmit Interval by pressing 1 key on the Extra Function Menu Extra Function Menu Note 1 Retransmit Interval 2 Keeping Call and 4 Language Pattern are available for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x or later Note 3 Howler Tone is not supported by DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x The setting should be 1 Disable fixed STEP 3 Retransmit Interval Menu appears Select 1 Standa...

Page 3053: ...her call connection is kept up even if DtermIP SIP detects that communication failure occurs between the system and DtermIP SIP Note This parameter is available for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x or later STEP 1 Select 7 Extra Function by pressing 7 key on the SIP Settings Menu SIP Settings Menu STEP 2 Extra Function Menu appears Select 2 Keeping Call by pressing 2 key on the Extra Func...

Page 3054: ...nd go back to the Extra Function Menu STEP 5 Press Exit key on the Extra Function Menu to return to the SIP Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the SIP Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 7 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Note 1 When communication failure occurs between the system and DtermIP SIP that enables Keeping Call func tion DtermIP SIP displays as f...

Page 3055: ... kept up even if the system is failed 4 2 7 3 Language Pattern On the Language Pattern parameter set Language Pattern for display format Automatic Pattern 1 Standard and Pattern 2 For Europe Note This parameter is available for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x or later STEP 1 Select 7 Extra Function by pressing 7 key on the SIP Settings Menu SIP Settings Menu STEP 2 Extra Function Menu ap...

Page 3056: ...key to activate Language Pattern 1 Standard Select 3 Pattern2 by pressing 3 key to activate Language Pattern 2 For Europe Default Language Pattern is set as 1 Automatic Note The currently selected item flashes STEP 4 After Language Pattern is set press OK key and go back to the Extra Function Menu STEP 5 Press Exit key on the Extra Function Menu to return to the SIP Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit...

Page 3057: ...ed setting Visual Settings LCD display setting STEP 1 To open the Audio Visual Settings Menu select 3 Audio Visual Settings by pressing 3 key on the Main Menu Main Menu STEP 2 The Audio Visual Settings Menu appears as follows Audio Visual Settings Menu Up Down Cancel 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Audio Visual Settings 4 Maintenance Settings 5 Terminal Information Save Exit 31 Audio Settings ...

Page 3058: ...dio Visual Settings Menu Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 2 Audio Settings Menu appears Select 1 Confirmation Tone by pressing 1 key Audio Settings Menu STEP 3 Select whether to enable the confirmation tone To disable the confirmation tone select 1 Disable by pressing 1 key To enable the confirmation tone select 2 Enable by pressing 2 key The confirmation tone is enabled by the default setting Exit...

Page 3059: ...y pressing 1 key on the Audio Visual Settings Menu Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 2 Audio Settings Menu appears Select 2 Music Select by pressing 2 key Audio Settings Menu STEP 3 Select whether to use the download data or default data for music on hold When selecting 1 Download Data the download data is used for music on hold When selecting 2 Default Data the default data is used for music on hol...

Page 3060: ...one Volume parameter set the volume of the side tone STEP 1 Select 1 Audio Settings by pressing 1 key on the Audio Visual Settings Menu Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 2 Audio Settings Menu appears Select 3 Sidetone Volume by pressing 3 Audio Settings Menu STEP 3 Specify the side tone volume lower 0 7 higher 9 Automatic The default value is 9 Cancel OK 2 Default Data 1 Download Data Exit 31 Audio ...

Page 3061: ...e the assigned data 4 3 1 4 Send Gain On the Send Gain parameter set the sending gain of the handset Note The sending receiving gain from the System has higher priority than the setting value from the terminal STEP 1 Select 1 Audio Settings by pressing 1 key on the Audio Visual Settings Menu Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 2 Audio Settings Menu appears Select 4 Send Gain by pressing 4 key OK Sidet...

Page 3062: ...Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the Audio Visual Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 7 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data 4 3 1 5 Receive Bias On the Receive Bias parameter set the receiving bias of the handset Up Down 311 Confirmation Tone 3 Sidetone Volume 4 Send Gain 5 Receive Bias Exit 6 Receive Gain 7 Ring Settings 2 Music Select 8 RTP Alarm 9 DTMF Play Mode O...

Page 3063: ... STEP 3 Specify the receiving bias of the handset lower 0 7 higher 9 Automatic The default value is 9 Note To delete an entered digit press BK key Exit 31 Audio Settings 2 Visual Settings Up Down 311 Confirmation Tone 3 Sidetone Volume 4 Send Gain 5 Receive Bias Exit 6 Receive Gain 7 Ring Settings 2 Music Select 8 RTP Alarm 9 DTMF Play Mode OK Receive Bias 0 7 9 for Auto X Cancel Receive Bias dB 7...

Page 3064: ...e handset Note The sending receiving gain from the System has higher priority than the setting value from the terminal STEP 1 Select 1 Audio Settings by pressing 1 key on the Audio Visual Settings Menu Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 2 Audio Settings Menu appears Select 6 Receive Gain by pressing 6 key Audio Settings Menu STEP 3 Specify the receiving gain of the handset lower 0 31 higher 99 Automa...

Page 3065: ... Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data 4 3 1 7 Ring Settings On the Ring Settings parameter set the Tone Type to each Ringer Pattern STEP 1 Select 1 Audio Settings by pressing 1 key on the Audio Visual Settings Menu Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 2 Audio Settings Menu appears Select 7 Ring Settings by pressing 7 key OK Receive Gain 0 31 99 for Auto XX Cancel Gain Value Country 0 min...

Page 3066: ...2 Music Select 8 RTP Alarm 9 DTMF Play Mode 3171 External Call 2 Internal Call Exit OK 1 Pattern A Cancel Tone Type No 1st Frequency Hz 2ndFrequency Hz Tone Kind Pattern A 520 660 16 Hz modulation Pattern B 520 660 8 Hz modulation Pattern C 1400 1100 Door Phone Pattern D 1100 No modulation Pattern E 540 No modulation Pattern F 1100 1400 16 Hz modulation Pattern G 660 760 16 Hz modulation Pattern H...

Page 3067: ...he assigned data 4 3 1 8 RTP Alarm On the RTP Alarm parameter determine whether to send RTP Warning Tone to the terminal Note This parameter is available for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 3 0 0 0 or later STEP 1 Select 1 Audio Settings by pressing 1 key on the Audio Visual Settings Menu Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 2 Audio Settings Menu appears Select 8 RTP Alarm by pressing 8 key Audio Set...

Page 3068: ...Audio Settings Menu to go back to the Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the Audio Visual Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 7 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data 4 3 1 9 DTMF Play Mode On the DTMF Play Mode parameter determine whether to play back the DTMF tone Note This parameter is available for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 3 0 0 0 or lat...

Page 3069: ...n set by the default STEP 4 Press OK key and go back to the Audio Settings Menu STEP 5 Press Exit key on the Audio Settings Menu to go back to the Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the Audio Visual Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 7 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Up Down 311 Confirmation Tone 3 Sidetone Volume 4 Send Gain 5 Receive Bias E...

Page 3070: ...ars Select 1 Time Display Type by pressing 1 key Visual Settings Menu STEP 3 Select either 12 hour AM PM or 24 hour time indication The default setting is 12 hour time indication Note The currently enabled item flashes STEP 4 Press OK key and go back to the Visual Settings Menu STEP 5 Press Exit key on the Audio Settings Menu to go back to the Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on th...

Page 3071: ...play the local volume indication select 1 Disable by pressing 1 key To display the local volume indication select 2 Enable by pressing 2 key The default setting is Enable Note The currently enabled item flashes STEP 4 Press OK key and go back to the Visual Settings Menu STEP 5 Press Exit key on the Audio Settings Menu to go back to the Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the Audio ...

Page 3072: ...layed on the LCD The selectable languages are English NEC Portuguese NEC Spanish NEC and French NEC for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version earlier than 4 1 x x For DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x or later the selectable languages are German Italian Dutch Norwegian Danish Swedish Greek English Portuguese Spanish and French in addition to above 1 Automatic is set by the default setting Note...

Page 3073: ...u STEP 5 Press Exit key on the Audio Settings Menu to go back to the Audio Visual Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the Audio Visual Settings Menu and go back to the Main Menu STEP 7 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data OK 1 Automatic 2 English NEC Cancel 3 Portuguese NEC 4 Spanish NEC 5 French NEC Up Down 6 German 7 Italian 8 Dutch 9 Norwegian 10 Danish 11 Swedish 12 Gre...

Page 3074: ...phone test Config Password Mode Set the control method of Configuration Password STEP 1 To open the SIP Settings Menu select 4 Maintenance Settings by pressing 4 on the Main Menu Main Menu STEP 2 The Maintenance Settings Menu appears as follows Maintenance Settings Menu Note 6 Auto Config is not supported by DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x Up Down Cancel 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings...

Page 3075: ...At this time if the IP address of the TFTP FTP server has already been assigned go to Step 5 STEP 3 Enter IP address of the TFTP FTP server For example to set the IP address of 10 41 208 205 enter 10 41 208 205 separate with an asterisk Note To delete an entered character press BK key STEP 4 Press OK key to save the assigned IP address and go back to the display of Step 2 STEP 5 Select 1 Download ...

Page 3076: ...e not supported by DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x STEP 7 The default file name is displayed on the LCD If it is necessary to change the file name to be down loaded change the file name A maximum of 20 characters 0 9 A Z a z or _ can be entered as a file name Note 1 Note To delete an entered character press BK key Note 1 An input character or number changes depending on the number of tim...

Page 3077: ...lete is displayed the terminal will be reset hard reset When pressing Exit key while Download Failed is displayed the display of STEP 6 will ap pear again Digit Key The Number of Times Key is Pressed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 2 a b c A B C 2 3 d e f D E F 3 4 g h i G H I 4 5 j k l J K L 5 6 m n o M N O 6 7 p q r s P Q R S 7 8 t u v T U V 8 9 w x y z W X Y Z 9 0 0 _ Downloading During the downloading p...

Page 3078: ... the Maintenance Settings Menu Maintenance Settings Menu Note 6 Auto Config is not supported by DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x STEP 2 Press OK key to reset the terminal hard reset At this time the setting data is not saved Exit 41 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset Up Down 3 Factory Value 4 Simple Test Mode 5 Config Password Mode 6 Auto Config OK Hard Reset Execute Cancel ...

Page 3079: ...nce Settings Menu Note 6 Auto Config is not supported by DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x STEP 2 Press OK key to reset the terminal to its factory defaults Note After resetting the terminal to its factory defaults new data is saved when Save key is pressed on the Main Menu Exit 41 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset Up Down 3 Factory Value 4 Simple Test Mode 5 Config Password Mode 6 Auto Config OK...

Page 3080: ...l Test Ad dress STEP 1 Select 4 Simple Test Mode by pressing 4 key on the Maintenance Settings Menu Maintenance Settings Menu Note 6 Auto Config is not supported by DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x STEP 2 Select 1 Test Call On by pressing 1 key on the Simple Test Mode Menu Simple Test Mode Menu STEP 3 The telephone call test is started The display changes as follows Exit 41 Download Menu ...

Page 3081: ...IP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x STEP 2 Select 2 Call Test Address by pressing 2 key on the Simple Test Mode Menu Simple Test Mode Menu STEP 3 Enter IP address of the destination terminal For example to set the IP address of 10 41 208 205 enter 10 41 208 205 separate with an asterisk Exit Path On Test Call Start Exit 41 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset Up Down 3 Factory Value 4 Simple Test Mode 5 Config...

Page 3082: ... Maintenance Settings Menu Note 6 Auto Config is not supported by DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x STEP 2 Select 3 Key Test Random by pressing 3 key on the Simple Test Mode Menu Simple Test Mode Menu STEP 3 The Key Test Random screen is displayed Perform the key test keys are randomly pressed Cancel OK Use For Adr XXX XXX XXX XXX BK Exit 41 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset Up Down 3 Factory Val...

Page 3083: ... Menu Note 6 Auto Config is not supported by DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x STEP 2 Select 4 Key Test Seq by pressing 4 key on the Simple Test Mode Menu Simple Test Mode Menu STEP 3 The Key Test Seq screen is displayed Perform the key test keys are sequentially pressed XXXXXXX Ver X XX TEST PUSH Exit 41 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset Up Down 3 Factory Value 4 Simple Test Mode 5 Config Passwo...

Page 3084: ...nance Settings Menu Note 6 Auto Config is not supported by DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x STEP 2 Select 5 Voice Loopback by pressing 5 key on the Simple Test Mode Menu Simple Test Mode Menu STEP 3 Determine how to perform the loopback test XXXXXXX NEXT F12 TEST PUSH Exit 41 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset Up Down 3 Factory Value 4 Simple Test Mode 5 Config Password Mode 6 Auto Config Exit 44...

Page 3085: ... with Firmware Version 4 1 x x STEP 2 Select 6 Speaker Test by pressing 6 key on the Simple Test Mode Menu Exit 1 Handset Hand Speaker 2 Handset Speaker Up Down 3 Headset Head Speaker 4 Headset Speaker 5 MIC Handset Speaker 6 MIC Headset Speaker 7 MIC Speaker Key No Send Speak Receive Hear 1 Handset Handset 2 Handset Speaker 3 Headset Headset 4 Headset Speaker 5 Microphone Handset 6 Microphone Hea...

Page 3086: ...ressing 1 or 2 key STEP 4 The display changes as follows You hear Dial Tone from the speaker at the maximum volume STEP 5 After hearing the Dial Tone press Exit key to go back to the Simple Test Mode Menu Exit 441 Test Call On 2 Call Test Address Up Down 3 Key Test Random 4 Key Test Seq 5 Voice Loopback 6 Speaker Test Exit 2 Japan 4461 America Exit Dial Tone On Speaker Test Start ...

Page 3087: ...er 1 Disable by pressing 1 key or 2 Enable by pressing 2 key When 1 Dis able is selected password authentication for User Mode is set to OFF When 2 Enable is selected password authentication for User Mode is set to ON Note 1 Disable is set by the default setting When 1 Disable is selected go to the STEP 5 When 2 Enable is selected go to the next step STEP 3 STEP 3 Enter the login password up to 20...

Page 3088: ...ntered here differs from the password entered in STEP 3 the following message will be displayed To re enter the correct password press Retry key STEP 5 Press OK key to go back to the Maintenance Settings Menu STEP 6 Press Exit key on the Maintenance Settings to go back to the Main Menu STEP 7 Press Save key on the Main Menu to save the assigned data Cancel OK XXXXXXXXXX Confirm BK Cancel Retry Una...

Page 3089: ...pears as follows Hardware Version Display the hardware version of the terminal Firmware Version Display the firmware version of the terminal MAC Address Display the MAC address of the terminal Terminal Information Menu Up Down Cancel 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Audio Visual Settings 4 Maintenance Settings 5 Terminal Information Save Exit XX XX XX XX Hardware Version Up Down Press Down key ...

Page 3090: ... Help key is pressed is shorter than one second PRESS ANY SOFTKEY FOR HELP is displayed as conventional operation When the terminal is in normal operation one of the following messages are displayed on the terminal s LCD DHCP Connecting While connecting to DHCP without VLAN Connecting While connecting to SIP server without VLAN DHCP Connecting VLAN While connecting to DHCP with VLAN Connecting VLA...

Page 3091: ...th SIP server is completed successfully Download Complete Program Download by SIP server instruction is completed successful ly Parameter Missing Cert 802 1X Authentication data error Note 1 Failed Cert 802 1X Authentication is failed Note 1 Time Display in idle or busy state When the terminal is in busy state the LCD display cannot be moved to Configuration Setting screen but it can be moved to O...

Page 3092: ...size Note 3 Note 1 The maximum displayable value is 99999999 Even if the number of packet loss events is more than 99999999 99999999 is displayed on the LCD Note 2 During a conversation the number of packet loss events for five seconds is displayed After a lapse of five seconds the counting of the number of packet loss events is started again and the result of the next five seconds is displayed on...

Page 3093: ...VOL 3 606 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP Note 3 The display pattern for Codec and Payload is as follows Codec Payload G 711μ 10 20 30 40 G 711A 10 20 30 40 G 729a 10 20 30 40 ...

Page 3094: ...tion of Network Settings is displayed When pressing 2 key setting information of SIP Settings is displayed When pressing 3 key setting information of Audio Visual Settings is displayed When pressing 4 key the download address is displayed When pressing 5 key Terminal Information is displayed System Information Main Screen Note 5 Terminal Information is available for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Versi...

Page 3095: ...Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Up key Press Down key Up Down Prev XXX XXX XXX XXX DNS Address Up Down Prev XXX XXX XXX XXX Subnet Mask Up Down Prev XXX XXX XXX XXX Default Gateway Up Down Prev XXXX VLAN ID Up Down Prev Disable Enable VLAN Mode Up Down Prev X VLAN Priority Up Down Prev Autonego Speed Duplex Up Down Prev Disable Enable PC Port VLAN Mode Up Dow...

Page 3096: ...g three settings Prev ON Auto PC Port Available Up Down Prev OFF Auto PC Port Available Up Down Prev OFF PC Port Available Up Down 2 PC port is disabled according to directions from the System 3 PC Port is disabled accord ing to the configuration setting 1 PC port is enabled according to directions from the System ...

Page 3097: ...p Down Prev XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Connecting Server PX Up Down Prev Remote Normal Access Mode Up Down Prev XXXX Port 1st Up Down Prev XXXX Port 2nd Up Down Prev XXXX Port 3rd Up Down Prev XXXX Port 4th Up Down Prev XXXXXXXXXXXXXX Area ID Press Up key Up Down Prev Disable Enable Authentication Mode Up Down Prev XXX XXX XXX XXX 1st Server Up Down Prev XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1st Server PX Systm ...

Page 3098: ...ion 162 is recognized as IP address used for Lo cation Diversity L 55 Thus IP address is not displayed on 1st Server 2nd Server 3rd Server and 4th Server screens but displayed on Connecting Server screen Prev XXX XXX XXX XXX Connecting Server Up Down Prev IP Address is Invalid 1st Server Up Down Prev IP Address is Invalid 2nd Server Up Down Prev IP Address is Invalid 3rd Server Up Down Prev IP Add...

Page 3099: ...own key Press Down key Press Up key Press Up key Press Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Down key Press Up key Press Up key Press Down key Up Down Prev XX Send Gain Up Down Prev X Sidetone Volume Up Down Prev Pattern X Ring Internal Call Up Down Prev XX Receive Gain Up Down Prev X Receive Bias Up Down Prev Pattern X Ring External Call Up Down Prev OFF ON Volume...

Page 3100: ...the configuration setting 1 RTP Alarm is ON according to directions from the System Prev ON RTP Alarm Up Down 4 RTP Alarm is OFF according to the configuration setting Default Setting Prev ON Auto DTMF Play Mode Up Down Prev OFF Auto DTMF Play Mode Up Down Prev OFF DTMF Play Mode Up Down 2 DTMF Play Mode is OFF according to directions from the System 3 DTMF Play Mode is ON according to the configu...

Page 3101: ...CONFIGURATION SETUP 5 2 4 Maintenance Settings Information Note To go back to the System Information Main screen press Prev key Press 4 key Press Prev key Prev XXX XXX XXX XXX Download Address System Information Main Menu ...

Page 3102: ...minal Information display is available for DtermIP SIP with Firmware Version 4 1 x x or later Up Down Prev XX XX XX XX Hardware Version Up Down Prev XX XX XX XX XX XX MAC Address System Information Main Menu Press Up key Press Up key Press Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Down key Up Down Prev XX XX XX XX Firmware Version Press 5 key ...

Page 3103: ...ay 1 press Prev key to go back to the Online Monitoring screen and then press 3 key again STEP 3 After pressing OK key on the screen of Step 2 1 ping command is sent to the specified IP address At this time the destination IP address and the ping sending result are displayed on the LCD After the ping is sent four times Complete is displayed in the second line of the LCD Also Prev and Retry keys ap...

Page 3104: ...d as the ping sending result Screen status NI status Destination IP address entry screen Ping sending screen NI is not running NG is displayed without sending the ping NG is displayed without sending the ping NI is running The ping is sent Either OK or NG is displayed The ping is sent Either OK or NG is displayed 1 Ping XXX XXX XXX XXX Ping Command is sent after pressing OK key 1OK 2 First time Re...

Page 3105: ... Configuration setup is not supported on terminals without LCD 2 Configuration Setup by Web Programming By using Web Programming application various settings for the terminal is possible from the maintenance console Web Programming supports both types of terminal with LCD and without LCD For details see Section 6 2 Configuration Data Setting Procedure This section describes the configuration setti...

Page 3106: ...3 3 2 0 within 100 night Hotel Search Lake Sea of XXX Ubiquitous St 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 6 7 10 11 12 15 16 13 14 17 18 19 22 23 20 21 24 25 26 29 30 27 28 2010 June City Map Related Sites Distance Admission Fee Small Children Categories Transportation Area Art Music Ubiquitous City by walking Search City Music Hall 2 3 1 Ubiquitous City AM 10 00 PM 5 00 1 1 1 Ubiquitous City AM 10 00 PM 5 00 3 3 2 Ubiqu...

Page 3107: ...Go to STEP 5 END DT750 Series Color LCD Without Home URL Note 2 The Home URL can be displayed from 0 Config 6 Application Settings 1 XML Settings 2 XML Browser 1 Home URL For details refer to Confugration Menu List Available only for firmware issue 2 0 0 0 or later DT730 Series Standard LCD Without Home URL DT710 Series 2 line LCD 1 38PM FRI 11 Jan 2008 MIC DND DT750 Series Color LCD With Home URL...

Page 3108: ...lection on Map Other Information Ubiquitous City 2010 07 12 3 3 2 0 within 100 night Hotel Search Lake Sea of XXX Ubiquitous St 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 6 7 10 11 12 15 16 13 14 17 18 19 22 23 20 21 24 25 26 29 30 27 28 2010 June City Map Related Sites Distance Admission Fee Small Children Categories Transportation Area Art Music Ubiquitous City by walking Search City Music Hall 2 3 1 Ubiquitous City AM 10 0...

Page 3109: ... The LCD displays password entry screen Enter User Name and Password and then press the software key for OK STEP 3 After a while Config menu is displayed Password BK Set Cancel OK Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save END User Name ADMIN Terminals with Menu button Menu 0 Terminals without Menu button Hold Transfer ACD terminals with Key Pads Release Hold Note ...

Page 3110: ... 0 key DT710 Series 2 line LCD 0 Config Administrator Menu STEP 1 On Menu screen select the following menu for each terminal type STEP 2 The LCD displays password entry screen for administrator s menu User Name ADMIN Password BK Set Cancel OK STEP 3 After a while Config menu is displayed Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Set...

Page 3111: ...estaurant Hotel Bookings Reservation Seek Resv Cancel Detail Breakfast Area First Night Nights Nationality Price Adults Children Infants Selection on Calendar Selection on Map Other Information Ubiquitous City 2010 07 12 3 3 2 0 within 100 night Hotel Search Lake Sea of XXX Ubiquitous St 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 6 7 10 11 12 15 16 13 14 17 18 19 22 23 20 21 24 25 26 29 30 27 28 2010 June City Map Related Sit...

Page 3112: ... alphanumeric characters and symbols on the LCD for such as user ID and password entry See the tables below for available characters and symbols Pressing the key switches the character table in the order of Bg uppercase Sm lowercase Num numbers FW 3 0 0 0 or later For DT730G FW 1 0 0 0 or later a English Bg Upper case ...

Page 3113: ...VOL 3 626 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP b English Sm Lower case ...

Page 3114: ...VOL 3 627 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP c Turkish Bg Upper case d Turkish Sm Lower case ...

Page 3115: ...VOL 3 628 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP e Russian Bg Upper case f Russian Sm Lower case ...

Page 3116: ...VOL 3 629 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP g Others EMEA Bg Upper case h Others EMEA Sm Lower case ...

Page 3117: ...VOL 3 630 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP FW 2 2 X X or earlier except for DT730G a English Bg Upper case ...

Page 3118: ...VOL 3 631 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP b English Sm Lower case ...

Page 3119: ...VOL 3 632 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP c Turkish Bg Upper case d Turkish Sm Lower case ...

Page 3120: ...VOL 3 633 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP e Russian Bg Upper case f Russian Sm Lower case ...

Page 3121: ...VOL 3 634 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP g Others EMEA Bg Upper case h Others EMEA Sm Lower case ...

Page 3122: ...menus Scroll the focused line highlighted line up Scroll the focused line highlighted line down OK Confirm the entered selected menu and move on to the next hierarchy Back Return to one menu hierarchy up without confirming the setting Exec Execute the setting with the entered selected value BK Delete the entered character Set Move on to the next setting Call History Phonebook related Detail Displa...

Page 3123: ...mming is displayed Enter the User ID and the password ADMIN and 6633222 are set as the default value for User ID and password respectively Be sure to change the default password See Section 6 2 14 Password Change 6 1 2 2 Operations STEP 1 Setting menu is listed on the left field of the window Select the target setting menu Note The message waiting lamp of Cradle Phone blinks in yellow while loggin...

Page 3124: ...ONFIGURATION SETUP STEP 1 Select the setting menu STEP 2 Assign parameters STEP 3 Click the Save button to save the setting data STEP 4 confirming data save is displayed Click the OK button to save the data A popup dialogue ...

Page 3125: ... operation manual of each terminal for the setting procedure using cursor key and software key 6 2 1 IP Address of DT700 Series and SIP server This menu assigns the IP address of terminal only for without DHCP configuration and the IP address or FQDN of SIP server Note 1 Assignment procedure depends on the system configuration Select from the following three methods Note 2 for configuration assign...

Page 3126: ...cessary to assign the below in the DT700 Series configuration setting DT700 Series terminal s IP address and subnet mask SIP server s IP address or FQDN Router default gateway address Setting Procedure STEP 1 Start up DT700 Series Turn on the power via PoE feeding or optional AC adapter STEP 2 Initialize data a For DT700 Series other than DT710 Series without LCD 1 On the administrator s menu Conf...

Page 3127: ...r is prepared in the network When necessary assign IP address for DNS server Type 3 Without DHCP Server Set DHCP to Disable Assign IP address or FQDN for the primary SIP server Assign IP address for second third fourth SIP server Perform this assignment only when backup SIP server is prepared in the network When necessary assign IP address for DNS server Assign IP address for DT700 Series terminal...

Page 3128: ...option 120 If there is no option 120 3rd priority is terminal local setting Caution Observe the following while assigning the configuration data Do Not Turn OFF the power of the DT700 Series SIP server DHCP server Do Not Unplug or Plug the LAN cable connecting to the DT700 Series SIP server DHCP Do Not Turn OFF the power of the HUB connecting to the DT700 Series SIP server DHCP ...

Page 3129: ...n Data Clear menu select 1 Factory Value Data Clear 1 Factory Value 2 Terminal Data 3 Personal Data Exit Data Clear 1 Factory Value 2 Terminal Data 3 Personal Data Exit STEP 4 On Factory Value screen press the software key for OK to confirm Factory Value Factory Value Set Cancel OK STEP 5 All the parameters return to factory default setting On Data Clear menu press the software key for Exit to dis...

Page 3130: ...1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 8 On Network Settings menu select 1 DHCP Mode Network Settings 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway Exit STEP 9 On DHCP Mode screen verify that 2 Enable is flashing and then press the software key for OK DHCP Mode 1 Disable 2 Enable Cancel OK B A Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit ...

Page 3131: ...ware key for OK when all settings are complete When SIP server s IP address is assigned via DHCP server IP address or FQDN to specify SIP server When SIP server is specified by FQDN via DHCP server When not necessary to assign DNS server s IP address on configuration setting If DHCP option 162 information for Telephony Server which DT700 Series connected to specifies SIP server by FQDN instead of ...

Page 3132: ...ings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save Note In the following instances the terminal will display an error message SIP server does not exist in the network Connection to SIP server could not be established since the user assigned an incorrect value Connection to DHCP Server could not be established since the user assigned an incorrect value If the above occurs perform one of the fol...

Page 3133: ... following Obtain DNS server s IP address from the DHCP server Assign DNS server s IP address on DT700 Series configuration setting When not necessary to assign DNS server s IP address on configuration setting STEP 8 STEP 6 Select Network Settings DNS Address STEP 7 Enter the IP address of DNS server Click the OK button STEP 8 Click the Save button After setting is complete SIP server begins setup...

Page 3134: ...server Do Not Unplug or Plug the LAN cable connecting to the DT700 Series SIP server DHCP Do Not Turn OFF the power of the HUB connecting to the DT700 Series SIP server DHCP STEP 1 On Config main menu select 3 Maintenance Settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 2 On Maintenance menu select 3 Data Clear Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Dat...

Page 3135: ...select 1 DHCP Mode Network Settings 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway Exit STEP 9 On DHCP Mode screen verify that 2 Enable is flashing and then press the software key for OK DHCP Mode 1 Disable 2 Enable Cancel OK B A Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit Data Clear 1 Factory Value 2 Terminal Data 3 Personal Data Exit STEP 5 All the parameters return to factory default...

Page 3136: ...s using the number button Use to separate each bytes Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete When SIP server s IP address is assigned via DHCP server IP address or FQDN to specify SIP server When SIP server is specified by FQDN via DHCP server When not necessary to assign DNS server s IP address on configuration setting It is necessary to perform either of the following Obtain...

Page 3137: ...turn to Config menu STEP 14 On Config menu select 2 SIP Settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 15 On SIP Settings menu select 2 Server Address SIP Settings 1 SIP User 2 Server Address 3 Access Mode Exit STEP 16 On Server Address menu select 1 1st Server Address Server Address 1 1st Server Address 2 2nd Server Address 3 3rd Server Address Exit ...

Page 3138: ...er to related part of Volume 1 in this manual As in STEP 17 specify the SIP server by IP address or FQDN Assign fully qualified domain name of SIP server using digit keys 0 9 A Z a z period hyphen and _ underscore is available to use for domain name entry maximum 128 characters Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete Press the software key for IP URI to switch the mode to URI ...

Page 3139: ... Settings menu STEP 21 On SIP Settings menu press the software key for Exit to return to Config menu SIP Settings 1 SIP User 2 Server Address 3 Access Mode Exit Server Address 1 1st Server Address 2 2nd Server Address 3 3rd Server Address Exit Note In the following instances the terminal will display an error message SIP server does not exist in the network Connection to SIP server could not be es...

Page 3140: ... OK button 0 9 A Z a z period hyphen and _ underscore is available to use for domain name entry maximum 128 characters Note DNS server s assignment is necessary when using fully qualified domain name See IP Address Setting for DNS Server for details Note 1 About IP address of SIP server Telephony Server refer to Registration Destination of IP Devices Sta tions in INTRODUCTION of Installation Manua...

Page 3141: ...ed in a way that does not use DHCP server The followings are necessary to assign in the DT700 Series configuration setting DT700 Series terminal s IP address and Subnet mask Router default gateway address SIP server s IP address or FQDN Caution Observe the following while assigning the configuration data Do Not Turn OFF the power of the DT700 Series SIP server DHCP server Do Not Unplug or Plug the...

Page 3142: ...On Maintenance menu select 3 Data Clear Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit STEP 3 On Data Clear menu select 1 Factory Value Data Clear 1 Factory Value 2 Terminal Data 3 Personal Data Exit STEP 4 On Factory Value screen press the software key for OK Factory Value Factory Value Set Cancel OK A Note For other operations and of software key cursor key and touch sensitive panel ...

Page 3143: ...On Network Settings menu select 1 DHCP Mode Network Settings 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway Exit STEP 9 On DHCP Mode screen 2 Enable is flashing DHCP Mode 1 Disable 2 Enable Cancel OK B A Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit Data Clear 1 Factory Value 2 Terminal Data 3 Personal Data Exit STEP 5 All the parameters return to factory default setting On Data Clear men...

Page 3144: ...On IP Address setting screen assign the IP address of DT700 Series terminal using number keys STEP 10 Select 1 and verify that 1 Disabled line is flashing Then press the software key for OK DHCP Mode 1 Disable 2 Enable Cancel OK IP Address For 0 0 0 0 BK Cancel OK Use to separate each bytes Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete STEP 14 On Default Gateway setting screen assig...

Page 3145: ...tngs Menu List Up Down On Network Settings menu press the software key for Exit to return to Config menu FQDN IP address Network Settings 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway Exit Network Settings 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway Exit STEP 17 The LCD displays Network Settings menu STEP 18 On Network Settings menu select 5 DNS Address When IP address is used to specify SIP server IP...

Page 3146: ...3 Default Gateway Exit STEP 20 The LCD displays Network Settings menu Press the software key for Exit to return to Config menu STEP 21 On Config menu select 2 SIP Settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 22 On SIP Settings menu select 2 Server Address SIP Settings 1 SIP User 2 Server Address 3 Access Mode Exit STEP 23 On Server Address menu select 1...

Page 3147: ... IP address or FQDN Assign fully qualified domain name of SIP server using digit keys 0 9 A Z a z period hyphen and _ underscore is available to use for domain name entry maximum 128 characters Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete Press the software key for IP URI to switch the mode to URI entry Select 2 to assign the second SIP server Select 3 to assign the third SIP serve...

Page 3148: ...s 1 SIP User 2 Server Address 3 Access Mode Exit Server Address 1 1st Server Address 2 2nd Server Address 3 3rd Server Address Exit Note In the following instances the terminal will display an error message SIP server does not exist in the network Connection to SIP server could not be established since the user assigned an incorrect value Connection to DHCP Server could not be established since th...

Page 3149: ...IP address of DNS server Click the OK button STEP 14 Select SIP Settings Server Address URI 1st Server Address a To specify SIP server by IP address Assign the IP address of SIP server and then click the OK button Note 1 b To specify SIP server by FQDN Assign fully qualified domain name of SIP server and then click the OK button 0 9 A Z a z period hyphen and _ underscore is available to use for do...

Page 3150: ...er assigned an incorrect value If the above occurs perform one of the following Reassign data settings Connect SIP server to the network Connect DHCP Server to the network Refer to Error Messages for details on error messages 6 2 2 PC Port Remote Control To use PC Port Remote Control feature assigned by PCPro programming the following setting is also required on DT700 Series terminal side Note Ref...

Page 3151: ...vanced Settings 1 LAN Port Settings 2 PC Port Settings 3 CDP Mode Exit STEP 1 On Config menu select 1 Network Settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway 4 Subnet Mask 5 DNS Address 6 Advanced Settings Network Settngs Menu List Up Down Note For other operations and of software key cursor key and touch sensitive pan...

Page 3152: ...able setting screen Perform either of the following a When automatically setting the DT700 Series terminal s PC port status following the setting on PCPro b When disabling the DT700 Series terminal s PC port without following the setting on PCPro 1 Select 0 Automatic 2 0 Automatic flashes 3 Press the software key for OK 1 Select 1 Disable 2 1 Disable flashes 3 Press the software key for OK Port Av...

Page 3153: ...ng the setting on PCPro STEP 3 Click the save button 6 2 3 Type of Service ToS ToS value can be changed on DT700 Series terminal Note During operation ToS value assigned by the Telephony Server is enabled It is unnecessary to assign ToS value on the DT700 Series terminal side B END STEP 8 The LCD returns to Network Settings menu Press the software key for Exit to return to Config menu Network Sett...

Page 3154: ... Address 6 Advanced Settings Network Settings Menu List Up Down 1 Press the number button 0 once 2 Press the number button 2 three times The value changes 2 A B STEP 4 The LCD displays Type of Service setting screen Select the packet type for setting ToS 1 RTP 2 SIP Type of Service 1 RTP 2 SIP Cancel OK STEP 5 ToS value setting screen for the selected packet type RTP in this example is displayed E...

Page 3155: ...button A END STEP 8 The LCD returns to Network Settings menu Press the software key for Exit to return to Config menu Network Settings 4 Subnet Mask 5 DNS Address 6 Advanced Settings Exit STEP 9 On Config screen press the software key Save to save the settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 7 The LCD returns to Advanced Settings menu Press the soft...

Page 3156: ...Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 4 The LCD displays User ID setting screen Enter User ID using the digit keys Use digit keys 0 9 and Press the software key for BK to delete entered value Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete STEP 5 The LCD returns to SIP User menu Select 2 Password SIP Settings 1 SIP User 2 Server Address 3 Acc...

Page 3157: ...e LCD returns to SIP Settings menu Press the software key for Exit to return to Config menu SIP Settings 1 SIP User 2 Server Address 3 Access Mode Exit Password xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx BK Cancel OK Enter Password for the User ID using the digit keys Use digit keys 0 9 and Press the software key for BK to delete entered value Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete Note The terminal ...

Page 3158: ...ion Setting on Terminal SIP Server Port 1 1st Server Port 2 2nd Server Port 3 3rd Server Port Exit A STEP 2 The LCD displays SIP Settings menu Select 4 SIP Server Port STEP 3 The LCD displays SIP Server Port menu STEP 1 On Config menu select 2 SIP Settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save SIP Settings 1 SIP User 2 Server Address 3 Access Mode Exit Perform...

Page 3159: ...keys Use digit keys It is possible to enter values between 1024 65535 Default value is 5060 Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete 1st Server Port 5060 1024 65535 1024 65535 BK Cancel OK STEP 5 The LCD returns to SIP Server Port menu Press the software key for Exit SIP Server Port 1 1st Server Port 2 2nd Server Port 3 3rd Server Port Exit STEP 7 On Config screen press the sof...

Page 3160: ...nitial value is 5060 STEP 4 Click the Save button After setting is complete SIP server begins setup for DT700 Series 6 2 6 Area ID DT700 Series terminal can adjust its tone patterns for different areas countries that it is used in The user must assign the Area ID to make this possible This section explains the areas where DT700 Series usage is possible and the procedure to change the Area ID 1 Con...

Page 3161: ...s displayed in the configuration menu earlier than FW 4 0 0 0 except for DT730G 18 Italy 19 Netherlands 20 Catalonia Not used 21 Denmark 22 Sweden 23 Poland 24 Czech 25 Norway 26 France 27 Portugal 28 Spain 29 Austria 30 Belgium 31 UK 32 Greece 33 Switzerland 34 South Africa 35 Brazil NECU Note 2 Countries Areas Where DT700 Series Usage is Available Note 1 Area ID Country ...

Page 3162: ...splays 01 3 1 Japan display flashes 4 Press software key for OK When selecting 1 Japan Area ID 01 0 Automatic 1 Japan 2 America Cancel OK STEP 4 The LCD returns to SIP Settings menu Press the software key for Exit to return to Config menu SIP Settings 1 SIP User 2 Server Address 3 Access Mode Exit STEP 5 On Config screen press the software key Save to save the settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 ...

Page 3163: ...tic Telephony Server side setting is applied when Automatic is selected 1 Japan 2 America Canada and North America 3 Australia 4 Others 5 Hong Kong 6 Malaysia 7 Singapore 8 Mexico 9 Taiwan 10 New Zealand 11 Korea 12 Brazil 13 China 14 Thailand 15 Thailand EGAT 16 Sri Lanka 17 Germany 18 Italy 19 Netherlands 20 Catalonia Not used 21 Denmark 22 Sweden 23 Poland 24 Czech 25 Norway 26 France 27 Portug...

Page 3164: ...re DT700 Series Usage is Available Area ID Country Extra Function 1 Retransmit Interval 2 Keeping Call 3 Howler Tone Exit STEP 3 The LCD displays Extra Function menu Select 2 Keeping Call to display the Keeping Cal menu STEP 1 On Config menu select 2 SIP Settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 2 The LCD displays SIP Settings menu Select 6 Extra Fun...

Page 3165: ...ig menu STEP 6 On Config screen press the software key for Save to save the settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save END STEP 4 Select 2 Enable Verify that 2 Enable line is flashing Then press the software key for OK Keeping Call 1 Disable 2 Enable Cancel OK Note When 2 Disable is selected an ongoing call through the handset will be kept until the approp...

Page 3166: ... Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 2 On Maintenance menu select 4 Adjust to display the Adjust menu Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit STEP 3 On Adjust menu select 1 Audio Adjust Exit STEP 4 On Audio menu select 1 Sidetone Volume Audio A 1 Audio 2 Key Kit Type 3 Calibration 1 Sidetone Volume 2 Send Gain 3 Receive Bias Exit Note For other operations and of software key c...

Page 3167: ... complete to return to Audio menu Sidetone Volume 0 7 4 BK Cancel OK Use digit keys 0 7 Press the software key for BK to delete entered value Note 1 Sidetone volume set by system takes priority over this setting Assigned Value Sidetone Volume Value dB 0 54 minimum value 1 48 2 42 3 36 4 30 initial value 5 24 6 18 7 12 maximum value END STEP 8 On Maintenance menu press the software key for Exit to ...

Page 3168: ... have priority over the terminal side settings 1 Configuration Setting on Terminal STEP 1 On Config main menu select 3 Maintenance Settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 2 On Maintenance menu select 4 Adjust to display the Adjust menu Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit STEP 3 On Adjust menu select 1 Audio Adjust Exit STEP 4...

Page 3169: ...ey for OK when all settings are complete to return to Audio menu Send Gain 0 31 24 BK Cancel OK Use digit keys 0 31 Press the software key for BK to delete entered value END STEP 8 On Maintenance menu press the software key for Exit to display Config menu Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit STEP 9 On Config main menu press the software key for Save to save settings Config 1 ...

Page 3170: ...nfiguration Setting on Terminal STEP 1 On Config main menu select 3 Maintenance Settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 2 On Maintenance menu select 4 Adjust to display the Adjust menu Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit STEP 3 On Adjust menu select 1 Audio Adjust Exit STEP 4 On Audio menu select 3 Receive Bias Audio A 1 Audi...

Page 3171: ...Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete to return to Audio menu Receive Bias 0 7 0 BK Cancel OK Use digit keys 0 7 Press the software key for BK to delete entered value Assigned Value Receive Bias Value dB 7 6 minimum value 6 4 5 2 4 0 3 6 2 4 1 2 0 0 initial value END STEP 8 On Maintenance menu press the software key for Exit to display Config menu Maintenance 1 Download Menu...

Page 3172: ...e it will have priority over the terminal tone settings 1 Configuration Setting on Terminal STEP 1 On Config main menu select 3 Maintenance Settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 2 On Maintenance menu select 4 Adjust to display the Adjust menu Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit STEP 3 On Adjust menu select 1 Audio Adjust Ex...

Page 3173: ...Receive Gain Note 1 Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete to return to Audio menu Receive Gain 0 31 22 BK Cancel OK Use digit keys 0 31 Press the software key for BK to delete entered value Note 1 Sidetone volume set by system takes priority over this setting Note 2 Volume becomes 2 dB higher lower in each change of Assigned Value END STEP 8 On Maintenance menu press the sof...

Page 3174: ...erates by connecting to a switch corresponding to authentication If unauthorized hardware is connected to the PC port after authentication process is completed un authorized access to the network will occur To prevent this from happening we recommend users to perform either of the following Perform preventive measures on authentication switch side Disable PC Port in DT700 Series Configuration menu...

Page 3175: ...he following are required on the au thentication switch side Multi Host Authentication Feature MAC Address Authentication Feature When separating Audio and Data Network by attaching different VLAN ID to the packets from the PC and the packets from the DT700 Series respectively Multi Host Authentication Feature corresponding to VLAN Tag is required on authentication switch side Note Hardware with S...

Page 3176: ...1X Supplicant 2 Push Server 3 Admin Password Exit STEP 3 On 802 1X Supplicant menu select 1 Supplicant to display the Supplicant menu A 802 1X Supplicant Exit 1 Supplicant 2 EAP Method 3 Account STEP 4 Select 2 Enable Verify that 2 Enable line is flashing Then press the software key for OK Supplicant 1 Disable 2 Enable Cancel OK Config 4 Security Cancel Save 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings N...

Page 3177: ... Z a z period hyphen and _ underbar Press the software key for BK to delete entered value Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete Account Input a account BK Cancel OK STEP 6 On Account menu use digit keys to assign the User ID for EAP MD5 authentication User may enter the following characters 0 9 A Z a z period hyphen and _ underbar Press the software key for BK to delete ente...

Page 3178: ...Exit 1 Supplicant 2 EAP Method 3 Account STEP 10 Select 2 Enable Verify that 2 Enable line is flashing Then press the software key for OK Supplicant 1 Disable 2 Enable Cancel OK Note When the user selects 2 Enable in EAPOL VLAN Mode VLAN tag will be attached according to the following data settings VLAN Mode VLAN ID VLAN Priority STEP 12 The LCD returns to Security menu Press the software key for ...

Page 3179: ...he LCD displays LAN Port Settings screen Select 2 to display the VLAN Mode menu C STEP 14 The LCD displays Network Settings menu Select 6 Advanced Settings 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway 4 Subnet Mask 5 DNS Address 6 Advanced Settings Network Settings Menu List Up Down STEP 15 On Advanced Settings menu select 1 LAN Port Settings Cancel OK LAN Port Settings 1 Speed Duplex 2 VLAN Mode 3 ...

Page 3180: ...must be between 0 7 Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete VLAN Priority Cancel OK 0 7 5 STEP 20 The LCD displays LAN Port Settings screen Select 4 to display the VLAN Priority menu Exit LAN Port Settings 4 VLAN Priority 2 VLAN Mode 3 VLAN ID STEP 22 The LCD returns to LAN Port Settings screen Press the software key for OK to return to Advanced Settings menu Cancel OK LAN Por...

Page 3181: ... EAP MD5 authentication Then click the OK button For Password use 0 9 A Z a z period hyphen and _ underscore maximum 32 characters STEP 7 Select Security 802 1X Supplicant EAP VLAN Mode STEP 23 The LCD returns to Advanced Settings menu Press the software key for Exit E STEP 24 The LCD returns to Network Settings menu Press the software key for Exit Network Settings Exit 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 ...

Page 3182: ... Settings Advance Settings LAN Port Settings VLAN ID STEP 12 Enter VLAN ID The value must be within 0 4094 Click the OK button STEP 13 Select Network Settings Advance Settings LAN Port Settings VLAN Priority STEP 14 Enter VLAN Priority The value must be within 0 7 Click the OK button STEP 15 Click the Save button Note 1 When the user selects 2 Enable in EAP VLAN Mode VLAN tag will be attached acco...

Page 3183: ...s menu Select 6 Advanced Settings PC Port Settings 4 Port VLAN Priority 5 Port Available 6 EAPOL Forwarding Exit STEP 4 The LCD displays PC Port Settings menu Select 6 EAPOL Forwarding STEP 1 On Config menu select 1 Network Settings Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway 4 Subnet Mask 5 DNS Address 6 Advanced Settings ...

Page 3184: ... 6 The LCD returns to PC Port Settings menu Select 2 Port VLAN Mode PC Port Settings 1 Speed Duplex 2 Port VLAN Mode 3 Port VLAN ID Exit STEP 8 The LCD returns to PC Port Settings menu Select 3 Port VLAN ID PC Port Settings 1 Speed Duplex 2 Port VLAN Mode 3 Port VLAN ID Exit STEP 9 The LCD displays VLAN ID menu Use digit keys to assign VLAN ID VLAN ID value must be between 0 4094 Press the softwar...

Page 3185: ...be between 0 7 Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete VLAN Priority Cancel OK 0 7 5 STEP 13 The LCD displays Port Security menu Select 2 Enable and press the software key for OK Port Security 1 Disable 2 Enable OK Cancel STEP 14 The LCD displays PC Port Settings menu Press the software key for Exit PC Port Settings Exit 4 Port VLAN Priority 2 Port VLAN Mode 3 Port VLAN ID C N...

Page 3186: ...ettings PC Port Settings Port VLAN ID STEP 6 Enter VLAN ID The ID value must be between 0 4094 Then click the OK button STEP 7 Select Network Settings Advance Settings PC Port Settings Port VLAN Priority STEP 8 Enter VLAN ID The ID value must be between 0 7 Then click the OK button STEP 9 Click the Save button C STEP 15 The LCD returns to Advanced Settings menu Press the software key for Exit Adva...

Page 3187: ... 3 Directory URL XML Settings 1 Terminal ID 2 XML Browser 3 Directory URL Exit STEP 3 On Directory URL screen enter the URL of Corporate Phonebook and press the software key for OK Directory URL Input a directory URL http xxxx xxx xxxxxx BK Cancel OK STEP 1 On Config menu select 6 Application Settings Config 4 Security 5 Terminal Information 6 Application Setting Cancel Save 1 Network Settings 2 S...

Page 3188: ...setting screen Press the software key for Exit END STEP 6 The LCD returns to App Settings menu Press the software key for Exit to return to Config menu STEP 7 On Config screen press the software key for Save to save the settings Telephony Server starts setting the DT700 Series up App Settings 1 XML Settings 2 IPM Self Port 3 Incoming Popup Exit XML Settings 1 Terminal ID 2 XML Browser 3 Directory ...

Page 3189: ...cation A Note For other operations and of software key cursor key and touch sensitive panel operation are also available Refer to Section 6 1 1 2 Operations for more details STEP 2 On User Setting menu select 4 Change Password User Setting 3 Display 1 Incoming Call 2 Talk Back OK STEP 3 On Change Password menu enter Old Pass and New Pass Then press the software key for OK Change Password Old Pass ...

Page 3190: ...ot Used END STEP 6 The LCD returns to Setting menu Press the software key for OK to save settings STEP 4 The LCD will display either of the following 1 Press the software key for OK 2 Proceed to Step 5 Complete Password Complete OK 1 Press the software key for OK 2 Return to Step 3 Error Password Password Error OK Back Setting 3 Data Backup Restore 1 User Setting 2 Download Back OK ...

Page 3191: ... Special Config Menu List Up Down STEP 2 The LCD displays Security menu Select 3 Admin Password STEP 3 On Admin Password menu enter Old Pass and New Pass Then press the software key for OK Admin Password Old Pass XXXX New Pass Retry Pass BK Set Cancel OK Security 1 Web Programming 2 Push Server 3 Admin Password Exit Note For other operations and of software key cursor key and touch sensitive panel...

Page 3192: ...lt A STEP 5 The LCD returns to Security menu Press the software key for Exit Security 1 Web Programming 2 Push Server 3 Admin Password Exit Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save END STEP 6 The LCD returns to Config menu Press the software key for Save to save settings STEP 4 The LCD will display either of the following 1 Press the software key for OK 2 Proceed...

Page 3193: ...Setting menu select 1 User Setting STEP 3 On User Setting menu select 1 Incoming Call A Setting 3 Data Backup Restore 1 User Setting 2 Download Back OK User Setting 1 Incoming Call 2 Talk 3 Display Back OK Menu 6 Presence Back OK 4 Call Func 5 Setting Note For other operations and of software key cursor key and touch sensitive panel operation are also available Refer to Section 6 1 1 2 Operations ...

Page 3194: ...ls on Ring Tone setting A STEP 5 LCD displays the Ring Tone menu Select 2 Internal Call Ring Tone 1 External Call 2 Internal Call 3 IM Back OK Not used Not used STEP 4 On Incoming Call menu select 4 Ring Tone Incoming Call 2 Offhook Ring 3 Headset Ring 4 Ring Tone Back OK ...

Page 3195: ...lody 10 Tone Type 10 Melody 1 11 Tone Type 11 Melody 2 12 Tone Type 12 Melody 3 13 Tone Type 13 Melody 4 14 Tone Type 14 Melody 5 15 Download 1 16 Download 2 17 Download 3 Note Ringing Tone settings by 2 Directory 2 Edit 8 Ringing Tone take priority over the set tings in this section The priority order is as follows 1st Priority Ringing tone settings by 2 Directory 2 Edit 8 Ringing Tone 2nd Priori...

Page 3196: ...used STEP 6 LCD displays Internal Call menu The LCD will display the following Step 1 Currently selected Ring Tone will ring Step 2 Currently selected Ring Tone Value will flash Step 3 Use number buttons to assign a Ring Tone value is between 1 17 Step 4 Newly assigned Ring Tone will ring Step 5 Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete Internal Call 00 3 Tone Type 2 Back OK 1 A...

Page 3197: ... 3 Data Backup Restore 1 User Setting 2 Download Back OK STEP 3 On User Setting menu select 2 Talk User Setting 1 Incoming Call 2 Talk 3 Display Back OK STEP 4 On Talk menu select 1 RTP Alarm Talk 1 RTP Alarm 2 DTMF Tone 3 Key Touch Tone Back OK Menu 6 Presence Back OK 4 Call Func 5 Setting Note For other operations and of software key cursor key and touch sensitive panel operation are also availa...

Page 3198: ...rm is Disabled Follows the setting assigned to system Settings assigned to system has priority RTP Alarm is Enabled only when settings assigned by system do not exist Does not follow the setting assigned by system Settings assigned to terminal has priority RTP Alarm is Enabled A STEP 5 LCD displays the RTP Alarm menu Select either Automatic Disable or Enable using digit keys 0 Automatic will be fl...

Page 3199: ... 3 Data Backup Restore 1 User Setting 2 Download Back OK STEP 3 On User Setting menu select 2 Talk User Setting 1 Incoming Call 2 Talk 3 Display Back OK STEP 4 On Talk menu select 2 DTMF Tone Talk 1 RTP Alarm 2 DTMF Tone 3 Key Touch Tone Back OK Menu 6 Presence Back OK 4 Call Func 5 Setting Note For other operations and of software key cursor key and touch sensitive panel operation are also availa...

Page 3200: ...ressing the software key for Back will return to the upper menu Talk 1 RTP Alarm 2 DTMF Tone 3 Key Touch Tone Back OK LCD Display Assignment Conditions 0 Automatic 1 Disable 2 Enable Does not follow the setting assigned by system Settings assigned to terminal has priority RTP Alarm is Disabled Follows the setting assigned to system Settings assigned to system has priority RTP Alarm is Enabled only...

Page 3201: ...STEP 1 Go to Menu main menu Select 5 Setting A STEP 2 On Setting menu select 1 User Setting Setting 3 Data Backup Restore 1 User Setting 2 Download Back OK STEP 3 On User Setting menu select 2 Talk User Setting 1 Incoming Call 2 Talk 3 Display Back OK STEP 4 On Talk menu select 4 Hold Music Talk 2 DTMF Tone 3 Key Touch Tone 4 Hold Music Back OK Menu 6 Presence Back OK 4 Call Func 5 Setting Note Fo...

Page 3202: ...efault Minuet or 2 Download by digit key and then press the software key for OK User Setting 1 Incoming Call 2 Talk 3 Display Back OK STEP 6 The LCD displays Talk menu Presings the software key for Back will return to User Setting menu Talk 2 DTMF Tone 3 Key Touch Tone 4 Hold Music Back OK ...

Page 3203: ...nal LCD Description 0 Automatic Telephony Server side s language setting is applied 1 Japanese Japanese 2 NEC English NEC English 3 NEC Portuguese NEC Portuguese 4 NEC Spanish NEC Spanish 5 NEC French NEC French 6 German German 7 Italian Italian 8 Dutch Dutch 9 Norwegian Norwegian 10 Danish Danish 11 Swedish Swedish 12 Greek Greek 13 English English 14 Portuguese Portuguese 15 Spanish Spanish 16 F...

Page 3204: ...p Restore 1 User Setting 2 Download Back OK Menu 6 Presence Back OK 4 Call Func 5 Setting Note For other operations and of software key cursor key and touch sensitive panel operation are also available Refer to Section 6 1 1 2 Operations for more details STEP 3 On User Setting menu select 3 Display User Setting 1 Incoming Call 2 Talk 3 Display Back OK ...

Page 3205: ...Language menu select the language by pressing the digit key and then press the software key for OK For example to set 2 NEC English 1 Enter 0 and 2 2 Entering field displays 02 3 2 NEC English line is focusted 4 Press the software key for OK Language 02 0 Automatic 1 Japanese 2 NEC English Back OK STEP 6 The LCD displays Display menu Presings the software key for Back will return to User Setting m...

Page 3206: ... origination including Sub Line s call origination is restricted The terminal in Security mode rings for incoming call though it cannot answer the call including Sub Line s call termination 3 To make Security mode disabled release password is required When the terminal user forget the assigned Security password the restriction can be released by administrator s menu Config 3 Maintenance Set tings ...

Page 3207: ... party can converse with a calling party though terminal operation is restricted 7 To make a call is available toward a called party in the Security mode but the called party cannot respond because the terminal is locked The terminal needs to release the Security mode to respond to the call 6 2 20 1 How to Start Release Security Mode 1 Start Security Mode Security button Security LED LCD Security ...

Page 3208: ...password entry The LCD displays Security Violation below for a password entry error Pressing the software key for Cancel will return to screen saver to keep Security mode Pressing the software key for OK will re quest the user to retry entering the password When the user mistake entering password three times the LCD displays Secu rity Violation below Pressing the software key for OK will return to...

Page 3209: ...k Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings 4 Security 5 Terminal Information 6 Application Settings Configuration Menu List Up Down Encryption 1 Authentication Mode 2 One Time Password 3 Authentication Status Exit STEP 1 On Config menu select 2 SIP Settings STEP 2 The LCD displays SIP Settings menu Select 7 Encryption STEP ...

Page 3210: ... The LCD displays One Time Password screen Enter the password for User ID up to 10 digits 0 9 On the screen the password will be displayed with To delete the entered value press the software key for BK Press the software key for OK when password entry is finished STEP 7 The LCD displays Encryption menu A Encryption 1 Authentication Mode 2 One Time Password 3 Authentication Status Exit B Note Enter...

Page 3211: ...e same One Time Password as the password assigned to the Telephony Server STEP 5 Click the Save button SIP Settings 1 SIP User 2 Server Address URI 3 Access Mode Exit Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 8 On Encryption menu press the software key for Exit The LCD displays SIP Settings menu STEP 9 On SIP Settings menu press the software key for Exit The ...

Page 3212: ... Note Emergency Call can be set for firmware version 3 0 0 0 DT730G with firmware version 1 0 0 0 For DT710 DESI Less terminal Security Lock is not supported Thus Emergency Call is not available When using DT700 Series DT750 DT730 DT710 with firmware version 5 0 0 0 or later or DT730G if Security Lock is not set after originating an Emergency Call Security Lock will be set after 60 minutes from re...

Page 3213: ...cy Call 1 Emergency Dial 1 2 Emergency Dial 2 3 Emergency Dial 3 Exit STEP 1 On Config menu select 6 Application Settings STEP 2 The LCD displays App Settings menu Select 5 Emergency Call STEP 3 On Emergency Call menu select 1 Emergency Dial 1 Note For other operations and of software key cursor key and touch sensitive panel operation are also available Refer to Section 6 1 1 2 Operations for more...

Page 3214: ...he software key for OK Note This is an example for assigning the destination number for Emergency Dial 1 Perform these steps to Emergency Dial 2 and 3 in the same way if required STEP 5 The LCD displays Emergency Call menu Press the software key for Exit STEP 6 The LCD returns to App Settings menu Press the software key for Exit to return to Config menu STEP 7 On Config menu press the software key...

Page 3215: ...dialed number does not correspond to the assigned emergency number the LCD shows the message below Then the LCD returns to Emergency Call menu after a few seconds STEP 3 After the call place the handset on hook The LCD turns to time display Security mode is released When failed in originating an emergency call Security mode is not released with on hook operation END Note Off hook operation by othe...

Page 3216: ...n learned from the received LLDP packet Note 1 LLDP packets are also transmitted in the following cases that LLDP packet contents to be advertised are changed The Reception Waiting Time RX Waiting Time has timed out IP address is allocated via DHCP ToS value is defined by the Telephony Server Note 2 When DT700 Series transmits LLDP packets within LLDP Packet Transmission Interval it sets LLDP Pack...

Page 3217: ...s When the LLDP Auto Setting Mode is enabled after starting LLDP packet transmission and reception DT700 Series automatically sets network policies by using the valid LLDP packet re ceived within the time specified by the Reception Waiting Time RX Waiting Time LLDP Transparent Mode DT700 Series can forward LLDP data between its LAN and PC ports This provides the above men tioned LLDP Auto Setting ...

Page 3218: ...ting Modes are enabled it may take some time to receive LLDP data 15 seconds by default before DT700 Series starts up 10 VLAN IDs cannot be assigned automatically to the PC port of DT700 Series by using the LLDP Auto Set ting Mode 11 The LLDP Auto Setting Mode will override the AutoConfig feature Thus even if performing the Auto Config may involve changes in the settings common to both of them the...

Page 3219: ... MAC address Time To Live TLV time to live Length of time the LLDP data will be valid LLDP packet transmission interval LLDP time to live Port Description TLV port description Port description LAN Port System Name TLV system name System name NEC IP Phone System Description TLV system description System description DT700 Series System Capabilities TLV system capabilities Supported LAN capabilities ...

Page 3220: ...T half full du plex mode operational MAU type Operational MAU type Speed duplex during trans mission 0x00 0x02 10BASE T half duplex 0x00 0x04 10BASE T full duplex 0x00 0x10 100BASE TX half duplex 0x00 0x20 100BASE TX full duplex Power Via MDI TLV MDI power support Not advertised PSE power pair power class Link Aggregation TLV aggregation status Link aggregation status Not advertised aggregated por...

Page 3221: ...RTP ToS Network Policy TLV 2 Note 5 Application Type Application type to which the network policy applies 2 Voice Signaling U Flag to indicate whether the information is known or un known in the network policy request In the LLDP Auto Setting Mode 1 Unknown In case other than the above 0 Defined T Flag to indicate whether the VLAN is tagged or un tagged LAN port VLAN is dis abled 0 untagged VLAN L...

Page 3222: ... or local power supply 0x0 Unknown Power Priority Power supply priority 0x0 Unknown Power Value Supply side Minimum power available to supply Demand side Maximum consumed power 77 DT750 63 DT730 63 DT730 DESI less 130 DT730G 33 DT710 33 DT710 without LCD 90 DT770G Hardware Revision TLV Hardware Revision Hardware version Hardware version Firmware Revision TLV Firmware Revision Firmware version Firm...

Page 3223: ...viewed Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV Receivable Not viewed VLAN Name TLV Receivable Not viewed Protocol Identity TLV Receivable Not viewed IEEE802 3 Extensions MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV I F capability status type Receivable Viewed auto negotiation support status operational MAU type only Power Via MDI TLV Receivable Not viewed Link Aggregation TLV Link aggregation port ID status Receivable ...

Page 3224: ...g Time RX Waiting Time the LLDP Auto Setting will be made by using LLDP packets with partially valid data 4 The following settings can be automatically configured by the LLDP Auto Setting LAN port configuration VLAN ID LAN port configuration VLAN priority TOS mode RTP TOS mode SIP Firmware Revision TLV Firmware version Receivable Not viewed Software Revision TLV Software version Receivable Not vie...

Page 3225: ...minal and the Telephony Server In this case DT700 Series automatically restarts 11 Setting data configured by the LLDP Auto Setting are not stored in the flash memory and will be lost by turning the power off and on or doing a hard or soft reset In this case perform the LLDP Auto Setting again 12 The AutoConfig is implemented for the settings configured by the Configuration data assignment of DT70...

Page 3226: ... relevant manuals 16 Conditions for ToS mode SIP To configure ToS mode SIP DT700 Series needs to receive an LLDP packet containing one or more Net work Policy TLVs ToS mode SIP is determined based on the received Network TLVs meeting the condi tions below Note For TLV definition refer to the relevant manuals Network Policy TLV Requirements for VLAN Priority Configuration TLV Element Condition Appl...

Page 3227: ...VOL 3 740 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP 17 The LCD displays the following message during the LLDP Auto Setting including LLDP packet reception LLDP Receiving ...

Page 3228: ...6 Advanced Settings Network Settings Menu List Up Down STEP 3 On Advanced Settings menu select 6 LLDP Settings Advanced Settings 4 Type of Service 5 Self Port Settings 6 LLDP Settings Exit Network Settings Exit 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway Cancel OK LLDP Mode 1 Disable 2 Enable Exit LLDP Settings 1 LLDP Mode 2 Auto Setting Mode 3 RX Waiting Time Press the digit key 2 to transmit rece...

Page 3229: ...le the Auto Setting Mode Note 2 Enable is set by default This data is valid when the LLDP mode is enabled STEP 8 The LCD displays LLDP Settings screen Select 3 RX Waiting Time Exit LLDP Settings 1 LLDP Mode 2 Auto Setting Mode 3 RX Waiting Time BK Cancel Set the RX Waiting Time using digit keys You can set 1 60 default time 15 seconds Press the software key for BK to delete the RX Waiting Time Pre...

Page 3230: ...te This data is valid when the LLDP mode is enabled STEP 11 The LCD displays Transmit Interval setting screen Hold Multiplier OK 2 10 multiple 4 BK Cancel Set the time to live for the LLDP data using Digit Keys The time to live will be determined by multiplying Transmit Interval value by the Hold Multiplier value Note 1 You can set 2 10 default multiplier 4 times Press the software key for BK to d...

Page 3231: ... times Press the software key for BK to delete the number Press the software key for OK when the Fast Start Count settings is complete Note This data is valid when the LLDP mode is enabled STEP 15 The LCD displays Fast Start Count setting screen Cancel OK Transparent Mode 1 Disable 2 Enable Press the digit key 2 to enable the Transparent Mode Press the digit key 1 to disable the Transparent Mode P...

Page 3232: ...he Asset ID Press the software key for OK when the Asset ID settings is complete Note This data is valid when the LLDP mode is enabled Note You can finish this setting by pressing the software key for OK without entering digits because of the software specification In this case the default data will be set automatically STEP 19 The LCD displays Asset ID setting screen STEP 20 The LCD displays LLDP...

Page 3233: ...k Settings menu Press the software key for Exit E Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 23 The LCD returns to Config menu Press the software key for Save to save settings Network Settings Exit 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway ...

Page 3234: ...he following information as the substitute information while DHCP is out of service IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Server Address 2nd 4th Server Address 2nd 4th Server Port Note It is mandatory to set IP address and Subnet Mask Operation with Spare IP 1 The power of DT700 Series is OFF A substitute IP address is set by Configuration Menu in advance 2 The power of DT700 Series is turned...

Page 3235: ...700 Series obtains an IP address from the DHCP server DT700 Series operates with the obtained IP address The obtained IP address is set for the configuration at the same time 3 The obtained IP address is saved as a substitute IP address in the configuration even after DT700 Series is turned OFF 4 The power of DT700 Series is turned ON DT700 Series fails to obtain an IP address because of commu nic...

Page 3236: ...g the substitute IP address without ob taining an IP address from the DHCP server 7 When DT700 Series fails to connect to all of the 2nd 4th servers an error occurs Then DT700 Series performs retry to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server If DT700 Series obtains an IP address suc cessfully DT700 Series attempts to connect to the 1st server without using the substitute IP address 8 DT700 Series...

Page 3237: ... IP address information in Backup IP mode at the time it obtains an IP address from the DHCP server 14 A substitute IP address may inhibit DT700 Series from connecting to the Telephony Server if the substitute IP address duplicates other IP addresses used for the equipment in the network 15 AutoConfig is not be activated while a substitute IP address is in service 16 When AutoConfig Mode is in ser...

Page 3238: ...e LCD displays the error or a user of DT700 Series presses the software key for Exit Configuration setting is available even when the LCD displays the error message 22 When the substitute IP address mode is Backup IP only IP addresses that are obtained through DHCP op tion 120 can be saved as 2nd 4th Server Addresses IP addresses obtained through DHCP option 162 are recognized as used for Location...

Page 3239: ... Down STEP 3 On Advanced Settings menu select 7 Spare IP Settings Advanced Settings 5 Self Port Settings 6 LLDP Settings 7 Spare IP Settings Exit Network Settings Exit 1 DHCP Mode 2 IP Address 3 Default Gateway Cancel OK Spare Backup IP Mode 1 Disable 2 Spare IP 3 Backup IP Exit Spare IP Settings 1 Spare Backup IP Mode 2 Network Settings 3 SIP Settings Press the digit key 1 to disable the Spare Ba...

Page 3240: ...k Exit Spare IP Settings 1 Spare Backup IP Mode 2 Network Settings 3 SIP Settings IP Address For 0 0 0 0 BK Cancel OK Press the software key for OK when the IP Address setting is complete Network Settings Back 1 IP Address 2 Default Gateway 3 Subnet Mask STEP 9 The LCD displays Network Settings menu Use to separate each byte Press the software key for BK to delete the input value Note When Backup ...

Page 3241: ...ss using the digit keys Default Gateway For 0 0 0 0 BK Cancel OK Note When Backup IP is in service this data will be overwritten by obtained Default Gateway address if DT700 Series obtains an IP address from DHCP server If obtained data does not have a Default Gateway address the existing data is maintained Press the software key for OK when the Subnet Mask setting is complete Use to separate each...

Page 3242: ...re key for Exit to go back to Spare IP Settings menu STEP 17 On Spare IP Settings menu select 3 SIP Settings Press the digit key 1 to Set the 2nd Server IP Address Press the digit key 2 to Set the 3rd Server IP Address Press the digit key 3 to Set the 4th Server IP Address Press the digit key 4 to Set the 2nd Server port number Press the digit key 5 to Set the 3rd Server port number Press the digi...

Page 3243: ...Server Address is selected in SIP Settings menu Setting 2nd 4th Server Address Note When Backup IP is in service this data will be overwritten by obtained SIP Server port number if DT700 Series obtains an IP address from DHCP server If obtained data does not have a SIP Server port number the existing data is maintained Note The figure shows an example when 4 2nd Server Port is selected in SIP Sett...

Page 3244: ...dress 2 Default Gateway 3 Subnet Mask E STEP 21 The LCD returns to Advanced Settings menu Press the software key for Exit Advanced Settings 1 LAN Port Settings 2 PC Port Settings 3 CDP Mode Exit Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save STEP 24 The LCD returns to Config menu Press the software key for Save to save settings Exit Spare IP Settings 1 Spare Backup IP ...

Page 3245: ...ownloaded Note 2 For more information about Language Pack file see Section 6 2 25 Font Download Feature Note 3 For firmware versions earlier than 4 0 0 0 except for DT730G displayed as Translation data file Note 4 For firmware versions earlier than 4 0 0 0 except for DT730G displayed as trnslate tgz TYPE DEFAULT FILE NAME Music on Hold file Note 1 MOH wav Ringing Tone file Note 1 Melody1 wav Melod...

Page 3246: ...value before starting the downloading procedure Caution Observe the following while program downloading Do Not Turn OFF the power of the DT700 Series the Telephony Server and DHCP server Do Not Unplug or Plug the LAN cable connecting to the DT700 Series the Telephony Server and DHCP Do Not Turn OFF the power of the HUB connecting to the DT700 Series the Telephony Server and DHCP ...

Page 3247: ...rectory C InetPub ftproot is the default directory for Windows server TFTP server Place the files to be downloaded under the directory for download b Configuration Boot Program Flash memory Voice Translation file downloading Menu 1 History 2 Directory 3 Tool Back OK Setting 1 User Setting 2 Download 3 Data Backup Restore Back OK STEP 4 On Download menu select 3 Protocol A Go to STEP 21 a Music on ...

Page 3248: ...P 9 The LCD displays FTP Settings menu Select 2 Password FTP Settings 1 User ID 2 Password 3 Folder Back OK Download Menu 1 Download Files 2 Download Address 3 Protocol Back OK STEP 8 On User ID screen enter user ID by the digit keys and then press the software key for OK B A Protocol 1 FTP 2 TFTP Back OK 1 Download Files 2 Download Address 3 Protocol 4 FTP Settings Download Menu List Up Down When...

Page 3249: ...Files 2 Download Address 3 Protocol Back OK STEP 10 On Password screen enter password by the digit keys and then press the software key for OK Folder xxxxxxxxxxx BK Back OK STEP 12 On Folder screen enter the download file stored directory and the press the software key for OK C B Note See How to Enter Characters on Configuration Menu for the way to enter characters Note Alphanumeric characters are...

Page 3250: ... by digit key and then press the software key for OK Ring Tone 1 Download 1 2 Download 2 3 Download 3 Back OK STEP 19 File name is displayed for each selected download file D C Download Address For 0 0 0 0 BK Back OK Use to separate each bytes Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete Music on Hold file select 1 Hold Music Ringing Tone file select 2 Ring Tone Terminal Phonebook ...

Page 3251: ...ec Go to STEP 41 STEP 22 The LCD displays Maintenance menu Select 1 Download Menu Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save Download Menu 1 Download Files 2 Download Address 3 Protocol Exit STEP 23 On Download menu select 3 Protocol STEP 24 On Protocol screen select the file server s protocol type 1 FTP or...

Page 3252: ...for OK 1 Download Files 2 Download Address 3 Protocol 4 FTP Settings Download Menu List Up Down Password BK Cancel OK STEP 29 On Password screen enter password by the digit keys and then press the software key for OK STEP 28 The LCD displays FTP Settings menu Select 2 Password FTP Settings 1 User ID 2 Password 3 Folder Exit Note See How to Enter Characters on Configuration Menu for the way to ente...

Page 3253: ...ad file stored directory and the press the software key for OK G F STEP 34 The LCD displays Download Address screen Assign the IP address of FTP TFTP server using digit keys Download Address For 0 0 0 0 BK Cancel OK Use to separate each bytes Press the software key for OK when all settings are complete STEP 33 On Download Menu select 2 Download Address Download Menu 1 Download Files 2 Download Add...

Page 3254: ... 37 File name is displayed for each selected download file Change the download file name Not change the download file name chack the file name and press the software key for Exec This is an example for selecting Boot Program file Go to STEP 38 Go to STEP 39 STEP 38 When you want to change the download file name perform this step Ring Tone ringmusic wav BK Cancel Exec 1 Press the software key for B...

Page 3255: ...r off the terminal during the LCD displaying Saving It may cause trouble in DT700 Series starting up STEP 40 The LCD displays the message below Press the software key for Exit to restart the terminal Download Complete Press Exit to Reset Exit STEP 41 DT700 Series terminal restarts reading out the downloaded program Downloading Initializing ...

Page 3256: ...Web Programming does not support the downloading of Music on Hold Ringing Tone and Terminal Phonebook files Refer to 1 Configuration Setting on Terminal for these types of file downloading Note 1 For firmware versions earlier than 4 0 0 0 except for DT730G displayed as Translation Data CAUSE COUNTERMEASURES Target download file is not put in the directory specified by FTP TFTP server Place the dow...

Page 3257: ...of FTP TFTP server folder Enter the folder name on which download file is stored File name Enter target download file name Note 2 User ID Enter User ID Password Enter password Note 2 See Download file on page 758 for the default file name of each type Note The LCD displays the messages below STATE LCD While download is in progress Downloading Succeeded in downloading Download Complete Press Exit t...

Page 3258: ...ified IP address 6 2 24 1 How to Start Exit Online Monitoring Menu This section explains how to start exit Online Monitoring menu 1 Start Online Monitoring Menu While the LCD displays Connecting pressing the Help key lower right of the LCD for over one second will open Online Monitoring Menu Note 1 when the LCD displays the login screen for login mode or the time display In Online Monitoring menu ...

Page 3259: ...e software keys for Up and Down will scroll one line up and down Note 1 Cursor key cannot scroll the menu Note 1 The software keys for Up and Down are displayed only when scrolling is required for the menu list On DT710 Series the software key indication differs from that of DT750 DT730 DT730G because the available number of lines is smaller Use digit keys corresponding to the menu number to selec...

Page 3260: ...et loss events for the last call is cleared and the counting for the new call is started STEP 1 Open Online Monitoring menu referring to Section 6 2 24 1 How to Start Exit Online Monitoring Menu STEP 2 Select 1 QoS STEP 3 The LCD lists packet loss code and payload information STEP 4 To display Online Monitoring s other menu press the software key for Prev To close Online Monitoring menu refer to S...

Page 3261: ...2 20 40 1 QoS 2 System Information 3 Ping Exit STEP 1 Open Online Monitoring menu referring to Section 6 2 24 1 How to Start Exit Online Monitoring Menu STEP 2 Select 2 System Information STEP 3 The LCD displays the System Information menu 1 Network Settings System Information 2 SIP Settings 3 Audio Visual Settings Exit Up Down Prev 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Audio Visual Settings 4 Maint...

Page 3262: ...nd and LCD indication related parameters assigned in Audio Visual Set tings of Config menu Go to 3 Audio Visual Settings Select 4 Maintenance Settings to display the maintenance related parameters assigned in Maintenance Settings of Config menu Go to 4 Maintenance Setting Select 5 Terminal Information to display the parameters available to list in Terminal Information of Config menu Go to 5 Termin...

Page 3263: ...rt VLAN Priority VLAN Priority of PC port PC Port Speed Duplex Communication speed of PC port 10M 100M Full Half Duplex Auto negotiation PC Port Available Whether to use PC port Note 2 EAPOL Forwarding Whether to forward EAPOL from PC port CDP Mode Whether to inform power consumption information by CDP Note 3 ToS RTP ToS setting for RTP packet ToS SIP ToS setting for SIP packet Supplicant Mode Whe...

Page 3264: ... DNS Address Up Down Prev XXX XXX XXX XXX Subnet Mask Up Down Prev XXX XXX XXX XXX Default Gateway Up Down Prev XXXX VLAN ID Up Down Prev Disable Enable VLAN Mode Up Down Prev X VLAN Priority Up Down Prev Autonego Speed Duplex Up Down Prev Disable Enable PC Port VLAN Mode Up Down Prev Autonego PC Port Speed Duplex Up Down Prev X PC Port VLAN Priority Up Down Prev XXXX PC Port VLAN ID Up Down Prev ...

Page 3265: ... Port has the follow ing three patterns of display Note 3 DT730G does not support CDP mode IP Address BackupIP xxx xxx xxx xxx Up Down Prev PC Port Available 1 PC port is enabled by Telephony Server s direction 2 PC port is disabled by Telephony Server s direction 3 PC port is disabled by configuration setting ON Auto Up Down Prev PC Port Available OFF Auto Up Down Prev PC Port Available OFF Up Do...

Page 3266: ...erver Port 2nd Destination port number of the sending packet to 2nd SIP server Port 3rd Destination port number of the sending packet to 3rd SIP server Port 4th Destination port number of the sending packet to 4th SIP server Area ID Country code tone pattern Authentication Mode Whether to use terminal authentication Retransmit Interval Re sending timer for registration process Standard 6 seconds K...

Page 3267: ...Down Prev XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Connecting Server PX Up Down Prev Remote Normal Access Mode Up Down Prev XXXX Port 1st Up Down Prev XXXX Port 2nd Up Down Prev XXXX Port 3rd Up Down Prev XXXX Port 4th Up Down Prev XXXXXXXXXXXXXX Area ID Press Up key Up Down Prev Disable Enable Authentication Mode Up Down Prev XXX XXX XXX XXX 1st Server Up Down Prev XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 1st Server PX Systm In...

Page 3268: ...ompleted successfully by the SIP server address specified on the address list This mark is not displayed during registration is in progress Note 4 DHCP is displayed when the parameter is obtained from DHCP server Note 5 SIP server s address assigned either by DHCP server option 162 or by the configuration setting is dis played for 1st Server 4th Server parameters though when the registration proce...

Page 3269: ...ume Sidetone volume Send Gain Sending gain for handset Receive Bias Receiving bias for handset Receive Gain Receiving gain for handset Ring Internal call Ringing tone pattern for incoming station call Ring External Call Ringing tone pattern for incoming trunk call Volume Indication Whether to display the volume gage Language Language for date and time display RTP Alarm Whether to ring alarm for in...

Page 3270: ...ress Up key Press Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Down key Press Up key Press Up key Press Down key Up Down Prev XX Send Gain Up Down Prev X Sidetone Volume Up Down Prev Pattern X Ring Internal Call Up Down Prev XX Receive Gain Up Down Prev X Receive Bias Up Down Prev Pattern X Ring External Call Up Down Prev OFF ON Volume Indication Up Down Prev XXXXXXXXX La...

Page 3271: ...rver s direction 2 RTP alarm is disabled by Telephony Server s direction 3 RTP alarm is enabled by configuration setting 3 RTP alarm is disabled by configuration setting ON Auto Up Down Prev RTP Alarm OFF Auto Up Down Prev RTP Alarm ON Up Down Prev RTP Alarm OFF Up Down Prev DTMF Play Mode 1 DTMF is enabled by Telephony Server s direction 2 DTMF is disabled by Telephony Server s direction 3 DTMF i...

Page 3272: ...Down Prev STEP 1 When 4 Maintenance Settings is selected the LCD displays the following Download Address IP address of FTP TFTP server for program and file downloading Download Config Version Downloaded configuration file version Auto Config File Name The name of a file used by Auto Config STEP 2 Pressing the software key Prev returns the LCD to System Information menu END ...

Page 3273: ... the software key for Up and Down Hardware Version Hardware version of terminal destination of the unit attached FW 4 0 0 0 or later For DT730G FW 1 0 0 0 or later MAC Address MAC address of terminal Firmware Version Firmware version of terminal Bottom Option ADA Unit version attached to terminal Side Option1 Side option name of terminal Side Option2 Side option name of terminal See Parameters in ...

Page 3274: ...Main Menu Press Up key Press Up key Press Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Down key Up Down Prev XX XX XX XX Firmware Version Press 5 key Up Down Prev ButtonOptionName V X X Button Option Up Down Prev SideOption1Name V X X Side Option1 Press Up key Press Up key Press Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Down key Up Down Prev SideOptionName2 V X X Side Option2 ...

Page 3275: ... chassis ID of Chassis ID TLV in the re ceived LLDP packet Port ID TLV Element port ID of Port ID TLV in the received LLDP packet Port Description TLV Element port description of Port Description TLV in the received LLDP packet PHY Auto nego status TLV Element auto negotiation support status of MAC PHY Configuration Status TLV in the received LLDP pack et Speed Duplex MAC PHY Configuration Status ...

Page 3276: ...of Network Policy TLV in the re ceived LLDP packet L2 Priority VoiceSignal TLV Element L2 Priority of Network Policy TLV in the received LLDP packet DSCP Value VoiceSignal TLV Element DSCP Value of Network Policy TLV Location ID Civic Location Identification TLV Location ID ECS ELIN Location Identification TLV Asset ID Asset ID See Parameters in LLDP Settings for the page switching order by Up and...

Page 3277: ...Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Up key Press Down key Press Down key Up Down Prev Port ID xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Up Down Prev Chassis ID xxxxxxxxxxxx Up Down Prev System Description xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Up Down Prev Port Description xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Press Down key Press Down key Press Up key Press Up key Press Down key Up Down Prev PHY Auto nego status xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Up Down...

Page 3278: ...ng menu referring to Section 6 2 24 1 How to Start Exit Online Monitoring Menu STEP 2 Select 3 Ping STEP 3 Enter the destination IP address and then press the software key for OK Use digit key for entering number Press for separating each byte Note When the network is disabled e g IP address cannot be ob tained from DHCP server the LCD displays DHCP Server Down message STEP 4 Ping command is start...

Page 3279: ... OK 4 OK Complete Prev Retry STEP 5 Complete is displayed after sending Ping four times STEP 6 To display Online Monitoring s other menu press the software key for Prev To close Online Monitoring menu refer to Section 6 2 24 1 How to Start Exit Online Monitoring Menu END A ...

Page 3280: ...nditions 1 This feature is supported by DT750 DT730 DT730G and DT710 DESI less terminal 2 After Language Pack is downloaded the language is set as Automatic Therefore from Menu select 5 Settings 1 User Setting 3 Display 6 Language to display the language you want to use 3 When you download Language Pack newly the previous data of Language Pack will be deleted 4 The download font is surely displaye...

Page 3281: ... 0 0 0 except for DT730G displayed as trnslate tgz Note After downloading the parameters assigned on each configuration menu may return to factory default Be sure to write down the assigned value before starting downloading procedure TYPE DEFAULT FILE NAME Language Pack file Note 1 LangPack tgz Note 2 Caution Observe the following while program downloading Do Not Turn OFF the power of the DT700 Se...

Page 3282: ...ndows server TFTP server Place the files to be downloaded under the directory for download A File type STEP 3 The LCD displays Maintenance menu Select 1 Download Menu Maintenance 1 Download Menu 2 Hard Reset 3 Data Clear Exit Config 1 Network Settings 2 SIP Settings 3 Maintenance Settings Cancel Save Download Menu 1 Download Files 2 Download Address 3 Protocol Exit STEP 4 On Download menu select 3...

Page 3283: ...es 2 Download Address 3 Protocol Exit STEP 8 On User ID screen enter user ID by the digit keys and then press the software key for OK 1 Download Files 2 Download Address 3 Protocol 4 FTP Settings Download Menu List Up Down Password BK Cancel OK STEP 10 On Password screen enter your password using the digit keys and then press the software key for OK STEP 9 The LCD displays FTP Settings menu Select...

Page 3284: ...older xxxxxxxxxxx BK Cancel OK STEP 12 On Folder screen enter the download file stored in the directory and the press the software key for OK C B STEP 15 The LCD displays Download Address screen Assign the IP address of FTP TFTP server using digit keys Download Address For 0 0 0 0 BK Cancel OK Use to separate each bytes Press the software key for OK when all settings are completed STEP 14 On Downl...

Page 3285: ... displayed for each selected download file Change the download file name Not change the download file name check the file name and press the software key for Exec This is an example for selecting Boot Program file Go to STEP 19 Go to STEP 20 STEP 19 When you want to change the download file name perform this step Ring Tone Japanese tgz BK Cancel Exec 1 Press the software key for BK to delete the d...

Page 3286: ...al The IP address of FTP TFTP server assigned on the configuration setting is wrong Enter correct IP address of FTP TFTP server FTP TFTP server or the network device e g HUB between the server and the terminal is not turned on Turn the power on for the devices LAN cable disconnection Connect LAN cable to the terminal and FTP TFTP server Saving STEP 20 The terminal starts downloading Downloading fl...

Page 3287: ...ck the OK button The terminal starts downloading Protocol Select the protocol of the file server storing download file Download Address Enter the IP address of FTP TFTP server folder Enter the folder name on which download file is stored File name Enter target download file name Note 2 User ID Enter User ID Password Enter password Note 2 See Download file on page 794 for the default file name of e...

Page 3288: ...istory Earlier than FW 2 0 0 0 Parameter Description Default DT750 Series DT730 Series 1 Missed Note 1 Lists the history of missed calls X X 2 Outgoing Note 1 Lists the history of outgoing calls X X 3 Incoming Note 1 Lists the history of incoming calls X X 4 Delete All Deletes the call history completely X X Parameter Description Default DT750 Series DT730 Series 1 Call Originates a call to the nu...

Page 3289: ...below from 2 Tel 2 to down on the list are vacant and new numbers can be added to Select 2 Tel 2 and press the software key for OK to move on to Category Set screen LCD 3 Follow the sub menu 2 Directory Add 1 New for the subsequent procedure This is an example for DT730 Series Standard LCD 3 Prefix Adds a prefix to the number displayed on the LCD X X 4 Delete One Deletes one history displayed on t...

Page 3290: ...Searches by entering a target name X X 3 Tel Number Searches by entering numbers X X 4 Others Searches by other search key X X 1 Memory ID Searches by entering Memory ID X X 2 Category Searches by selecting Category X X 1 Company Searches through Company category X X 2 Mobile Searches through Mobile category X X 3 Voice Mail Searches through Voice Mail category X X 4 Home Searches through Home cat...

Page 3291: ...n be specified Automatic X X 1 Automatic Sets Automatic to Ring Tone Tone Type 1 rings when Automatic is selected 2 Default Applies default Ringing Tone on terminal 3 Tone Type 1 16 Tone Type 14 Sets the selected tone type to Ringing Tone 17 Download 1 19 Download 3 9 Illumination Note 1 Sets lamp indication for informing call termination Automatic X X 1 Automatic Sets Automatic to lamp indication...

Page 3292: ...l s configuration menu regardless of SFI 246 SFI 247 data setting Note 5 This parameter becomes available when you set URL of Corporate Phonebook by 0 Config 6 Appli cation Settings 1 XML Settings 3 Directory URL 3 Group Setting Sets groups X X 1 Default 2 Colleagues 3 VIPs 4 Family 5 Friends 6 Group6 20 Group 20 1 Name Registers group name X X 2 Ring Tone Note 1 Note 2 Sets Ringing Tone for infor...

Page 3293: ... Headset ringing is ON 4 Ring Tone Note 2 Sets Ringing Tone for incoming call termination X X 1 External Call Sets Ringing Tone for external call termination Automatic X X 0 Automatic Sets Automatic for the Ringing Tone of incoming call termination Tone Type 1 rings when Automatic is selected 1 Tone Type 1 14 Tone Type 14 Sets Tone Type 1 Tone Type 14 for Ringing Tone 15 Download 1 17 Download 3 S...

Page 3294: ... receiving DTMF signal Automatic X X 0 Automatic Applies DTMF tone setting on the Telephony Server 1 Disable DTMF tone is OFF 2 Enable DTMF tone is ON 3 Key Touch Tone Sets touch tone for pressing digit key touch sensitive panel Tone X X 0 Automatic Sets Automatic to key touch tone 1 No Tone Sets key touch tone disabled 2 Tone Sets key touch tone enabled 3 Voice Enables the key touch tone by voice...

Page 3295: ... the bright level of backlight 5 Font Size Note 4 Switches the font size on configuration menu Standard 16dot X X 1 Standard 16dot Selects Standard or Small of font size 2 Small 12dot 6 Language Selects the language on date and time display Automatic X X 0 Automatic Sets Automatic for language setting on date and time display 1 Japanese Selected language is displayed on date and time display 2 NEC...

Page 3296: ...ds files of Music on Hold Ringing Tone and Phonebook 1 Hold Music Downloads a sound file used for Music on Hold MOH wav X X 2 Ring Tone Downloads a sound file used for Ringing Tone X X 1 Download 1 Downloads Melody1 Melody3 Melody1 wav 2 Download 2 Melody2 wav 3 Download 3 Melody3 wav 3 Directory Downloads a csv format file used for Terminal Phonebook Directory csv X X 4 Wall Paper Not used 2 Down...

Page 3297: ...t 6 Presence Earlier than FW 2 0 0 0 Not used Favorite Earlier than FW 2 0 0 0 Not used 3 Data Backup Restore Makes backup of terminal data or restores from backup file X X 1 Data Backup Saves the terminal setting to backup file PersonalDat a gz 2 Data Restore Restores the terminal data by reading out the saved backup file PersonalDat a gz X X 3 Server Address Sets IP address of FTP TFTP server 0 ...

Page 3298: ...ommunication speed of PC port Autonego X X X 1 Autonego Autonegotiation 2 100M Full 100Mbps in full duplex mode 3 100M Half 100Mbps in half duplex mode 4 10M Full 10Mbps in full duplex mode 5 10M Half 10Mbps in half duplex mode 2 VLAN Mode Selects whether to use port VLAN of PC port Disable X X X 1 Disable Port VLAN of PC port is not used 2 Enable Port VLAN of PC port is used 3 Port VLAN ID Sets p...

Page 3299: ...destination X X X 1 1st Register Address Sets IP address or fully qualified domain name FQDN or 1st 4th registrar server X X X 2 2nd Register Address 3 3rd Register Address 4 4th Register Address 3 Access Mode Sets access mode for SIP server Normal X X X 1 Normal Normal access 2 Remote Remote access 4 SIP Server Port Sets SIP server port 1024 65535 5060 X X X 1 1st Server Port Specifies the destin...

Page 3300: ...orth America 3 Australia 4 Others 5 Hong Kong 6 Malaysia 7 Singapore 8 Mexico 9 Taiwan 10 Newzealand 11 Korea 12 Brazil 13 China 14 Thailand 15 Thailand EGAT 16 Sri Lanka 17 Germany 18 Italy 19 Netherlands 20 Catalonia Not used 21 Denmark 22 Sweden 23 Poland 24 Czech 25 Norway 26 France 27 Portugal 28 Spain 29 Austria 30 Belgium 31 UK 32 Greece 33 Switzerland 34 South Africa 35 Brazil NEC Philips ...

Page 3301: ...nance related data X X X 1 Download Menu Downloads specified file to DT700 Series X X X 1 Download Files Specifies download file name for each file type X X X 1 Config Downloads configuration file Terminal t gz X X X 2 Certificate Not used 3 Boot Program Downloads boot and program DT750 itlisips tgz DT730 itlisipv tgz DT710 itlisipe tgz X X X 4 Flash Memory Image Downloads flash memory image imgsi...

Page 3302: ...tional button kit data X X X 1 Kit 1 4 Kit 4 8 Kit 8 12 Kit 12 Key 1 4 8 12 on button kit is used Kit 8 is not displayed on DT750 DT750 Kit 1 DT730 Kit 1 DT710 Kit 9 X X X 1 Line Key Type Sets Line key Available for DT730 Series Standard LCD excepting DESI Less Phone DT750 Line 12 DT730 Line 12 DT730 DESI Less Line 8 DT710 Line 2 X X X 1 Line 12 Sets to 12 line of DT730 X X X 2 Line 24 Sets to 24 ...

Page 3303: ...inal Data Restores terminal setting and data TerminalD ata tgz X X X 3 Personal Data Restores personal setting and data PersonalD ata tgz X X X 3 Server Address Sets IP address of the server that executes data backup restoration 0 0 0 0 X X X 4 Protocol Selects FTP or TFTP for file downloading protocol FTP X X X 1 FTP FTP is used 2 TFTP TFTP is used 5 FTP Settings Sets data for accessing FTP serve...

Page 3304: ...rameter X X X 1 Supplicant Sets whether to use supplicant on DT700 Series Disable X X X 1 Disable Supplicant is disabled on DT700 Series 2 Enable Supplicant is enabled on DT700 Series 2 EAP Method Not used 3 Account Sets user ID for EAP MD5 X X X 4 Password Sets password for EAP MD5 X X X 5 EAP VLAN Selects whether to add VLAN tag to EAP packet Enable X X X 1 Disable VLAN tag is not added to EAP p...

Page 3305: ...X X 2 Proxy Settings Sets proxy server related data X X X 1 Proxy IP Sets proxy IP address of XML browser X X X 2 Proxy Port Sets proxy port of XML browser 1024 65535 8080 X X X 3 Directory URL Sets URL of Corporate Phonebook X X N 2 IPM Self Port Sets the port for connecting to IP Phone Manager 1024 65535 except 17185 60000 3530 X X X 3 Incoming Popup Not used 4 Screen Saver URL Not used 5 Emerge...

Page 3306: ...erminal s configuration menu regardless of SFI 248 data setting Note 1 On History menu pressing the software key for Option displays the following sub menu LEGEND X Available N Not available Not applicable 1 History Not Earlier than FW 2 0 0 0 but Earlier Than FW 5 0 0 0 Parameter Description Default DT750 Series DT730 Series 1 Missed Note 1 Lists the history of missed calls X X 2 Outgoing Note 1 ...

Page 3307: ...ed to Select 2 Tel 2 and press the software key for OK to move on to Category Set screen LCD 3 Follow the sub menu 2 Directory Add 1 New for the subsequent procedure This is an example for DT730 Series Standard LCD 2 Addition Adds numbers to searched data X X Directory Search Note 3 Searches the Directory data to which you want to add the number X X Directory Add Note 3 Adds the number to the sear...

Page 3308: ...up20 X X 2 Name Searches by entering a target name X X 3 Tel Number Searches by entering numbers X X 4 Others Searches by other search key X X 1 Memory ID Searches by entering Memory ID X X 2 Category Searches by selecting Category X X 1 Company Searches through Company category X X 2 Mobile Searches through Mobile category X X 3 Voice Mail Searches through Voice Mail category X X 4 Home Searches ...

Page 3309: ...s Note 6 X X 1 Automatic Sets Automatic to Ring Tone Tone Type 1 rings when Automatic is selected 2 Default Applies default Ringing Tone on terminal 3 Tone Type 1 16 Tone Type 14 Sets the selected tone type to Ringing Tone 17 Download 1 19 Download 3 9 Illumination Note 1 Sets lamp indication for informing call termination Default follows group settings Note 6 X X 1 Automatic Sets Automatic to lam...

Page 3310: ...et as out of service ASFC SFI 246 0 SFI 247 0 the parameters under Directory menu will be displayed on the terminal s configuration menu regardless of SFI 246 SFI 247 data setting Note 5 This parameter becomes available when you set URL of Corporate Phonebook by 0 Config 6 Appli cation Settings 1 XML Settings 3 Directory URL 3 Group Setting Sets groups X X 1 Default 2 Colleagues 3 VIPs 4 Family 5 ...

Page 3311: ... incoming call in busy state Enable X X X 1 Disable Offhook ringing is OFF 2 Enable Offhook ringing is ON 3 Headset Ring Note 1 Selects whether to use headset ringing Disable X X 1 Disable Headset ringing is OFF 2 Enable Headset ringing is ON 4 Ring Tone Note 2 Sets Ringing Tone for incoming call termination X X X 1 External Call Note 5 Sets Ringing Tone for external call termination Automatic X X...

Page 3312: ... Headset Ring Volume Not used 2 Talk Sets call related data X X X 1 RTP Alarm Sets whether to allow the alarm for detecting packet loss in receiving speech packets Automatic X X X 0 Automatic Applies RTP alarm setting on the Telephony Server 1 Disable Alarm is OFF 2 Enable Alarm is ON 2 DTMF Tone Sets whether to hear DTMF PB tone on receiving DTMF signal Automatic X X X 0 Automatic Applies DTMF to...

Page 3313: ...splayed 2 Enable Volume gage is displayed 3 Screen Saver Note 11 Sets Screen Saver related data 1 Screen Saver Mode Selects whether to use Screen Saver Disable X X X 1 Disable Screen Saver is not used 2 Enable Screen Saver is used 2 Wait Time Sets wait time until Screen Saver activation 1 999 min 120 X X X 4 Back Light Switches ON OFF the backlight on DT730 Series Enable Note 3 X 1 Automatic Sets ...

Page 3314: ... data for display DT750 Series Color LCD only X 1 Wallpaper Note 12 Sets the Home screen background Default X 1 Default Sets the default screen background 2 Download Sets the download data file 2 Touch Panel Selects whether to use touch sensitive panel function Enable X 1 Disable Touch sensitive panel is OFF 2 Enable Touch sensitive panel is ON 3 Shortcut Icon Not used 4 Font Color Note 12 Sets th...

Page 3315: ...s of Music on Hold Ringing Tone and Phonebook 1 Hold Music Downloads a sound file used for Music on Hold MOH wav X X X 2 Ring Tone Downloads a sound file used for Ringing Tone X X X 1 Download 1 Downloads Melody1 Melody3 Melody1 w av 2 Download 2 Melody2 w av 3 Download 3 Melody3 w av 3 Directory Downloads a csv format file used for Terminal Phonebook Directory c sv X X X 4 Wallpaper Note 12 Downl...

Page 3316: ...ioritized over this setting except DT710 Note 6 The lamp illuminates Red when Automatic is selected If an illumination has been set in the Directory menu it will be prioritized over this setting except DT710 Note 7 A tone will be provided if Automatic has been set Note 8 12 Hour Indication is applied when Automatic has been set Note 9 A setting for Enable is applied when Automatic has been set 3 D...

Page 3317: ...X X X 1 Disable DHCP is not used 2 Enable DHCP is used 2 IP Address Sets DT700 Series terminal s IP address 0 0 0 0 X X X 3 Default Gateway Sets default router s IP address 0 0 0 0 X X X 4 Subnet Mask Sets subnet mask 0 0 0 0 X X X 5 DNS Address Sets DNS server s IP address 0 0 0 0 X X X 6 Advanced Settings Sets network expanded data X X X 1 LAN Port Settings Sets LAN port X X X 1 Speed Duplex Set...

Page 3318: ...information Disable X X X 1 Disable CDP is not used Not send CDP to HUB 2 Enable CDP is used Sends CDP to HUB 4 Type of Service Sets ToS value X X X 1 RTP Sets ToS value for RTP in Hex A0 2 SIP Sets ToS value for SIP in Hex C0 5 Self Port Settings Note 10 Sets each port for DT700 Series 1 RTP Self Port Sets RTP port for DT700 Series 1024 65528 except 59994 60000 Note 19 Note 20 3462 X X X 2 SIP Se...

Page 3319: ...Spare IP Spare IP is enabled 3 Backup IP Backup IP is enabled 2 Network Settings Sets network related data when Spare Backup IP is enabled X X X 1 IP Address Sets DT700 Series terminal s IP address when Spare Backup IP is enabled 0 0 0 0 2 Default Gateway Sets default router s IP address when Spare Backup IP is enabled 0 0 0 0 3 Subnet Mask Sets subnet mask when Spare Backup IP is enabled 0 0 0 0 ...

Page 3320: ...X 1 1st Register Address Sets IP address or fully qualified domain name FQDN or 1st 4th registrar server X X X 2 2nd Register Address 3 3rd Register Address 4 4th Register Address 3 Access Mode Sets access mode for SIP server Normal X X X 1 Normal Normal access 2 Remote Remote access 4 SIP Server Port Sets SIP server port 1024 65535 5060 X X X 1 1st Server Port Specifies the destination port numbe...

Page 3321: ...ralia 4 Others 5 Hong Kong 6 Malaysia 7 Singapore 8 Mexico 9 Taiwan 10 Newzealand 11 Korea 12 Brazil 13 China 14 Thailand 15 Thailand EGAT 16 Sri Lanka 17 Germany 18 Italy 19 Netherlands 20 Catalonia Not used 21 Denmark 22 Sweden 23 Poland 24 Czech 25 Norway 26 France 27 Portugal 28 Spain 29 Austria 30 Belgium 31 UK 32 Greece 33 Switzerland 34 South Africa 35 Brazil NECU Note 17 0 Config Continued...

Page 3322: ...minal detects communication failure with the Telephony Server 3 Howler Tone Note 3 Selects whether to send howler tone Disable X X X 1 Disable Howler tone sending is OFF 2 Enable Howler tone sending is ON 7 Encryption Note 7 Sets encryption data X X X 1 Authentication Mode Selects whether to use authentication Disable X X X 1 Disable Authentication is not used 2 Enable Authentication is used 2 One...

Page 3323: ...File Downloads voice file voice tgz X X N 7 Translation Data Downloads translation data file trnslate tgz X X 2 Download Address Sets IP address of FTP TFTP server 0 0 0 0 X X X 3 Protocol Selects FTP or TFTP for file downloading protocol FTP X X X 1 FTP FTP is used 2 TFTP TFTP is used 4 FTP Settings Sets data for accessing FTP server X X X 1 User ID Sets user ID for login to FTP server X X X 2 Pa...

Page 3324: ...or 2 Enable Sets to enable the Noise Suppressor 2 KeyKit Type Sets additional button kit data X X X 1 Kit 1 4 Kit 4 8 Kit 8 12 Kit 12 16 Kit 17Note 10 Note 11 Note 12 Key 1 4 8 17 on button kit are used Kit 8 is not displayed on DT750 Kit 17 is displayed on DT750 only DT750 Kit 1 DT730 Kit 1 DT710 Kit 9 X X X 1 Line Key Type Sets Line key Available for DT730 Series Standard LCD excepting DESI Less...

Page 3325: ...ord Sets password for login to FTP server X X X 3 Folder Specifies the directory to save the download file X X X 7 Simple Test Note 8 Changes the terminal to test mode X X X 1 Call Test Call Test X X X 2 Call Test Address Sets an IP address of the opposite terminal to perform the call test 10 136 20 188 X X X 3 Key Test 1 Random Tests to press the random button X X X 4 Key Test 2 Sequential Tests ...

Page 3326: ...Push server 4 Client 4 Note 15 Sets IP address of 4th XML s Push server 3 Push Server Port Port number of XML s Push server 82 1024 65535 Note 20 82 X X N 3 Admin Password Sets administrator s password 6633222 X X X 4 802 1X Supplicant Sets 802 1X authentication related parameter X X X 1 Supplicant Sets whether to use supplicant on DT700 Series Disable X X X 1 Disable Supplicant is disabled on DT7...

Page 3327: ...t 17 is set X N N 2 IPM Self Port Sets the port for connecting to IP Phone Manager 1024 65535 except 17185 60000 Note 20 3530 X X X 3 Popup Note 10 Sets the popup window display X 1 Popup Mode Sets the mode of the popup window display App Priority 1 Enable Sets the popup window display enabled 2 App Priority Sets to depend on a definition of XML tag for Popup window 2 Close Button Sets the Close B...

Page 3328: ...e 3 App Priority on the menu Also refer to the manual 4 5 3 Security Lock of IP Phone Manager set the Lock Mode to Disable to dis able the security button To connect the phone and the IP Phone Manager port numbers to use must match Set the port number on the phone side from 0 Config 6 Application Setting 2 IPM Self Support Note 6 This function requires an LCD Note 7 This service is available for D...

Page 3329: ...or later Note 16 Be careful when you specify 3 Enable All Client because security service are disabled for Push when 3 Enable All Client is set Note 17 35 Brazil NEC Philips is displayed in the configuration menu earlier than FW 4 0 0 0 Note 18 is displayed in default setting Note 19 Odd numbered ports cannot be assigned Note 20 A unique number must be assigned to each of the following ports For R...

Page 3330: ... parameters under History menu is not available Note Even though Terminal Call History is set as out of service ASFC SFI 248 0 the parameters under His tory menu will be displayed on the terminal s configuration menu regardless of SFI 248 data setting Note 1 On History menu pressing the software key for Option displays the following sub menu LEGEND X Available N Not available Not applicable 1 Hist...

Page 3331: ...s new number X X Category Set Selects the group the new number registered to Company X X 1 Company 2 Mobile 3 Voice Mail 4 Home 5 Others Priority Flag Sets the priority order of dialing number for call origination Disable X X 1 Disable 2 Enable Edit Note 2 Edits Directory This menu is displayed after Priority Flag setting X X 2 Addition Adds numbers to searched data X X Directory Search Note 3 Sea...

Page 3332: ...es by other search key X X 1 Memory ID Searches by entering Memory ID X X 2 Category Searches by selecting Category X X 1 Company Searches through Company category X X 2 Mobile Searches through Mobile category X X 3 Voice Mail Searches through Voice Mail category X X 4 Home Searches through Home category X X 5 Etc Searches through Etc category X X 3 Company Searches by entering a company name X X ...

Page 3333: ...ings when Automatic is selected 2 Default Applies default Ringing Tone on terminal 3 Tone Type 1 16 Tone Type 14 Sets the selected tone type to Ringing Tone 17 Download 1 19 Download 3 9 Illumination Note 1 Sets lamp indication for announcing call termination Default follows group settings X X 1 Automatic Sets Automatic to lamp indication for announcing call termination The lamp illuminates Red wh...

Page 3334: ...mes available when you set URL of Corporate Phonebook by 0 Config 6 Appli cation Settings 1 XML Settings 3 Directory URL When XML application is assigned to directory URL 3 Corporate is displayed on the Directory menu 3 Group Setting Sets groups X X 1 Default 2 Colleagues 3 VIPs 4 Family 5 Friends 6 Group6 20 Group 20 1 Name Registers group name X X 2 Ring Tone Note 1 Note 2 Sets Ringing Tone for ...

Page 3335: ... 4 X X 4 Setting Parameter Description Default DT730G 12 24CG DT730G 12 24DG 1 User Setting Sets user interface related X X 1 Incoming Call Sets ringing and lamp indication data for incoming call X X 1 Ring Volume Not used 2 Offhook Ring Selects whether to use offhook ringing ringing for incoming call in busy state Enable X X 1 Disable Offhook ringing is OFF 2 Enable Offhook ringing is ON 3 Headse...

Page 3336: ... Automatic Sets Automatic for the Ringing Tone of incoming call termination 1 Tone Type 1 14 Tone Type 14 Sets Tone Type 1 Tone Type 14 for Ringing Tone 15 Download 1 17 Download 3 Sets Download 1 Download 3 for Ringing Tone 3 IM Not used 5 Illumination Note 2 Sets lamp indication pattern for incoming call termination X X 1 External Call Note 5 Sets Illumination for External Call The lamp illumina...

Page 3337: ...on the Telephony Server 1 Disable Alarm is OFF 2 Enable Alarm is ON 2 DTMF Tone Sets whether to hear DTMF PB tone on receiving DTMF signal Automatic X X 0 Automatic Applies DTMF tone setting on the Telephony Server 1 Disable DTMF tone is OFF 2 Enable DTMF tone is ON 3 Key Touch Tone Sets touch tone for pressing digit key touch sensitive panel Automatic Note 6 X X 0 Automatic Sets Automatic to key ...

Page 3338: ... related data 1 Screen Saver Mode Selects whether to use Screen Saver Disable X X 1 Disable Screen Saver is not used 2 Enable Screen Saver is used 2 Wait Time Sets wait time until Screen Saver activation 1 999 min 120 X X 4 Back Light Switches ON OFF the backlight on DT730G 12 24DG Enable Note 3 X 1 Disable Backlight is OFF 2 Enable Backlight is ON 4 Back Light Turns up down the backlight on DT730...

Page 3339: ...rkish 19 Romania 20 Polish 21 Catalan 22 Korean 23 Download 1 Selected download language is displayed on date and time display Note 10 24 Download 2 25 Download 3 26 Download 4 7 Advanced Sets other data for display X X 1 Wallpaper Sets the Home screen background Default X 1 Default Sets the default screen background 2 Download Sets the download data file 2 Shortcut Icon Not used 3 Font Color Sets...

Page 3340: ...Control 2 Enable Enables Backlight Fade Control 4 Change Password Assigns the password of the terminal used for data clear security and login of user mode 0000 X X 5 Security Not used 6 Peripherals Setting for using peripheral equipment of terminal X X 1 USB Memory Setting for safely removing USB memory from the terminal 1 Remove 7 Usability Set the operation of Help key while pop up window is dis...

Page 3341: ...P is used 2 TFTP TFTP is used 4 FTP Settings Sets data for accessing FTP server X X 1 User ID Sets user ID for login to FTP server 2 Password Sets password for login to FTP server 3 Folder Specifies the directory to save the download file 3 Data Backup Restore Makes backup of terminal data or restores from backup file X X 1 Data Backup Saves the terminal setting to backup file PersonalD ata tgz 2 ...

Page 3342: ... discarding the terminal s setting Note 4 Tone Type 1 rings when Automatic is selected If a ring tone has been set in the Directory menu it will be prioritized over this setting Note 5 The lamp illuminates Red when Automatic is selected If an illumination has been set in the Directory menu it will be prioritized over this setting Note 6 A tone will be provided if Automatic has been set Note 7 12 H...

Page 3343: ...X X 1 Disable DHCP is not used 2 Enable DHCP is used 2 IP Address Sets DT700 Series terminal s IP address 0 0 0 0 X X 3 Default Gateway Sets default router s IP address 0 0 0 0 X X 4 Subnet Mask Sets subnet mask 0 0 0 0 X X 5 DNS Address Sets DNS server s IP address 0 0 0 0 X X 6 Advanced Settings Sets network expanded data X X 1 LAN Port Settings Sets LAN port X X 1 Speed Duplex Sets communicatio...

Page 3344: ...t 7 PC Port Security Select whether to clear authentication status of the terminal which is connected to PC port for authentication switch when the link of PC port has been down Enable X X 1 Disable Not clear the authentication status 2 Enable Clear the authentication status 3 CDP Mode Selects whether to notify HUB of power consuming information Disable N N 1 Disable CDP is not used Not send CDP t...

Page 3345: ... transmit LLDP packets 5 32768 seconds 30 X X 5 Hold Multiplier Sets a multiplier determining the time to live for the LLDP packets to be transmitted 2 10 multiples 4 X X 6 Fast Start Count Sets the number of times to transmit LLDP packets at one second intervals after DT700 Series starts up 1 10 times 3 X X 7 Transparent Mode Sets whether Transparent Mode of LLDP packets is enabled between the PC...

Page 3346: ...hen Spare Backup IP is enabled 1 2nd Server Address Specifies the address of the server to be set as the 2nd SIP server 0 0 0 0 X X 2 3rd Server Address Specifies the address of the server to be set as the 3rd SIP server 0 0 0 0 X X 3 4th Server Address Specifies the address of the server to be set as the 4th SIP server 0 0 0 0 X X 4 2nd Server Port Specifies the port number of the server to be se...

Page 3347: ... registrar server X X 2 2nd Register Address 3 3rd Register Address 4 4th Register Address 3 Access Mode Sets access mode for SIP server Normal X X 1 Normal Normal access 2 Remote Remote access 4 SIP Server Port Sets SIP server port 1024 65535 5060 X X 1 1st Server Port Specifies the destination port number of sending packet to 1st 4th SIP server 2 2nd Server Port 3 3rd Server Port 4 4th Server Po...

Page 3348: ...erica Canada and North America 3 Australia 4 Others 5 Hong Kong 6 Malaysia 7 Singapore 8 Mexico 9 Taiwan 10 New Zealand 11 Korea 12 Brazil 13 China 14 Thailand 15 Thailand EGAT 16 Sri Lanka 17 Germany 18 Italy 19 Netherlands 20 Catalonia Not used 21 Denmark 22 Sweden 23 Poland 24 Czech 25 Norway 26 France 27 Portugal 28 Spain 29 Austria 30 Belgium 31 UK 32 Greece 33 Switzerland 34 South Africa 35 ...

Page 3349: ...gress are not held even when DT700 Series terminal detects communication failure with the Telephony Server 3 Howler Tone Note 3 Selects whether to send howler tone Disable X X 1 Disable Howler tone sending is OFF 2 Enable Howler tone sending is ON 7 Encryption Sets encryption data Disable X X 1 Authentication Mode Selects whether to use authentication X X 1 Disable Authentication is not used 2 Ena...

Page 3350: ...rver 0 0 0 0 X X 3 Protocol Selects FTP or TFTP for file downloading protocol FTP X X 1 FTP FTP is used 2 TFTP TFTP is used 4 FTP Settings Sets data for accessing FTP server X X 1 User ID Sets user ID for login to FTP server X X 2 Password Sets password for login to FTP server X X 3 Folder Specifies the directory to save the download file X X 2 Hard Reset Resets DT700 Series without data saving X ...

Page 3351: ...ressor Set 1 Disable in normal operation Disable X X 1 Disable Disables the Noise Suppressor 2 Enable Enables the Noise Suppressor 2 Handsfree Mode Sets handsfree mode of handset Retro Mode X X 1 Retro Mode Sets to Retro mode 2 New Mode Sets to New mode 2 KeyKit Type Sets additional button kit data X X 2 Kit 2 Note 8 Note 9 Key 1 3 17 on button kit are used Kit 2 X X 1 Line Key Type Do not change ...

Page 3352: ... PersonalD ata tgz X X 2 Restore Executes restoration X X 1 All Data Restores all the configuration setting and data AllData tg z X X 2 Terminal Data Restores terminal setting and data Terminal Data tgz X X 3 Personal Data Restores personal setting and data PersonalD ata tgz X X 3 Server Address Sets IP address of the server that executes data backup restoration 0 0 0 0 X X 4 Protocol Selects FTP ...

Page 3353: ... Tests the speaker X X 1 Japan A DT for Japan is heard in maximum volume X X 2 America A DT for North America is heard in maximum volume X X 7 Receiver Test Receiver Test for a handset X X 4 Security Sets security related data X X 1 Web Programming Selects whether to use Web Programming Enable X X 1 Disable Web Programming is disabled 2 Enable Web Programming is enabled 2 Push Server Sets XML s Pu...

Page 3354: ...AP packet Enable X X 1 Disable VLAN tag is not added to EAP packet 2 Enable VLAN tag is added to EAP packet 5 VPN Client Not used 6 USB Sets USB related parameter X X 1 Power Sets whether to supply power to USB devices Enable X X 1 Disable Power is not supplied to USB devices 2 Enable Power is supplied to USB devices 5 Terminal Information Displays terminal information X X Hardware Version Display...

Page 3355: ...orate Phonebook X X 4 Service URL Sets URL of XML application X X 1 1st Service URL URL of up to four XML applications can be specified 2 2nd Service URL 3 3rd Service URL 4 4th Service URL 5 Conf Key URL Sets URL when the Conf Key is used This data can be set only when Key Kit 17 is set N N 2 IPM Self Port Sets the port for connecting to IP Phone Manager 1024 65535 Note 14 3530 X X 3 Popup Sets t...

Page 3356: ...is function requires an LCD Note 6 This service is available to perform various tests such as Key Test LED LCD and Call Test Note 7 This item appears in the menu but the assignment of this parameter is prohibited Note 8 Key Kit 17 is provided for Hotel System feature Note 9 Key Kit 16 is not displayed Actual Key Kit will be displayed as 13 14 15 17 Note 10 Be careful when you specify 3 Enable All ...

Page 3357: ...4 CONFIGURATION SETUP Note 14 A unique number must be assigned to each of the following ports For RTP Self Port 16 ports starting from an assigned port are used RTP Self Port SIP Self Port Push Server Port IPM Self Port ...

Page 3358: ...l menu is displayed instead of Service menu Note When C 195 Call History ASFC SFI 238 is in service the LCD moves on to the list of Call History The parameters under History menu is not available Note Even though Terminal Call History is set as out of service ASFC SFI 248 0 the parameters under His tory menu will be displayed on the terminal s configuration menu regardless of SFI 248 data setting ...

Page 3359: ...is an example for DT730 Series Standard LCD 1 New Registers new number X X Category Set Selects the group the new number registered to Company X X 1 Company 2 Mobile 3 Voice Mail 4 Home 5 Others Priority Flag Sets the priority order of dialing number for call origination Disable X X 1 Disable 2 Enable Edit Note 2 Edits Directory This menu is displayed after Priority Flag setting X X 2 Addition Add...

Page 3360: ...s Searches by other search key X X 1 Memory ID Searches by entering Memory ID X X 2 Category Searches by selecting Category X X 1 Company Searches through Company category X X 2 Mobile Searches through Mobile category X X 3 Voice Mail Searches through Voice Mail category X X 4 Home Searches through Home category X X 5 Etc Searches through Etc category X X 3 Company Searches by entering a company n...

Page 3361: ...utomatic is selected 2 Default Applies default Ringing Tone on terminal 3 Tone Type 1 16 Tone Type 14 Sets the selected tone type to Ringing Tone 17 Download 1 19 Download 3 9 Illumination Note 1 Note 6 Sets lamp indication for announcing call termination Default follows group settings X X 1 Automatic Sets Automatic to lamp indication for announcing call termination The lamp illuminates Red when A...

Page 3362: ...ory menu will be displayed on the terminal s configuration menu regardless of SFI 246 SFI 247 data setting Note 5 This parameter becomes available when you set URL of Corporate Phonebook by 0 Config 6 Appli cation Settings 1 XML Settings 3 Directory URL When XML application is assigned to directory URL 3 Corporate is displayed on the Directory menu 3 Group Setting Sets groups X X 1 Default 2 Colle...

Page 3363: ...s DT730 Series DT710 Series 3 Service Starts up XML browser and Instant Message tool X X 1 Service Starts up XML browser X X 3 Tool for DT710 Series FW 5 0 0 0 or later Parameter Description Default DT750 Series DT730 Series DT710 Series 3 Tool Starts up XML browser and Instant Message tool X 1 Service Starts up XML browser X 4 Setting FW 5 0 0 0 or later Parameter Description Default DT750 Series...

Page 3364: ...ets Automatic for the Ringing Tone of incoming call termination 1 Tone Type 1 14 Tone Type 14 Sets Tone Type 1 Tone Type 14 for Ringing Tone 15 Download 1 17 Download 3 Sets Download 1 Download 3 for Ringing Tone N 3 IM Not used 5 Illumination Note 2 Sets lamp indication pattern for incoming call termination X X 1 External Call Note 5 Sets Illumination for External Call The lamp illuminates Red wh...

Page 3365: ...y Server 1 Disable Alarm is OFF 2 Enable Alarm is ON 2 DTMF Tone Sets whether to hear DTMF PB tone on receiving DTMF signal Automatic X X X 0 Automatic Applies DTMF tone setting on the Telephony Server 1 Disable DTMF tone is OFF 2 Enable DTMF tone is ON 3 Key Touch Tone Sets touch tone for pressing digit key touch sensitive panel Automatic Note 6 X X X 0 Automatic Sets Automatic to key touch tone ...

Page 3366: ...ver Sets Screen Saver related data 1 Screen Saver Mode Selects whether to use Screen Saver Disable X X X 1 Disable Screen Saver is not used 2 Enable Screen Saver is used 2 Wait Time Sets wait time until Screen Saver activation 1 999 min 120 X X X 4 Back Light Switches ON OFF the backlight on DT730 Enable Note 3 X 1 Disable Backlight is OFF 2 Enable Backlight is ON 4 Back Light Turns up down the ba...

Page 3367: ...s displayed on date and time display Note 11 23 Download 2 24 Download 3 25 Download 4 7 Advanced Sets other data for display X 1 Wallpaper Sets the Home screen background Default X 1 Default Sets the default screen background 2 Download Sets the download data file 2 Touch Panel Selects whether to use touch sensitive panel function Enable X 1 Disable Touch sensitive panel is OFF 2 Enable Touch sen...

Page 3368: ...Enables Backlight Fade Control 4 Change Password Assigns the password of the terminal used for data clear security and login of user mode 0000 X X X 5 Security Not used 6 Peripherals Setting for using peripheral equipment of terminal 1 USB Memory Setting for safely removing USB memory from the terminal 1 Remove 7 Usability Set the operation of Help key while pop up window is displayed X X 1 Help K...

Page 3369: ...TP TFTP is used 4 FTP Settings Sets data for accessing FTP server X X X 1 User ID Sets user ID for login to FTP server 2 Password Sets password for login to FTP server 3 Folder Specifies the directory to save the download file 3 Data Backup Restore Makes backup of terminal data or restores from backup file X X X 1 Data Backup Saves the terminal setting to backup file PersonalD ata tgz 2 Data Resto...

Page 3370: ...l follows the Telephony Server s direction discarding the terminal s setting Note 4 Tone Type 1 rings when Automatic is selected If a ring tone has been set in the Directory menu it will be prioritized over this setting except DT710 Note 5 The lamp illuminates Red when Automatic is selected If an illumination has been set in the Directory menu it will be prioritized over this setting except DT710 ...

Page 3371: ...one for incoming call termination 1 External Call Sets Ringing Tone for external call termination Tone Type 1 rings when Automatic is selected Automatic 0 Automatic Sets Automatic for the Ringing Tone of incoming call termination 1 Tone Type 1 14 Tone Type 14 Sets Tone Type 1 Tone Type 14 for Ringing Tone 15 Download 1 17 Download 3 Sets Download 1 Download 3 for Ringing Tone 2 Internal Call Sets ...

Page 3372: ...etting 0 Automatic Sets Automatic for the lamp indication of incoming call termination Automatic 1 Disable Lamp indication is OFF 2 Red Specifies the color of lamp indication for incoming call termination 3 Green 4 Orange 5 Rotation 2 Internal Call Sets Illumination for Internal Call The lamp illuminates Red when Automatic is selected 0 Automatic Sets Automatic for the lamp indication of incoming ...

Page 3373: ...to display volume gage when adjusting the volume level Automatic 3 Screen Saver Sets Screen Saver related data 4 Back Light Switches ON OFF the backlight on DT710 DESI Less terminal Enable 5 Font Size Switches the font size on configuration menu Standard 16dot 6 Language Selects the language on date and time display Automatic 7 Home View Mode Sets whether to switch both menu window and DESI less s...

Page 3374: ...able X X X 1 Disable DHCP is not used 2 Enable DHCP is used 2 IP Address Sets DT700 Series terminal s IP address 0 0 0 0 X X X 3 Default Gateway Sets default router s IP address 0 0 0 0 X X X 4 Subnet Mask Sets subnet mask 0 0 0 0 X X X 5 DNS Address Sets DNS server s IP address 0 0 0 0 X X X 6 Advanced Settings Sets network expanded data X X X 1 LAN Port Settings Sets LAN port X X X 1 Speed Duple...

Page 3375: ...curity Select whether to clear authentication status of the terminal which is connected to PC port for authentication switch when the link of PC port has been down Enable X X X 1 Disable Not clear the authentication status 2 Enable Clear the authentication status 3 CDP Mode Selects whether to notify HUB of power consuming information Disable X X X 1 Disable CDP is not used Not send CDP to HUB 2 En...

Page 3376: ...ckets 5 32768 seconds 30 X X X 5 Hold Multiplier Sets a multiplier determining the time to live for the LLDP packets to be transmitted 2 10 multiples 4 X X X 6 Fast Start Count Sets the number of times to transmit LLDP packets at one second intervals after DT700 Series starts up 1 10 times 3 X X X 7 Transparent Mode Sets whether Transparent Mode of LLDP packets is enabled between the PC port and t...

Page 3377: ... enabled 1 2nd Server Address Specifies the address of the server to be set as the 2nd SIP server 0 0 0 0 X X X 2 3rd Server Address Specifies the address of the server to be set as the 3rd SIP server 0 0 0 0 X X X 3 4th Server Address Specifies the address of the server to be set as the 4th SIP server 0 0 0 0 X X X 4 2nd Server Port Specifies the port number of the server to be set as the 2nd SIP...

Page 3378: ...er X X X 2 2nd Register Address 3 3rd Register Address 4 4th Register Address 3 Access Mode Sets access mode for SIP server Normal X X X 1 Normal Normal access 2 Remote Remote access 4 SIP Server Port Sets SIP server port 1024 65535 5060 X X X 1 1st Server Port Specifies the destination port number of sending packet to 1st 4th SIP server 2 2nd Server Port 3 3rd Server Port 4 4th Server Port 5 Regi...

Page 3379: ...and North America 3 Australia 4 Others 5 Hong Kong 6 Malaysia 7 Singapore 8 Mexico 9 Taiwan 10 New Zealand 11 Korea 12 Brazil 13 China 14 Thailand 15 Thailand EGAT 16 Sri Lanka 17 Germany 18 Italy 19 Netherlands 20 Catalonia Not used 21 Denmark 22 Sweden 23 Poland 24 Czech 25 Norway 26 France 27 Portugal 28 Spain 29 Austria 30 Belgium 31 UK 32 Greece 33 Switzerland 34 South Africa 35 Brazil NECU 0...

Page 3380: ...ld even when DT700 Series terminal detects communication failure with the Telephony Server 3 Howler Tone Note 3 Selects whether to send howler tone Disable X X X 1 Disable Howler tone sending is OFF 2 Enable Howler tone sending is ON 7 Encryption Sets encryption data Disable X X X 1 Authentication Mode Selects whether to use authentication X X X 1 Disable Authentication is not used 2 Enable Authen...

Page 3381: ...n Not used 6 Voice File Downloads voice file voice tgz X X N 7 Language Pack Downloads translation data file LangPack t gz X X 2 Download Address Sets IP address of FTP TFTP server 0 0 0 0 X X X 3 Protocol Selects FTP or TFTP for file downloading protocol FTP X X X 1 FTP FTP is used 2 TFTP TFTP is used 4 FTP Settings Sets data for accessing FTP server X X X 1 User ID Sets user ID for login to FTP ...

Page 3382: ... operation Disable X X X 1 Disable Sets to disable the Noise Suppressor 2 Enable Sets to enable the Noise Suppressor 2 KeyKit Type Sets additional button kit data X X X 1 Kit 1 4 Kit 4 8 Kit 8 12 Kit 12 16 Kit 17 Note 9 Note 10 Key 1 4 8 17 on button kit are used Kit 8 is not displayed on DT750 Kit 17 is displayed on DT750 only DT750 Kit 1 DT730 Kit 1 DT710 Kit 9 X X X 1 Line Key Type Do not chang...

Page 3383: ... 2 Restore Executes restoration X X X 1 All Data Restores all the configuration setting and data AllData tg z X X X 2 Terminal Data Restores terminal setting and data TerminalD ata tgz X X X 3 Personal Data Restores personal setting and data PersonalD ata tgz X X X 3 Server Address Sets IP address of the server that executes data backup restoration 0 0 0 0 X X X 4 Protocol Selects FTP or TFTP for ...

Page 3384: ...e speaker X X X 1 Japan A DT for Japan is heard in maximum volume X X X 2 America A DT for North America is heard in maximum volume X X X 7 Receiver Test Receiver Test for a handset X X X 4 Security Sets security related data X X X 1 Web Programming Selects whether to use Web Programming Enable X X N 1 Disable Web Programming is disabled 2 Enable Web Programming is enabled 2 Push Server Sets XML s...

Page 3385: ...password for EAP MD5 X X X 5 EAP VLAN Mode Selects whether to add VLAN tag to EAP packet Enable X X X 1 Disable VLAN tag is not added to EAP packet 2 Enable VLAN tag is added to EAP packet 5 VPN Client Not used 5 Terminal Information Displays terminal information X X X Hardware Version Displays hardware version of DT700 Series X X X MAC Address Displays MAC address of DT700 Series X X X Firmware V...

Page 3386: ...s URL when the Conf Key is used This data can be set only when Key Kit 17 is set X N N 2 IPM Self Port Sets the port for connecting to IP Phone Manager 1024 65535 except 17185 60000 Note 14 3530 X X X 3 Popup Sets the popup window display X X X 1 Popup Mode Sets the mode of the popup window display App Priority X X X 1 Enable Sets the popup window display enabled 2 App Priority Sets to depend on a...

Page 3387: ...port numbers to use must match Set the port number on the phone side from 0 Config 6 Application Setting 2 IPM Self Port Note 6 This function requires an LCD Note 7 This service is available to perform various tests such as Key Test LED LCD and Call Test Note 8 This item appears in the menu but the assignment of this parameter is prohibited Note 9 Key Kit 17 is provided for Hotel System feature No...

Page 3388: ...I Less this menu is displayed as 5 Menu Key Mode Depending on the Home URL setting this menu is displayed as follows When Home URL is not registered home screen is displayed and the menu name is displayed as Phone When Home URL is registered XML application screen is displayed and the menu name is displayed as the application name to be described in the XML application If application name is not d...

Page 3389: ...terminal s IP address 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway Sets default router s IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Sets subnet mask 0 0 0 0 DNS Address Sets DNS server s IP address 0 0 0 0 Advanced Settings Sets network expanded data LAN Port Settings Sets LAN port Speed Duplex Sets communication speed of Ether port Autonego 1 Autonego Autonegotiation 2 100M Full 100Mbps in full duplex mode 3 100M Half 100Mbps in...

Page 3390: ...port Disable 1 Disable Not forward EAPOL packet from PC port 2 Enable Forwards EAPOL packet from PC port PC Port Security Select whether to clear authentication status of the terminal which is connected to PC port for authentication switch when the link of PC port has been down Enable 1 Disable Not clear the authentication status 2 Enable Clear the authentication status Type Of Service Sets ToS va...

Page 3391: ...th Spare and Backup IPs are disabled 2 Spare IP Spare IP is enabled 3 Backup IP Backup IP is enabled Network Settings Sets network related data when Spare Backup IP is enabled IP Address Sets DT770G terminal s IP address when Spare Backup IP is enabled 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway Sets default router s IP address when Spare Backup IP is enabled 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Sets subnet mask when Spare Backup IP ...

Page 3392: ...e FQDN or 1st 4th registrar server 0 0 0 0 2 2nd Register Address 3 3rd Register Address 4 4th Register Address Access Mode Sets access mode for SIP server Normal 1 Normal Normal access 2 Remote Remote access SIP Server Port Sets SIP server port 1024 65535 5060 1 1st Server Port Specifies the destination port number of sending packet to 1st 4th SIP server 2 2nd Server Port 3 3rd Server Port 4 4th ...

Page 3393: ...ct ed 2 America Canada and North America 3 Australia 4 Others 5 Hong Kong 6 Malaysia 7 Singapore 8 Mexico 9 Taiwan 10 New Zealand 11 Korea 12 Brazil 13 China 14 Thailand 15 Thailand EGAT 16 Sri Lanka 17 Germany 18 Italy 19 Netherlands 20 Catalonia Not used 21 Denmark 22 Sweden 23 Poland 24 Czech 25 Norway 26 France 27 Portugal 28 Spain 29 Austria 30 Belgium 31 UK 32 Greece 33 Switzerland 34 South ...

Page 3394: ...rver 2 Enable Calls in progress are not held even when DT770G terminal detects communication failure with the Telephony Server Howler Tone Note 3 Selects whether to send howler tone Disable 1 Disable Howler tone sending is OFF 2 Enable Howler tone sending is ON Encryption Sets encryption data Disable Authentication Mode Selects whether to use authentication 1 Disable Authentication is not used 2 E...

Page 3395: ... 2 Terminal Data Clears terminal data on DT770G 3 Personal Data Clears personal data on DT770G Adjust Adjusts audio and button kit Default Audio Sets audio data Sidetone Volume Note 5 Sets Side Tone volume 0 7 4 Send Gain Note 5 Sets sending gain of handset 0 31 24 Receive Bias Note 5 Sets receiving bias of handset 0 7 0 Receive Gain Note 5 Sets receiving gain of handset 0 31 22 Talk Characteristi...

Page 3396: ...for file downloading protocol FTP 1 FTP FTP is used 2 TFTP TFTP is used FTP Settings Sets data for accessing FTP server 1 User ID Sets user ID for login to FTP server 2 Password Sets password for login to FTP server 3 Folder Specifies the directory to save the download file 4 Security Sets security related data Admin Password Sets administrator s password 6633222 802 1X Supplicant Sets 802 1X auth...

Page 3397: ...his item appears in the menu but the assignment of this parameter is prohibited Note 5 Be sure not to change from default value to the others Note 6 is displayed in default setting Note 7 Odd numbered ports cannot be assigned Note 8 A unique number must be assigned to each of the following ports For RTP Self Port 16 ports starting from an assigned port are used RTP Self Port SIP Self Port Push Ser...

Page 3398: ...oad 3 Sets Download 1 Download 3 for Ringing Tone Internal Call Note 1 Sets Ringing Tone for station call termination Tone Type 1 rings when Automatic is selected 0 Automatic Sets Automatic for the Ringing Tone of incoming call termination 1 Tone Type 1 14 Tone Type 14 Sets Tone Type 1 Tone Type 14 for Ringing Tone 15 Download 1 17 Download 3 Sets Download 1 Download 3 for Ringing Tone Talk Sets c...

Page 3399: ...connection Enable Disable Auto connection is not used Enable Auto connection is used Connection Cycle Sets Bluetooth connection cycle 10 Seconds 3 Seconds Bluetooth connection cycle is 3 seconds 10 Seconds Bluetooth connection cycle is 10 seconds 1 Minute Bluetooth connection cycle is 1 minute 10 Minutes Bluetooth connection cycle is 10 minutes Interrupt Ringing Selects whether to use Interrupt Ri...

Page 3400: ...P TFTP is used FTP Settings Sets data for accessing FTP server 1 User ID Sets user ID for login to FTP server 2 Password Sets password for login to FTP server 3 Folder Specifies the directory to save the download file Data Backup Restore Makes backup of terminal data or restores from backup file Data Backup Saves the terminal setting to backup file Data Restore Restores the terminal data by readin...

Page 3401: ...erver and the DT700 Series are connected to the net work Check that a DHCP server is operating normally Check that the network equipment is connected correctly When the DT700 Series is not used set the parameter to DHCP Disable DHCP Lease Parameter Error Not operable because of a discrepancy in the optional information acquired from DHCP If it is failed again contact the mainte nance person SIP se...

Page 3402: ...is set for the LAN equipment on the network cor rectly Check that the Duplex of SW port con nected to DT700 Series is set to Auto Check that the station number is not overlapped DHCP IP address is expired Though DHCP attempted to renew a lease for the IP address the server didn t send back the response The DHCP address is expired The DHCP server setting and cable connection Check that the DHCP ser...

Page 3403: ...ted the DT700 Se ries connected later is starting to oper ate and the DT700 Series connected earlier will be unavailable and restart When No is selected change the sta tion number set for the DT700 Series and restart it If the left message is displayed continuously Select Yes to override and No not to override Check the office data related to the DT700 Series again Override No Yes ...

Page 3404: ... configuration menu reflects this data assignment 2 Directory 1 Personal 3 Group Setting File name Directory csv fixed Character code Unicode UTF 8 Setting parameter Setting value Meaning Available number of characters digits Remarks Name Group name 32 characters Enclose the data in double quotation marks and Ring Tone 0 Automatic 1 2 digits 1 Default 2 15 Tone Type 1 Tone Type 14 16 18 Download 1...

Page 3405: ...egory Set 0 Company 1 digit 1 Mobile 2 Voice Mail 3 Home 4 Others Tel 1 s Priority Flag Note 1 0 Disable 1 digit 1 Enable Tel 2 Tel 2 32 characters Enclose the data in double quotation marks and Tel 2 s Category Set 0 Company 1 digit 1 Mobile 2 Voice Mail 3 Home 4 Others Tel 2 s Priority Flag Note 1 0 Disable 1 digit 1 Enable Tel 3 Tel 3 32 characters Enclose the data in double quotation marks and...

Page 3406: ... when 1 Enable is assigned to both Tel 2 and Tel 3 only the setting for Tel 2 is available and 0 Disable is applied to Tel 3 Company Name Compan y name 32 characters Enclose the data in double quotation marks and Ring Tone 0 Automatic 1 2 digits 1 Default 2 15 Tone Type 1 Tone Type 14 16 18 Download 1 Download 3 Illumination 0 Automatic 1 2 digits 1 Default 2 Disable 3 Red 4 Green 5 Yellow 6 Blue ...

Page 3407: ...t 0 Company Tel 1 s Category Set 0 Company Tel 1 s Priority Flag 1 Enable Tel 1 s Priority Flag 0 Disable Tel 2 222 Tel 2 Tel 2 s Category Set 0 Company Tel 2 s Category Set 0 Company Tel 2 s Priority Flag 0 Disable Tel 2 s Priority Flag 0 Disable Tel 3 333 Tel 3 Tel 3 s Category Set 0 Company Tel 3 s Category Set 0 Company Tel 3 s Priority Flag 0 Disable Tel 3 s Priority Flag 0 Disable Tel 4 444 ...

Page 3408: ... DT730 DT730G DT710 6 9 1 When Switching from Dual Configuration to Single Configuration IP terminal may fail to log in to the system since the information of the stopped system will remain right after switching from dual configuration to single configuration Therefore wait for two minutes before log ging in Note Wait for two minutes before logging in also when stopping one system in dual configur...

Page 3409: ...isplay area and main menu press scroll key When CALLER ID DISPLAY SUB LINE C 204 is invalid DESI Less screen is not switched to the Home screen by an incoming call to sub line DESI Less screen can be switched to the Home screen by answering the call or line pre selection And when CALLER ID DISPLAY SUB LINE C 204 is valid or the terminal receives a call in sub line during line pre selection DESI Le...

Page 3410: ...nnection Example of a Wireless Headset WT100 EHS NE Connection Note For the details on how to connect a telephone and Wireless Headset see the manual attached to the Wire less Headset 1 Wireless Headset is available for DT700 Series DT730 However DT730 ITL 32D 1 and DT730 ITL 8LD 1 are not supported 2 Before using Wireless Headset be sure to assign LKP 3 32 Line Feature Keys with the ADKS command ...

Page 3411: ...r to the center of the speaker correctly After that connect the microphone plug to the cable jack For the details see the manual attached to the Headset 6 9 3 When Using DT700 Series DT730 12 24CG DT700 Series DT730 12 24CG user can change the Home screen background and font color 6 9 4 When Using DT700 Series DT750 1 When the terminal is DT700 Series DT750 equipped with firmware version 3 0 0 0 o...

Page 3412: ...sers can ac tivate screen saver For the operating procedures refer to the user s guide of the relevant terminal 6 9 6 Other Information Only the call termination on My line enables illumination and displaying phonebook for incoming call In formation such as number and internal external call is managed by each terminal according to notifica tions from the system ...

Page 3413: ...irmware uploading deleting and updating can be collectively operated by accessing the Telephony Serv er via a web browser 1 The following settings by maintenance PC are required in advance Activating HTTP server by ADTM command Uploading firmware via a web browser Establishing automatic updating via the browser 2 IP station requests registration on the Telephony Server 3 The Telephony Server direc...

Page 3414: ...VOL 3 927 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP 8 The Telephony Server normally starts up the IP station ...

Page 3415: ... uploaded either 9 ID admin and Password mainte are required for authentication on accessing the HTTP server The password for authentication is sent received encrypted Basic authentication is used 10 The start time of Firmware Auto Update is selected from Right now to maximum 24 hours later 11 Back button on Internet Explorer is available to back to the former window to change the parameter set ti...

Page 3416: ...e is also deleted In that case where both files are deleted another uploading is required 21 Operation with multiple windows or tabs may cause abnormal performance depending on the executed tim ing Be sure to use only one window or tab for Internet Explorer when using this Firmware Auto Update feature 22 This feature is not available when the system operation is handed over to SR MGC Operation Pro...

Page 3417: ... PCPro STEP 1 Activate ADTM on PCPro STEP 2 Select the radio button LAN1 in the box Select LAN Interface STEP 3 Select Activation setting of Internal server in Options tab and click Execute button STEP 4 Click the check box HTTP Server to ON and click Set button ...

Page 3418: ...n click OK button Login ID admin Password mainte Note 1 XXX IP address of the Telephony Server which varies depending on your configuration as follow In the case of single configuration enter IP address of LAN1 ACT In the case of dual configuration enter IP address of LAN1 System 0 1 User name admin Password mainte Specify LAN1 address as HTTP server to access Telephony Server via a web browser e ...

Page 3419: ...VOL 3 932 CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP STEP 2 Dterm Firmware Update main menu window appears Select required operation by clicking on the hyper link ...

Page 3420: ... and then click the Open button Note 1 STEP 2 Confirm the selected file and then click upload button Note 1 When you try to upload a file with the same file name exists on the server warning message appears to ask whether to overwrite the existing file Click Open 4 Select a terminal type by clicking the radio button 1 Click Browse to display the Choose file dialog box 2 DT770G DT730CG DT730DG DT75...

Page 3421: ...upload is displayed When the upload is successful uploaded file information file name and file size is displayed When the upload fails cause of the failure is displayed DT770G DT730CG DT730DG DT750 DT730 DT710 Cause of Failure DT770G DT730CG DT730DG DT750 DT730 DT710 ...

Page 3422: ...nu window the Firmware Delete window shown below appears Select a target file to be deleted and then click the delete button DT770G DT730CG DT730DG DT750 DT730 DT710 itlisipcr tgz itlisipvc tgz itlisipvg tgz itlisips tgz itlisipv tgz itlisipe tgz G tgz tgz G tgz 1 Select a target file 2 Click delete itlisipcr tgz ...

Page 3423: ... displayed When the file deletion is successful the deleted file information file name is displayed When the file deletion fails cause of the failure is displayed itlisipcr tgz itlisipcr tgz has been deleted Cause of Failure itlisipcr tgz itlisipcr tgz was not able to be deleted ...

Page 3424: ... registered already box to update the terminals which have completed the registration Firmware List DT730DG Firmware name Refix date Size Terminal type Version itlisipcr tgz itlisipvc tgz itlisipvg tgz itlisips tgz itlisipv tgz itlisipe tgz 2012 11 09 2012 11 09 2012 11 09 2012 11 09 2012 11 09 2012 11 09 14223KB 17702KB 14141KB 5588KB 5339KB 4117KB DT770G DT730CG DT750 DT730 DT710 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0...

Page 3425: ...CHAPTER 4 CONFIGURATION SETUP STEP 2 Conditions specified in STEP 1 appears If there is no problem with the above settings click the Save button STEP 3 The setting result is displayed DT770G DT770G itlisipcr tgz ...

Page 3426: ...g is selected on the main menu window Stop Firmware Automatic Updating window below appears Currently assigned information is listed Click STOP button if you want to stop Firmware Auto Update When Firmware Auto Update is not started Not set line is displayed STEP 2 Result is displayed Click STOP Condition assigned now ...

Page 3427: ...are Automatic Updating Log is selected on the main menu window Firmware Auto matic Update Log window below appears Select the conditions and then click DISP button STEP 2 Logs are displayed error log is displayed in different color 2 Click DISP 1 Specify the conditions Error logs red lines ...

Page 3428: ...sion error Hardware version error is detected This tool does not support the selected terminal Terminal error Other error is detected Execute downloading again There is a possibility of terminal s hardware failure Config file parse error Error is detected on the auto update setting file Check the setting on Setup of Firmware automatic update again to make sure the condition is correct This error i...

Page 3429: ...ntervention is required by administrator The following are cable specifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RJ IN RJ OUT Power Hub Channel Ethernet Switch D term IP RJ 45 RJ 45 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Unused Unused Unused Unused DC DC DC DC Power Bus 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Ethernet Switch D term IP RJ 45 RJ 45 Data DC DC DC DC Data Data ...

Page 3430: ...er Patch and BF200 24 PoE ITR xx 1 ITR xx 2 DTR xx with IP R NDP Position 1 802 3af Position 1 802 3af ITR 8D 3 ITR 16D 3 ITR 16LD 3 ITR 32D 3 802 3af Position 1 NDP Position 2 NEC Discovery Protocol NDP for Power Patch and BF200 24 PoE INASET Classic NDP Position 1 802 3af Position 1 802 3af INASET 240G INASET 320G INASET 320C 802 3af Position 1 NDP Position 2 NEC Discovery Protocol NDP for Power...

Page 3431: ...is used as the Power Switch In ITR xxD 3 SW2 is used as the Power Switch The settings are as follows Note 4D IP Version 3 only support 802 3af and doesn t have power switch on the terminal Table APP 3 Power Consumption NEC IP TERMINAL PoE ETHERNET CONSUMPTION ITR 8D 3 6 4W MAX ITR 16D 3 6 4W MAX ITR 32D 3 6 4W MAX ITR 16LD 3 6 4W MAX INASET240G 5 3W MAX INASET320G 8W MAX INASET320C 8W MAX Table AP...

Page 3432: ... the Power Switch The settings are as follows Table APP 5 Power Consumption NEC IP TERMINAL PoE ETHERNET CONSUMPTION ITR 8D 1 6 4W MAX ITR 8D 2 6 4W MAX DTR 8D with IP R 6 4W MAX ITR 16D 1 6 4W MAX ITR 16D 2 6 4W MAX ITR 16D with IP R 6 4W MAX ITR 32D with IP R 6 4W MAX Table APP 6 DtermIPv1 DtermIPv2 IP R PoE Switch Conditions SWITCH POSITION CONDITIONS NOTES Position 1 Local Power supply via AC ...

Page 3433: ...settings of the Power Switch are as follows Table APP 7 Power Consumption NEC IP TERMINAL PoE ETHERNET CONSUMPTION Dterm 75 32D Type 6 4W MAX Dterm 75 16D Type 6 4W MAX Dterm 75 8D Type 6 4W MAX Table APP 8 IPW 2R PoE Switch Conditions SWITCH POSITION CONDITIONS NOTES Position 1 Local Power supply via AC DC power adaptor Power Patch Panel NDP BF200 24 PoE compatible May cause communication error w...

Page 3434: ...ILPA ITR 2 48V 133mA 6 4W Available Available Available via ILPA INASET 48V 219mA 10 5W Not available Available Available via ILPA INASET 240G 48V 110mA 5 3W Available Available via ILPA Available INASET 320G 48V 167mA 8W Available Available via ILPA Available INASET 320C 48V 167mA 8W Available Available via ILPA Available ITR 8D 3 48V 92mA 6 4W Available Available via ILPA Available ITR 16D 3 48V...

Page 3435: ...rrent with All Options Maximum Current Without Options 48VDC 24VDC 48VDC 24VDC ITL 320C 2 Class 3 160mA 7 7W 290mA 7 0W 111mA 5 3W 192mA 4 6W ITL 32D 1 Class 2 130mA 6 2W 235mA 5 6W 90mA 4 3W 153mA 3 7W ITL 8LD 1 Class 2 130mA 6 2W 235mA 5 6W 81mA 3 9W 137mA 3 3W ITL 8LDE 1 Class 1 68mA 3 3W 122mA 2 9W 68mA 3 3W 122mA 2 9W ITL 24D 1 Class 2 130mA 6 2W 235mA 5 6W 81mA 3 9W 137mA 3 3W ITL 12D 1 Clas...

Page 3436: ...618 619 623 628 671 674 685 722 727 732 746 755 764 766 783 791 795 797 815 828 837 848 854 861 865 867 885 896 898 S6 DATE JUNE 2012 Chapter 1 2 9 15 35 36 37 38 39 Chapter 2 98 99 101 130 Chapter 4 379 385 395 405 429 523 547 550 551 552 609 622 636 650 659 730 732 754 767 768 772 774 777 789 814 815 820 826 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 847 848 849 850 851 852 853 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 ...

Page 3437: ...pter 2 144 Chapter 4 394 494 497 634 650 651 690 692 694 696 698 803 807 S2 DATE JULY 2009 Chapter 1 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 33 Chapter 4 413 414 416 564 565 646 647 648 649 650 651 661 664 666 673 768 799 803 804 806 807 810 815 816 825 S1E DATE JANUARY 2009 99 395 631 726 728 762 781 784 789 790 800 808 809 812 ...

Page 3438: ...Printed in Japan 1307 120 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for SV8500

Brand: N-Com Pages: 2

Brand: Teac Pages: 24

Brand: TeachLogic Pages: 21

Brand: Magnavox Pages: 78

Brand: Audio System Pages: 2

SoundStation 1725-30955-001

Brand: Polycom Pages: 2

Brand: ASA Electronics Pages: 2

Brand: Polycom Pages: 2

Brand: Mantracourt Pages: 24

Brand: Len Gordon Pages: 23

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 68

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 18

Brand: RCA Pages: 14

Brand: New Rock Technologies Pages: 71

Brand: Kenwood Pages: 160

Brand: JVC Pages: 32

Brand: JVC Pages: 48

Brand: JVC Pages: 34

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands